This work was carried out in accordance with the requirements of the international quality standard for Market Research, ISO 20252.
Executive summary
This report presents findings from research exploring the role of government in public engagement and ways to improve Scottish Government’s public engagement approach on climate change. The research is part of the mid-point review of the Scottish Government’s Public Engagement Strategy for Climate Change (PES).
Aims
The research aimed to address the following questions:
What does recent thinking and research suggest are the most effective roles and practical actions a government such as the Scottish Government can take to successfully engage the public on climate change and deliver the aims of the PES?
What lessons can be learned from approaches taken by comparative governments internationally to improve delivery of the aims and activities of the PES?
What are the views of the public in Scotland on the most appropriate ways for the Scottish Government to engage them on climate issues?
The overall aim of the study was to compare findings with the principles set out in the PES and identify any lessons that could enhance the delivery of the PES going forward.
Approach
The research was carried out between September 2024 and January 2025. It involved three strands:
Stakeholder interviews exploring views from a range of practitioners and specialists involved in public engagement to complement the evidence review
A desk-based evidence review to identify public engagement activities and examples of best practice
Focus groups with members of the public to understand their views on how the Scottish Government should approach public engagement on climate change.
Findings
The research showed that there is no single best way to engage the public on climate change. Public engagement should use multiple and varied contexts, scales, activities, depths of engagement, approaches and intervention points.
A number of different examples of best practice on climate change public engagement were identified, grouped under three broad categories:
Communication and education. This includes large-scale communication campaigns, information packs, door-to-door canvassing, broadcast, social media campaigns and educational activities. Much of the best practice on communication and education is already captured in the PES. This includes the need to be inclusive and accessible, to communicate with different audiences in different ways, to use trusted messengers, and to use messaging that highlights the relevance to individuals and the practical actions they can take.
Deliberative engagement and co-design. This includes a wide range of participatory activities designed to help people to take part in decision-making processes. The PES has been developed with the good practice principles of participation in mind in line with the Scottish Government’s Participation Framework and the Open Government approach. The findings highlight best practice that aligns with many of the PES principles such as being participative, inclusive, open and transparent. The findings also highlight areas for consideration in the implementation of these types of activities as part of the PES, as outlined below.
Creative activities. This includes public engagement using art, digital tools, games, virtual reality and other creative approaches. Generally, the evidence supports the effectiveness of creative interactive engagement methods for a variety of outcomes. However, creative forms of engagement are not explored in detail in the PES and could therefore be an area for greater focus going forward.
Implications for the PES
To help identify next steps, the key lessons from this research were presented in two groups:
Areas in which the content of the PES already aligns with best practice, and which should be continued: Themes such as inclusion, transparency and evidence-based approaches are all principles for the PES and were all identified in this research as important features of public engagement. This suggests that the Scottish Government’s approach is already in line with some of the public engagement best practice happening in other places.
Areas that are not currently included or not outlined in detail in the PES. These approaches, grouped below under the three overarching objectives of the PES, should be considered for the remainder of the PES.
Understand (Communicating climate change)
On messaging, ensure that climate change is framed in a way that is relevant to the lives of individuals and communities, reflects the context (cultural, political, geographic and others) and is focussed on practical actions for individuals.
As well as using positive messaging, do not shy away from conveying the negative consequences of inaction on climate change. While there is a potential conflict between those two directions, the overall sentiment was that governments should be honest about the realities and associated risks of climate change, but also convey positive, practical actions that the public can adopt.
When conveying the message, the research has identified the characteristics of (e.g. being authentic, sincere, kind, honest, credible) and types of people (e.g. naturalists, healthcare professionals, scientists) who are considered trusted messengers, and those that are not. It also highlights the benefits of exploring different approaches such as the use of visual communication and humour.
Take measures to build collective efficacy such as using messaging that emphasise social norms, shared beliefs and a sense of community. Examples of this include sharing testimonials, photos and videos of citizens taking action, or hosting competitions, quizzes and user-generated content on social media.
In education settings, encourage and enable approaches that foster collaboration and co-design with learners. Further explore opportunities for workforce training on technical aspects of climate change.
Participate (Enabling participation in policy design)
Demonstrate that the public have been listened to and that action has been taken as a result of their participation. This was a strong theme in the general public focus groups and they considered it a high priority for future public engagement. It is important to be clear on and convey how the public are having an influence on decisions, be transparent about how those decisions are being acted upon and keep the public updated on progress towards outcomes. Take lessons from the Irish Citizens Assembly and the permanent climate assembly in Brussels which have established mechanisms for ensuring feedback for participants, helping hold decisions makers to account. Think carefully about who is involved in deliberative, co-design and other participatory processes. As part of the design of the processes, consider how best to draw on people’s local knowledge and lived experience.
Encourage active forms of participation to help engage people in different ways. This can include approaches such as citizens’ science, which involves the public directly in data collection and other research activities, and participatory budgeting, which has a clear link between the public’s involvement and the decisions being taken as a result.
Explore the use of digital and creative tools to help share findings from deliberative and co-design approaches with a wider audience.
Explore the use of creative activities. Some of these approaches, such as gaming and virtual reality, are still relatively new in the literature so would benefit from further exploration and testing before being used more widely.
Act (Encouraging action)
Making climate change relevant to people’s lives and conveying why their actions are important.
Give people autonomy by supporting co-production and co-creation processes. These approaches can help give the public a say in the way they engage and ownership over outputs or recommendations. This can foster a sense of empowerment and help legitimise the process.
Integrate public engagement into policy decision making. This includes responding meaningfully to the outputs and recommendations of public engagement and clearly communicating with the public about how their engagement links with the policy process.
Take measures that help boost collective efficacy. This includes using messaging that emphasise social norms, shared beliefs and a sense of community. Promoting a sense of ownership of engagement outcomes and recommendation can also support feelings of self and collective efficacy.
Introduction
Background
Public engagement is a central component of the Scottish Government’s commitment to reaching net zero by 2045 and delivering on the ambitions of the updated Climate Change Plan. A commitment to public engagement is also part of the Scottish Government’s National Adaptation Plan and its approach to planning for a Just Transition to net zero.
In 2021, the Scottish Government published the Public Engagement Strategy for Climate Change (PES), which underscores the importance of widespread participation and engagement in order to drive the transformational change needed to reach net zero. The PES sets out a holistic, systemic approach to public engagement with the aim of building a mandate for long term societal change. The overall vision of the PES is that: “Everyone in Scotland recognises the implications of the global climate emergency, fully understands and contributes to Scotland’s response, and embraces their role in the transition to a net zero and climate ready Scotland.”
The PES is guided by three strategic objectives:
Understand: Communicating climate change. People are aware of the action that all of Scotland is taking to tackle climate change and understand how it relates to their lives.
Participate: Enabling participation in policy design. People actively participate in shaping just, fair and inclusive policies that promote mitigation of and adaptation to climate change.
Act: Encouraging action. Taking action on climate change is normalised and encouraged in households, communities and places across Scotland.
Monitoring and evaluation of the PES is being carried out using a multi-stranded approach. As well as annual reporting against key national indicators and evaluating individual public engagement programmes, the Scottish Government committed to an interim review of the PES at the midway point of delivery in 2024. The midpoint review consists of various elements being delivered by the Scottish Government, including a stakeholder survey and evaluations of activities undertaken as part of PES delivery to date. This report presents findings from research conducted by Ipsos and the Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), which complements the Scottish Government’s own evaluations. Outside of Scotland, whilst there are many examples of government-led or government-supported public engagement interventions, there are few occasions where these have been evaluated. Therefore, the monitoring and evaluation aspect of the Scottish Government PES is somewhat unique.
Research aims
ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government commissioned Ipsos and CAST to conduct research into the role of government in public engagement and ways to improve Scottish Government’s engagement approach. Specifically, the research aimed to address the following questions:
What does recent thinking and research suggest are the most effective roles and practical actions a government such as the Scottish Government can take to successfully engage the public on climate change and deliver the aims of the PES?
What lessons can be learned from approaches taken by comparative governments internationally to improve delivery of the aims and activities of the PES?
What are the views of the Scottish public on the most appropriate ways for the Scottish Government to engage them on climate issues?
The overall aim of the study was to help understand how well various aspects of the strategy have been working in practice so far and identify any lessons that could enhance the delivery of the PES going forward.
Method
The research involved three strands, outlined below. A more detailed methodology can be found in Appendix A.
Desk based evidence review – assessing existing national and international evidence published between 2020-2024 of climate and environment-related public engagement activities and examples of best practice as part of answering the first two research questions. Most evidence focused on activities engaging people around broad ‘climate’ or ‘environment’ issues, although some were focused on specific topics within these areas. The range of activities identified in the evidence review fell into three main categories, which are each explored in detail in the remainder of this report: communication and education; deliberative engagement and co-design; and creative activities. Note that these categories are broad and there is a lot of overlap between them. See Appendix A for more detail on the scope and limitations of the evidence.
Six stakeholder interviews – exploring views from a range of practitioners and specialists involved in public engagement on climate change, to complement the evidence review.
Four general public focus groups – to answer the third research question and understand the public’s views on how the Scottish Government should approach public engagement on climate change in future. Focus groups were shown four case study examples of public engagement activities in different parts of the world. These included: a public health campaign on the impacts of climate change on children’s health; a carbon footprint food tracking app; a climate coalition working on plans for offshore wind in their local area; and a citizen science project measuring air quality. More detail on each of these is included in Appendix B.
Types of public engagement activities identified
The range of activities identified in the evidence review fell into three main categories, which are outlined in detail in chapters 3, 4 and 5:
Communication and education: Large-scale communication campaigns, information packs, door-to-door canvassing, e-mail campaigns, radio messages, news broadcasting, social media posts, single message testing (videos, images, pure text), menus, posters. Education included school classes, university modules/lectures, curriculum changes, challenges, gamification, inquiry-based learning (where the learners choose which questions to investigate), writing reflections, argumentation training, apps, cooking classes, nature-based workshops, community action groups, training for particular professions, farmer field schools, peer discussions.
Deliberative engagement and co-design: Climate assemblies, global assembly, mini-publics, advisory councils, climate commissions, participatory planning, participatory budgeting, participation in decision-making, stakeholder engagement workshops, stakeholder collaboration, citizen science, virtual engagement, gamification.
Creative activities: Art, interactive theatre, digital games, board games, role-play, escape rooms, virtual reality, simulations, gamified places, mobile devices/apps, social media, internet of things (IoT), artificial intelligence (AI), interactive informational exhibits, plogging, photovoice, environmental events.
How to read this report
The report brings together findings from all strands of the research (the evidence review, stakeholder interviews and focus groups). Rather than setting out the findings under each of the three research questions, they are presented thematically, reflecting the cross-cutting nature of the findings. This means that findings from the evidence reviews, stakeholder interviews and focus groups are presented together within each thematic section. Where findings are specific to just one strand of research, this is stated.
Chapters 3 to 5 focus on specific types of public engagement, grouped by theme. Chapter 6 brings together strategy-level findings that relate across different types of engagement. At the end of each chapter (or sub-section within the chapter) reference is made to how the findings relate to the PES.
Due to the volume of studies reviewed, rather than citing studies individually, these are given within the text via numerical references. Click these to view the full study details in the bibliography (for example [1], [2], [3]).
Communication and education
This section outlines findings related to public engagement that were categorised as “communication”. This included large-scale communication campaigns, information packs, door-to-door canvassing, broadcast and social media campaigns, and more. It also covers forms of engagement classed as “education”, as these had similar findings to those related to communication.
The examples and lessons covered here tend to fall under either the ‘Understand’ and ‘Act’ objectives of the PES. Climate communication campaigns are often focused on increasing knowledge, awareness and pro-climate attitudes and behaviours. There are few examples of climate messaging designed to engage people in decision-making or other participatory processes, or to communicate the outcomes of such processes. Similarly, most literature around education focuses on increasing knowledge and awareness, and there was very little evidence on the impact of education on participation or behaviour. Lessons for the ‘Participate’ objective are covered elsewhere in this report. Source: Public Engagement Strategy
Findings below are outlined in relation to the type of messaging, the means and channels of conveying the message, and the needs of the audiences. Findings related to education initiatives specifically are included at the end.
Key messages
Use multiple methods and channels, because different types of communication work for different people.
Tailor communications to the audience and test content with your target audience before rolling it out at scale.
Design communications to be personal, dynamic and engaging – content should be relevant to people’s lives and appeal to their values and emotions.
Trial the use of health frames and health professionals as trusted messengers.
Fear-based messaging can be effective, but should be paired with practical solutions-focused messaging.
For educational interventions, give learners some autonomy over the process.
Incorporate environmental education into school/university curricula.
Messaging
Appeal to people’s values and emotions
Climate inaction is often rooted in emotional responses and structural/practical barriers. Therefore providing facts and data alone is usually insufficient to inspire changes in attitudes or behaviour [1], [2], [3], [4]. This isn’t always the case – for example, information provision has been found to increase support for wind turbine developments [5] and intention to adopt pro-climate actions [6], [7], [8], [9], [10]. Supporting claims with scientific information can lend credibility. However, technical information generally works best for people already knowledgeable about and supportive of climate action [11]. Therefore, climate communications should aim to also be personal, dynamic and engaging, appealing to people’s values and emotions and fostering a sense of efficacy, hope and community [12], [13], [14]. It should also be accompanied by wider structural support to enable action.
Stakeholders echoed this finding from the literature, stressing the valuable role of messages that connect climate change with things people already care about.
“One of the few good things about climate change is that it’s so all encompassing that everybody has a direct and real stake in the outcome… If your kid has asthma, you should care about climate change. If you like chocolate, you should care about climate change. If you’re a person of faith, you should care about climate change. If you love your country and your cultural heritage, you should care about climate change. And 1001 other reasons… As communicators, our job is to figure out how to connect the dots between climate change and the people, places and things that people already love.” (Stakeholder – climate communicator).
There are a number of tactics that communicators can use to ensure climate messages resonate with people’s values and emotions, as outlined in the sections below.
Make it relevant to the audience
Making climate change relevant to audience’s lives gives them a concrete reason to care on a personal level. Climate communicators should reduce the perceived temporal and spatial distance of climate change by highlighting immediate and local climate impacts. Research shows that emphasising the ‘here and now’ of climate issues increases support for climate mitigation policies, sustainable behavioural intentions and perceptions of climate threats [3], [15], [16], [17], [18], [19], [20], [21], [22]. Although see Section 3.1.3 for more information on how communications framing could change depending on the psychological distance of the issue being discussed.
Tactics to reduce psychological distance include using real-time and historical data to illustrate the effects of climate change [12]; framing costs of climate impacts per household instead of at a national level [18], [23]; highlighting links to iconic local places such as the Great Barrier Reef in Australia [22], and local issues, such as pollution [20]; and platforming local people’s individual experiences of climate change and climate solutions [24]. Additionally, major events, like global climate summits or environmental disasters, can anchor climate change in the present day [14]. Additionally, connecting climate change to local issues, impacts and values increases relevance.
“One of the big things that we see across the developed world, including the United States, is that many people who… basically accept that climate change is real, nonetheless still think of it as distant… Distant in time – that the impacts aren’t going to be felt for a generation or more, so maybe this is a problem for their grandkids. Or distant in space – this is about polar bears or maybe some developing countries, but not my country, not my community, not my friends, not my family, not me. And as a result… it just becomes one of a hundred other issues that’s out there… people don’t understand why this needs to be a priority.” (Stakeholder interview, climate communicator).
Focus group participants also stressed the importance of communicating about climate change that was relatable and relevant to their local contexts.
“[It] makes people get more involved in it if they have a personal link and see, you know, the personal impact that it can have on people.” (Focus group participant)
Participants generally preferred messaging that focused on more “tangible” impacts of climate change that are currently impacting on communities in Scotland, compared to more abstract, hypothetical scenarios. They suggested using examples such as crop failures, food prices, extreme weather, and health impacts to convey the current relevance of climate change to them.
They also highlighted the need for communication to convey the role of the individual as part of a wider societal transformation. There was some scepticism expressed around the need for individual behaviour change relating to certain aspects of climate change. For example, participants questioned how much impact reducing their carbon footprint would have and questioned the need to save water in Scotland.
“I also feel like you would always have that thing in the back of your mind where you would think, in the whole scheme of things, like, what does me watching my food miles really do when there’s, you know, there’s airplanes going over the head every day?” (Focus group participant).
There was a sense that comprehensive, clear explanations and transparency around why people are being asked to make changes are needed to build understanding and trust.
Think about the framing
When trying to engage people on climate change, environmental arguments can be effective [7], [25], [26], [27], [28]. Discussions focusing on maintaining ‘balance with nature’ are particularly well received [14], [24], [28] and adaptation may be a less polarising topic than mitigation [24]. However, non-environmental frames that talk to other values, goals and issues can also be effective [29], [30].
Research shows that presenting climate change in terms of its impacts on health, safety and wellbeing can be effective [1], [14], [24], [26], [31], [32], [33], [34], with heat risk a possible entry point to climate conversations [24]. Equally, activating communal and societal goals such as social protection, unity, care, national security, scientific or economic development and global leadership may be a good tactic [28], [35], [36]. Other effective frames that resonate with many groups include ‘impacts on future generations’ [24], [35], [37], [38]; ‘maintaining freedom and choice’ [26], [39]; and ‘avoiding waste’ [26], [40]. That said, communicators should also clearly articulate their one takeaway message to avoid confusing audiences with multiple topics [41].
A study by Wolstenholme and colleagues tested messaging interventions with UK students. Every morning and evening for two weeks, participants received messages via an automated private chat on Facebook Messenger on the positive impacts of eating less red and processed meat. The messages either highlighted the benefits to people’s health (e.g. reducing the likelihood of developing cancer, heart disease or becoming obese), the environment (e.g. reducing excessive land use, deforestation or the release of greenhouse gases), or both, with a different benefit being highlighted each day. Participants were also reminded to try not to eat more than two portions of red and processed meat each week.
The study found that providing information about the health and/or environmental impacts of eating meat caused students to reduce their red and processed meat consumption during the intervention and one month later. In other words, pro-climate behaviour can be encouraged without talking about climate change.
Some frames work better for particular groups. For example, ‘living well locally’ resonates with rural communities [39]; ‘morality and justice’ works well with left-wing groups [1], [32]; and ‘responsibility and patriotism’ works better with conservatives [1]. Evidence around the effectiveness of economic framing is mixed [25], [27], [36]. Interestingly, frames also vary in their ability to boost behavioural intention depending on the psychological distance of the issue being discussed. When talking about impacts that are psychologically close (concrete and spatially near), communicators should use efficacy framing (highlight the feasibility of solutions). For psychologically distant impacts (abstract and spatially far away), risk framing (highlighting the negative impacts of climate change) is more effective [15]. Given that there is no one ‘best’ way to talk about climate change, communicators should use multiple different frames and recognise the need to balance tailoring messages to the audience with avoiding polarising language [34], [42].
“In general [climate change] has been framed as a scientific story. And it is… but this issue is so much bigger than that. It’s a real estate story, it’s a health story, it’s an arts and culture story. Every traditional beat of the news media should be engaged with the climate connections.” (Stakeholder – climate communicator).
The importance of framing was also clear in the focus groups. Reflecting on one of the case study examples used in the focus groups (the Make it Better campaign, described in Appendix B and shown in Figure 1 below) participants felt that associating climate change with negative impacts on children’s health was a powerful message and one which would encourage people to consider how they could mitigate those impacts.
Figure 1: Example of health-framing of climate change communication. Images of three climate-related health impacts were shown with pictures of children at risk from heat-related illnesses, along with the campaign’s tagline. Source Canadian Journal of Public Health
On framing, participants also felt that climate change discourse can be political and, at times, controversial topic and felt that care should be taken to avoid misinformation in climate change communications.
Make climate change a ‘human’ issue
Telling personal stories about climate change (involving relatable people and familiar places) enhances audiences’ emotional response, increasing engagement, climate belief and risk perceptions, and making the effects more persistent [19], [32], [41], [43], [44]. This holds true for conservative and moderate groups [43]. Communications can also make climate change feel more ‘human’ by emphasising social norms, shared beliefs and a sense of community – these can boost collective efficacy, policy acceptance and behaviour change [19], [38], [45], [46], [47], [48], [49], [50]. Tactics include sharing testimonials and photos of citizens taking action, or hosting competitions, quizzes and user-generated content on social media [51]. Importantly, norm-based messaging should be relatable and authentic – it can backfire if overly authoritative or formal [17], [22], [24], [36], [41], [44].
“The other critical element is storytelling… [our radio show plays] short first-person narratives of people who are talking about how climate change matters to them and likewise what they are doing to solve it… These stories feature the voices of people from every walk of life… And what we see in our research results is that those kinds of stories work really well, because suddenly people can realise this is not just a problem for China to solve or the UN to solve, which is so removed from people’s lives. This is about how people just like them – who dress like them, talk like them, have similar values – [are getting involved with climate change].” (Stakeholder – climate communicator).
This initiative by Bristol One City displays multiple features of good climate communication. A series of 30 short videos, produced by Bristol City Council, tells the stories of a diverse range of Bristolians doing things they enjoy which are also good for the climate. For example, two members of a boxing club share how they’re reducing plastic waste and litter in their gym, while a mother discusses the benefits of walking her children to school instead of driving them.
The videos make the issue of climate change relatable and personal by discussing local issues and including a diverse range of groups. The videos also normalise pro-climate behaviours, by showing that people are already taking (and benefitting from) climate action.
Bristol City Council and partners use these films in social media campaigns and displayed them on screens in key public spaces during COP26 and again in summer 2022. They have had lots of positive feedback on the videos from citizens, including underrepresented groups, and partner organisations.
Use positive, but honest, messaging
Fear-based messaging that highlights the risks and negative impacts of climate change can capture people’s attention and elicit emotional responses [1], [22], [34], [40], [52]. It can be useful for increasing knowledge, but over time can be disengaging and may come across as disingenuous [1], [17], [38], [53]. Positive messaging that highlights our capacity to tackle climate change is important for boosting efficacy and empowerment [1], [4], [14], [17], [19], [20], [22], [24], [29], [33], [41], [47], [51], [53], [54], [55]. Therefore, communicators should platform the opportunities that climate change presents to build a better world, the pro-climate actions already being adopted by others, and the co-benefits already being realised by climate action. But they should also acknowledge the risks and uncertainties of climate change, as well as the fact that solving climate change will require some change to life as we know it.
“We’ve done a pretty good job helping [people] understand the seriousness and the gravity of the problem, but we have not done a good job helping them understand what the solutions are… I get so frustrated with the argument I sometimes hear within the climate community: either ‘let’s scare the bejesus out of people and that’s going to motivate them’ or ‘no, no, don’t talk about all that doom and gloom stuff, only talk about solutions’. No, it’s not an either or, it’s a both.” (Stakeholder – climate communicator).
Providing practical, actionable steps that people can take to tackle climate change increases intention to undertake pro-environmental action [9], [14], [19], [27], [29], [33], [53], [56]. Which types of pro-climate behaviour are best to promote is beyond the scope of this report but some studies suggest that it could be useful to encourage ‘small’/‘easy’ actions first, to create a snowball effect that leads to political engagement [57], and to provide time-oriented goals, such as ‘can you limit your red meat intake to two portions per week in January?’ [9]. Additionally, efficacy can be fostered by using language that is communal (‘we’ rather than ‘you’) and motivational (‘start/grow/support’ rather than ‘don’t/stop’) [14], [22].
Focus group discussions also revealed a need for a balance between positive and negative messaging. On the one hand, there was a view that shocking, fear-based messaging is needed to make people pay attention and ensure the public understand the serious nature of climate-change issues. Participants referenced what they perceived to be effective messaging around the dangers of smoking or the Covid-19 pandemic. This framing was seen as an effective way to demonstrate the serious impacts of climate change, with a suggestion that people may be even more receptive to this type of messaging post-pandemic.
“For people to take stuff seriously when it comes to the news, you have to kind of scare them a little bit. With Covid that is exactly what happened.” (Focus group participant).
At the same time, there was a desire for more information around solutions and positive actions that participants could take. Participants stressed that when negative impacts of climate change were shared (for example the negative health impacts highlighted in the Make It Better campaign case study – see 5.3), specific guidance was needed around what exactly people could do.
“I know that, for a lot of young people my age, people struggle with having money for clothes and stuff. And so they always resort to SHEIN or Teemu or things like that, which are absolutely awful for the environment. So I think putting an emphasis on alternatives [is important].” (Focus group participant).
However, there was a strong feeling that public engagement on climate change issues should avoid “lecturing” people, as this causes them to feel guilty about their lifestyle choices. Rather than focusing solely on individual responsibility, participants felt that communications should also acknowledge the role of companies and governments in contributing to and combatting climate change. Highlighting the need for both individual and systemic action was also flagged as good communications practice in the literature [23], [56].
Relevance for the PES
The importance of messaging is referred to throughout the PES, including commitments to ensuring messaging is evidence-based, easy to engage with, and accessible. The PES also refers to engaging with people’s values, identities and concerns. It is part of the PES principle of ensuring an evidence-based approach.
The literature and focus groups both support these aspects of the PES and provide insights into how they can be delivered. It was clear that, ideally, future messaging would be supported by evidence, appeal to people’s personal values and emotions, and be made relevant to people’s lives. The PES also acknowledges the importance of helping people to see their individual actions within the context of the bigger picture, and that they are not tackling climate change alone. Focus groups findings in particular support this view, as participants highlighted a sense of uncertainty around how much impact their own actions would have.
The merits of both positive and negative, or fear-based, messaging were discussed in the literature and in the focus groups. While there is a potential conflict between those two directions, the overall sentiment was that governments should be honest about the risks and uncertainties of climate change, but also convey positive, pro-climate actions and practical actions that the public can adopt. These findings support the principle underlying the PES, that it will take a positive approach that outlines a vision for climate action that promotes the many benefits. This is described in the PES as a way of combatting climate distress. However, given the findings that a balance between both positive and honest messaging can be effective, this suggests that the PES should not necessarily shy away from conveying the negative consequences of climate change.
Conveying the message
Use trusted messengers
Building trust is important for climate communicators, especially when trying to reach vulnerable groups. It takes time to build trust, and it is much easier to lose it than gain it [58], [59]. In order to become a trusted messenger, communicators should be authentic, human, sincere, down to earth, kind, reliable, honest; show empathy and passion; and demonstrate their credibility [1], [20], [58].
There are certain people who are already trusted by the public. These include: naturalists and nature conservation charities [58]; healthcare professionals [1], [32], [33], [41], [42], [59]; parental groups [1]; scientists, academic experts, environmental specialists and weather presenters [11], [12], [17], [41], [42], [59]; elders [12], [53]; and people with lived experience of the issue on which they are speaking [41]. Other examples include community leaders, non-governmental organisations (NGOs), educators, experts and impartial facilitators [1], [4], [12], [19], [23], [26], [28], [30], [53], [54], [55], [60], [61], [62], [63], [64], [65], [66], [67], [68], [69]. In general, the public is less trusting of activists and elites (celebrities or prominent figures) [1], [17], [19], [58], although there are some exceptions (e.g. David Attenborough is trusted across audience groups) [70]. Again, different groups trust different messengers. People are more likely to trust and engage with local people [6], [12], [17], [21], [23], [33], [42] and in-group members. For example, one study found meat-eaters were more likely to accept a call to reduce their meat intake from other meat-eaters, versus from vegans [71].
“[Tourism workers] are one of the best messengers [to communicate about the impacts of climate change on coral reefs], because they’re the people that access and see these impacts firsthand. Their lives depend on the reef. I have a friend who [takes tourists scuba diving] in the southern Great Barrier Reef, which was the worst hit area earlier this year for the bleaching…He’s made a climate talk, with really clear calls to action.” (Stakeholder – climate campaigner and outreach organiser).
It can also be useful to have multiple messengers from a diversity of backgrounds, including experts, lay public and people from marginalised groups [1], [29].
Make it visual
Visual communication can promote learning and participation. Techniques such as images, graphs, diagrams, infographics, illustrations, interactive displays and pen portraits (fictional characters that represent different sections of the population) can make complex information more accessible, personal (see section 3.1.4 on making climate change a ‘human’ issue) and memorable [12], [32], [39], [41], [59], [63], [72], [73], [74], [75], [76]. More collaborative approaches might include partnering with local communities, architects and designers to produce visualisations of the future [77]. Videos have also been found to be highly emotionally engaging and can increase people’s knowledge, risk perception, collective efficacy and government-related efficacy [10], [41], [42], [78]. Additionally, rather than relying on technical language (such as describing increases in CO2 emissions), communicators should use figurative expressions (such as “the planet is heating up” or “the pollution produced is equivalent to that from 10 car journeys”) [17], [79].
As with written and verbal communications, visual climate communications should aim to make climate change relevant and ‘human’. For example, images should show real people (not staged scenarios) [63] and local impacts (clearly linked to climate change) [63], [72], [80]. Visuals should be emotionally salient, reflecting the severity of the topic and highlighting people’s vulnerability [24], [59], [72], [80]. For example, in one study images of people suffering from respiratory illness due to air pollution were found to be effective for communicating the health impacts of climate change, because they caused participants to feel more vulnerable and susceptible towards the issue. However, images of ‘problems’ should be paired with those of solutions, to promote action alongside urgency [63], [72], [77]. Images depicting air pollution [72] may be particularly salient. However, protest imagery can be alienating [1]. Again, as with other forms of communication, videos should be short, relatable and easy-to-understand [10], [41], [42].
Trial the use of humour
Emerging evidence suggests that humour could offer a unique way to engage audiences on climate change by catching their attention, breaking taboos, and helping people cope with the psychological weight of the topic. Methods like cartoons, memes, satirical shows and live performances can encourage people to interact with content (including online), as well as increase their belief in and understanding of environmental issues [81], [82]. That said, evidence regarding humour’s ability to stimulate behaviour change is mixed and there are concerns that taking a humorous approach to climate change may trivialise the issue [81], [82]. Communicators should therefore test humour-based approaches with their target audiences.
This initiative produces videos in which climate scientists are paired with comedians who ‘translate’ climate science into emotional, shareable and actionable formats. It’s a great example of using humour to make climate information more accessible and engaging. According to Climate Science Breakthrough’s own research, their videos make 87.5% of viewers more likely to take climate action.
Think about the medium/channel
Communications campaigns are most effective when they use multiple mediums (e.g. website, e-mails, social media, posters, flyers, community bulletins, meetings, events, word-of-mouth, TV, radio, newspaper, slogans, icons), including a mix of grassroots and top-down, formal and informal, and digital, creative and traditional methods [3], [8], [10], [12], [21], [32], [83]. This finding was echoed in focus groups, in which participants believed a variety of methods of sharing information would be required to meet the needs of different groups of people, covering both online and offline approaches. It is also advisable to communicate regularly and consistently [14], [17] and put messages where people will naturally see them, without having to seek them out – for example, in schools, supermarkets, doctor’s surgeries and on Google maps or TV shows [41].
Example: Information packs to reduce household energy consumption [7].
In a field study in Belgium, households were provided with information packs about how to reduce their energy use. Packs included information on the monetary and/or environmental consequences of saving energy; neighbourhood energy consumption data (broken down by house size); guidance on how to interpret kWh as a unit of energy use; testimonials from citizens who successfully reduced energy consumption; energy-saving advice (adapted to each season); links to further resources; and physical tools (e.g. radiator bleeder, energy saving tip stickers for household appliances and a meter reading chart).
Over the three-year study period, households who received information packs reduced their gas consumption more than households who didn’t receive the packs. The effect was particularly strong in high-consuming households. These packs follow several principles of good climate communication – the information was highly accessible (by being delivered directly to households rather than requiring people to seek it out); the packs included a variety of different types of content; and the content included practical advice and tools, rather than only highlighting the problem of climate change.
The evidence suggests that people still value communication via traditional methods, such as news media, TV and radio (especially in rural communities) [6], [62], [84]. Additionally, face-to-face and community-based communication is well received, especially by older people and rural communities [12], [21], [39], [85].
Social media can also be an effective way to reach a large audience (particularly young people) in an informal, relatable way [12], [16], [17], [18], [51], [66], [68], [83], [86], [87], [88], [89], [90], [91], [92], [93], [94]. Exposure to sustainability-related content on social media has been found to increase individuals’ sustainability-related knowledge, fear of climate change, subjective norms, pro-environmental attitudes, perceived behavioural control, behavioural intent, and actual behaviour [51]. Social media may be a particularly effective way to engage with young people [52], [68], [83], [88], [91], [93], [94]. That said, communicators should be wary not to overwhelm people with information [93] or to narrow the focus to topics that are highly (socially) contagious but less impactful regarding fighting climate change (e.g. plastic pollution) [40]. Digital communication methods (such as texts and e-mails) are less effective for deep communication but could be useful for delivering information and alerts [27], [74].
“[To reach out to youth] social media is our best friend.” (Stakeholder – Advocacy and engagement organisation).
In focus groups, participants felt that sharing information online, including on social media, can be an effective way to reach a large number of people and younger age groups in particular. Rural participants also highlighted the importance of using social media for those living in rural areas in Scotland, who may not regularly pass through towns or villages where they might see posters or leaflets. At the same time, participants thought that certain people are not able or comfortable spending time online. Therefore, more traditional communication channels were suggested such as printed materials, TV, radio or newspapers (particularly local stations/publications), and information sent by post. They felt that social media campaigns bring benefits, such as using hashtags to gain traction and providing opportunities for people to more easily engage with, share and interact with the information that is posted.
Finally, embedding climate communications in entertainment (e.g. films, TV shows, podcasts and live performances) shows promising initial results in terms of boosting climate awareness, attitudes and action [10], [51], [95], [96], [97]. It is important that the entertainment aspect takes priority, to avoid being boring or ‘preachy’ [95], [96], [97]
Relevance for the PES
As part of the ‘Understand’ objective, the PES includes a commitment to using a range of communication challenges, including both traditional and digital channels. This research supports the need for this multi-pronged approach, to help ensure the messaging is accessible and has wide appeal.
The PES acknowledges the needs to use trusted messengers and describes these messengers as individuals and organisations working to engage the public, from small local groups up to stakeholders delivering national campaigns. The evidence review has provided some further insights into who are considered trusted messengers, and their characteristics. The type of organisation, and what principles they stand for, are therefore both important considerations when partnering with these messengers on public engagement.
Some of the specific means of communication highlighted in the evidence are also referenced in the PES. This includes the use of storytelling, as part of the Scottish Government’s efforts to lead the way in developing and promoting climate conversations as a means of sharing views and improving climate literacy. The PES also refers to power of the arts to help the public to understand and visualise the potential impacts of the climate change. The findings suggest that these different channels should continue to be used to communicate and education on climate change. Humour is not specifically mentioned in the PES and is one of the more emerging strands in the evidence review. This is potentially an area for further testing and development in the next stages of the PES.
Responding to the audience
Tailor communications to the audience and context
“That’s a crucial question for any, especially national, strategy… no country has the resources to do everything. You’ve got to be strategic. This is why you start with audience analysis… You’ve got to first get very clear about exactly what it is you’re trying to accomplish. Then figure out who’s the audience… Then figure out the best way to reach them.” (Stakeholder – climate communicator).
As has been highlighted, different groups and people respond differently to climate communications materials. The evidence is emphatic that the choice of framing, language, messenger and medium must consider the audience and context. For example, responses vary according to many different factors:
Cultural context: In ‘individualistic nations like the UK (that value self-sufficiency, personal achievement and competition), emphasising the individual gains made by taking climate action is effective [47].
Religion: Linking climate change to ‘creation’ works well with Muslim, Jewish and Christian faith groups, but not as well with Hindu and Buddhist groups [1].
Political ideology: Liberals respond better to expert knowledge and participatory engagement, whereas moderates and conservatives prefer hearing from lay people with direct experience of climate change [98].
Level of engagement with climate change: Factual/scientific information and messengers are better received and more likely to boost climate beliefs and support for mitigation policies among people already knowledgeable and concerned about climate change [11], [41]. However, these people don’t need to be convinced that climate change is a problem, they mostly want to hear about the steps they can take to solve it [99]. For groups ‘in the middle’ (cautious but not fully engaged), communicators should highlight the relevance of climate change through simple, clear, repeated messages from a range of trusted sources [41], [99]. Doubtful groups are more likely to negatively appraise climate change materials, so highlighting widely accepted contributions of science to society (e.g. vaccinations) [11] and using non-climate frames [41], [99] may be effective. That said, non-climate frames can also be interpreted as ‘propaganda’ [41].
Climate attitudes and beliefs also vary with location (rural versus urban) [18], [39], [99]; income [39]; (dis)ability [39]; degree of experienced climate impacts [18]; age [1], [27], [39], [73]; and gender [73], [100].
Make it accessible
Accessibility was a common theme across the literature and the focus groups. An overarching principle in the literature is the importance of making climate communications accessible to a wide range of people [3], [13], [21], [22]. Information should be concise and easy to understand [27]. For example, communicators should focus on one key message, consistently communicated; use a limited number of statistics, ensuring those that are used are clear and memorable; avoid technical language, jargon and acronyms; and provide contextual/explanatory information for any maps and diagrams [7], [12], [17], [33], [41]. Communication materials should also be shared in multiple languages, including local languages, via a variety of media channels, and be sensitive to the cultural, social and accessibility needs of different audiences [1], [12], [17], [23], [29], [33], [59], [63].
Relevance for the PES
These findings on understanding the audience are closely in line with the content of the PES and some of its central messages. Under the action of “ensuring accessibility”, the PES states that communication should include a variety of channels to reach different audiences in ways that are most appropriate and engaging for them.
While findings align with the PES, the evidence review provides some further considerations for understanding the audience and ensuring accessibility. In particular, ensuring communication is sensitive to cultural, political, religious, geographical and other contexts is an area not explored in detail in the PES.
Education
Use a range of approaches to inform and educate
The evidence found that in some instances information provision alone can increase environmental knowledge and lead to further positive outcomes. This is most likely to happen when the information is simple and action-based. For example, providing simple guidelines about climate friendly food choices can increase people’s ability to choose climate friendly products in easy product choice situations [9].
However, generally didactic presentation of information is more effective when combined with other methods, preferably interactive ones. Such methods include: art activities [101]; challenges and competitions [102], [103]; gamification [104], [105]; inquiry-based learning [106], [107], [108], [109]; cooking classes [110], [111]; projects [112], [113]; argumentation training [114], [115], [116]; writing reflections [104]; farmer field schools [117], [118], [119], [120]; tree planting [121]; experiential learning [116], [122]; and group exercises and discussions [123], [124], [125]. One notable project took portable aquaponic pods to schools to engage pupils in food production and foster learning about sustainability, climate change and healthy eating [126]. Effective interventions often use multiple combined approaches.
Example: Interactive learning intervention in UK schools [127]
An activity-based educational intervention was embedded into the curriculum of Year 9 classes in two schools in the UK. It used a range of interactive approaches, including student-led inquiry, drawing flowcharts/maps, discussions and quizzes. As a result of engaging with the intervention, students developed a stronger understanding of the causes and effects of global warming. This supports the use of engaging, collaborative methods in climate education.
Tailor to the audience and context
As with communications campaigns, multiple studies highlighted the importance of tailoring educational interventions to the audience and local environment [117], [128], [129], [130], [131]. One way this can be accomplished is through designing interventions which focus on applying global issues to local contexts and issues [125].
Enable learners to be co-creators
Effective educational interventions that increased environmental knowledge/awareness often took a collaborative approach. This includes staff-student collaborations and student-led projects [108], [132]; training local community members or action groups to deliver non-formal education [133], [134]; and co-developing toolkits with key stakeholders [135].
“The workshop is kind of like a menu…every group has different baseline knowledge. So, if you’d like to dig into [specific topics], we can totally go into that. But if all you need to know is that [climate change is] bad and here’s what we can do, we can start there as well. And most people go for the second option… I guess you’re giving them that autonomy. You’re not just lecturing at them.” (Stakeholder – climate campaigner and outreach organiser).
Support systemic change
The literature emphasised the need for change beyond individual interventions. Several studies outlined that environmental issues could be better embedded in school and university curricula [130], [136], [137], [138], [139]. Key points to consider here include defining the aim of climate change and sustainability education; involving educators and students in developing change; incorporating sustainability education across different elements of the curriculum (and linking these up); and making education place-based and grounded in real-world contexts and issues [130], [138]. However, some schools do not have adequate resources (including funding and time) to implement initiatives that can effectively educate students [126], [140], so these are areas where the Government could lend support. Ledwell and colleagues [63] also highlight how climate change education can empower communities to be better able to adapt to environmental impacts and argue for similar programmes (that focus on developing the skills and knowledge needed for climate adaptation and resilience) among the adult workforce.
Relevance for the PES
One of the PES actions is to embed climate change within formal education. It includes a commitment to supporting climate change education, for example by implementing the Learning for Sustainability action plan and working with the Teach the Future campaign. The evidence review findings provides insights into the types of approaches that would work best, particularly in terms of the type and style of information provision and the opportunities for collaboration and co-creation.
Training is not currently part of the PES, therefore the findings suggest that further exploration of opportunities for upskilling young people and workers would be a valuable addition.
Summary
The evidence is clear that following good communications principles is essential for successful public engagement on climate change. Much of the research supports known ‘best practice’ for communicating about climate change, but there are also some emerging new areas of opportunity. A common theme is that there is no single ‘best’ way of communicating about climate change. It is therefore important to use multiple methods and test communication campaigns and messages with your audience before rolling them out at scale [12], [33], [41], [141].
Findings from the evidence review and the focus groups have highlighted that much of the best practice on communication and education is already captured within the PES. This includes the need to be inclusive and accessible, to communicate with different audiences in different ways, to use trusted messengers, and to use messaging that highlights the relevance to individuals and the practical actions they can take.
As well as endorsing various elements of the PES, the findings also provide insights into areas for further consideration for the remainder of the PES period. These include:
On messaging, ensure that climate change is framed in a way that is relevant to the lives of individuals and communities, reflects the context (cultural, political, geographic and others) and is focussed on practical actions for individuals. As well as using positive messaging, do not shy away from conveying the negative consequences of inaction on climate change.
When conveying the message, the research has identified the characteristics of (e.g. being authentic, sincere, kind, honest, credible) and types of people (e.g. naturalists, healthcare professionals, scientists) who are considered trusted messengers, and those that are not. It also highlights the benefits of exploring different approaches such as the use of visual communication and humour.
In education settings, encourage and enable approaches that foster collaboration and co-design with learners. Further explore opportunities for workforce training on technical aspects of climate change.
Take measures to build collective efficacy such as using messaging that emphasise social norms, shared beliefs and a sense of community. Examples of this include sharing testimonials, photos and videos of citizens taking action, or hosting competitions, quizzes and user-generated content on social media.
The lessons outlined in this chapter can be applied across many aspects of climate change messaging, but are particularly relevant for the following PES actions:
Develop and implement our public communications approach to ensure people understand Scotland’s climate ambitions and the policies that will be required to reach them
Collaborate with key delivery organisations to ensure information reaches key audiences, including through initiatives such as Climate Week
Working with Adaption Scotland and others to provide consistent messaging that makes clear the impact of climate change locally, nationally and globally
Support trusted messengers to promote climate literacy
Embed climate change within formal education
Use marketing and communications activity to ensure that households understand the changes needed to help Scotland get to net zero.
Deliberative engagement and co-design
This section outlines the findings related to public engagement that are categorised as “deliberative engagement” and “co-design” approaches.
The examples and lessons covered here relate to the ‘Participate’ objective of the PES. There is a wide range of activities that fall under the deliberative engagement and co-design banner and huge variation in how the same activities are delivered in different settings. Participatory activities such as these are all about getting people to take part in decision-making processes. Therefore, they mainly contribute to the ‘Participate’ objective. Source: Public Engagement Strategy
However, they also enhance climate knowledge and awareness, and promote behaviour change and support for climate solutions/actions [133], [134], [142], [143], [144]. Furthermore, they can lead to antecedents to pro-climate behaviour, including feelings of trust, community, ownership, empowerment, self-efficacy and stewardship over the local environment [92], [145], [146], [147]. Therefore, deliberative and co-design activities can also support the ‘Understand’ and ‘Act’ objectives of the PES.
For this chapter, a summary of the relevance of these findings for the PES is provided at the end of the chapter, rather than after each sub-section.
Who is involved
Be inclusive
Deliberation and co-design activities should involve a diverse range of people, including traditionally marginalised groups such as young people, ethnic minorities and those who are less physically able. Organisers could use purposive recruitment to gather an approximately representative group of participants or identify key stakeholders affected by the issue [53], [148], [149]. They could also support people facing financial, temporal, spatial or physical restrictions by providing compensation, child- or elder-care, support with logistics, a dedicated helper, and options to engage virtually [28], [150], [151]. Particular attention should be paid to the barriers faced by marginalised communities [152], [153], [154]. Additionally, internal dynamics should be well managed to ensure that all participants feel welcome and able to contribute [28], [29], [77], [150]. This includes organisers and facilitators reflecting on their own assumptions, being conscious of people’s differing values, and as getting to know participants’ motivations for engaging in a project [148], [155].
“What I think is really powerful about [citizens] assemblies is getting that diversity in one room and talking across different communities… learning together, deliberating together, crafting recommendations together… I think that’s really unusual and really hard to replicate in any other way.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
It is also important to combine diverse sources of information, including local knowledge, indigenous knowledge, lived experience and scientific expertise [55], [156]. Local people are best positioned to monitor and solve local problems [148], [157], [158], [159] and bringing together groups that don’t usually work together can foster new perspectives and ideas [147], [159], [160], [161].
“By the time the government takes action, the divers and the fishermen have seen it. But they don’t have a channel of communication, [so they feel like] the government doesn’t listen to them… So I would advise to [listen to] the observers, the person in the forest that sees that the trees are dying are those who live in the forest.” (Stakeholder – Public engagement delivery organisation).
This finding was echoed among focus groups participants. They highlighted the need for public engagement activities to be promoted in an inclusive way so that everyone with a potential stake in the topic was aware of how they could be involved. This was particularly thought to be the case to reach people who may not actively seek out opportunities to share their views and avoid only recruiting people who are already very engaged in climate change issues or have strong views about particular subjects. One participant shared frustrations about having recently missed out on attending a climate change-related event in their local village due to not being aware of it until after it had occurred. This was despite being ‘active’ online.
Participants also stressed that it was important not to overwhelm people with too much information in advance of an engagement event, and to make sure people feel welcomed and understand that their contributions are valuable.
“It’s about making sure that people don’t feel that because it’s a climate advocate [and] they’re going to know a lot more […] it doesn’t mean that their opinion is of greater importance than the person who’s living in that community.” (Focus group participant).
Focus group participants felt that, to encourage views from a diverse range of people (beyond those already interested in the topic), public engagement practitioners should reassure the public that any lack of knowledge or prior involvement in discussions about climate change is not a barrier to taking part.
Content and format of engagement
Tailor to the audience and context
The literature emphasises that deliberative and co-design activities are not ‘off the shelf’ solutions. Organisers and facilitators should consider the local environmental issues; political, social and economic context; and participants’ demographics. For example, people in countries where citizen participation in democracy is high will likely expect a more involved approach. Power relations between the people in the room are also important, as social divisions and tensions can be barriers to participation, especially on a local scale [143], [154].
Make it accessible
In focus groups, participants felt that using a variety of different engagement methods – both online and offline – would help to make these types of engagements more accessible. For example, to ensure the accessibility of face-to-face engagement events, participants suggested holding these in places that were easy for participants to get to and in physically accessible buildings. They also noted a need for convenient timings, taking into account different schedules. Participants felt that online engagement, such as through video platforms or apps, could help encourage participation from those unable to attend an in-person activity. However, they also noted the risk of digital exclusion and that these tools are not accessible to everyone. A balance between offline and online methods was therefore seen as necessary.
Support active and innovative forms of participation
Focus group participants felt that giving the public the opportunity to get directly involved in activities would help to make the topic of climate change more engaging and impactful for them. For example, they welcomed the citizen science approach demonstrated in one of the case studies, in which volunteers helped to collect data as part of a study on air quality in Buenos Aires (see 7.3). Participants felt that taking an active part in data collection in this way would make people more interested in the findings compared to having simply been told about them.
“If you get involved with something […], you’re more interested in what the results come back than if you didn’t get involved with it in the first place.” (Focus group participant)
There was support for including a level of active engagement even in relation to information campaigns where possible. For example, in the Make It Better case study campaign (see Appendix B), the public were encouraged to sign a pledge and this was praised for being “at least [the] start of doing something”. However, concerns were raised about asking participants to do too much and the risk of “volunteer fatigue”. Similarly, others stressed the need for engagement to be easy, especially if it was taking place over a longer period of time.
Enjoyment in participatory processes has been linked to increased awareness and behaviour change [143]. Therefore, practitioners could employ creative methods of engagement, such as art, visioning exercises and even field trips, which are generally well received by participants [62], [162].
“There were a couple of juries which banned PowerPoint, which I thought was really funny, and there was one classic one where you had a climate scientist on the floor building a graph with Lego blocks to show the cumulative growth [of emissions]. And that really stuck in people’s heads.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
Digital tools (such as mobile phone apps – see the Floop app example in Appendix D – websites and social media) are also increasingly available. These may be less effective for in-depth deliberation and discussion, but could be useful for capturing and sharing information with a large audience (for example, in citizen science or quick consultation activities) [163].
Example: People’s Plan for Nature, UK (source: expert interviewee)
This project, led by three environmental organisations (the WWF, RSPB and National Trust), used a participatory process to develop a plan of action for protecting nature in the UK. The organisations collaborated with an assembly of 100 people from across the country, who met over four weekends to discuss nature-related issues and put together recommendations for action. The approach was blended – i.e. involved meeting face to face (for the first and last weekend), as well as digitally (for the second and third weekend). This combination made the process accessible, and the timing of the in-person sessions meant that people were able to get to know each other at the start of the process and then produce recommendations collectively at the end.
Give participants autonomy
Promoting a sense of ownership and empowerment among participants supports feelings of self and collective efficacy, legitimises the process and increases acceptability of solutions [156], [164], [165], [166]. This can be achieved by giving participants control over the agenda and activities, and giving the public ownership of outputs or recommendations [144], [152], [167]. Interestingly, there may be no difference in perceived acceptability of solutions when participants are given full control or partial control (i.e. some expert input remains) [156].
“It’s about the dynamic. We ran an assembly years ago with experts…they give their presentation and then they sit at the top [of the room] and the citizens ask their questions. It looks a bit like Question Time. And that is…basically pandering to the expert status of the people at the top. So what we did in the next one was … got the citizens to think about their questions and the experts moved around the tables… [citizens] were in control of what they asked and if they wanted to move on to the next question, it was completely up to them, completely changed the dynamics.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
Some participatory processes have divided participants into groups to cover more topics in depth, but this may mean participants don’t feel ownership over recommendations they were not involved in [167]. Another caveat to be aware of is that while bottom-up control over framing and design increases citizen input and creativity, it may also lead to less feasible policy options [69].
Example: Citizen science and co-policy design in the ClairCity Project [143]
This project engaged people across six European regions around air pollution and carbon emissions. It involved a variety of activities that gave residents a sense of ownership and control over the process. For example, participants used apps to monitor their own transport habits, emissions production and emissions exposure. A crowdsourcing process also gathered lived experiences and policy ideas. Residents involved in the project found it enjoyable and reported increased understanding of air quality. 74% of those surveyed indicated that they would make a behaviour change to improve air quality.
Create a supportive atmosphere
To ensure participants feel comfortable, activities should be conducted in informal, familiar places. For example, the literature cited locations such as coffee shops, community centres and participants’ homes [66].
“It’s very important where you meet your focus group. I don’t call everybody to the city to come to a focus group meeting. We go to the comfort zone. It’s very important to be where the people are comfortable, [so they can] express themselves.” (Stakeholder – public engagement delivery organisation).
Additionally, practitioners should explicitly communicate that participants’ contributions are valued [148], [168] and given enough time to cover topics in depth and discuss ideas fully. Participants’ privacy should be respected [153] and issues surrounding data handling and ethics should be taken seriously [148], [149]. Further, to promote credibility and legitimacy, deliberative processes should be transparent and well-communicated [169], [170].
Echoing the literature, focus group participants suggested that there should be opportunities for people to speak in small groups or with others one-to-one (to reduce anxiety around speaking in groups).
Consider practical issues
Planning ahead is crucial in ensuring the success of deliberation and co-design interventions. A clear remit and goal should be set in advance [171]; policymakers and facilitators should be sufficiently trained [77]; proper resources and funding should be provided [171]; and, ideally, tools that can be used in different contexts and at different scales should be employed [172]. Where participants act as data collectors – for example, in citizen science projects – organisers should ensure that the data collection method is congruent with the data analysis plan [148].
It is also important to enable initiatives to self-reflect and learn from each other. For example, useful actions include conducting pilots [147], [171]; gathering feedback from participants [168]; and sharing evidence, evaluations and failures with wider networks and organisations [148], [169], [173].
Impacts of the engagement
Engage meaningfully with outputs and recommendations
Alongside lessons relating to the delivery of individual deliberation and co-design activities, a common finding across the literature, interviews and focus groups was the need to respond meaningfully to outputs and recommendations. When these are ignored, engagement activities can appear tokenistic. This may call into question the legitimacy of participatory processes (in the eyes of participants and policymakers) and reinforce conflict within the involved communities [174], [175], [176].
Responding to, acting on and monitoring the implementation of recommendations should be seen as part of the participatory process and factored into the plan and budget [153], [164], [169], [177], [178], [179], [180]. Generally, integrating the outcomes of participatory activities into policy is easier when these are government-led. However, such interventions are also more likely to be perceived as ‘box-ticking exercises’ designed to give commissioners legitimacy [181].
To ensure decision-makers respond meaningfully to participatory processes, organisers should get buy in early on from actors that will be affected by the outcomes [166]. There should be a core policy team that is responsible for taking recommendations through the policy process, preferably involving officials from multiple departments and the core government, not just climate teams. Decision-makers should avoid merely assigning individual recommendations to the appropriate government departments for action, but also respond to the wider context, ethos and vision of participatory outputs. Additionally, the response process should be transparent to participants – participants should be told from the outset how their efforts will be acknowledged [148], [168], [182] and be regularly updated on how recommendations are being implemented [1], [30], [60], [61], [65], [66], [67], [169], [182].
“How are we going to follow up on [climate assemblies] in a way that does justice to what the assembly members have done? We’re so obsessed by the citizen engagement bit that we don’t focus enough on getting the structures around it right… I think we kind of go – ‘oh, that’s the participation there’. Actually, the participation is all of it… Don’t deliver an assembly unless you are sure you understand what the follow up is going to be.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
Example: Irish Citizens Assembly (source: expert interviewee and EPA report)
In the Irish Citizens’ Assembly, 99 citizens deliberated on how Ireland can become a leader in tackling climate change. The process produced 13 recommendations which were more radical than many expected. A strength of the process was that a specific all-party parliamentary committee – the Joint Oireachtas Committee on Climate Action (JOCCA) – was set up to respond to the recommendations (via a published report). JOCCA’s report gave the recommendations momentum and ended up significantly shaping the Government’s Climate Action Plan to Tackle Climate Breakdown.
Example: Permanent climate assembly in Brussels (source: expert interviewee)
The permanent climate assembly in Brussels has a small committee of ten diverse citizens who spend a year working with the municipality after each deliberation cycle. This involves a new group of people each time and they have the right to ask for any information they want. The municipality is required to say after three months, what it’s going to do, and after a year what it’s done. While permanent assemblies will not always be possible and appropriate, this example highlights a practical approach to ensuring that engagement is built into decision making and that participants are kept close to the outputs and recommendations.
Another activity to consider is green participatory budgeting, where local people get together to decide how funds will be spent on environmental initiatives. This was flagged by one of our expert interviewees as a useful local-level participatory activity, that is less traditional than climate assemblies and garners involvement from a wide range of people.
“Participatory budgeting (PB) is one of the few participatory processes where the people who get involved can very directly see how their contribution then results in resources being mobilised to take action, to fund projects, to reform a service, to start a new initiative, or to channel resources in a new direction… It’s a more proactive and co-produced type of engagement. It’s not just led by the local authorities, it’s a partnership with a number of community organisations and third sector organisations. Green PB, I think, is a real opportunity that should play a central role in the public engagement strategy.” (Stakeholder – public policy and engagement expert).
Example: Green participatory budgeting in Lisbon, Portugal [23]
Lisbon’s green participatory budgeting programme empowers citizens to use part of the City Council’s budget each year for projects that make the city more sustainable, resilient and environmentally friendly. It is open to everyone in the municipality of Lisbon over the age of 16 and engagement is hybrid, with in-person events for discussion and debate alongside web-based platforms for voting and proposal submission. Winning projects are integrated into the City Council’s Plan of Activities and Budget and then implemented. Evidence suggests that citizens are actively engaged in Lisbon’s PB process and that this leads to the commissioning of sustainability-related projects.
Summary and relevance for the PES
Deliberation and co-design activities often lead to high levels of satisfaction among participants and can deliver benefits for the local community and those facilitating engagement [145], [183]. They are effective at engaging the public in climate change and crucial for bringing a topic onto the public stage [145], [184], [185]. However, practitioners should be aware that solutions that come out of participatory processes may not be ambitious enough to meet climate targets [171] and data gathered by citizens without expert input may be of poor quality [87].
The PES has been developed with the good practice principles of participation in mind, in line with the Scottish Government’s Participation Framework and the Open Government approach. The findings highlight some of the best practice which align with many of the PES principles such as being participative, inclusive, open and transparent. The findings also highlight areas for consideration in the implementation of these types of activities as part of the PES. These include:
When designing these engagement approaches, thinking carefully about who is there and how best to draw on local knowledge, lived experience and other types of expertise.
Encourage active forms of participation such as citizens’ science techniques, which involve the public directly in research, and approaches such as participatory budgeting which have a clear link between the public’s involvement and the decisions.
Explore the use of digital and creative tools to help share findings from deliberative and co-design approaches with a wider audience.
From the beginning, build in ways of measuring and demonstrating the impact of the engagement process. Take lessons from the Irish Citizens Assembly and the permanent climate assembly in Brussels which have established mechanisms for ensuring feedback for participants, helping hold decisions makers to account.
The lessons outlined in this chapter are particularly relevant for the following PES actions:
Build on Scotland’s Climate Assembly to develop further deliberative approaches
Continue to facilitate meaningful climate engagement conversations with people and audiences not currently engaged on the topic
Develop our approach to ensuring key climate change policies exhibit the principles of Open Government through meaningful consultation and participation
Creative activities
This chapter details the final theme identified in the literature, where “creative” approaches to public engagement have been used.
Creative engagement methods have a variety of outcomes and can be used in any of the other activity categories already explored (communication, education, deliberation and co-design). Therefore, creative interventions could contribute to all three of the PES objectives (‘Understand’, ‘Participate’ and ‘Act’).
Creating and working with art can increase environmental awareness and understanding [186]. It also facilitates reflection, critical thinking, empowerment and discussion, so is useful in participatory/deliberative processes [77], [90], [186]. Viewing climate change art – even virtually [78] – can enhance engagement, awareness, reflection and discussion [90], [187]. It also strengthens local/community identity [187] and cohesion [188], support for climate action [90] and sustainable behavioural intention [187].
Art exhibitions are particularly effective when they are collaboratively designed (by a diverse range of stakeholders), interactive, in public places and linked to local contexts, as they make people consider how climate change relates to their own lives [77], [90], [187], [189]. For example, exhibits could take place in squares, parks and streets, platform local stories and experiences, use local imagery and references, and engage local organisations.
Example:‘Floodlights’, an art exhibit in Hull, UK about sea level rise and flooding [187]
‘Floodlights’ was a multi-media, interactive exhibit that involved a range of pieces, including large projections onto iconic local landmarks, interactive activities and soundscapes. The exhibit increased attendees’ behavioural intention to take water and climate action, with engagement thought to be driven by emotional response, place-based attachment and civic pride. This highlights the potential role of interactive creative initiatives that are tailored to the local context in encouraging pro-climate behaviour.
Interactive information exhibits are stands or displays that incorporate activities such as posters, flash cards, infographics, models, digital or in-person games, live displays and sensory exercises. They are effective at increasing environmental knowledge and behaviour change intention [75], [190], [191]. They may do this by changing people’s perceptions of how their peers think, feels and act in relation to climate action, as well as increasing people’s confidence in taking action [191]. Such exhibits are interesting, engaging, memorable and enjoyable to people from a range of age-groups [189], [190]. They are also low-cost and easy to implement.
Interactive information exhibits should incorporate multiple activities which are playful, emotional, locally relevant and solutions-focused, but not present so much information that viewers feel overwhelmed. Having well-trained facilitators and communicators on hand to support discussion and answer questions is useful. Additionally, there are considerations for presenting interactive data – for example, presentation approaches that mimic the form, material and colour of biological processes are intuitively understood, as are colour scales like red-green [75].
Use digital tools, but be aware of drawbacks
As highlighted in previous sections, digital tools may be useful in achieving certain aims in certain contexts. Digital tools have the capacity to support environmental education, communication, participation, behavioural intention and real-world behaviour change [87], [192], [193], [194], [195].
Virtual platforms are a relatively quick, easy and cheap way to connect with a wide range of people, which is especially useful for collecting data (e.g. for environmental monitoring or opinion polls) and disseminating information (e.g. early warnings during disasters). Further, digital reward systems and currencies, where users accumulate points for carrying out pro-environmental behaviours – e.g. ‘Ant Forest’ [194] and ‘Greencoin’ [193] – can promote real life behaviour change. Digital platforms should be interactive, customisable and easy to use. They should not only be used to connect policymakers with the public, but also to connect publics and stakeholders with each other and encourage collaboration, information-sharing and discussion.
“Digital has this capacity of reach… It has generated participants who wouldn’t have come to face to face. There were people who, for example, had long term sickness, who would actually dial in from their beds. There were people with anxiety, who wouldn’t come to a face to face, but would do online.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
However, there are a number of caveats to be aware of regarding digital tools [87]. First, these are complex technologies that we don’t yet fully understand – they can be unreliable and difficult to fix when things go wrong. They require practitioners and users to have technological skills, knowledge and resource, therefore aren’t accessible to everyone. They are less effective for deep engagement and may only be as good as the original data or communications content that they share [87]. Additionally, technology use comes with risks and negative consequences, such as carbon emissions, technology dependence, mental disorders, preventing people developing traditional skills, job losses and breaches of user privacy and agency [87].
“It can be a combination of both [online and offline], depending on resources and time. [Offline] is very effective because the interpersonal nature, the chemistry… That dynamic, you cannot get it online.” (Stakeholder – public engagement delivery organisation).
An app called AirRater was developed in Australia to encourage behaviours that protect health in response to environmental hazards.
The app enabled users to view information on multiple atmospheric health hazards in real time, view local environmental conditions, and track their personal symptoms.
Supporting the use of digital tools, most users valued the app’s visual features (e.g. maps and location settings) and found the information easy to understand.
In focus groups, the use of virtual tools, such as video platforms or apps, was seen as making public engagement more accessible in certain situations. The former was seen as useful for including people in group discussions where there are travel limitations, such as for those living in rural areas. Participants specifically discussed the use of apps as a means of public engagement in the context of one of the case studies (the food carbon tracking app – see Appendix D and Figure 3). Among those who were familiar with using apps, this approach was seen as an easy and convenient way to engage. However, while these approaches could increase accessibility in some ways, participants acknowledged that they were not always easy for everyone to use. Concerns were raised around digital exclusion, and the difficulties of taking part in a group discussion at home if there are other people or distractions around.
Figure 3: Floop a food carbon tracking app that was discussed in the focus groups.
Gaming, virtual reality and emerging approaches
Trial the use of games
There is promising evidence around the use of games for environmental public engagement, but there are caveats. Games have been found to support environmental risk perception [196]; reduced psychological distance [196], [197]; interest [198]; awareness and understanding [196], [198], [199], [200], [201], [202], [203], [204], [205], [206], [207], [208], [209]; efficacy and hope [196], [198], [199], [208]; emotional and affective engagement [196], [208]; feelings of urgency and responsibility [196], [208]; attitudes [210]; discussion, participation, collaboration and cooperation [77], [200], [201], [203], [209]; policy support [207]; behavioural intentions [196], [197], [207]; and sustainable behaviour change and emissions reduction [197], [199], [203], [204], [205].
Participants across a range of ages and groups have found games fun, interesting, engaging and accessible [196], [197], [198], [201], [204], [205], [206], [207], [208], [211]. Games can be used on a variety of topics and at a variety of scales (individual to community-level). Energy saving behaviours in households and offices show particular benefit from gamification [199]. Further, games may be very useful in educational settings as they foster experiential learning [77], [204], [205], which translates to real life settings [209]. Gamified places (where playful interactions are built into everyday activities) foster more active engagement and behaviour change as citizens gain a sense of ownership and community [203].
That said, research into climate change games is relatively new. The methods of evaluation are inconsistent and the results are not conclusive [212], [213], [214]. Benefits can be often short-term, with constant/repeated engagement needed for changes to be effective [199], [203], [210]. Further, games risk trivialising and commodifying the serious issue of climate change [203].
Example: Challenge-based game intervention between students [197]
Students at two universities competed on real-world behaviour change challenges, using a virtual platform to receive information, track their progress and view real-time scores. Participants enjoyed playing the game and it resulted in sustainable behaviour change and emissions reduction. The element of competition in this game was found to be particularly motivating for students.
A serious board game about sustainable drainage solutions (SuDS) increased players’ knowledge, comprehension, awareness, behavioural intention and acceptance of SuDS interventions. Providing support for the use of games in climate engagement, players found the game fun and engaging, although they also highlighted that the experience would be improved if the game was more realistic.
Initial evidence suggests that climate change games are most effective when they are realistic (in look, narrative and activities), responsive and intuitive [194], [196], [201], [207], [208], [210], [212], [213]. A challenge or competition element makes games particularly engaging [197], [199], [204], [205], [206], [210], as does giving the player some sense of autonomy and control [194], [212]. When implementing games, practitioners should encourage players to be open to scientific evidence, even if it goes against their existing beliefs [198]. And in educational settings, games should be customisable, co-designed with educators and integrated into the existing workflow/curriculum [204], [205], [206].
Trial the use of (immersive) virtual reality
Immersive virtual reality (IVR) has been used in games but also in non-game-based interventions, such as visualisations. Evidence surrounding the effects of IVR is inconclusive, with meta-analyses having found mixed results [215]. Some studies find that IVR experiences can enhance efficacy, learning, behavioural intentions and (virtual and real-life) pro-environmental behaviour [196], [215], [216], [217], [218], [219]. IVR users have also reported greater feelings of presence, immersion, usability, engagement and emotion, compared to other engagement methods [196].
However, other studies find IVR has minimal effects on behavioural intention [219] or is as effective as other modes of delivery (e.g. computer-based, text with graphics) in fostering learning and other benefits [196], [202]. IVR may be particularly useful for visualising scenarios far away in time or place, that would be difficult, dangerous, expensive or environmentally damaging to visit in real life [217], [219]. Recommendations seem to be similar to those for game design – make experiences realistic, relevant and immersive [215], [216]. IVR should be used with caution to supplement other activities.
Users travelled virtually to a national park and witnessed environmental destruction due to dietary choices. This immersive intervention was more effective than a virtual intervention which just presented information at increasing users’ pro-environmental intentions, virtual pro-environmental behaviour and real life pro-environmental behaviour around food choices, including a week after the intervention. This suggests that the availability of virtual reality to transport people to another place is particularly valuable in climate change engagement.
Be aware of other methods
The literature highlighted a few other activities which have not been extensively researched but show some promising initial evidence. These include:
Interactive theatre (‘science shows’ which are educational but also involve characters, narratives, engaging delivery, demonstrations and audience participation) can increase behavioural intention and are particularly well received by families and children [97], [220].
‘Plogging’ (picking up litter while jogging, or doing another physical activity) can increase awareness of littering and the benefits of taking environmental action [221].
Photo voice activities (where participants take photos and use these as a catalyst for discussion) can encourage environmental awareness, comprehension, sustainable behaviour change, community building, discussion and new ways of thinking [222].
Attending environmental events such as beach cleans and birdwatching events can increase people’s environmental concern, subjective norms (belief that other people are taking environmental action) and behavioural intention [86].
Summary and relevance to the PES
Generally, the evidence supports the effectiveness of creative interactive engagement methods for a variety of outcomes [68]. This may be because creative activities are intuitively understood, accessible and tap into people’s emotions. Creative methods are also often well-received by participants.
Creative forms of engagement are not explored in detail in the PES. One of the activities outlined in the PES involves engaging through culture and heritage, and highlights that the arts act as a significant communication tool. However, specific uses of art and other creative approaches are not explored in detail. Creative forms of engagement could therefore be an area for greater focus going forward.
The lessons outlined in this chapter can be applied across many aspects of climate change messaging, but are particularly relevant for the following PES actions:
Collaborate with key delivery organisations to ensure information reaches key audiences, including through initiatives such as Climate Week
Continue to facilitate meaningful climate engagement with people and audiences not currently engage on the topic
Continue to champion and fund community-led climate action
Utilise the potential of the arts, creativity and heritage to inspire and empower culture change.
Strategy-level findings
This section outlines findings that were relevant across all strands of public engagement activity, including strategy-level considerations identified in the literature. As these findings are broader that those in chapters 3 to 5, they are more closely related to the overarching principles of the PES, rather than specific actions.
Have a clear strategy linked to a vision for net zero
The evidence review was clear that having a national-level, government-led strategy on public engagement is important. Scotland is already leading the way by having a climate change public engagement strategy. The suggestions for what such a strategy should include mirror much of what is within the existing PES, however the findings serve as a reminder to ensure the strategy is support by sufficient resource, encourages cross-sector thinking, and is linked to a feasible vision for net zero.
Literature and stakeholder interviews suggest that an engagement strategy should coordinate large-scale activities and support local activities, over a sustained period of time [28], [55], [60], [66], [67], [68], [182], [223]. It should raise awareness, normalise climate action, invite people to shape decision-making and enable people to take action via structural support and behavioural approaches [4], [26], [30], [54], [57], [63], [69], [223].
“Joining of the dots into a coherent system is so important. It’s important to make effective use of public budgets and resources, to not burn people out and create more scepticism, and to demonstrate that there is a … coherent system of different spaces that are complementary… It’s not about any single public engagement process. All of them have strengths and weaknesses. It’s about their combination and their purpose.” (Stakeholder – public policy and engagement expert).
A government public engagement strategy should be embedded in the national climate change strategy [67] and be properly resourced and funded. It should include a concrete, positive, feasible vision for net zero, that has been co-produced and consistently communicated [14], [23], [26], [28], [30], [54], [60], [67], [223]. It should encourage cross-sector thinking and discussion [67], as well as including sector-specific strategies for hard-to-decarbonise areas [223].
Build on and support existing public engagement initiatives
The literature and stakeholders highlighted the importance of acknowledging and building upon any public engagement work that is already being carried out. This includes mapping, linking up and giving a platform to small-scale, bottom-up initiatives. Stakeholders suggested that a role for governments could be to provide resources, funding, legal advice and networking opportunities to grassroots and community initiatives already taking place.
“In some communities of place, there’s very little social capital left to initiate [engagement or advocacy]. What happens there? Well, that’s where the state needs to take the first step… What is needed is that kind of seed investment to get things going… The role of the state is to create the spaces where those ideas and actions can be supported and invested in.” (Stakeholder – public policy and engagement expert).
Stakeholders also pointed out that not all relevant groups may describe themselves as ‘climate’ groups (e.g., they may fall under community engagement labels) and not all will want to engage in the same way.
Show strong leadership, be trustworthy and transparent
Several sources highlighted the importance of strong government leadership in building collective efficacy and trust [4], [17], [30], [54], [63], [69]. This not only means having ambitious climate targets and strong climate policies, but also ‘leading by example’ (government actors and departments behaving in line with their climate communications and policy). Platforming and supporting others’ pro-climate behaviours is also considered part of strong leadership, as is leading international cooperation on public engagement (also referred to as Action for Climate Empowerment or ‘ACE’) [223].
Literature showed the importance of being honest about the engagement process and about the environmental issue being discussed, including the benefits, risks and areas of uncertainty [12], [53]. The importance of trusted messengers, who are referred to throughout the PES, was also clear from the literature. Building trust was also seen as important among focus group participants. They felt it was important for the information shared as part of public engagement on climate change to be balanced and evidence-based, in order for people to make informed judgements on the issues. Similarly, they felt that there should be a neutral or balanced perspective among people running or speaking at public engagement events. There was some cynicism about the motivations of those that carry out public engagement, which can diminish trust in the process.
“It depends on the answer [the commissioner] is chasing…. if they want something to go through, they’ll find the people they want to sit on that meeting. It’s very easy to buy the answer that you want.” (Focus group participant).
Some felt that public engagement can be used to endorse a pre-determined point of view and that participants can be chosen because they already have a vested interest in the outcome. They gave examples of recent consultations on topics such as local transport or farming practices which they felt had a foregone conclusion.
To help built trust in the engagement process, focus group participants felt that the organisation responsible for implementing the findings should be transparent about the actions they are taking as a result and be held accountable for doing so.
“Once we agree, or the Government agrees, a plan… they have to be accountable. So how do you make them accountable?…[Continually provide us with] an update on how [Scotland] is doing [on climate change targets] and how we’re doing against other countries. Make it real for everyone.” (Focus group participant).
This need for accountability was linked to a concern that organisations might change their minds about a decision or go back on what was agreed as part of the engagement. While this concern was largely framed in terms of private sector organisations overturning decisions due to commercial interests, it reflects a broader point about ensuring transparency about how findings from engagement activities have been acted upon.
Get the timing right
The research did not identify an optimum length or duration of public engagement, as this varies depending on the style, purpose and context of activities. However, literature did suggest that good public engagement should be conducted consistently over long periods of time. Even ‘standalone’ projects should give people the opportunity to stay involved and be updated after completion. This requires commissioners and practitioners to be proactive, organising engagement activities at the right time, for example well before legal obligations or public pressure necessitate it [1], [4], [12], [26], [28], [60], [66], [182]. People may also be particularly open to change during big life events (e.g. moving cities) and key societal moments (e.g. Covid-19) [69].
Embed public engagement in decision-making
A theme that emerged strongly in the literature and interviews was the importance of integrating public engagement within formal decision-making processes, in a co-ordinated way. Partly that means responding meaningfully to the outputs and recommendations of participatory activities and clearly communicating with the public about how engagement links with the policy process. But, broader than that, it also means viewing engagement activities not as isolated ad hoc events, but as part of an ongoing process that is systematically linked with decision-making [169]. For example, participants should be supported by permanent structures that enable them to hold decision-makers to account [179]. These could include permanent assemblies [173], invitations to government meetings and involvement in the implementation and monitoring of public engagement outputs.
“I think that’s the next frontier, making participation a way of everyday working.” (Stakeholder – climate assemblies expert).
“What we are short on is on a public engagement that is more co-productive, that puts as much emphasis on … that ongoing, more kind of co-productive relationship, I guess. And I think that’s where the public engagement agenda in Scotland needs to move.” (Stakeholder – public policy and engagement expert).
The evidence suggests that efforts should also be made to embed public engagement in the way government works, making it a ‘reflex’ for policy makers – i.e. something automatic, that happens as part of everyday operations [54], [55], [68], [182]. For example, public administrations should get a clear mandate from policy makers for using public engagement to inform policy and make public engagement an aim of new projects. Public engagement training could be provided to policy makers and their annual appraisals and promotions could consider involvement with engagement initiatives.
Demonstrate how the public’s views have been acted on
The need for demonstrable outcomes from public engagement was a strong theme in the focus groups. Participants felt that, for engagement to be worthwhile, it needs to have a clear outcome and, ideally, result in real change. They stressed the importance of ensuring that the public feel that they are being listened to, as this creates a sense of empowerment.
“It is really important to make sure that people thought their opinions were valued. So, make sure that they’re actually being listened to and take away the feeling of, like, powerlessness in the conversations…If you’re not in a position of power, it can be kind of difficult to make that happen.” (Focus group participant).
There was some cynicism, however, about whether public engagement always leads to action. This criticism was not directed at one particular type of engagement or organisation, but participants shared their own experience of local consultations or engagement activities that they felt had lacked impact. One example was a consultation about ferry services in island areas, during which participants felt concerns had not been listened to acted upon. This had created a sense of frustration and diminished trust in the organisation and the process. Another example was the hosting of COP26 in Glasgow, which was criticised for not having resulted in any meaningful change for the public.
“A lot of these things, you can go to them, but does it make a difference? I’ve been to [consultation events] about the ferries and they just spout the company line and they go away. People get annoyed. Nothing happens.” (Focus group participant)
“COP26, there was so much hype around it but really, was there enough messaging that filtered through and made people want to make change?” (Focus group participant)
Summary and relevance for the PES
These findings provide lessons for the overall direction of the PES at a strategic level. They suggest that, for the remainder of the PES, consideration should be given to:
Ensuring the PES is supported by sufficient resource, encourages cross-sector thinking, and delvers multiple approaches to engagement.
Working through existing networks of organisations delivering engagement at a local, community and regional basis. Scottish Government’s role in this respect could be as enabler and supporter of these public engagement activities, either through funding, advice, or other types of support.
Leading by example. To demonstrate credibility and ensure the public trust in delivery of the PES, the Scottish Government could be transparent about what actions are being taken and why, showcase pro-climate behaviours, and be open about the role of public engagement activities and how the findings will be used.
While there is no set guidance on when public engagement should take place, timing should be considered part of the overall approach to gaining trust and credibility. In practice this means engagement taking place early enough so that the findings can make a difference to a particular policy area.
Making clear how the public’s involvement will have an impact on decisions. Focus group participants were clear that the public should be reassured that they have been listened to and that their contributions have made a difference. Potential approaches could be to build this messaging into specific engagement activities at the beginning (i.e. making clear what has already happened as a result of previous engagements), at the end (i.e. through follow-up communications after an initial exercise) or as part of an ongoing programme of communication from government. Lessons can be learned from countries such as Ireland and Belgium where citizens’ assemblies have included formalised feedback processes.
Conclusions
The research showed that there is no single best way to engage the public on climate change. Public engagement should use multiple and varied contexts, scales, activities, depths of engagement, approaches and intervention points. Top-down approaches may be more effective at raising awareness at scale, but grassroots approaches lead to more meaningful engagement.
This research has identified a number of lessons for future public engagement on climate change that can inform future decisions related to the PES. These lessons are based on a combination of best practice examples in the evidence review and the views from focus groups with the general public. Of course, it will not be possible to do everything or to reach everyone. What can be achieved will be dependent on time, money and other resources, and choices will need to be made about what public engagement approaches to take and when. To help prioritise next steps, the key lessons from this research are presented in two groups:
Firstly, the areas that are not currently included or not outlined in detail in the PES. These “newer” lessons could be prioritised for the remainder of the PES.
Secondly, the areas in which the content of the PES already aligns with best practice, and which should be continued.
Areas for future consideration in the PES
The research has identified areas that are not referred to, or not outlined in detail, in the PES. These newer approaches could be taken into consideration for the remainder of the PES period. These are not presented in order of priority, but are grouped under the three strategic objectives of the PES to which they most closely relate.
Understand
Ensure that climate change messaging reflects the context of those it is aimed towards (including cultural, political and geographic factors) and is focussed on practical actions for individuals. Linking with other, non-climate topics can help to engage the public on climate change. Framing it in terms of impacts on health, safety and wellbeing were seen as particularly effective.
Balance both positive and negative, or fear-based, messaging. The merits of both these approaches were discussed in the literature and in the focus groups. While there is a potential conflict between those two directions, the overall sentiment was that governments should be honest about the risks and uncertainties of climate change, but also convey positive, practical actions that the public can adopt. This point was particularly relevant to communications campaigns but could also be applied to information conveyed through other communication channels and in educational settings.
When conveying the message, explore different approaches such as the use of visual communication and humour to convey information. Humour is an area not specifically mentioned in the PES and is one of the more emerging strands in the evidence review. This is potentially an area for further testing and development in the next stages of the PES.
In education settings, encourage and enable approaches that foster collaboration and co-design with learners. Examples in the literature included staff-student collaborations and student-led projects, training local community members or action groups to deliver non-formal education, and co-developing toolkits with key stakeholders.
Participate
Demonstrate that the public have been listened to and that action has been taken as a result of their participation. This was a strong theme in the general public focus groups and they considered it a high priority for future public engagement. It is important to be clear on and convey how the public are having an influence on decisions, be transparent about how those decisions are being acted upon, and keep the public updated on progress towards outcomes. Potential approaches could be to build this messaging into specific engagement activities at the beginning (i.e. making clear what has already happened as a result of previous, similar engagements), at the end (i.e. through programming in follow-up communications after an initial exercise) or as part of an ongoing programme of communication from government.
Think carefully about who is involved in deliberative, co-design and other participatory processes. As part of the design of the processes, consider how best to draw on people’s local knowledge and lived experience.
Encourage active forms of participation to help engage people in different ways. This can include approaches such as citizens’ science, which involves the public directly in data collection and other research activities, and participatory budgeting, which has a clear link between the public’s involvement and the decisions being taken as a result. These approaches can complement other, more established engagement approaches such as citizens’ assemblies.
Explore the use of creative activities. Some of these approaches, such as gaming and virtual reality, are still relatively new in the literature so would benefit from further exploration and testing before being used more widely.
Act
Make climate change relevant to people’s lives and conveying why their actions are important. The research showed that climate change can seem a distant topic for some, and there is still some scepticism amongst the public about the difference that their individual actions can make to climate change targets.
Give people autonomy by supporting co-production and co-creation processes. These approaches can help give the public a say in the way they engage and ownership over outputs or recommendations. This can foster a sense of empowerment and help legitimises the process.
Integrate public engagement into policy decision making. This includes responding meaningfully to the outputs and recommendations of public engagement and clearly communicating with the public about how their engagement links with the policy process. More broadly it means viewing engagement activities not as isolated ad hoc events, but as part of an ongoing process that is systematically linked with decision-making.
Take measures that help boost collective efficacy. Measures to build collective efficacy included using messaging that emphasise social norms, shared beliefs and a sense of community. Examples of this include sharing testimonials, photos and videos of citizens taking action, or hosting competitions, quizzes and user-generated content on social media. Promoting a sense of ownership of engagement outcomes and recommendation can also support feelings of self and collective efficacy.
Existing aspects of the PES that should continue
Overall, findings from this research support many of the principles, activities and initiatives within the PES. Themes such as inclusion, transparency, and evidence-based approaches are all principles for the PES and were all identified in this research as important features of public engagement. This suggests that the Scottish Government’s approach is already in line with some of the public engagement best practice happening in other places.
The research highlights some key areas that the Scottish Government should continue to focus on in the delivery of the PES:
Have a clear strategy with multiple engagement approaches. Scotland is already leading the way, not just in have the PES in place but also having a built-in process of monitoring and evaluation. The PES should continue to provide a clear and positive vision for the future and include multiple approaches, including co-ordinating large-scale engagement and supporting smaller local engagement. It could explore more creative innovative activities than those currently used, including strategy-level ideas such as an Open Climate Data Platform and cross-Government digital public engagement tools
Ensure communication is inclusive, wide-reaching and targeted to the audience. Much of the best practice on communication and education is already captured within the PES. This includes the need to be inclusive and accessible, to communicate with different audiences in different ways and to use messaging that highlights the relevance to individuals.
Consider what makes a “trusted” messenger and use these to help convey relevant messages. Clear and specific examples of trusted messengers were highlighted in the research (e.g. nature conservation charities, healthcare professionals, scientists, etc.). Specific groups aside, overarching characteristics that people trusted included sincerity, kindness, honesty, empathy, passion, and credibility. The type of organisation, and what principles they stand for, are therefore both important considerations when partnering with these messengers on public engagement.
Follow best practice on participatory approaches and how to remove barriers to engagement. Continuing to follow best practice and learnings from previous engagements such as Scotland’s Climate Assembly for deliberative and co-designed processes. This includes thinking carefully about who is there and how best to draw on local knowledge, lived experience and other types of expertise. In keeping with best practice engagement principles, the research highlighted the need to remove barriers to participation as much as possible. Particular attention should be paid to the barriers faced by marginalised communities and thinking carefully about how best to engage them.
Tracking and evaluating effectiveness. As well as the ongoing evaluation that is written into the PES, this should also involve testing different interventions, measuring their impact, and sharing learnings with others
Appendices
Appendix A – Research methodology additional detail
A.1. Desk-based evidence review: Approach to identifying evidence
A desk-based review of evidence was carried out to identify public engagement activities and examples of best practice. The review was designed to primarily answer the first two research questions.
A systematic search of academic literature was carried out on Scopus and Google Scholar, using pre-agreed search terms and parameters. This was supplemented with searches of relevant grey literature using Overton, OECD Library, World Cat and organisational websites. Inclusion criteria for the review were agreed in advance. All literature was written in English and published in 2020 or later (since a previous ClimateXChange study in 2020 that explored public engagement on climate change). The review included examples relevant to all three aspects of the PES objectives (‘Understand’, ‘Participate’ and ‘Act’). It focused as much as possible on sources that evaluated public engagement, to shed light on the question of “how to do good public engagement?” This included empirical studies, case studies, evidence reviews, and lessons drawn from relevant theory.
A total of 292 sources were reviewed, 236 of which were academic and 56 of which were grey literature.
A.2. Desk-based evidence review: Types of evidence reviewed
The evidence review highlighted a wide range of public engagement activities. Most of these engaged people around broad ‘climate’ or ‘environment’ issues. But some focused on more specific topics, including adaptation, consumption, waste, diet, transport, energy, justice, health, land use, nature, ocean sustainability, water management, sea level rise, geoengineering and carbon capture and storage (CCS).
The evidence had a global reach, but rich ‘Western’ regions such as the UK, Europe and North America dominated. Public engagement interventions covered a range of scales (from local to multi-country) and timeframes (from single sessions to multi-year projects). Audiences were generally citizens or residents, but some initiatives targeted particular groups (e.g. healthcare professionals, students, farmers, rural communities, young people).
Whilst there are many examples of government-led or government-supported public engagement interventions, there are few occasions where these have been evaluated. Therefore, as this review only included sources that evaluated public engagement activities, most of the interventions were academic or NGO-led rather than government-led.
A.3. Desk-based evidence review: Quality and limitations of evidence
There was a substantial amount of evidence that evaluated public engagement interventions, including those with pre- and post-measurement designs. However, evaluation was often over short periods of time, in artificial settings and involved self-report data, limiting the applicability of findings. Additionally, Scotland is one of very few countries to have a public engagement strategy on climate change. Therefore, while there is evidence regarding how to effectively conduct climate change public engagement activities, there are limited occasions where a (national) climate change engagement strategy has been evaluated. Strategy-level reflections tends to be suggestive, based on relevant theory, rather than on practice.
It is also important to point out that links between variables such as engagement, awareness, attitudes and behaviour are complex. Notably, many studies measured behavioural intention, which is an important antecedent of behaviour but does not automatically lead to behaviour change.
A.4. Desk-based evidence review: Types of public engagement
The range of activities identified in the evidence review fell into three main categories:
Communication and education: Large-scale communication campaigns, information packs, door-to-door canvassing, e-mail campaigns, radio messages, news broadcasting, social media posts, single message testing (videos, images, pure text), menus, posters. Education included school classes, university modules/lectures, curriculum changes, challenges, gamification, inquiry-based learning (where the learners choose which questions to investigate), writing reflections, argumentation training, apps, cooking classes, nature-based workshops, community action groups, training for particular professions, farmer field schools, peer discussions.
Deliberative engagement and co-design: Climate assemblies, global assembly, mini-publics, advisory councils, climate commissions, participatory planning, participatory budgeting, participation in decision-making, stakeholder engagement workshops, stakeholder collaboration, citizen science, virtual engagement, gamification.
Creative activities: Art, interactive theatre, digital games, board games, role-play, escape rooms, virtual reality, simulations, gamified places, mobile devices/apps, social media, internet of things (IoT), artificial intelligence (AI), interactive informational exhibits, plogging, photovoice, environmental events.
These categories are broad and there is a lot of overlap between them – for example, creative methods were used in educational and participatory interventions; communication principles were referenced in all activity types. There were also some sources that took a more top level (rather than activity-specific) approach, discussing general principles for doing good public engagement or ideas for developing and implementing a public engagement strategy.
Regarding the PES objectives, there was a lot of overlap across different types of activity, with many sources relating to more than one objective. There were some trends – for example, literature around deliberation and co-design activities tended to focus on ‘participate’, while education literature often focused on ‘understand’. However, overall, links between activities and PES objectives were not clear cut.
A.5. Stakeholder interviews
Interviews were conducted with six stakeholders, representing public engagement practitioners and specialists. These interviews were designed to complement the evidence review, and explored views on public engagement best practice and lessons for future public engagement for governments like the Scottish Government. Stakeholders with the following roles and from the noted locations represented different types of organisations involved the climate change public engagement space:
Climate communicator (USA)
Climate assemblies expert (Europe)
Climate campaigner and outreach organiser (Australia)
Public engagement delivery organisation (Seychelles)
Climate advocacy and engagement organisation (Europe)
Public policy and engagement expert (UK)
The stakeholders were identified by the research team at Ipsos and CAST based on the team’s existing knowledge of the sector. The mix of stakeholders was chosen to reflect different types of involvement in public engagement on climate change, different international locations and different topic specialisms. The list was agreed with ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government in advance. Interviews were conducted by phone or video, following a semi-structured discussion guide.
A.6. General public focus groups
Focus groups were carried out with members of the Scottish public to help address the third research question. The broad aim of the focus groups was to understand the public’s views on what good public engagement on climate change looked like, and how the Scottish Government should approach public engagement on climate change in future.
Four focus groups were carried out, each with seven or eight participants and each lasting 90 minutes. A mix of online and in-person focus groups were used, to help cater to different needs and accessibility requirements. Each group was designed to be broadly representative of the population (in terms of age, gender, working status, and disability or health condition) with certain groups intentionally over-represented to ensure adequate representation (those from ethnic minority groups and 16-24 year olds).
Participants were recruited by telephone via a specialist recruitment agency. A screening questionnaire was used to ensure their eligibility for the research and to meet the demographic quotas. A summary of each group is provided in Figure 1.
Figure A1 – Focus group summary
Group
Date
Format and location
No. of participants
1
15/10/24
Online, participants all from remote rural[1] locations
7
2
17/10/24
In person, Perth
8
3
22/10/24
In person, Glasgow
7
4
23/10/24
Online, participants from accessible rural locations
7
Focus groups were structured around a topic guide designed by the research team and agreed with ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government in advance. As part of the discussions, participants were shown examples of public engagement on climate change in the form of international case studies that had been identified in the evidence review. These are referred to throughout the report. Discussion guides and stimulus materials used in the focus groups are shown in Appendices C and D.
Appendix B – Case studies of public engagement
During the focus groups, participants were presented with four case study examples of previous public engagement activities from different parts of the world. While their views on each case study informs the main report, a summary of views on each is included here.
1. Make It Better campaign
The Make It Better campaign was run by the Ontario Public Health Association to raise awareness of the health impacts of climate change for children. Information was shared via social media, on a dedicated website, and through local public health professionals. People were able to sign a pledge on the website, committing to taking action.
Positives:
Topic seen as relevant – a current issue that lots of people will relate to
Subject seen as relatively uncontroversial for most people
Topic seen as serious and ’hard hitting’
Hashtag to boost reach
Concerns:
Digital exclusion
Pledges insubstantial/easily ignored
Not ‘dramatic’ enough to capture attention and ‘cut through the noise’
Would need to be more information about actions to take to be effective
“[The campaign] makes [climate change impacts] very tangible […] like, how does it affect us right now, right here? And it really joins the dots a bit.”
2. Carbon footprint food tracking app: Floop
Floop is a free app that allows people to track the carbon footprint of the food they buy. Developed by a private UK company, Floop’s features include meal logs, target setting, and suggested recipes.
Positives:
Easy and convenient to use an app
Liked that it has multiple features
Potential to compare or compete
Concerns:
Too much hassle
Digital exclusion
Needs promotion to people who wouldn’t think to look for it
Focus on individual lifestyle choices and making people feel guilty
Would make food shopping expensive
Not always a wide choice for consumers (especially in rural areas)
Preference for carbon labelling on packaging instead
Distrust of how politicians would use data from this type of app
A feeling that apps are commercial -not associated with public bodies
Wariness around in-app purchases
“It’s just too much faffing about […] I try not to buy anything that’s travelled too far […] but something like this, I just could not be bothered.”
3. Maine’s climate coalition
This was a partnership, including labour unions, climate groups and advocates, who worked together develop plans for how offshore wind energy should be put in place in Maine. They met with community groups, including those who opposed windfarms, and government officials. The plans they developed informed a new bill brough in by the government.
Positives:
A “ground up” approach
Driven by organisations without a vested interest in making a profit
Diverse stakeholders – e.g. unions will consider jobs not just the climate
Inclusion of opposing viewpoints
Created a significant impact
Concerns:
Lack of involvement of ordinary members of the public
Risk of only those with strong views being included
Climate specialists may cause public to feel underqualified to share views
Sounds like a big time commitment
“It wasn’t just, you know, one government official saying, this is what I want, or, you know, or one private company. [It] came from the ground up.”
4. Citizen’s science air quality project
A team at a university in Buenos Aires ran workshops with students to build air quality sensors. They put out an open advertisement for volunteers, who attached the sensors to their bikes for 7 weeks. The data collected was used to produce a city-level visualisation of air pollution.
Positives:
Community given the chance to get involved and make a difference
Brings people together, builds networks, could lead to further action
People would be more interested in the findings/the topic
Gets people active
Concept could work well via different mediums, e.g. data collection apps
Concerns:
Demanding – risk of volunteer fatigue
Public may not collect accurate data
Not clear what the impact would be, it’s just a data gathering exercise
Topic of air pollution – some negative associations e.g. potential for ULEZ
Bikes not suitable for all people/areas
“[People] are actually allowed to get involved more than just [sharing] thoughts […] it’ll certainly feel so much more like they are [making an impact].”
Appendix C – Discussion guides for focus groups
Introduction – 18.00 (3-5 mins)
Aim: to set expectations and cover ground rules
Thank you for joining us today. My name is …. and I work for Ipsos, an independent research company.
Today we are going to be discussing the best ways to engage the public in conversations relating to climate change.
This research has been commissioned by ClimateXChange, Scotland’s centre of expertise on climate change, on behalf of the Scottish Government. The Scottish Government is interested in finding out how people feel about the ways the public have been involved in discussions about climate change in the past, and how best to engage with the public in future. The research involves group discussions (including this one) with people across Scotland, as well as looking at other research that has already been carried out in Scotland and other countries about what works well when engaging people in climate change issues. It is looking at ways that people are informed about climate change, how they are encouraged to take part in discussions about climate change, and how they are encouraged to take action.
The findings from this research will be used by ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government to understand what might work well to engage with people about climate change in future. So your input is really valuable and we really appreciate you joining us.
Firstly- a brief overview of how the discussion will work:
Explain that the discussion will last until 7.30 pm
Cover general housekeeping, videos on, mobile phones on silent
FOR IN PERSON GROUPS: cover practicalities e.g. toilets/exits
FOR ONLINE GROUPS: if connection drops in online groups – text moderator/wait for moderator to return SHARE MOBILE [redacted]
Before we begin, I would like to…
stress that there are no right or wrong answers – we are just interested in understanding your views
reassure you about anonymity and confidentiality. Ipsos is fully compliant with the Market Research Society Code of Conduct. No information about individuals will be passed on to anyone outside the research team
note that there’s a lot to cover, so I may move you on from time to time
ask if you could respect each other’s viewpoints and speak one at a time
give you the option of writing down your thoughts on a post-it or in the chat if you would like to
request permission to record the discussions to assist with our analysis and reporting
CHECK FOR CONSENT TO RECORD
3. Warm up – 18.05 (5-7 mins)
TURN ON RECORDER
Let’s start off with some introductions. It would be great to have everybody introduce themselves and let us know what you would usually be doing this evening if you weren’t taking part in this discussion?
GO ROUND EVERYONE
4. Discussion 1: Awareness and experiences of public engagement on climate change – 18.10 (10 mins)
Aim: Get an understanding of experiences and views on public engagement generally.
As you heard, we are interested in how the Scottish Government and other organisations communicate with people about climate change.
Firstly, what kind of issues come to mind when you think about climate change?
PROMPT if needed: What sorts of words or phrases come to mind when you hear that term?
What aspect of climate change would you say you have heard most about?
PROBES (ONLY USE IF NECESSARY): How about the ways in which we might respond to climate change and how it impacts our lives day-to-day, e.g.
The way we get around?
The way we heat our homes?
The types of food we produce and eat?
Other things, such as clothes, that we buy?
The way we handle our waste?
What sorts of ways would you say the public can be involved in discussions and have their say about climate change issues?
Any examples they can think of?
Before today, have you taken part in activities where you shared your views on issues relating to climate change? (E.g. this might have been a public meeting, a consultation, attending an event)
IF NO: Have you shared your views on other topics, for example about changes in your local area, how public spaces are used, or public transport?
IF YES TO EITHER:
What did this involve?
Why did you get involved?
How did you find this? What worked well/less well?
IF NO TO BOTH: Do you think you would have liked to have taken part in something like this?
5. Discussion 2: What is ‘good’ public engagement? 18.20 (15 mins)
Aim: to develop understanding of what public engagement is, some key approaches used, and explore expectations about what would characterise a successful engagement. These principles will then be applied to their ‘review’ of detailed examples in the next section.
Getting involved in these conversations and having your say about climate change in the ways we’ve been discussing can be described as “public engagement”. This slide summarises what we mean be that:
SHARE SLIDE WITH DEFINTION OF PUBLIC ENGAGEMENT & EXAMPLES
So when we talk about public engagement, we mean a range of ways that raise our awareness and understanding of an issue, enable us to participate in decision making, and encourage people to take action.
There are lots of different examples of public engagement. Later this evening we will look at a few of this in detail, but for now I’ve shown on the slide here some of the main types. You may or may not have heard of these, but they include:
Communication campaigns raise awareness about a topic, with information shared in range of ways such as through websites, social media, advertising, other media channels and public events.
Organised group discussions, where members of the public are invited to come along (either in a room, or online like we are tonight) to discuss their views about a particular issue or topic. There is usually a limit to the number of people that are asked to attend these discussions, and they are usually on a set date and time.
Public meetings, or drop in events, where the public can come along and have their say about topic. The difference between this and organised group discussions is that in a public meeting anyone that wants to can attend, whereas with organised groups there are usually some criteria used to decide how many and what different types of people can attend.
Open online consultations, where you can submit ideas or feedback on an issue, via a website
And then the final one, you may have heard some of these terms like Citizens Assemblies or Citizens Forums. These are like the organised group discussions, but are typically bigger, so 50 to 100 people at each meeting, and usually run over several days or weekends. But we’ll say more about those later.
Why do you think organisations would choose one type of public engagement over another?
PROBE: What sorts of considerations do you think they would have in mind when deciding what approach is best?
Now that we’ve seen what public engagement is and some of the ways it can be done, I’d like you each take a few minutes and think about the following question:
What would ‘good’ public engagement look like to you? (5 MINS)
IN-PERSON GROUPS: Could you please pair up with the person next to you and do this together? Write down your thoughts on post-it notes and then we can put them all on the flipchart. [Suggest which pairings to avoid confusion, include group of 3 if odd number]
ONLINE GROUPS: Note down your thoughts, and then I’ll ask everyone to share this, and I’ll write it all d own on my [slides/screen].
FOR ALL:
Try to think about public engagement about climate change issues specifically, as that is what we are most interested in.
There are no right or wrong answers here, we just want to hear any views at all
You could think about things like:
who organises the public engagement,
what information is shared with the public,
how this information is shared and with who?
whether members of the public get involved,
how those people are selected/invited,
what people are asked to do etc.
PROBE EACH PAIR ON REASONS FOR THEIR ANSWERS.
Would good public engagement be the same no matter what the organisers of the engagement are trying to achieve?
And final question before we take a quick 5 minute break, what would ‘bad’ public engagement look like then? Would it just be the opposite of the things you have listed under ‘good’, or would it be anything else?
BREAK 18.35 – 18.40 (5 mins)
Case Study examples – 18.40 (45 mins)
Aim: to test views on different types of public engagement on climate change in more detail, by examining specific examples identified in the literature review. As well as getting views on these specific examples, the aim is to get to some of the underlying views on what they consider important in terms of future public engagement.
So far we have been talking about how and why people get involved in decisions about climate change, and what ‘good’ public engagement would look like. I’d now like us to talk about that in a bit more detail, by looking at some examples of how this has been done in the past.
There are a few examples we are going to talk through, and we’ll show some information on screen to summarise what they involved. After each one, I’ll stop and ask for your views. Really what we are interested in here is how you feel about the way the public have been engaged in each example – you might think they are good examples, you might not, but any opinions are welcome.
SHOW THE FOLLOWING 4 METHOD EXAMPLES AS IDENTIFIED IN THE EVIDENCE REVIEW. HAVE POWERPOINT SLIDES SUMMARISING EACH ONE (INCLUDING IMAGES).
SPEND 10 MINUTES ON EACH CASE STUDY. ORDER OF THE EXAMPLES WILL BE ROTATED BETWEEN FOCUS GROUP, SO THAT EACH GROUP STARTS WITH A DIFFERENT ONE.
FACILITATOR NOTE – IF ASKED, THERE ARE NO SET PLANS FOR THE SCOTTISH GOVERNMENT TO IMPLEMENT THESE ACTIVITIES IN SCOTLAND, BUT SIMILAR ACTIVITIES HAVE TAKEN PLACE HERE. STRESS THAT THE AIM OF THESE EXAMPLES IS TO UNDERSTAND IF THERE ARE ANY ELEMENTS OF THEM THAT THEY PARTICULARLY LIKE OR DISLIKE, RATHER THAN TO DECIDE WHETHER THE SCOTTISH GOVERNMENT SHOULD PUT THESE SPECIFIC IDEAS IN PLACE.
Order to show examples in each group
Group 1 (online)
Group 2 (Perth)
Group 3 (Glasgow)
Group 4 (Online)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 1
Example 3
Example 4
Example 1
Example 2
Example 4
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
FOR EACH EXAMPLE, PROBE ON:
Immediate thoughts/reactions?
What are the positives about this example? And negatives? (REFERRING BACK TO THEIR IDEAS FOR WHAT ‘GOOD’ ENGAGMENT LOOKED LIKE)
SPECIFIC PROBES FOR EACH EXAMPLE:
Example 1: Make It Better campaign:
How did you feel about….
The link between climate change and health?
The way information was share with the public?
How easy or difficult it would be to find out about this?
That this was targeted at parents, caregivers and health professionals?
What is missing? How could it be better?
What would you do if you saw this campaign?
What if the Scottish Government or another public agency had a similar campaign – how would you feel about that?
Would it make a difference who was delivering the campaign?
Would you do anything differently if you saw a campaign this like from the Scottish Government? Why/why not
Example 2: The food carbon app:
How did you feel about….
The link between climate change and food?
The fact that this was an app?
How easy or difficult it would be to get involved in this?
How easy or difficult it would be use?
What is missing? How could it be better?
What would you do if you saw this app?
What if the Scottish Government or another public agency had an app like this – how would you feel about that?
Would it make a difference what organisation launched the app?
Would you do anything differently if you saw something like this from the Scottish Government? Why/why not
Example 3: Main’s climate coalition
How did you feel about….
The types of groups that were involved – labour unions, environmental groups and climate advocates?
The amount of time and input they gave i.e. meetings with each other, meetings with government, working up plans?
How easy or difficult it would be for members of the public to get involved in this?
What is missing? How could it be better?
What if this sort of activity was happening in your area – would you get involved? Why/why not?
What if the Scottish Government or another public agency was encouraging groups to get together and develop plans like this – who would you feel about that?
Would it make a difference what organisation led this sort of programme?
Would you do anything differently if you saw something like this being organised by the Scottish Government? Why/why not
Example 4: Measuring air quality
How did you feel about….
The way they recruited volunteers through an open advertisement?
The number of people involved?
What people were asked to do?
The fact that the volunteers were asked to contribute to the research by going out and collecting data?
How easy or difficult it would be to get involved in this?
What is missing? How could it be better?
What if the Scottish Government or another public agency was encouraging people to take part in an activity like this – who would you feel about that?
Would it make a different what organisation led the activity?
Would you do anything differently if you saw something like this being organised by the Scottish Government? Why/why not
Feedback and wrap up – 19.25 (5 mins)
We’re getting to the end of the discussion now, so I just have a few more questions
From the examples we discussed, what are the most positive things that stand out for you?
What would ideal future public engagement on climate change look like?
If you could tell the Scottish Government one thing about how best to engage with the public in future what would be it be?
Thanks very much everyone for sharing your thoughts on these examples of public engagement, it’s been really interesting and useful to hear.
Are there any final points anyone wants to add?
Any final questions?
EXPLAIN INCENTIVES AND NEXT STEPS. THANK AND CLOSE.
Appendix D – Stimulus for focus groups
The stimulus for the focus groups took the form of six Powerpoint slides. For accessibility reasons, the content of these slides has been formatted into Word. Therefore, please note that this information looks slightly different to how it was displayed in PowerPoint, although it is as close as possible.
D.1.Content of stimulus slide 1 of 6 – Background information
Public engagement
A range of approaches that help to raise the public’s awareness and understanding of an issue, enable us to participate in decision making, and encourage us to take action. For example…
D.2.Content of stimulus slide 2 of 6 – What is good public engagement to you?
What would ‘good’ public engagement look like to you?
Figure D.3.Content of stimulus slide 3 of 6 – Make It Better Case Study
Make It Better campaign
A campaign by the Ontario Public Health Association to address the health impacts of climate change.
It aimed to inform people about the health-related risks of climate change for children (Lyme disease, asthma, heat-related illness).
It provided tools and information to help parents, caregivers, health professionals and community members take actions that would help reduce the health risks of climate change.
Information was shared by the Public Health Association over social media (using #MakeItBetter), on a dedicated website, and through local public health professionals.
People were asked to:
Sign the #MakeItBetter pledge (meaning they supported the campaign were committed to taking action)
Keep themselves informed by learning more about how children’s health is impacted by climate change
Share what they had learned with other people
Discover ways to combat climate change and its impacts and take actions.
Figure D.4.Content of stimulus slide 4 of 6 – Food carbon app case study
Food carbon app
“Floop” is a free app which tracks the carbon footprint of our food
It was founded by three individuals who formed the company, based in the UK.
It aims to bring attention to our carbon footprint and encourage people to eat more sustainable food.
Users can download the app, log their daily meals and it calculates the carbon footprint of each meal. It also allows you to set targets for how much you want to reduce your carbon footprint by, and provides recipes and meal plans.
The app includes information about the research that has been used to develop the app.
Note that a number of other apps that calculate the carbon impact of food have been tested and/or launched elsewhere.
Figure D.5.Content of stimulus slide 5 of 6 – Maine’s climate coalition case study
Maine’s climate coalition
A partnership in Maine, USA, that worked together to help inform local policies in relation to offshore wind energy.
A number of labour unions, environmental groups and climate advocates came together and formed a partnership to push for the development of offshore windfarms in their area. Their view was that offshore wind could address climate change by creating clean energy and create jobs by building a new industry in the area.
They met and worked together several times to develop plans for how offshore wind energy should be put in place. As well as meeting with each other, they met with various community groups, including those that opposed windfarms and various government officials.
The plans they developed were shared with government and helped to inform a new bill that sets out how offshore wind should be put in place.
Figure D.6.Content of stimulus slide 6 of 6 – Measuring air quality case study
Measuring air quality
A team at a university in Buenos Aires, Argentina, set out to understand the differences in air quality across different parts of the city.
They ran workshops with 80 students where they built air quality sensors and learnt about the impact of air quality on health.
They then put out an open advertisement for volunteers and recruited 20 people. These volunteers collected data on changes to air quality in the city by carrying the air quality sensors on their bikes for 7 weeks.
Each volunteer regularly uploaded their data to an open platform. The data was then used to produce a city-level visualisation of air pollution (see image on right).
Since then they launched similar air quality pilots in other cities in Argentina in partnership with local authorities.
References
Sources cited in the report
[1] Centre for Public Impact, ‘Public engagement for net zero: A literature review’, Centre for Public Impact, Apr. 2021. [Online]. Available: https://www.centreforpublicimpact.org/europe/engaging-the-public-on-climate-change
[2] C. Cherry, C. Verfuerth, and C. Demski, ‘Discourses of climate inaction undermine public support for 1.5 °C lifestyles’, Glob. Environ. Change, vol. 87, p. 102875, Jul. 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.gloenvcha.2024.102875.
[3] A. McCarron, S. Semple, C. F. Braban, V. Swanson, C. Gillespie, and H. D. Price, ‘Public engagement with air quality data: Using health behaviour change theory to support exposure-minimising behaviours’, J. Expo. Sci. Environ. Epidemiol., vol. 33, no. 3, pp. 321–331, 2023, doi: 10.1038/s41370-022-00449-2.
[4] K. Mitev, L. Player, C. Verfuerth, S. Westlake, and L. Whitmarsh, ‘The implications of behavioural science for effective climate policy: Output 1: Literature review and background report’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), Bath, England, Sep. 2023.
[5] K. Winter, M. J. Hornsey, L. Pummerer, and K. Sassenberg, ‘Anticipating and defusing the role of conspiracy beliefs in shaping opposition to wind farms’, Nat. Energy, vol. 7, no. 12, pp. 1200–1207, 2022, doi: 10.1038/s41560-022-01164-w.
[6] E. Kwakye and Y. B. Agyeman, ‘Influence of climate change information on community-based livelihood adaptation around Lake Bosomtwe, Ghana’, Int. J. Clim. Change Impacts Responses, vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 21–34, 2022, doi: 10.18848/1835-7156/CGP/v14i02/21-34.
[7] F. Lange, R. Van Asbroeck, D. Van Baelen, and S. Dewitte, ‘For cash, the planet, or for both: Evaluating an informational intervention for energy consumption reduction’, Energy Policy, vol. 194, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.enpol.2024.114314.
[8] H. Malan et al., ‘Increasing the selection of low-carbon-footprint entrées through the addition of new menu items and a social marketing campaign in university dining’, J. Assoc. Consum. Res., vol. 7, no. 4, pp. 461–470, 2022, doi: 10.1086/720450.
[9] K. Schmidt, ‘Behavioral effects of guideline-provision on climate-friendly food choices – A psychological perspective’, J. Clean. Prod., vol. 277, 2020, doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2020.123284.
[10] G. Shreedhar, A. Sabherwal, and R. Maldonado, ‘Cli-fi videos can increase charitable donations: Experimental evidence from the United Kingdom’, Front. Psychol., vol. 14, 2023, doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2023.1176077.
[11] M. Andreotta, F. Boschetti, S. Farrell, C. Paris, I. Walker, and M. Hurlstone, ‘Evidence for three distinct climate change audience segments with varying belief-updating tendencies: Implications for climate change communication’, Clim. Change, vol. 174, no. 3–4, 2022, doi: 10.1007/s10584-022-03437-5.
[12] K. Altman, B. Yelton, D. E. Porter, R. H. Kelsey, and D. B. Friedman, ‘The role of understanding, trust, and access in public engagement with environmental activities and decision making: A qualitative study with water quality practitioners’, Environ. Manage., vol. 71, no. 6, pp. 1162–1175, 2023, doi: 10.1007/s00267-023-01803-2.
[13] H. Palm, H. Pfeffer, N. Raith, and N. Brandstetter, ‘An interdisciplinary approach for successful municipal energy transition communication’, J. Environ. Stud. Sci., Jun. 2024, doi: 10.1007/s13412-024-00960-y.
[14] C. Shaw and S. Wang, ‘After the lockdown? New lessons for building climate change engagement in the UK’, Climate Outreach and the Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), 2021.
[15] H. Chu and J. Z. Yang, ‘Risk or efficacy? How psychological distance influences climate change engagement’, Risk Anal., vol. 40, no. 4, pp. 758–770, 2020, doi: 10.1111/risa.13446.
[16] Y. Guo and Y. Hou, ‘COVID-19 pandemic as an opportunity or challenge: Applying psychological distance theory and the co-benefit frame to promote public support for climate change mitigation on social media’, Environ. Commun., vol. 18, no. 5, pp. 550–568, 2024, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2023.2205038.
[17] House of Lords, ‘In our hands: Behaviour change for climate and environmental goals’, Environment and Climate Change Committee, House of Lords, Oct. 2022.
[18] V. S. Limaye and B. Toff, ‘Evaluating responses to health-related messages about the financial costs of climate change’, J. Clim. Change Health, vol. 10, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.joclim.2023.100218.
[19] D. Powell and E. James, ‘How can politicians avoid a net-zero backlash? The role of public engagement: A briefing for policy makers and communicators. CAST Briefing 20’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), Bath, England, Nov. 2023.
[20] L. A. Selvey, M. Carpenter, M. Lazarou, and K. Cullerton, ‘Communicating about energy policy in a resource-rich jurisdiction during the climate crisis: Lessons from the people of Brisbane, Queensland, Australia’, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public. Health, vol. 19, no. 8, 2022, doi: 10.3390/ijerph19084635.
[21] L. T. H. Sen, J. Bond, N. T. Dung, H. G. Hung, N. T. H. Mai, and H. T. A. Phuong, ‘Farmers’ barriers to the access and use of climate information in the mountainous regions of Thừa Thiên Huế province, Vietnam’, Clim. Serv., vol. 24, 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.cliser.2021.100267.
[22] Y. L. Waters, K. A. Wilson, and A. J. Dean, ‘The role of iconic places, collective efficacy, and negative emotions in climate change communication’, Environ. Sci. Policy, vol. 151, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.envsci.2023.103635.
[23] Centre for Public Impact, ‘Public engagement on climate change: A case study compendium’, Centre for Public Impact, Apr. 2021. [Online]. Available: https://www.centreforpublicimpact.org/europe/engaging-the-public-on-climate-change
[24] A. Corner, C. Demski, K. Steentjes, and N. Pidgeon, ‘Engaging the public on climate risks and adaptation: A briefing for UK communicators’, Climate Outreach, Oxford, 2020.
[25] C. Bretter, K. L. Unsworth, S. V. Russell, T. E. Quested, G. Kaptan, and A. Doriza, ‘Food waste interventions: Experimental evidence of the effectiveness of environmental messages’, J. Clean. Prod., vol. 414, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2023.137596.
[26] C. Demski, ‘Net zero public engagement and participation: A research note’, Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, Mar. 2021.
[27] M. Lähdesmäki and A. Matilainen, ‘Female forest owners as a market segment? Results from a marketing experiment in the context of a small forest service enterprise’, Balt. For., vol. 27, no. 2, 2021, doi: 10.46490/BF606.
[28] C. Verfuerth, C. Demski, S. Capstick, L. Whitmarsh, and W. Poortinga, ‘A people-centred approach is needed to meet net zero goals’, J. Br. Acad., vol. 11, no. S4, pp. 97–124, 2023, doi: 10.5871/jba/011s4.097.
[29] R. J. Romsdahl, ‘Deliberative framing: Opening up discussions for local-level public engagement on climate change’, Clim. Change, vol. 162, no. 2, pp. 145–163, 2020, doi: 10.1007/s10584-020-02754-x.
[30] B. Zanin, C. Verfuerth, C. Demski, C. Cherry, L. Whitmarsh, and D. Powell, ‘Five principles for good public engagement: How to get people involved in the climate conversation. CAST Briefing 29’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), Bath, England, Jul. 2024.
[31] C. Mullins-Jaime and J. K. Wachter, ‘Motivating personal climate action through a safety and health risk management framework’, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public. Health, vol. 20, no. 1, 2023, doi: 10.3390/ijerph20010007.
[32] E. Peters et al., ‘Evidence-based recommendations for communicating the impacts of climate change on health’, Transl. Behav. Med., vol. 12, no. 4, pp. 543–553, Apr. 2022, doi: 10.1093/tbm/ibac029.
[33] M. Sanderson, H. Doyle, and P. Walsh, ‘Developing and implementing a targeted health-focused climate communications campaign in Ontario—#MakeItBetter’, Can. J. Public Health., vol. 111, no. 6, pp. 869–875, 2020, doi: 10.17269/s41997-020-00352-z.
[34] E. Wolstenholme, W. Poortinga, and L. Whitmarsh, ‘Two birds, one stone: The effectiveness of health and environmental messages to reduce meat consumption and encourage pro-environmental behavioral spillover’, Front. Psychol., vol. 11, 2020, doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2020.577111.
[35] S. Akehurst and L. Murphy, ‘A rising tide: Strengthening public permission for climate action’, Institute for Public Policy Research (IPPR), 2022.
[36] C. F. Nisa, J. J. Bélanger, and B. M. Scumpe, ‘Assessing the effectiveness of food waste messaging’, Environ. Sci. Policy, vol. 132, pp. 224–236, 2022, doi: 10.1016/j.envsci.2022.02.020.
[37] L. S. Svenningsen and B. J. Thorsen, ‘The effect of gain-loss framing on climate policy preferences’, Ecol. Econ., vol. 185, 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.ecolecon.2021.107009.
[38] S. Timmons, Y. Andersson, and P. Lunn, ‘Framing climate change as a generational issue: Experimental effects on youth worry, motivation and belief in collective action’, Economic and Social Research Institute, ESRI Working Paper No. 731, 2022.
[39] A. Prosser, D. Thorman, K. Mitev, L. Whitmarsh, and A. Sawas, ‘Developing an evidence-based toolkit for car reduction’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST) and Climate Outreach, 2022.
[40] D. Barrios-O’Neill, ‘Focus and social contagion of environmental organization advocacy on Twitter’, Conserv. Biol., vol. 35, no. 1, pp. 307–315, 2021, doi: 10.1111/cobi.13564.
[41] L. Cameron, R. Rocque, K. Penner, and I. Mauro, ‘Evidence-based communication on climate change and health: Testing videos, text, and maps on climate change and Lyme disease in Manitoba, Canada’, PLoS ONE, vol. 16, no. 6 June, 2021, doi: 10.1371/journal.pone.0252952.
[42] K. L. Akerlof, C. Boules, E. Ban Rohring, B. Rohring, and S. Kappalman, ‘Governmental communication of climate change risk and efficacy: Moving audiences toward “danger control”’, Environ. Manage., vol. 65, no. 5, pp. 678–688, 2020, doi: 10.1007/s00267-020-01283-8.
[43] T. Bolsen, R. Palm, and R. E. Luke, ‘Public response to solar geoengineering: How media frames about stratospheric aerosol injection affect opinions’, Clim. Change, vol. 176, no. 8, 2023, doi: 10.1007/s10584-023-03575-4.
[44] A. Gustafson, M. T. Ballew, M. H. Goldberg, M. J. Cutler, S. A. Rosenthal, and A. Leiserowitz, ‘Personal stories can shift climate change beliefs and risk perceptions: The mediating role of emotion’, Commun. Rep., vol. 33, no. 3, pp. 121–135, Sep. 2020, doi: 10.1080/08934215.2020.1799049.
[45] C. C. Anderson et al., ‘Public acceptance of nature-based solutions for natural hazard risk reduction: Survey findings from three study sites in Europe’, Front. Environ. Sci., vol. 9, 2021, doi: 10.3389/fenvs.2021.678938.
[46] O. I. Asensio, C. Z. Apablaza, M. C. Lawson, and S. E. Walsh, ‘A field experiment on workplace norms and electric vehicle charging etiquette’, J. Ind. Ecol., vol. 26, no. 1, pp. 183–196, 2022, doi: 10.1111/jiec.13116.
[47] M. N. Bechtoldt, A. Götmann, U. Moslener, and W. P. Pauw, ‘Addressing the climate change adaptation puzzle: A psychological science perspective’, Clim. Policy, vol. 21, no. 2, pp. 186–202, 2021, doi: 10.1080/14693062.2020.1807897.
[48] G. Caso, A. Annunziata, and R. Vecchio, ‘Let us go with the flow − Impact of a dynamic social norm nudge on parents’ school menu selection’, Food Qual. Prefer., vol. 121, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.foodqual.2024.105274.
[49] S. J. Goerg, A. Pondorfer, and V. Stöhr, ‘Regional variation in social norm nudges’, Sci. Rep., vol. 14, no. 1, 2024, doi: 10.1038/s41598-024-65765-z.
[50] C. R. Schneider and S. van der Linden, ‘Social norms as a powerful lever for motivating pro-climate actions’, One Earth, vol. 6, no. 4, pp. 346–351, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.oneear.2023.03.014.
[51] B. León, M. Bourk, W. Finkler, M. Boykoff, and L. S. Davis, ‘Strategies for climate change communication through social media: Objectives, approach, and interaction’, Media Int. Aust., vol. 188, no. 1, pp. 112–127, Aug. 2023, doi: 10.1177/1329878X211038004.
[52] Z. Shah, L. Wei, and U. Ghani, ‘The use of social networking sites and pro-environmental behaviors: A mediation and moderation model’, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public. Health, vol. 18, no. 4, pp. 1–21, 2021, doi: 10.3390/ijerph18041805.
[53] A. Randall, D. Basu Ray, G. Kaur, and D. Zayad, ‘Something to talk about – success stories of public engagement to tackle climate change’, Climate Outreach. Accessed: Sep. 19, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://climateoutreach.org/public-engagement-case-studies/
[54] S. Allan, ‘What role for government? A practical guide to the types, roles and spaces of public engagement on climate’, Involve, Sep. 2023.
[55] National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine, ‘Public engagement to build a strong social contract for deep decarbonization’, in Accelerating decarbonization in the United States: Technology, policy, and societal dimensions, in Accelerating Decarbonization in the United States: Technology, Policy, and Societal Dimensions. , 2024, p. 806. doi: 10.17226/25931.
[56] A. Rakhimov and E. Thulin, ‘Knowing behavior matters doesn’t hurt: The effect of individual climate behavior messaging on green policy support’, Oxf. Open Clim. Change, vol. 2, no. 1, 2022, doi: 10.1093/oxfclm/kgac007.
[57] C. Wamsler et al., ‘Meaning-making in a context of climate change: Supporting agency and political engagement’, Clim. Policy, vol. 23, no. 7, pp. 829–844, Aug. 2023, doi: 10.1080/14693062.2022.2121254.
[58] Climate Outreach, ‘Beyond “trusted messengers”: New insights on trust & influence in climate communications’, Climate Outreach, Oxford, 2024.
[59] N. McLoughlin, C. Howarth, and G. Shreedhar, ‘Changing behavioral responses to heat risk in a warming world: How can communication approaches be improved?’, Wiley Interdiscip. Rev. Clim. Change, vol. 14, no. 2, 2023, doi: 10.1002/wcc.819.
[60] M. Bapna et al., ‘Decision making in a changing climate: Adaptation challenges and choices’, United Nations Environment Programme, 2020.
[61] L. Fritz, C. M. Baum, S. Low, and B. K. Sovacool, ‘Public engagement for inclusive and sustainable governance of climate interventions’, Nat. Commun., vol. 15, no. 1, p. 4168, May 2024, doi: 10.1038/s41467-024-48510-y.
[62] F. S. Khatibi, A. Dedekorkut-Howes, M. Howes, and E. Torabi, ‘Can public awareness, knowledge and engagement improve climate change adaptation policies?’, Discov. Sustain., vol. 2, no. 1, 2021, doi: 10.1007/s43621-021-00024-z.
[63] C. Ledwell, D. Basu Ray, N. Hameed, and A. Sawas, ‘Public engagement on climate change adaptation: A briefing for developing country National Adaptation Plan teams’, Climate Outreach and the International Institute for Sustainable Development, 2023.
[64] O. Marquet, L. Mojica, M.-B. Fernández-Núñez, and M. Maciejewska, ‘Pathways to 15-minute city adoption: Can our understanding of climate policies’ acceptability explain the backlash towards x-minute city programs?’, Cities, vol. 148, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.cities.2024.104878.
[65] M. Murunga, C. Macleod, and G. Pecl, ‘Assumptions and contradictions shape public engagement on climate change’, Nat. Clim. Change, vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 126–133, Feb. 2024, doi: 10.1038/s41558-023-01904-0.
[66] P. Parmiter and R. Bell, ‘Public perception of CCS: A review of public engagement for CCS projects’, EU CCUS Projects Network, 2020.
[67] T. Sasse, S. Allan, and J. Rutter, ‘Public engagement and net zero’, Institute for Government, Sep. 2021.
[68] I. Soutar et al., ‘Constructing practices of engagement with users and communities: Comparing emergent state-led smart local energy systems’, Energy Policy, vol. 171, 2022, doi: 10.1016/j.enpol.2022.113279.
[69] C. Verfuerth et al., ‘Catalysts of change: People at the heart of climate transformations: Key messages from five years of social science research on climate change’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), London, 2024.
[70] S. Wang, A. Corner, and J. Nicholls, ‘Britain Talks Climate: A toolkit for engaging the British public on climate change’, Climate Outreach, Oxford, 2020.
[71] J. L. Thürmer, J. Stadler, and S. M. McCrea, ‘Intergroup sensitivity and promoting sustainable consumption: Meat eaters reject vegans’ call for a plant-based diet’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 14, no. 3, 2022, doi: 10.3390/su14031741.
[72] V. Creative, ‘The air we breathe: How imagery of air pollution can communicate the health impacts of climate change’, Climate Outreach. Accessed: Sep. 19, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://climateoutreach.org/reports/the-air-we-breathe/
[73] H. Komatsu, H. Kubota, K. Asano, and Y. Nagai, ‘Effect of information provision by familial nudging on attitudes toward offshore wind power’, PLoS ONE, vol. 19, no. 1 January, 2024, doi: 10.1371/journal.pone.0297199.
[74] L. Li, X. Yuan, and J. Li, ‘Understanding visual feedback mechanism from three-dimensional of information, time and display: A meta-analysis of feedback research for household electricity conservation’, Energy Build., vol. 316, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.enbuild.2024.114297.
[75] E. Margariti, V. Vlachokyriakos, A. C. Durrant, and D. Kirk, ‘Evaluating ActuAir: Building occupants’ experiences of a shape-changing air quality display’, presented at the Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems – Proceedings, 2024. doi: 10.1145/3613904.3642396.
[76] T. Metze, ‘Visualization in environmental policy and planning: A systematic review and research agenda’, J. Environ. Policy Plan., vol. 22, no. 5, pp. 745–760, Sep. 2020, doi: 10.1080/1523908X.2020.1798751.
[77] A. Restrepo-Mieth, J. Perry, J. Garnick, and M. Weisberg, ‘Community-based participatory climate action’, Glob. Sustain., vol. 6, 2023, doi: 10.1017/sus.2023.12.
[78] A. Mah, C. Aragón, and E. Markowitz, ‘Visualizing hope: Investigating the effect of public art on risk perception and awareness of climate adaptation’, Weather Clim. Soc., vol. 16, no. 1, pp. 185–204, 2024, doi: 10.1175/WCAS-D-23-0081.1.
[79] T. Ye and A. S. Mattila, ‘The impact of environmental messages on consumer responses to plant-based meat: Does language style matter?’, Int. J. Hosp. Manag., vol. 107, 2022, doi: 10.1016/j.ijhm.2022.103298.
[80] B. León, S. Negredo, and M. C. Erviti, ‘Social engagement with climate change: Principles for effective visual representation on social media’, Clim. Policy, vol. 22, no. 8, pp. 976–992, 2022, doi: 10.1080/14693062.2022.2077292.
[81] M. Kaltenbacher and S. Drews, ‘An inconvenient joke? A review of humor in climate change communication’, Environ. Commun., vol. 14, no. 6, pp. 717–729, Aug. 2020, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2020.1756888.
[82] B. Zhang and J. Pinto, ‘Changing the world one meme at a time: The effects of climate change memes on civic engagement intentions’, Environ. Commun., vol. 15, no. 6, pp. 749–764, Aug. 2021, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2021.1894197.
[83] A. Varni, C. L. Thai, and S. Jamaleddine, ‘Using an Instagram campaign to influence knowledge, subjective norms, perceived behavioral control, and behavioral intentions for sustainable behaviors’, Front. Psychol., vol. 15, 2024, doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2024.1377211.
[84] I. Willig, M. Blach-Ørsten, and R. Burkal, ‘What is “good” climate journalism? Public perceptions of climate journalism in Denmark’, Journal. Pract., vol. 16, no. 2–3, pp. 520–539, Mar. 2022, doi: 10.1080/17512786.2021.2016069.
[85] Neighbours United and MECCE, ‘Changing the climate and energy conversation’, Neighbours United and MECCE, 2023.
[86] S. I. N. W. Abdullah, F. K. Tat, T. Subramaniam, and A. A. M. Mustafa, ‘Going green: The impact of green initiative events on environmental practice intentions’, J. Sustain. Sci. Manag., vol. 18, no. 8, pp. 1–23, 2023, doi: 10.46754/jssm.2023.08.001.
[87] A.-L. Balogun et al., ‘Assessing the potentials of digitalization as a tool for climate change adaptation and sustainable development in urban centres’, Sustain. Cities Soc., vol. 53, p. 101888, Feb. 2020, doi: 10.1016/j.scs.2019.101888.
[88] R. Briandana and M. S. M. Saleh, ‘Implementing environmental communication strategy towards climate change through social media in Indonesia’, Online J. Commun. Media Technol., vol. 12, no. 4, 2022, doi: 10.30935/ojcmt/12467.
[89] C40 Cities, ‘Youth engagement playbook for cities: How to tackle the climate crisis through collaboration with youth’, C40 Cities, 2021.
[90] M. Colavito, B. Satink Wolfson, A. E. Thode, C. Haffey, and C. Kimball, ‘Integrating art and science to communicate the social and ecological complexities of wildfire and climate change in Arizona, USA’, Fire Ecol., vol. 16, no. 1, 2020, doi: 10.1186/s42408-020-00078-w.
[91] D. Giacomini, L. Rocca, P. Zola, and M. Mazzoleni, ‘Local Governments’ environmental disclosure via social networks: Organizational legitimacy and stakeholders’ interactions’, J. Clean. Prod., vol. 317, 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.jclepro.2021.128290.
[92] J. Kong, W. He, Y. Zheng, and X. Li, ‘Awareness of spontaneous urban vegetation: Significance of social media-based public psychogeography in promoting community climate-resilient construction: A technical note’, Atmosphere, vol. 14, no. 11, 2023, doi: 10.3390/atmos14111691.
[93] Y. Meng, D. Chung, and A. Zhang, ‘The effect of social media environmental information exposure on the intention to participate in pro-environmental behavior’, PLoS ONE, vol. 18, no. 11 November, 2023, doi: 10.1371/journal.pone.0294577.
[94] Q. Tong, Q. Zhang, and J. Zhang, ‘More is not always better: The role of Social Media Information in shaping individual low-carbon behavioral intention’, Int. J. Sustain. Dev. World Ecol., vol. 31, no. 6, pp. 639–652, 2024, doi: 10.1080/13504509.2024.2315553.
[95] N. S. Corser, ‘Don’t Look Up is a wonderful talking point, but will it unify people into acting on climate change?’, Climate Outreach. Accessed: Oct. 17, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://climateoutreach.org/dont-look-up/
[96] S. Sood, A. H. Riley, and L. Birkenstock, ‘Entertainment-education and climate change: Program examples, evidence, and best practices from around the World’, in Storytelling to accelerate climate solutions, Cham: Springer International Publishing, 2024, pp. 17–46.
[97] G. J. Walker, ‘Here be science show dragons: Ice, icons and metaphoric approaches to climate change communication’, in Communicating Ice through Popular Art and Aesthetics, A. Hemkendreis and A.-S. Jürgens, Eds., Cham: Springer International Publishing, 2024, pp. 63–83. doi: 10.1007/978-3-031-39787-5_4.
[98] B. Suldovsky and D. Taylor-Rodríguez, ‘Epistemic engagement: Examining personal epistemology and engagement preferences with climate change in Oregon’, Clim. Change, vol. 166, no. 3, p. 48, Jun. 2021, doi: 10.1007/s10584-021-03138-5.
[99] A. Leiserowitz, C. Roser-Renouf, J. Marlon, and E. Maibach, ‘Global warming’s Six Americas: A review and recommendations for climate change communication’, Curr. Opin. Behav. Sci., vol. 42, pp. 97–103, Dec. 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.cobeha.2021.04.007.
[100] D. C. Null, K. F. Hurst, and L. A. Duram, ‘Beyond the classroom: Influence of a sustainability intervention on university students’ environmental knowledge and behaviors’, J. Environ. Stud. Sci., vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 224–235, 2024, doi: 10.1007/s13412-023-00882-1.
[101] C. D. Trott, ‘Children’s constructive climate change engagement: Empowering awareness, agency, and action’, Environ. Educ. Res., vol. 26, no. 4, pp. 532–554, Apr. 2020, doi: 10.1080/13504622.2019.1675594.
[102] E. Duda, ‘Case study-based research on understanding app user engagement to develop environmental literacy of urban residents’, presented at the 31st International Conference on Computers in Education, ICCE 2023 – Proceedings, 2023, pp. 624–626. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85181539543&partnerID=40&md5=a8fa4da1e105fe13044c70c66a6402bd
[103] Y. Li et al., ‘Effectiveness evaluation of a primary school-based intervention against heatwaves in China’, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public. Health, vol. 19, no. 5, 2022, doi: 10.3390/ijerph19052532.
[104] A. Deep, A. Pathak, and N. Chatterjee, ‘An evaluation of the online course on climate change and emotion’, presented at the 30th International Conference on Computers in Education Conference, ICCE 2022 – Proceedings, 2022, pp. 387–391. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85151062737&partnerID=40&md5=2399a602326be562efaea6b59992b88d
[105] M. Stevens et al., ‘Drawing a line from CO2 emissions to health—evaluation of medical students’ knowledge and attitudes towards climate change and health following a novel serious game: A mixed-methods study’, BMC Med. Educ., vol. 24, no. 1, 2024, doi: 10.1186/s12909-024-05619-4.
[106] V. Deisenrieder, S. Kubisch, L. Keller, and J. Stötter, ‘Bridging the action gap by democratizing climate change education – The case of k.i.d.Z.21 in the context of fridays for future’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 12, no. 5, 2020, doi: 10.3390/su12051748.
[107] C. Slimings, E. Sisson, C. Larson, D. Bowles, and R. Hussain, ‘Adaptive doctors in Australia: Preparing tomorrow’s doctors for practice in a world destabilised by declining planetary health’, Environ. Educ. Res., vol. 28, no. 5, pp. 786–801, 2022, doi: 10.1080/13504622.2021.2025343.
[108] F. Stevenson and A. Kwok, ‘Mainstreaming zero carbon: Lessons for built-environment education and training’, Build. Cities, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 687–696, 2020, doi: 10.5334/bc.84.
[109] B. Tremblay and J. Hawkins, ‘Climate and health: Impact of climate education on nursing student knowledge, confidence, and intent to act’, Nurse Educ., vol. 49, no. 2, pp. 85–90, 2024, doi: 10.1097/NNE.0000000000001524.
[110] L. Jans, N. Koudenburg, and L. Grosse, ‘Cooking a pro-veg*n social identity: The influence of vegan cooking workshops on children’s pro-veg*n social identities, attitudes, and dietary intentions’, Environ. Educ. Res., vol. 29, no. 9, pp. 1361–1376, 2023, doi: 10.1080/13504622.2023.2182750.
[111] N. Rosenau, U. Neumann, S. Hamblett, and T. Ellrott, ‘University students as change agents for health and sustainability: A pilot study on the effects of a teaching kitchen-based planetary health diet curriculum’, Nutrients, vol. 16, no. 4, 2024, doi: 10.3390/nu16040521.
[112] Z. Ahmed et al., ‘Fostering innovation and sustainable thinking in surgery: An evaluation of a surgical hackathon’, Ann. R. Coll. Surg. Engl., vol. 106, no. 6, pp. 504–508, 2024, doi: 10.1308/rcsann.2024.0010.
[113] A. Kuthe, A. Körfgen, J. Stötter, and L. Keller, ‘Strengthening their climate change literacy: A case study addressing the weaknesses in young people’s climate change awareness’, Appl. Environ. Educ. Commun., vol. 19, no. 4, pp. 375–388, Oct. 2020, doi: 10.1080/1533015X.2019.1597661.
[114] V. Dawson and K. Carson, ‘Introducing argumentation about climate change socioscientific issues in a disadvantaged school’, Res. Sci. Educ., vol. 50, no. 3, pp. 863–883, 2020, doi: 10.1007/s11165-018-9715-x.
[115] L. M. Zummo and S. J. Dozier, ‘Using epistemic instructional activities to support secondary science teachers’ social construction of knowledge of anthropogenic climate change during a professional learning experience’, J. Geosci. Educ., vol. 70, no. 4, pp. 530–545, 2022, doi: 10.1080/10899995.2021.1986785.
[116] J. M. P. Sanchez, M. T. Picardal, S. R. Fernandez, and R. R. A. Caturza, ‘Socio-scientific issues in focus: A meta-analytical review of strategies and outcomes in climate change science education’, Sci. Educ. Int., vol. 35, no. 2, pp. 119–132, 2024, doi: 10.33828/sei.v35.i2.6.
[117] D. Campbell and S. Lester, ‘Building resilience in Jamaica’s farming communities: Insights from a climate-smart intervention’, Case Stud. Environ., vol. 7, no. 1, pp. 273–286, 2023, doi: 10.1525/cse.2023.1233811.
[118] C. Gichuki, M. Osewe, and S. W. Ndiritu, ‘Dissemination of climate smart agricultural knowledge through farmer field schools (FFS): Analyzing the application CAS knowledge by smallholder farmers’, Int. J. Dev. Issues, vol. 22, no. 3, pp. 399–417, 2023, doi: 10.1108/IJDI-04-2023-0109.
[119] L. Silici, A. Rowe, N. Suppiramaniam, and J. W. Knox, ‘Building adaptive capacity of smallholder agriculture to climate change: Evidence synthesis on learning outcomes’, Environ. Res. Commun., vol. 3, no. 12, 2021, doi: 10.1088/2515-7620/AC44DF.
[120] H. van den Berg et al., ‘Monitoring, evaluation and learning (MEL) in farmer field schools on food security and adaptation to climate change: pilot testing of a framework in Malawi’, Food Secur., vol. 15, no. 6, pp. 1611–1627, 2023, doi: 10.1007/s12571-023-01386-0.
[121] B. Irawan, ‘Mangrove planting initiative within a collaborative project-based biology course to improve students’ climate literacy’, presented at the IOP Conference Series: Earth and Environmental Science, 2023. doi: 10.1088/1755-1315/1148/1/012044.
[122] B. Kligler, G. Pinto Zipp, C. Rocchetti, M. Secic, and E. S. Ihde, ‘The impact of integrating environmental health into medical school curricula: A survey-based study’, BMC Med. Educ., vol. 21, no. 1, 2021, doi: 10.1186/s12909-020-02458-x.
[123] J. Keller et al., ‘Evaluating the Public Climate School, a multi-component school-based program to promote climate awareness and action in students: A cluster-controlled pilot study’, J. Clim. Change Health, vol. 15, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.joclim.2023.100286.
[124] University of Education, Winneba and MECCE, ‘Dry season gardening as climate action by rural women: A case study of Kuliyaa Community in Northern Ghana’, University of Education, Winneba and MECCE, 2023.
[125] K. J. Wilby, E. K. Black, A. Benetoli, and B. Paravattil, ‘Students’ conception of local responses to global problems for a more peaceful and sustainable world: A collaborative education project between Brazil, Canada, Qatar, and New Zealand’, JACCP J. Am. Coll. Clin. Pharm., vol. 5, no. 6, pp. 605–612, 2022, doi: 10.1002/jac5.1608.
[126] A. Kluczkovski et al., ‘Aquaponics in schools: Hands-on learning about healthy eating and a healthy planet’, Nutr. Bull., vol. 49, no. 3, pp. 327–344, 2024, doi: 10.1111/nbu.12689.
[127] P. M. Kurup, R. Levinson, and X. Li, ‘Informed-decision regarding global warming and climate change among high school students in the United Kingdom’, Can. J. Sci. Math. Technol. Educ., vol. 21, no. 1, pp. 166–185, 2021, doi: 10.1007/s42330-020-00123-5.
[128] B. Borde, P. Lena, and L. Lescarmontier, ‘Education as a strategy for climate change mitigation and adaptation’, in Handbook of Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation, Cham: Springer International Publishing, 2022, pp. 3089–3113.
[129] Centre for Environment Education (CCE) and MECCE, ‘Blue flag beaches as place-based climate and sustainability education sites in India’, Centre for Environment Education (CCE) and MECCE, 2023.
[130] D. Nusche, M. F. Rabella, and S. Lauterbach, ‘Rethinking education in the context of climate change: Leverage points for transformative change’, OECD, OECD Education Working Papers 307, Feb. 2024. doi: 10.1787/f14c8a81-en.
[131] L. Rodrigues et al., ‘User engagement in community energy schemes: A case study at the Trent Basin in Nottingham, UK’, Sustain. Cities Soc., vol. 61, 2020, doi: 10.1016/j.scs.2020.102187.
[132] A. Navarrete-Welton et al., ‘A grassroots approach for greener education: An example of a medical student-driven planetary health curriculum’, Front. Public Health, vol. 10, 2022, doi: 10.3389/fpubh.2022.1013880.
[133] D. L. Coppock et al., ‘Non-formal education promotes innovation and climate change preparedness among isolated Nepalese farmers’, Clim. Dev., vol. 14, no. 4, pp. 297–310, 2022, doi: 10.1080/17565529.2021.1921685.
[134] U. Sharma, B. Brahmbhatt, and H. N. Panchal, ‘Do community-based institutions spur climate adaptation in urban informal settlements in India?’, in Climate Change and Community Resilience: Insights from South Asia, 2021, pp. 339–356. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85167533916&doi=10.1007%2f978-981-16-0680-9_22&partnerID=40&md5=e156db7fb77e52ded0b0b46b981ed21a
[135] C. Torres and J. Dixon, ‘Pathways to climate health: Active learning and effective communication to optimize climate change action an evaluation of the climate change and renal health awareness and education toolkit for healthcare providers: Reducing climate-health risks in primary care’, J. Clim. Change Health, vol. 9, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.joclim.2022.100198.
[136] K. Hampshire, N. Islam, B. Kissel, H. Chase, and K. Gundling, ‘The Planetary Health Report Card: A student-led initiative to inspire planetary health in medical schools’, Lancet Planet. Health, vol. 6, no. 5, pp. e449–e454, 2022, doi: 10.1016/S2542-5196(22)00045-6.
[137] L. Müller, M. Kühl, and S. J. Kühl, ‘Climate change and health: Changes in student environmental knowledge and awareness due to the implementation of a mandatory elective at the Medical Faculty of Ulm?’, GMS J. Med. Educ., vol. 40, no. 3, 2023, doi: 10.3205/zma001614.
[138] A. Okada and P. Gray, ‘A climate change and sustainability education movement: Networks, open schooling, and the “CARE-KNOW-DO” Framework’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 15, no. 3, 2023, doi: 10.3390/su15032356.
[139] V. A. Whitener, B. Cook, I. Spielbauer, P. K. Nguyen, and J. A. Jay, ‘Impact of a college course on the sustainability of student diets in terms of the planetary boundaries for climate change and land, water, nitrogen and phosphorus use’, Front. Sustain. Food Syst., vol. 5, 2021, doi: 10.3389/fsufs.2021.677002.
[140] O. A. Blanchard, L. M. Greenwald, and P. E. Sheffield, ‘The climate change conversation: Understanding nationwide medical education efforts’, Yale J. Biol. Med., vol. 96, no. 2, pp. 171–184, 2023, doi: 10.59249/PYIW9718.
[141] D. Greene, O. Yuheng Zhu, and S. Dolnicar, ‘Vegan burger, no thanks! Juicy American burger, yes please! The effect of restaurant meal names on affective appeal’, Food Qual. Prefer., vol. 113, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.foodqual.2023.105042.
[142] A. Boeri, D. Longo, S. Orlandi, R. Roversi, and G. Turci, ‘Temporary transformations to access and experience sustainable city public spaces’, WIT Trans. Ecol. Environ., vol. 249, pp. 43–55, 2020, doi: 10.2495/SC200051.
[143] L. Fogg-Rogers, A. M. Sardo, E. Csobod, C. Boushel, S. Laggan, and E. Hayes, ‘Citizen-led emissions reduction: Enhancing enjoyment and understanding for diverse citizen engagement with air pollution and climate change decision making’, Environ. Sci. Policy, vol. 154, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.envsci.2024.103692.
[144] J. Knook, V. Eory, M. Brander, and D. Moran, ‘The evaluation of a participatory extension programme focused on climate friendly farming’, J. Rural Stud., vol. 76, pp. 40–48, 2020, doi: 10.1016/j.jrurstud.2020.03.010.
[145] M. Ambani, G. A. Gbetibouo, and F. Percy, ‘Multi-Stakeholder Dialogue to co-Design Anticipatory Adaptation: Lessons from Participatory Scenario Planning in Africa’, in Handbook of Climate Change Management: Research, Leadership, Transformation, vol. 6, 2021, pp. 4819–4843. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85161926175&doi=10.1007%2f978-3-030-57281-5_111&partnerID=40&md5=f7b18e4f35873e8cf9d97bc5953b3db1
[146] L. Donkers, ‘Revitalising embodied community knowledges as leverage for climate change engagement’, Clim. Change, vol. 171, no. 1, p. 2, 2022, doi: 10.1007/s10584-022-03327-w.
[147] R. Murti, S.-L. Mathez-Stiefel, and S. Rist, ‘A Methodological Orientation for Social Learning Based Adaptation Planning: Lessons from Pilot Interventions in Rural Communities of Burkina Faso, Chile and Senegal’, Syst. Pract. Action Res., vol. 33, no. 4, pp. 409–434, 2020, doi: 10.1007/s11213-019-09495-8.
[148] D. Fraisl et al., ‘Citizen science in environmental and ecological sciences’, Nat. Rev. Methods Primer, vol. 2, no. 1, pp. 1–20, Aug. 2022, doi: 10.1038/s43586-022-00144-4.
[149] K. Peach, A. Berditchevskaia, G. Mulgan, G. Lucarelli, and M. Ebelshaeuser, ‘Collective intelligence for sustainable development: Getting smarter together’, Nesta’s Centre for Collective Intelligence Design, 2021.
[150] Involve and KNOCA, ‘Innovations in subnational climate mini publics in the UK’, Involve and KNOCA, 2023.
[151] H. Solman, M. Smits, B. van Vliet, and S. Bush, ‘Co-production in the wind energy sector: A systematic literature review of public engagement beyond invited stakeholder participation’, Energy Res. Soc. Sci., vol. 72, p. 101876, Feb. 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.erss.2020.101876.
[152] G. Mullally et al., ‘A Roadmap for Local Deliberative Engagements on Transitions to Net Zero Carbon and Climate Resilience’, Environmental Protection Agency, 2022.
[153] OECD, Innovative Citizen Participation and New Democratic Institutions: Catching the Deliberative Wave. Paris: OECD Publishing, 2020. [Online]. Available: https://www.oecd-ilibrary.org/governance/innovative-citizen-participation-and-new-democratic-institutions_339306da-en
[154] R. Shunglu et al., ‘Barriers in Participative Water Governance: A Critical Analysis of Community Development Approaches’, Water Switz., vol. 14, no. 5, 2022, doi: 10.3390/w14050762.
[155] Nesta, ‘Engaging local residents in conversations about pathways to net zero’, nesta. Accessed: Sep. 19, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://www.nesta.org.uk/project-updates/engaging-local-residents-in-conversations-about-pathways-to-net-zero/
[156] L. Liu, T. Bouman, G. Perlaviciute, and L. Steg, ‘The more public influence, the better? The effects of full versus shared influence on public acceptability of energy projects in the Netherlands and China’, Energy Res. Soc. Sci., vol. 81, p. 102286, 2021, doi: 10.1016/j.erss.2021.102286.
[157] A. Boeri, D. Longo, S. Orlandi, R. Roversi, and G. Turci, ‘COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT AND GREENING STRATEGIES AS ENABLING PRACTICES FOR INCLUSIVE AND RESILIENT CITIES’, Int. J. Environ. Impacts, vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 1–14, 2022, doi: 10.2495/EI-V5-N1-1-14.
[158] T. Dawson, J. Hambly, A. Kelley, W. Lees, and S. Miller, ‘Coastal heritage, global climate change, public engagement, and citizen science’, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., vol. 117, no. 15, pp. 8280–8286, 2020.
[159] C. Makate, ‘Local institutions and indigenous knowledge in adoption and scaling of climate-smart agricultural innovations among sub-Saharan smallholder farmers’, Int. J. Clim. Change Strateg. Manag., vol. 12, no. 2, pp. 270–287, 2020, doi: 10.1108/IJCCSM-07-2018-0055.
[160] L. P. Hopkins, D. J. January-Bevers, E. K. Caton, and L. A. Campos, ‘A simple tree planting framework to improve climate, air pollution, health, and urban heat in vulnerable locations using non-traditional partners’, Plants People Planet, vol. 4, no. 3, pp. 243–257, 2022, doi: 10.1002/ppp3.10245.
[161] J. Langfermann, ‘How Citizen Entrepreneurship Works’, J. Entrep. Innov. Emerg. Econ., 2024, doi: 10.1177/23939575241263677.
[162] C. Verfuerth, G. Jones, and L. Roberts, ‘Workshops to discuss the future of tree planting with Welsh farmers’, Welsh Government, 2023.
[163] A. B. Raschke, J. Davis, and A. Quiroz, ‘The Central Arizona Conservation Alliance Programs: Use of Social Media and App-Supported Community Science for Landscape-Scale Habitat Restoration, Governance Support, and Community Resilience-Building’, Land, vol. 11, no. 1, 2022, doi: 10.3390/land11010137.
[164] Global Assembly Team, ‘Report of the 2021 Global Assembly on the Climate and Ecological Crisis: Giving everyone a seat at the global governance table’, Global Assembly, 2022.
[165] S. H. Hamilton et al., ‘Affecting behavioural change through empowerment: conceptual insights from theory and agricultural case studies in South Asia’, Reg. Environ. Change, vol. 22, no. 3, 2022, doi: 10.1007/s10113-022-01939-7.
[166] R. Shammin, R. Firoz, and R. Hasan, ‘Frameworks, stories and learnings from disaster management in Bangladesh’, in Climate Change and Community Resilience: Insights from South Asia, 2021, pp. 239–256. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85167529664&doi=10.1007%2f978-981-16-0680-9_16&partnerID=40&md5=ac9f2ec22fa5fcf1c579960f9e3ad4ca
[167] S. Elstub, J. Carrick, D. M. Farrell, and P. Mockler, ‘The scope of climate assemblies: Lessons from the climate assembly uk’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 13, no. 20, 2021, doi: 10.3390/su132011272.
[168] E. Teko and O. Lah, ‘Capacity Needs Assessment in Transport Innovation Living Labs: The Case of an Innovative E-Mobility Project’, Front. Future Transp., vol. 3, 2022, doi: 10.3389/ffutr.2022.799505.
[169] C. Cherry, S. Capstick, C. Demski, C. Mellier, L. Stone, and C. Verfuerth, ‘Citizens’ climate assemblies: Understanding public deliberation for climate policy’, The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), Cardiff, 2021.
[170] R. Sandover, A. Moseley, and P. Devine-Wright, ‘Contrasting views of Citizens’ Assemblies: Stakeholder perceptions of public deliberation on climate change’, Polit. Gov., vol. 9, no. 2, pp. 76–86, 2021.
[171] P. Hofman, F. Wade, J. Webb, and M. Groenleer, ‘Retrofitting at scale: comparing transition experiments in Scotland and the Netherlands’, Build. Cities, vol. 2, no. 1, pp. 637–654, 2021, doi: 10.5334/bc.98.
[172] A. Berditchevskaia, A. Albert, K. Peach, G. Lucarelli, and A. Cottica, ‘Untapped: Collective Intelligence for Climate Action’, United Nations Development Programme, New York, 2024.
[173] N. Abbas and G. Smith, ‘Towards Permanent Climate Citizens’ Assemblies: Learning from the Early Adopters. KNOCA Briefing No. 10’, Knowledge Network on Climate Assemblies, 2024.
[174] M. Araos, ‘Democracy underwater: Public participation, technical expertise, and climate infrastructure planning in New York City’, Theor Soc, vol. 52, no. 1, pp. 1–34, 2023, doi: 10.1007/s11186-021-09459-9.
[175] J. Jeffers, ‘Barriers to transformation towards participatory adaptation decision-making: Lessons from the Cork flood defences dispute’, Land Use Policy, vol. 90, 2020, doi: 10.1016/j.landusepol.2019.104333.
[176] E. ter Mors and E. van Leeuwen, ‘It matters to be heard: Increasing the citizen acceptance of low-carbon technologies in the Netherlands and United Kingdom’, Energy Res. Soc. Sci., vol. 100, p. 103103, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.erss.2023.103103.
[177] J. Ainscough and R. Willis, ‘Embedding deliberation: guiding the use of deliberative mini-publics in climate policy-making’, Clim. Policy, vol. 24, no. 6, pp. 828–842, 2024, doi: 10.1080/14693062.2024.2303337.
[178] J. Boswell, R. Dean, and G. Smith, ‘Can citizen deliberation address the climate crisis? Not if it is disconnected from politics and policymaking’, EUROPP. [Online]. Available: https://blogs.lse.ac.uk/europpblog/2022/12/07/can-citizen-deliberation-address-the-climate-crisis-not-if-it-is-disconnected-from-politics-and-policymaking/
[179] G. Smith, We Need To Talk About Climate: How Citizens’ Assemblies Can Help Us Solve The Climate Crisis. London: University of Westminster Press, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://www.uwestminsterpress.co.uk/site/books/10.16997/book73/read/?loc=002.xhtml
[180] The Scottish Parliament, ‘Scottish Parliament People’s Panel reviewing the Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009’, The Scottish Parliament, 2024.
[181] P. Kashwan and H. Lee, ‘Beyond stakeholder consultations: Red-green coalition democratizes Maine’s offshore wind energy policymaking’, Energy Res. Soc. Sci., vol. 116, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.erss.2024.103692.
[182] K. Peach, ‘Creating a Citizen Participation Service and other ideas: Reimagining government for better climate policy’, Nesta’s Centre for Collective Intelligence Design, 2023.
[183] K. A. McNamara, M. Kostelny, G. Kim, D. M. Keating, J. Estiandan, and J. Armbruster, ‘A novel resident outreach program improves street tree planting outcomes in Los Angeles’, Environ. Chall., vol. 9, 2022, doi: 10.1016/j.envc.2022.100596.
[184] G. Lucertini, G. Di Giustino, C. F. dall’Omo, and F. Musco, ‘An innovative climate adaptation planning process: iDEAL project’, J. Environ. Manage., vol. 317, 2022, doi: 10.1016/j.jenvman.2022.115408.
[185] D. Silveira, ‘The role of deliberative public engagement in climate policy development: A report for the Climate Change Committee’, Climate Citizens and Lancaster Unversity, 2022.
[186] J. Bentz, ‘Learning about climate change in, with and through art’, Clim. Change, vol. 162, no. 3, pp. 1595–1612, Oct. 2020, doi: 10.1007/s10584-020-02804-4.
[187] K. Smith, B. McDonagh, and E. Brookes, ‘Place-based arts engagement and learning histories: An effective tool for climate action’, Environ. Commun., 2024, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2024.2382473.
[188] K. Lee, ‘Urban public space as a didactic platform: Raising awareness of climate change through experiencing arts’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 13, no. 5, pp. 1–17, 2021, doi: 10.3390/su13052915.
[189] F. Ueberschär, ‘AI for experience: Designing with Generative Adversarial Networks to evoke climate fascination’, Master thesis, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands, 2021.
[190] A. Kluczkovski et al., ‘Interacting with members of the public to discuss the impact of food choices on climate change-experiences from two UK public engagement events’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 12, no. 6, pp. 1–21, 2020, doi: 10.3390/su12062323.
[191] S. Syropoulos et al., ‘Changing community climate change attitudes: Evidence from a community exhibit intervention’, J. Environ. Psychol., vol. 98, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.jenvp.2024.102369.
[192] B. Hedin, L. Grönborg, and G. Johansson, ‘Food carbon literacy: A definition and framework exemplified by designing and evaluating a digital grocery list for increasing food carbon literacy and changing behavior’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 14, no. 19, 2022, doi: 10.3390/su141912442.
[193] H. Obracht-Prondzyńska, E. Duda, H. Anacka, and J. Kowal, ‘Greencoin as an AI-based solution shaping climate awareness’, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public. Health, vol. 19, no. 18, 2022, doi: 10.3390/ijerph191811183.
[194] B. Obuobi, D. Tang, F. Awuah, E. Nketiah, and G. Adu-Gyamfi, ‘Utilizing Ant Forest technology to foster sustainable behaviors: A novel approach towards environmental conservation’, J. Environ. Manage., vol. 359, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.jenvman.2024.121038.
[195] A. Workman et al., ‘Evaluating user preferences, comprehension, and trust in apps for environmental health hazards: Qualitative case study’, JMIR Form. Res., vol. 6, no. 12, 2022, doi: 10.2196/38471.
[196] C. Hurrell, A. Chai, H. Green, and G. Bradley, ‘Virtual reality facilitates pro-environmental behavioural intentions’, Environ. Educ. Res., 2024, doi: 10.1080/13504622.2024.2342942.
[197] V. Berger and D. Koch, ‘The climate wins! – How a gamification approach can foster sustainable consumption on university campuses and beyond’, Int. J. Sustain. High. Educ., 2024, doi: 10.1108/IJSHE-08-2022-0269.
[198] I. Thacker, ‘Supporting secondary students’ climate change learning and motivation using novel data and data visualizations’, Contemp. Educ. Psychol., vol. 78, 2024, doi: 10.1016/j.cedpsych.2024.102285.
[199] Ș. Boncu, O.-S. Candel, and N. L. Popa, ‘Gameful green: A systematic review on the use of serious computer games and gamified mobile apps to foster pro-environmental information, attitudes and behaviors’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 14, no. 16, 2022, doi: 10.3390/su141610400.
[200] D. Carrillo-Nieves, E. Clarke-Crespo, P. Cervantes-Avilés, M. Cuevas-Cancino, and A. Y. Vanoye-García, ‘Designing learning experiences on climate change for undergraduate students of different majors’, Front. Educ., vol. 9, 2024, doi: 10.3389/feduc.2024.1284593.
[201] I. De Sena, C. Cocco, V. Brůža, P. Lenicolais, S. Crowley, and F. Pilla, ‘EbAcraft: Engaging local communities in learning about ecosystem-based adaptation for coastal cities in Europe’, presented at the Proceedings 2023 IEEE 19th International Conference on e-Science, e-Science 2023, 2023. doi: 10.1109/e-Science58273.2023.10254941.
[202] D. Fernández Galeote, N.-Z. Legaki, and J. Hamari, ‘From traditional to game-based learning of climate change: A media comparison experiment’, Proc. ACM Hum.-Comput. Interact., vol. 7, pp. 503–525, 2023, doi: 10.1145/3611039.
[203] N. Mohammadpourlima, M. Nygård, and M. P. Heris, ‘Gamification: A catalyst to achieve carbon-neutral cities’, presented at the Lecture Notes in Computer Science (including subseries Lecture Notes in Artificial Intelligence and Lecture Notes in Bioinformatics), 2024, pp. 226–243. doi: 10.1007/978-3-031-65285-1_15.
[204] G. Mylonas, J. Hofstaetter, A. Friedl, and M. Giannakos, ‘Designing effective playful experiences for sustainability awareness in schools and makerspaces’, presented at the ACM International Conference Proceeding Series, 2021. doi: 10.1145/3466725.3466755.
[205] G. Mylonas, J. Hofstaetter, M. Giannakos, A. Friedl, and P. Koulouris, ‘Playful interventions for sustainability awareness in educational environments: A longitudinal, large-scale study in three countries’, Int. J. Child-Comput. Interact., vol. 35, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.ijcci.2022.100562.
[206] G. Mylonas, F. Paganelli, G. Cuffaro, I. Nesi, and D. Karantzis, ‘Using gamification and IoT-based educational tools towards energy savings – some experiences from two schools in Italy and Greece’, J. Ambient Intell. Humaniz. Comput., vol. 14, no. 12, pp. 15725–15744, 2023, doi: 10.1007/s12652-020-02838-7.
[207] J. Nguyen, A. Mittal, Z. Kapelan, and L. Scholten, ‘SuDSbury: A serious game to support the adoption of sustainable drainage solutions’, Urban Water J., vol. 21, no. 2, pp. 204–218, 2024, doi: 10.1080/1573062X.2023.2284958.
[208] J. N. Rooney-Varga, F. Kapmeier, J. D. Sterman, A. P. Jones, M. Putko, and K. Rath, ‘The Climate Action Simulation’, Simul. Gaming, vol. 51, no. 2, pp. 114–140, 2020, doi: 10.1177/1046878119890643.
[209] F. van Schaik, ‘In-game uncertainties and climate change challenges as identified by pre-service teachers’, Simul. Gaming, vol. 54, no. 6, pp. 680–707, 2023, doi: 10.1177/10468781231199262.
[210] M. Daiiani, P. Sweetser, S. Stanley, S. Caldwell, and D. Van Rooy, ‘Evaluating the impact of gameful design on pro-environmental attitudes: Beyond Blue as intervention’, presented at the ACM International Conference Proceeding Series, 2024. doi: 10.1145/3649921.3649933.
[211] B. Orlove et al., ‘FutureCoast: A playful way to assess public perceptions for better climate change communication’, Environ. Commun., 2024, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2024.2341926.
[212] D. Fernández Galeote et al., ‘The good, the bad, and the divergent in game-based learning: Player experiences of a serious game for climate change engagement’, presented at the ACM International Conference Proceeding Series, 2022, pp. 256–267. doi: 10.1145/3569219.3569414.
[213] D. Fernández Galeote, M. Rajanen, D. Rajanen, N.-Z. Legaki, D. J. Langley, and J. Hamari, ‘Gamification for climate change engagement: A user-centered design agenda’, presented at the ACM International Conference Proceeding Series, 2023, pp. 45–56. doi: 10.1145/3616961.3616968.
[214] Z. Song, Y. Sun, V. Ruijters, and R. Lc, ‘Climate influence: Implicit game-based interactive storytelling for climate action purpose’, in Interactive Storytelling, A. Mitchell and M. Vosmeer, Eds., Cham: Springer International Publishing, 2021, pp. 425–429. doi: 10.1007/978-3-030-92300-6_42.
[215] V. Aksel Stenberdt and G. Makransky, ‘Mastery experiences in immersive virtual reality promote pro-environmental waste-sorting behavior’, Comput. Educ., vol. 198, 2023, doi: 10.1016/j.compedu.2023.104760.
[216] G. Fauville, C. C. M. Queiroz, and J. N. Bailenson, ‘Virtual reality as a promising tool to promote climate change awareness’, in Technology and Health: Promoting attitude and behaviour change, Elsevier, 2020, pp. 91–108. doi: 10.1016/B978-0-12-816958-2.00005-8.
[217] G. B. Petersen, S. Klingenberg, R. E. Mayer, and G. Makransky, ‘The virtual field trip: Investigating how to optimize immersive virtual learning in climate change education’, Br. J. Educ. Technol., vol. 51, no. 6, pp. 2099–2115, 2020, doi: 10.1111/bjet.12991.
[218] A. Plechatá, M. H. Hielkema, L.-M. Merkl, G. Makransky, and M. B. Frøst, ‘Shifting from information- to experience-based climate change communication increases pro-environmental behavior via efficacy beliefs’, Environ. Commun., vol. 18, no. 5, pp. 589–609, 2024, doi: 10.1080/17524032.2024.2334727.
[219] C. Wienrich, S. Vogt, N. Döllinger, and D. Obremski, ‘Promoting eco-friendly behavior through virtual reality – Implementation and evaluation of immersive feedback conditions of a virtual CO2 calculator’, presented at the Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems – Proceedings, 2024. doi: 10.1145/3613904.3642957.
[220] D. Davidson, ‘“Can we talk?” Forum theatre as rehearsal for climate change interventions’, in Theatre Pedagogy in the Era of Climate Crisis, 2021, pp. 115–129. doi: 10.4324/9781003087823-11.
[221] C. Martínez-Mirambell, S. Boned-Gómez, M. Urrea-Solano, and S. Baena-Morales, ‘Step by step towards a greener future: The role of plogging in educating tomorrow’s citizens’, Sustain. Switz., vol. 15, no. 18, 2023, doi: 10.3390/su151813558.
[222] M. Reamer, G. Maranto, T. Harrison, and A. Clement, ‘Photovoice in the interdisciplinary climate classroom: A case study in climate adaptation pedagogy from a hybrid university course’, Appl. Environ. Educ. Commun., vol. 23, no. 1–2, pp. 1–23, 2024, doi: 10.1080/1533015X.2023.2275252.
[223] R. Orr and D. Powell, ‘Towards a UK public engagement strategy on climate change’, Climate Outreach, Oxford, Sep. 2023.
Sources that informed the evidence review but are not cited in the report
D. Rousell and A. Cutter-Mackenzie-Knowles, ‘A systematic review of climate change education: Giving children and young people a “voice” and a “hand” in redressing climate change’, Children’s Geographies, vol. 18, no. 2, pp. 191–208, Mar. 2020.
E. André, P. E. Colombo, L. Schäfer Elinder, J. Larsson, and M. Hunsberger, ‘Acceptance of low-carbon school meals with and without information — A controlled intervention study’, Journal of Consumer Policy, vol. 47, no. 1, pp. 109–125, 2024.
A. Simic, ‘C-change project in the “Juraj Sizgoric” Sibenik public library: Arts and culture activities for raising awareness on climate change’, Vjesnik Bibliotekara Hrvatske, vol. 64, no. 2, pp. 469–494, 2021.
D. Munshi, P. Kurian, S. Morrison, L. Kathlene, and R. Cretney, ‘Centring culture in public engagement on climate change adaptation: Re-shaping the future of the NZ tourism sector project team’, University of Waikato and the Deep South National Science Challenge, 2020. [Online]. Available: http://rgdoi.net/10.13140/RG.2.2.29922.35527.
G. Smith, ‘Climate assemblies: Emerging trends, challenges and opportunities’, Knowledge Network on Climate Assemblies, Jun. 2024.
M. A. Ranney and L. Velautham, ‘Climate change cognition and education: Given no silver bullet for denial, diverse information-hunks increase global warming acceptance’, Current Opinion in Behavioral Sciences, vol. 42, pp. 139–146, 2021.
L. Muradova, H. Walker, and F. Colli, ‘Climate change communication and public engagement in interpersonal deliberative settings: Evidence from the Irish citizens’ assembly’, Climate Policy, vol. 20, no. 10, pp. 1322–1335, 2020.
A. Berditchevskaia, K. Peach, G. Lucarelli, and M. Ebelshaeuser, ‘Collective intelligence for sustainable development: 13 stories from the UNDP Accelerator Labs’, Nesta’s Centre for Collective Intelligence Design, 2021.
H. Al-Amin, R. Webster, D. Kaoukji, and A. Sawas, ‘Communicating climate justice with young adults in Europe: A messaging guide’, Oxford: Climate Outreach, 2023.
P. Alarcón, J. L. Fernández-Martínez, and J. Font, ‘Comparing environmental advisory councils: How they work and why it matters’, Sustainability, vol. 12, no. 10, p. 4286, Jan. 2020.
Y. Tao, C. Wang, T. C. Zhang, L. Zhai, Y. Gao, and J. Liu, ‘CSR communication in hospitality: Fostering hotel guests’ climate (change) engagement’, Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, vol. 60, pp. 264–276, 2024.
T. Dölker et al., ‘Easy-to-implement educational interventions to bring climate-smart actions to daily anesthesiologic practice: A cross-sectional before and after study’, Minerva Anestesiologica, vol. 90, no. 3, pp. 126–134, 2024.
L. Mu, Y. Liu, C. Wang, X. Qu, and Y. Yu, ‘Enhancing capacity building to climate adaptation and water conservation among Chinese young people’, Environmental Science and Pollution Research, vol. 28, no. 22, pp. 27614–27628, 2021.
E. Griffin, S. Duncan, and P. Manners, ‘Enhancing place-based public engagement: Lessons learned’, National Co-ordinating Centre for Public Engagement, 2022.
C. G. Staub and G. Clarkson, ‘Farmer-led participatory extension leads Haitian farmers to anticipate climate-related risks and adjust livelihood strategies’, Journal of Rural Studies, vol. 81, pp. 235–245, 2021.
E. Feldbacher, M. Waberer, L. Campostrini, and G. Weigelhofer, ‘Identifying gaps in climate change education – a case study in Austrian schools’, International Research in Geographical and Environmental Education, vol. 33, no. 2, pp. 109–124, Apr. 2024.
K. Vidou and D. Latinopoulos, ‘Implementation of a Place Game tool in the city of Rotterdam to enhance urban resilience to climate change through placemaking’, Journal of Urbanism, vol. 16, no. 3, pp. 286–309, 2023.
L. Wu, T. Ma, Y. Bian, S. Li, and Z. Yi, ‘Improvement of regional environmental quality: Government environmental governance and public participation’, Science of The Total Environment, vol. 717, p. 137265, May 2020.
J. Boswell, R. Dean, and G. Smith, ‘Integrating citizen deliberation into climate governance: Lessons on robust design from six climate assemblies’, Public Administration, vol. 101, no. 1, pp. 182–200, 2023.
V. Dany and L. Lebel, ‘Integrating concerns with climate change into local development planning in Cambodia’, Review of Policy Research, vol. 37, no. 2, pp. 221–243, 2020.
M. S. Moustafa Saleh and H. E. S. Elsabahy, ‘Integrating sustainability development education program in nursing to challenge practice among nursing interns in health care’, Journal of Nursing Management, vol. 30, no. 8, pp. 4419–4429, 2022.
D. Rajanen, ‘Interactive and participatory media for public engagement with climate change: A systematic literature review and an integrative model’, INTERACT Research Unit, University of Oulu, 2021.
N. M. Wadi, K. Cheikh, Y. W. Keung, and R. Green, ‘Investigating intervention components and their effectiveness in promoting environmentally sustainable diets: A systematic review’, The Lancet Planetary Health, vol. 8, no. 6, pp. e410–e422, 2024.
M. Zandlová, H. Skokanová, and M. Trnka, ‘Landscape change scenarios: Developing participatory tools for enhancing resilience to climate change’, Environmental Management, vol. 72, no. 3, pp. 631–656, 2023.
P. Newell, R. Price, and F. Daley, ‘Landscapes of (in)justice: Reflecting on voices, spaces and alliances for just transitions’, Energy Research and Social Science, vol. 116, 2024. [Online]. Available: https://www.scopus.com/inward/record.uri?eid=2-s2.0-85200539503&doi=10.1016%2fj.erss.2024.103701&partnerID=40&md5=eb6575cf56008e506226793804a80b04
A. J. Jalil, J. Tasoff, and A. V. Bustamante, ‘Low-cost climate-change informational intervention reduces meat consumption among students for 3 years’, Nature Food, vol. 4, no. 3, pp. 218–222, 2023.
J. F. Davies et al., ‘Operation clean up: A model for eco-leadership and sustainability implementation’, Anaesthesia and Intensive Care, vol. 51, no. 2, pp. 88–95, 2023.
L. Liu, G. Perlaviciute, and L. Squintani, ‘Opposing out loud versus supporting in silence: Who wants to participate in decision-making about energy projects?’, Environmental Research Letters, vol. 17, no. 11, p. 114053, 2022.
S. Theminimulle et al., ‘Our journey to net zero: Understanding household and community participation in the UK’s transition to a greener future’, Nuffield Foundation and the Institute for Community Studies, 2024.
S. Sereenonchai and N. Arunrat, ‘Practical agricultural communication: Incorporating scientific and indigenous knowledge for climate mitigation’, Kasetsart Journal of Social Sciences, vol. 41, no. 1, pp. 60–67, 2020.
E. M. Schwienhorst-Stich et al., ‘Pre-post evaluation of the emotions and motivations for transformative action of medical students in Germany after two different planetary health educational interventions’, The Lancet Planetary Health, vol. 8, p. S9, 2024.
K. McBride, ‘Preparing for a climate assembly’, Knowledge Network on Climate Assemblies, 2022.
D. Bidwell and P. J. Schweizer, ‘Public values and goals for public participation’, Environmental Policy and Governance, vol. 31, no. 4, pp. 257–269, 2021.
A. Thaller et al., ‘Pushing low-carbon mobility: A survey experiment on the public acceptance of disruptive policy packages’, Climate Policy, vol. 24, no. 7, pp. 949–962, 2024.
N. Andrews, S. Elstub, S. McVean, and G. Sandie, ‘Scotland’s Climate Assembly Research Report: Process, impact and Assembly member experience’, Scottish Government Research, Edinburgh, 2022.
S. J. Mostacedo-Marasovic, A. A. Olsen, and C. T. Forbes, ‘Supporting secondary students’ understanding of Earth’s climate system and global climate change using EzGCM: A cross-sectional study’, Journal of Science Education and Technology, vol. 33, no. 2, pp. 178–94, 2024.
C. Álvarez-Nieto, L. Parra-Anguita, C. Álvarez-García, E. M. Montoro Ramirez, M. D. López-Franco, S. Sanz-Martos, et al., ‘Sustainability education in nursing degree for climate-smart healthcare: A quasi-experimental study’, International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education, vol. 25, no. 9, pp. 278–92, 2024.
M. Shoina, I. Voukkali, A. Anagnostopoulos, I. Papamichael, M. Stylianou, and A. A. Zorpas, ‘The 15-minute city concept: The case study within a neighbourhood of Thessaloniki’, Waste Management and Research, vol. 42, no. 8, pp. 694–710, 2024.
J. B. da Silva, D. Silva, M. Barbosa, and M. Rodrigues, ‘The Healthy Waters science-based educational intervention programme: The potential of participatory approaches for developing and promoting students’ environmental citizenship’, Journal of Social Science Education, vol. 23, no. 1, pp. 1–24, 2024.
K. Mitev, L. Player, C. Verfuerth, S. Westlake, and L. Whitmarsh, ‘The implications of behavioural science for effective climate policy: Output 2: Policy recommendations’, Bath, England: The Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), Sep. 2023.
A. Singer, C. Kirby, and E. Rappolee, ‘Using fiction and nonfiction readings in climate change education’, Journal of College Science Teaching, vol. 52, no. 7, pp. 103–10, 2023.
M. Murunga, E. Ogier, C. Macleod, and G. Pecl, ‘What drives public engagement by scientists? An Australian perspective’, Global Environmental Change, vol. 87, p. 102889, Jul. 2024.
Millar, C., Mulholland, C., Zanin, B., Whitmarsh, L., Gibson, R., Meyer J., Demski, C. (2024) A review of effective public engagement on climate and implications for Scotland, ClimateXChange.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange Edinburgh Climate Change Institute High School Yards Edinburgh EH1 1LZ +44 (0) 131 651 4783
The planning system in Scotland is used to make decisions about future developments and use of land in towns, cities and countryside. Planning authorities are required to prepare evidence reports as part of the local development plan (LDP) process. These provide a summary of the baseline data used and explain the implications of the LDP.
Supported by National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), planning LDPs should account for and address current and future climate risks, and enable places to adapt accordingly. Accurate, sub-national spatial data, which identifies geographic features such as rivers and utilities, is vital to create effective plans with a sound evidence base to evaluate climate risks. Fully evidencing climate risk requires an understanding of hazards, but also exposure and vulnerability, typically requiring interpretation of multiple datasets at once.
This report explores the geospatial resources that are available to support the evidence gathering stage with a view to improving access to geospatial data on climate risk. It identifies existing data, data gaps, barriers, and resources needed for evidence-based planning and delivery.
Key findings
Through engagement with a selection of Scottish Planning Authorities, we found:
Data for evidence reports
A wide range of data is required to assess climate vulnerabilities and impacts, some of which require substantial climate and data expertise to interpret.
Most required data is free for planning authorities.
Planning authorities tend to rely on datasets familiar to them – such as Flood Maps (SEPA), Dynamic Coast, Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD), and OS MasterMap to assess climate risks like flooding, coastal erosion, and social vulnerability. These datasets are highly usable, with consistent coverage and quality across Scotland, but sometimes require geospatial expertise for analysis.
There are additional datasets and tools which would benefit from further adoption by Planning Authorities, especially the Local Authority Climate Service. Additional datasets related to wildfire risk, air quality and land use may offer value, but would require some transformation, processing and interpretation to the climate context.
Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water, infrastructure and landslides. Proxies (e.g. combining urban form, green space, and housing quality data) are suggested for urban heat island assessments. However, these must be approached in a considered way, which balances the potential effort to develop the interpretation against the likely risk.
Planning authorities’ approach
There is a knowledge gap on how climate risk impacts planning. Some planning authorities have limited prior experience on climate risk, fewer technical data skills within their teams and no dedicated climate change professional. This leads to planning authorities mainly focusing on flood risk, where they have more familiarity.
Planning authority use of spatial data is limited, despite support for it in the Local Development Planning Guidance. This underuse may result from limited awareness of the guidance and expectations of evidence reports, and a lack of capacity and skills to interpret geospatial data.
Planners expressed a wish for a simplified approach to incorporate climate adaptation considerations into their plans.
Planning authorities find it challenging and time-consuming to gather data from multiple providers.
There is value in carrying out Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) to better direct the use of data but there is no consistent approach or simple tool available for planning authorities to use.
Collaboration across planning authorities allows knowledge and resources sharing, which leads to more consistent and effective outcomes.
Given the wide range of potential data and analysis, planning authorities benefit from instances where work had been undertaken ahead of the LDP process to provide a view of which risks are most impactful, allowing a more focused approach to data.
Briefing note for planning authorities
Many planning authorities lack clarity on which data should be used for assessing climate risks and vulnerabilities, and how to interpret it. We have created an accompanying briefing note (Section 9.5), which should help by providing guidance on more usable and interpretable data.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
ADMS
Atmospheric Dispersion Modelling System
BGS
British Geological Survey
CC BY
Creative Commons Attribution License (further detail in 9.1.2)
CLIMADA
CLIMate ADAptation, Economics of Climate Adaptation
CRVA
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment
CCRA
Climate Change Risk Assessment
DSM
Digital Surface Model
DTM
Digital Terrain Mode
EFFIS
European Forest Fire Information System
GIS
Geographic Information System
HabMoS
Habitat Map of Scotland
LA
Local Authority
LACS
Local Authority Climate Service
LDP
Local Development Plan
LiDAR
Light Detection and Ranging
LPA
Local Planning Authority
LSOA
Lower Super Output Area
NGD
National Geographic Database
NPF4
National Planning Framework 4
OGL
Open Government Licence (further detail in 9.1.2)
OpenCLIM
Open Climate Impacts Modelling framework
OS
Ordnance Survey
SNAP3
(Third) Scottish National Adaptation Plan
SEPA
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency
SIMD
Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation
Sniffer
Independent charity – knowledge brokers for a resilient Scotland
PSGA
Public Sector Geospatial Agreement (further detail in 9.1.2)
UHI
Urban Heat Island
UKCCRA3
(Third) UK Climate Change Risk Assessment
UKCP18
UK Climate Projections 2018
UK-CRI
UK Climate Risk Indicators
Context and approach
Context
The reduction of emissions and adaptation to current and future risks of climate change is a challenge which is vital to be addressed via the planning system. The planning system provides opportunities to adapt to both current and future risks of climate change, as well as the potential to promote nature recovery and restoration in the area.
As part of the effort to modernise and update the planning system, the Scottish Government aims to align land-use planning with an outcomes-based approach to deliver sustainable development. This approach supports the National Performance Framework National Outcomes (Scottish Government, 2015) and supports the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (United Nations, 2015).
Development planning, which outlines how places should change and where development should and should not happen, requires planning authorities to prepare and publish a local development plan (LDP)[1], updating on a 5 yearly basis.
The National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4) (Scottish Government, 2023c),puts climate change adaptation and resilience front and centre. A clear understanding of the impact of hazards and risks related to climate is required for an effective plan, and this must be underpinned by the effective use of climate risk data.
Defining climate risk
In this report, we refer climate risk in line with existing climate literature. Risk is defined as a combination of hazard, exposure and vulnerability (IPCC 2014).
Hazards are physical events which may have adverse effects, such as sea level rise & increased heat.
Exposure indicates the presence of people, resources, infrastructure which could be impacted by the hazard, and the extent to which they can be reached by the hazard. Physical proximity is one key consideration in understanding degree of exposure.
Vulnerability indicates to which extent people, resources or infrastructure could be more or less impacted by a hazard
Crucially, data can indicate hazard, exposure, vulnerability, or potentially a combination of the factors if indicating risk. However, if a dataset was not designed with the above in mind, it would need to be reinterpreted to a climate risk context. As an example, Ordnance Survey provides extensive data on the location of buildings, infrastructure and natural features, but geospatial analysis would be required to derive metrics such location to flood zones to indicate risk of flooding.
There is a substantial range of potential hazards associated with climate change in Scotland (Grace et. Al 2025). For this report, our engagement with the planning authorities focussed on the applicability of data, therefore a simplified grouping of hazards and risks was used (Table 1). In instances where datasets were particularly applicable to vulnerability and exposure, this is discussed in detail in Section 4.
Table 1 – Hazards and risks, as summarised in this report
Hazard Groups
Rainfall & Storms
Temperature & Water Scarcity
Sea Level Rise
Well Represented Hazards and Risks
Flooding
Costal Erosion
Health risks
Air pollution
Loss of land
Flood risk
Potentially Under Represented Hazards and Risks
Storm damage
Landslides
Water pollution
Agricultural changes
Habitat changes
Urban Heat Islands
Habitat Loss
Infrastructure damage
Local development plan evidence reports
Evidence reports are an early, statutory step in the development of a local plan. It provides a summary of the baseline data and other information which will form the basis of the plan.
This research focuses on the evidence gathering stage for climate risk – specifically, the tasks of early engagement and data collection, preparation of the evidence reports and a gate check by the Planning and Environmental Appeals Division (DPEA).
Evidence reports should be proportionate, with planning authorities having the discretion to tailor them to local characteristics and conditions. The Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b) provides guidance to support planning authorities in preparing evidence reports, including potential datasets relevant to NPF4 policies for climate change adaptation planning.
In addition to data access, there is a need to draw out implications of the data for the plan. It is not just about accessing the geospatial climate risk dataset but also ensuring its usability to accurately inform local development plans.
Rationale for this research
The lack of easily accessible spatial data on climate risk at a sub-national resolution has been identified as a key barrier to localised understanding of climate change adaptation by local authority planning officers.
Data gaps and accessibility issues create barriers to planning authorities producing proportionate, evidence-based plans. The aim of this research is to establish options for improved, simplified access by Scottish planning authorities to geospatial data that enables consistent, collaborative climate adaptation in local planning.
The intended audience for this research includes the Scottish Government and planning authorities. The work was commissioned on behalf of the Scottish Government, with particular interest for colleagues from the Climate Change Division and Planning, Architecture and Regeneration Directorate. A standalone briefing note and data catalogue (see Section 9.5) has also been produced specifically for planning authorities to showcase the available datasets.
Research methodology
The research involved an evidence review including a review of relevant literature, planning requirements and an in-depth data analysis of available risk data and its characteristics. Stakeholder engagement was conducted with planning authorities which were at various stages of evidence report development (see Figure 1) from early planning to successful completion. The engagement included interviews, as well as a wider workshop (See 9.3). Findings from these activities were the analysed to understand current needs, challenges and possible solutions to improve the process.
Figure 1 – Planning authorities engaged with in this study included Western Isles, Moray, West Dumbarton, Glasgow City, the Lothians, the Borders and Fife
Climate risk data
Effective data is central to the local development plan, and it is key that the right data is used and referenced for the evidence report. Additionally, the evidence report is expected to rely on spatial data, for which baseline evidence sources should be accessible.
There is a large range of data potentially available for use in evidence reports. This section provides a consolidated assessment of key datasets.
Our engagement with planning authorities identified:
Five climate-related datasets that were familiar to planning authorities and were – or were intended to be – used to produce the evidence report.
Eight datasets which would be valuable if used more extensively by planning authorities in the preparation of evidence reports.
Five areas of concern to planning authorities in relation to the evidence report which did not have a dataset available, or a clear methodology, documented below as data gaps.
In this section, key aspects of the data are provided, such as name, the organisation providing the data. The data license under which the data is made available is provided, the full implications of the license to usage by planning authorities is detailed in Section 9.1.2.
The majority of datasets reviewed are updated and published at a rate sufficient for their purpose, though we have noted instances where there may not be a clear long term plan for the maintenance of the data.
Several other datasets were identified as having potential value. For the full list of all data sources reviewed please see the accompanying data catalogue (Section 9.5)., which catalogue includes details of the metadata and access links.
Key datasets already in use
Through the interviews and workshop, there were multiple datasets already in use by planning authorities in the production of the evidence reports, though not consistently in all cases. The most popular datasets are discussed in this section, along with a narrative of how the datasets were applied and if any issues were faced.
Table 4.1 – Key datasets already in use by planning authorities
The consensus among most participants was that the Flood Maps from the Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) were a useful source for assessing increased flooding risks, which could be an outcome of both increased magnitude and frequency of rainfall, storms and sea level rise. The SEPA data is presented using a simple index (high, medium and low risk) down to ‘street’ level, which lends to easy interpretation by all stakeholders. The SEPA data also distinguishes between current flood risk, and future flood risk up to the 2080s, in the ‘Future Flood Maps’ layer. One participant also commented that the support provided by SEPA is also incredibly useful. Given the flood data also overlaps with other planning use cases out with the evidence report, there is a lot of familiarity with the data.
Dynamic Coast
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
NatureScot
OGL and PGSA
Rainfall, Storms, Sea Level rise
High
Data from Dynamic Coast is used by multiple planning authorities. This project undertook a wide range of analyses, from coastal change due to sea level rise to the social disadvantage of the population exposed to coastal erosion. The output is a series of datasets on coastal erosion, intended as a broad planning tool for ‘street’ to ‘regional scale’ mitigation. The data also includes social vulnerability as an indicator. For coastal planning authorities, the data was seen as valuable and usable, though may not be as accurate or applicable in estuarine areas. The outputs include a mixture of OGL and PSGA data, so while most of the data is fully open, not all layers can be supplied to all stakeholders.
Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Scottish Government
OGL
All hazards/ vulnerability
High
The Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD) dataset provides a range of indices which can be used to highlight areas of high deprivation that may face a higher impact from climate risks. The data is presented at Lower Layer Super Output Area (LSOA) level (e.g. ‘neighbourhood’ level) and summarises social issues in simple to interpret indices. The housing index specifically accounts for houses which are overcrowded, and those which do not have central heating – key factors to consider when assessing risks related to several climate hazards.
OS MasterMap
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Ordnance Survey
OGL/ PSGA
All hazards
Medium
There is a large range of data available from the Ordnance Survey (OS), which can cover a range of topics from housing, infrastructure to green space and biodiversity. OS also provides products which can be used as backdrop maps to improve the accessibility of data when shared with stakeholders. The OS MasterMap range of datasets has been used in local government for various purposes since its launch in 2001, so there is likely to be organisational familiarity, especially in GIS teams. OS has been in the process of refreshing its key products with the introduction of the National Geographic Database (NGD). This is intended to add additional data to OS’s products to serve further analytical use cases and adds data such as the presence of green roofs and solar panels on buildings (coming in future release), habitat classifications and building ages. OS data is largely licensed under PSGA or OGL, and access is provided via the OS Datahub. OS also has products which identify areas of greenspace, namely MasterMap Greenspace and OS Open Greenspace. OS data is all high resolution, ‘street’ level data.
OS data is of high quality and coverage, providing street level data across Great Britain, which is updated frequently. Indicators for climate hazards, however would need to be derived through analysis. This would generally require geospatial skills and tools, but additionally, OS datasets tend to be large and complex. OS has made some efforts to address the complexity of accessing large data, including ‘Select+Build’ features, and API access. All planning authorities, as PSGA members, can access direct technical support from OS.
Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Scottish Government
OGL
All hazards
Low
LiDAR data from the Scottish Remote Sensing portal is valuable for assessing risks related to flooding. Digital Surface Model (DSM)/Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data from LiDAR can be easily interpreted and integrated with other steps in the analysis. The Scottish Remote Sensing portal has OGL licensed LiDAR data in a relatively easily accessible form – however, the coverage of the data is mostly focussed on the Central Belt, limiting the ability for some planning authorities to use. Additional coverage for the data was announced as part of the Future Farming Investment Scheme[5], which should improve the usability of this data in the future. The data is high resolution, supporting analysis at ‘street’ level.
Suggested datasets for future wider use
The following datasets were discussed in interviews and workshops, but we found that not all planning authorities sampled were using them. For some datasets, the low uptake by planning authorities was due to difficulty in the use, or accessing of the dataset, whereas for others low uptake was down to a lack of familiarity.
In this section we have provided a narrative for these datasets to indicate where they may be of value for planning authorities to use going forward.
Table 4.2 – Suggested datasets which could be used by Planning authorities for further value
Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI) and Social Flood Risk Index (SFRI)
Climate Just
OGL
Rainfall & Storms
High
4.2.7
UK Climate Projections 2018 (UKCP18)
Met Office
OGL
All Hazards
Low
4.2.8
GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate
British Geological Survey
OGL and Licensed
Rainfall & storms, sea level rise
Low
Local Authority Climate Service
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Met Office
OGL
All hazards
High
The newly launched Local Authority Climate Service (LACS) from the Met Office aims to provide planning authorities across the UK with crucial information on climate change to support decision-making. The LACS provides a simple interface for analysing changes related to key hazards and includes climate averages and climate indicators. A Climate Report can be generated through the Climate Explorer. Planning authorities can add data and then use it in other applications such as Excel and Power BI. It is built using geospatial technology from Esri UK and is part of the Climate Data Portal (Met Office, 2024b) which hosts the information within the Local Authority Climate Projections Explorer. The LACS also includes guidance on the process of assessing climate risk with ‘regional’ level data. The Met Office launched the new beta service on 9 October, so as a new service has not yet seen widespread adoption in planning authorities. The Met Office are inviting feedback to help drive improvements of the LACS – the conclusions of which could be used as the basis to feed into this improvement process. Additionally, it could increase the number of Scottish planning authorities involved, increasing their awareness and knowledge of the system, and also make sure the LACS delivers the service that Scottish planners need. The LACS is not currently configured to provide reports for National Park planning authorities, but does cover all Scottish local authorities.
Habitat Map of Scotland
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
NatureScot
OGL
All hazards
Medium
The Habitat Map of Scotland (HabMoS) is a composite dataset including different layers of detailed habitat data. All have been given a common Habitat Coding from the European Nature Information System (EUNIS). Using this data, a mapping of the existing habitats in a planning authority can be created. High value, or at risk habitats can then be identified, and habitat loss due to hazards such as sea level rise can be accounted for . The data is OGL licensed, with ‘street’ level resolution. HabMoS brings together habitat and land use data from multiple sources into one map, but the data is not interpreted in the context of climate hazards, so further interpretation and combination with additional datasets would be required to draw conclusions.
European Local Climate Zones
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Demuzere et. al. (2022)
CC BY 4.0
All hazards
High
The European Local Climate Zone (LCZ) data creates a simple typology for the built environment and landcover which is intended to support decision-making around climate risks. The data aims to characterise the urban landscape into broad categories (such as low-rise and high-rise housing) so that interactions between urban form and risks such as poor air quality, flooding and heatwaves can be modelled. Data is provided at ‘neighbourhood’ level resolution. One workshop participant reported that they had undertaken a ground truthing exercise in their local authority and confirmed that the data was broadly valid. As the data was recently, in 2022 and was aimed at the climate academic community, this dataset has not yet found widespread use in planning authorities. There are not currently any regular updates or revisions published for the LCZ data. Given the data is at ‘neighbourhood’ resolution, there is less need for it to be updated frequently, as only large changes to the urban landscape would be detected. As well as the detailed methodology being public, an LCZ Generator tool is provided by Ruhr University Bochum[9] which provides potential opportunities for updated datasets to be created for Scotland in the future.
UK Climate Risk Indicators (UK-CRI)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
UK Climate Resilience Programme
CC BY 4.0
All hazards
High
UK-CRI data simplifies analysis of many risks into indices. For temperature related risks, the data includes an estimation of days (or events) per year of events including heat waves, amber heat-health alerts, tropical nights (nights with a minimum temp of 20 °C). This extends to heat related impacts on infrastructure, such as road melting and high temperatures on rail. The impact of hazards on agriculture such as growing season and heat stress are also reported. Rather than creating new climate data, the UK-CRI is an interface on existing datasets (primarily Met Office) which simplifies complex data into more easily interpreted indices. The Met Office publishes annual updates to its climate data, though the UK-CRI tool does not receive updates as frequently. At ‘regional’ scale, it is less critical that the data is frequently updated, though after 5-10 years if the tool does not receive data updates, it may become far less appropriate to use.
River Basin Management Plans
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
SEPA
OGL
All hazards
Medium
River basin management plans set out actions to address current issues affecting water quality, water resources and fish. The management plans can be used in context with other data sources to understand risks which impact river health. River basin management plans are not explicitly geospatial datasets but relate to river basins which can be represented geospatially. The issues faced using this data mainly lie in the river basin boundaries not aligning with local authority boundaries, so requires some analysis. In addition, the key use case of the dataset is not climate risk or hazard related, so will require reinterpreting to the climate context.
Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI) and Social Flood Risk Index (SFRI)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Climate Just
OGL
Rainfall & Storms
High
A national flood vulnerability dataset was created by the Joseph Rowntree Foundation and is publicly available via the ClimateJust Maps tool. This dataset provides and easily to use, ready-made index describing flood vulnerability by combing physical flood risk with several factors which represent socio-economic vulnerability to flooding. However, it is based on ‘street level’ data published in 2011, which at this scale becomes quickly outdated. England and Wales had their index updated in 2022. An updated Scottish equivalent would be a useful tool for planning authorities to explore the vulnerability to this specific and pressing hazard.
UK Climate Projections 2018 (UKCP18)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Met Office
OGL
All Hazards
Low
The Met Office is the authoritative source for key climate projection data for the UK. UKCP18 products are commonly used for temperature and precipitation projections, but it can also provide data on humidity, wind and sea level rise. The climate projections generally support analysis at a ‘neighbourhood’ to ‘regional’ level, dependent on the specific data UKCP18 product.
The Met Office provides a UKCP18 User Interface for querying and extracting the data, graphs and pre-paired maps (plus access to the full data catalogue for those experienced in handling large datasets), but this does require some expertise in the underlying data to navigate, limiting its usability to planning authorities that have GIS teams or capability. This was reflected in the workshops, as some participants expressed concern that the climate data accessed from the UKCP18 portal was sometimes difficult to use. In addition, there is further interpretation work required to convert a numerical value from the data into a clear indicator which can be used to influence a decision. This interpretation of the climate data and translation into implications for the LDP was also found challenging , with some planning authorities being unable to fully explore what the data means for their plan.
The UKCP18 data is a crucial underpinning to climate analysis and has been used by some planning authorities. More recently the data has been made more usable with a set of pre-prepared indicators by tools such as the Met Office Local Authority Climate Service (where GIS users can also visualise the mapped data and also add their own geospatial data), and UK Climate Risk Indicators.
GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
British Geological Survey (BGS)
OGL and Licensed
Rainfall & storms, sea level rise
Low
Participants expressed an interest in data from the British Geological Survey, which has the potential to address risks such as coastal erosion and landslides. The BGS GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate datasets indicate risks arising from multiple hazards, with a range of open and licensed datasets. The use of BGS data was not widespread among participants, partly due to the licensing cost associated with the premium datasets.
There may be more value to be gained from these datasets, but it would likely require the supporting geotechnical knowledge and interpretation, unless a simpler way of indicating future risks is provided.
Perceived gaps and ways to address gaps
When discussing risks, participants expressed several areas where they felt there was insufficient data available to meet their needs. This was due more to the limited understanding of what data was required to support the analysis, rather than specific datasets lacking appropriate spatial and temporal resolution or having gaps in coverage.
It should also be considered that if these data gaps were closed, what value would they provide to the evidence reports in each planning authority, and to what extent would the planning process be able to take useful action on the data. Urban heat islands serve as a useful example – while it would be possible to carry out a detailed analysis in each planning authority, for rural, or northerly authorities, the risk could be understood to be minimal by using an understanding of the local context and long term heat risk from tools like the Local Authority Climate Data Service (see 4.2.1).
In this section, we list the key gaps and explore some datasets and approaches which could be used to address those gaps.
Urban heat islands
Participants generally expressed a lack of data to understand the risks associated with the urban heat island (UHI) effect. The overheating risk methodology can be derived from both UKCCRA3 (Built Environment chapter) and the previous Environmental Audit Committee evidence reviews (e.g. 2018). Determining the extent of the effect of UHIs in urban areas can be done using a temperature sensor network (at high spatial resolution), modelling (e.g. using dedicated products such as Envi-MET, adapting more commonly used modelling approaches, e.g. atmospheric dispersion modelling systems (ADMS) (Zhong et al., 2024), or analysis of high-resolution satellite data products. However, these approaches may not be suitable for all planning authorities due to resource or lack of specialist knowledge. Overheating risk is likely to be greater in areas where urban form is compact, where there is less green and open space, and where the housing quality is poor. As such, combining datasets on Local Climate Zones (to give urban form), green space, and Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation may act as a proxy for estimating urban heat island magnitude (e.g. Ferranti et al., 2023). Housing quality can also be indicated in further detail by Home Analytics data from the Energy Savings Trust which provides specific attributes on building fabric. This is a simpler approach using GIS datasets that planning authorities may be able to use for their evidence reports.
Storm and wind damage
While there are multiple datasets for inundation and coastal erosion, we did not find much work done to understand wind damage to buildings, or from trees. Tree fall risk is a statutory responsibility so it may be that planning authorities have some of this data held within parks or urban forestry teams. There are datasets which use remote sensing techniques to identify trees. One such dataset is National Tree Map from BlueSky – however, as this is a proprietary, licensed dataset it is unclear if the cost of this dataset outweighs the value which can be gained.
Landslides
While participants did discuss landslide risk, there was no broad consensus on the approach, nor most appropriate data. The open data published by the BGS could serve as a potential baseline assessment of current risk which, if found to be sufficiently high, further research could be carried out incorporating premium data, or input from specialists.
Health infrastructure
Data on the locations of key health infrastructure are available from NHS Scotland and accessible via the Spatial Hub. However, the use of these datasets in the context of the evidence reports would require further interpretation in order to drive decision making in the climate context. Whilst it would be possible to interpret which areas could be exposed to hazards such flooding and coastal erosion, understanding the magnitude of the risk on health infrastructure from hazards such as heating would require additional data to determine vulnerability such as building age and fabric. In the workshops, these aspects were not raised by participants, suggesting that this has not been a focus for planning authorities thus far.
Water infrastructure
Relevant data on water infrastructure, from Scottish Water for example, for the climate context is either available piecemeal, or not published. To understand which data would be required, planning authorities would need more knowledge as to which risks are likely to require water infrastructure data to assess.
Further observations
Wildfire risk was one aspect investigated by some planning authorities. Seasonal risk forecasts, as well as real-time monitoring is published by the European Forest Fire Information System[10] (EFFIS). This is a valuable resource for assessing the current risk landscape for fires, but additional context would be required for evaluating future risk (see UK-CRI in Section 4.3 above).
Datasets such as the Scottish Air Quality Database[11] provide information on air quality monitoring, analysis and interpretation of data, and pollutant trends at national and local levels. Historical data can also be accessed via the Met Office. Since these are observational datasets, they can be used for assessing current risk, but additional context would be required for evaluating future risk.
For more rural or agricultural planning authorities, there was also value in land use and land cover data from NatureScot, which allows risk to peatlands and croplands to be assessed. For coastal areas this data could also be analysed alongside Dynamic Coast data.
Based on the interviews and workshop discussions, participants expressed several areas where they had difficulty using data for specific outcomes or were not sure what to use.
Most of the datasets which were found to be of value for the evidence report were not hosted by a single source such as the Improvement Service Spatial Hub. The overhead effort of data acquisition for the planning authorities could be improved by more of the data providers providing a copy of their data to the Spatial Hub. However, this approach would not be straightforward with all datasets, such as those which are licensed (e.g. BGS), or those were the provider includes an analytical interface for extracting key indicators (Met Office LACS or UK-CRI).
Analytical tools
We reviewed several different analytical tools, such as CLIMADA[12] and OpenCLIM[13] which are designed to support users in analysing climate datasets and produce new data outputs indicating risk. These tools are open source, adaptable and suitable for academic use cases. In our interviews and workshops, we did not receive any feedback from planning authorities on these tools, suggesting they do not use them. As they require a high degree of specific technical proficiency (e.g. running python code), they may not be particularly suited to the planning authority teams who are producing evidence reports.
Current Approach
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) or Climate Change Risk Assessments (CCRAs) are available for some planning authorities and some regions of Scotland. These include the Clyde area, and one in preparation for south east Scotland.
Nationally, there is the UK CCRA Independent Assessment (Climate Change Committee, 2021a) and the National Summary for Scotland (Sniffer, 2021). These documents are long, difficult to navigate, and have a comprehensive list of wide-ranging risks. For anyone with limited familiarity with climate science and/or individual sectors, it is hard to understand which risks are most relevant to their planning authority or which risks are most important to planning. Risks in these documents are categorised with urgency and magnitude scores, and there is no scoring of impact or likelihood (apart from flooding likelihood) at a national, regional or local scale. Planning authorities need this information for their evidence report requirements, but it is not provided in the national CCRA3.
National documentation on adaptation (i.e. Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programme: progress report 2023 to 2024) does not directly relate to local planning process and/or is difficult for the untrained person to see the links. The wider list of literature reviewed is given in Section 9.4.1.
Local climate risk assessment barriers and challenges – findings from the academic literature
Research related to mapping climate risk has increased rapidly in recent years. Studies are usually area- and problem-specific, which means that there is no standardised approach. Some maps focus on the local level, such as a city scale, but some have also looked nationally. Some also consider both spatial scales. Similarly, maps that assess climate risk can vary in perspective, such as focusing on one climate hazard because it disproportionately affects the study area the map is produced for. While many do take a multi-hazard approach, some focus on specific challenges such as heat, flooding, and drought.
Methodological process can also vary greatly across such assessments which may affect results so, for decision-makers, it can be challenging to decide which method is most appropriate to use. One key feature of many CRVA maps is the weighting of variables, which affects the extent of which specific variables may influence overall scoring. The SIMD dataset from the Scottish Government, as an example, weights income and employment indicators more heavily than housing in its determination of the deprivation index. However, in a climate risk context, a different weighting may be more appropriate. From a local perspective, weighting variables may be beneficial as they can provide more accurate results for decision-makers. However, in some cases it is difficult to achieve and an unweighted approach is preferred. Reasons can include
a lack of data or local studies
the risk of politicisation that may underpin the decisions upon weighting which links to subjectivity and
complexities around how different climate hazards may weight other variables differently.
Ultimately, adaptation to climate change should be a process that is iterative and embedded into organisational practices. Knowledge underpinning decisions may be imperfect, incomplete, or comprise other challenges such as those outlined above. It is important nevertheless that the process is started with the best knowledge and data available at the time. In repeating the process, more experience is gained, and the challenges can begin to be addressed (Greenham et al., 2024b).
Approach to the evidence report
Current position
In both the interviews and workshop, the planning authorities were at different stages of preparing their evidence reports. This ranged from those at very early stages of preparation through to authorities who have drafted their evidence report and received feedback from the Gate Check[14]. It is important to note that the small number of authorities having received the Gate Check at the point of the interviews and workshop, meaning a small sample may have impacted some of the feedback, alongside the relatively small sample of planning authorities that could be engaged during this short project.
The participants’ attitudes towards producing the evidence report were slightly more positive than their understanding of climate risks in general, with a generally positive sentiment (Figure 2)
Figure 2 – Sentiment captured during the workshop from the participants
Different approaches
The approaches used by planning authorities varied significantly, with different methods to identify data including policy review, evidence audits and workshops.
The teams undertaking evidence reports ranged in number of staff from 1-2 to 4-5 people. The use of specialist data or climate specialist colleagues in other departments within the planning authorities varied.
There appears to be a disparity on the anticipated timescales and resources required to undertake the evidence report. This depends on the extent to which planning authorities have already undertaken a climate change risk or vulnerability assessment and could be more reflective of local authority capabilities to conduct and deliver the output.
Some authorities have access to pre-prepared local or regional climate risk assessments or are part of existing climate ready projects (see Section 5.6). Others have access to climate change profiles, which provided an overview of expected future climate change. We also found some authorities had not explored climate risk and therefore had little existing evidence or experience to work from.
However, it was noted that even those planning authorities which had undertaken previous assessments found it difficult to access primary data. They were mainly using the conclusions of the past risk assessments to inform their evidence reports.
The implications of interpreting the data in a climate context and what the evidence actual means for informing or changing the local development plans was not always clear.
Using data to produce the reports
Concerns were raised by participants over the dynamic nature of the data, new data being published, and old data being updated. Not only did this make it hard to identify the latest datasets, but it also gave rise to concerns about evidence becoming out of date soon after reports were developed[15].
Concerns were also raised about the complex array of caveats and limitations that are inherent in much of the data. This included concerns about their own understanding and interpretation, and how these limitations should be portrayed in the reports in a non-technical manner.
Another issue raised was an inability to find locally specific data at a sub-local authority resolution; one local authority wanted to take a ‘neighbourhood’-level approach but felt that data did not exist to support this.
Data accessibility challenges
Challenges in accessing and fully utilising data exist at several points, and in ways which varied across planning authorities.
Firstly, a very broad set of potential datasets which could be used exists. The planning authorities had to locate many different data sources to compile the data they needed.
Next, the data needed to be downloaded and formatted from the different data sources and while most of the data required is licensable freely to planning authorities, we found a subset where the licensing implications and restrictions were unclear. In the case where the work was being carried out by organisations external to the planning authorities (e.g. Sniffer), additional barriers were faced as access to PSGA licensed data is not immediately granted, and additional contractor licenses need to be provided. PSGA contractor licenses are free, and they limit the scope of external use of the data to specifically the contracted work.
Once the data is obtained, its application to understanding climate risks and hazards is not always straightforward. Some information is in a readily usable format, while others require expert input before analysis is possible. In the case of datasets such as Dynamic Coast, or data presented via the Met Office Local Authority Climate Service, data is pre-transformed and interpreted in a climate context. As an example, the Met Office LACS provides simple indices such as “Average Number of Extreme Summer Days”. This contrasts with datasets such as UKCP18, where a user will need to download the dataset, isolate the area of interest, extract the climate values, and determine what metric to rate them against. This is a time-consuming process, requiring both geospatial and climate expertise.
Understanding how to link the data back to the guidance and the requirements of the evidence report is a key required outcome, and the extent to which accessing this insight from the data can be achieved varies widely across the datasets used.
Understanding climate risks
Concerns were expressed in the workshop by participants from smaller planning and development teams about resourcing, where there was little or no dedicated resource within the team, or even access to a dedicated individual with climate change knowledge. This makes the process more difficult and time consuming for these planning authorities.
Risks vary from area to area, but additionally will vary over time as the climate changes. We found that many workshop participants were focused on a current view of risk, rather than being informed on how risks might change based on future projections. Risks across different hazard areas discussed, and whether they seemed well represented or potentially underrepresented in the workshops are outlined in Table 1. Additionally, not all planning authorities had fully defined which hazards were most appropriate for their region.
Given many planning authorities already have a track record in modelling flood risk, and have a greater understanding of flood risks specifically, there is a heavy focus on flooding. There is less awareness of other climate risks, specifically future climate risks, and how they may relate to development planning. In some cases, there is confusion between climate mitigation (through reduction of greenhouse gas emissions) and adaption to reduce climate risk.
The value of pre-existing work
In some instances, planning authorities were (or will be) able to build upon pre-existing work. Of particular value is work focused on climate risk, and the production of data layers specifically to allow easy interpretation from a wide range of users.
The data and findings from examples like Climate Ready Clyde and Climate Ready South East Scotland can be re-used and built upon for consistency, as well as reducing the effort required for an evidence report specifically. However, planning authorities who have not benefited from these will be at a relative disadvantage.
Climate Ready Clyde
Climate Ready Clyde (CRC)[16] is a leading cross-sector initiative funded by 12 member organisations and supported by Scottish Government to create and deliver a shared vision, strategy and action plan for an adapting Glasgow City Region. CRC have produced Glasgow City Region’s Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan (Sniffer, 2024a) which includes a webmap (created by Clydeplan) that shows the location of postcodes most vulnerable to the impacts of climate change (Clydeplan, 2022). This includes heat risk (derived from the 4EI Heat Hazard Index[17]) and a layer highlighting postcodes within the top two heat risk bands. The work from CRC on the Climate Risk and Opportunity Assessment and data layers in the vulnerability map directly informed Glasgow City Council’s Evidence report.
Figure 3 – Glasgow City Region Climate Vulnerability Map
Climate Ready South East Scotland
A new project to support collaborative climate action in the Edinburgh and south east Scotland City Region. Climate Ready South East Scotland[18] is led by Sniffer, working in partnership with the region’s six local authorities: City of Edinburgh, East Lothian, Fife, Midlothian, Scottish Borders and West Lothian.
Climate Ready South East Scotland plans to:
Identify and prioritise the risks and opportunities from climate change to Edinburgh and south east Scotland’s society, economy and environment between now and 2080.
Lay the foundation for a transformational approach to climate adaptation and resilience for the city region.
Support a just transition to a net zero and climate resilient economy, in a way that delivers fairness and tackles inequality and injustice.
A detailed assessment of the climate risks and opportunities faced by the Edinburgh and south east Scotland City Region will be carried out, and is intended to be published by March 2025. This assessment will both draw on the best available scientific evidence, and work with communities across the region to gather and share their experiences of climate change. It will inform decision-making across the region, laying the foundation for collaborative climate adaptation action (Sniffer, 2024b).
We collated six overall observations, looking across the literature review, interviews and workshop.
A focus on flooding and a lack of awareness of available non-flood data
Knowledge and understanding of flood risk and applicable datasets is much more established with planning authorities. While this experience is valuable, it does lead to a focus on flooding to the detriment of the consideration of other risks.
In general, the participants revealed a lack of awareness around climate change projection data, including where to source it and how to use it. As an example, whilst some participants with backgrounds and expertise in climate had knowledge of the data, planners in general were far less familiar with UKCP18 data, when asked about data they used. Most questions on data were directed back to flood information. In one interview, when questioned more on UKCP18 there appeared to be no knowledge of where this data can be located and how to access it. Some statements suggested a lack of understanding of what climate projections are and different scenarios used, however this was not fully probed in the interviews. This data is key in understanding the risks that planning authorities will face in the future and the degree of potential impact.
Spatial data not always used
The use of spatial data appears limited even though the use of it in evidence reports is supported by the Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b). Whilst some spatial datasets are well known by planning authorities (e.g. SEPA flood maps) the use of further datasets is not extensive due to poor understanding of the geospatial data required and/or ability and access to staff with the right skills to use and interpret geospatial data.
Simple indices support interpretation
Interviewees generally favoured datasets which provide simple indices tailored to the climate risk context, such as SEPA flood maps and Dynamic Coast. These datasets allow interpretation by users without specific climate or data expertise. This contrasts with the UKCP18 data, as an example, which provides users with hazard data like temperature and rainfall values over time. Considerable interpretation would need to be done to translate this data into a measure of risk which can be interpreted. Users without climate or geospatial data experience can be supported in understanding the implications if the data is pre-prepared, and presented with relatively simple indicators.
Section 9.2 provides examples of tools and datasets which have been developed outwith Scotland, used to support users without climate expertise in understanding risks.
Simplification of the approach is needed
There is a need to simplify the approach that planners adopt, to enable them to incorporate climate adaptation into their plans. The evidence report is an important part of this process to help development of a baseline and support understanding of the climate risks faced by planning authorities now and in the future. To do this, a Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (CRVA), which considers key hazard, vulnerability and exposure data, is a valuable prerequisite to identify those risks which can be mitigated by planning. Spatial data is key to undertaking an accurate and specific assessment, although there is currently no simple tool to support it. An example of this would be the methods and approach taken by the University of Birmingham for work done for one local authority (Birmingham) and one regional authority (West Midlands) in England (see Section 9.2). Aside from a tool, authorities would benefit from greater understanding of the key datasets which provide the best outcomes. This mirrors findings from the evidence report gate checks completed to date.
Prior work and climate data skills are advantageous
There was a general observation (which was also identified by several stakeholders) that some planning authorities faced greater challenges in the evidence report process. This is because they have little prior work on climate risk, less technical data skills within the team and no dedicated climate change professional within the Council.
Planning support and guidance is not specific on the application of data
The literature review illustrates that there is little information on climate risks and resilience that is written to support either local authority planners or the evidence report process. There is a wide range of data available, which could be used in many different approaches to be applied to understanding climate risk and appropriate adaptations. Furthermore, there is a gap in knowledge on how climate risk impacts planning and how planners can enhance climate resilience through planning requirements and the local development plan. Such information contextualised for Scottish planners would be invaluable to support the evidence report process and would allow adaptation to become business as usual within planning processes.
Conclusions
The following conclusions drawn from this research project to improve the evidence base for climate resilient planning policy are:
Accessibility and usability of data
There are numerous and varied datasets required to consider the range of vulnerabilities to, and impacts from, climate risks. There are several key datasets which are underutilised by planning authorities currently.
Many planning authorities do not have a clear and specific understanding of what data is needed to assess climate risk and vulnerabilities. The accompanying Briefing Note for Scottish Planning authorities to this research report (see Section 9.5) should provide support in providing signposted usable data.
Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water infrastructure and landslides. Proxies can be used, e.g. combining urban form, green space, and housing quality to assess urban heat island risk. However, consideration should be taken to ensure a consistent methodology, and a proportional amount of effort given potential risk.
The most useable and accessible data sources, such SEPA, Dynamic Coast, and Met Office LACS provide pre-determined, simple indices which provide a clear indication of climate risk. These allow planners to make clear decisions, without having to apply climate or data expertise to determine risk themselves.
Not all datasets provide simple indices, however, there are several datasets which could be used by planning authorities in the evidence reports which are not widely used currently. A consistent methodology for planners on how the indicators can be derived and used to incorporate adaptation and resilience into local planning would be advantageous.
Longer term, a single entry-point to these datasets would make this process easier for the planners and ensure that all Planning authorities have similar data to undertake the assessments
The data required is also mostly free for planning authorities, however, there are some licensing differences to be aware of when publishing to the public. See 9.1.2 – Data Licensing for further detail.
Accessibility could also be improved with further guidance on certain requirements mean and how they can be achieved. For example, the requirements ask planning authorities to assess the likelihood of risks occurring. This is a complex task, requiring knowledge of the climate hazards, how they will change, uncertainties, the ranges of climate outcomes depending on scenarios. Guidance on how to define likelihood and how to use data to evaluate likelihood is important, and can be paired with a specific indication of which dataset can be used for that purpose.
Understanding and capacity
Planning authorities find it time-consuming and difficult to get the required data from all the different providers.
Undertaking climate change risk assessments prior to the evidence report would provide a better understanding of which risks and hazards are most impactful.
However, planning authorities may need help doing this (especially the smaller planning authorities and/or those without climate and GIS and data experts), including:
Direct funding to outsource.
Support to identify partners and apply for funding.
Sharing or secondment of staff with climate resilience/climate science and GIS and data skills.
Collaboration and co-funding with neighbouring/regional planning authorities, like the ‘Climate Ready’ regional projects.
As an example, Sniffer is an independent charity that supports and coordinates the climate ready programmes in Scotland, including work such as webinars which discuss the use of different datasets. Sniffer currently hold a Scottish Government funded contract (Adaptation Scotland) to provide some capacity building support to planning authorities. This could be expanded to provide wider support for the climate change risk assessment process and support planners in translating the findings into the evidence report and the local development plans.
It should also be noted that the assessment of likelihood of risks occurring, beyond flood risk, is not undertaken in the UKCCRA3 or Scotland’s national summary.
It is useful to understand and address vulnerability at the evidence report stage, although stakeholders did not seem familiar with this as a concept or how it might be assessed.
Potential for action
Based on the findings from this research, the following actions could be explored in the short term to enhance and improve the coverage and usefulness of evidence reports:
Engage with the Met Office for a review of planner-specific user experience when accessing the latest UK Climate Projections (UKCP18)
The impression from most stakeholders was that UKCP18 projections are daunting and avoided by planners. The Met Office Local Authority Climate Service (LACS) (Met Office, 2024a) is still in beta, and feedback should be provided on how it could further meet the needs of Scottish planners.
Explore whether non-flood related climate data could be sourced directly via an existing data service for the creation of bespoke Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment indices and geospatial data portal relevant to planning in Scotland.
Explore the inclusion of features to support the National Park planning authorities in the LACS.
Engage with the British Geological Survey (BGS) to explore expansion of access for the assessment of landslide risk – and potential inclusion of licensed data.
Provide planners with further detail on which aspects of various datasets are valuable for their local plans, including the climate risks which planning should address (e.g. overheating, surface water flooding).
Encourage cross-authority engagement and collaboration. Given the inconsistent availability of knowledge, skills and capacity, peer learning and support can potentially provide a valuable approach to improving quality and consistency.
Share and promote the list of data (from this research) as a standalone resource, cross referenced with the relevant climate risks. See accompanying data catalogue (Section 9.5).
This research also clarifies which data licences may be required to support evidence report production, and further guidance on the impacts of the different license types.
Investigate funding options for regional Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments. As a first step, a CRVA provides a clear steer on what the key risks are, therefore allowing a more targeted approach to the Evidence reports.
Scope out the requirements for a Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment data platform for centralising the hosting of key datasets. In addition, this should include the development of new datasets and indicators which allow interpretation to non-climate, or non-geospatial users more easily. This could be delivered as a new tool or an extension to an existing one.
There is potential in the longer term to make the key national datasets available, with pre-interpreted indices available in one location. The data could have simple (e.g. high, medium, low) indices with user friendly guidance on what the data is, what it means and caveats (this could be 4-5 key hazards, with a climate vulnerability index). It could link directly to the datasets that have been identified in this report and could also potentially use some of the data from the analytics tools. This would require further research and dialogue with potential providers.
Ferranti, E., Cook, S., Greenham, S.V., Grayson, N., Futcher, J. and Salter, K., (2023) Incorporating Heat Vulnerability into Local Authority Decision Making: An Open Access Approach. Sustainability, 15(18), p.13501. https://doi.org/10.3390/su151813501
Grace, E., Marcinko, C., Paterson, C., & Stobbs, W. (2025). Using future climate scenarios to support today’s decision making. CXC/Government Actuary’s Department.
Greenham, SV., Jones, SA., Ferranti, EJS., Zhong, J., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Grayson, N., (2023) Mapping climate risk and vulnerability with publicly available data. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham. Available online: https://doi.org/10.25500/epapers.bham.00004259 [last accessed October 2024]
Greenham, S, Ferranti, E, Jones, S, Zhong, J, Grayson, N, Needle, S, Acton, J, MacKenzie, AR & Bloss, W. (2024a) An open access approach to mapping climate risk and vulnerability for decision-making: A case study of Birmingham, United Kingdom, Climate Services, vol. 36, 100521. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cliser.2024.100521
Greenham, SV., Ferranti, EJS., Cork, NA., Jones, SA., Zhong, J., Haskins, B., Grayson, N., Needle, S., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Bloss, WJ. (2024b). Mapping climate risk and vulnerability in the West Midlands. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham. https://doi.org/10.25500/epapers.bham.00004371
IPCC (2014a). Summary for policymakers. In: Climate Change 2014: Impacts, Adaptation, and Vulnerability. Part A: Global and Sectoral Aspects. Contribution of Working Group II to the Fifth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, United Kingdom and New York, NY, USA, pp. 1-32. Available at https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar5/wg2/.
Scottish Government (2023a) The Town and Country Planning (Development Planning) (Scotland) Regulations 2023. Available online at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1997/8/contents [last accessed October 2024].
Sniffer (2024a) Climate Ready Clyde, Building a more resilient, prosperous and fairer Glasgow City Region. Available online: https://climatereadyclyde.org.uk/ [last accessed October 2024].
Sniffer (2024b) Climate Ready South East Scotland, Supporting regional climate action in the Edinburgh and South East Scotland City Region. Available online: https://climatereadyses.org.uk/about/ [last accessed October 2024]
UK Climate Change Committee (2021a) Independent Assessment of UK Climate Risk
Zhong, J, Lu, Y, Stocker, J, Hamilton, V & Johnson, K. (2024) Modelling the urban heat island in Birmingham, UK at the neighbourhood scale. In EGU General Assembly 2024., EGU24-19930, EGU General Assembly 2024, Vienna, Austria, 14/04/24. https://doi.org/10.5194/egusphere-egu24-19930
Appendices
Definition of Terms
Usability
Usability is summarised as follows:
‘High’ – a dataset which provides simple indices in a climate hazard and risk context and access and can be interpreted easily. Users will not need specific GIS or climate expertise to understand planning outcomes from these datasets.
‘Medium’ – data is relatively accessible but requires expertise to interpret or transform. To understand the data in a climate hazard and risk context, as well as planning outcomes, specific expertise in either climate, or GIS will be required.
‘Low’ – a dataset which requires specialist knowledge, expertise or skills. Extensive expertise, as well as time and effort will need to be applied to this data in order to arrive at indicators that can be used to make planning decisions.
Data Licensing
The information is provided as guidance on the description and general consequences of the common license types encountered for data. However, care should always be taken to ensure that if any data is used, the license and its limits should be validated before use or distribution.
Table 9.1 – Relevant data licences and their impact on planning authorities
License Name
Description
Outcomes for planning authorities
Link
OGL – Open Government License
A UK government defined license that encourages the public sharing of government created data
OGL generally supports data being used for most purposes internally at a local authority, and shared publicly in full
The license under which premium Ordnance Survey data is licensed to UK central and local governments
The PSGA license generally supports planning authorities in using data internally for all government functions. However, the data cannot be published and shared publicly in full. OS provides details on the full obligations.[19]
A permissive public copyright license that enables the free distribution of copyrighted work
CC-BY generally supports data being used for most purposes internally at a local authority, and shared publicly in full, so long as attribution is given.
There are many sub types of Creative Commons licenses, so refer to the Creative Commons site for more details
BSD is licenses are generally for software rather than data, but it is a very permissive license that imposes few limits on what can be done – a local authority could use BSD licensed software for any use internally, and then publish publicly in full
Climate Risk Vulnerability Assessment methods – the University of Birmingham
A Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (CRVA) map is a method co-developed by the WM-Air project team at the University of Birmingham with local and regional stakeholders across Birmingham and the West Midlands. A CRVA map shows how geospatial climate risk data may be used by local planning authorities. It is pulled together using different environmental, physical, and socio-economic datasets to understand how climate risk varies across an area. The mapping approach prioritises using publicly accessible data and can be replicated by other planning authorities to improve climate resilience (Greenham et al., 2023).
Figure 4 – Birmingham City Council Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment map
Birmingham City Council recently published their CRVA (Greenham et al., 2023) on the city’s website (Birmingham City Council, 2024). The CRVA map scores areas of Birmingham based on compiling the presence and extent of 11 different factors that may influence the impact of climate change, where the higher the score, the more at-risk and vulnerable an area and its citizens are likely to be to climate change. The approach is considered a Minimum Viable Product (MVP), i.e. it works, and refinements can be made through use.
West Midlands Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (WM-CRVA) Map
Figure 5 – West Midlands Combined Authority Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment Map
The University of Birmingham also collaborated with the West Midlands Combined Authority (WMCA); co-developing a CRVA map for the wider West Midlands (Greenham et al., 2024a). It takes forward the Birmingham MVP approach by including greater consideration of vulnerability. The overall CRVA map scores are based on 24 different factors, each of which is considered one of either a hazard, vulnerability, or exposure factor influencing climate risk.
Methodology
Our approach included two key phases the Discovery phase and the Analysis phase. The discovery phase involved a continuation of planning and refining the scope, and identifying the key tasks needed to ensure we had the full background and context to successfully undertake the research. The Analysis phase involved the main research tasks, including stakeholder engagement and a deep dive analysis of currently available climate risk and hazard data. Both are described in more detail below.
Discovery Phase
A desktop literature review was conducted (August 2024). The literature included covered information on climate change methods, past climate risk or vulnerability studies (where spatial data was used), and information relevant to climate risk in Scotland as well as the latest policy documents around climate adaptation for Scotland. Here we identified which risks were commonly highlighted within Scotland and what data has been used by others to represent those risks. As well as summarising the key policies relevant to the topic climate change risk and adaptation for the Evidence reports. The literature review findings were summarised in an excel spreadsheet. The full references to the literature are included in Appendix Literature review (Section 9.4.1).
Three of the currently available evidence reports were also reviewed, this allowed us to understand the current work by planning authorities and what approaches they took. We also began to identify gaps between the produced Evidence reports and the requirements.
A long list of potential workshop invitees was developed, this was to be refined within the analysis phase.
Identified a proposed list of relevant data with key search parameters for deep dive assessment. Research partners the University of Birmingham shared the data lists for both their CRVA mapping projects for Birmingham City Council and the West Midlands Combined Authority for review in the context of identifying the same UK wide datasets of their Scottish equivalents.
Set out an initial stakeholder engagement plan for the approach to both the interviews and a workshop, which was reviewed by and agreed with CXC.
Analysis Phase
Undertook the dataset deep dive and identified key practical characteristics including cost, availability, and accessibility
In the stakeholder engagement plan the approach for both the interviews and workshops were also set out. For the interviews we identified a list of stakeholders, this included three planning authorities that had or were in the process of undertaking the Evidence reports. We asked to speak to relevant individuals who had written the reports or who would be or were significantly involved in gathering climate evidence. Here, knowledge gained from the literature review was used to develop appropriate questions to help us better understand the local authority’s approach to gathering evidence, their understanding of the requirements and any difficulties they had faced or anticipated facing, and confidence with the topic (a full list of the interview questions can be found in Appendix Interview responses, Section 9.4.2).
When selecting stakeholders for both interviews and workshops we aimed to get a mix of stages within the development report process. We also ensured we had a good geographic spread of participants representing the wide range of planning authorities in Scotland. This included, coastal, city based, and Island based planning authorities.
During this analysis phase we held three interviews with representatives of Fife Council (21st August 2024), Comhairle Nan Eilean Siar (28th August 2024) and Glasgow City Council (3rd September 2024). Interviews included multiple members of the Arup team representing planning, Climate and data expertise as well as a note taker. All interviews were recorded with the permission of the participants. Interview findings were summarised in Appendix Interview responses (Section 9.4.2).
After the initial interviews a virtual ‘Prioritisation Workshop’ (17th September 2024) which included representatives from the planning authorities we interviewed, other planning authorities (across a geographic spread and at differing stages in their LDP) and other relevant wider stakeholders (such as representative from Sniffer). The workshop was developed using the findings of the interviews, so that the activities probed at areas of interest and or areas not fully covered by the interviews. The aim of this workshop was to further discuss how planning authorities can improve their access to geospatial data for climate adaptation.
Underlying assumptions
CXC facilitated introductions to key stakeholders for engagement. Engagements were virtual, via Microsoft Teams.
The sample of planning authorities involved was not aiming to be extensive or include all Scottish LPAs, given the scope, size and duration of this research project, but aimed to have good representation across geography, size and stage of progress with the Evidence report.
Literature review and stakeholder engagement
Literature review
A desktop literature review was conducted during the discovery phase, and a full list of references is provided here.
Table 9.3: Full list of references for literature review
Full reference
Link
Birmingham City Council (2024) Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment map.
Centre for Sustainable Energy and the Town and Country Planning Association (2023) Spatial planning for Climate resilience and Net Zero (CSE&TCPA). UK Climate Change Committee
Greenham, SV., Ferranti, EJS., Cork, NA., Jones, SA., Zhong, J., Haskins, B., Grayson, N., Needle, S., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Bloss, WJ. (2024b). Mapping climate risk and vulnerability in the West Midlands. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham
Greenham, SV., Jones, SA., Ferranti, EJS., Zhong, J., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Grayson, N., 2023. Mapping climate risk and vulnerability with publicly available data. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham.
Scottish Government / Riaghaltas an h-Alba (2024) Draft Scottish National Adaptation Plan (2024-2029): Actions today, for a climate resilient future. 31 January 2024.
This section provides the interview questions and a summary of the answer given by all three planning authorities interviewed.
Q1: What is your role in preparing the Evidence report?
Most stakeholders interviewed were planning officers based in planning services or equivalent.
Teams working on this topic of the Evidence report ranged from 1-2 to 4-5 members of staff as the core team. Though generally one or two key individuals took responsibility or a key co-ordination role.
Use of expertise outside of teams also varied including some drawing on data individuals or climate and sustainability officers.
Q2: What is the status of your Evidence report? And what are the next steps?
Ranged from early stages of prep to just complete and complete and addressing feedback.
Q3: How clear to you were the requirements / guidance for assessing climate risk through the Evidence report?
Responses to this question were mixed, some stated the guidance “left a lot open to interpretation”, feeling it was hard to understand what they actually needed to do.
One Local Authority said the guidance was clear in answer to this question but after further probing it appeared they were not sure on several of the elements within the requirements.
One response stated that requirements were easier to interpret due to knowledge of other resources.
Q4: How did you assess climate risk/climate change within your Evidence report?
In one interview the approach had not been developed and it was too early to discuss.
The other two planning authorities relied heavily on information that had been previously produced for the area, such as past climate profiles or regional risk assessments. Using this information and interpreting it rather than new information or raw data designed specifically for the Evidence report.
One Local Authority took a place-based approach but struggled with assessing climate risk on this level.
Q5: How have you assessed vulnerability to climate change and inequalities?
This question was generally not well answered indicating that there was a lack of understanding on the requirements around assessing vulnerability.
One Local Authority alluded to have a copy of a vulnerability index, but not sure where it was sourced from (potentially from SEPA).
Q6: Do you know what datasets were required to undertake climate risk assessment?
One Council in the early stages indicated that they did not yet know what datasets would be required to complete assessments but were aware of the recommended data sets.
Another realised on using report summarising previous regional risk assessments and interpreted screenshots from these reports. They had tried to get the data but had difficulty locating/accessing it.
Generally, when talking about data the focus was flood data. No participant mentioned raw climate projection data. Heat hazard data was mentioned by a single Local Authority but in the context of difficulties getting the data.
Q7: Do you know how to/have the ability to access them (within the team)?
Answers for this question were mixed some had dedicated contacts they could reach out too for data others stated they struggled knowing which data was relevant.
When probed there generally seemed to be a lack of knowledge on what data was out there, without even thinking about how to access, use and interpret the data.
General staff resources were flagged as an issue and time needed to use datasets.
One Local Authority had external GIS support for these kind of tasks from a cross local authority collaboration to share resource, with a 2-year secondment, though this was a resource with a limited timescale.
Q8: Is there anything else you would like to share about the process?
One set of interviews mentioned that they were beginning to realise the size and scope of the task of gathering and analysing climate risk data as they begin process of evidence gathering.
One Local Authority mentioned concern about understanding how all of this actually linked into to planning and how in general the evidence would be used to influence planning.
One also mentioned they had a lot of support from their climate team and could sense check and problem solve with their guidance. This was an invaluable resource.
Workshop
Arup and the University of Birmingham undertook a stakeholder workshop on 17 September 2024 for ClimateXChange Scotland and the Scottish Government on Improving access to geospatial climate risk data. The purpose of this workshop was to discuss together how planning authorities can improve their access to geospatial data for climate adaptation in the context of development planning.
The online workshop brought together planning authorities (across a geographic spread and at differing stages in their LDP) to better understand their needs as a local planning authority and/or climate policy team:
to prepare Evidence reports,
as users of this geospatial climate risk data and;
understand any current challenges or gaps that need addressing
The workshop provided information on key hazards and risks the planning authorities had been or anticipated focussing on and what data would or had been used. The workshop built on the interviews by delving deeper into the data and methods of analysis. Providing further insight on data gaps, ease of use and challenges faced by the planning authorities.
Additional Resources
Data catalogue
The data catalogue spreadsheet is available online:
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
The LDP is required under The Town and Country Planning (Scotland) Act 1997 (Scottish Government, 1997), as amended by the Planning (Scotland) Act 2019 (Scottish Government, 2019). Relevant secondary legislation and published guidance includes The Town and Country Planning (Development Planning) (Scotland) Regulations 2023 (Scottish Government, 2023a) as well as Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b). ↑
A detailed description of licensing terms and their implication, such as OGL, PSGA, BSD and CC-BY are provided in 9.1.2 – Data Licensing ↑
The relevance of the dataset to the hazard groups as discussed with participants. Definitions are shown in Table 1 ↑
Captures ease of use by local authority officials. See 9.1.1 – Usability for more detail ↑
Administered by the Planning and Environmental Appeals Division, the Gate Check is a process through which the sufficiency of the evidence report is assessed, to confirm there is a sound evidence base on which to prepare a Local Development Plan ↑
From an LDP guidance perspective the evidence available at the time of writing the report is proportionate and sufficient. ↑
Heat loss from domestic buildings has been identified as a major source of carbon emissions. Energy Performance Certificates (EPCs) present energy efficiency ratings for buildings. They will become an increasingly important tool in quantifying energy loss for individual properties in Scotland, as outlined in the proposed Heat in Buildings Bill.
This study reviews the approaches taken in European Union (EU) member states on operational governance of EPCs, through a desk-based literature review, expert interviews and in-depth case studies of three countries of interest.
We identify opportunities for Scotland to learn from examples of best practice in other countries. We also present a series of options that could be implemented as part of a potential reform of the operational framework for EPC governance in Scotland.
Key findings
Governance models
Member states allocate responsibility for EPC implementation and quality assurance of their EPC regimes in different ways. Some member states utilise a central government body, and others use a publicly funded arms-length body. A few member states use an external private organisation or allocate this responsibility at a regional level.
Minimum qualifications, training and accreditation for EPC assessors
Member states must ensure that EPC assessors are suitably qualified and certified. They do this by setting requirements for assessors, such as a higher education degree, and/or professional experience in a related field. Most member states also have approved training courses and/or examinations, which might be voluntary or mandatory. Some countries also require mandatory recertification or retraining after a set period of time or require programmes of continuous professional development.
Auditing and quality assurance in the production of EPCs
Member states must ensure that quality standards are upheld in the production of EPCs. They are required to carry out random sampling of EPCs, although some member states conduct random sampling of total EPCs issues, and others sample a percentage of EPCs per assessor. Some member states also choose to conduct additional targeted audits, which can be desk-based or on-site and are triggered by specific risk factors. Some member states also use digital screening systems, which automatically screen input data to identify incorrect or inconsistent data.
All member states implement some sort of penalty system for assessor errors to uphold quality standards. These usually depend on the severity of the infraction, but include reissuing the EPC, additional targeted training, or monetary fines. For severe or repeat offences, assessors in some member states can also have their assessor license suspended or withdrawn.
Enforcement mechanisms
Most member states can issue fines for failing to present a valid EPC at the point of sale or rental. However, many do not enforce this requirement or issue fines in practice and there are data gaps in how well the requirement is enforced. Analysis by the European Commission found that only a small number of member states have a robust system for enforcing the requirement to present an EPCs at the point of sale. Those that do require legal professionals to check that an EPC is present as part of the sale. However, rental agreements often do not involve a legal professional in the process, so they cannot be targeted in the same way as sales are more difficult to enforce.
Options for Scotland
We have established a list of potential options which could improve the operational governance of EPCs in Scotland.
Option 1 – Including standard training requirements for EPC assessors in the Operational framework
This could include introducing standard education and qualification requirements into the operational framework, approving a standardised mandatory training programme for EPC assessors, and/or requirements for assessors to attend mandatory annual re-training.
Option 2 – Develop standardised quality assurance procedures for approved organisations in the operational framework
This could include developing a digital quality assurance system to screen EPC input data, establishing a ‘Helpdesk’ function to receive complaints about EPCs, implementing targeted audits of EPCs based on specific risk factors and/or outlining a clear penalty system for assessor infractions.
Option 3 – Engage wider stakeholders in the rental/sales process to support enforcement of the requirement to present an EPC
Formalising the requirement for solicitors to check EPC documentation at the point of sale could help enforce this requirement in practice. Engaging stakeholders involved in the rental market, such as estate agents, could help encourage checking of EPC documentation for lettings.
Glossary and abbreviations table
ADENE
The Portuguese Energy Agency
AO
Approved organisations – whose members are approved to deliver EPCs in Scotland
APEL
Approved Prior Experiential Learning
BER
Building Energy Rating – energy efficiency ratings used for buildings in Ireland
CPD
Continuous professional development
CzK
Czech Koruna
EU
European Union
EPBD
Energy Performance of Buildings Directive
EPC
Energy Performance Certificate
HRK
Hrvatska Kuna (Croatian Kuna)
ICS
Independent Control System – EPBD requirement that member states must allocate responsibility for upholding the quality of EPCs and their associated QA procedures. This can be allocated to a government department or to an external organisation.
NVQ
National Vocational Qualification
Operational framework
The document which governs approved organisations in Scotland and outlines key processes to ensure that EPCs are prepared by sufficiently qualified persons
QQI
Quality and Qualifications Ireland
QA
Quality assurance
SEAI
Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland
VEKA
Flemish Energy and Climate Agency
Introduction
Context
Energy Performance Certificates in Scotland
The Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) is the primary legislative instrument used to promote energy efficiency in buildings in the European Union (EU). First published in 2002, it was recast in 2010, 2018 and most recently in May 2024 to align with the higher energy efficiency ambition in the European Green Deal (European Union, 2024).
The Energy Performance of Buildings (Scotland) Regulations 2008 transposed the original EU’s EPBD into Scottish statute. The Regulations dictate how Energy Performance Certificates (EPC) are implemented in Scotland, and outline that an EPC must be produced when a new building is constructed and when a building is sold or rented. This applies both to homes and to non-domestic buildings. EPCs contain an energy efficiency rating, as well as recommendations on how to improve a building’s energy efficiency. Therefore, they are widely considered to be useful tools for helping to drive emission reductions from buildings.
However, using EPCs as a basis upon which to set standards can be problematic, as a result of issues including:
Poor quality or low robustness of assessments
Infrequently updated assessments
Use of modelled data rather than actual energy performance data
A lack of incentives for decarbonising heat
To ensure that EPCs are fit for purpose in the context of Scotland’s leading net zero objectives, the Scottish Government is planning to revise the role of EPCs in line with the proposed Heat in Buildings Bill. There could be a more prominent role for EPCs, particularly as a tool for demonstrating compliance.
Operational governance of EPCs in Scotland and reform
In Scotland, an EPC must be produced by members of six “Approved Organisations” (AOs). Regulation 8(3) of the Energy Performance of Buildings Regulations (Scotland) 2008 requires that AOs “ensure that members are fit and proper persons who are qualified by their education, training and experience to carry out the preparation and issuing of energy performance certificates”. AOs therefore hold primary responsibility for training and accrediting EPC assessors in Scotland. An operational framework outlines key processes that ensure EPCs are prepared and issued by sufficiently qualified persons, including (Scottish Government, 2012):
Ensuring integrity and operational resilience
Accreditation of energy assessor members
Administering the operation of energy assessor members
Maintaining records to facilitate effective operation of the scheme and periodic audit by the Scottish Government
A report by Alembic Research Ltd et al, (2019) and commissioned by the Scottish Government, made recommendations on minimum standard qualifications for EPC assessors, auditors, and AOs. It also suggested an independent redress avenue for EPC consumers. In line with this, the Scottish Government are looking to assess and potentially review the Operating Framework and its role in upholding the quality and robustness of EPCs. This will ensure EPCs are fit for purpose in their potentially enhanced role in the upcoming Heat and Buildings Bill.
Objectives and scope
In this study, we investigate how the operational governance provisions of the EPBD have been implemented in the EU member states. This will enable us to identify opportunities for Scotland to learn from examples of best practice in other countries. The key objectives of this study are therefore to:
Review the approaches taken to operational governance of EPCs in EU member states
Identify different methods of implementation and areas of interest for Scotland
Develop options for potential reform of the operational framework for EPC governance in Scotland.
We only consider approaches taken in EU member states in this review. In addition, we do not consider aspects related to EPC methodologies. The focus is on the operational aspects of EPC governance. These include:
Governance model – whether central government or arms-length bodies hold responsibility for EPC governance, or if this is delegated to external organisations.
Training for EPC assessors – including coverage of any education prerequisites to apply for certification, training courses or examinations that assessors must complete, and any requirements for re-certification or retraining after a set period.
Auditing, verification and quality assurance (QA) procedures – the systems and processes in place to guarantee the quality of EPC production, how the requirement for an independent control system (ICS) is met, including who holds QA responsibilities and any penalties issued for assessor infractions.
Enforcement mechanisms – how member states enforce the requirement to present an EPC at the point of construction, sale or rental of a property, and any associated penalties
Affordability – any information identified on how member states ensure the affordability of EPCs, in line with Article 16 of the EPBD.
Methodology
We collected data for this study primarily through a desk-based literature review. This was supplemented with a series of interviews with EPC experts,[1] which we used to triangulate findings from the literature review and to fill any identified gaps in the evidence. We then selected three countries of interest for Scotland (Belgium, Croatia and Ireland) and developed an in-depth case study for each. The collected data was used to derive policy options for improving the operational governance of EPCs in Scotland. Full methodological detail, including relevant limitations, is presented in Appendix A.
Operational governance of EPCs in the EU member states
Governance models
This section explores the governance models that member states use to implement Energy Performance Certificate regimes, including how they delegate the responsibility for the Independent Control System required in the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive.
EPBD requirements
member states can delegate the responsibility for implementing the ICS for EPCs as they deem fit under Annex VI of the EPBD. This system aims to ensure the quality of EPCs and their associated QA procedures. (European Commission, 2021a). Amongst other requirements, the ICS should:
Provide a clear definition of a valid EPC, which should include requirements to check the validity of input data and calculations used to generate the EPC
Clearly outline the quality objectives and level of statistical confidence that the EPC framework should achieve (these are further explained in Section 4.3.1)
Ensure that EPCs are available to prospective buyers and tenants so that informed decisions can be made on their decision to buy or rent a property
Account for different building typologies, such as single residential, multi-residential, offices or retail
Regularly publish information on the ICS, through the national database of EPCs.
Member state approaches
Scottish approach
Scotland follows the approach agreed in the UK when the EPBD was transposed into domestic regulation in 2008, when the UK was an EU Member State.
The Scottish Government implements EPCs, including the ICS, through six external private organisations, called Approved Organisations. The Scottish Government has an agreement with these AOs, who are governed by an operational framework, which was published in 2012. Members of AOs are often self-employed energy assessors, whom the AOs contract to produce EPCs in line with government-approved methodologies and tools (Delorme and Hughes, 2016). However, the role of the AOs is to ensure that their members have the skills and expertise necessary to prepare and issue EPCs. They are also responsible for upholding QA protocols and for issuing penalties for incorrect EPCs.
A similar approach is adopted in England and Wales, where six independent accreditation schemes are responsible for managing energy assessors and for ensuring they possess the appropriate skills for the role.
Table 1 gives an overview of the governance models adopted in the member states. The majority place the responsibility of implementing the ICS for EPCs on a Central Government body. This approach is adopted in Greece for example, where the Department of Energy Inspection hold QA responsibilities (CRES, 2020). Some member states have allocated the responsibility of implementing the ICS on government-funded, arms-length bodies. For example, this is the approach adopted in Ireland, where the Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland (SEAI) is responsible, and in Slovakia, where this falls to the Slovak Trade Inspection. Both bodies are publicly funded, non-profit organisations separate to the central government Ministries and Departments responsible for overall EPC policy (SEAI, 2017b) (Slovak Trade Inspection, n.d.).
Governance model
Description
Examples of Member State adoption
Government body (Central Government Ministry or Department)
Most common model of governance adopted – the Government Ministry or Department made responsible for implementing the ICS
Cyprus, Czechia, Estonia, Finland, France, Greece, Croatia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Latvia, the Netherlands, Poland, Romania, Slovenia
Government body (arms-length bodies)
Responsibility of implementing the ICS lies with government-funded, arms-length organisations that are separate from the Government
Bulgaria, Denmark, Ireland, Hungary, Malta, Slovakia and Sweden
External body
Responsibility of the ICS lies with an external private organisation
ICS responsibilities are allocated differently at regional level
Austria, Belgium (Flanders, Brussels and Wallonia), Germany, Italy and Spain
Table 1: Overview of different governance models employed by MS.
Portugal has allocated the responsibility of implementing the EPBD and the ICS to an external body. The Portuguese Energy Agency (ADENE) oversees the central register and assessor accreditation. An EU-level EPC expert interviewed for this project perceived that this approach was adopted to separate EPC governance from changing political governments, instilling stability and allowing for a long-term vision for the system to be implemented.
Five member states implement the ICS at regional level. Each of the Belgian regions govern EPCs independently. In Austria, some regions have allocated responsibility of conducting QA on EPC data to the municipalities (OIB, 2020), whereas energy agencies oversee the QA in others (TU Wien, 2021). Italian regions and autonomous provinces had autonomy over energy topics until 2015, resulting in a complex regulatory framework. Guidelines for regulating EPCs were released in 2015 that implemented a new standardised EPC system at national level (Azzolini et al., 2020).
Minimum qualifications, training and accreditation for EPC assessors
This section outlines the training and certification schemes member states have adopted to ensure that EPC assessors are suitably qualified independent experts.
EPBD requirements
Article 25 of the EPBD sets out a requirement for member states to ensure that EPCs are carried out by ‘independent experts’. It outlines that:
Experts must be suitably qualified and certified, but can be self-employed, employed by public bodies or by private enterprises
Information on the training and certification process should be made available to the public
A list of certified experts or companies that offer the services of experts must be regularly updated and made available to the public.
Member state approaches
Scottish approach
The Operating Framework mandates that AOs reference the UK National Occupational Standards for Energy Assessors. These have been developed to ensure energy assessors are competent and possess the right skills to conduct energy assessments. A Level 3 NVQ qualification for assessors exists in Scotland, as well and in England and Wales. However, AOs are ultimately responsible for ensuring EPC assessors are suitably qualified in Scotland. Although some assessors obtain this NVQ, it is not mandatory and AOs use Approved Prior Experiential Learning (APEL), which considers relevant experience, skills, and training of a potential assessor.
EPC experts must complete a 3-5 day training course, designed and delivered by AOs. These can cost between £700 and £1250 (Kanzyl, 2020a). The type of accreditation depends on the building type to be assessed – with separate accreditations for:
Domestic EPCs (existing buildings).
Domestic EPCs (new buildings).
Non-domestic EPCs (existing buildings).
Non-domestic EPCs (new buildings).
Continuous professional development (CPD) is required, although the minimum level of CPD is specified by each AO (Delorme and Hughes, 2016). As AOs in Scotland are responsible for ensuring assessors are suitably qualified, and there are no minimum national standards for qualifications, training, or continuous professional development. Therefore, there may be a variation in standards across the country. The approach taken in England and Wales is similar, where accreditation schemes have discretion over whether assessors hold the necessary skills to become an assessor. However, energy assessors can satisfy requirements through training and examinations, or by demonstrating suitable qualifications and experience (Delorme & Higley, 2020).
Pre-Requisites for independent experts
Table 2 outlines the approaches member states have taken to setting pre-requisites for independent experts. Thirteen member states have set subject-specific educational requirements. These are all higher education requirements (either Bachelors or Masters) in subjects such as engineering and architecture. Sweden, Romania and the Netherlands are the only member states only requiring professional experience as a pre-requisite for accreditation. In Sweden for example, applicants must first have 5 years of professional experience to undergo the training for assessor accreditation (Hjorth et al., 2020).
Higher education (Bachelors or Masters) degree required. These are always in subjects such as engineering or architecture.
Austria, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czechia, Denmark, Finland, France, Greece, Croatia, Hungary, Italy, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Slovenia
Professional
Professional experience in a related field (such as construction)
Sweden, Romania and the Netherlands
Both education and professional
Combination of both educational and professional experience required
Estonia, Germany, Lithuania and Portugal
Flexible approach
Multiple pathways available to assessors (either education, or prior professional experience)
Belgium (Flanders, Brussels, Wallonia), Ireland, Scotland, England and Wales
Table 2: Overview of different pre-requisites for independent experts.
Some member states have more flexible requirements and recognise either professional or educational experience. Others, however, require both specific higher education degrees and professional experience. For example, in Lithuania applicants must have an engineering degree and three years’ experience in the construction sector (Kranzl, 2020a).
Training courses for independent experts
Table 3 outlines the approaches to training independent experts adopted by member states for assessor accreditation.
Mandatory accreditation training administered either by external certified organisations or government bodies
Germany, Estonia, Croatia, Luxembourg, Slovenia, Sweden and Scotland
Mandatory training and exam
Mandatory accreditation training and examination administered either by external certified organisations or government bodies
Belgium (Flanders, Brussels and Wallonia), Bulgaria, Cyprus, Denmark, Finland, France, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Lithuania, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, England and Wales[5]
Voluntary training only
Voluntary training for assessor accreditation, accreditation authority responsible for granting accreditation
Austria and Germany
Voluntary training and exam
Voluntary training for assessor accreditation, accreditation authority responsible for granting accreditation. Mandatory examination also required.
Cyprus and Hungary
Table 3: Overview of the different training requirements for independent experts.
Most member states have implemented a mandatory training programme for EPC assessor accreditation. The majority of member states (including Bulgaria, Denmark, Greece and Ireland) have also implemented a mandatory written examination as a requirement for accreditation. Malta requires both written and oral examinations (BPIE, 2014). Six member states (Austria, Germany, Estonia, Croatia, Luxembourg and Slovenia) do not have a mandatory exam for prospective assessors.
Some member states have only introduced a voluntary training scheme for assessor accreditation. In these member states (Austria and Germany), the authority responsible for assessor accreditation certifies experts based on professional experience or education achievements, without the adoption of mandatory training (Kranzl, 2020a) (BPIE, 2014). In Cyprus and Hungary, despite the adoption of voluntary training, completion of a mandatory exam is required for accreditation (BPIE, 2014). The training requirements for member states do not appear to be linked to the stringency of pre-requisites, for example, the countries who implement a voluntary training programme only do not necessarily have more stringent pre-requisites (and vice versa).
Training course administration
In most cases, training is administered by external, private organisations that have been approved by the Government. In Ireland for example, the national agency for qualifications, ‘Quality and Qualifications Ireland’ oversees the accreditation of training course providers. Only courses administered by these organisations are accepted (SEAI, 2017a). Similarly, in member states such as Denmark and Greece, a singular accreditation body has been appointed (National Energy Agency in Sweden and the Ministry of Environment, Energy and Climate Change in Denmark) (Ruggieri et al., 2023). An interview with an EPC expert in the Belgium (Flanders) highlighted that whilst the Flemish Government had outsourced the delivery of training and examinations to external providers, they are now in the process of re-instating the administration of the accreditation internally. No further clarification on why this was the case was provided.
Recertification or retraining for independent experts
Table 4 outlines the approaches to recertification and retraining adopted in EU member states.
Requirement for independent experts to recertify or retrain after a set period of time
Estonia, Finland, France, Ireland, Lithuania, Luxembourg
Continuous professional development requirements
Requirement that independent experts complete programmes of Continuous Professional Development
Austria, Belgium (Flanders, Wallonia and Brussels), Bulgaria, Czechia, Germany, Denmark, Croatia, Slovenia, Scotland, England and Wales
Voluntary refresher training
No requirements for recertification, retraining or continuous professional development
Romania and Portugal
Table 4: Overview of the different recertification or retraining requirements for independent experts.
Some member states require independent experts to recertify or retrain after a set period of time. This is achieved either by re-sitting the accreditation examination, taking refresher training or through proof of experience. Eight member states have a requirement that independent experts complete programmes of CPD. In Belgium (Flanders), for example, all independent experts must undergo training and sit an examination annually. This training is used to either introduce new concepts or developments (ensuring continuous improvement) or to provide targeted refresher training for specific areas where errors have been identified by a significant number of assessors. The annual training is administered by the Flemish Energy and Climate agency (VEKA) and is tailored each year.[7]In Germany however, no official continuous development or recertification procedures have been adopted but experts are required to take personal responsibility for the quality of certification and ensure they are up to date with developments in the field (BPIE, 2014). ADENE in Portugal administers regular refresher training for experts in Portugal who wish to improve their skills (Kranzl, 2020a).
Auditing and quality assurance in the production of EPCs
This section discusses the various approaches that member states take to ensure that the quality of EPCs and their associated quality assurance procedures are upheld.
EPBD requirements
Annex VI of the recast EPBD (European Commission, 2024) outlines provisions related to QA of EPCs that the ICS should implement. These include requiring member states to:
Provide a clear definition of quality objectives, including the level of statistical confidence that the EPC framework should achieve – at a minimum the ICS should ensure that at least 90% of all valid EPCs issued are evaluated with 95% statistical confidence over a period that cannot exceed one year.
Carry out random sampling of EPCs to assess the level of quality and confidence in the ICS for EPCs.
Use a third party to verify at least 25% of the random sample when the ICS has been delegated to non-governmental bodies.
Ensure the validity of the input data through an on-site visit for at least 10% of EPCs that are part of the random sampling (this is a new requirement of the 2024 recast of the EPBD).
Employ pre-emptive and reactive measures to ensure the quality of the overall EPC regime, including but not limited to:
Additional training for independent experts.
Targeted sampling (in addition to random sampling) to specifically detect and target poor-quality EPCs.
Obligations to resubmit EPCs.
Monetary fines.
Temporary or permanent bans for independent experts.
Article 24 of the EPBD states that member states should implement penalties with regards to infringements of aspects of EPBD implementation, including EPCs. These penalties are not prescribed, however must be “effective, proportionate and dissuasive”.
Scottish approach
AOs hold responsibility for QA in Scotland. They must check a representative sample of EPCs, with a minimum of 2% of all EPCs produced being checked. In 2016, 260,206 EPCs were produced, and 6,604 (2.53%) were checked (Delorme and Hughes, 2016). The checks repeat the EPC calculations using data on the register, most checks are desk-based. Assessors’ outputs are checked every six months. Poor performance can lead to targeted auditing, retraining, suspension, or being struck off (Delorme and Hughes, 2016).
The Scottish Government audits AOs on a 3-yearly basis to ensure compliance with the Operating Framework. In addition, AOs are obliged to complete and return annual reports to the Scottish Government, which were recently reviewed to include more detailed QA information in an effort to better understand the nature of audit failures, complaints, and other important information. Organisations failing to meet the terms of the Framework are subject to corrective action and may have their agreement terminated (Delorme and Hughes, 2016).
A similar approach is taken in England and Wales, where Accreditation Schemes hold responsibility for assuring the outputs produced by their accredited energy assessors. The government then audits the Accreditation Schemes to ensure quality standards are upheld (Delorme & Higley, 2020).
Random sampling of a percentage of total EPCs issued
Conducting digital audits on a statistically significant number of the total EPCs issued within a given timeframe (maximum one year)
Austria, Belgium (Brussels), Bulgaria, Czechia, Estonia, Malta, Romania, Scotland, England and Wales
Random sampling of a percentage of EPCs per assessor
Conducting digital audits on a statistically significant number EPCs issued per assessors issued within a given timeframe (maximum the last year)
The Netherlands
Random sampling – per assessor and per total of EPCs issued
Conducting both audits on a random sample of a percentage of total EPCs issued and a random sample of a percentage of EPCs per assessor
France
Two-tiered approach to digital QA
Additional targeted audits conducted. These are identified either by errors flagged during the random sampling or by specific citizen complaints of non-compliance
Belgium (Flanders and Wallonia), Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, Greece, Croatia, Cyprus, Hungary, Luxembourg, Lithuania, Latvia, Ireland, Poland, Portugal and Sweden
Table 5: Overview of the approaches to QA audits in EU MS.
Digital screening systems
Some member states have adopted a digital system that automatically screens EPC input data before an EPC is issued. The Portuguese EPC database does this, and flags inconsistencies detected to prevent the input of incorrect or inconsistent data. An EU-level interviewee stated that implementing a mechanism like this limits the amount of QA that is required at later stages of the process.
This study found that all member states are conducting a statistically significant number of random sampling audits as per the requirements of the EPBD. Some member states collate a random sample by sampling a percentage of the total number of EPCs, which is the approach taken in Scotland. Others collate a sample of EPCs by sampling a percentage of EPCs per assessor. France reported conducting a two-tiered random sampling QA approach, conducting audits on both a random sample of total EPCs issues and on a percentage of EPCs per assessor.
Several member states reported that a second phase of targeted audits forms part of their QA procedures. These audits are carried out on EPCs whereby inconsistencies are identified during the random sampling auditing phase. Moreover, targeted audits are conducted in some member states where instances of non-compliance are reported. An interview with an EPC expert in Belgium (Flanders) highlighted that a system has been implemented, whereby citizens can notify complaints of non-compliance which can also lead to targeted audits.
It is understood that Slovakia is also conducting random sampling audits, although the nature of these audits is unknown. Moreover, Italy has reported that the approach to QA is implemented at regional level, resulting in variation. The literature review did not identify QA approaches for Slovenia.
A compliance study published by the European Commission in 2015 conducted analysis on the strength of the compliance checking systems implemented in EU member states. The analysis found that Belgium (Wallonia), Cyprus, Denmark, France, Italy and Lithuania had very robust compliance checking systems. Estonia, Latvia, Malta, Poland, Slovakia and Spain were found to have the lowest strength of EPC compliance checking systems (European Commission, 2015).
Public awareness and compliance
A Danish EPC expert we interviewed reported that the high strength and quality of EPCs in Denmark could be linked to high levels of public awareness and acceptance of EPCs and their benefits. It is believed that Danish homeowners have a strong understanding of EPCs and the benefits they can bring in raising property sale prices. This has resulted in higher levels of compliance and a desire to have high-rating EPC certificates.
On-site quality assurance audits
Mandatory on-site inspections were introduced in the 2024 recast version of the EPBD. Therefore, the data collected as part of this literature review may not reflect these most recent requirements and any subsequent changes to Member State QA regimes.
Approved organisations are responsible for carrying out QA checks in Scotland, and the majority of checks are desk-based. This is similar to the approach taken in England and Wales, where Accreditation Schemes are responsible for QA checks. However, Some member states (such as Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Denmark, Hungary and Ireland) conduct on-site audits alongside digital audits. In the majority of member states, these are carried out where inconsistencies are identified during the digital random sampling audits (as in Denmark[9]) or where specific citizen complaints or reports of non-compliance are received (as in Belgium (Flanders)9). Moreover, as in Ireland9, specific risk factors such as multiple infractions per assessor or an assessor publishing an abnormally high level of EPCs result in on-site audits being conducted. This is because on-site audits can provide a more detailed understanding of the accuracy of the data reported. Auditors can see the properties of the building in person, allowing for an extra level of QA[10]. In a few cases however (as in Cyprus), experts do on-site sample checks to verify data (MECI, 2020).
Approach to assessor infractions
In Scotland, poor performance by assessors can lead to targeted auditing, retraining, suspension, or being struck off. However, this is at the discretion of Approved Organisations. Accreditation Schemes hold similar responsibilities in England and Wales. All member states implement some kind of penalty system for assessors to minimise the risk of producing incorrect or invalid EPCs. member states have different levels of penalties for assessors, which are dependent on the severity of their infraction. For some, including Ireland and Latvia, this is quantified using a penalty points system (BPIE, 2014). In both member states, the penalties range from requiring the assessor to undertake corrective training to a temporarily or permanently suspended licence (BPIE, 2014). In Ireland, points on an assessor’s portfolio last for 2 years before they are removed from the record (SEAI, 2016). In other member states, the level of penalty appears to be linked to the severity or number of errors. Common approaches to assessor infractions are detailed below.
Reissue of an EPC – Assessors may be required to reissue a correct EPC at their own cost, usually within a certain timeframe. This is one of the most common practices amongst member states. This occurs in member states including Austria, Belgium (Wallonia), Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czechia, Denmark, Spain, Finland, Croatia, Lithuania, Malta, Portugal and Slovenia. In Finland, the penalty sometimes requires the original assessor to pay for a different assessor to carry out the re-certification (TU Wien, 2021).
Training – Assessors may be required to undergo corrective training. For example, this approach is used in Belgium (Wallonia), Ireland, and Latvia. In the case of Belgium (Wallonia), the assessor must also pass an exam in order to continue carrying out EPC assessments (Fourez et al., 2020).
Monetary fines – The majority of member states have monetary fines in place, the value of which is usually dependent on the perceived severity of the error. The value of monetary fines can vary greatly within and between member states. Examples of values are shown in Table 6.
Member state
Value of fines for assessors
Belgium (Flanders)
€250 – €5000 (TU Wien, 2021)
Germany
Up to €15,000 (TU Wien, 2021)
Estonia
Up to €6,400 for an individual or €64,000 for an organisation (Ministry of Economic Affairs and Communications et al., 2020)
France
Up to €1500 (Deslot et al., 2020)
Greece
€200 – €10,000 (CRES, 2020)
Italy
€300 – €10,000 (Azzolini et al., 2020)
Portugal
€500 – €700 (Kranzl, 2020a)
Romania
€250 – €2000 (Kranzl, 2020a)
Table 6: Table showing the value of fines imposed on EPC assessors when errors are found in certain EU MS.
In some member states, monetary fines are technically possible but not imposed in practice. This includes Bulgaria (SEDA, 2020), Czechia (BPIE, 2014), and Estonia (Ministry of Economic Affairs and Communications et al., 2020). Monetary fines are very rarely used in Germany (BfEE, 2020). In Cyprus and Portugal, monetary fines are only possible if the EPC assessor does not reissue the EPC in the required period (MECI, 2020; Fragoso and Baptista, 2016). In other member states, monetary fines are only imposed if the errors surpass a certain threshold. For example, in Croatia an assessor must have produced more than three incorrect EPCs to face a monetary fine (MCPP, 2020), and in Hungary the energy class must be wrong by at least two classes for the assessor to face a monetary fine (Jenei et al., 2020). In Poland, assessors only face monetary fines if the error is quantified at more than 10%, or if they use incorrect technical assumptions in their methodology (Kranzl, 2020a; Bekierski et al., 2016).
No evidence was found that Austria, Denmark (Energistyrelsen et al., 2020), Ireland (BPIE, 2014), Lithuania (Encius, 2016), Luxembourg (Worré et al., 2020), Latvia (BPIE, 2014), Malta (Degiorgio and Barbara 2016), Sweden, and Slovakia impose monetary fines on assessors.
Suspension or withdrawal of accreditation – In Scotland, poor performance by assessors can lead to penalties including suspension or withdrawal of accreditation at the discretion of Approved Organisations. Accreditation Schemes in England and Wales also have discretion over applying such penalties to assessors. In many member states, assessors can face temporary or permanent loss of accreditation to carry out EPC assessments as a result of infractions. This is the case in Belgium (Flanders) (TU, Wien, 2020; Kranzl, 2020a), Belgium (Wallonia) (Fourez et al., 2020), Cyprus (BPIE, 2014), Czechia (BPIE, 2014), Finland (TU Wien, 2021), France (BPIE, 2014), Greece (TU Wien, 2021), Croatia (Mardetko-Škoro, 2015), Hungary (Jenei et al., 2020), Ireland (BPIE, 2014), Lithuania (Encius, 2016), Luxembourg (Worré et al., 2020), Latvia (BPIE, 2014), and Poland (BPIE, 2014).
In a number of member states, the length of the suspension is dependent on the severity of the infraction. For example, in Greece assessors can face suspensions of between one and three years, depending on the severity of the mistake (TU Wien, 2021). In Croatia, assessors can lose their accreditation if they submit more than three invalid EPCs (Mardetko-Škoro, 2015). In Hungary, assessors can lose their license for three years if errors result in EPCs changing by more than 2 energy classes (Jenei et al., 2020).
In other member states, suspension or withdrawal of a license is only imposed if a threshold is passed. For example, in Ireland, if an assessor submits more than 10 incorrect EPCs in two years, they can be suspended for between 3-12 months (BPIE, 2014). In Latvia, if an assessor has more than seven points on their portfolio they face suspension of six months, and if they have more than 10 points on their portfolio, they face suspension of 12 months (BPIE, 2014). In Denmark, EPC assessors are employed by certified organisations, and the organisations can lose their accreditation in the case of repeated errors from their assessors (Energistyrelsen et al., 2020).
Use of administrative fees and levies
This section explores fees and levies implemented by Member States charged to assessors for the registration or lodgement of EPCs. It does not include fines implemented for assessor registration or fines associated with assessor infractions.
EPBD requirements
There is no requirement in the EPBD for what administrative fees or levies Member States can charge to assessors for EPC lodgement or registration. Therefore, Member States have taken different approaches in whether they choose to implement such a fee or its value.
Member state approaches
Scottish approach
Scotland has implemented a fee for the lodgement of EPCs of Existing Domestic Buildings and Non-Domestic Buildings in Scotland. The value of the fees varies based on the nature of the building. The Energy Performance of Buildings (Scotland) Regulations 2008 outline that the fee associated with a domestic EPC is £2.60, whereas the fee associated with a non-domestic EPC is £12.60. The revenue generated from these fees is ring-fenced to support the effective operation and maintenance of register systems. (Scottish Government, 2017).
Country
Description
Examples of Member State adoption
No administrative fee
Member State does not charge an administrative fee to assessors
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czechia, Cyprus, Estonia, France, Finland, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Luxembourg, Latvia, The Netherlands, Poland, Romania, Slovenia, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden
Administrative fee in place with no ringfencing
Member State does not ring fence revenue for specific purpose
Malta
Administrative fee in place with ringfencing of revenue
Member State ring fences revenue for EPC-related purposes, which can include maintaining the EPC registry or QA procedures, for example
Ireland, Portugal, England and Wales, Germany, Lithuania, Denmark
Table 7: Table showing the approaches taken to charging administrative fees and levies to assessors
Member state EPC regimes can be partly or fully financed through their lodgement or registration fees, in combination with other fees such as annual assessor registration fees. For example, the EPC system in Ireland was intentionally designed to be cost-neutral (BPIE, 2014). In countries that don’t charge specific administration costs, Borragán and Legon, (2021) report that this fee can also be indirectly covered by the overall EPC assessment price. However, in most cases, Member States rely partly or fully on public funds to support their EPC systems. The amount of public funds used to finance EPC systems can amount to as much as several million euros every year in some Member States (Loncour and Heijmans, 2018).
Lodgement fee value
Whilst the majority of Member States have not implemented fees or levies for issuing or publishing individual EPCs, Ireland, Malta, Lithuania, Portugal, Germany and Denmark have, as have England and Wales (BPIE, 2014). The value of these fees varies between the Member States. Although Malta has the highest fee for domestic EPCs at €75, it doesn’t appear for the other Member States that the size of the Member State or the number of EPCs they issue directly correlates with the value of the fee.
Germany, Lithuania and Malta charge one fee for all EPCs, whereas Denmark, England and Wales, Ireland and Portugal outline different fees for domestic and non-domestic EPCs. In all cases where a different fee is charged, the fee associated with a non-domestic EPC is higher than the fee for a domestic EPC. In England and Wales, the difference is very small, but in Denmark, Ireland and Portugal, the fee associated with a non-domestic EPC is at least double the value of the fee for a domestic EPC.
Table 8: Table showing the fees associated with lodgement of domestic and non-domestic EPCs in the Member States and England and Wales
Use of revenue generated
In the following Member States that have adopted a fee for registering and publishing EPCs, the revenue generated is ring-fenced and used for EPC-related purposes.
Ireland – the SEAI uses the revenue to make investments back into the EPC programme, such as by developing, upgrading or replacing the systems and increasing the resources to support assessors, industry, and the wider public through the EPC Helpdesk and quality assurance system[15].
Portugal – the revenue generated from the fees is used to support daily technical support to the experts, IT infrastructure and developments, quality assessment and enforcement, awareness and communication.[16]
Germany – the registry budget is supported through the fees for lodging EPCs (BPIE, 2014)
Lithuania – part of the revenue raised from the EPC lodgement fee is used to finance quality assurance of EPCs (Encius and Baranauskas, 2016).
Denmark – the fee charged by DEA in covers work carried out by DEA concerning the necessary supervision of the scheme. It involves taking EPCs out for quality control, handling complaints, but also answering general questions about the EPC scheme, developing and maintaining the IT systems (the EPC database, etc.), and the contact with the educational institutions for the training of EPC assessors[17].
England and Wales – the revenue generated from these fees is ring-fenced to pay for the technical team that run the register for the fees, as well as policy and operations salaries. Moreover, the revenue generated funds any technical running costs associated with the lodgement of EPCs as well as any opportunities identified for “register improvement”[18].
In Malta however, the money generated from the lodgement fee is not ring-fenced for any specific purpose. It joins other sources of revenue and then funding is allocated where and as necessary[19].
Enforcement mechanisms
This section investigates how member states ensure that the requirement to present an EPC for a building at the point of sale/rental is enforced.
EPBD requirements
Article 20 of the recast EPBD (European Commission, 2024) mandates that digital EPCs must be issued for buildings or building units when they are:
Newly constructed or have undergone major renovation.
Sold to a new owner.
Rented to a tenant (or a rental contract is renewed).
An existing building owned or occupied by public bodies.
It also requires that the EPC must be shown and handed over to prospective tenants or buyers at point of sale or rental. There are some exceptions to this, for example, when the building is only intended to be used for less than four months of the year or has an actual energy consumption of less than 25% of the expected annual energy consumption.
Member state approaches
Scottish approach
Failing to issue EPCs when marketing a property for sale or for rent can result in enforcement actions. Penalties, outlined in the Energy Performance of Buildings Regulations (Scotland) 2008, are £500 for residential dwellings and £1000 for other cases. Local Authorities are the nominated Enforcement Authorities and hold the duty to uphold EPC regulations within their jurisdictions, so are therefore responsible for issuing fines. Local Authorities can also consider criminal action (Delorme and Hughes, 2016).
The Scottish Government does not have a clear picture of the scale of enforcement activity undertaken by the Local Authorities and are currently engaging with all 32 local authorities to gain more detailed information on enforcement in practice.
In England and Wales, local authorities are responsible for enforcement and hold powers to request that copies of an EPC are produced for inspection. They also hold powers to decide the appropriate course of action to enforce compliance, which can include a range of actions from providing compliance advice to issuing a penalty (Delorme & Higley, 2020).
Only a small number of member states have a vigorous mechanism for ensuring EPCs are available at the point of rental or sale (European Commission, 2015) and availability of enforcement rate data is often low. In most of these member states, checks are made by notaries during the sale transaction, which is thought to be an effective system (European Commission, 2015). However, as rental agreements are often less formal, ensuring EPCs are made available here is more challenging. It is thought that ensuring the EPC is signed off by a lawyer in the rental agreement is a good way to address this problem (European Commission, 2015). However, rental agreements are often less formal and do not always involve a legal professional, meaning that the systems in place for enforcement can be less developed in the rental sector than they are for sales. This often results in lower compliance rates or poor data availability in the rental sector. However, in Hungary for example, it is a requirement that a legal professional signs off on rental agreements. They are then responsible for checking the presence of EPC documentation.
The member states found to have the highest level of compliance rates with requirements for new, sold and rented buildings, as well as the highest strength of EPC compliance checking systems, are Belgium (Wallonia), Cyprus, France, Italy, Lithuania and the UK (this study was conducted when the UK was an EU Member State). Latvia and Poland were found to have the lowest compliance rates, coupled with the lowest strength of EPC compliance checking system (European Commission, 2015).
Monetary fines
The majority of member states impose monetary fines on building owners if they fail to present a valid EPC at the point of sale or rental. The cost of fines vary within and between member states, as shown in Table 9.
Member state
Value of fines for building owners
Austria
Up to €1450 (OIB, 2020; Arbeiterkammer Oberösterreich, 2024)
Belgium (Flanders)
€500 – €5000 (Kranzl, 2020a)
Belgium (Wallonia)
€500 – €1000, which can double if the same individual or organisation reoffends within three years (TU Wien, 2021; Fourez et al., 2020)
Czechia
100,000 Czech Koruna (CZK) (€3979), up to 200,000 CZK (€7958) for apartment buildings (Mečíccrová, 2021)
Germany
Up to €10,000 (Olschner, 2024)
Spain
€300 – €6000 (TU Wien)
Greece
€200 – €2000 (TU Wien, 2020)
Croatia
5000 Hrvatska Kuna (Croatian Kuna) (HRK) – 30,000 HRK (€662 – €3976) (StanGRAD, n.d.),
Italy
€3000 – €18,000 (Azzolini et al., 2020)
Lithuania
Up to €289 (Encius, 2016)
Portugal
€750 – €7500 (Kranzl, 2020a)
Table 9: Table showing the value of fines imposed on building owners when EPCs are not presented at required times in certain EU member states.
In most member states, it is unclear what type of infraction results in a higher level of fine for building owners. However, in Spain there are clear guidelines: simple faults result in fines of €300 – €1000, while serious faults can result in fines of up to €6000 (TU Wien, 2021). Serious faults include knowingly falsifying data or having an EPC assessment performed by a non-accredited assessor (TU Wien, 2021). In Finland, the level of fine is dependent on the type of building for which an EPC was not presented, or for the size of the municipality in the case of public buildings (Ministry of the Environment of Finland & Motiva Oy, 2020).
Use of notaries in enforcement
In some member states, notaries or lawyers involved in the sale or rental process are liable for ensuring EPCs are presented when necessary and are also liable for monetary fines if EPCs are not presented. This is the case for lawyers in Hungary, who are required to sign-off the EPC included in a rental agreement (European Commission, 2015). Similarly, notaries in Portugal are required to notify the relevant authorities if an EPC is not presented at the point of sale and can be fined between €250 – €3500 for failing to do so (Kranzl, 2020a). Notaries may also be fined in Belgium (Wallonia), for failing to notify the authorities of an absent EPC at point of sale or rental (TU Wien, 2021).
Affordability of EPCs
This section discusses any action that member states take to ensure that EPCs are affordable.
EPBD requirements
Article 19 of the EPBD requires that member states “take measures to ensure that EPCs are affordable and shall consider whether to provide financial support for vulnerable households.” The EPBD does not require member states to provide any price caps or subsidies, although some member states have chosen to do so.
Little information was found on interventions taken by member states to provide financial support for households requiring EPCs, nor the ability of citizens in member states to pay for EPCs assessments. Therefore, the following discussion focuses on EPC pricing and price controls in member states.
Member state approaches
Scottish approach
The price of EPCs in Scotland is controlled by the market. Research in 2016 showed that indicative starting costs were £35 to £60 (€40 – €70) for residential EPCs and £129 to £150 (€150-€175) for non-residential EPCs. This includes the registration fee payable each time an EPC is recorded on the register (Delorme and Hughes, 2016). There is no cap on EPC prices, and affordability is not actively managed by the Scottish Government.
Price-caps
The majority of member states have not imposed any price limitations on the cost of EPCs and rely on the market to control the affordability of EPCs. However, three member states have imposed price regulations, as detailed in Table 10:
Member state
Details of price cap on EPC cost
Slovenia
€1.5 / m2 for residential buildings up to 220m2, €2 / m2 for residential buildings over 220 m2, and €1 – €4 /m2 for apartment buildings (between 5 and 51 dwellings) (BPIE, 2014). The total cost is also capped at €170 for one and two-dwelling buildings (Kranzl, 2020a).
Hungary
An EPC for apartments and single-family homes is capped at €40 (+VAT) (Kranzl, 2020a; Jenei et al., 2020). There is no legally defined price for an EPC in non-residential or public buildings (Jenei et al., 2020).
Denmark
EPCs in 2024 are capped at €1,067 for a single family house. For larger buildings, the price for EPCs is subject to the market[20].
Table 10: Table showing the price caps on the cost of an EPC assessment in various MS.
Greece and Croatia used to have price caps which have since been abolished (TU Wien, 2021). In Croatia, the price cap was introduced when there were few EPC assessors in the market which caused prices to increase. When more EPC assessors were accredited, the price cap was removed, and EPC prices are now effectively controlled by the market[21].
While the price caps imposed generally have a positive impact on building owners who face the costs of EPCs, the price caps are commonly criticised for being too low and having resulting impacts on the quality of the certificate produced. For example, in Hungary, there are concerns that the price cap is set unrealistically low which results in lower quality EPCs (Jenei et al., 2020). Similarly, in Croatia, it is thought that the low price cap resulted in the recommendations of energy efficiency measures included in the certificate being of poor quality (Sayfikar & Jenkins, 2024). In Demark, it is thought that competition within the market keeps EPC prices much lower than the price cap, as average prices for single family houses is reported to be around €66720,suggesting the price cap is not necessary here.
Member states which have not imposed price caps have been criticised for average EPC costs being too high. For example, in Bulgaria the average price of an EPC is estimated at €0.2–€1/m2, which is thought to be relatively high for the average EPC consumer in Bulgaria (Sayfikar & Jenkins, 2024). This, alongside low public awareness of EPCs, is thought to be a reason why only around 1% of residential buildings in Bulgaria have an EPC (BPIE, 2018). Appendix F shows a summary of estimated EPC costs across member states, however it is important to note that this data comes from a variety of sources with different publication dates. Some figures have also been subject to exchange rates from local currencies. As a result, price data between member states is not necessarily comparable.
Other measures to ensure affordability
Member states who have not imposed price caps have often not done so to reflect the true cost of an EPC calculation. The cost can vary greatly according to various factors, including the type and complexity of a building and the quality of existing data (TU Wien, 2021). For example, in Czechia the average cost of a standard EPC is thought to be between 3000 – 7000 CZK (€119 – €278). This is because many buildings in the country are old and do not have much existing documentation or data (Mečíccrová, 2021). These buildings require an on-site visit from a specialist assessor, which can increase the cost of an EPC to tens of thousands of CZK (Mečíccrová, 2021).
While no other member states actively control the price of their EPCs, some have introduced other methods of promoting affordability. For example, in Belgium (Wallonia) the EPC methodology is kept as efficient as possible to keep costs down (Fourez et al., 2020). In the Netherlands, the government imposed a system to minimise costs in which building owners first receive a temporary EPC, which is calculated using existing data on a property (e.g. building type, data of construction, insulation, and heating and energy systems). The building owner can then change or add information (alongside proof such as photographs), which is then approved by an assessor. The assessor then recalculates the EPC and uploads it to the national database (Kranzl, 2020a). This process is thought to minimise on-site visits and time spent by assessors, and minimise the final cost of an EPC.
Case studies
After we conducted our review of the approaches taken to operational governance of EPCs in the EU member states, we selected three countries of interest to the Scottish Government. These were countries with approaches which could have the potential to improve the current operational governance procedures in Scotland. The countries we selected were Belgium, Croatia and Ireland.
Full case studies are presented in Annexes B-D, however, an overview of the main findings from each case study is presented in Table 11 – Table 15.
Country
Overview of governance model
Belgium
EPCs are governed by authorities at the regional level. This is the Flemish Energy and Climate Energy Agency (VEKA) in Flanders, the Department of Energy and Sustainable Buildings in Wallonia and The Brussels Environment Office in Brussels.
Croatia
The Ministry of Physical Planning, Construction and State Assets (MPGI) is responsible for the implementation of the EPBD including EPCs, the ICS and accrediting independent experts. The Ministry of Economy, Market Inspectorate is responsible for ensuring EPCs are correctly advertised during the sale or lease of a building.
Ireland
The EPBD Implementation in Ireland is coordinated by senior officials of the following bodies with sufficient authority to make decisions and allocate resources: Department of Environment, Climate and Communications, Department of Housing, Local Government and Heritage, and the Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland (SEAI). The SEAI is responsible for administering the EPC scheme, which is called a Building Energy Rating (BER) scheme in Ireland. SEAI also govern the registration and performance of BER assessors.
Table 11: Overview of the main findings from each case study: Overview of Governance Model
Country
Affordability
Belgium
In Wallonia, EPC prices have been actively controlled by designing a short certification process to reduce costs. This reduced costs from €480 to €240 for single-family houses from the early stages of the scheme to 2020. In Flanders, the price of EPCs is regulated by the market. Prices range from €195 for a small apartment to €345 for a 5-bedroom house. No evidence was identified for Brussels.
Croatia
The price of EPCs was capped at €1.5 / m2, but this requirement was removed in 2014 and the price is now controlled by the market. The average price for an EPC is reported at around 200.00 EUR for an apartment and 380.00 EUR for a house.
Ireland
The price of a BER assessment is controlled by the market, meaning it can vary based on the supplier and size of a building. Prices are approximately €150 in apartments, while the cost for a standard house is between €200 and €300. Moreover, a levy of €30 is in place for the publication of a Domestic BER Certificate.
Table 12: Overview of the main findings from each case study: Affordability
Country
Minimum qualifications, training and accreditation for EPC assessors
Belgium
In Flanders, education pre-requisites are needed to assess certain building types. All assessors undergo training which varies based on the type of buildings they will assess. Assessors sit a central exam, and annual re-training is mandatory.
Wallonia has a flexible pathway to eligibility and accept either education or professional experience. Assessors attend a five and a half day training course and complete both an oral and written exam. There are no requirements for continuous professional development.
Brussels has subject-specific education requirements for all assessors, who must also sit a 5-day training course and complete an exam. There are no requirements for continuous professional development.
Croatia
Assessors must have both specific higher education qualifications and at least five years of work experience in the profession or two years of work experience in design and/or expert construction supervision.
They must then complete a two-week course, followed by a written and practical examination. Every year, assessors must attend eight-hours of training to upgrade their skills.
Ireland
Assessors are required to either hold an NFQ level 6 certificate in a construction-related disciplines or equivalent (demonstrated by a combination of appropriate construction-related qualifications or relevant experience). Assessors must also complete an accredited Domestic BER Training Course and achieve a minimum of 70%. Continuous professional development is obligatory for all BER assessors.
Table 13: Overview of the main findings from each case study: Qualifications, training and accreditation
Country
Auditing, verification and QA
Belgium
Flanders use a combination of random sampling and targeted audits, which include on-site audits on a less frequent basis. A citizen complaints system can trigger a targeted review.
Wallonia has a digital ‘control web’ which automatically screens all EPCs submitted and flags inconsistent data or values. Audits are conducted on a randomly selected statistically significant sample of the total number of EPCs submitted.
Brussels conducts audits on a yearly basis and reviews 1.5% of total EPCs issued. Refresher training is mandatory for accredited experts who make frequent mistakes.
Croatia
As of October 1, 2017, EPCs can only be issued using the Information System of Energy Certificates (lEC).
All EPCs go through administrative checks when uploaded to the EPC database. A random sample undergo more detailed checks, as well as EPCs which have received a complaint. Detailed checks are performed on the contents and accuracy of the EPC report, the input data, and the recommended energy efficiency measures.
Assessors are penalised when EPCs are found to be invalid. Penalties include warnings, re-issue of the EPC at their own cost, and having accreditation revoked. Monetary fines are possible but are rarely used in practice.
Ireland
Ireland conducts audits on both a targeted and random basis. Targeted audits are mostly desk-based reviews, but on-site audits are also conducted when certain risk factors are met. Training audits are also carried out for newly qualified assessors.
The SEAI have implemented a penalty point system, whereby the level of penalty imposed on assessors depends on the severity of the assessor infraction. The nature of these penalties ranges from corrective training to the permanent suspension of the license.
Table 14: Overview of the main findings from each case study: Auditing, verification and QA
Country
Enforcement
Belgium
In Flanders, the responsibility for enforcing the requirement to display an EPC at the point of sale lies with VEKA, although notaries are required to check the existence of an EPC. An administrative fine exists for notaries is possible in the case that a sale or rental is made without the existence of an EPC, but these have not been administered to date. A fine of minimum €500 can be administered to building owners for not displaying an EPC at the point of sale.
In Wallonia, minimum fines of €500 can be issued to building owners who do not present an EPC at the point of rent or sale.
In Brussels, the BEO are responsible for enforcement. Estate agencies repeatedly reported as non-compliant face fines or potential imprisonment.
Croatia
If building owners fail to produce an EPC at the point of sale or rental, they can receive fines between 662 – 3,976 EUR.
Ireland
The solicitor managing the sale of the property is responsible for checking the presence of an EPC at the point of sale. Failure to present a BER certificate at the time of rental or sale can result in financial or judicial penalties, with fines ranging from €500 to €5,000. Criminal records and prison sentences are also a possibility. Compliance with the requirement is higher with property sales than with property rentals.
Table 15: Overview of the main findings from each case study: Enforcement
Conclusions and options for Scotland
Our research has shown that a range of different approaches are applied in the EU member states to enable effective EPC governance. There is limited data available to evidence the effectiveness of the various approaches taken, making it difficult to determine the impact that each approach has on the overall quality of EPCs in each Member State.
To address this gap, we conducted interviews with EPC professionals in member states of interest to understand their opinions on the perceived effectiveness of the approaches they have adopted. We have established a list of potential options which could improve the operational governance of EPCs in Scotland based on evidence collected in the review of approaches taken in the EU member states, targeted interviews and case studies. The options are presented in Table 16.
Option
Rationale
1
Include standardised training requirements for independent experts in the operational framework
Many member states have standard requirements at a national level to ensure that independent experts have the necessary skills and training. As the Scottish Government currently delegates responsibility for training and certifying assessors to the AOs, there may be variations in the standards across the country.
2
Develop standardised QA procedures for AOs in the operational framework
QA procedures in Scotland are the responsibility of AOs, who are responsible for checking a representative sample of EPCs. However, many member states go beyond the random sampling approach to guarantee the quality of EPCs. A more stringent QA approach could be standardised in the Operating Framework to ensure higher quality EPCs across Scotland. For example, a digital system that screens EPC data or targeted audits based on certain risk factors.
3
Establish requirements for stakeholders involved in the rental and sales processes to support enforcement of the requirement to present an EPC
Enforcing the requirement to present an EPC at the point of sale/rental is difficult for the majority of member states. Those that are enforcing this successfully rely on notaries to check the presence of an EPC as part of the sales process. Although notaries are not generally involved in house sales in Scotland, considering different options for encouraging stakeholders to check the presence of an EPC at the point of sale could result in higher compliance rates in Scotland: for example, formalising the requirement for solicitors involved in sales processes to check whether EPC documents have been presented. For rentals, various options could be explored further to encourage stakeholders to check for compliance.
Table 16: Options for Scotland to improve their operational governance of EPCs
Options have not been assessed for feasibility of implementation in Scotland, or for potential long-term impacts. There is an opportunity for additional research, if the Scottish Government wish to explore any of these options in further detail.
Each of these options are outlined below, with a series of sub-options which outline how each overarching option could be operationalised in practice. These options are not mutually exclusive and could be implemented in conjunction with each other.
Including standardised training requirements for independent experts in the operational framework
Sub-option 1a – Introduce standard education and qualification requirements into the operational framework
This could include requirements for higher education and/or relevant professional experience. However, the flexible approach adopted in Bulgaria, Denmark, Estonia and Ireland ensures that independent experts can access via multiple routes. In Scotland, this could mean that experts must either:
Hold a National Vocational Qualification (NVQ) Level 3 or other similar (as required in England and Wales) or,
Demonstrate they hold an equivalent level of experience, which could be in the form of another qualification alongside proof of significant industry experience.
Requirements could also be tailored by assessor type. For example, higher education is only required for EPC assessors who conduct EPCs for new buildings in Belgium (Flanders).
Although AOs in Scotland may be using similar pre-requisites for independent experts, these are not standardised and may vary by AO. Ensuring that requirements are clearly defined in the operational framework will reduce ambiguity in requirements and ensure standardisation across the country.
Sub-option 1b – Approve a standardised mandatory training programme for independent experts
This can be delivered by AOs, but the content should be regularly updated and approved by the Scottish Government to ensure independent experts have skills which are aligned with the most recent developments in the sector.
This could be combined with an examination and, on passing, certification proving the independent expert has attended and taken on board the content of the training modules.
Sub-option 1c – Introduce requirements to attend mandatory annual re-training
In addition to a Scottish Government-approved training module for assessors, the Scottish Government could approve an annual retraining course for assessors. Mandatory retraining for assessors to keep their license would ensure assessors are up to date with the latest developments in the field and present an opportunity to learn from and correct mistakes. The approach taken in Belgium (Flanders) could be adopted, where retraining includes both mandatory modules (which cover common errors or new developments in the field) and optional modules, tailored to the assessor type and/or any infractions identified for that assessor in the previous year.
Develop standardised QA procedures for AOs in the operational framework
Sub-option 2a – Develop a digital QA system and screening of EPC input data
To streamline current QA procedures, a central digital system could be developed that screens and sense-checks EPC input data for errors. For example, when an independent expert conducts an assessment, they can input data into a digital system which will flag when they have input data which falls outside an expected range. An example of this approach is the digital ‘control web’ in Belgium (Wallonia), which screens all submitted EPCs to flag inconsistent values or data.
Sub-option 2b – Establish a ‘Helpdesk’ function to receive complaints about EPCs
Some member states, including Croatia and Belgium (Flanders) operate a helpdesk function, which customers can use to submit complaints or report suspected non-compliance. This could be introduced in Scotland and co-ordinated by central government at a national level, with complaints being redirected to the relevant AO for further investigation.
Sub-option 2c – Targeted audits of EPCs based on specific risk factors
In addition to the minimum random sampling required by the EPBD, best practice among member states is to combine this sampling with more targeted audits in a two-tiered QA approach. The approach taken in Ireland and Belgium (Flanders) is that certain risk factors, such as assessors issuing a large number of EPCs, or a complaint from a customer, trigger a targeted audit. These can be desk-based or on-site, but the Operating Framework could clearly outline what risk factors trigger a particular follow-up audit.
Sub-option 2d – Outline a clear penalty system for assessor infractions
A penalty points system, which clearly outlines what infractions result in what penalties, could be outlined in the operational framework to ensure that all assessors and AOs are clear about the penalties which will be issued in identified cases of non-compliance. Linking infractions to points and setting a maximum number of points would result in the suspension of their accreditation.
Penalties for assessors should be developed alongside a standardised and regular training schedule. Working with assessors, by providing regular and up-to-date training opportunities, gives them the opportunity to refresh their training. It also allows repeat issues to be targeted in dedicated training sessions and would ensure assessors remain engaged and interested in the process.
Engage wider stakeholders in the rental/sales process to support enforcement of the requirement to present an EPC
Sub-option 3a – Formalising the requirement for solicitors to check EPC documentation at the point of sale
The European Commission’s 2015 compliance study reported that member states generally struggle to enforce the requirement to make EPCs available at the point of sale or rent and data availability on compliance rates is often low. member states that are enforcing this in a robust manner rely on notaries to conduct checks during the sale transaction (European Commission, 2015).
Solicitors are responsible for checking documentation during a property sale in Scotland. Formalising the requirement to check the presence of an EPC at the point of sale as part of a legal checklist could result in greater enforcement of this requirement in Scotland.
Sub-option 3b – Requirements for stakeholders in the rental market to check EPC documentation
Rental agreements often do not involve a legal professional in the process, so they cannot be targeted in the same way as sales (European Commission, 2015). Hungary was the only country we identified that required a legal professional to sign-off on all rental agreements. Generally, this means that the systems in place to enforce these requirements are less developed in the rental sector, resulting in lower compliance or limited data availability on compliance rates.
Various options could be explored as to how this requirement could be enforced in the rental market. These could include:
Requiring that a legal professional signs off on all rental agreements in Scotland
Formalising the requirement to present an EPC when registering on the Scottish Landlord Register
Introducing compliance measures for estate agents, such as legal obligations or linking compliance to incentives such as green financing
Encouraging estate agents to use the Helpdesk function to report instances of non-compliance
References
Alembic Research, Energy Action Scotland and Dr Patrick Waterfield (2019) A review of domestic and non-domestic energy performance certificates in Scotland. Available at: A Review of Domestic and Non-Domestic Energy Performance Certificates in Scotland: Research report for the Scottish Government, Heat, Energy Efficiency and Consumers Unit – Final Report (www.gov.scot)
Ministry of Construction and Physical Planning [MCPP] (2020). Implementation of the EPBD Croatia, Status in 2020. Available at: http://bpes.ypeka.gr/?page_id=21
Schoenherr (n.d.). Slovenia: Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) – Additional Burden on Real Properties’ Owners or Welcomed Measure? Available at: https://www.schoenherr.rs/uploads/tx_news/schoenherr_Slovenia_Energy_Performance_Certificate__EPC_.pdf
We conducted a literature review using key search terms and Boolean operators where relevant, to maximise the search outputs and refine results. We used key search terms including: ‘Energy efficiency in buildings’, ‘EPC’, ‘Implementation’, ‘[Name of Member State], in combination with each of the following terms ‘Legislation’, ‘Governance’, ‘Independent Control System’, ‘Assessors’, ‘Accreditation’, ‘Audit’, ‘Verification’, ‘Assurance’, ‘Enforcement body’, ‘Enforcement mechanism’, ‘Affordability’.
We conducted searches in English and in the official language of the MS in question, using machine translation software DeepL. We used Google and Google Scholar to conduct searches.
Data extraction into summary database
When we identified relevant data sources, we reviewed them in full and extracted relevant information into a summary database (Annex A). The summary database was structured with a row for each MS and Scotland (28 total) and columns representing an area of interest for the research. These included:
Key data sources used for the country in question.
Governance model.
Qualifications and training for EPC assessors.
Auditing, verification and QA of EPCs.
Enforcement of EPC requirements.
How affordability of EPCs is ensured.
Case studies
Based on the outputs of the literature review, we selected three case studies of interest, which adopted different approaches to that currently taken in Scotland for the operational governance of EPCs. These were jointly selected with the Scottish Government. The three final case studies selected were:
Belgium
Croatia
Ireland
We first drafted each case study from the outputs of the literature review, and the enhanced them with targeted consultation with experts from the MS in question.
Targeted interviews
We held eight interviews with key stakeholders to supplement this research, as well as an additional interview with a Scottish Government representative to better understand the operational governance. These consisted of:
Two interviews with overarching EU-level EPC experts.
One email-based interview with a Danish EPC expert.
Two interviews with Irish EPC experts.
One interview with a Belgian EPC expert from Belgium (Flanders), and one email-based interview with an expert from the Walloon region (representatives from Brussels were contacted, but either did not respond or were unavailable to participate in this research).
One interview with a Croatian EPC expert (additional interviewees from Croatia were contacted, but either did not respond or were unavailable to participate in this research).
One interview with a Scottish EPC expert.
In most cases, the country-level EPC experts worked on EPC regimes within national governments.
Case study limitations
We conducted this research on a relatively short timescale (between April and July 2024). The collected data was used to derive policy options for improving the operational governance of EPCs in Scotland. A detailed assessment of the long-term impacts of these policy options, including analysis of uncertainties associated with future scenarios and feasibility constraints, was not within scope of this project.
Appendix F Table of estimated EPC costs in member states
Member state
Estimate EPC cost
Austria
Average of €400 (Netherlands Enterprise Agency, 2021)
Belgium (Brussels)
Gap
Belgium (Flanders)
Prices range from €195 for a small apartment to €345 for a 5-bedroom house (Certinergie, n.d.b).
Belgium (Wallonia)
Single family house average of €480
Apartment average €165 (Fourez et al, 2020)
Bulgaria
€0.2 – €1 per m2 (BPIE, 2014)
Cyprus
Gap
Czechia
3000-7000 crowns, tens of thousands of crowns if an energy specialist is required to visit (Mečíccrová, 2021)
Germany
Single family home average of less than €100
If an on-site inspection is required, this is €300 – €500 (Olschner, 2024)
Denmark
EPCs in 2024 are capped at €1,067 for a single family house. However, competition makes the price lower – currently around €667. For larger buildings the price for EPCs is subject to a free market. For larger buildings the price for EPCs is subject to a free market[22].
Estonia
Average for existing house of €100 – €300 (Hang.ee, 2022)
Spain
Average price of €60 – €130 for a 50-100m2 building (Arroyo, 2024)
Finland
Small houses average of €300 – 400 (existing) and €200 – €300 (new)
Terraced houses and apartments average of €510 (existing) and €450 (new) (Motiva, 2024)
France
Average of €100 – €250 (Berard, 2023)
Greece
Gap
Croatia
Capped at €1.5 / m2 (BPIE, 2014)
Hungary
Price is regulated for apartments and single family homes at €40 + VAT (Jenei et al, 2020; Kranzl, 2020a)
Ireland
Apartments average of €150
Standard house average of €200 – €300 (Citizens Information, 2024)
Italy
Average of €150
Lithuania
Between €100 – €500 (Encius, 2016)
Luxembourg
Between €500 – €1000 (RTL Today, 2014)
Latvia
Gap
Malta
Gap
The Netherlands
Average of €255 (Netherlands Enterprise Agency, 2021)
Poland
Between €40 – €1300 (Bekierski et al., 2016)
Portugal
Average of €200 (Netherlands Enterprise Agency, 2021)
Romania
Gap
Sweden
Average for a single family house of €500 (BPIE, 2014)
Slovenia
Price is regulated at €1.5 / m2 for residential buildings up to 220m2 and €2 / m2 for over 220 m2, and €1 – €4 / m2 for apartment buildings (depending on number of dwellings) (BPIE, 2014)
There’s also a cap of €170 for one-dwelling and two-dwelling buildings (Kranzl, 2020a)
Slovakia
Average of an apartment (60m2) of €200
Average of a single family house (220m2) of €250
Average of small apartment building of €1000 (Schoenherr, n.d.)
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
In most cases, the EPC experts consulted work on EPC regimes within national governments. ↑
The UK devolved governments follow the approach agreed in the UK when the EPBD was transposed into domestic regulation in 2008, when the UK was an EU Member State. ↑
The literature review did not identify pre-requisite requirements for Spain, Latvia and Slovakia ↑
The literature review did not identify training requirements for Czechia, Spain, Latvia and Slovakia. ↑
Although Accreditation Schemes can ensure that energy assessors hold the right skills by requiring them to attend a training course and to sit an examination, it appears that assessors can also demonstrate suitable qualifications and experience in place of sitting this exam, so it may not be mandatory in all cases. ↑
The literature review did not identify re-certification requirements for Cyprus, Spain, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Sweden, Slovakia and Scotland ↑
We did not identify approaches to QA of EPCs for Slovenia. Italy has adopted a region approach to QA and Slovakia has adopted random sampling, but we did not identify a sampling approach. ↑
Information obtained during an interview with an EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during an interview with an EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Danish EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a German EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Maltese EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Portuguese EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder engagement with an Irish EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Portuguese EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Danish EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with an EPC expert in England and Wales ↑
Information obtained during stakeholder consultation with a Maltese EPC expert ↑
Information obtained during an interview with an EPC expert in Denmark ↑
Information obtained during an interview with EPC experts from Croatia ↑
Information obtained during interview with Danish EPC Expert ↑
The agriculture policies outlined in the Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCP) provide a route map for agricultural transformation, to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. They take a co-development approach and work with stakeholders and farmer-led groups to secure increased uptake of low-emission farming measures through new schemes and approaches.
This project examined the potential reductions in livestock methane emissions through breeding, and the policy levers that could motivate these changes.
We began by exploring the technologies that detect and measure methane, manage data and are used in the breeding process. This included considering the availability of these technologies in Scotland in 2030 and 2045, with practical considerations for a Scottish context, and identifying the breeding traits that can lead to lower methane emissions.
We then identified the relevant policy levers and behaviour changes and considered what Government, the post-farm market, pre-farm gate actors and farmers can do differently to encourage methane reductions through breeding.
Key findings
By 2045, breeding could reduce methane emissions from the digestive process in livestock, known as enteric methane, by up to 9.5% (382.2 kt CO2 equivalent). This is under the “Policy changes” scenario, where legislation will require farmers to introduce methane reducing breeding techniques to their herds (with uptake rates of 100% in dairy, 80% in beef, and 60% in sheep).
This includes a 6.8% reduction in emissions from beef, 6% from dairy and 17.5% from sheep.
This reduction is achieved by selecting traits for methane efficiency (methane production, intensity and yield), feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight, milk yield and milk fat and protein when choosing breeding stock.
Our research highlighted selective breeding for feed efficiency as a promising option. This is because, despite its lower methane reduction potential, it builds on a practice that is already well understood by farmers.
To achieve emission reductions, actions and behaviour changes will be required of Government policymakers, pre- and post-farm gate actors and farmers. We found key barriers were lack of knowledge and perceived cost.
Scotland has a well-developed research base around breeding livestock for reduced emissions, placing it in good stead to develop further work in this area. Funding could be targeted towards building on this research, with more data points to support innovation and enhance the robustness of results. Further research could include the potential for a specific methane reduction target to increase clarity and focus action. Funding would be useful if targeted to better communication of the research findings to inform farm advisers, pre- and post-farm actors and supporting farmer peer-to-peer learning. Collaboration between stakeholder groups will achieve greater progress.
Relevant technologies include methods to detect and measure enteric methane in animals, data management, reproductive technologies and genomics. Those that could be mainstream in Scotland by 2030 include a national breeding programme, sexed semen and the breeding potential of an animal for a specific trait, known as estimated breeding values. The interaction between technologies is key to success. For instance, the wide use of data management tools will depend on the wide use of genomics to collect data.
We found very few instances of methane detection methods being used on farm in the UK. We therefore believe it is unlikely these will be used beyond research and innovators by 2045. As such, we recommend encouraging the use of proxies such as mid-infrared (MIR) spectra in milk to determine methane emissions.
Many reproductive technologies are already in use, particularly in the dairy industry, so we estimate these to be mainstream across the cattle sector by 2045. We estimate lower uptake in the sheep sector due to artificial insemination being a complex procedure. However, as sheep start breeding at an early age and often have multiple births per animal, there is greater potential for emission reductions if low-emitting traits are introduced into the herd such as through a ram.
On this basis, we think there is a strong foundation for breeding for reduced methane emissions to contribute to Scottish Government’s methane and climate commitments and to support Scottish livestock farmers’ future resilience.
Glossary / Abbreviations
AI
Artificial insemination
DNA
Deoxyribonucleic acid is an organic chemical that contains genetic information and instructions for protein synthesis
EBVs
Estimated breeding values
DMI
Dry Matter Intake
FAO
Food and Agriculture Organisation
Gene
A genetic sequence that contains information on specific traits.
Genetic modification
Any process by which genes are changed or deleted in order to adjust a certain characteristic of an organism. It is the manipulation of traits at the cellular level.
Genetic selection
Selecting for specific genes that carry desirable traits.
Genetics
The study of how genes are passed down from one generation to the next.
GHG
Greenhouse gas
CO2
Carbon dioxide
ICBF
Irish Cattle Breeding Federation
Methane
A powerful greenhouse gas, a chemical compound with the chemical formula CH4.
Microbes
Microscopic organisms
Microbiome
A collection of microbes (e.g. bacteria) that occur in the rumen.
NERC
Natural Environment Research Council
PAC
Portable Accumulation Chambers
Precision breeding
Amends sections of DNA by adding or moving genetic material
Proxy
An object/thing that is being used in the place of something else
REA
Rapid evidence assessment
Rumen
The specialised stomach of a ruminant (e.g. cow) that digests feed by microbial fermentation.
Ruminant
Animals, including cattle and sheep, that have more than one stomach and have the ability to bring food up from their stomach and chew it again.
Selective breeding
Choosing animals that carry desirable traits to be bred so that the traits are passed on to their offspring.
Traits
Specific characteristics that are genetically determined.
Introduction
Methane is a powerful greenhouse gas (GHG), 28 times more potent than CO2, produced as a by-product of the ruminant digestive process called enteric fermentation. During enteric fermentation, microbes digest feed in a specialised stomach, known as the rumen, subsequently releasing enteric methane. In 2021, enteric fermentation from ruminant livestock, such as cattle and sheep, was responsible for 48% of GHG emissions from agriculture in Scotland.
The UK signed the Paris Agreement, committing to limit global warming to 1.5°C and is a signatory of the Global Methane Pledge, aiming to reduce global methane emissions by at least 30% from 2020 levels by 2030. The Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019 outlines a net zero target for Scotland by 2045, with a 75% reduction in emissions by 2030. The strategy to meet these targets is laid out in Scotland’s Climate Change Plan (CCP) 2018-2032 and Climate Change Plan Update (CCPU).
One potential way to reduce emissions from the livestock sector is to select breeding traits in livestock that lead to lower methane emissions.
Traditional breeding programmes select cows or ewes producing offspring with desirable characteristics to either produce meat, milk or fibre, or to continue in the breeding herd. This method relies on waiting for the offspring to mature before the desired traits can be identified. The use of genetic technologies allows desired traits to be chosen at the point of breeding, giving a more assured outcome at an earlier stage.
Genetics are already used to facilitate precision breeding to improve livestock performance. As genetic changes are permanent and cumulative, it is an attractive option for targeting and reducing GHG emissions from ruminants (González-Recio et al., 2020; Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021; Rowe et al., 2021).
Scottish research is at the forefront in breeding livestock for reduced methane. A recent project by the Roslin Institute highlighted the strong relationship between the rumen microbiome and methane emissions; SRUC has several relevant research studies (published and ongoing), with research facilities such as GreenCow measuring GHG emissions, and Moredun has researched the impact of livestock health and welfare on methane emissions. In 2023, Defra awarded £2.9 million to the sheep sector to launch ‘Breed for Ch4nge’ which aims to measure methane from 13,500 sheep to improve the efficiency of the UK flock; some of the research is taking place on Scottish farms.
The issue is of interest internationally. New Zealand research has shown that breeding for reduced emissions in sheep does not impact productivity and health; Canadian traders are marketing dairy semen with methane efficiency traits, and beef farmers in Ireland are being paid to take part in genomic programmes.
Please note, reducing methane through dietary amendments (such as feed additives) is out of scope for this project.
Project aims
This research project has two key aims:
To understand the methane emission reductions that could be achieved in Scotland through breeding. We do this by identifying technologies that detect and measure methane, manage data and are involved in the breeding process. We look at the likely availability of these technologies in Scotland in 2030 and 2045, with practical considerations. Finally, we identify the breeding traits that can lead to lower methane emissions and quantify these.
To identify what is needed to support this through policy levers and behaviour change. Using the findings of our literature review and stakeholder consultation, we suggest behaviour changes and discuss their impacts.
Identifying the evidence
To better understand where and how methane emissions could be reduced for project aim 1, we performed a Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) and a series of stakeholder interviews[1] (now on referred to as our review) to understand:
The technologies involved in reduced emission breeding;
The important traits to select for reduced emissions;
Emission reduction values;
The benefits and challenges of breeding for reduced emissions;
The review also sought evidence on what is needed to support further uptake of these technologies in Scotland, for project aim 2.
The technologies involved in breeding for reduced emissions
We grouped the technologies used to identify livestock with low methane emissions into four categories: detection methods, data management, reproductive technologies and animal genomics.
We found little information regarding the timeline of availability for the technologies on farms in Scotland. In the stakeholder interviews, many were not aware of specific technologies being used unless they were directly involved in research. Our research did find international evidence, for example, portable accumulation chambers (PAC) in New Zealand support The Cool Sheep™ Programme. Due to this limited data on timing, we categorised the availability of the technology in Scotland in 2030 and 2045 under the following headings:
Experimental (E): used in research only, with no use on Scottish farms.
Innovative (I): used in trials on Scottish farms by a few innovators.
Mainstream (M): considered mainstream and being used on Scottish farms.
Future possibility (FP): unlikely the technology will be used by 2030 or 2045, however not ruling out its availability in the future.
Not applicable (NA): not relevant to the sector.
The rate of technology uptake will differ between and within sectors. For instance, dairy cattle are milked multiple times a day, providing an opportunity to closely assess individuals interacting with the technology. For the same assessment in the beef and sheep sectors, the grazing nature of the system may require cultural and habitual change for widespread uptake (Jones and Haresign, 2020). Farmers also have different interests, business structures, cash flow etc which impacts their decisions on changing farm practices.
Cost was excluded from our review due to the complexities in estimation. The cost of a technology is likely to depend on the individual farm situation, for example, the number of livestock or proximity to infrastructure or manufacturers. Technologies requiring installation may vary depending on whether adjustments are required to an existing building.
We understand the technologies presented below have the potential to be used in Scotland. The full list of technologies discovered in our research can be found in Appendix A, section 9.1.
Detection methods
Detection methods are used to detect and measure enteric methane to identify which animals emit less. Examples include a respiration chamber which measures the difference in methane emissions with and without the animal, while spot sampling uses head chamber systems or hand-held lasers to take short-term measurements from the animal’s breath (Tedeschi et al., 2022). Further examples can be seen in Table 1.
We found very few instances of detection methods being used in UK research, but we estimate that some will be available in 2030 and more by 2045 (see Table 1). However, as detection methods are primarily a research tool, it is unlikely they will be used beyond innovators by 2045. Practical constraints such as large technological components and measuring a few animals at a time make it challenging to introduce respiration chambers (which are considered the ‘gold standard’ of measurements) on a large scale (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021; Rowe et al., 2020). As such, we recommend encouraging use of proxies such as mid-infrared (MIR) spectra in milk to determine methane emissions.
Portable Accumulation Chambers (PACs) have been launched recently by scientists at Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC) for use across the UK. The two units (of 12 trailers) are currently only being used for research purposes. Each trailer holds 12 chambers and is capable of measuring between 60 – 80 sheep per day providing breeding values for methane emissions for representative samples of sheep within a breeding programme (Duthie et al., 2024)
New Zealand currently incorporates the use of PACs in breeding programmes through The Cool Sheep™ Programme, where breeders use PACs to measure and select for low-emitting rams available for breeding. Research trials are underway in countries such as Australia, Norway and Uruguay and now the UK. This technology provides a promising option for Scotland as it is transportable between farms and has a short measurement period which limits stress in livestock. However, current research trials on UK sheep systems need to be completed before PACs can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Data management
Data management technologies are essential to store, share and analyse data, while also tracking individuals and breeding lines with desired traits to improve target outcomes (including emissions reductions).
The dairy sector is advanced in this area compared to beef and sheep sectors, with established tools for monitoring and measuring production characteristics. Stakeholders discussed the possibility to enhance or repackage these tools and platforms, such as ScotEID, to incorporate methane traits. Using a tool that is familiar for farmers might reduce resistance for adoption.
Case study: New Zealand
N-Prove is a free website tool for New Zealand farmers to find the best rams for breeding. Using a series of buttons and slider scales, farmers can customise what traits they are looking for in a ram. NProve then generates a list of breeders with rams that best fit. Farmers can select terminal or maternal traits, as well as breeders based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results. Methane production is an option to select from the maternal traits. The tool is free to use and registration is not required. The tools anonymity means farmers can gather their options for the best breeder for their farm. NProve sources data from a central database and genetic evaluation service (SIL database) that holds information for more than 600 flocks, making it one of the largest genetic evaluations of sheep in the world. This tool could be used in a similar fashion for other species in other geographies as long as an appropriate database was available or was developed to source information.
Data technologies rely on wider infrastructure, such as website portals or cross-country collaboration, making it challenging to estimate the availability for 2030 and 2045. However, there is high potential. Stakeholders discussed that a risk for these technologies is the lack of interest and uptake from farmers, so it is important to inform and engage the industry regarding their benefits.
These technologies offer benefits for farmers by improving the understanding of the genetic qualities of their livestock and having a head-start on understanding the genetics and traits being brought into the herd. See Table 2 for the relevant data management technologies.
Table 1. Examples of the detection methods involved in breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Livestock Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Automated head chamber system (e.g. GreenFeed)
A head chamber unit that can be positioned in housing or pasture. Feed is used to attract livestock to the unit (van Breukelen, 2023; Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Non-invasive.
Can be set up in grazing fields or in housing.
Portable
High purchase and running costs.
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Feed to attract livestock increases costs.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence was found for use in the UK. It could be a feasible option for Scotland due to the benefits of transportability and ability to measure grazing livestock.
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data
MIR spectroscopy is used to predict the fat and protein content of milk. As methane is linked to milk composition, the latter can be used as a proxy to predict methane emissions (Dehareng et al., 2012; Semex, 2023).
Dairy
Milk components such as lactose, protein and fat
MIR technology is already used routinely in milk recording. Therefore providing an existing infrastructure to integrate methane reporting to.
Because it is a proxy, validation of results (for example with a respiration chamber) is required (Denninger et al., 2020).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
No evidence found of MIR in the UK to estimate methane, but European examples were found. The data could become available through existing milk recording schemes, so it could be introduced by innovators by 2030. If the need for verifying results via detection methods is removed, this could be mainstream by 2045.
Portable accumulation chambers (PAC)
A portable respiration chamber which takes measurements over a short period of time (e.g. 1 hour) (Cummins et al., 2022).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Quick measurement period reduces animal stress (Cummins et al., 2022).
Transportable (NZHerald, 2023).
Feeding and management protocols must be followed prior to measurements (Duthie et al., 2024).
Not suitable for long-term measurements (Cummins et al., 2022).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A promising option for Scotland as it is transportable between farms. SRUC recently acquired a PAC for sheep. However, current research needs to be completed before they can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Handheld lasers
A handheld device originally developed to detect gas leaks can measure concentrations of methane in livestock breath (Sorg, 2021).
All
Methane concentration
Non-invasive and portable.
Can take measurements from grazing livestock.
Can take measurements from several animals in one day.
Results can be sent to a smart phone (Sorg, 2021).
Has a lower accuracy, measurements are highly affected by environmental conditions (de Haas et al., 2021; Sorg, 2021).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence found for use in UK research. However, the benefit of taking measurements from several animals in the same day may make it an attractive option for Scotland. Its widespread use may depend on supporting infrastructure such as reporting systems.
Table 2. Examples of data management tools involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
nProve
A free tool for New Zealand farmers to use to choose rams for breeding. They can choose the terminal or maternal traits that fit their breeding goals. When choosing maternal traits, methane production is an option.
Sheep
Reproduction, lamb growth, size, meat, wool, health indices, methane production.
User friendly.
Farmers can choose rams based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results.
NA
NA
2030: FP
2045: I
Success requires genetic evaluation and measuring methane (via PAC) to be common practice. Existing tools such as ScotEID (records births, deaths, and movements), and RamCompare (presents performance recorded ram data), could be repackaged to incorporate methane production.
National breeding programme
A programme which plans and identifies breeding objectives, traits and information on selection criteria
All
Methane emissions
UK wide
To be successful at a national scale, significant data, cooperation and initial funding is required.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
In 2023, The National Sheep Association began a 3-year initiative to measure methane from 13,500 sheep to incorporate production traits into breeding programmes. With progress like this, it is possible that national breeding programmes will be mainstream by 2030.
Multi-country database
An international database that contains data from many livestock (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
All
performance/ production (trait-related) records
A larger dataset
improves robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in reporting, recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
Sharing genetic information between countries requires compliance with the Nagoya Protocol.
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: I
2030: FP
2045: FP
Due to data sharing challenges, it is unlikely this will be available by 2045 in this context. There may be progress in the dairy sector due to the use of methane indexes, e.g. in Canada and the international scope of many dairy processors.
Bull catalogues (e.g. Genus Bull search)
This index allows farmers to see the scores of certain traits in bulls.
Dairy, beef
One of these traits is called Feed Advantage which can identify bulls with the greatest feed conversion (ABS, 2023).
Farmers can choose bulls with the desired characteristics to use in breeding.
2030: M
2024: M
2030: M
2024: M
NA
These are already available for farmers to use, so we would estimate them to be mainstream by 2030.
Reproductive technologies
Reproductive technologies are directly used for breeding. With many already in use on Scottish dairy farms, we estimate that it is likely most will be mainstream in the cattle sectors by 2045. We estimate lower progress in the sheep sector reflecting the current low uptake. Stakeholders discussed the reasons for low uptake in the sheep sector are due to the extensive nature of sheep farming in Scotland and less infrastructure for sheep in this area, such as semen collection and storage, the availability of which determines uptake. In addition to this, artificial insemination (AI) in sheep requires a vet to perform a surgical procedure (in cattle it can be done by a qualified farmer), adding a practical and financial hurdle.
Table 3. Examples of reproductive technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Artificial insemination (AI)
A technique to inseminate females, using fresh or frozen semen.
All
High success rate for cattle.
No requirement for a bull to be on the farm.
Better guarantee of uniform calving.
AI in sheep is often done by laparoscopic artificial insemination which is a surgical procedure done by a vet. Due to the scale and extensive nature of sheep farming, this brings practical challenges.
Relies on sufficient infrastructure to collect and store semen (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
AI is common practice in the dairy sector, with some use in the beef sector. It’s likely this will be mainstream by 2030 for cattle. Due to the practical challenges in sheep, it may still only apply to innovators.
Sexed semen
A method which allows control over the sex of the offspring by separating sperm cells based on their X or Y chromosome content. By focusing on females for example, there is the potential to reduce methane emissions by reducing the number of unwanted males (Duthie et al., 2024).
All
Increasing selection of females in the dairy sector improves productivity.
Success relies on the uptake of AI.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
This is widely done in the dairy sector. Use in the beef sector is currently lower, however by 2030 there is the potential for this to be mainstream. Progress is determined by the uptake of AI in the sector. Due to the practical challenges associated with AI, it will likely remain an innovative practice in the sheep sector.
Conventional breeding
The use of bull/ram to cow/ewe breeding. Selecting cows or ewes producing offspring with desirable characteristics to remain in the breeding herd.
All
Minimal technical input.
Familiar practice for farmers.
Little control over selecting desirable traits.
Time intensive as it requires offspring maturity before seeing if they have the desired traits.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Already common practice for general breeding, so breeding for methane reduction could be mainstream by 2030.
Animal Genomics
Genomics is the study of the genome, a complete set of an organism’s DNA[2]. Genomics provides the opportunity to better understand how well an animal will perform based on its DNA profile. DNA and management both determine performance qualities, such as milk yield. Precision breeding (which is not genetic modification) amends sections of DNA by adding or moving genetic material. This has been used in the cropping sector to improve yields and/or disease resistance. In the livestock sector, research focusses on increased resilience to bovine tuberculosis and mastitis. In 2023, England introduced The Precision Breeding Act, outlining classifications for using precision breeding on crops and livestock, including how the products from them should be regulated, “Neither the Scottish nor Welsh Parliaments have granted legislative consent to the Bill.”.
Table 4. Examples of animal genomic technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Microbiome-driven breeding
Emphasis is on selecting livestock with a rumen microbiome composition which is more efficient at fermenting feed so producing less methane.
All
Rumen fluid samples – sequencing of microbial DNA.
Potential method for improving animal health and reducing environmental impact.
This is a relatively new field and much is unknown about how the gut microbiome develops and is maintained over time.
It is unclear how much influence the animal may have over those processes.
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Good early signs but still at research stage.
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
Values that are based on information from livestock DNA and measured performance. Can be used with EBVs to improve accuracy of breeding programmes. (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA and performance records.
Can be used to identify traits that
are difficult to record.
Beneficial for traits measured in only one sex.
Useful for accurately measuring traits that occur later in life (Scholtens et al., 2020).
Accuracy of the estimate is dependent on the number of animals included in the reference population (Scholtens et al., 2020).
2030: I
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: M
GEBVs are currently available for a number of carcass traits in Limousin cattle in the UK (Business Wales, 2016) and offered by the genetic company Genus.
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
Calculated from the performance data of recorded animals. Environmental factors (e.g. feeding) are filtered out to provide a genetic value for each trait (Stout, D. 2021).
All
Performance records – parentage and traits of interest (e.g. weight traits).
Provides a more objective (data driven approach) towards selection.
Genetic selection based on EBVs leads to faster rates of genetic gain and flock improvement (compared to selection based on raw data or basic observation).
Allows comparisons within breeds, not between breeds.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Use as a tool to aid in the selection of healthy and structurally sound animals.
Traits
Traits are specific characteristics of an individual (physical or behavioural) that are influenced by genes and environmental factors. Understanding the traits that lead to lower methane emissions is key to a successful breeding programme for methane emissions reduction.
It should be noted that the breeding focus, and therefore traits selected, depends on the farmer’s goals. For example, breeding for breeding stock would focus on selecting offspring traits, such as calving or lambing ease, while farms producing fat or store stock would focus on product traits, such as increased liveweight gain (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Currently, most traits are associated with productivity, such as increasing milk yield in the dairy sector. Progress in the beef and sheep sectors has been much slower, with fewer examples found of genetics used in breeding programmes.
The traits in Table 5 are used for breeding in global research to reduce methane emissions directly and indirectly. We have categorised these traits into the following groups:
Production – offspring: Traits associated with reproduction.
Production – product: Traits associated with products from the animal.
Functional: Traits that underpin the function of the animal and are not specific to production or emissions improvements.
Climate: Traits directly linked to reducing methane emissions.
Stakeholders and the literature emphasised that selection for methane reduction traits should ensure production traits, such as health, are not compromised (Stakeholder comment, 2023; Llonch et al., 2017). To look into this further, we examined performance and methane efficiency data from SEMEX. For their Holstein bulls with above average methane efficiency scores, we could not identify any clear relationship between this trait and the other traits. However, this is only for one breed of cattle from one company.
Case study: New Zealand
Research in New Zealand genotyped low emitting sheep which identified traits that lead to reduced methane emission. The research found no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions.
Our research highlighted the importance of selecting for feed efficiency. Despite this trait having a lower methane reduction potential than others, it will benefit farmers through more efficient use of feed through better feed conversion (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Table 6 presents the traits that were selected for further analysis, including quantification and the technologies used to detect or select them. Only a few of the traits found in our review were taken forward because some of the traits did not have robust emission reduction values, so were therefore excluded from our calculations.
Table 5. Traits included in breeding indexes around the world, split by sector and type.
Table 6. The quantifiable traits in each sector, with the technologies which can be used to detect or select them.
Technologies used to detect or select traits
Quantifiable traits in each sector
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Feed efficiency
Offspring carcass weight
Methane production
Feed efficiency
Milk fat and protein
Milk yield
Methane intensity
Feed efficiency
Methane yield
Detection methods
Respiration chambers
X
X
X
Sniffers
X
X
X
SF6 tracer gas
X
X
X
Automated head chamber system
X
X
X
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data (proxy)
X
X
X
X
PAC
X
X
X
Handheld lasers
X
X
X
Rumen microbial composition
X
X
X
Feed efficiency index
X
X
X
Data management
Selection index theory
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
National breeding programmes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi-country database
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Efficient Dairy Genome Project
X
X
X
X
Ram Compare
X
X
Bull catalogues
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reproductive technologies
Artificial Insemination (AI)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Conventional breeding
X
X
X
Animal genomics
Microbiome-driven breeding
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genotyping
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genetic markers
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Quantifying the potential emission savings
We calculated the potential methane emission reductions under different traits for dairy, beef and sheep. Further information can be found in Appendix E.
The traits identified in our review (see Section 4.2) were further evaluated to assess their applicability to emission reduction calculations, based on requirements for defined quantification of methane emission values (either absolute or relative) and values to have a comparative emission baseline. A summary of the applicable traits used in the quantification calculations are presented in Table 7 below, with further information presented in Appendix E, Section 10.6.4.
Table 7. Traits used in the calculations of emissions savings
Sector
Trait Category
Trait Name
Unit of baseline
Value of methane reduction from baseline
Beef
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Offspring carcass weight
kgCO2e/per kg meat per breeding cow per year
1.3%
Climate
Methane yield
gCH4/kgDMI per generation
12%
Dairy
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
5%
Milk fat + protein
MJ CH4/kg milk
12%
Milk yield
kg CH4/kg milk
15%
Climate
Methane intensity
kg CH4/kg milk
24%
Sheep
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Climate
Methane yield
g CH4/kg DMI
35%
The current uptake of genetic traits focused on methane emissions is estimated based on our review and discussions with Scottish Government. This was based on an understanding on the currently uptake of AI and breeding technologies used within the sector from expert knowledge and limited research able to be found online. This rate provides a baseline for the quantification of additional uptake in 2030 and 2045 under four scenarios (further described in Appendix E, Section 10.6.4). The scenarios include: no additional intervention, voluntary uptake, supplier demand and policy changes. Scenario uptake percentages are presented with the current baselines in Table 8 below. These values were developed based on technical expertise and discussion with both stakeholders and Scottish Government, as well as published research. The impact of other traits (such as functional, health related traits) could not be estimated in this work as relevant values for methane reduction potential could not be identified in the literature. Further information in the calculation methodology, including additional detail on the selected scenarios, traits selected and limitations to the data is presented in Appendix E, Section 10.6.
Table 8. Scenario implementation values for dairy, beef and sheep
Type
Scenario
Current baseline
2030 uptake
2045 uptake
Dairy
1. No intervention
75%
80%
80%
2. Voluntary uptake
75%
80%
85%
3. Supplier demand
75%
82.5%
92.5%
4. Policy changes
75%
85%
100%
Beef
1. No intervention
40%
45%
45%
2. Voluntary uptake
40%
45%
50%
3. Supplier demand
40%
47.5%
65%
4. Policy changes
40%
50%
80%
Sheep
1. No intervention
10%
15%
15%
2. Voluntary uptake
10%
15%
20%
3. Supplier demand
10%
17.5%
40%
4. Policy changes
10%
20%
60%
Baseline enteric fermentation methane emissions for beef, dairy cattle and sheep in Scotland in 2021 (totalling 4,020 kt CO2e ), show beef cattle emitted the most at 59% (2,370 kt CO2e ), sheep emitted 26% (1,061 kt CO2e ), and dairy cattle 15% of (590 kt CO2e).
Our calculations found that methane focused traits (methane production/intensity/yield) presented the highest emission reductions for all livestock categories. As the impact of the interaction between traits are unknown, reductions from traits focused on feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight (beef specific) and milk yield, milk fat and protein (dairy specific) are not presented in the maximum reduction potential. However, we acknowledge that reductions for these traits were found within the three livestock categories. Results are presented in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 below. These figures show that in each sector, up to 2030, the reductions are relatively steady, but there is a greater reduction at 2045, influenced by the proposed increase in uptake. Due to the proposed uptake percentages the policy change scenario presents the greatest reduction under all traits, with the no intervention scenario showing the smallest reduction due to a 5% increase in uptake in 2030 and no further uptake in 2045.
In the policy change scenario, choosing climate traits, we estimate that emissions would reduce in 2045 up to 382.2 kt CO2e or 9.5% of enteric methane emissions. This includes a 6.8% reduction from beef cattle (161.1 kt CO2e), 6% in dairy cattle (35.4 kt CO2e) and 17.5% in sheep (185.6 kt CO2e). Smaller reductions are feasible from traits focused on feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight (beef specific) and milk yield, milk fat and protein (dairy specific). Further details presented in Appendix E.
Figure 1. Methane emissions for beef cattle traits against the 2021 baseline enteric methane emissions of beef cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 2. Methane emissions for dairy traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of dairy cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 3. Methane emissions for sheep traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of sheep in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Identifying policy drivers and behaviour change needs
This section examines actions to encourage behaviour change. We understand that behaviour change is needed by four stakeholder groups:
Government, which would be policy drivers
Post-farm gate market, such as supermarkets, wholesalers, caterers, hospitality etc
Pre-farm gate, such as livestock markets, breed societies
Farmers
We explored how actions taken by each stakeholder group can enable further behaviour change in the other groups, and present three national level case studies to show actions that promote breeding practices to reduce methane emissions. Examples from these case studies are dispersed through the report in text boxes where the surrounding information was relevant. The countries are as follows:
Ireland, which has incentivised and subsidised breeding practices.
Canada, which has incentivised and subsidised breeding practices.
New Zealand, which has started to take a regulatory approach and has incentivised breeding practices.
All three countries have strong research programmes supporting their policies.
Government action
Scottish Government have an important role in supporting uptake of new breeding techniques through policy. Below are policy drivers that can influence behaviour changes across the other stakeholder groups (post-farm gate market, pre-farm gate actors and farmers).
Legislation and targets
Setting a legal target for methane reduction in Scotland can help to shift the focus of the agricultural industry to methane emissions and align with climate commitments that have been made, such as the Global Methane Pledge at COP26. Other countries have set separate targets for biogenic methane, nitrous oxide, and carbon dioxide, such as New Zealand.
Case study: New Zealand
New Zealand aims to achieve net-zero emissions by 2050 and has a target to reduce biogenic methane by 10% relative to 2017 levels by 2030 and 24 – 47% by 2050. This ‘split-gas’ approach helped focus policy development and action, informed by strong research programmes and stakeholder dialogue. A split-gas approach can also give farmers flexibility to determine the most efficient, cost-effective mitigation practices for their farms (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
A methane target for Scotland could encourage constructive conversations among stakeholders about how to reduce emissions, leading to a higher uptake of relevant practices.
Financial incentives
The concept of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions may be new for many farmers in Scotland. Methane emissions from ruminant livestock are viewed by many as a natural part of livestock farming, particularly in upland farming systems (Bruce, 2013). Therefore, the economic benefits of breeding for reduced methane emissions will need to be clearly demonstrated to farmers.
Cost was mentioned by some stakeholders as a barrier to selecting livestock based on lower emissions. However, there was little understanding of what the specific costs are. Given this, the perceived cost of adopting new breeding techniques might become just as significant as the barrier of cost itself. However, measuring methane from individual animals in a herd using the technologies in Table 1 is labour intensive and not widely available, which creates financial and labour bottlenecks (CIEL, 2023).
6.1.2.1 Subsidies
Some stakeholders believe that new policies could drive financial incentives (Stakeholder comment, 2023). For example, payments for using the technologies presented in section 4.1.
6.1.2.2. Specific funds incentivising measuring emissions
New Zealand supported a programme via funding to enable every stud ram breeder to use PAC chambers to measure emissions. This service was oversubscribed in 2023, indicating that the adoption of measurement techniques could be encouraged by government funding.
Case study: New Zealand
The Cool Sheep™ Programme, launched in 2022, is a three-year programme aiming to offer genetic selection to every sheep farmer in New Zealand to reduce GHG emissions. It gathers phenotype data to provide a methane breeding value which will be available on NProve. Breeders wanting to produce low-methane rams can measure a proportion of their flock using a PAC.
6.1.2.3. Research
All three case study countries have strong Government funded research programmes. The outputs from these informs the policies and actions designed to reduce emissions. Scotland is at the forefront of research on breeding livestock for reduced methane, so this just emphasises the importance of focussing research in this area.
Case study: Canada
Canada’s Agricultural Methane Reduction Challenge will award up to $12 million CD$ to innovators designing practices, processes, and technologies to reduce enteric methane emissions.
Education and advice
Effective communication around breeding for reduced methane and the climate benefits for reducing methane are essential to support uptake. Farmers are crucial stakeholders and while some may be confident in trialling new approaches, advice must be available to help all understand why and how to implement innovative techniques on their farm, manage their farm in a new system and where to ask for help (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Training could also be provided by the private sector.
Peer to peer learning is very successful as it provides an informal opportunity to ask practical questions of farmers who have already tried and hopefully succeeded.
Example: Northern Ireland farmers visit Scotland
As part of the Farm Innovation Visits, a group of dairy farmers from Northern Ireland visited farms in Scotland to see breeding technologies in practice, such as genetic reports and use of sexed semen.
Farm advisers would be essential to ensure consistent and clear messaging to farmers. Training and communication material could be provided for advisers through existing Government schemes such as the Scottish Farm Advisory Service.
Consumers should be made aware of the importance of reducing methane emissions and of the industry’s associated actions .
Behaviour change
Table 10 shows the outcome of our review on possible Government actions that could lead to behaviour change among farmers, the post-farm gate market and pre-farm gate actors. The three key actions we identified are 1) legislative targets for methane reductions, 2) financial incentives and 3) education and advice programmes.
Table 107: Behaviour changes caused by actions taken by Government
Government actions
Behaviour changes due to Government actions
Farmers
Pre-farm gate actors
Post-farm gate market
Legislative targets for methane emissions reductions
Provides a legislative backstop that must be met. Increased awareness of emissions helps farmers to visualise their emissions and select practices for adoption.
Provides a legislative backstop that must be met. Livestock markets and breed societies prompted to support farmers by providing information on emissions from animals.
Provides a legislative backstop, therefore retailers may encourage suppliers to take on low-emission breeding practices.
Financial incentives
Farmers are more likely to invest time and money in adopting breeding practices if they receive payments for their efforts or if (real and perceived) financial barriers are reduced.
Stronger demand from farmers to understand emissions from livestock will drive breed societies and markets to provide information about emissions.
If breed societies provide advice on reducing emissions from a herd, they could gain a competitive and possibly over time cultural advantage.
Reduced emission livestock products could be marketed for a higher price, aimed at more environmentally conscious consumers.
Risk: if government subsidies were already supporting farmers adopting emission reduction practices, retailers may be less incentivised to pay a premium price.
Education and advice programmes
Increased awareness and clarity on breeding practices to reduce emissions may encourage increased uptake.
Advisers will be able to influence farmers.
Increased awareness of low emissions products may influence consumers to buy food produced using low emission breeding strategies.
Risk: consumers will ask for one thing but often pay for something different
Post-farm gate market
The post-farm gate market includes supermarkets, farm shops, other retailers, consumers and food chain assurance schemes. It has an important role in supporting uptake of new breeding techniques through demonstrating demand and providing price signals. Using our review, we explored actions where the market can influence behaviour change across the other stakeholder groups.
Price signals
Stakeholders discussed the important role of supermarkets, retailers, hospitality businesses, and their suppliers and consumers as these groups can set standards for better prices or to meet customer/societal demands. For example, Tesco aims to be net zero from farm to fork by 2050 , Waitrose has committed to source only from net zero carbon farms in the UK by 2035, and Morrisons aim to be supplied by ‘Net Zero’ carbon British farms as a whole by 2030. Others along the supply chain may need to start to provide evidence of emission reductions as these different retailers and suppliers reduce their Scope 3 emissions, for example as outlined in the British Retail Consortium’s Net Zero Roadmap for the Retail Industry.
Validation of the claims through assurance schemes are important to ensure trust in the food chain. A stakeholder said, “if you take an animal to a ‘normal’ livestock market and claim it has reduced methane emissions, you’ll probably get the same price as any other animal regardless of the additional effort”.
Consumer demand
Consumers paying a premium price are likely to drive new practice adoption. Transparent communication about low emission breeding practices, supply chains and actions on farm is important to demonstrate to consumers the benefits of their choices and reduce the risk of ‘greenwashing’.
International example: Sweden
In 2022, methane-reduced beef was sold in Sweden. It was well received by consumers, selling out in less than a week. There was however backlash in the media with claims of greenwashing. This example emphasises consumers’ interests in climate-friendly options. while ensuring transparency.
Behaviour change
How the market influences other stakeholders is explored in more detail in Table 10. The key actions are 1) improved price signals from retailers and 2) increased consumer demand which is realised at the sales point.
Table 11: Behaviour changes caused by post-farm gate market actions
Post-farm gate actions
Behaviour changes as a result of post-farm gate actions
Government
Farmers
Pre-farm gate industry
Post-farm gate market retailers
Price signals from retailers
Similar to government financial incentives, farmers are more likely to invest time and money in adopting breeding practices if they receive payments for their efforts.
Risk: uptake by farmers could be inconsistent depending on which retailers adopt this action first.
Livestock markets or breed societies could display methane scores if they know this is something that farmers are looking for.
Retailers offering a premium for low-emitting products will encourage uptake of practices.
Marketing low-emitting products will raise awareness among consumers, possibly increasing demand for low-emission products.
Post farm gate actors own emission reduction targets to meet societal demand for low emission products will require farms to reduce emissions
Increased consumer demand for low emissions livestock products
Government may be encouraged to support low methane emissions breeding practices due to a higher demand.
Procurement guidelines for catering in Government funded facilities could include low methane emitting meat.
Increased demand for low emissions products may prompt adoption of practices.
Due to farming in Scotland not being solely driven by the market, consumer demand alone may not influence the pre-farm gate industry. Yet it may lead to actions that prompt further actions related to emission savings.
Increased demand for low-emission products will incentivise retailers and hospitality to provide these, possibly paying a premium to farmers.
Pre-farm gate actors
Pre-farm gate actors refers to industry representatives, levy groups, research institutions, breed societies, and livestock markets. They have an important role in supporting uptake of new techniques through increasing understanding and supporting data collection. Below are actions that can influence behaviour change.
Improving data and data sharing
A key infrastructure need is an accessible database of genetic information, including methane emissions, to enable benchmarking (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Stakeholders noted that farmers may struggle to envision new practices on their farms, and a database can help to conceptualise the traits.
Case study: New Zealand
The ram selection tool nProve provides a user-friendly platform to select required traits in a ram, including methane production.
Existing platforms already used by farmers, such as ScotEID, the Beef Efficiency Scheme (BES), and SRUC’s genetic tool EGENES could add new elements around methane (Stakeholder comment, 2023). For example, Nprove allows farmers to assess methane elements in a user-friendly way.
The Beef Efficiency Scheme (BES) required farmers and land managers to submit tissue samples and other metrics of their beef herd to develop an understanding of the genes within the herd to improve efficiency. Uptake from the industry was low, with only 30% of the national breeding herd participating in the scheme. It currently remains unclear in the literature if the captured data has been incorporated into any local breeding schemes or progressed following the end of the scheme. This scheme could provide valuable learning on the integration of positive genetic traits across the herd in Scotland.
In our review, a stakeholder commented that as only a handful of breeds make up most of the livestock sector in Scotland, the establishment of a database would not take long to create (Stakeholder comment, 2023). This comment however shows the lack of understanding that the genetic material for breeding for methane is independent of breed and based on individual animals.
Case study: Ireland
The Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF) launched the National Genotyping Programme (NGP) in 2023 to achieve a fully genotyped cattle herd in Ireland. The programme offers beef and dairy farmers a low-cost option to collect DNA samples from calves at birth. The collected information is used to identify specific traits which contribute to national genetic indexes, including methane traits. It also allows farmers to optimise the health and productivity of their herd, while reducing the emissions intensity. The ICBF further publish methane evaluations for AI sires when methane data has been recorded.
Ireland’s NGP and New Zealand’s N Prove provide examples of the development of national databases. In Ireland, the use of metrics like Residual Methane Emissions (RME) index and predicted transmitting ability (PTA) aim to provide an easy way of comparing livestock to the average and to other farmers. Stakeholders noted that a challenge in the Scottish context could be a reluctance by stakeholders to pool data. However this has been successfully achieved in the Scottish pig industry with a number of health and productivity benefits to the individual farmers and to the sector. The NGP also allowed for subsidising DNA sampling of calves which helps to genotype the national herd
Stakeholders discussed the potential for livestock markets to display information on methane emissions. In many markets, a screen displays the weight of the animal and the name of the seller; it could be possible to add the expected or benchmarked methane emissions.
Case study: New Zealand
A methane breeding value was launched in 2019 by Beef and Lamb New Zealand, giving the sector a practical decision making tool. This led to the development of The Cool Sheep™ Programme (see section 6.1.2).
Metrics for methane emissions
Stakeholders recommend adding methane as an estimated breeding value (EBV) as this would allow farmers to benchmark. Stakeholders emphasised that metrics would only be used if they are adopted consistently across Scotland (and perhaps the UK) with cross sector collaboration and there was some incentive for farmers to reduce methane emissions from their livestock. Similarly, to the adoption of RME and PTA figures in Ireland, regulation and guidance from Scottish Government would be advisable to make sure the most sensible metric was adopted.
Case study: Ireland
Residual methane emissions (RME) index is a metric to understanding the difference between the expected methane emissions based on feed intake and the actual emissions. High RME is undesirable and low RME is desirable.
ICBF methane predicted transmitting ability (PTA) values have been produced by recording methane emissions from over 1,500 animals from 19 breeds. These are publicly available for AI beef and dairy bulls. Bulls are classed as favourable or unfavourable compared with the average sire.
Behaviour change
The two key take-aways from our review are 1) improved data and data sharing amongst farmers, researchers and across stakeholders and 2) developing metrics for methane emissions to enable benchmarking between farmers and products. Table 12 describes how actions by pre-farm gate actors could support behaviour change among other stakeholders.
Table 12: Behaviour change due to actions taken by the pre-farm gate actors
Pre-farm gate action
Behaviour change due to pre-farm gate action
Government
Farmers
Pre-farm gate actors
Post-farm gate market
Improved data and data sharing
A database can inform policy.
Enables farmers to understand the emission reduction potential of their animals.
Displaying methane information at markets can help choose livestock based on emissions.
More data would support more robust research, thereby increasing the output of Scotland-specific research.
Markets around Scotland displaying methane data would raise awareness among farmers.
Better data would enable retailers to communicate sustainability data to customers, increasing trust in the food system.
Metrics for methane emissions
Scottish Government could ensure all relevant stakeholders are involved in developing a metric.
Metrics would enable farmers to make comparisons against individual animals when deciding which ones to breed or purchase.
Breed societies and livestock markets would be able to display methane emissions.
Breed society representatives can discuss options for reducing emissions.
Retailers have a consistent metric they can use to communicate the methane emissions of products to consumers.
Farmers
Farmer behaviour change in this context relates to choosing animals with low methane traits to breed, and implementing systems on farm that support this. Some farmers could measure emissions from their livestock to verify the effectiveness of breeding for reduced emissions. Uptake of technologies outlined in section 4 provides the opportunity to better track genetics and traits in their herd.
Farmers will need support to make these changes and to enable behaviour change from the pre-market, post-market and government stakeholder groups identified in the sections above. In addition, the adoption of new practices will likely vary between dairy, beef and sheep producers, and the challenges they face will be different. Farmers who are already using reproductive technologies, such as sexed semen and AI, are expected to progress fastest in this area, given their familiarity with the processes. It is likely that the dairy sector will lead the way, and to a smaller extent, the beef sector. Rapid uptake of AI (and therefore sexed semen) in the sheep sector faces practical challenges, therefore it may be best to prioritise low-emitting traits in rams.
The financial benefit of farmers selecting methane traits is currently unclear. It is likely that the primary motivation will come from the supply chain; it will be important to have specific supply chain indicators. For example, if a milk buyer sets methane reduction goals, suppliers will need to respond. Behaviour change is also influenced by seeing neighbours or peers taking on new practices for example. Below are some points for each of the different livestock sectors groups that should be considered to enable the behaviour change actions identified in the previous sections.
Cummins et al (2022) advise that further research is needed on how breeding for low methane emissions affects the productive and profitable genes that make an animal appealing to farmers. However, research in New Zealand on genotyped low emitting sheep showed no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions and preliminary economic analysis shows that low-emitting sheep could lead to higher profits, primarily due to higher growth rates, a greater proportion of meat, and increased wool production. This section also briefly covers some actions that could be undertaken on farm to support farmers to shift to breeding lower methane emitting livestock.
Sheep farmers
Sheep farmers deal with a large number of animals which tend to be farmed extensively in Scotland, so using methane detecting technologies is potentially more difficult than for other livestock sectors. Despite this challenge, the shorter time to slaughter means that low-emitting traits can be introduced regularly and methane reductions can accumulate quickly (Stakeholder comment, 2023). In addition, other countries such as New Zealand have implemented programmes to begin to measure the national flock such as The Cool Sheep Programme (see section 6.1.2). Stakeholders discussed how the sheep sector produces a lower-value product compared to the cattle sector, so cash flow may be a prohibiting factor in taking on new practices.
Beef farmers
Stakeholders asserted that the beef sector is complicated by several commercial interests in the market which influence genetic improvement. Unlike the dairy sector, AI is not widely used in the beef sector (Stakeholder comment, 2023). However, there are opportunities to influence the genetics of the herd by encouraging bull breeders or bull stud farms to take on practices to support low-emitting traits.
As it is common for dairy cow offspring to enter the beef system, there is the opportunity to use lower emitting dairy animals to feed into emissions reductions in the beef sector (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Dairy farmers
The dairy sector is the most advanced ruminant sector in using genetic technology and tools for selective breeding. For example, AI is fairly common practice, currently with the objective of increasing productivity rather than targeting emissions. Progress in the sheep and beef sectors is much slower due to challenges around practicalities, sufficient data and uptake of technologies in these sectors. The dairy industry also has a steadier cashflow than beef and sheep (Stakeholder comment, 2023), and is more progressive when it comes to real-time data collection and data management. This puts the dairy sector in a good position to advance breeding for reduced methane emissions.
Cross-farm actions to support breeding lower methane livestock
Strong and structured communication, sharing of ideas and engagement locally are important drivers to enable behaviour change in farming communities. Peer to peer support, for example through breeding groups, to share ideas, showcase technologies and discuss successful and disappointing technologies will enable neighbours and other local farmers to progress faster. Organising local workshops, either by Government supported advisers or leading farmers, would help to spread the word about the importance of breeding for reduced emissions and provide practical examples. The more discussion about the overall aim, the need to reduce emissions, the potential actions, outcomes and successes, the more likely that breeding for reduced methane emissions will become mainstream.
Gaps in the research
We identified the following gaps in research:
Timeline of availability for the technologies. Due to a lack of robust information in many cases, we made an expert judgement on the availability of the technologies in Scotland up to 2030 and 2045.
Quantified impact of introducing methane traits in case study countries. We did not find evidence for the actions and policies introduced in the case study countries reducing overall country emissions. A reason for this is that many of the examples presented in the case studies in the appendices are very recent, therefore there has not been enough time to quantify the emission savings. In addition, it could be challenging to see whether these actions had a specific impact emissions due to other surrounding factors, for example changes in stocking rate, or outbreak in disease.
Evidence for current level of uptake in Scotland and the UK. The review did not find much evidence for current levels of uptake of breeding livestock for reduced emissions.
Mitigation potentials of some traits. Many sources did not present methane emission values, but instead covered genetic correlations between traits. This meant that due to a lack of data many of the traits identified in the REA (see Table 5) were excluded from quantification. In other cases, some mitigation potentials were not comparative to the baseline used in our study because it presented changes from an entire lifecycle or system.
The interaction between traits. Emission calculations were quantified for individual traits, rather than combining the mitigation potential for all traits because the relationship and interaction between traits is unknown.
Due to the smaller quantity of literature available on methane efficiency focused traits, the reduction potential values may be less robust. Greater consistency in measurement, modelling, and presentation and their impacts on emissions savings and animal production would fill this knowledge gap.
Conclusions
We estimate that, by 2045, breeding for reduced methane emissions could achieve a reduction in enteric methane emissions of 9.5% from the baseline, including 6.8% reduction from beef, 6% from dairy and 17.5% from sheep assuming livestock numbers remain constant. This would be achieved by selecting breeding traits for methane efficiency (methane production, intensity and yield), feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight, milk yield and milk fat and protein. Selecting for these traits brings cumulative and permanent emission savings. A limited number of studies researched the impacts of selecting low-methane traits on productivity and health and found that these qualities were not compromised.
Scotland has a well-developed research base around breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions, placing it in good stead in developing further work and providing validation and trust. Research programmes in New Zealand, Canada and Ireland have successfully interacted with farmers, for example, by the development of user-friendly, accessible tools. Our stakeholder comments implies that a comparable interaction between research and on-farm activities and innovation is currently lacking in Scotland.
To achieve the emissions reductions, actions and behaviour change will be required by four stakeholder groups: Scottish Government, pre- and post-farm gate industry and markets, and farmers. Change will need to be co-created across the stakeholder groups.
The financial benefit of farmers selecting methane traits remains uncertain. Therefore, it is likely that the primary motivation will be the supply chain which will need supply chain indicators. For example, if a milk buyer sets methane reduction goals, suppliers will need to respond. Behaviour change is also influenced by neighbours or peers taking on new practices.
The key barriers to uptake are around knowledge and perceived cost. To alleviate these, Government funding could be targeted towards more data collection and research with farmer involvement to improves robustness. Investment in adviser training and farmer peer-to-peer will enable local farmers to progress faster. Organising local workshops, either by Government supported advisers or leading farmers, would help to spread the word about the importance of breeding for reduced emissions and provide practical examples. The more discussion about the overall aim, the actions, outcomes and successes, the more likely it is that breeding for reduced methane emissions will become mainstream.
The technologies we estimate could be mainstream by 2030 include a national breeding programme, sexed semen, artificial insemination (AI) and estimated breeding values (EBVs). However, their success will be about but the interactions between them. For example, data will inform EVBs, which in turn will inform a national breeding programme. If the constant use of methane detecting technologies is required, this may be difficult to implement in extensive farming systems. However, if a proxy measurement was used or the breeding stock was known to provide the necessary traits, this would allow existing systems to continue.
On this basis, we think there is a strong foundation for breeding for reduced emissions to become part of Scottish Government’s commitments.
Alford, A.R., Hegarty, R.S., Parnell, P.F., Cacho, O.J., Herd, R.M. and Griffith, G.R., 2006. The impact of breeding to reduce residual feed intake on enteric methane emissions from the Australian beef industry. Australian Journal of Experimental Agriculture, 46(7), pp.813-820.
B+LNZ Genetics, 2023. Reducing methane emissions in New Zealand’s national sheep flock through genetic selection – The Cool Sheep™ Programme. Available from: https://www.blnzgenetics.com/cool-sheep-programme
Bell, M.J., Wall, E., Russell, G., Morgan, C. and Simm, G., 2010. Effect of breeding for milk yield, diet and management on enteric methane emissions from dairy cows. Animal Production Science, 50(8), pp.817-826.
Bruce, A., 2013. The lore of low methane livestock: co-producing technology and animals for reduced climate change impact. Life Sciences, Society and Policy, 9(1), pp.1-21.
De Haas, Y., Veerkamp, R.F., De Jong, G. and Aldridge, M.N., 2021. Selective breeding as a mitigation tool for methane emissions from dairy cattle. Animal, 15, p.100294.
Dehareng, F., Delfosse, C., Froidmont, E., Soyeurt, H., Martin, C., Gengler, N., Vanlierde, A. and Dardenne, P., 2012. Potential use of milk mid-infrared spectra to predict individual methane emission of dairy cows. Animal, 6(10), pp.1694-1701.
Denninger, T.M., Schwarm, A., Dohme-Meier, F., Münger, A., Bapst, B., Wegmann, S., Grandl, F., Vanlierde, A., Sorg, D., Ortmann, S. and Clauss, M., 2020. Accuracy of methane emissions predicted from milk mid-infrared spectra and measured by laser methane detectors in Brown Swiss dairy cows. Journal of dairy science, 103(2), pp.2024-2039.
Esrafili Taze Kand Mohammaddiyeh, M., Rafat, S.A., Shodja, J., Javanmard, A. and Esfandyari, H., 2023. Selective genotyping to implement genomic selection in beef cattle breeding. Frontiers in Genetics, 14, p.1083106.
González-Recio, O., López-Paredes, J., Ouatahar, L., Charfeddine, N., Ugarte, E., Alenda, R. and Jiménez-Montero, J.A., 2020. Mitigation of greenhouse gases in dairy cattle via genetic selection: 2. Incorporating methane emissions into the breeding goal. Journal of Dairy Science, 103(8), pp.7210-7221.
Hayes, B.J., Lewin, H.A. and Goddard, M.E., 2013. The future of livestock breeding: genomic selection for efficiency, reduced emissions intensity, and adaptation. Trends in genetics, 29(4), pp.206-214.
Hybu Cig Cymru – Meat Promotion Wales, 2013. Genetic markers in beef and sheep breeding programmes. Available from: https://meatpromotion.wales/en
Jones, H., Haresign, W. 2020. A review of current and new technologies for both genetic improvement and breed conservation of UK farm animal genetic resources. Produced by members of the Defra expert committee on Farm Animal Genetic Resources (FAnGR).
Jonker, A., Hickey, S.M., Rowe, S.J., Janssen, P.H., Shackell, G.H., Elmes, S., Bain, W.E., Wing, J., Greer, G.J., Bryson, B. and MacLean, S., 2018. Genetic parameters of methane emissions determined using portable accumulation chambers in lambs and ewes grazing pasture and genetic correlations with emissions determined in respiration chambers. Journal of Animal Science, 96(8), pp.3031-3042.
Llonch, P., Haskell, M.J., Dewhurst, R.J. and Turner, S.P., 2017. Current available strategies to mitigate greenhouse gas emissions in livestock systems: an animal welfare perspective. Animal, 11(2), pp.274-284.
Manzanilla-Pech, C.I.V., Gordo, D.M., Difford, G.F., Pryce, J.E., Schenkel, F., Wegmann, S., Miglior, F., Chud, T.C., Moate, P.J., Williams, S.R.O. and Richardson, C.M., 2021. Breeding for reduced methane emission and feed-efficient Holstein cows: An international response. Journal of Dairy Science, 104(8), pp.8983-9001.
Manzanilla-Pech, C.I.V., Stephansen, R.B., Difford, G.F., Løvendahl, P. and Lassen, J., 2022. Selecting for feed efficient cows will help to reduce methane gas emissions. Frontiers in Genetics, 13, p.885932.
Martínez-Álvaro, M., J. Mattock, Z. Weng, R. J. Dewhurst, M. A. Cleveland, M. Watson, and R. Roehe. 2022. “Part of the functional rumen core microbiome is influenced by the bovine host genome and associated with feed efficiency.” In Proceedings of 12th World Congress on Genetics Applied to Livestock Production (WCGALP) Technical and species orientated innovations in animal breeding, and contribution of genetics to solving societal challenges, pp. 324-327. Wageningen Academic Publishers, 2022.
Miller, G.A., Auffret, M.D., Roehe, R., Nisbet, H. and Martínez-Álvaro, M., 2023. Different microbial genera drive methane emissions in beef cattle fed with two extreme diets. Frontiers in Microbiology, 14, p.1102400.
Quinton, C.D., Hely, F.S., Amer, P.R., Byrne, T.J. and Cromie, A.R., 2018. Prediction of effects of beef selection indexes on greenhouse gas emissions. Animal, 12(5), pp.889-897.
Reid, A. and Wainwright, W., 2018. Climate Change and Agriculture: How Can Scottish Agriculture Contribute to Climate Change Targets.
Rowe, S.J., Hickey, S.M., Johnson, P.L., Bilton, T.P., Jonker, A., Bain, W., Veenvliet, B., Pilel, G., Bryson, B. and Knowler, K., 2021. The contribution animal breeding can make to industry carbon neutrality goals. In Proc. Assoc. Advmt. Anim. Breed. Genet (Vol. 24, pp. 15-18).
Rowe, S.J., Hess, M., Zetouni, L., Hickey, S., Brauning, R., Henry, H., Flay, H., Budel, J., Bryson, B., Janssen, P. and Jonker, A., 2020. Breeding low emitting ruminants: predicting methane from microbes. Multidisciplinary Digital Publishing Institute Proceedings, 36(1), p.177.
Scholtens, M., Lopez-Villalobos, N., Lehnert, K., Snell, R., Garrick, D. and Blair, H.T., 2020. Advantage of including genomic information to predict breeding values for lactation yields of milk, fat, and protein or somatic cell score in a New Zealand dairy goat herd. Animals, 11(1), p.24.
Tedeschi, L.O., Abdalla, A.L., Álvarez, C., Anuga, S.W., Arango, J., Beauchemin, K.A., Becquet, P., Berndt, A., Burns, R., De Camillis, C. and Chará, J., 2022. Quantification of methane emitted by ruminants: a review of methods. Journal of Animal Science, 100(7), p.skac197.
van Breukelen, A.E., Aldridge, M.N., Veerkamp, R.F., Koning, L., Sebek, L.B. and de Haas, Y., 2023. Heritability and genetic correlations between enteric methane production and concentration recorded by GreenFeed and sniffers on dairy cows. Journal of Dairy Science, 106(6), pp.4121-4132.
van Staaveren, N., Oliveira, H.R., Houlahan, K., Chud, T.C., Oliveira Jr, G.A., Hailemariam, D., Kistemaker, G., Miglior, F., Plastow, G., Schenkel, F.S. and Cerri, R., 2023. The Resilient Dairy Genome Project–a general overview of methods and objectives related to feed efficiency and methane emissions. Journal of dairy science.
Wellmann, R., 2023. Selection index theory for populations under directional and stabilizing selection. Genetics Selection Evolution, 55(1), p.10.
Worden, D. and Hailu, G., 2020. Do genomic innovations enable an economic and environmental win-win in dairy production?. Agricultural Systems, 181, p.102807.
Appendix / Appendices
Technologies involved in breeding for reduced methane, full tables
Table 13. Examples of the detection methods involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Respiration chamber
A sealed chamber taking samples from an animal in a controlled environment. The animal is typically kept in the measurement chamber for a couple of days and is provided with food and water (Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane concentration
Believed to be the most accurate way to measure methane from livestock (Zaman et al., 2021).
Measurements taken over several days increases robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Restricts normal animal behaviour and movement (Zaman et al., 2021; Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
High capital cost.
Limited to a few or one animal per chamber (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Used in research facilities in Scotland, however there is limited scope to use them on farms due to the high cost (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Sniffers
Non-dispersive infrared unit that can be installed in feeding areas or milking parlours (van Breukelen, 2023; de Haas et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentration
Non-invasive, can be incorporated into existing milking technologies (de Haas et al., 2021).
Offers large scale recording (de Haas et al., 2021).
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Limited to indoor measuring (Cummins et al., 2022).
More difficult to introduce in beef and sheep sectors compared to dairy due to frequent milking.
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: E
2030: FP
2045: FP
In 2021 ‘the first’ was installed at a Dutch dairy farm for research (CRV, 2021). No evidence found for use on farms in the UK.
SF6 tracer gas
A tube containing sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) tracer gas is placed inside the rumen and collection lines are used to collect breath samples (Cummins etal., 2022).
All
Methane concentrations
Measurements can be taken from confined, free range, and grazing animals (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Invasive measure which has animal welfare concerns (de Haas et al., 2021).
SF6 is a greenhouse gas itself (Tedeschi et al., 2022).
Daily canister collection means high labour (Cummins etal., 2022).
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
No evidence was found for use in UK trials and research, but it used widely in globally. It would be beneficial in Scottish research due to measuring livestock while grazing.
Automated head chamber system (e.g. GreenFeed)
A transportable head chamber unit that can be positioned in housing or pasture. Feed is used to attract livestock to the unit (van Breukelen, 2023; Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Non-invasive.
It can be set up in grazing fields or in housing.
High purchase and running costs.
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Feed to attract livestock increases costs.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence was found for use in UK trials and research. However it is potentially a feasible option for Scotland due to the benefits of transportability and measuring grazing livestock.
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data
MIR spectroscopy is used to predict the fat and protein content of milk. As methane is linked to milk composition, it can be used as a proxy to predict methane emissions (Dehareng et al., 2012; Semex, 2023)
Dairy
Milk component such as lactose, protein and fat
MIR technology is already used in milk recording, so could provide an existing infrastructure to integrate methane reporting into.
Because it is a proxy, validation of results (for example with a respiration chamber) is required (Denninger et al., 2020).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
No evidence found of MIR being used in the UK to estimate methane, but European examples were found. As data could become available through existing milk recording schemes, it could be introduced by innovators by 2030. If the need for verifying results via detection methods is removed, this could be mainstream by 2045.
Portable accumulation chambers (PAC)
A portable respiration chamber which takes measurements over a short period of time (e.g. 1 hour) (Cummins et al., 2022).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Quick measurement period reduces animal stress (Cummins et al., 2022).
Transportable (NZHerald, 2023).
Feeding and management protocols must be followed prior to measurements (Duthie et al., 2024).
Not suitable for long-term measurements (Cummins et al., 2022).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A promising option for Scotland, given its transportable between farms. SRUC recently acquired a PAC for sheep in the UK. However current research needs to be completed before they can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Handheld lasers
A handheld device originally developed to detect gas leaks can measure concentrations of methane in livestock breath (Sorg, 2021).
All
Methane concentrations
Non-invasive and portable.
Can take measurements from grazing livestock.
Can take measurements from several animals in one day.
Results can be sent to a smart phone (Sorg, 2021)
Has a lower accuracy, measurements are highly affected by environmental conditions (de Haas et al., 2021; Sorg, 2021)
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence found for use in UK research. However, the benefit of taking measurements from several animals in the same day may make it an attractive option for Scotland. Its widespread use may depend on supporting infrastructure such as reporting systems.
Rumen microbial composition
The rumen holds a variety of microorganisms that aid in the digestion of feed. By studying the microbes present in the rumen, those influencing the production of methane can be identified and used as a proxy to identify animals with the microbiome composition which emits lower methane (Miller et al., 2023).
All
Dry matter intake and methane concentrations
It can also be used to improve feed conversion and disease resistance (Duthie et al., 2024).
The composition of the microbiome is largely influenced by the ratio of feed (i.e. forage vs concentrate) so accuracy of results may be influenced by diet (Miller et al., 2023).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A technique being used in Scottish research in all sectors. Likely to remain an experimental technology, with future trials on some farms in the future.
Feed efficiency index
An indicator showing how efficient a cow is at converting feed into product, for example, into milk. Research shows that selecting for feed efficiency reduces methane emissions (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2022).
Helps to reduce the amount of feed required and therefore associated costs.
It’s important that selecting for feed-efficiency does not compromise growth.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
No evidence found of this being done with the aim of reducing methane emissions in the UK, but it is used in the UK to improve efficiency in dairy.
Table 14. Examples of data management tools involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP),
Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations related to the feasibility in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
ScotEID
A multispecies database which records and tracks livestock information. It may be possible to build on this in the future to introduce information relevant to methane.
All
Births, deaths and movements.
A familiar platform for farmers in Scotland.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
An established infrastructure exists and is familiar to the industry, therefore a promising option to repurpose to include methane traits.
nProve
A free tool for New Zealand farmers to use to choose rams for breeding. They can choose the terminal or maternal traits that fit their breeding goals. When choosing maternal traits, methane production is an option.
Sheep
Reproduction, lamb growth, size, meat, wool, health indices
Very user friendly, guides the user through the selection process. Contact details are provided for breeders that meet chosen criteria.
Farmers can choose rams based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results.
NA
NA
2030: FP
2045: I
To be successful in Scotland, genetic evaluation and measuring methane from sheep would need to be common practice. There are existing tools such as ScotEID which records births, deaths and movements, and RamCompare which presents data from performance recorded rams i.e. carcass weight, that could be repackaged to incorporate methane production. But success would also depend on wide use of PAC (as done in New Zealand).
Selection index
Combines information to predict an animals estimated breeding value (EBV). It can be used to select traits for breeding goals, for example, milk production, feed efficiency and health to maximise future profit (Wellmann, 2023; de Haas et al., 2021).
All
It is possible to apply weightings to traits in relation to its importance in the breeding goals
Before a trait can be added to a selection index, it needs to be “clearly defined, recordable, affordable, have phenotypic variation, be heritable, and the genetic correlations between other traits in the index need to be known” (de Haas et al., 2021).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
In 2023, Semex introduced a methane index for Holsteins in Canada. Availability in Scotland depends on the progress of measuring methane.
National breeding programme
A programme which plans and identifies breeding objectives, traits and information on selection criteria.
All
It can optimise gains and trait changes (De Haas et al., 2021).
To be successful at a national scale, significant data and cooperation is required.
For a trait to be included in a programme it must be environmentally important, express genetic variation and be measurable (Teagasc, 2012).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
In 2023, The National Sheep Association began a 3-year initiative to measure methane from 13,500 sheep. The aim of this is to measure production traits to incorporate into breeding programmes. With progress like this, it is possible that national breeding programmes will be mainstream by 2030.
Multi-country database
An international database that contains performance/production (trait-related) records from a large number of livestock (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
All
An increased dataset
Improves robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021)
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in reporting and recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: I
2030: FP
2045: FP
A significant amount of collaboration is required to make this effective. Due to having to overcome the data sharing challenges, it is possibly unlikely this will be available with the aim of reducing methane emissions by 2045. There may be some progress in the dairy sector however due to the introduction of the methane index in Canada.
Efficient Dairy Genome Project
An international initiative that combines data from 6 countries (Australia, Canada, Denmark, United Kingdom, United States, and Switzerland) aiming to build one genomic reference population and a unique database of DMI records.
Dairy
DMI, milk, methane was measured in 4 of the 6 countries participating in the initiative
The overall objective is to potentially improve feed efficiency (cost benefit) and reduce methane emissions (environmental benefit).
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in areas such as reporting and recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
Bull catalogues (such as Genus Bull search)
This index allows farmers to see the scores of certain traits in bulls. One of these traits is called Feed Advantage which can identify bulls with the greatest feed conversion (ABS, 2023).
Dairy, beef
Farmers can choose bulls with the desired characteristics to use in breeding.
2030: M
2024: M
2030: M
2024: M
NA
These are already available for farmers to use, so we would estimate them to be mainstream by 2030.
Beef Efficiency Scheme
A 5-year scheme funded by Scottish Government to help improve the efficiency, sustainability and quality of beef herds – helping to increase genetic value and reduce GHG emissions. The scheme focused on cattle genetics and management practices on-farm.
Beef
Tissue samples – genotyping
blood samples,
calving data,
culling/death reasons, dam data (docility)
Funding was provided to farmers for data collection and entry.
A free advisory service was also provided to assist farmers in developing their beef herd.
2030: FP
2045: FP
NA
NA
This scheme ended in 2021. It may be possible to build on and repackage the scheme to consider methane traits in the future.
Table 15. Examples of reproductive technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M)
Future possibility (FP) Not applicable (NA)Practical considerations related to the feasibility in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Semen freezing
A technique to preserve semen.
All
Provides security in an instance that could risk a breed’s survival (Jones et al., 2020)
Variable success rate using thawed semen.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
Artificial insemination (AI)
A technique to inseminate females, using fresh or frozen semen.
All
High success rate for cattle.
Not required to have a bull on the farm.
Better guarantee of uniform calving.
To be most efficient, livestock are required to come into heat at the same time as AI takes place. This is done artificially by the farmer, adding additional labour.
AI in sheep is often done laparoscopically, which is a surgical procedure performed by a vet. Due to the scale and extensive nature of sheep farming, this brings practical challenges.
Relies on sufficient infrastructure to collect and store semen of which there are limited facilities in Scotland (in particular for the sheep sector) (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
AI is already common practice in the dairy sector, with some use in the beef sector too. It’s likely this will be mainstream by 2030 for cattle. However, due to the practical challenges in sheep, it may still only apply to innovators.
Sexed semen
A method which allows control over the sex of the offspring by separating sperm cells based on their X or Y chromosome content. By focusing on females for example, there is the potential to reduce methane by reducing the number of unwanted males (Duthie et al., 2024).
All
Increases the selection of females in the dairy sector.
Improves productivity.
Success relies on the uptake of AI.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
This is widely practiced in the dairy sector. Use in the beef sector is currently lower, however by 2030 there is the potential for this to be mainstream. Progress is determined by the uptake of AI in the sector. Due to the practical challenges associated with AI, it will likely remain an innovative practice.
In-vitro fertilisation (IVF)
Harvested oocytes are taken from donor cows and fertilised in a petri dish with semen to create an embryo.
Beef, dairy
Less semen required
Nutrition and diet need to be consistent in the lead up to extracting oocytes.
2030: I
M
NA
Process is conducted in a lab under sterile conditions.
Embryo freezing
A method for cryopreservation of embryos for long-term storage or transport. This tends to occur in conjunction with MOET.
All
I?
I?
I?
Lack of suitable laboratories
Conventional breeding
The use of bull/ram to cow/ewe breeding. Enhanced tools to select lower than average emitting bulls or rams.
All
Minimal technical input.
Familiar management practice for farmers.
Little control over selecting desirable traits.
It requires waiting for offspring to become fully grown before seeing if they have taken on the desired traits.
M
M
M
Table 16. Examples of animal genomics involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Microbiome-driven breeding
Emphasis is on selecting livestock with a rumen microbiome composition which is more efficient at fermenting of feed so that less excess hydrogen and thus less methane is produced.
Livestock genetics and therefore breeding influences the composition of the microbiome which therefore affects the amount of methane released.
All
Rumen fluid samples – sequencing of microbial DNA
There is a growing demand for livestock that emit less methane.
Potential method for improving animal health and reduce environmental impact.
This is a relatively new field, and much is unknown about how the gut microbiome develops and is maintained over time.
It is unclear how much influence the animal may have over those processes.
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Good early signs but still at research stage.
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
Values that are based on information from livestock DNA and measured performance. Can be used with EBVs to improve accuracy of breeding programmes. (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA and performance records
Can be used to identify traits that are difficult to record
Beneficial for traits measured in only one sex
Useful for accurately measuring traits that occur later in life (Scholtens et al., 2020).
Accuracy of the estimate is dependent on the number of animals included in the reference population (Scholtens et al., 2020).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: E
For the UK beef industry, GEBVs are currently available for a number of carcass traits in Limousin cattle (Business Wales, 2016)
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
Calculated from the performance data of recorded animals. Environmental factors (e.g. feeding) are filtered out to provide a genetic value for each trait (Stout, D. 2021).
All
Performance records – parentage and traits of interest (e.g. weight traits).
Provides a more objective (data driven approach) towards selection.
Genetic selection based on EBVs leads to faster rates of genetic gain and flock improvement (compared to selection based on raw data or basic observation)
Allows comparisons within breeds, not between breeds.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Use as a tool to aid in the selection of healthy and structurally sound animals.
Genotyping
The process of determining/comparing the genetic variation of DNA sequences (or whole genomes) amongst individuals or populations.
All
Aids in genomic selection of both desirable (and harmful) traits.
Prediction accuracy of genomic selection is influenced by the type (male/female, previous generations) and number of animals that are genotyped (Mohammaddiyeh et al., 2023)
NA
NA
NA
Farmers cannot use this method themselves and therefore require the use of external service providers.
Genetic markers
Genetic markers identify desirable traits in animals which can then be selected for breeding (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA marker information can be obtained from animals at birth (Hayes et al., 2013).
Can be used to select for traits that are difficult to record.
Genetic progress in slow given the relatively long generation interval in cattle and sheep
NA
NA
NA
Farmers cannot use this method themselves and therefore require the use of external service providers.
Gene editing
A method for editing individual genes within the genome of a cell, embryo or ovum to bring about a desired genetic change.
All
The ability to eliminate undesirable traits.
Accelerates rate of genetic improvement.
Introduces variation into a population e.g. disease resistance
Identifying the appropriate genes/ genomic site can be challenging, time consuming and expensive.
Appendix A: REA and stakeholder interviews methodology
REA methodology
The REA methodology used for this project aligned with NERC methodology (Collins et al., 2015) and comprised of the following steps.
Define the search strategy protocol, identify key search words or terms, define inclusion/exclusion criteria. This step helped to focus the review on the most relevant sources. Inclusion and exclusion criteria were also defined. For example, studies related to reducing emissions through feed additives were excluded.
Searching for evidence and recording findings. Due to the short timescales of this REA, we searched for literature using Google Scholar, utilising our accounts with Science Direct and Research Gate to access restricted pdfs where required. For each search, we recorded the date, search string and number of results found, each search string was assigned a reference number. Examples of search strings include:
breeding for reduced methane emissions
policy drivers for reduced methane emissions in livestock “breeding”
breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock “Scotland”
Screening. Evidence was then screened, initially by title and a selection of sources were screened by the abstract, applying the criteria developed in step 1. This step ensures the relevance and robustness of the evidence that was included in the study.
Extract and appraise the evidence. Evidence was then extracted from the papers after screening, this included methane reduction values, traits that lead to reduced emissions and the technologies involved in the process.
Stakeholder interview methodology
Stakeholder interviews were used to collect information that may have been absent from the literature, for example on trials currently taking place that will not yet be included in publications. The stakeholders included researchers and individuals from farmer representative groups. We invited farmers for interview, however, only confirmed one farmer for an interview.
The semi-structured interviews took place over Microsoft Teams, with questions covering all parts of the study. For instance, asking for views on the key traits to select for, any examples of farmers choosing livestock based on emissions and the benefits and risks.
We did seven one-to-one interviews (with four stakeholders based in Scotland) and a group interview with nine stakeholders, all located in Scotland. The group interview was done to allow space for conversation and discussion between stakeholders. During this meeting, we presented the key themes raised in the one-to-one interviews. This included the barriers and drivers to uptake, the availability of technologies and the structural needs to support uptake.
Appendix B: New Zealand sheep case study
Country information
New Zealand is an island nation in the South Pacific and has many similarities to Scotland in terms of its geography and climate. Agriculture is integral to the New Zealand economy with the sector accounting for 10% of gross domestic product (GDP), over 65% of export revenue and almost 12% of the workforce. In 2023 there were 26,821,846 sheep in New Zealand, down from approximately 70,000,000 in the 1980s.
Around half of GHG emissions in New Zealand (49% in 2021) and 91% of biogenic methane emissions stem from agriculture, with sheep farming a key contributor.
New Zealand has relevant international and domestic emissiontargets, including the Global Methane Pledge, and the Climate Change Response (Zero Carbon) Amendment Act 2019, which sets a net zero target by 2050. There is a specific reduction target for biogenic methane of 10% relative to 2017 levels by 2030, and 24 – 47% by 2050. New Zealand also has emissions’ budgets and emissions’ reduction plans which sets out policies and strategies for meeting the budgets.
Accelerating new mitigations such as breeding for low-methane sheep is seen as an important way to reduce emissions alongside the pricing of agriculture emissions, as well as support initiatives.
Relevant research, programmes and technologies
The New Zealand Agricultural Greenhouse Gas Research Centre (NZAGRC) and the Pastoral Greenhouse Gas Research Consortium (PGgRc) are key leaders in the robust and comprehensive programme of research in New Zealand.
The NZAGRC is a Government funded centre which invests and coordinates research for practical and cost-effective reductions of agricultural GHG. One of its main targets of reducing enteric methane emissions.
The PGgRc is a joint initiative of the New Zealand Government and the agricultural sector which funds research into ways to reduce methane emissions, including from sheep, such as breeding. It also provides knowledge and tools for farmers to help mitigate GHG, for instance research reports (‘Sheep farmers now able to breed “low methane” sheep’), and fact sheets, with the aim of increasing understanding around the research.
The NZAGRC and PGgRc led the following research programmes related to breeding for reduced methane emissions:
Low emitting sheep were genotyped and markers were used to identify low emitting traits which confirmed a genetic basis for the variation in methane emissions. After 13 years of selecting for low emitting traits, a 16% difference in methane emissions was found between low and high emitting sheep. Other key findings include no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions. Predications have also been made that with the low emitting flock a 1% decrease in methane emissions per year is achievable The low emitting flock has been producing more wool and leaner meat and the emissions savings are both permanent and cumulative. This programme is ongoing and has produced one of the most comprehensive datasets in the world.
A methane breeding value was launched in 2019 from research undertaken by NZAGRC and PGRC. This was made available to selected ram breeders through Beef + Lamb Genetics and gives the sector a practical tool to make decisions with. This has then led to the development of the Cool Sheep Programme.
The Cool Sheep™ Programme was launched in 2022. This three-year programme aims to provide every sheep farmer in New Zealand the chance to use genetic selection to reduce GHG emissions. As well as supporting farmers, this programme gathers phenotype data which feeds back into research. This is available to farmers who are reviewing rams for selection on N Prove. Breeders wanting to produce low-methane rams do so by measuring a proportion of their flock using PAC. When combined with other information and sheep genotyping, this is used to provide a methane breeding value. In November 2023, bookings for use of the PAC chambers by stud breeders were fully subscribed, indicating uptake is high. They note that progress is slow in terms of methane emissions reduction around 2-3% per year, with single trait selection, although this is cumulative.
The four workstreams of the project are:
Ram supply: Measuring rams with PAC to make low-emitting rams available for breeding.
National Impact: using GHG calculators on farms to show methane reductions, rewarding farmers for their efforts.
Awareness and outreach: increasing knowledge for farmers, improving public awareness of efforts to reduce emissions while improving national productivity.
Key policies
There is no government policy legislating livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in New Zealand. However, there are policies that that may contribute to introducing this in the future.
The Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS) is a key tool in New Zealand to help reduce emissions. Under the ETS, businesses must measure and report on their GHG emissions, and surrender one ‘emissions unit’ (an NZU) to the Government for each tonne of emissions emitted. They do this by purchasing NZU. The Government sets and reduces the number of NZU supplied into the scheme over time. This limits the quantity that emitters can emit, in line with emission reduction targets. Businesses who participate in the ETS can also buy and sell units from each other i.e. emitters can buy NZU from forestry companies or farmers to offset emissions. The price for units reflects supply and demand in the scheme. All sectors of New Zealand’s economy, apart from agriculture, pay for their emissions through their ETS surrender obligations. The agriculture sector must report its emissions but does not have surrender obligations.
Currently, no major incentive exists for agricultural producers to reduce their emissions. The ETS was not seen as the right mechanism to price agricultural emissions.
Instead, Government, industry representatives and Māori formed the He Waka Eke Noa – Primary Sector Climate Action Partnership (the Partnership) to reduce agricultural emissions. It is committed to designing an on-farm pricing system that ensures New Zealand’s agricultural products remain internationally competitive while reducing emissions.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
Agricultural Greenhouse Gas Research Centre, Government-funded centre which invests and coordinates research for reductions of agricultural GHG.
Crown Research Institutes, Crown-owned companies that carry out scientific research.
Beef + Lamb New Zealand, a farmer-owned, industry organisation representing New Zealand’s sheep and beef farmers.
Dairy Companies Association of New Zealand, representing dairy manufacturing and exporting companies.
Dairy NZ, industry organisation that represents all dairy farmers.
Farmers.
He Pou a Rangi – Climate Change Commission, an independent Crown entity that provides advice to government on climate issues
Iwi Māori, tribal entities and largest social units in Māori society that represent a group of people and land area
Māori Landowner groups, groups that represent Māori land that is governed and protected under specific statutes
Meat Industry Association, voluntary trade association representing red meat processors, marketers and exporters
Ministry for the Environment, New Zealand Government’s primary adviser on environmental matters
Pastoral Greenhouse Gas Research Consortium, provides knowledge and tools for farmers, to mitigate GHG
Public
Scientists and academics
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in New Zealand for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
Full subscription of the Cool Sheep programme to use genetic selection to reduce GHG emissions highlights the keen interest in this programme from farmers
Within the proposal for emission pricing, there have been the following successes that are likely to help drive behaviour change to uptake methane emission reduction breeding selection:
A farm level, split-gas levy gives farmers flexibility to determine the most efficient, cost-effective mitigation practices for their farms (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
The He Waka Eke Noa partnership involved key stakeholders discussing practical solutions to reducing emissions (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
While a policy for pricing agricultural emissions has not yet been legislated and implemented, discussions about a policy helped make New Zealand farmers more aware of their emissions and how to manage them.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are some challenges with the New Zealand scenario that are relevant for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
The fully prescribed uptake of the Cool Sheep programme in 2023 may highlight potential challenges with sourcing enough infrastructure to support all farmers interested in the programme.
In particular, there are challenges related to the agriculture emissions pricing:
Mitigation options under proposed policies are more currently more suited to dairy farmers than sheep and beef farmers.
The sheep and beef sectors are expected to be impacted by the pricing of emissions more than other farming sectors. There are likely to be disproportionate impacts on Māori due to the large proportion of Māori ownership in the sheep and beef sectors and historical context.
Potentially ancillary challenges and unforeseen challenges from the proposal such as environmental and social challenges due to land use changes due to the need to reduce emissions i.e. increased planting of forest may lead to landscapes changes etc.
The recent change in Government has posed a challenge. The 2025 implementation target for implementing the pricing of emissions is expected to be pushed back until 2030 (Stakeholder comment, 2023) and uptake of other methane related programmes could waver too.
Relevance in Scotland
There are some key learnings from the New Zealand scenario that are relevant for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
At this stage, it is hard to determine exactly what has encouraged uptake of the Cool Sheep Programme and PAC measurements by sheep farmers. However it is assumed that discussions around agriculture emissions pricing and increased awareness, as well as financial assistance, has no doubt contributed to uptake.
The He Waka Eke Noa partnership highlighted that each livestock sector has different requirements. In Scotland, for example, stakeholders interviewed for this project suggested that it may be difficult to introduce breeding practices in the sheep sector due to its extensive nature. In addition, there is less frequent cashflow in the sheep and beef sectors compared to dairy, making it more difficult to introduce new practices. In New Zealand suggestions have been made that the dairy industry has had a better lobbying influence in the development of the policy than the sheep and beef industry and have been more successful at influencing a policy that better suits their needs (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Therefore, any consultations or partnerships must include different livestock types and stakeholders, and consider the differences between upland or lowland systems.
New Zealand is one of the first countries in the world to attempt to price agriculture emissions therefore can provide a huge amount of learning that should be considered by Scotland in developing policy around methane reduction.
Having an emissions number to reduce from makes it easier to see how actions will impact. This will encourage the consideration of emission reductions as part of general on-farm decision making, on-farm investment decisions and other considerations.
The policy impacts on certain farmers and Māori may be of relevance to island farmers and crofters with unique challenges, who may be disproportionately impacted by any climate policies in Scotland.
Research from the NZAGRC and the PGgRc has produced schemes like the Cool Sheep Programme.
The ram selection tool nProve provides a user-friendly platform for farmers to select the traits they want from a ram, including methane production. It gives farmers a tool to compare emissions between different animals before purchasing a ram, bull or semen. Because of the Cool Sheep programme and because there are planned policies to reduce emissions, there may be an incentive to use this metric. It may be possible to build on existing tools such as ScotEID and RamCompare in the future to create a similar platform (not only for sheep).
A policy for pricing agricultural emissions has not yet been legislated and therefore whether it has/will contribute to reduced emissions is yet to be realised. However government modelling suggests that the levy could achieve sufficient emissions reductions to meet or exceed methane targets. Discussions about a policy helped make New Zealand farmers more aware of their emissions and how to manage them.
Appendix C: Canada dairy case study
Country information
Canada has similarities in climate and geography to Scotland. Agriculture is a key aspect of the Canadian economy with agriculture and the agri-food system generating $143.8 billion Canadian Dollars (CD$) (around 7%) of Canada’s GDP. Canada is also the fifth-largest exporter of agri-food and seafood in the world. Dairy is a key part of the sector and is a top commodity in five of Canada’s provinces/territories.
Description of relevant research, programmes and technologies
Canada is undertaking research and programmes focused on breeding and new genomic technologies for reduced methane emissions in dairy production systems:
The Efficient Dairy Genome Project (EDGP) developed genomic-based methods for selecting dairy cattle with reduced methane emissions and improved feed efficiency. The project was underpinned by an extensive database used for genomic analysis. For example, correlating MIR with reduced methane emissions. The project also recognised the necessity of featuring the economic, environmental and social benefits of selecting for reduced methane emissions.
The Resilient Dairy Genome Project (RDGP) aims to integrate genomic approaches to improve dairy cattle resilience and industry sustainability. The project builds on the EDGP, with a focus on additional data collection, management and visualisation to support genomic analyses. Researchers noted an essential component is understanding the interaction between enteric methane emissions and specific farm conditions. For example, predicting methane emissions of individual animals and whole herds using milk MIR spectroscopy. By acknowledging the crucialness of collaboration with industry partners, the project will ensure results will render user-friendly products to enable technological uptake.
An ongoing commercial endeavour between genetic evaluation provider, Lactanet Canada and genetics supplier, Semex Alliance aims to develop a reliable methane efficiency index that can be easily integrated with common selection indices such as fertility, disease resistance and lifetime profitability.
Description of key policies related to reducing methane emissions through breeding
There are currently no government policies legislating livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in Canada, however there are some policies that are likely to eventually incentivise it.
Agricultural Methane Reduction Challenge provided funding awarding up to $12 million CD$ to innovators designing practices, processes, and technologies to reduce enteric methane emissions.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
University of Guelph, and University of Alberta, orchestrate EDGP and RDGP
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in the Canadian scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
Public-Private Partnerships (PPP) between research and industry can be accredited for the establishment of Canada’s major EDGP and RDGP, and were paramount in the development of the sophisticated database. Stakeholders Lactanet Canada and Semex Alliance effectively utilised this database, and in April 2023, Canada became the first country in the world to commercially market dairy semen containing methane efficiency as a relative breeding value (RBV). Their database and AI catalogue now includes 26 Holstein bulls with proven methane reduction capabilities, and a further 165 predicted. Semex Alliance also estimate widespread adoption of the low-methane trait could reduce methane emissions from Canada’s dairy herd by 1.5% annually, and up to 20-30% by 2050. The collective effort of all members of the Canadian dairy industry has enabled significant progression, to which the inclusion of a methane efficiency genetic valuation can be traced to.
A GHG Offset Credit System can incentivise farmers to undertake innovative projects that reduce GHGs for financial reward.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are some challenges with the Canadian scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
There are some key learnings from the Canadian scenario that are relevant for Scotland in terms of identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
When compared to other livestock sectors, the data gathering process in the dairy industry is unique as daily milking and feeding activities provide a non-invasive opportunity to measure individual animals without major management changes. Coupling the simplistic nature of data collection with advanced existing genetic databases and the widespread use of artificial insemination (AI), the Scottish dairy industry is capable of reducing enteric methane emissions efficiently. Applying knowledge or making predictions from existing information has great potential to eliminate and/or significantly reduce cost, data collection periods and the requirement of on-farm experimentation.
Genetic change is a simple and low-cost approach to reduce enteric methane emissions in dairy production systems. Owing to modern technologies and transport capabilities, the methane efficiency RBV developed in Canada is compatible with the Scottish dairy herd and can be purchased and administered via AI to help begin reducing enteric methane emissions.
Canada has precedented instigating good working relationships with farmers, a goal achieved by highlighting the primary objective of research is to enhance industry sustainability. In response, many Canadian dairy farmers have also recognised constructive engagement with research and industry is fundamental. The establishment of a comprehensive and transparent database has provided assurance and confidence to adopt new best management practices.
Scotland could consider monitoring the effectiveness of the Offset Credit System currently being considered in Ottawa to see if it incentivises behaviour change or changes finances and markets.
Canada does not currently offer incentives for low-methane cattle breeding, and livestock breeders do not charge a premium for methane efficiency traits. However, discussions on this topic are ongoing between stakeholders and policy makers and it is looking likely a financial benefit will be introduced in the future.
Appendix D: Ireland beef case study
Country information
Ireland has a similar climate and geography to Scotland. Agriculture is key aspect of the Irish economy with the agriculture, forestry and fishing GDP valued at €3,672m in 2020. In 2020, 55% of farms were specialist beef, with many others including cattle as part of a mixed farm.
In 2022, agriculture was responsible for 38.4% of GHG emissions, making it the sector with the biggest share of emissions. 62.6% was caused by enteric fermentation.
Ireland is part of the Global Methane pledge and legally obliged as an EU Member State to reduce emissions under the EU’s Effort Sharing Regulation, including in agriculture. Ireland’s 2030 target is to deliver at least a 42% reduction by 2030 compared to 2005 levels.
Ireland has developed the Food Vision 2030 Strategy for the Irish agri-food sector which commits to reducing biogenic methane. This includes the ‘Ag Climatise’ Roadmap, covering animal breeding, with an aim to genotype the entire national herd by 2030 to develop and enhance dairy and beef breeding programmes.
Description of relevant research, programmes and technologies
The Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF) launched the National Genotyping Programme (NGP) for cattle in 2023. This offers beef and dairy farmers a low-cost option to collect DNA samples from calves at birth which can be used for genotyping to identify specific traits or characteristics. The aim of the programme is to achieve a fully genotyped herd in Ireland. This has made national genetic indexes available to farmers, including methane traits. It also allows farmers to optimise the health and productivity of their herd, reducing its emissions intensity. The ICBF also publish methane evaluations for AI sires that have had methane data recorded.
Teagasc has an important role in the research in Ireland. Animal breeding is one of the four solutions from Teagasc to reduce methane emissions from livestock. Current research projects include:
GREENBREED: Measured methane at the Tully Progeny Test centre using a GreenFeed automated head chamber system. This research led to the publication of genomic evaluations for methane emissions in Irish beef cattle and sheep. It found notable differences in methane emissions from livestock being fed the same diet, 11% of these in cattle were found to be due to genetic differences. This indicates that breeding programmes to reduce methane will be effective in Ireland.
Collaborative research by Teagasc and ICBF found a 30% difference in methane emissions from beef cattle of a similar size. This lead to the residual methane emissions (RME)[10] index being identified as a metric to rank animals.
Description of key policies
There is no legislation on livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in Ireland, but the following policies related to GHGs may support this.
The Beef Data and Genomics Programme (BDGP) paid suckler farmers to improve the genetic merit of their herd through data collection and genotyping, with the aim of lowering GHG emissions by improving quality and efficiency.
Payments were made of €142.50/ha for the first 6.66 ha and €120/ha for the remaining eligible hectares (the equivalent of €95 for the first 10 cows and €80 for the remaining cows), farmers have to undertake specific requirements.
These requirements include calf registration, detailed surveys of animal characteristics, genotyping and tissue tag sampling, and implementing a replacement strategy based on high genetic merit animals.
Additional support in the form of the carbon navigator decision making tool and training courses for farmers are also provided.
Participants of the programme were found to be achieving improvements at a faster rate compared to farms not taking part. The impact of the programme can help to promote smaller, more efficient suckler cows to produce more efficient beef.
The Suckler Carbon Efficiency Programme:
As part of its Common Agriculture Policy Strategic Plan (CSP), Ireland developed ENVCLIM (70) 53SCEP as a follow-on from the BDGP, providing support to beef farmers who implement breeding actions that aim to lower the overall GHG emissions. The BDGP was shown to deliver on both environmental and productive efficiency and emissions per suckler cow are being reduced through breeding strategies. Another measure in the CSP, 53SCT, targets training to complement the Suckler Carbon Efficiency Programme.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
Teagasc, Agriculture and Food Development Authority providing research, advisory and training to the agriculture and food industry and rural communities.
Department of Agriculture, Food and the Marine, Irish government department leading, developing and regulating the agri-food sector, protecting public health and optimising social, economic and environmental benefits.
Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF), non-profit organisation charged with providing cattle breeding information services.
Irish Environmental Protection Agency, independent public body to protect, improve and restore the environment through regulation, scientific knowledge and working with others.
Irish Farmers Association, Ireland’s largest farming representative organisation.
Farmers.
Food Vision Sheep and Beef Group, group of stakeholders established by the Minister for Agriculture Food and the Marine to identify measures that the sector can take to contribute to reducing emissions from the agricultural sector
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in the Irish scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
The NGP is a useable database of genotyped methane information available for farmers to use. This is the result of comprehensive research programmes, collaboration between breed societies, and creating useful systems for farmers to benefit from. Making this data easily available to all farmers across Ireland can encourage behaviour change and is a successful programme that could be considered in Scotland. The creation of the ICBF has been essential for this, as it means there is one body overseeing all genotyping and data storage.
The BDGP is an example of how payments to farmers can be used to gather data and reward farmers for adopting positive practices.
Research from GREENBREED indicates that breeding programs to reduce methane emissions will be effective for selecting low-emitting livestock, especially combined with the national genomic evaluations, and will have no negative impact on performance and profitability.
Ireland has produced methane evaluations to enable farmers to identify opportunities to reduce emissions and improve the sustainability of their enterprise.
Overall, the authors did not find evidence of a quantifiable impact from introducing methane related actions and policies. This may be because the relevant research, programmes and technologies as mentioned above are still relatively new and it is too early to quantify. For example, the NGP is to only be completed by 2027, whereas following on from data collected from methane evaluations, methods are still being developed on how best to incorporate methane traits into beef and dairy production.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
Additional research would be required to understand how the policies and programmes were received by farmers and how successful the agricultural community views them to be. We contacted Ireland representatives for involvement in stakeholder interviews however we did not get a response.
Relevance to Scotland
There are some key learnings from Ireland that are relevant for Scotland in terms of identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
A national database was suggested by Scottish stakeholders (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Therefore, Ireland’s NGP provides an example for Scotland if this was to develop. In particular:
predicted transmitting ability (PTA) could give Scottish farmers and crofters an easy way of comparing their livestock to other farmers and understanding where they are compared to the average.
Challenges in the Scottish context could include reluctance on the part of different breed societies to pool data.
Ireland have shown that emissions for cattle can be reduced through appropriate breeding strategies and incentives for farmers. Such as subsidising DNA sampling of calves which helps to genotype the national herd.
The creation of the Food Vision Beef and Sheep Group to chart a path for the sector to meet the emissions emission targets is a potential model for ways that Scotland might bring key stakeholders into the development of key policies to reduce emissions.
The main ways behaviour change has been encouraged is by making the programmes and policies mentioned above easy to access, for example, the ICBF also provides information to help farmers make decisions about their herd through HerdPlus.
The BDGP and CSP provides training to farmers who are using the scheme, for which funding is provided.
Appendix E: Methodology and results for the quantification of potential emission savings
Methane emission savings are achievable through breeding and new genomic technologies. The main sources of methane from cattle and sheep in Scotland are enteric fermentation and managed manures. We have chosen to focus our calculations on emissions from enteric fermentation for two reasons:
Methane emissions from managed manures are much smaller.
Changes to livestock by selecting traits which lead to lower methane emissions will have a greater impact on the emissions from enteric fermentation rather than the emissions produced from livestock manures.
To align with the CCP’s targets, of achieving net zero in Scotland by 2045 and a 75% reduction in emissions by 2030, we present data for potential emission reductions for 2030 and 2045. The following data were used to quantify the potential emission savings:
Key traits leading to reduced methane emissions, from the REA.
Methane reduction values associated with traits, from the REA.
Note: A particular challenge was identifying emission reduction values that were associated with specific traits, that we could use in our calculations. We have used the data available to draw conclusions.
Baseline emissions data for Scotland from the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory (NAEI, 2023).
Uptake values (sector specific) for adoption of chosen traits through breeding, based on findings in the REA, stakeholder interviews and expert judgement.
Baseline methane emissions
To calculate the baseline methane emissions for dairy, beef and sheep, the enteric fermentation emissions of the livestock types for Scotland in 2021 were extracted from the NAEI (2023)[11].
Current uptake rate for adoption of traits
The current uptake rate is an estimated current baseline based on evidence gathered in the REA review of evidence and technical knowledge. This provides a baseline for additional uptake under the scenarios presented below.
Current uptake is set at 75% for dairy cattle, due to the high usage of reproductive technologies (see Section 4.1.3), in particular use of sexed semen and artificial insemination (AI) using Holstein Friesian semen, a key breed which already has proven methane efficiency ratings published as part of the breeding profile. It is understood that methane efficiency ratings are also being developed for other key dairy breeds as observed on UK dairy and beef cattle semen sales websites.
Beef cattle uptake has been set at a 40% baseline as findings show that methane efficiency ratings are less regularly published as part of the beef breed profile on UK semen sales websites. However, artificial insemination of beef cattle is relatively common, although it is not a standard practice as in the dairy industry. It is understood adoption of breeding for reduced emissions is developing and evidence is being gathered (see Section 4).
The current baseline for sheep has been set at 10% based on a comparison with New Zealand where there is an uptake rate of 30% (Rowe et al. in 2020). Following discussions with Scottish Government it is acknowledged that there is some technology usage around the world, but that adoption in Scotland is not yet as high as in New Zealand. Therefore, 10% has been chosen as the baseline. This links to understanding of technology uptake in Section 4.
Scenarios
The quantification of emissions savings was based on four different scenarios to reflect various levels of uptake:
The no interventionscenario reflects an increase in uptake of 5% from the current baseline by 2030 and remains at the same level until 2045 for all livestock types.
The voluntary uptake scenario is designed to reflect levels of uptake expected with no other push such as a financial incentive or a relevant policy. This scenario reflects a 5% increase in uptake from the current baseline by 2030, and an additional 5% increase in uptake by 2045 for all livestock types.
The supplier demand scenario is based on companies along the supply chain offering financial incentives to farmers that implement breeding techniques to reduce methane emissions. This value is set at a mid-point between the voluntary uptake and the regulatory scenario.
The policy changes scenario represents the uptake where legislation has been introduced that will require farmers to introduce methane reducing breeding techniques to their herds. This scenario reflects a 10% increase in uptake from the current baseline by 2030. By 2045 it is assumed there would be 100% uptake for dairy cattle due to the large-scale usage of AI within the industry and progress seen on methane efficiency profiling already published within the key breed profile. It is assumed that beef cattle could reach 80% uptake by 2045, and sheep could reach a 60% uptake by 2045 under a regulatory scenario.
Scenario uptake values are presented for dairy, beef and sheep in Table 17.
Table 17. Scenario implementation values for dairy, beef and sheep
Type
Scenario
Current baseline
Change from current baseline to 2030
2030 uptake
Change from current baseline to 2045
2045 uptake
Dairy
1. No intervention
75%
5%
80%
5%
80%
2. Voluntary uptake
75%
5%
80%
10%
85%
3. Supplier demand
75%
7.5%
82.5%
17.5%
92.5%
4. Policy changes
75%
10%
85%
25%
100%
Beef
1. No intervention
40%
5%
45%
5%
45%
2. Voluntary uptake
40%
5%
45%
10%
50%
3. Supplier demand
40%
7.5%
47.5%
25%
65%
4. Policy changes
40%
10%
50%
40%
80%
Sheep
1. No intervention
10%
5%
15%
5%
15%
2. Voluntary uptake
10%
5%
15%
10%
20%
3. Supplier demand
10%
7.5%
17.5%
30%
40%
4. Policy changes
10%
10%
20%
50%
60%
Traits
Traits and technologies with a possible relationship with methane emissions and emission reductions were identified through a REA of relevant literature (see Section 4).
Traits identified were further reviewed to assess their applicability to emission reduction calculations. When assessing each trait to quantify the emissions savings, appropriate values were found to be scarce in the literature. There were two key reasons that led to studies and/or traits being excluded from use in this task:
A significant portion of the literature did not present methane emission values and was instead looking at genetic correlations between traits. Therefore, literature that did not present methane emission values or change in methane emissions, either as absolute or relative values, were excluded.
Often the changes in methane emission were comparative to a baseline that was not appropriate for our calculations focusing on methane emission from enteric fermentation. For example, papers excluded in our review presented changes to emissions from the entire lifecycle or system.
A summary of the traits, where appropriate values were obtained, are presented in Table 17 below.
Table 18. Traits identified with appropriate methane reduction values used in the calculations of emissions savings
Sector
Trait Category
Trait Name
Unit of baseline
Value of methane reduction from baseline
Beef
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Offspring carcass weight
kgCO2e/per kg meat per breeding cow per year
1.3%
Climate
Methane yield
gCH4/kgDMI per generation
12%
Dairy
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
5%
Milk fat + protein
MJ CH4/kg milk
12%
Milk yield
kg CH4/kg milk
15%
Climate
Methane intensity
kg CH4/kg milk
24%
Sheep
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Climate
Methane yield
g CH4/kg DMI
35%
Feed efficiency
References: (Alford, A.R. et al. 2006; Worden, D. et al. 2020; Rowe, S.J. et al. 2021)
The ability of animals to optimally convert feed into liveweight with minimal losses of energy, meaning that animals with high feed efficiency consume less than their peers with equivalent liveweight and weight gain. This trait was identified across all three livestock types and has been highlighted by the stakeholders and the literature as a key trait for emission reductions (see Section 4).
Methane focused climate traits
References: (Quinton, C.D. et al. 2018; De Haas, Y. et al. 2021; Jonker, A. et al. 2018)
Methane traits are likely to have the greatest impact on methane emissions. Here the methane related traits were focused on manipulating the gut microbiome and selecting for animals with certain microbial populations that led to lower methane emissions. While methane traits were identified for all three livestock types, they were presented differently across the literature.
Offspring carcass weight – Specific to beef cattle
References: (Martínez-Álvaro, M. et al., 2022)
Focus on offspring carcass weight in beef cattle reduces methane emissions through increased quantity of product per animal, therefore reducing the number of animals required to produce the same amount of beef product.
Milk yield and Milk fat and protein – Specific to dairy cattle
References: (Bell, M.J. et al. 2010)
Traits reduce methane emissions per kg of milk while maintaining production levels and quality.
Emissions reduction
To calculate the emission reduction of different traits under the different scenarios the following formula is used:
Where:
= Emissions savings (kt CH4 for the livestock type)
= Baseline emissions (kt CH4 for the livestock type)
= Uptake (U) for the projected year (y)
= Emission reduction coefficient (%)
This formula calculates a percentage of emissions based on emissions reduction potential and uptake rate and subtracts this portion from baseline emissions. The result is an estimate of methane emissions if the reduction potential and uptake for the trait is achieved. The savings were then calculated by subtracting the estimated emissions from the baseline emissions, and both were calculated in units of percentage of baseline and absolute values (kt CO2e). This calculation was completed for each trait found in beef, dairy, and sheep sectors, for the years 2030 and 2045.
Limitations in the data:
All traits have been presented separately as the interaction between traits and the impact this would have on emission reductions is unknown.
It is acknowledged that traits found within the literature are presented in different units (see Table 7). Traits selected from the literature also presented a percentage change which was used within the change calculations. The percentage change has been applied to total emissions from the relevant livestock sector due to limited data on specific emissions related to more specific production categories such as CH4 emissions per kg milk produced.
Methane efficiency focused traits have shown to have the greatest methane reduction potential for all three livestock types. However, it is noted that there was less literature available on this subject compared to feed efficiency. Due to the smaller quantity of literature available the reduction potential values selected for methane efficiency could be less robust. Greater consistency in measurement, modelling, and presentation of methane efficiency traits and their impacts on emissions savings and animal performance production could be useful research to fill this knowledge gap.
Traits reduction factors compiled within the review were presented in different units, however, all presented a percentage reduction. It has been assumed that the percentage reduction would be applicable to be used as a reduction factor as this would have a direct impact on methane reductions independent of the unit the factor was recorded in.
Limited data was provided within the literature reviewed on the length of time until each trait reaches maximum potential within the population. However, it is assumed that once the trait has been bred into the total population there will be no additional improvements unless new breeding traits are selected. Within the calculations we have assumed that traits will account for their maximum potential to the selected population at the assessment point (i.e., in 2030 100% of the trait will apply to the current baseline uptake with the additional percentage uptake).
There is the possibility that, due to the nature of genetics, when selecting for certain traits, that they will not fully spread throughout the entire population where the trait is applied. This is a complicated process, and it has been assumed that at each assessment point (2030 and 2045) each trait has reached maximum spread in the portion of the population that has taken up the measure (i.e., in 2030 100% of the trait will apply to the current baseline uptake with the additional percentage uptake).
Results
Figures 4-7 show that in each sector, up to 2030, the reductions are relatively steady, but there is a greater reduction at 2045, influenced by the proposed increase in uptake. Due to the proposed uptake percentages the policy change scenario presents the greatest reduction under all traits, with the no intervention scenario showing the smallest reduction due to a 5% increase in uptake in 2030 and no further uptake in 2045.
Figure 4 presents the methane emissions under the four scenarios for the three traits selected for beef cattle: feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight and methane production. The methane production focused trait has the largest emission reduction (reduction of 161.1 kt CO2e in 2045 under the policy changes scenario), whereas the offspring carcass weight focused trait has the smallest impact at less than 12.4 kt CO2e reduced by 2045 under the maximum reduction scenario.
In correlation with beef trait reductions, methane intensity traits have the largest reduction to methane emissions in dairy cattle, with a reduction of 35.4 kt CO2e observed under the policy change scenario by 2045, as presented in Figure 5. While breeding for methane reductions through feed efficiency has the least change at 7.4 kt CO2e reduced by 2045, this could be due to the work already completed on feed efficiency breeding within dairy. Traits focused on milk fat and protein and milk yield provide similar reduction level levels, however there is the potential for overlapping improvements with feed efficiency as breeding focused on improvements to milk production traits could also link to improvements to feed efficiency.
Reduction potential for sheep is presented in Figure 6 for the two selected traits: feed efficiency and methane yield. As with the cattle categories, the trait focused on methane improvements (methane yield) had the largest potential reduction at 185.6 kt CO2e reduced by 2045 under the policy change scenario, whilst feed efficiency traits saw a smaller reduction of 37.1 kt CO2e by 2045 under the policy change scenario.
Figure 4. Methane emissions for beef cattle traits against the 2021 baseline enteric methane emissions of beef cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 5. Methane emissions for dairy traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of dairy cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 6. Methane emissions for sheep traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of sheep in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 7 presents the methane emissions by 2045 under all scenarios for all traits for each livestock type. The difference in total enteric fermentation emissions for each livestock type can be seen by the dotted baseline line. Beef cattle emitted the majority of the methane from enteric fermentation in Scotland in 2021, with sheep emissions being less than half those of beef cattle, and dairy under a quarter those of beef cattle.
Figure 7. Methane emissions for all livestock for all traits presented against baseline enteric emissions of beef, dairy and sheep in Scotland.
How to cite this publication:
Jenkins, B., Herold, L., de Mendonça, M., Loughnan, H., Willcocks, J., David, T., Ginns, B., Rock, L., Wilshire, J., Avis, K (2024) ‘Breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5569
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
DNA contains the information required to create the entire organism, a unit of DNA containing specific information to create a protein or set of proteins is referred to as a gene. It is these proteins which make up the body and control chemical reactions between cells. the study of genes is referred to as genetics. ↑
The productive lifespan of livestock. For beef and dairy – a longer productive lifetime would reduce the number of replacement heifers needed to maintain a constant herd size. For sheep – the longer ewes can produce lambs, production efficiency improves. ↑
The number of lambs born per number of ewes mated, expressed as a percentage. ↑
For beef and dairy – less feed is used for the same output of product and less loss of energy to methane (kg CO2e/kg product). For sheep – this is CO2e but as far as can be told it is only methane in this value. Less feed is used for the same output of product and less loss of energy to methane (kg CO2e/kg product). ↑
The number of kilograms gained by the animal per day, measured in kg/day. ↑
Overall production of the animal (including feed efficiency), supporting the animal to reach its full genetic potential and ensuring it reaches the highest possible level of performance. ↑
ME is expressed as a Relative Breeding Value (RBV) with a mean score of 100 and a standard deviation (how much a point differs from the average), of five. A score below 100 indicates below average and a score above 100 indicates above average. A higher RBV indicates a higher methane reduction potential. ↑
The amount of methane produced per unit of milk or sheepmeat produced (kg CH4/kg milk/sheepmeat). ↑
RME is the difference between the expected methane emissions from an animal based on its size and feed intake, compared to what it actually produces. High RME is undesirable and low RME is desirable. ↑
Achieving Scotland’s net zero goals by 2045 will require significant expansion of the renewable energy workforce. This is especially true in the rapidly growing onshore wind and solar energy sectors. Forecasts indicate a dramatic increase in workforce demands by 2030. This emphasises the need for enhanced, well-aligned training programmes to develop a skilled labour pool.
This study assesses the current training provision for the onshore wind and solar energy sectors in Scotland, identifying gaps, barriers and opportunities for improvement. It analyses existing programmes and their alignment with industry needs, exploring future workforce demands and strategies to address skills shortages.
Findings
We conducted desk research, data analysis and stakeholder consultations. The skills needed in the solar and onshore wind sectors can be divided into sector-specific, allied STEM (from broader disciplines such as mechanical and electrical engineering) and other skills (Figure 2). Although some critical training provision is needed for solar and onshore wind separately, the majority of roles are shared by the sectors requiring allied STEM and other skills. Siloed approaches for skills governance in solar and onshore wind could be counterproductive as the sectors compete for many of the same skillsets.
Figure 1. Conceptual framework of skill types relevant to solar and onshore wind industries.
We found that:
There is a strong breadth of allied STEM training provision in Scotland, with skills that are highly sought across multiple sectors. A siloed approach to STEM workforce planning is a threat, as several industries draw from the same talent pool. Stakeholders highlighted poor visibility of careers, as well as low job attractiveness, as major barriers to the development of solar and onshore wind sectors at the accelerated pace required.
There is a shortage of specialised training provision providing essential skills for the construction and operational phases of solar and onshore wind projects. The solar sector, in particular, suffers from a lack of training specific to large-scale or ground-mounted solar installations.
The majority of targeted training provision relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors is largely theory-based, with insufficient emphasis on practical, hands-on experience. Industry leaders are concerned that graduates often lack real-world skills and are not “work-ready” upon entering the workforce. Practical training opportunities, such as industry partnerships and on-site apprenticeships, are limited.
Funding constraints are a significant barrier to the expansion and modernisation of training programmes. High-cost courses, such as those involving high-voltage systems and specialised certifications, require substantial investment in equipment and facilities. Many colleges and training providers struggle to secure adequate resources to enhance the training delivery.
Industry uncertainty, driven by a lack of clear and stable policy directives, complicates long-term planning for workforce development. Industry is hesitant to invest in apprenticeships and workforce training without concrete indications of project pipelines and future market stability.
The competition for technically skilled workers is fierce across various industries. Renewable energy companies compete among themselves and with other sectors for these workers. This high level of competition complicates talent acquisition and retention.
Lessons learnt
The content and delivery principles of training programmes needs to be updated to better equip trainees with practical, hands-on experience. Deeper collaborations between industry stakeholders and educational institutions would ensure curricula content is relevant and meets current and future sector needs. Educational institutions and training providers should integrate work-based learning modules, internships and apprenticeship opportunities into their curricula. Modular and more flexible courses as a core mechanism for training delivery would facilitate targeted, intensive upskilling or reskilling. Such flexibility would enable faster and more efficient transitions into the workforce.
There is a pressing need for increased and targeted funding to support technical training programmes to enable these updates.
To attract and retain a skilled workforce, the onshore wind and solar sectors must become more visible and appealing to job seekers. Development of career pathway maps would illustrate how individuals can progress from entry-level roles to senior positions. This would provide a clearer picture of the long-term opportunities available in the sector, making it more attractive to potential recruits.
An integrated perspective is necessary to consider the requirement for a STEM workforce across all infrastructure projects of national importance and overall installed capacity ambitions. A comprehensive map that details the scale, timelines and workforce demands of major infrastructure projects has the potential to inform the total scale of skilled workforce needs, including for the onshore wind and solar sectors.
Next steps
Effective workforce development will require close collaboration between government, industry and educational institutions, and workforce representative groups. A coordinated approach will ensure that training programmes are aligned with sector demands. To address the workforce and training challenges outlined in this report, a detailed, comprehensive action plan should be developed. This plan should include timelines, assigned responsibilities, and measurable outcomes to ensure progress is tracked and accountability is maintained.
With workforce demand projected to peak by 2027, the action plan must be implemented swiftly. Initiatives should be launched before the start of the 2025/2026 academic year to allow training providers time to adapt and scale. This proactive approach will enable the industry to meet pressing needs and support for the Scottish Government to deliver its renewable energy commitments.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
CESAP
Climate Emergency Skills Action Plan
ESP
Energy Skills Partnership
FPE
Full person equivalents – a standardised unit that quantifies the number of people enrolled in a course
FTE
Full time equivalents – a standardised unit that quantifies workload equivalence to full-time hours
GWO
Global Wind Organisation
NESA
National Energy Skills Accelerator
NESCoL
North-East Scotland College
NOS
National Occupational Standards
OPITO
Offshore Petroleum Industry Training Organisation
SCGJ
Skills Council for Green Jobs
STEM
Science, technology, engineering, and mathematics
UHI
University of Highlands and Islands
Introduction
Scale of skills demands in solar and onshore wind
The achievement of Scotland’s net-zero commitment by 2045 relies heavily on expanding the renewable energy sector, including the onshore wind and solar energy sectors. Both the wind and solar sectors are expanding rapidly, creating an urgent need to train a larger skilled workforce. Two recent studies published by the ClimateXChange have estimated the workforce needs for both these sectors.
In the onshore wind sector, the workforce could need to increase from around 6,900 full-time equivalent (FTE) jobs in 2024 to an estimated around 20,500 FTEs by 2027 (Morrison, et al., 2024). Most of these new jobs will focus on constructing and installing wind farms. Key areas such as the Highlands and Dumfries and Galloway will need a large share of the workforce, but recruitment challenges already exist in these regions. Critical skills shortages include high-voltage engineers and wind turbine technicians. If these gaps are not filled, it could slow down the sector’s growth and reduce its economic and environmental benefits.
The solar sector faces similar challenges. Its workforce could need to grow from around 800 FTEs in 2023 to an estimated over 11,000 by 2030, with over 80% of these roles estimated to be related to construction, especially for large ground-mounted solar projects (Creamer et al, 2024). Solar projects will require key tradespeople, such as electricians, grid connection engineers, and high-voltage technicians. Many of the large solar installations will be in rural parts of Scotland, which makes workforce distribution a challenge.
Both sectors already have skilled workers, but they must attract and train more people to meet their installed capacity ambitions. While current training programmes can address some of these needs, there is a clear requirement to upskill and reskill workers from other sectors. Previous research (Morrison et al, 2024; Creamer et al, 2024) has shown that a large part of the additional workforce required for solar and onshore wind sectors will require education at Higher National Certificate, Higher National Diploma and degree levels. Furthermore, the industry strongly prefers trainees who have real-world experience in these sectors. As such, apprenticeships are expected to play a significant role in the delivery of the future skilled workforce.
Based on the findings of these studies, we argue that the timelines for intervention towards increased training provision are urgent. To illustrate, the onshore wind sector forecasts a peak of workforce demand as early as 2027, leaving only two academic years for intervention and subsequent training to be delivered.
This follow-on study focuses on the analysis of the existing and planned training provision, profiling its alignment with the industry needs, and exploring potential avenues for optimisation of training provision based on insights from sector stakeholders.
Conceptualisation of relevant training provision
The skills needed in the solar and onshore wind sectors can be divided into sector-specific, allied STEM, and otherskills (Figure 2).
Sector-specific skills focus on the installation, maintenance, and safe operation of the unique infrastructure in each sector. For example, solar projects require expertise in setting up and maintaining solar panels, while wind projects demand skills in handling large wind turbines, often in challenging environments such as working at heights. Health and safety knowledge is critical in both sectors, as they each present different risks—solar work involves concerns like heat stress, while wind energy can involve working at height and operation of heavy equipment. Additionally, site design in both sectors requires highly specialised skills. Wind projects, for example, need knowledge of geology and land use to optimise turbine placement, whereas solar projects focus on efficient land use for arrays.
More detail on sector-specific skills and job roles can be found in the ClimateXChange publications by Creamer et al (2024) and Morrison et al (2024) (solar and onshore wind, respectively). These skills are often acquired through the apprenticeship routes, as well as first degrees and private training provision programmes.
Allied STEM skills include those adapted from broader disciplines such as civil, structural, mechanical and electrical engineering. These disciplines are essential for building and connecting renewable energy infrastructure to the grid. Engineers play a vital role in constructing foundations for wind turbines or solar supports and managing and balancing electrical systems. Further, skills from environmental sciences and logistics help ensure that projects comply with environmental regulations and manage supply chains effectively. Similar to sector-specific skills, allied STEM skills are acquired through apprenticeships, as well as first degrees and postgraduate training.
In addition to technical skills, other skills, such as finance, planning, and management expertise are critical for the success of renewable energy projects. These professionals may not have hands-on involvement in infrastructure development but are key in overseeing projects, securing funding, navigating regulations, and managing teams. Understanding the specifics of solar and wind energy is essential in these roles, as managers and leaders must handle complex projects, from permitting and financing to project delivery. These skills are a combination of theoretical sector understanding that could be achieved, for example, through first degree or postgraduate specialisation, in addition to extensive work experience in the sector. Albeit these skills are not the main focus of the current study, it is important to acknowledge their involvement in the sectoral skills ecosystem, and in particular in context of their position in career pathways for mid-career and senior professionals.
This report uses the framework outlined in Figure 2 for a comprehensive discussion of training provision that enables solar and onshore wind industries. This is in alignment with the precursor studies, which identified that the highest skilled workforce demands are likely to be within the allied sectors. This report discusses solar, onshore wind, and allied STEM skills training provision in parallel, as the skills needs across solar and onshore wind sectors have high levels of convergence. Any differences between the sectors are highlighted in the text and summarised in the Conclusions.
Figure 2. Conceptual framework of skill types relevant to solar and onshore wind industries.
Methodology
We carried out extensive desk based research, reviewing national and international policies and initiatives related to training provision for solar and onshore wind sectors and the renewable energy sector overall. This included the review of the precursor studies, literature regarding the EU Pact of Skills, International Energy Agency reports, and others.
Following this, we conducted a comprehensive landscape analysis of training provision in Scotland for solar, onshore wind, and other relevant STEM sectors. This process included profiling all training providers in Scotland’s higher and further education institutions, gathering course names and qualifications offered, and analysing course content to understand the themes and topics. We also mapped the geographic distribution of training provision sites to visualise the regional availability of skills provision.
To understand how the training provision aligns with industry needs, we reviewed national occupational standards (NOS) and explored future training initiatives. Additionally, we extracted and analysed student enrolment data from the Scottish Funding Council (SFC) to assess the number of students enrolled in relevant STEM disciplines and compared this with solar and onshore wind workforce demand forecasts from previous studies.
Our stakeholder engagement programme involved consulting a broad range of participants, including those from policy, training providers, supporting organisations, industry, and the supply chain (21 participants) between July and September 2024. Through semi-structured one-to-one interviews via Microsoft Teams, we gathered insights on how current policies affect training provision, the competition for talent, and talent retention. We also explored stakeholders’ views on the barriers and motivations individuals face when pursuing careers in solar and onshore wind sectors. These discussions helped us identify potential actions to address current and future skills gaps, as well as suggestions for improving the targeting, timing, and enhancement of training provisions. A complete list of the organisations we consulted is included in Appendix A.
Key relevant training provision policy and initiatives
Scotland
Policy activity
In Scottish national policy, onshore wind and solar sectors are covered under the umbrella of green jobs / skills and renewables. Scotland’s National Strategy for Economic Transformation (The Scottish Government, 2022) places significant emphasis on building a skilled workforce to drive future economic prosperity. This publication outlines, in general terms, that the skills related to the net zero transition, including renewable energy, will be critical. It emphasises lifelong learning mechanisms such as continuous reskilling and upskilling as key to adapting to fast-paced technological changes. The Climate Emergency Skills Action Plan (CESAP) (Skills Development Scotland, 2020) is a document that outlines key initiatives to equip Scotland’s workforce for the transition to a net zero economy. The Green Jobs Workforce Academy was launched as a service aimed to help the workforce with training, upskilling, and job seeking in the emerging green sectors. The National Transition Training Fund (NTTF) was introduced in 2020 as a direct response to the economic impact of the Covid-19 pandemic. In its second and final year, the fund’s scope expanded and included a more significant emphasis on supporting individuals and employers in the transition to net zero. This followed a commitment within CESAP. Further, CESAP’s original publication indicated the ambition to launch the Green Jobs Skills Hub to provide insights into the skills needed over the next 25 years, working with businesses and educational institutions to ensure training aligns with the demand for green jobs
Additionally, CESAP indicates that sector-specific initiatives, such as the Energy Skills Alliance (now led by the Offshore Petroleum Industry Training Organisation OPITO) and Offshore Wind Skills Group, will map out skills requirements in renewable energy, such as hydrogen production and carbon capture. At a policy level, there is no equivalent regionally targeted working group aimed at solar or onshore wind.
CESAP set an ambition to work with educational institutions to realign curricula with industry needs and offer work-based learning to ensure individuals acquire the skills needed for Scotland’s green economy. Much of this work was carried out through Pathfinder activity under the remit of the Skills Alignment Assurance Group, now Shared Outcomes Assurance Group of the Scottish Government. Lastly, CESAP indicates that a place-based approach will target regional needs, with agencies like Highlands and Islands Enterprise leading efforts in rural areas to promote green job opportunities.
The CESAP Pathfinder Work Package 1 (Skills Development Scotland, 2023) aimed to understand the demand for skills driven by the transition to net zero and to map existing skills provision across apprenticeships, further education, higher education, upskilling, and reskilling. The report revealed that 27% (32,300) of college enrolments are in courses aligned with CESAP sectors. Additionally, around 16% of Scottish university graduates were working in a CESAP sector 15 months after graduation. In terms of apprenticeships, 29% (7,400) of Modern Apprenticeship (MA) starts and 38% (400) of Graduate Apprenticeship (GA) starts were in sectors aligned with CESAP. However, CESAP WP1 report indicates that there is evidence of leakage from this potential skills supply pipeline. Of the university graduates who entered a CESAP sector as their first destination, about 40% took jobs outside of Scotland. CESAP WP1 also highlighted the gap in knowledge of the future destinations of college students.
Future training provision initiatives in Scotland
Stakeholders across Scotland are engaging in a range of initiatives towards optimising future training provision for the whole renewables sector, many of which are targeted at offshore wind. We note that offshore wind skills are often directly applicable to onshore wind, and these are reviewed below. The Scottish Government, as part of its NSET strategy, prioritises a “Skilled Workforce” with a focus on future skills needs, including the net zero transition.
OPITO has introduced credit-rated qualifications in Hydrogen, Oil and Gas, and Wind Power to enhance workforce mobility across sectors. The Energy Skills Partnership (funded by Scottish Funding Council) supports key technical skills across Scotland’s colleges through various Training Networks. National Energy Skills Accelerator (NESA) has secured £1 million from the Just Transition Fund to pilot training programmes, including Performing Engineering Operations – Renewables, Electrical Systems for Renewable Energy, Project Management Fundamentals, and Energy Data Management.
Hosted by the North East Scotland College (NESCol) and funded by the Just Transition Fund, Energy Transition Zone/NESA is also developing an Energy Transition Skills Hub, which will include demonstration and teaching facilities for energy transition technologies and a state-of-the-art welding and fabrication academy. The Engineering Construction Industry Training Board has launched Energy Scholarships to address workforce shortages in roles such as Wind Transfer Technician and Energy Transfer Technician, with trainees receiving training in core engineering skills, new technologies, and digital competencies. RenewableUK and Energy & Utility Skills have partnered to create training and assessment standards for the UK’s renewable energy workforce, including national occupational standards (discussed below) and apprenticeship frameworks.
UK
In July 2024, the UK Government announced a mission to increase onshore wind development. This was marked by the launch of the Onshore Wind Industry Taskforce (UK Government, 2024). One of their key working groups is specifically focused on supply chains, skills and the workforce. The Taskforce will run for up to 6 months and culminate in the publication of a final report, setting out their commitments, and transition into the delivery body.
In May 2023, the UK Government launched the Solar Taskforce (UK Government, 2023) with terms of reference including skills governance for the solar sector. A ‘Draft Solar Roadmap’ was last discussed in the taskforce meeting in March 2024, and the final publication is pending.
European Union
In the European Union (EU), achieving the REPowerEU targets across all renewables sectors is predicted to create over 3.5 million jobs by 2030. In response to this rapid increase in STEM workforce demands, the EU has launched several initiatives to develop a skilled workforce for the renewable energy sector.
One of the flagship efforts as a part of the European Skills Agenda is the Pact for Skills (European Commission, 2020), aimed at upskilling and reskilling the workforce in various industries. One of the themes of the Pact of Skills is the Renewable Energy Ecosystem. This ecosystem is a series of strategic partnerships between the industry and policymakers to ensure sectoral cooperation for the development of skilled workforce in sufficient numbers. Examples of partnerships include Renewable Energy Skills Partnership, Large-Scale Partnership on the Digitalisation of the Energy Value Chain, and Skills Partnership for Offshore Renewable Energy. These initiatives are supported through consistent and sustained funding mechanisms such as Horizon Europe and Erasmus+ funding programmes. This capacity building is strengthened through international cooperation, facilitating the exchange of best practices and expertise, and harmonisation activities in training content.
Another relevant EU policy initiative is the BUILD UP Skills programme (European Climate Infrastructure and Environment Executive Agency, 2011), which has been active since 2011 and focuses on increasing skills in the construction sector, particularly for energy efficiency and renewable technologies. It provides national roadmaps to tackle skills shortages and works through EU funding programmes like Horizon 2020 and LIFE CET to support training for green energy jobs. This highlights that the EU is taking a broad approach to renewable energy workforce development and recognises the allied STEM skills role in it.
Overall, while these strategies aim to effectively transition workers and communities to renewable energy sectors, their success can be difficult to measure as the energy transition is ongoing. The long-term impact of workforce transition and reskilling is yet to be seen.
In addition to the skills governance, broader economic conditions, like market fluctuations and supply chain disruptions, also affect outcomes. The transition’s success ultimately relies on sustained political will, consistent funding, and strong collaboration among governments, industry, and communities.
Review of existing training provision
Targeted training programmes
List of targeted training provision
To identify targeted training provision that is relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors, we profiled course lists available on the websites of training providers (Scotland-based universities and colleges) and collated a list of courses that include renewable energy (general), wind, or solar in their title or public description. For private training provision, we carried out a Google search using keywords such as “Scotland solar PV training courses” and “Scotland onshore wind training courses” and profiled course lists available through private providers (remote training options were excluded from the analysis).
Our analysis of training provision identified a total of 57 courses relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors in Scottish colleges and universities being delivered in 2024/2025. We analysed the course content available in the public description on training providers’ websites and found:
23 courses that include content on renewable energy and energy systems (without specifying wind (onshore and offshore) or solar in the public description)
11 courses that include wind (onshore and offshore)- and solar-themed modules
5 courses that include solar-specific modules
18 courses that include wind-specific modules (onshore and offshore).
Figure 3 illustrates the levels of qualifications offered by the identified relevant courses. This data shows that most solar and wind sector courses are at postgraduate level specialism (25 total). This is in comparison to only 8 courses at the first-degree level, and two courses at SCQF L4. The highest number of targeted skills provision courses were hosted at the University of Strathclyde (10) and NESCol (7). The full list of courses identified as directly relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors is included in Appendix B.
Figure 3. Levels of qualifications of courses targeted to solar and onshore wind sectors available through Scottish public education providers.
We note that the numbers outlined above are a high-level estimation of training provision for solar and wind. Other courses, particularly at BEng and BSc levels in electrical engineering and other allied sectors, might include further content relevant to solar and onshore wind. This analysis, therefore, focuses on courses where solar and/or onshore wind forms the major component of the course content.
In addition to training provision available through Scottish colleges and universities, we identified 110 short courses available through private training providers:
Solar: 5
Wind: 105 (specialist skill training, Global Wind Organisation (GWO) basic safety courses and other safety certifications).
These short courses are typically 1-6 days in duration and include certifications that are critical for safe working on solar and wind sites, as well as highly specialist technical skills and use of highly specialised equipment. The full list of identified relevant course private provision is included in Appendix B, Table 2.
Thematic analysis of course content
We reviewed publicly available information on the contents of college and university courses identified as directly relevant to onshore wind and solar sectors and identified nine key thematic trends. All module names and themes are extracted from STEM course descriptions.
Theme 1: Fundamental engineering and electrical principles.
Description: These modules provide the foundational engineering knowledge crucial for understanding and applying more advanced concepts in renewable energy. Mastery of these basic principles is essential for anyone entering the energy sector, as they underpin much of the work in system design, operation, and maintenance.
Theme 2: Renewable energy technologies and systems.
Module titles: Wind Turbine Technology; Solar Energy Systems; Marine and Wind Energy; Energy Conversion and Storage; Renewable Energy Integration to Grid; Wind, Solar, Hydro, and Marine Electricity Generation; Future Energy; Renewable Energy Technologies.
Description: This theme includes modules that focus on specific renewable energy technologies and systems. Students learn the principles, operations, and applications of various renewable energy sources, including wind and solar, as well as hydro, geothermal, and marine energy. These courses are most directly applicable to the onshore wind and solar sectors.
Theme 3: Power systems and grid integration.
Module titles: Electrical Power Systems; Power Electronics for Energy & Drive Control; High Voltage Technology & Electromagnetic Compatibility; Distributed Energy Resources and Smart Grids; Renewable Energy Integration to Grid; Power Systems Engineering and Economics; Power System Design, Operation & Protection.
Description: Modules under this theme cover the complexities of integrating renewable energy sources into existing power grids. Students are taught the technical and economic aspects of power systems, including high-voltage technology, power electronics, and grid management. This knowledge is essential for ensuring that renewable energy can be effectively and efficiently incorporated into the larger energy infrastructure.
Theme 4: Practical skills and hands-on experience.
Module titles: Assembling and Testing Fluid Power Systems; Operation and Maintenance of Wind Turbine Systems; Basic Hydraulics.
Description: Practical experience is a critical aspect of training in the renewable energy sector. These modules focus on hands-on learning, where students gain direct experience with the operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of renewable energy systems. This practical knowledge is crucial for developing the skills needed to work effectively in the field.
Theme 5: Health, safety, and industry-specific certifications and standards.
Module titles: Health and Safety Passport (CCNSG); GWO BTT Course (Electrical, Mechanical, Hydraulics); ECITB Mechanical Joint Integrity Training; Solar and energy storage system design and installation modules recognised by Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS).
Description: Industry-specific certifications and skills are vital for professionals in the renewable energy sector. This theme includes modules that provide the necessary certifications and specialized training required by the industry. These qualifications are crucial for meeting industry standards and ensuring that professionals are fully prepared for their roles.
Theme 6: Sustainable energy and environmental impact.
Module titles: Basic Evaluation of the Impact of Energy Generation on the Environment; Sustainable Energy Management; Environmental Impact Assessment.
Description: Modules in this theme explore the environmental aspects of energy production and the importance of sustainability. Students learn about the environmental impacts of different energy sources, strategies for sustainable energy management, and how to reduce emissions and pollution. These modules are critical for understanding the broader environmental implications of energy projects.
Theme 7: Project management and strategic planning.
Description: Effective management and strategic planning are crucial for the successful execution of renewable energy projects. These modules equip students in STEM courses with the skills needed to manage complex projects, plan strategically, and navigate the economic and regulatory landscapes. This theme prepares students for leadership roles within the industry.
Theme 8: Innovation and advanced technologies.
Module titles: Data Analytics & AI for Energy Systems; 3D Printing and Inventor Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs); Advanced Control Engineering; Digital Signal Processing Principles; Renewable Technology Commercialisation
Description: Innovation drives progress in renewable energy, and this theme covers the latest technologies and methodologies that are transforming the industry. Courses in this category focus on advanced technologies like AI, IoT, and programmable logic controllers, which are crucial for developing new solutions and improving existing systems in the renewable energy sector.
Theme 9: Energy economics and sustainability policy.
Module titles: The Economics of Community Wealth Building; Net Zero Society; Transition to Net Zero; Understanding Sustainability Discourses; Energy Resources & Policy
Description: This theme covers the economic, policy, and sustainability aspects of the energy sector. Modules in this category focus on the financial and regulatory frameworks that influence renewable energy projects, as well as the broader societal impacts of transitioning to a net-zero economy. Understanding these factors is essential for anyone involved in the strategic planning and implementation of renewable energy projects.
Based on these desk research findings, we conclude that the overall scope of current training courses has the potential to equip trainees with a wide range of skills suitable for various roles in the solar and onshore wind sectors, from technical and practical positions to environmental and project management. The courses also cover important areas like health and safety, policy, economics, and innovation, providing a solid foundation of knowledge for these industries. Stakeholders expressed a difference in opinion on the suitability of the content of current training provision for the industry. This is discussed in detail in Section 8.1.
Training provision alignment with industry needs
National Occupational Standards
National Occupational Standards (NOS) describe the skills, knowledge and understanding required to undertake a particular job to a nationally (UK-wide) recognised level of competence. NOS are proposed, developed and updated in response to industry needs. The process is usually led by the relevant industry skills association, that works with employers and sector experts to collectively refine NOS through a process of consultation. The NOS are then approved by UK government regulators to ensure that they meet industry requirements. NOS are the foundation for vocational qualifications, including apprenticeships. Learners are assessed against NOS to ensure that they have achieved the necessary competencies to be employed in that occupational role.
NOS are grouped into business sectors. There are 22 NOS that are grouped in the wind turbine sector, although only two are specific to wind turbines. There are 16 that are grouped in the solar PV sector, all but two of which are specific to solar PV. These NOS are listed in Appendix C, Table 3. As of the time of the creation of this report, a review of the NOS is ongoing (Energy and Utility Skills, 2024).
Activity towards aligning curricula and industry needs
Based on intelligence received from industry, ESP previously created a Wind Training Network for the College sector. The Colleges were strategically located in areas where there was a demand for onshore wind turbine technicians. The network has grown from the original 3 colleges and now consists of 11 throughout Scotland to meet forecasted demands.
The curriculum content is co-created by colleges and industry and continues to evolve with direct industry input from companies such as Natural Power, that have sponsored wind turbine technician courses at Dumfries & Galloway College with direct routes to employment offered. This model is forecast to be rolled out to other areas where demand exists and can be duplicated and adapted by additional industry partners.
Colleges are collaborating with industry partners to deliver short technical courses for wind turbine technicians that include GWO BTT qualifications. The teaching materials are shared resources within the network and a collaborative approach to delivery is used. To date, the solar sector has not had the same level of interest, but as demand increases a similar college training network model can be implemented to increase capability and capacity to meet this growing demand, both strategically and sustainability. We note that there is minimal activity towards future training provision for the solar sector, especially in the context of large ground-mounted projects. One stakeholder noted that the minimal activity of ground-mounted projects in the planning pipeline has led to a lack of clear indication from the industry about its skills needs for these projects, making it challenging for training providers to respond.
Allied sector STEM skills provision
Overview
As illustrated in Figure 2, both onshore wind and solar sectors are further enabled by a skills base drawn from allied sectors. These skills are fundamentally rooted in non-energy-focused disciplines such as engineering (electrical, mechanical, civil, and structural), and applied disciplines such as construction, welding, electrical installation and others.
We have identified a total of 389 courses available through Scottish universities and colleges that are aligned with these topics (Figure 4). These courses are distinct from the courses identified in the section above. In this STEM training provision, we identified 10 Foundational Apprenticeships, 16 Modern Apprenticeships, 8 Graduate Apprenticeships and 14 pre-apprenticeship courses. Many of these apprenticeships are provided via the apprenticeship frameworks (listed in Appendix D). Additionally, apprenticeships are also available through private companies, and typically these would not be advertised through training providers’ course lists and websites.
Figure 4. The number of courses in the allied sectors relevant to solar and onshore wind per provider.
Thematic analysis
A thematic analysis of the course content reveals broad provision across core engineering disciplines, particularly in structural, mechanical, civil, and electrical engineering. Key areas such as structural mechanics, geotechnical engineering, fluid mechanics, thermodynamics, and power electronics demonstrate comprehensive training in fundamental engineering topics. The curricula also place significant emphasis on computational techniques, with modules such as computer-aided engineering design, mathematical modelling, and finite element analysis providing students with essential design and analysis skills.
Environmental and sustainability topics are well-represented, with courses such as environmental engineering, water resource management, and sustainability, reflecting the growing importance of sustainable practices in engineering. Some of the curricula further include emerging technologies, such as artificial intelligence, machine learning, and Internet-of-Things as interdisciplinary data science fields. Additionally, modules in project management, risk management, and engineering innovation and management offer robust professional skills development, preparing students for leadership roles in managing engineering projects.
However, there are potential gaps. Emerging technologies, such as artificial intelligence, machine learning, and Internet-of-Things generally remain under-represented. The curricula could also benefit from expanded coverage of specific renewable energy subsectors, including solar and onshore wind; the current course content only mentions “wind” three times and “solar” two times.
In summary, while the course content provides a strong foundation in traditional and modern engineering disciplines, there is room to enhance the curricula by incorporating more emerging technologies and renewable energy topics. This would better prepare students for the evolving challenges of the engineering profession. It would also encourage students from engineering backgrounds to further specialise in solar and onshore wind sectors, particularly considering the lack of targeted solar and onshore wind coverage at undergraduate levels.
Geographic distribution of training provision
Locations of training provision
Research shows that future onshore wind farm developments will be in remote and rural areas of Scotland such as the Highland and parts of Dumfries and Galloway, resulting in a sharp increase in skills requirements in these geographies (Morrison et al, 2024). In comparison, commercial rooftop solar projects in Scotland are mainly based around densely populated areas, including the central belt, Borders, Dumfries and Galloway, the east, north-east, and Inverness. Ground-mounted solar projects will be primarily situated in rural areas like Aberdeenshire, Angus, Fife, and Tayside (Creamer et al, 2024), where there is ample land for larger systems.
We have created a map that shows where the targeted training provision is available (Figure 5). Most of these locations are aligned with the locations of higher and further education institutions, and it has been supplemented with locations of the private training provision company sites. It shows that the training provision is located within the central belt of Scotland, as well as Aberdeen and Inverness. There is an obvious disparity between the locations of training providers and the geographic regions where the solar and onshore wind workforce will be in the highest demand.
Figure 5. Geographic locations of Scottish training providers (colleges, universities, and private companies) offering courses relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors.
Stakeholder commentary on the development of local talent
Attraction, development, and retention of local talent pools in remote and rural areas was highlighted as an area of high concern by 9 of 21 stakeholders. The Highlands, in particular, faces substantial challenges in attracting and retaining local talent and developing a skilled regional workforce. Two regional stakeholders expressed an opinion that the Highlands is an emerging industrial cluster and predicted a sharp increase in demand for technical talent. This is an area of concern because the region has a rapidly ageing population (Highlands and Islands Enterprise, 2019).
“We don’t actually have enough (…) people for all the jobs that are going to be available.”
The temporary nature of jobs in the construction stages of solar and onshore wind projects further exacerbates the issue with the development of local talent. Construction and commissioning stages of projects in solar and onshore wind industries are marked by a sharp increase in workforce requirement. However, this demand is temporary as the construction stage of project development takes 2-3 years and is seasonal. As such, the industry is heavily dependent on a mobile skilled workforce. One stakeholder highlighted that the current reliance on bringing an external workforce to the region is, in effect, a barrier to the development of a stable, local talent pool for solar and onshore wind sectors. This is due to the fact that, from an industry perspective, skilled regional workforce development takes a significant investment of time that is not aligned with timelines of a typical project. From the workforce perspective, these temporary job roles might not serve as a basis for a life-long career and, therefore, make the sectors less attractive to new entrants.
“The reliance on transient workforce [means] there’s no real demand from developers to try and develop a workforce locally.”
In addition, two stakeholders indicated that the planned acceleration in onshore wind activity in England is a potential threat to maintaining a stable technical talent pool in Scotland. They explained that this acceleration is likely to drive a rapid increase in demand for skilled workers in England, where there is an anecdotal shortage of talent, prompting the industry to potentially draw from the Scottish workforce. Additionally, remuneration in England is perceived as higher, which could further incentivise talent migration.
“There is a concern that Scotland could lose a significant chunk of its skilled workforce to England.”
Addressing the future skilled workforce demands
Analysis of SFC data
To understand analyse the scale of skills being delivered against the projected future skilled workforce demands, we extracted data in relation to the total number of enrolments in all STEM-related courses identified as relevant to onshore wind and solar sectors. This was done in collaboration with the Scottish Funding Council.
The analysis of enrolment numbers on a course level was not possible as the data request could not be fulfilled in the timelines of this study. Therefore, the datasets discussed below are assessing combined annual enrolment numbers in both targeted and broader STEM training provision courses.
In the most recent available dataset (2021/2022), the total full person equivalent (FPE) enrolment in first degree, postgraduate taught and postgraduate research courses broadly identified as relevant to the sectors was 53,585 (Figure 6). The transferability of skills from these courses into solar and onshore wind is illustrated in Appendix D, Table 5.
Figure 6. Number of enrolments (full person equivalents) in courses relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors in Scottish higher education institutions (2021/2022).
In the most recent available dataset (2022/2023) the total FPE enrolment in Scottish college courses that are engineering-focused and identified as relevant to solar and onshore wind and allied sectors was 14,890 (Figure 7).
Figure 7. Number of FPE enrolments in engineering courses identified as relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors in Scottish colleges (2022/2023).
To reiterate, previous studies have estimated the peak total workforce requirement for solar and onshore wind sectors as 11,000 and 20,500 respectively. The FPE numbers of the current training provision have been provided as an illustration of the training capacity of further and higher education institutions in Scotland in courses relevant to solar and onshore wind. However, it is critically important to note that the total FPE numbers illustrated in Figure 6 and Figure 7 above do not imply that Scotland’s skilled workforce needs are being addressed by the existing training provision. People from these courses enter a range of different industries, and this is explored further in Section 7.2. Additionally, annual FPE enrolments in the relevant courses do not equal the number of individuals completing the training, or the number of graduates that are entering the workforce. For example, the number of graduates in a four-year training programme could be 25% of the total FPE number (the 4th year trainees).
Further, the data on the future destinations of students undergoing the training is fragmented, and this has already been flagged by CESAP Work Package 1 report (Skills Development Scotland, 2023). The recent SDS Apprentice Voice publication states that 71% of modern apprentices are still working for the employer with which they completed their modern apprenticeship 15 months after completion (SDS, 2024). Further research could explore the demographics, interests, and future career pathways of students in training to clarify the true number of entrants into the renewables sector and identify their subsector preferences.
Competition for talent
Due to the short timeline for meeting the 2030 installed capacity ambitions, addressing future skilled workforce demands in solar and onshore wind sectors will rely on cross-sector skills transfer. Interviews highlighted that one dominant sector that provides technically skilled talent to renewables, in particular onshore and offshore wind, is ex-service personnel (6 of 21 stakeholders).
Technically skilled talent is in high demand across many sectors, including other renewables (hydrogen and offshore wind), manufacturing, construction, the utility companies, and others. The competition for talent within the onshore wind and solar sectors is also fierce. As a consequence, workforce retention is an issue. This was highlighted as a critical challenge by 14 of 21 stakeholders consulted. Stakeholders highlight that a siloed approach to skilled workforce planning is a potential threat to the renewables sector as a whole.
“We’re competing with so many other sectors for the same skill sets… it’s a very competitive marketplace.”
In addition to problems in attracting talent from other industries, solar and onshore wind sectors face significant challenges in retaining skilled workers within their roles (14 of 21 stakeholders).
“We did go through a period… where there was very high turnover and lots of people leaving.”
Talent mobility is high, with workers often moving on to more lucrative or appealing opportunities after a short period. This disincentivises the industry to invest in workforce development via traditional pathways.
“The investment of spending three years training them [apprentices] [is significant]. At the end of it, a lot of them were literally staying in the role for six months, then looking to the next thing.”
The ageing workforce in parts of the solar and onshore wind sectors represents an additional challenge in training and developing talent.
“We’re losing a lot of our real experienced people that would normally mentor those coming in straight from uni… that’s where the struggle is.”
“The ageing workforce and impending retirements are exacerbating these challenges, as there are not enough experienced workers to mentor new entrants.”
The limited talent pool can result in solar and onshore wind companies headhunting suitably trained technical talent within their supply chains, with potentially detrimental consequences to these suppliers.
“When we’ve got good people… the developers come and use us as a recruitment location (..) clearly you can’t restrict people’s careers but (..) that’s a challenging area for us.”
The industry indicates that more innovative training mechanisms will be required to address the issues with training and retention, and these are discussed in Section 8.
Sector visibility and attractiveness
Due to the overall high demand for a technically skilled workforce, stakeholders highlighted that improving the visibility and attractiveness of the sector is a key element in ensuring that the future skills demands are met (11 of 21 stakeholders). They suggest that one strategy for ensuring optimal communication of sector attractiveness is by clearly describing the opportunities for life-long, diverse careers in these sectors. This can be achieved, for example, through the development of clear career pathway maps by building on the sectoral overlap matrix conceptualised in Figure 2, for example by illustrating career paths from technical roles into leadership, management, and planning (other skills).
“People want to see, okay, where can I go next? They want to see that career path… that’s where we need to be to attract people.”
“We need visibility of career pathways… there will be a lot more interest if there’s more visibility of how they can go about obtaining those roles.”
“The biggest challenge is that they don’t know how to progress within the sector.”
One stakeholder indicated that some companies in the onshore wind sector use career mapping internally as a tool for increasing employee retention within the organisation.
“We’re doing a lot of that internally now… developing a career path map so people can see the visibility of where they can go.”
One stakeholder, actively engaged with skilled individuals looking to transition to onshore renewable energy, indicated that the overall levels of visibility and clarity about the requirements and opportunities in solar and onshore wind are relatively low.
“They [skilled individuals seeking to transfer to renewables] need to understand the route to becoming a fully qualified electrician to get into solar installation.
For solar, we’re not seeing the volume of opportunities.
We’re talking a lot about the opportunities but they’re just not visible… we don’t see the wind turbine technician roles coming up that often.
Training provision gaps, barriers, and opportunities for improvement
Gaps and barriers
Gaps in training provision and alignment with industry needs
Stakeholders (16 of 21) consistently highlighted a significant gap between the content and capacity of existing training programs and the specific needs of the solar and onshore wind sectors. This gap is particularly evident in specialised, role-specific training, such as for wind turbine technicians and ground-mounted solar project development specialists. This is in contrast to the findings outlined in the Section 6 above, suggesting suboptimal levels of communication between the education providers and the industry in tailoring course content to the industry’s specific needs.
“We have generic degree courses in electrical engineering… it’s probably more the specialisms that we’re lacking just now.”
“There is no single qualification in solar. Generally, qualifications are part of a wider training provision.”
“I’ve got engineers at the moment that I need to get up-skilled in solar… the closest training course I can find is in the south of England.”
The mismatch between academic offerings and industry requirements creates challenges in producing a workforce that is ready to contribute effectively from day one. Stakeholders highlighted that training provision is reactive rather than proactive and does not anticipate the industry’s needs to meet the 2030 installed capacity ambitions.
“The qualifications available in Scotland are very generic… we need a much more work-ready solution so that when people come out of training, they have a much better insight into the specifics.”
“Most training providers at the moment are looking to provide training for current demand. And there’s no foresight as to what that’s going to look like in the next two, three years.”
A few stakeholders (3/21) indicated that skills provision for solar sector, and especially large-scale commercial rooftop and ground mounted solar, is limited in Scotland. This opinion is supported by the desk based research findings that showed that most solar-targeted training provision is specialised on domestic rooftop installations. There is a clear deficit in targeted training for the more complex and technically demanding aspects of large solar projects.
“Solar is lagging behind – all on awareness level, not competence-based… solar farms are less catered for.”
“There is very limited experience on these types of projects [large commercial and ground-mounted projects]”.
Barriers to increased training provision
A recurring theme that was highlighted by 15 of 21 stakeholders as a critical issue is the lack of targeted funding for training provision, which has become a significant barrier to expanding and adapting training programmes.
“Funding is the main issue… the absolute allocation to individual Modern Apprenticeships has not increased for 10 years.”
“Colleges are struggling to provide [relevant training provision] without external support.”
The financial constraints are compounded by the high costs of the necessary infrastructure and materials, leaving institutions to rely on limited general budgets.
“These are very expensive courses to cover in comparison with other courses.”
“My understanding is that there’s only one college right now that has the equipment to deliver high-voltage training.”
Stakeholders indicated the need for ring-fenced funding to support the development and delivery of courses that are specific to solar and onshore wind sectors. This has become particularly important after the termination of the National Transition Training Fund in 2022. One stakeholder further indicated the need for ringfenced funding for safety certifications to ensure that the skilled workforce is certified to work in solar and onshore wind environments.
“We have nothing… all of that ring-fenced funding is now gone.”
“The funding available is often for higher-level qualifications, but it doesn’t apply to safety tickets or other certifications, which can be a barrier.”
Stakeholder commentary on policy
Stakeholders (10 of the 21 consulted) highlighted that policy has a central role in market certainty and, therefore, future skills needs planning and training provision. Uncertainty, particularly concerning the future pipeline of projects, complicates long-term workforce planning. Companies are hesitant to invest in long-term workforce development initiatives without clearly understanding future project demand. At the conclusion of this study, the upcoming Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan had not been published. Stakeholders highlighted that industry has interpreted this as a signal of market uncertainty, which by extension complicates their future workforce planning.
“We need confidence that there’s a long-term pipeline of projects… that gives us the green light to look at investment and ramping up the workforce.”
“If you’re recruiting an apprentice, you’re planning three or four years out… that’s challenging to do without certainty.”
Stakeholders also indicate that the skills governance and policy for solar and onshore wind currently lack certainty and strategic direction. This is in contrast to offshore wind skills governance, which was seen as substantially more mature, despite the lower levels of sector maturity compared to onshore wind. In addition, it was highlighted that the ongoing post-school education reform complicates future workforce development planning. In this context it is challenging for education providers to allocate resources to critical skills areas and delays the alignment of curricula with emerging industry needs, affecting the preparedness of trainees.
“The problem within my space at the moment is all our policy is up in the air… we’re waiting for (…) the funding review.”
“Without a clear directive from the government, the training provision will continue to be reactive rather than strategic.”
Overall, stakeholders called for a more strategic, top-level intervention from a policy perspective that would involve industry, training providers, and funding bodies.
Opportunities for enhancement
Modular and flexible training programs
The need for modular, flexible training programs that can quickly upskill individuals with relevant but incomplete experience is a recurring theme that was highlighted as the opportunity for training enhancement (14 of 21 stakeholders). These programs should be designed to provide targeted, condensed training that aligns with industry needs, allowing workers to become productive more quickly.
“They have the base skills and they just need a little top-up to actually enable them to move into the sector. We need to condense [training provision] into something intense, something that people can do in short courses.”
“If we [the industry] could fund modular type activities… that would really suit us.”
“We could take a more modular approach… train you to do [a certain task] and then upskill you as needed, but in the meantime, you’re productive much more quickly.”
The main idea behind modular training provision is to identify areas where a worker requires additional support while using their existing skills within the workforce. Two stakeholders described this process as skills “top-up”, as opposed to full retraining of already skilled workers that would remove them from the workforce for an extended period. This could be integrated into the existing training provision, with apprenticeships highlighted as one of the most important mechanisms for the delivery of a skilled workforce to the solar and onshore wind sectors.
“The perfect mix is where you have [modular training within] degree apprenticeships. They’re learning the fundamentals while getting operational experience.”
In addition, one stakeholder indicated that modular training provision could also support increased levels of training of trainers, expanding the skillset that can be passed on through existing training provision mechanisms. This highlights that the modular training provision could benefit different stakeholder groups and be synergistic for the development of skilled workforce.
Strategic collaboration between stakeholders
Effective workforce development in the renewable energy sector requires a coordinated effort between industry, government, educational institutions, and training providers. Stakeholders (18 of 21) consistently highlighted the need for improved communication and partnership that can lead to more effective training and recruitment efforts. This collaboration should focus on not only bringing together stakeholders from solar and onshore wind but also other relevant sectors.
“Employers need to work with training providers… to put together a training piece that’s going to assist [workforce that is looking to transfer] based on topping up their skills.”
“We just need to get that communication from industry… they [training providers] will absolutely ramp up and align their courses with it and we [a networking organisation] can support them to flex what they offer as well.”
“Government, industry, and training providers should be working more closely to develop a much more modular approach to the delivery of training.”
One stakeholder highlighted that, whilst the relevant people are “often in the same room…” they are “…speaking different languages”. This comment relates to the fact that policymakers, industry, education providers, and other stakeholders often tend to have different and occasionally conflicting priorities. As such, the solar and onshore wind sectors could benefit from more strategic and mediated conversations and relationship-building activities to ensure synergy between stakeholders.
Importance of practical training and on-the-job experience
There is a strong emphasis on the need for practical, hands-on experience in training programs. Many stakeholders (12 of 21) believe that current training programs are too theoretical and do not provide the real-world skills needed for success in the solar and onshore wind sectors.
“The practical element… is fairly limited, so we’re going to do more of that in-house now to meet the needs.”
“We’re still going to need months, if not years, of training them on our products… they have good general electrical engineering knowledge, but not the specifics.”
Two stakeholders indicated that, currently, qualifications alone do not guarantee competency to work in the sector.
“Just because someone is a qualified electrician, it doesn’t make them competent.”
Stakeholders also noted that the academic environment cannot prepare the future workforce for all required job roles in the industry, especially in mid-management. This relates to the previous insights associated with the ageing workforce; as the sector relies heavily on existing career professionals to upskill newcomers, mentorship and guidance must remain available to those entering the sector. This also applies to skilled workers transferring from other sectors to solar and onshore wind.
“The academic environment… doesn’t equip them as project managers. A lot of it realistically… where you get the real training is on the job.”
“We’ve been much more focused on… are they the right person culturally to fit the organisation… then we can train them from an experience point of view.”
Lessons learnt
The findings of our study suggest a series of key themes that could be used for future consideration in developing training provision for the onshore wind and solar sectors.
Although our analysis of current solar and wind sector courses found a theme of ‘practical skills and hands-on experience’ in the descriptions, industry stakeholders did not feel that this is sufficiently represented in the training available. Training providers need to ensure that the course content is relevant to industry needs, in particular regarding hands-on training and close collaboration with industry partners, including through apprenticeships. Access to internationally recognised, accredited training, such as GWO Health & Safety, should be prioritised to ensure that workers receive industry-standard qualifications.
Currently, most solar and wind sector courses are at postgraduate level of specialism. A shift towards a more flexible, modular approach to upskilling and reskilling the workforce is needed. This would allow individuals to tailor their training to specific needs rather than undergoing full retraining programmes. This has the potential to enable faster movement of individuals from training into the workforce which would benefit the industry.
Improved collaboration and communication between stakeholders is another critical lesson. The important role of government in creating clear market signals and strategic skills governance has been highlighted. Establishing more formal partnerships and regular cross-industry and education forums could help foster greater coordination and break down the siloed approach to workforce development. It would also benefit the SMEs in the solar and onshore wind sectors that cannot carry out substantial skills development programmes on their own.
To support the above points, there is a need to enhance and modernise existing funding mechanisms. This includes re-establishing targeted funding streams, encouraging industry investment in training, and exploring new funding models to support specialised programmes such as modular training options. In particular, there needs to be significant investment in practical infrastructure to support hands-on training.
This research highlights the centrality of allied STEM and other roles shared by both onshore wind and solar skills development. A siloed approach to STEM workforce planning is a threat as several industries are drawing from the same talent pool, resulting in competition with their vital supply chains. A more integrated perspective would consider the requirement for a STEM workforce across all infrastructure projects of national importance and overall installed capacity ambitions. A comprehensive map that details the scale, timelines, and workforce demands of major infrastructure projects has the potential to inform the total scale of skilled workforce needs and alleviate some concerns regarding the temporary nature of some job roles at times of peak demand. Such a map could be used as a signal of the availability of lifelong careers in these diverse sectors. Understanding the flow of skilled workforce amongst solar and onshore wind sectors and between other sectors will be vital to maximising skills and workforce potential.
Another suggestion for policy and the broader stakeholder ecosystem is the need to develop robust and compelling career pathways through comprehensive career mapping. Research is needed to outline career progression within the solar and onshore wind, as well as the broader renewable energy sector, and compare it with other major industries to create a comprehensive transferability framework. Identifying key roles, required skills, and potential career progression routes can provide clarity for professionals entering or transitioning within the sector, making it more attractive and accessible. This approach will be essential for addressing both recruitment and retention challenges.
Conclusions
In summary, current training provision has the potential to deliver the skilled workforce required for the solar and onshore wind sectors if it is strategically supported through policy certainty, targeted funding and changes in modes of training delivery. The need for intervention is urgent, as research indicates a peak in workforce demand as early as 2027 (Morrison, et al., 2024).
We have conceptualised the sectoral overlap of skills for the onshore wind and solar sectors (Figure 2). This demonstrates that although critical, specialised skills training provision is needed for solar and onshore wind separately, the majority of roles are shared by the sectors requiring allied STEM and other skills. We found that there are gaps for both sectors in specialised, role-specific training aligning to industry needs. However, siloed approaches for skills governance in solar and onshore wind could be counterproductive as the sectors compete for many of the same skillsets.
Allied STEM skills training provision in Scotland is extensive, with a significant number of students enrolling in relevant and transferable courses each year. These programmes equip trainees with foundational skills that can be applied across various sectors, including renewable energy. However, there is a lack of clarity regarding student destinations after completing these courses, making it difficult to track how many trainees are entering the solar and onshore wind sectors in Scotland. Stakeholder engagement highlighted that the onshore wind and solar sectors need to increase their job attractiveness in a highly competitive skills marketplace, including through increased visibility and clear career pathways.
Throughout this report, we have demonstrated the value of an integrated perspective, with the above conclusions being applicable to both sectors. However, our findings also suggest conclusions for the specific sectors, as set out below.
Sector specific conclusions: Onshore wind
Training provision for the onshore wind industry is available in Scotland but needs better alignment with the sector’s specific operational demands, especially with a stronger emphasis on practical, hands-on skills like wind turbine maintenance and site management. While there are few significant barriers preventing individuals from entering the industry, poor sector visibility is an issue. Industry leaders are keen to see training programmes that allow workers to quickly transition into the workforce, building on their existing knowledge while providing opportunities for continued upskilling. Modular training and “topping up” skills are considered vital to ensuring that workers can effectively meet the evolving needs of onshore wind projects and contribute to the industry’s success.
Sector specific conclusions: Solar
The solar industry in Scotland faces several challenges related to training and skills development. Currently, training provision is limited to domestic rooftop installations, which already require an electrical qualification. A major concern is Scotland’s lack of expertise in ground-mounted solar, which poses a potential threat to the sector’s development. There are no specialist courses available or training providers equipped to deliver the necessary skills. Skills governance for the solar sector is also lagging behind that of other renewable sectors, which further hinders the industry’s growth.
Like the onshore wind sector, the solar sector would greatly benefit from increased modular training provision to upskill workers quickly. However, training providers require a clear signal from the industry indicating a need for such courses. Addressing these gaps is essential for ensuring that the solar industry has a skilled workforce capable of supporting its growth.
Next steps
This study has identified the key barriers, opportunities and needs for intervention to increase training provision for solar and onshore wind sectors in Scotland. The next critical step is to develop a detailed, fast-paced action plan that engages all key stakeholders, including policymakers, industry representatives, training providers and potential talent pool representatives. Given the urgency of workforce demands and a projected peak of skills need as early as 2027, this action plan must establish clear and fast-paced timelines for intervention, with an aim to launch initiatives before the start of the next academic year (2025/2026). Coordinating this effort will be crucial to ensuring that Scotland can support the sectors’ rapid growth and deliver its renewable energy commitments.
Creamer, D., Beinarovica, J., Weir, I., Stodart, J., Romero, I. (2024) ‘Workforce and skills requirements in Scotland’s solar industry.’ Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/projects/workforce-and-skills-requirements-in-scotlands-solar-industry/ (Accessed: 25/09/2024).
Engineering and Construction Industry Training Board
ITPEnergised
Scotland’s Electrical Trade Association (SELECT)
Career Transition Partnership
EVO Energy
Dumfries and Galloway College
Ayrshire College
NMIS/University of Strathclyde
NESCol/Energy Transition Skills Hub
NESCol/National Energy Skills Accelerator
Hitachi Energy
SSE Renewables
Scottish Power Renewables
Highland Council
Energy Skills Partnership (ESP)
Institution
Level
Course name
Ayrshire College
L5 (school)
Skills for Work Introduction to Renewable Energy
Ayrshire College
L5 (pre-apprenticeship)
Electrical Engineering and Renewables
Ayrshire College
SCQF L6
Wind Turbine Systems
Borders College
No formal qualification
Introduction to Renewables Technology SPF
Dumfries & Galloway
NC (SCQF L6)
Natural Power Wind Turbine Technician Trainee
Dumfries & Galloway
NQ (SCQF L4)
Introduction to Engineering and Renewable Energy
Dumfries & Galloway
GWO
Basic Technical Training (BTT)
Dumfries & Galloway
SCQF L5
Renewable Energy Practical Skills
Edinburgh
BEng
Energy and Environmental Engineering
Edinburgh Napier University
BEng
Energy & Environmental Engineering
Fife
GWO
Basic Technician Training
Forth Valley
BPEC (NOS Mapped)
Solar Photovoltaic Systems
Glasgow Caledonian University
BEng / MEng
Electrical Power Engineering
Glasgow Clyde
BPEC
Electrical Energy (Battery) Storage Systems (EESS)
Glasgow Clyde
BPEC
Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems
Heriot Watt
MSc
Renewable and Sustainable Energy Transition
Heriot Watt
MSc
Renewable Energy Engineering
Inverness (UHI)
BEng (Hons)
Energy Engineering
Inverness (UHI)
MBA
Renewable Energy
Moray (UHI)
MBA
Renewable Energy
Moray (UHI)
BEng (Hons)
Energy Engineering
NESCoL
SCQF 4/5
Automation & Renewables
NESCoL
NC (SCQF L5)
Engineering Systems: Renewables
NESCoL
NC (SCQF L5)
Engineering Systems: Renewables
NESCoL
Skills for Work (SCQF Level 5)
Engineering: Sustainability & Renewables
NESCoL
ECITB (SCQF Level 6)
Engineering: Wind Turbine Technician (WT) Pathway
NESCoL
SCQF Level 5
Girls in Energy
NESCoL
SCQF Level 5
Performing Engineering Operations: Renewables
NESCoL
Online certificate
Principles of Sustainable Energy Management
North West & Hebrides (UHI)
BEng (Hons)
Energy Engineering
North West & Hebrides (UHI)
PDA
Renewable Energy Systems
North West & Hebrides (UHI)
MSc
Sustainable Energy Solutions
North West & Hebrides (UHI)
CPD (SCQF L9)
Sustainable Resource Management
North West & Hebrides (UHI)
MBA
Renewable Energy
Perth (UHI)
BEng (Hons)
Energy Engineering
Perth (UHI)
MBA
Renewable Energy
Robert Gordon University
BEng / MEng
Renewable Energy Engineering
SLC
BPEC
Solar PV
University of Aberdeen
MEng
Electrical and Electronic Engineering with Renewable Energy
University of Aberdeen
MEng
Energy Transition Systems and Technologies
University of Aberdeen
MSc
Renewable Energy Engineering
University of Edinburgh
MSc
Advanced Power Engineering
University of Edinburgh
MSc
Electrical Power Engineering
University of Edinburgh
MSc
Sustainable Energy Systems
University of Glasgow
MSc
Sustainable Energy
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Offshore Wind Energy
University of Strathclyde
MEng
Electrical Energy Systems
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Advanced Electrical Power & Energy Systems
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Advanced Mechanical Engineering with Energy Systems
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Electrical Power and Energy Systems
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Energy Systems Innovation
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Renewable Energy & Decarbonisation Technologies
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Sustainable Engineering: Offshore Renewable Energy
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Sustainable Engineering: Renewable Energy Systems & the Environment
University of Strathclyde
MSc
Wind Energy Systems
University of the West of Scotland
MSc
Sustainable Technology and Energy
West Lothian
SCQF Level 5
Electrical Sustainability Through Renewable Technology
Table 1. Training provision relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors available through Scottish colleges and universities in the academic year 2024/2025.
Organisation
Course name
Skills Training Group
Solar PV Installation Course With Battery Storage
BPEC
BPEC Solar Photovoltaic Systems NOS Mapped
TotalSkills
Level 3 Solar PV & Battery Storage Systems EESS – 4 Day course
Energy Technical Academy Group
Solar PV Installer Training (Solar PV & Battery Storage)
IRT Scotland
Roof Safety for Solar Installers
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Advanced Rescue
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Wind Basic Technical Straining
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Enhanced First Aid
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Sea Survival Training
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO First Aid Training
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Manual Handling
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Working at height
Clyde Training Solutions
GWO Basic Safety Training (BST) Package – Offshore
dwpa
Wind Turbine Technology Essentials
dwpa
Advanced Platform Theory
dwpa
Wind Turbine Maintenance
dwpa
Wind Turbine Troubleshooting
dwpa
Maintenance Quality Inspection (MQI)
dwpa
Asset Integrity Inspection (AII)
dwpa
Turbine Operation & Maintenance
dwpa
Gearbox Maintenance & Inspection (GMI)
dwpa
Remote Operations Awareness
dwpa
Operation & Maintenance Awareness
Aurora Energy
GWO Working at Height
Aurora Energy
GWO Manual Handling
Aurora Energy
GWO First Aid
Aurora Energy
GWO Fire Awareness
Aurora Energy
IRATA Rope Access
Aurora Energy
Mechanical Joint Integrity (MJI)
Aurora Energy
Confined Space Entry
Aurora Energy
Working at Height
Aurora Energy
CCNSG Safety Passport
Aurora Energy
ECITB CCNSG LaTS (Leading a Team Safely)
Aset Training
ECITB MJI 10, 18, 19: Mechanical Joint Integrity
Aset Training
ECITB MJI 33: Torque and Tension Wind Turbine Bolted Connections
Aset Training
Flange Make Up and Bolting for Integrity: SCQF Level 6
Aset Training
GWO Basic Technical Training (BTT) Bolt Tightening Module
Aset Training
GWO Basic Technical Training (BTT) Combined
Aset Training
GWO Basic Technical Training (BTT) Electrical Module
Aset Training
GWO Basic Technical Training (BTT) Hydraulics Module
Aset Training
GWO Basic Technical Training (BTT) Mechanical Module
Aset Training
GWO Control of Hazardous Energies (COHE) Basic Safety Module
Aset Training
GWO Control of Hazardous Energies (COHE) Combined
Aset Training
GWO Control of Hazardous Energies (COHE) Combined Refresher
Aset Training
GWO Control of Hazardous Energies (COHE) Electrical Safety Module
Aset Training
GWO Control of Hazardous Energies (COHE) Pressure Fluid Safety Module
Aset Training
GWO Fire Awareness
Aset Training
GWO Fire Awareness Refresher
Aset Training
GWO Manual Handling
Aset Training
GWO Manual Handling Refresher
Aset Training
GWO Working at Heights
Aset Training
GWO Working at Heights Refresher
Aset Training
HV Switching and System Control (City & Guilds 0672)
Power Climber SD4 Service Lift User Training TICCCS
360 training
Power Climber RD3 Service Lift User Training TICCCS
360 training
Equipamientos Eolicos Service Lift User Training TICCCS
360 training
GWO Advanced Rescue Training
360 training
GWO Basic Safety Training
360 training
GWO Basic Technical Training
360 training
GWO Basic Technical Training – Electrical
360 training
GWO Basic Technical Training – Hydraulic
360 training
GWO Basic Technical Training – Mechanical
360 training
GWO Fire Awareness
360 training
GWO Manual Handling
360 training
GWO Working at Height
GWT
GWO Five Module Package
Steam Marine Training
GWO Five Module Package
Synergie Training
Wind Turbine Safety Rules+A1:B110 (WTSR)
Table 2. Training provision relevant to solar and onshore wind sectors available through private providers.
NOS
Description
Sector relevance
EUSWT01*
Pre-Assemble Wind Turbine Components
Onshore wind
EUSWT03
Remove plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
EUSWT04
Maintain plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
EUSWT05
Inspect plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
EUSWT06
Configure plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
EUSWT07
Diagnose faults on plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
EUSWT08
Develop yourself in the work role
Onshore wind
EUSWT09
Work with other people
Onshore wind
EUSWT10
Minimise risks to life, property and the environment in electricity power utilities
Onshore wind
EUSWT11*
Install and maintain hydraulic systems on wind turbines
Onshore wind
EUSWT12
Replace plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities environment
Onshore wind
SEMETS347
Producing technical information for engineering activities
Onshore wind
SEMENG305
Obtain resources for engineering activities
Onshore wind
SEMMAN2302
Using and interpreting engineering data and documentation
Onshore wind
SEMMAN2303
Working efficiently and effectively in engineering
Onshore wind
INSML002
Develop your knowledge, skills and competence to meet the requirements of your work
Onshore wind
INSML024
Build teams and allocate work to team members
Onshore wind
INSML025
Manage and quality assure work in your team
Onshore wind
INSML031
Develop and sustain working relationships with colleagues and stakeholders
Onshore wind
EUSEPUS014
Fault location and diagnosis on plant and apparatus in the electricity power utilities
Onshore wind
EUSEPUS044
Location and identification of underground utility services in the electricity power utilities
Onshore wind
INSEA5
Promote low and zero carbon energy technologies
Onshore wind & solar PV
PROST01*
Prepare the structure for photovoltaic/solar thermal panel installation – existing structure
Solar PV
PROST02*
Fix solar thermal/photovoltaic panels onto a roof structure
Solar PV
PROST03*
Fix solar thermal/photovoltaic panels into a roof structure
Solar PV
PROST04*
Fix solar thermal/photovoltaic panels onto a non-roof structure
Solar PV
PROST05*
Solar thermal/photovoltaic panels post installation activities
Solar PV
PROST06*
Identify solar thermal/photovoltaic installation requirements
Solar PV
PROST07*
Produce specifications for solar thermal/photovoltaic installations
Solar PV
BSESPV02*
Install and connect Solar PV and EESS systems
Solar PV
BSESPV03*
Inspect and test Solar PV and EESS Systems
Solar PV
BSESPV04*
Commission Solar PV and EESS systems
Solar PV
BSESPV05*
Identify and rectify faults in Solar PV and EESS systems
Solar PV
BSESPV06*
Maintain Solar PV and EESS systems
Solar PV
BSESPV07*
Develop and agree project designs for Solar PV
Solar PV
BSESPV08
Develop, test and agree project designs for EESS
Solar PV
BSESPV01*
Install assemblies and enclosures for Solar PV and EESS systems
Solar PV
Table 3: National Occupational Standards (NOS) that are relevant to onshore wind and solar PV.
* denotes NOS that are specific to onshore wind and/or solar PV. All others are more general, but still of relevance.
Apprenticeship Type
Framework
Foundation
Civil Engineering
Engineering
IT: Hardware and System Support
IT: Software Development
Scientific Technologies
Construction L4/5
Graduate
Civil Engineering
Civil Engineering: Higher Apprenticeship at SCQF Level 8
Construction and the Built Environment
Cyber Security
Data Science
Business Management: Project Management
Engineering: Design and Manufacture
Engineering: Instrumentation, Measurement and Control
IT: Software Development
IT: Management for Business
Modern
Life Sciences and Related Science Industries
Life Sciences and Related Science Industries Technical
Maritime Occupations
Power Distribution
Industrial Applications
Process Manufacturing
Rural Skills: Environmental Conservation
Construction Technical Apprenticeship: Built Environment,
Construction Technical Apprenticeship: Contracting Operations
Construction: Building
Construction: Civil Engineering
Construction: Specialist
Construction: Technical
Data Analytics: Technical
Digital Technology
Electrical Installation
Engineering: Asset Lifecycle and Maintenance
Engineering: Manufacturing and Fabrication
Engineering: Technical Support
Engineering Construction
Engineering and Digital Manufacturing Technical Apprenticeship
Management
Project Management
Digital Technology Technical Apprenticeship
Sustainable Resource Management
Supply Chain Management
Table . List of Apprenticeship Frameworks identified as relevant for the broader STEM skills provision.
University courses
Transferability
Full person equivalents (2021/2022)
Aeronautical and aerospace engineering
980
Agricultural sciences
170
Agriculture
1445
Artificial intelligence
1130
Biology (non-specific)
1070
Biosciences (non-specific)
1820
Biotechnology
460
Building
3470
Chemical, process and energy engineering
2760
Civil engineering
3755
Earth sciences
1750
Ecology and environmental biology
1480
Electrical and electronic engineering
4095
Engineering (non-specific)
3170
Environmental and public health
1055
Environmental sciences
1630
Forestry and arboriculture
150
Geography (non-specific)
220
Information systems
1950
Information technology
2755
Landscape design
255
Maritime technology
40
Materials science
10
Materials technology
10
Mechanical engineering
4720
Microbiology and cell science
1325
Naval architecture
315
Others in engineering
225
Physical and geographical sciences
1865
Physical sciences (non-specific)
150
Planning (urban, rural and regional)
815
Plant sciences
110
Production and manufacturing engineering
1060
Rural estate management
245
Sciences (non-specific)
815
Software engineering
3335
Zoology
1050
Others
1925
Table 5. Scottish university courses and their relative transferability to solar and onshore wind sector. This list is derived from SFC records where courses are ranked in red, amber, and green for their relative transferability to onshore wind and solar sector skills needs. The RAG rating was assigned through qualitative reasoning of the consultants following in-depth thematic analysis of the course content as discussed in Section 6.1.2. The full person equivalent data was provided by the Scottish Funding Council.
How to cite this publication: Beinaroviča, J., Creamer, D., Morrison, M., Brown, J., Knox, D. (2025) Training provision in Scotland’s onshore wind and solar industries, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5399
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Erratum: Please note that this report was updated on 16 May 2025 to refer in three instances to Climate Ready HES: Adaptation Plan (2021) instead of Historic Environment Scotland Climate Action Plan (2020). Row 74 in the accompanying database has also been updated.
Executive summary
Introduction
Public bodies in Scotland are key players at the forefront of responding to climate change impacts in Scotland, given their roles as health, education, housing and social care providers, and emergency and risk management agencies. This study reviews the state of play of public body climate adaptation planning in Scotland. The report highlights approaches for delivering climate adaptation, common themes, similarities and differences between public bodies. It summarises available information on costs and benefits, to help inform a collective understanding among stakeholders and highlight knowledge gaps.
Summary of key findings
Overview of public body adaptation plans
The adaptation planning landscape is complex. In many public bodies, there is no single, dedicated climate adaptation plan; more often, adaptation is integrated into one or more documents. Public body adaptation plans vary widely in their scope, content and levels of maturity. Because of this variability it is difficult to evaluate progress on a like-for-like basis.
Affirming previous findings by the Sustainable Scotland Network (Sustainable Scotland Network, 2023), this study found multiple examples of confusion between climate change adaptation (i.e. responding to the impacts of climate change) and climate change mitigation (i.e. reducing greenhouse gas emissions). Public Bodies Climate Change Duties Reports (PBCCDRs) also frequently signposted to documents such as flood risk assessments that they are required to produce but do not constitute dedicated climate adaptation plans. Therefore, public bodies’ self-reported levels of adaptation planning is not always accurate.
Local authorities are not explicitly required by law to produce adaptation plans. We found that fewer than one-third of local authorities have a dedicated adaptation plan. The remainder have undertaken at least some planning relevant to climate adaptation, in line with their statutory duties on adaptation. Adaptation plans are generally area-wide in scope. These plans frequently made use of guidance, tools and resources made available through the Adaptation Scotland programme. There are several regional plans that have been produced via consortia, which are supported by additional evidence and are comparatively more mature.
As of October 2024, all 22 NHS Boards (including the 14 regional NHS Boards and 8 special NHS boards) have produced a climate change risk assessment (CCRA) and 18 have produced an adaptation plan. There is a requirement for NHS Boards to produce these in a standard Excel-based format, which prompts them to list actions against each risk. These plans generally focused on the organisation’s own operations, assets and supply chain.
The adaptation plans for Historic Environment Scotland, Scottish Water and Transport Scotland were sector-specific and took different approaches to adaptation planning overall. We observed some key differences between local authorities, NHS boards and the other organisations we reviewed, which likely reflect the different remits, the sectors and geographic areas they cover. Key differences include: the scope of their adaptation planning, the themes and content of their adaptation actions, whether they focused solely on the organisation or on the wider area, and whether they were underpinned by a CCRA.
Information on costs and benefits in adaptation plans
We found that the adaptation plans we reviewed contained minimal quantitative information on either costs or benefits. The latter are considered qualitatively in varying levels of detail.
For local authorities, the majority of quantitative information that is available comes from two regional economic impacts reports on climate risks produced by Paul Watkiss Associates. East Dunbartonshire Council was the only example we found of a local authority that had attempted to downscale this information to a local level. Otherwise, there was minimal cost information aside from a handful of local authorities who cited high-level costs, usually in relation to flood infrastructure or associated damage.
NHS boards are prompted to indicate the cost of adaptation measures in relation to each risk they identify. However, not all of them utilised this part of the form; some fields were left blank and it was not clear why. Where costs were indicated, it was not always clear what they referred to.
Of the other organisations reviewed, only Scottish Water cited costs in its adaptation plan, referring to the level of investment required in future years.
It is likely that more quantitative information on costs and benefits is held by public bodies but not necessarily incorporated into their adaptation plans.
Recommendations
Recommendations for policy are set out below. Further details are in Section 8.2
Engage with public bodies and undertake further research to understand the barriers they face to identify the specifics of the support they need for adaptation planning. Suggested topics for further study are provided in Section 8.2.
Require local authorities to produce climate change risk assessments that consider topics additional to flooding. Use these to develop climate change adaptation plans, in line with guidance from the Adaptation Scotland programme.
Provide public bodies with advice on how the regional economic impact assessments (see Section 6.2.2) and other national evidence relating to costs and benefits can be downscaled to support the case for local adaptation planning and investment.
Align the Sustainable Scotland Network’s (SSN) system for rating the maturity of adaptation planning with the Adaptation Capability Framework. This would likely require organisations to assess and self-report their scores, which links to Recommendation 2. See Section 7.1 for more information.
Explore ways to support public bodies with limited resources to produce adaptation plans or CCRAs. This could involve signposting to information provided by the Adaptation Scotland programme on easy wins, low-regret actions, no- or low-cost actions and partnership arrangements to share skills, knowledge and budgets.
Clarify what information on adaptation should be reported within Public Bodies Climate Change Duties Reports and what information is unnecessary in terms of key performance indicators. See Section 7.4 for more information.
In future, where mitigation programmes are undertaken or funded by the Scottish Government and public bodies would be involved in their delivery, signpost links between mitigation and adaptation.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
Adaptation
In human systems: The process of adjustment to actual or expected climate and its effects, to moderate harm or exploit beneficial opportunities.
In natural systems: The process of adjustment to actual climate and its effects; human intervention may facilitate adjustment to expected climate and its effects. (IPCC)
Mitigation
A human intervention to reduce emissions or enhance the sinks of greenhouse gases (IPCC).
CCC
Climate Change Committee
CCRA
Climate Change Risk Assessment
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
GCoM
Global Covenant of Mayors
GCR
Glasgow City Region
LA
Local Authority
LCLIP
Local Climate Impacts Profile
NHS
National Health Service
PBCCDR
Public Bodies Climate Change Duties Report
PSCAN
Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network
SECAP
Sustainable Energy and Climate Action Plan
SDaC
Sustainable Design and Construction Guide
SNAP
Scottish National Adaptation Plan
Sniffer
Scotland and Northern Ireland Foundation for Environmental Research
SSN
Sustainable Scotland Network
Introduction
Context
Public bodies are at the forefront of responding to climate change, given their roles as health, education, housing and social care providers, emergency and risk management agencies, and more. Under the Climate Change (Duties of Public Bodies: Reporting Requirements) (Scotland) Order 2015, public bodies in Scotland are required to produce annual reports on their compliance with their statutory climate change duties, covering mitigation, adaptation and sustainability. These are known as Public Bodies Climate Change Duties Reports (PBCCDRs).
Although public bodies are required to report how they are contributing to help deliver the national adaptation plan and whether they have their own climate adaptation plans, some organisations do not have them; it is not a statutory requirement. The plans that do exist demonstrate varying levels of maturity and detail.
The Scottish Government has identified that a particular gap exists regarding costs and benefits of adaptation measures. This presents a barrier to action in several ways, e.g. making it difficult to:
Determine the required levels of resilience
Identify the best use of public sector resources and which projects to prioritise
Understand who will be affected and how, as well as who bears the cost, which is important in the context of a just transition
Engage with stakeholders and generate buy-in
Develop business cases and obtain funding
This research study reviews the current ‘state of play’ of adaptation planning in Scotland, highlighting common themes, similarities, and differences among public bodies. It summarises available information on costs and benefits, to help inform a collective understanding among stakeholders and highlight knowledge gaps.
Climate change terminology
Adaptation vs. mitigation
This study focuses on climate change adaptation plans. Adaptation in this context refers to actions that are taken to manage and respond to the effects of climate change. This is distinct from climate change mitigation, which refers to actions that are intended to reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and thereby limit how much climate change occurs in the future.
In some cases, adaptation actions help to mitigate emissions, and vice-versa. For example, planting trees can help to provide cooling and shade in a warming climate (adaptation) while also removing carbon dioxide from the atmosphere (mitigation). In other cases, actions may contradict or subvert each other.
This review found several examples of climate change plans that confused adaptation and mitigation (for more information, see Sections 5.5 and 5.6). It also found examples where the linkages were either ignored or not fully acknowledged. There is a particular risk of confusion because climate change adaptation actions may be described as ‘mitigating climate risks’ in the standard language of risk management. This is distinct to climate mitigation actions that mitigate greenhouse gas emissions.
Risks: The interaction between hazard, vulnerability and exposure
The IPCC defines risk as, ‘The potential for adverse consequences for human or ecological systems, recognising the diversity of values and objectives associated with such systems […] In the context of climate change impacts, risks result from dynamic interactions between climate-related hazards with the exposure and vulnerability of the affected human or ecological system to the hazards.’ (IPCC, 2019)
Climate hazards include phenomena like heatwaves and floods, exposure refers to the presence of people, assets or services in places that could be affected by hazards and vulnerability is the predisposition to be adversely affected.
Methodology
Scope of the study
This study primarily focused on the climate change adaptation plans or strategies produced by Local Authorities and NHS Boards. This included consortium studies by three regional adaptation partnerships: Climate Ready Clyde, Climate Ready South East Scotland (SES) and Highland Adapts. At the request of the Scottish Government, the study was expanded to include Historic Environment Scotland, Scottish Water and Transport Scotland.
The study prioritised documents using a tiered approach:
Tier 1: Climate change plans or strategies that focus on adaptation and include ‘adaptation’ in the title.
Tier 2: Other climate change strategies or action plans with adaptation-related content (even if the primary focus is on mitigation)
Tier 3: Supporting documents and other evidence, such as climate change risk assessments (CCRAs), which contain information relevant to adaptation planning within Tier 1 and 2 documents.
Unless otherwise specified, the study did not examine other plans, strategies and documents where climate change was not the primary topic. Examples would include Local Development Plans, Flood Risk Assessments and Corporate Strategies.
Adaptation is often incorporated into multiple documents, to varying levels of detail. For simplicity, this report refers to all Tier 1 and Tier 2 documents as ‘adaptation plans’; however, readers should be mindful that the term is being used in a broad sense. Note, this tier system has been developed solely for the purpose of this study, to differentiate between various types of documents that were reviewed.
Research approach
This study comprised a desk review of climate adaptation plans and related documents as described in the previous section. The review was carried out from July to December 2024.
The initial task was to create a data collection template, ensuring consistent information recording. PBCCDRs for relevant public bodies were identified through the SSN website. Documents that were not publicly available were requested from the relevant public bodies.
Each document was then reviewed and evidence collated within the data template. The templates were collated into summary sheets to enable thematic analysis. An overview of these data can be found in the accompanying spreadsheet.
Limitations of the approach
This project is based on a desk review only. The results have not been informed by additional stakeholder consultation.
As stated previously, the scope of this review focused on dedicated climate adaptation plans/strategies. Climate adaptation measures that are integrated into other documents, such as Local Development Plans, may not be captured if they are not included in the organisation’s main climate change plan(s).
Public bodies may hold additional information or evidence relevant to climate adaptation, including quantified costs and benefits, that was not captured by this review. For example, the costs of additional flood protection infrastructure may have been assessed as part of individual business cases.
If an organisation has carried out further work on climate adaptation since its 2023/24 PBCCDR was published, it may not be included in this review. The same applies to any ongoing work or documents that are not yet finalised.
It is possible, although unlikely, that this review omitted some Tier 1 and 2 documents that are available online. This might be the case if they are not included in PBCCDRs, cross-referenced in other documents, or clearly signposted on the relevant public body’s website.
Overview of public body adaptation plans
This section summarises the overall landscape in regard to climate adaptation planning, for the Scottish public bodies that were reviewed.
How many public bodies have climate adaptation plans?
As noted within Section 4.1, adaptation planning is often incorporated into a wide variety of plans, strategies and other documents. As a result, simple metrics – such as the number of adaptation plans or how many actions they contain – are difficult to calculate. They also do not convey the overall level of maturity of public bodies’ climate adaptation planning.
To highlight the overall complexity of the landscape, consider the following example. West Dunbartonshire Council has produced a Climate Change Strategy that addresses both adaptation and mitigation but primarily focuses on the latter (West Dunbartonshire Council, 2021). The Strategy is supported by a Climate Change Action Plan. Both documents are structured around nine themes, of which ‘Climate Impacts, Risk and Adaptation’ is one. The adaptation section contains three actions: (1) to deliver relevant actions set out in the Glasgow City Region (GCR) Climate Adaptation Strategy, (2) to undertake a local CCRA and (3) to use the Adaptation Capability Framework to identify areas for further improvement. The reference to Glasgow City Region acknowledges a separate piece of work, underpinned by a regional CCRA and economic impact assessment, that has been produced by Climate Ready Clyde (Climate Ready Clyde, 2021). This relationship is illustrated in Figure 1.
Figure 1. West Dunbartonshire’s adaptation planning landscape
Based on this review, among the 32 Local Authorities that were assessed:
Nearly all Local Authorities have either a Tier 1 and/or Tier 2 document, indicating that some level of climate adaptation planning has been carried out, either individually or as part of a regional consortium. Note that the level of maturity and detail varies widely, as will be discussed in various sections of this report.
Approximately 2/3rds of Local Authorities have access to a CCRA, either for their council area and/or as part of a regional consortium.
Fewer than 1/3rd of Local Authorities have a specific, dedicated climate adaptation plan (a Tier 1 document as defined in Section 4.1).
A small number of Local Authorities (up to 3) appear not to have undertaken any climate adaptation planning. It is acknowledged that adaptation might be addressed in wider documents and strategies which were excluded from this review.
Among the 14 regional NHS Boards and 8 special NHS boards:
All 22 have undertaken a CCRA using a standard template.
18 of them have produced adaptation plans by listing actions against risks within their CCRAs. These combined CCRA/action plans have been counted as Tier 1 documents. Of those, 3 have also produced separate climate change strategies and/or action plans (Tier 2 documents).
One NHS Board which does not have a Tier 1 adaptation plan has produced a separate climate change strategy (Tier 2) which discusses adaptation at a high level.
An additional challenge was understanding how the adaptation plans and related documents (such as wider climate change strategies) produced by each public body interrelate. The research found several instances of organisations that had produced a form of adaptation-related documentation that was not referenced in their PBCCDR. There were also examples where key documents, such as regional adaptation plans with supporting evidence bases, were mentioned in passing but not highlighted as being particularly significant within the wider context of the public body’s adaptation planning or governance approach. These issues could indicate a lack of internal awareness of what planning has been undertaken and/or confusion about what to include in the PBCCDR. On the latter point, it may be useful to provide organisations with further clarity (see recommendations in Section 8.3).
Authorship of climate adaptation plans and other documents
Based on this review, the Tier 1 adaptation plans for most of the NHS boards, Scottish Water, Transport Scotland and HES appear to have been undertaken in-house, i.e. there are no other authors listed within the documents that were reviewed. However, correspondence with NHS NSS has confirmed that some NHS Boards had funding for external consultancy support to produce their combined CCRA/adaptation plans.
For Local Authorities, there are fewer Tier 1 climate adaptation plans. With the exception of the 2012 adaptation strategy by Highland Council, all of these appear to have either been produced in collaboration with other regional stakeholders or some other form of external support. The majority of Local Authority Tier 2 documents appear to be produced in-house, but as in the case of NHS Boards, some of these are known to have had input from external consultancies. Local Authority Tier 3 documents were more likely to have consultancy firms listed as the main authors, often being commissioned by a consortium. Although the sample size is small, the difference in authorship between Tier 1 and Tier 2 documents is notable. It might suggest that Local Authorities have higher in-house skills and capacity to develop mitigation plans compared with adaptation plans. It could also signify a preference for partnership working on adaptation. The two are not mutually exclusive.
Varying levels of additional support were provided by the Adaptation Scotland. Adaptation Scotland is a programme funded by the Scottish Government, which provides advice and support to businesses, communities and public sector organisations seeking to become more resilient to the effects of climate change. In this advisory capacity, Adaptation Scotland offer tools and guidance for public bodies undertaking adaptation reporting (see Table 1 below).
Joint plans have been developed at the regional scale to promote collaborative climate adaptation action, sharing guidance and resources between public bodies. These include Climate Ready Clyde (CRC), Climate Ready South East Scotland (SES) and Highland Adapts. Appendix A contains a list of the organisations that are involved in each of these consortia.
It is understood that Perth and Kinross, Angus and Dundee Councils are also currently exploring opportunities to create a Tayside Regional Adaptation Partnership. A list of regional and place-based adaptation partnerships is available on the Adaptation Scotland programme’s website (Adaptation Scotland, n.d.).
What standards, guidance and tools do they use?
Public bodies use a range of guidance and tools to inform their adaptation planning.
For Local Authorities, 14 of the 32 councils’ PBCCDRs referred to the Adaptation Scotland programme, although not all have used these resources and the outputs show considerable variation.
NHS boards are required to carry out CCRAs in a standard format using templates provided by NHS National Services Scotland (NSS), and then use these to inform adaptation plans.
Historic Environment Scotland and Transport Scotland also state in their PBCCDRs that they have used Adaptation Scotland’s Capability Framework (Adaptation Scotland, 2019). Scottish Water is also understood to have utilised this framework although this is not specifically mentioned in the documents that were reviewed.
The table provides more information on the standards, guidance and tools that were referred to in the documents that our team reviewed.
Name
Description
Comments
Adaptation Scotland
Adaptation Scotland is a programme funded by the Scottish Government and currently delivered by sustainability charity Sniffer. Adaptation Scotland provides a range of support and resources, including:
Adaptation Capability Framework
Adaptation Benchmarking Tool
Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network
Connecting climate risk and strategic priorities: Guide to strategic climate change risk assessments
If following the Adaptation Capability Framework, public bodies are expected to undertake a self-assessment of their progress on adaptation planning using the Benchmarking Tool. For more information, see Appendix C.
17 of 32 Local Authorities specifically mentioned having engaged with one or more of these resources, as did Historic Environment Scotland and Transport Scotland. Out of 32 Local Authorities, 24 are members of the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network (PSCAN).
Based solely on a desk review, this study was unable to determine the extent to which NHS Boards have engaged with the Adaptation Scotland programme.
NHS NSS tools
NHS National Services Scotland (NSS) have collaborated with Health Facilities Scotland and JBA Consulting to provide a range of climate change resources for health boards in Scotland. These are intended to help assess climate change risks and develop adaptation plans, focusing on assets and physical infrastructure. Tools include:
CCRA and Planning Tool
NHS Scotland Climate Change Mapping Tool
NHS Scotland Sustainability Assessment Tool
Sustainable Design and Construction Guide (SDaC)
NHS Boards are required to carry out CCRAs using the template provided, and then use this to inform an adaptation plan.
Aether was provided with a summary of NHS adaptation plans (not publicly available). According to that review, 22 NHS boards have completed CCRAs and 18 have produced adaptation plans using NHS NSS tools.
Many of these also referred to the SDaC when discussing future planning for their buildings.
LCLIP
The Local Climate Impacts Profile (LCLIP) tool has been developed by the UK Climate Impacts Programme (UKCIP). The simple tool helps organisations assess their exposure and vulnerability to weather and climate. Note that UKCIP has been discontinued.
Three Local Authorities made reference to this tool in the documents we reviewed.
SECAP
Signatories to the Global Covenant of Mayors (GCoM) commit to producing a Sustainable Energy and Climate Action Plan (SECAP). This includes a climate risk and vulnerability assessment which are entered into in an Excel-based template, following GCoM’s methodology.
At least three Local Authorities (Angus, Fife and Dundee Councils) have produced a SECAP.
Table 1: Standards, guidance and tools referenced in public bodies’ climate adaptation plans
It is likely that other standards, guidance and tools (particularly ones from the UK Climate Impacts Programme) have been used even if they were not captured by this review. This review did not record any specific references to the internationally-recognised ISO 14090:2019 standard, although it underpins the NHS NSS requirements.
Even among public bodies that referenced the same guidance, the outputs still varied in scope, content, themes, structure, and level of detail. This could be due, in part, to the fact that the Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework allows flexibility for organisations that are at different stages of maturity in planning for climate change adaptation, and the Adaptation Scotland website offers a wide range of tools and resources which public bodies can choose to adopt. The guidance is non-prescriptive and is designed to be tailored to the organisation’s needs.
Tools were also used differently by different organisations. For example, not all NHS boards responded to all of the prompts in the CCRA template. These differences in overall scope and content are explored more in the next section.
Overall scope and content of adaptation plans
Local Authorities
Although some Local Authority’s adaptation plans focus on risks to their own organisation’s assets and services, most are area-wide and cross-sectoral in their approach. In other words, they address issues that the council can influence directly, as well as those that are relevant to the geographic area as a whole where the council may have indirect influence.
There is wide variation in the level of detail and complexity in adaptation planning for Local Authorities. For example, Edinburgh City Council produced an adaptation plan in 2016 (Edinburgh City Council, 2016) which has already been updated with a new one (Edinburgh City Council, 2024). Whereas, for some Local Authorities, adaptation planning includes only a brief reference to adaptation within a document that is primarily mitigation-focused.
Regarding the specific climate hazards that the plans consider, the most common are flooding and severe weather. Many of the plans also discuss the impacts of climate change on the natural environment, green spaces or green infrastructure, and biodiversity. Overheating is mentioned in some of the plans but overall is not a key focus. This may reflect the types of climate hazards that have historically been more common in Scotland (flooding) and those that are more visible (the natural environment and green spaces).
Unlike NHS board plans (see next section), not all of the Local Authority plans were supported by a CCRA. Those that had undertaken a CCRA tended to address climate hazards, but did not necessarily assess exposure or vulnerability (see definitions in Section 3.2).
There was not a clear link between the level of detail of the adaptation plans and whether or not the Local Authority had a CCRA as part of their evidence base. There were some that had access to regional CCRAs (e.g. via Climate Ready Clyde) but the extent to which those findings had been incorporated into locally-specific climate adaptation plans or strategies was unclear based on this desk review. In other cases, organisations may have undertaken a CCRA as a first step but not yet produced an adaptation plan. Those organisations might be expected to have more detailed adaptation plans but it is not yet possible to say.
In terms of other commonalities and themes, there did not appear to be a clear correlation between the level of adaptation planning a Local Authority had undertaken, and its budget or number of employees. This is linked to the fact that some local authorities have joined together to produce regional risk assessments or strategies (see Appendix A).
Similarly, to the extent that there were regional differences in overall levels of adaptation planning, these were related to whether or not organisations were part of those joint strategies.
NHS Boards
NHS boards’ adaptation plans are targeted at the level of their own organisation, healthcare assets and services, and supply chains. Mostly, the focus is on physical assets. Based on information provided by the project steering group, it is understood that this focus was intentional, due to a need to narrow scope in line with budget and resourcing constraints.
As part of NHS NSS requirements, NHS boards are required to undertake a CCRA and develop adaptation plans using a standard Excel-based template. It includes the following headings, which are presented sequentially in the order that they appear.
Risk type;
Asset group;
Relevant climate hazard;
Assets at risk;
Potential impact category;
Risk exposure score;
Existing [risk] mitigation measures;
Recommended adaptation measures;
Residual risk exposure score;
Risk owner;
Delivery partners;
Timeline;
Financial costs;
Monitoring approach.
In general, there tends to be less variance in scope between NHS Boards plans, compared to Local Authority plans. Notably, although the template is framed as a risk assessment, many of the actions proposed in response to specific hazards are to undertake more detailed assessments of the risk. For more information on actions, see Section 5.6.
In addition, at least six NHS Boards have produced broader climate change strategies (or similarly titled documents) and most of these discuss adaptation at a high level.
NHS Boards plans are generally focused on hazards such as flooding, overheating, structural damage from severe weather, and general risks to the estate and services. For example, in the NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde Climate Change and Sustainability Strategy, one adaptation action focuses on utilising the existing outdoor estate to retrofit green infrastructure and combat increased flooding (NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde, 2023). NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde was a stakeholder within the Climate Ready Clyde group until 2024, demonstrating that some NHS Bodies, like some Local Authorities, are benefitting from shared regional learnings.
Other organisations
Historic Environment Scotland’s (HES) adaptation plan focuses on sector-specific climate risks (Historic Environment Scotland, 2021). The adaptation plan is accompanied by a detailed project methodology and results report, including results of the CCRA. A risk management strategy and severe weather policy has also been created to support the Climate Ready HES approach. The Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework was used to inform the organisation’s action plan. The plan groups risks into 5 broad categories: physical climate risks to physical assets, natural capital, operations, people and transition risks. For more detail on transition risks, see Appendix D.
Transport Scotland’s adaptation plan covers its area of operation, which covers all of Scotland (Transport Scotland, 2021). It outlines seven transport related climate risks and prioritises four high level strategic outcomes to help achieve the vision of a well-adapted transport system in Scotland. Transport Scotland used resources from the Adaptation Scotland programme to develop its plans. The risks are evidenced using the UK CCRA and a separate CCRA has not been undertaken for the organisation. The strategic outcomes relate to trunk roads, rail network, aviation network and maritime network. Each strategic outcome includes sub-outcomes which provide a much narrower scope for action. For example, for the strategic outcome relating to trunk roads, one sub-outcome is to deliver a programme of proactive scour schemes across the network.
Like Transport Scotland, Scottish Water’s adaptation plan is focused on its own assets and operations nationally (Scottish Water, 2024). The plan is embedded within their overall risk management process. It covers eight main themes, which include: impact on services, drought, deteriorating water quality, customer flooding and environmental pollution, waste water and environmental quality, asset flooding and coastal erosion, interdependent risks and enablers. Outcomes and outputs for each adaptation action are clearly defined along with timelines for adoption and enabling actions. The plan is based on a CCRA that contains two climate scenarios, in line with CCC recommendation to plan for a 2°C increase in global temperatures but assess for a 4°C increase.
Themes and structure of adaptation plans
Most of the adaptation plans reviewed in this study were structured around multiple thematic areas. However, there was little consistency in what these themes were and the scope of what they covered within different plans. This was true when comparing different types of organisation (e.g. NHS board vs. local authority) as well as when comparing across organisations of the same type (e.g. NHS board with NHS board). The thematic groupings used can be broadly categorised as:
Broad sectoral themes such as buildings, infrastructure and biodiversity – This is the most common way of defining themes. It is similar to the outcomes used to structure the third Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3). The thematic areas are not uniform across plans that use this approach and often different language is used to describe similar themes, for example ‘property assets and housing’ and ‘buildings’. A theme relating to nature, the environment and/or biodiversity was common to almost all plans that used this approach, and the built environment was also a common theme. Of the outcomes in SNAP3, the ‘economy, business and industry’ theme was least prominent across plans.
Sector-specific themes – For non-local authority organisations, including NHS boards, an approach similar to the sectoral themes above may be used but with specific themes more closely aligned to their delivery functions. For example, the Transport Scotland plan is structured around themes including trunk roads, rail, aviation and maritime.
Themes based on climate hazards – Some of the adaptation plans are structured around themes such as ‘flooding’, ‘heat’, ‘drought’ and ‘coastal adaptation’. This was most common among NHS Boards, as the CCRA template prompts the user to list actions against each risk (although some NHS Boards had also produced separate climate change strategies that addressed adaptation at a high level and did not follow the same structure). Overall, the plans generally have a stronger focus on flooding than other hazards, likely reflecting the current risk profile in Scotland.
Enablers – Many of the plans also contain at least one theme based around enablers for adaptation action, including governance, building understanding and knowledge, working in partnership and monitoring and evaluation.
Climate adaptation as one theme in a wider strategy – Some organisations have mitigation and adaptation combined into a single strategy document. Those tended to include a number of chapters of mitigation themes (transport, waste, land use etc.) and one or two additional chapters on adaptation and/or resilience. Having a single strategy could theoretically help with integrating adaptation and mitigation actions but in many cases this opportunity has been missed (see Section 5.6).
Some plans apply a mix of the above approaches, for example, using primarily sectoral themes with an additional chapter on a topic such as flooding or governance.
The wide variety of themes identified in the adaptation plans likely reflects the local and function specific nature of risk and adaptation to different organisations, as well as differing organisation priorities. However, this diversity of themes does make it difficult to compare plans and establish whether individual plans contain comprehensive coverage of the relevant risks and necessary actions.
Not all plans explicitly acknowledge interactions between themes. This creates a risk of siloed working and missed opportunities for join-up.
Inclusion of specific actions and policies in adaptation plans
Most of the plans include relatively high-level actions with a focus on planning and policy making rather than delivery and implementation. This suggests that the organisations may not yet be at a sufficiently mature stage of adaptation planning to have a delivery focus. For example, many plans include actions like ‘Set out a proactive approach to climate change adaptation within our Asset Management Plan’ and ‘Develop policies to strengthen the resilience of the transport network to the impacts of climate change’. In some cases, actions like ‘maximise partnership approaches’ are suggested, without outlining clear mechanisms for how partnerships will be built or who needs to be involved. As a result, implementation and monitoring progress against the action may be difficult (see Section 5.7 for further information).
Mirroring the diversity of themes within public bodies’ adaptation planning, a wide variety of adaptation policies and actions have been proposed. Some actions were common across many plans. For example, many included adaptation actions aiming to expand and protect green space and actions to improve governance such as incorporating climate risk into corporate risk registers; note, this is a specific capability and range of tasks within the ACF. Fewer plans included actions to reduce risks due to high temperatures. Actions aiming to address the higher exposure of rural and island communities were limited, even amongst local authorities with significant rural populations. In some cases, including the plans for Transport Scotland, Angus Council and Shetland Council, vulnerability due to the greater reliance of remote communities on specific transport links such as ferries and other infrastructure was acknowledged but specific, targeted actions to address this were not included or have not yet been developed. One exception was the Highland Council, which included an action to map vulnerable communities and sectors in their 2012 plan (Highland Council, 2012).
Overall, there is limited information on how actions have been prioritised, including a lack of direct use of information from risk assessments to ensure the most significant risks are acted upon. Historic Environment Scotland’s plan was an exception in that a relatively detailed methodology document accompanies their adaptation plan.
In many cases, it was not clear from reviewing the documents in this study how many plans commit to new or strengthened actions, rather than reiterating actions that would take place anyway. For example, many actions relating to flooding may be covered under existing local flood risk management work. This is a challenge when it comes to costing adaptation specifically.
Adaptation and mitigation actions are sometimes mis-categorised. SSN found, in their analysis of PBCCDRs for the year 2022/23, that 10% of NHS boards and 6% of local authorities listed mitigation measures in response to questions on adaptation (Sustainable Scotland Network, 2023). Examples of this confusion have been found within a number of plans. For example, the resilience section of one Local Authority plan refers to ‘milestones for our resilience journey to reduce GHG emissions’. There is an opportunity here for further training and knowledge dissemination.
Opportunities to join up adaptation and mitigation action, particularly where a single climate strategy covers both areas of work, have often been missed. For example, a number of plans contain actions to improve insulation of buildings to reduce emissions without explicitly considering the potential synergies with adaptation, such as the potential to reduce costs by retrofitting adaptation and mitigation measures to buildings at the same time, or the increased risks of overheating in insulated but poorly ventilated buildings. However, there are examples of plans that do acknowledge the synergies even if this is not a major focus. For example, NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde have an action to ‘Ensure energy models take account of future weather trends and models to be monitored in use with systems adjusted as required’ (NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde, 2023) and East Ayrshire acknowledges the benefits of green infrastructure for reducing flooding, improving biodiversity and sequestering carbon (East Ayrshire Council, 2021).
Approach to monitoring, evaluation and learning
Monitoring, evaluation and learning is a key part of the adaptation policy cycle which allows progress and performance to be understood and learned from to inform future policy development and implementation. It also allows decision makers flexibility to evolve their approaches as new information becomes available. At the national level, the Scottish Government have developed a monitoring and evaluation framework as part of SNAP3.
Of the NHS boards and Local Authorities that have specific, dedicated adaptation plans, or broader climate strategies that include adaptation, just under two thirds explicitly mention some kind of monitoring and evaluation arrangements. A similar number have plans to review and update these, many on an annual timescale but all within the next five years.
The reason for some plans not including monitoring and evaluation plans is not known but could be due to a lack of resource or a lack of skills or knowledge. Some of those not including monitoring plans have used standards or guidance in the development of their plans, such as the Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework.
The mechanisms proposed for monitoring and evaluation vary across different organisations. In some cases, plans acknowledge the need for monitoring and evaluation but do not include designs of specific frameworks, relying instead upon reporting through the PBCCD or setting up a steering group to review on an ongoing basis.
For the most mature plans, more detailed frameworks of governance and internal reporting, including performance indicators for actions and themes, have been developed. However, indicators are not comparable across different plans, meaning comparison or aggregation across different organisations would not be straightforward. For example, both the Aberdeen City Council and Dundee Council action plans contain actions relating to raising awareness of the health impacts of climate change. Aberdeen suggest measuring progress as the number of people reached by the campaigns for raising awareness (Aberdeen City Council, 2022) whereas Dundee proposes indicators relating to the number of people affected by illness (Sustainable Dundee and the Dundee Partnership, 2019)
Variations in key performance indicators across the public sector is likely to make it harder to consistently track progress at a national level.
Information on costs and benefits in the public body adaptation plans
Introduction
How have we defined costs and benefits?
This was interpreted broadly to include both monetary and non-monetised costs, as opposed to only costs associated with financial spend, and benefits associated with adaptation actions. To holistically appraise the costs and benefits of adaptation, three types of information need to be considered:
The cost of inaction – costs incurred due to the impacts of climate change in the absence of further adaptation
The cost of adaptation measures – the spend and investment required to implement adaptation measures
Ancillary costs and benefits – the wider impacts of adaptation action on the economy, society and the environment that go beyond avoided losses. For example, adaptation actions that enhance green space could result in benefits to human health and wellbeing.
The IPCC’s view on cost-benefit analysis
In ‘Economics of Adaptation’, the IPCC acknowledges that conventional cost-benefit analysis may not be the most suitable approach when it comes to adaptation measures (IPCC, 2018). The report cites several reasons for this, such as the inherent uncertainty associated with different climate futures, and the difficulty of ascribing a monetary value to non-market impacts on public health, heritage, ecosystem services, etc.
According to the IPCC, ‘A narrow focus on quantifiable costs and benefits can bias decisions against the poor and against ecosystems and those in the future whose values can be excluded or are understated.’ On this basis, the IPCC suggests that, in some cases, it may be more appropriate to use multi-metric decision making techniques. These might better enable decision-makers to weigh competing objectives.
In the UK context, research has recently been conducted into the latest methods for valuing the costs and benefits of climate risk and adaptation policy (Cambridge Econometrics, 2023) and the economics of adaptation (Advisory Group on the Economics of Climate Change Risk and Adaptation, 2024) in preparation for the fourth UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA4). Other relevant recent work includes The Costs of Adaptation, and the Economic Costs and Benefits of Adaptation in the UK (Paul Watkiss Associates, 2022), Barriers to financing adaptation actions in the UK (Frontier Economics & Paul Watkiss Associates, 2022) and Investment for a Well Adapted UK (Climate Change Committee, 2023).
Local authorities
Overview
The majority of quantitative cost-benefit information comes from two regional economic impact assessments produced on behalf of Climate Ready Clyde and Highland Adapts. More information on these is provided in the next section.
Several Local Authorities described quantitative costs or benefits in a more light-touch way, making a small number of references to these without providing more detail. Usually this referred to flood damages or infrastructure. For example, the City of Edinburgh’s adaptation plan (Edinburgh City Council, 2016) refers to the cost of maintaining and repairing coastal defences between 2008-2011 (£740,000). Aberdeen City Council and Dundee City Council both describe the cost of damage due to unmitigated flooding. The cost of flooding to Aberdeen without intervention is estimated to be £12.5m (Aberdeen Adapts, 2022) and the cost to residents, businesses and infrastructure in Broughty Ferry in Dundee of a 1 in 200 year flood is estimated to be in the region of £97m. (Sustainable Dundee and the Dundee Partnership, 2019).
It is considered likely that Local Authorities have a more detailed understanding of the costs and benefits of flood prevention measures because they have statutory duties in relation to flooding. There may be other topic areas where the cost of interventions has been or could be estimated by different departments, even if it is not captured within their climate adaptation plans. An example might be the cost of repairing potholes, which could increase due to climate change because of increased temperatures, rainfall and freeze-thaw cycles.
Some adaptation plans referred to the cost of inaction. This was framed as part of the overall rationale for taking steps to address climate change, rather than being used as a counterfactual to support specific adaptation measures. For example, Aberdeen City Council refers to the Stern Review (Stern, 2006) when explaining that the benefits of early action outweigh the costs of action. It also mentions the potential impact on gross domestic product (GDP). Perth and Kinross state that, ‘In general, each £1 spent on resilience measures has been demonstrated to generate between £2-£10 pounds in savings’ although no citation was provided (Perth and Kinross Council, 2021).
Several Local Authorities acknowledge the lack of information on costs and benefits, e.g.:
The LCLIP for Aberdeenshire (Aberdeenshire Council, 2019) recommends introducing a ‘cost code to capture costs from all extreme weather events’ and indicates that the Council may investigate setting up a central fund for climate adaptation.
One of the City of Edinburgh’s stated objectives in the draft Climate Ready Edinburgh Plan 202-2030 (Edinburgh City Council, 2023) is to ‘Carry out further research to enable options appraisals and cost benefit analysis of different adaptation responses in Edinburgh to improve decision making.’
The regional economic impact assessments (see Section 6.2.2) demonstrate that Local Authorities have been working together to address this gap, and there is evidence that there is an appetite for further collaboration. It is understood that Climate Ready Clyde has been exploring options to develop an Adaptation Finance Lab to help ‘support alternative financing models for adaptation action within Glasgow City Region’ (Climate Ready Clyde, 2021).
Regional reports
Two regional economic assessments have been produced by Paul Watkiss Associates on behalf of Climate Ready Clyde and Highland Adapts. These reports consider the overall economic impacts of climate change on these regions and key sectors, providing a monetary valuation of ‘relevant costs and benefits to Government and society’. Together, these reports provide an evidence base for nine out of 32 Local Authority areas.
It should be noted that the costs set out in these reports relate to climate risks, i.e. the potential cost of inaction, as opposed to adaptation actions.
The methodology of both reports is informed by guidance set out in the UK Government HM Treasury Green Book, which is the guidance the government provides for appraising, monitoring and evaluating programmes, projects and policies. This mirrors the approach taken to quantify costs as part of the first, second and third UK CCRAs (although CCRA4 is expected to use a different approach).
The data sources used in these analyses come from a range of studies, with estimates of future cost based on different socio-economic and climate change scenarios. Therefore, the authors acknowledge that they do not necessarily provide a like-for-like comparison across different risks. They also state that the values would need to be adjusted for use in a cost-benefit analysis.
For Climate Ready Clyde, the regional analysis (Paul Watkiss Associates, 2019) includes:
Current economic costs of extreme weather events, based on four recent examples in the Glasgow City region (the report notes that these costs are likely to be significant underestimates due to data gaps):
December 2015 river floods (£4m – £10m)
July 2012 surface water floods (£1m – £2m)
October 2017 wind storm (>£20m)
2013 warm and dry summer (£20m)
Potential economic costs (and benefits) associated with all risks identified in the regional CCRA
Total economic costs, expressed as indicative order of magnitude estimates for the 2020s, 2050s and 2080s.
For Highland Adapts (Paul Watkiss Associates, 2024), it includes:
Economic costs of flooding and wildfires
Potential health costs of higher temperatures
Impacts of reduced heating degree days
Macro-economic or economy-wide costs
As part of the Highland Adapts project, additional sector reports were provided for (1) Energy (2) Forestry and Timber (3) Food and Drink.
We found one example of an organisation that had attempted to downscale these costs to a more local level. East Dunbartonshire Council has produced an evidence report to inform its forthcoming climate adaptation plan and this contains indicative costs against each of the adaptation actions that are proposed (East Dunbartonshire Council, 2019). However, in general, it is not clear how a Local Authority would be expected to downscale these estimates to support a business case for a specific, local project. Therefore, in addition to this type of regional assessment, additional forms of evidence may be needed.
Reflecting on the quantitative information available to Local Authorities, at present the majority comes from these two reports by a single consultancy firm. While we do not suggest that there is any issue with the methodology, there would be higher confidence in the results if they could be validated using different approaches.
NHS boards
All NHS Boards are required to undertake a CCRA using a standard template. The intention is that the information is then turned into a climate adaptation plan. The form prompts the user to indicate the financial cost of responding to each of the hazards that are identified.
In the CCRA template, costs are represented as a range which users can select from a drop-down menu. It is possible that the responses are simply estimates based on the user’s judgment rather than drawing from more detailed analysis.
This study reviewed CCRAs for 20 out of 22 NHS Boards. Of those that were reviewed:
Two only included a risk assessment, with no adaptation actions or cost information.
Two included adaptation actions, but left the cost section blank.
The remaining 16 provided costs for some or most of the adaptation actions. However:
In three cases, the same costs were listed in each row, which may indicate an error or oversight.
In one case, the NHS Board only included costs for 3 out of 32 actions; however, rather than indicating a range using the drop-down menu, those costs appear to be specific quotes for building repair/upgrade work.
The guidance provided within the spreadsheet specifies that the financial costs relate to the cost to implement the proposed adaptation measure. However, it appears that some users have interpreted this in different ways, with some appearing to describe the cost of repairing damage, i.e. the cost of inaction.
Note the following:
Aside from NHS Dumfries and Galloway, which included an extract of its risk assessment in its PBCCDR, none of the CCRAs are publicly available. This means that some of the cost information cannot be shared.
Aether did not have access to any information about the methodology used to calculate the costs. Therefore, we cannot comment on the details of what the estimates include. For example, in several CCRAs, costs were indicated against a specific risk, but the proposed response was to undertake a further assessment of that risk. It is not clear whether the cost refers to the price of the assessment, or the potential cost of repairing damage.
Other organisations reviewed
The 2024 Adaptation Plan for Scottish Water (Scottish Water, 2024) describes the level of investment needed to respond to climate change impacts as being ‘in the range of £2-5 billion over the next 25 years.’ This was notable because it refers to costs as an ‘investment’, a term which acknowledges the long-term benefits and payback. However, the report does not explain how this figure was obtained. There are a few other similar costs cited, including £1.5bn having been invested in flooding/environmental projects in Glasgow, and £500m further investment needed for combined sewer overflows.
Transport Scotland’s adaptation plan (Transport Scotland, 2021) does not contain any quantitative information on costs or benefits. However, it contains information which suggests that these will be considered separately. For instance, a Vulnerable Locations Group has been established, which is expected to ‘deliver cost effective actions in the short term whilst developing a move to a long-term proactive approach, including a dedicated budget for climate adaptation.’
Historic Environment Scotland’s adaptation plan (Historic Environment Scotland, 2021) references the ‘triple dividend of adaptation, which is discussed qualitatively. This includes: (1) avoided losses (2) economic gains and (3) social, environmental and cultural benefits.
Key points regarding quantitative costs and benefits
Local Authorities: Overall, there is very little quantitative information on costs and benefits within Local Authority adaptation plans. Costs and benefits are addressed qualitatively to varying levels of detail. Two regional economic impact assessments have been produced, for Climate Ready Clyde and Highland Adapts, which together cover nine out of 32 Local Authorities. A small number of other adaptation plans cite costs for specific measures, mostly linked to flood damage and flood infrastructure.
NHS Boards: Those that undertake a CCRA using the standard template are prompted to record costs against individual risks, but not all have done so. In many cases it is not clear what the costs refer to. The costs primarily relate to the cost of upgrading infrastructure or repairing damage to assets (e.g. due to flooding).
Other organisations: Scottish Water referred to total investment costs at a high level in its adaptation plan. Transport Scotland and Climate Ready HES both address costs and benefits from a qualitative standpoint.
Reflections on the adaptation planning landscape
Maturity of adaptation plans
This section describes the overall maturity of adaptation plans, which can be assessed in different ways.
SSN measures the extent of adaptation action reported by organisations in their PBCCDs on a scale from ‘none’ to ‘advanced’, where advanced is defined as a ‘strategy or adaptation pathway with targets to assess progress on risk management and actions to address shortfalls.’
The Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework (Adaptation Scotland, 2019) rates organisations’ adaptive capacity as starting, intermediate, advanced or mature along four different axes relating to culture and resources, understanding, planning and implementation and working together. A benchmarking tool is provided for organisations to assess their own maturity. As there is no overall rating, an organisation can be ‘mature’ in one of the capabilities, but ‘starting’ in another. For more information, see Appendix C.
Within this report we have not formally defined a scale for how the maturity of an adaptation plan should be assessed. However, we have looked beyond reported action in the PBCCDRs to consider dimensions that influence the maturity of specific, dedicated climate adaptation plans where they exist. Dimensions that contribute to a mature plan, that have been discussed throughout this report, include:
Clear objectives and a vision for adaptation are defined.
A range of hazards and future scenarios are considered in a risk assessment that provides an evidence-based plan.
Individual actions are specific, have ownership, timescales, resourcing and relevance.
Monitoring and evaluation is in place.
The plan has been co-developed with stakeholders.
Synergies with mitigation actions are understood and exploited but adaptation and mitigation are not conflated.
SSN’s most recent summary analysis of PBCCDRs (Sustainable Scotland Network, 2023) assessed the extent of adaptation action reported, finding that 28% of local authorities and 65% of NHS boards reported limited adaptation planning, with 15% of NHS boards reporting no action at all.
There are some examples of more mature plans adhering to the principles outlined above, particularly amongst local authorities and the ‘other’ organisations reviewed here. For example, the City of Edinburgh Council updated its previous adaptation plan this year and the new plan contains numerous features of a more mature approach, including undergoing a consultation process during its development, setting out a high-level vision for adaptation and including timescales and ownership of specific actions. Conversely, there are also local authorities without consolidated adaptation planning and those that have confused adaptation and mitigation, so overall there is a wide range of capacity and maturity of planning in Scotland.
Unlike Local Authorities, all of the NHS plans were underpinned by a CCRA. They could be considered more mature than Local Authority plans by that metric. However, they generally focused on a narrower range of risks. It is therefore difficult to compare their maturity on a like-for-like basis.
This range of maturity and understanding across public bodies should be taken into account as further adaptation guidance is developed. Further work to understand the barriers for organisations to reach a greater level of maturity would be useful. It is acknowledged that organisations such as Sniffer may already have explored this topic and that Adaptation Scotland’s PSCAN offers an opportunity for organisations with less mature planning learn from those at a more advanced stage.
Finally, although this study did not specifically seek to compare adaptation plans against mitigation plans, it appears that adaptation plans are less mature overall.
Gaps and omissions in the adaptation plans reviewed
When taking a broad view of the documents that have been reviewed as part of this study, there are several notable gaps and omissions. The missing information may be recorded by public bodies in another form, or answers may be known internally by the organisation. Nevertheless, these gaps and omissions may have policy implications and could be investigated further to identify barriers to effective public body adaptation planning. These are presented in no particular order.
With the exception of flooding, the implications for emergency planning and risk management were generally omitted from Local Authorities’ plans. For example, the potential need to revise major incident plans to reflect more severe weather events.
Few organisations made an explicit link between adaptation and mitigation actions. Some of them mentioned potential co-benefits or the risk of unintended consequences. However, our team found various instances where there were linkages that had not been explored. This was not limited to mitigation but also applies to policies on health, biodiversity/nature, etc.
Some public bodies provided evidence of engaging with stakeholders such as business groups or utility companies. However, the adaptation plans that were reviewed in this study contained relatively limited information about how the public bodies engaged with, and sought input from, affected communities. A few (e.g. Shetland, Aberdeen) did refer to having held public events. It is acknowledged that various forms of community engagement have been undertaken (examples include, but are not limited to, the Highland Adapts/Outer Hebrides Climate Story Maps and work undertaken as part of Climate Ready Clyde) which may not be referenced in published adaptation plans.
Where organisations had produced their own adaptation plans, these generally did not appear to be coordinated with other public bodies operating in the same area except where regional partnerships exist. Several plans mentioned the need to consult with stakeholders, or cross-referenced regional studies that have been carried out. There was one example of an NHS board acknowledging that its adaptation response would rely in part on action taken by the Local Authority. However, that Council has not yet produced an adaptation plan so this desk review was unable determine the extent to which collaborative working may be taking place.
Where climate risk assessments were carried out, hazards were usually considered, but vulnerability and exposure were frequently not addressed. It is therefore difficult to state whether organisations have targeted their adaptation actions appropriately.
NHS boards that followed the CCRA template generally assessed the impacts of climate change on particular assets (e.g. flooding to car parks). They generally did not consider how climate change would affect the types of services they provide (e.g. having to treat different diseases).
Potential barriers
The scope of this study did not include an assessment of what barriers public bodies face when trying to develop more mature adaptation plans. However, our team identified a variety of potential contributing factors that could be explored in future:
Adaptation might be considered a lower priority than other issues, given that public bodies face competing demands on their resources.
For Local Authorities, the lack of dedicated climate adaptation plans may simply reflect the fact that they are not explicitly required to produce them.
Public bodies may have insufficient in-house capacity to develop more detailed plans. This could be due to a lack of time and/or budget to produce a plan or (where necessary) upskill personnel to complete them. Where there is insufficient in-house capacity, the bodies may also lack the financial resources to commission the work externally. If public bodies have received training or guidance, factors such as staff turnover could prevent this knowledge from becoming part of the institutional memory.
Although there is a variety of guidance available for public bodies to use for adaptation planning in general, some may be unaware of it, unsure how to access it, or not understand how to use it in the context of all the guidance that is available.
As discussed in Section 6.1, it may be challenging to apply conventional cost-benefit analysis to adaptation measures. Although methodologies for doing this do exist, they may not be accessible for public bodies to use.
Some organisations provide a wider range of services than others, or operate within a larger/more diverse geographic area. One reason their adaptation plans might contain less detail could be because they have to ensure that actions are relevant across all of their operations. A public body with a narrower remit might find it easier to develop specific adaptation actions.
It is important to gain a better understanding of what barriers public bodies face, because they may require different support and interventions.
Potential modifications to PBCCDRs
This review found that the responses to PBCCDRs that were intended to address climate change adaptation often included information that was not directly relevant. As a result, it was difficult to interpret the public bodies’ overall level of adaptation planning based on their PBCCDRs.
Below is a list of clarifications and questions that could be incorporated into the PBCCDR form or practical guidance to help address this issue. These are intended solely as examples for consideration.
At the start of the adaptation tab, add wording to the effect of: ‘This section requests information about your organisation’s climate change adaptation plans. Adaptation in this context refers to actions that are taken to manage and respond to the effects of climate change. This is distinct from climate change mitigation, which refers to actions that are intended to reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and thereby limit how much climate change occurs.’
On Question 4a, clarify that a comprehensive CCRA would consider a range of topics, not just flooding. Alternatively, state that Local Authorities do not have to describe their Flood Risk Assessments unless these have been incorporated into wider climate adaptation planning or CCRAs.
Add a new question or adjust Question 4b to ask, ‘Does your organisation have a dedicated climate change strategy and/or action plan that specifically addresses climate change adaptation?’
‘Have you assessed your progress against the ACF? If so, please provide your scores.’
[Local Authorities only] ‘If providing information about your Local Development Plan, please focus on specific ways that climate adaptation has been considered. If the plan only addresses climate adaptation as an overarching theme, without requiring any specific assessments or actions to be taken, this information can be excluded.’
Conclusion
This work has provided an overview of the adaptation planning landscape among Scottish public bodies, focusing on local authorities and NHS boards. It has described the information on costs and benefits of adaptation that is contained in public bodies’ climate adaptation plans. It has also presented reflections on the overall maturity and level of progress among different types of organisations. In doing so, it will help inform a collective understanding among stakeholders and identify knowledge gaps.
Key findings, topics for further study and recommendations are provided below.
Summary of key findings
The study reviewed a wide range of plans, strategies and other documents that are relevant to adaptation planning. It was clear that many organisations have utilised guidance, tools and resources made available through Adaptation Scotland. Nonetheless, we have identified that public body adaptation plans vary widely in their scope, content and levels of maturity.
There were some key differences observed between local authorities, NHS boards and other organisations (Scottish Water, Historic Environment Scotland and Transport Scotland), which likely reflect these organisations’ different remits, sectors and the geographic areas that they cover. Notably, NHS boards are required to produce CCRAs and adaptation plans in a standard format whereas local authorities are not.
Affirming earlier findings by SSN, this study found multiple examples of confusion between climate change adaptation and mitigation. Therefore, public bodies’ self-reported levels of adaptation planning is not always accurate.
The adaptation plans reviewed in this study were found to contain minimal quantitative information on costs and benefits.
For local authorities, the majority of quantitative information that is available relates to the regional economic impacts of climate risks (i.e. the cost of inaction). This is set out in two reports, both undertaken by Paul Watkiss Associates. We found one example of a local authority that had attempted to downscale this information in order to indicate costs against local adaptation measures. Overall, however, the regional assessments may not be suitable for the purpose of developing a business case.
NHS boards, when carrying out CCRAs, are prompted to indicate the cost of adaptation measures in relation to each risk that they identify. However, in most cases these sections were left blank. Where costs were indicated, it was not always clear what they referred to. Our team did not have any information on the methodology used to estimate those costs.
Flooding is the one topic area where organisations clearly showed a more mature understanding of the risks, historic impacts/damages, and the costs and benefits of adaptation measures.
Some adaptation plans specifically acknowledge the lack of information on costs and benefits, citing this as an area where further study is needed. There is evidence that public bodies have an appetite for collaborative working to address these gaps, as demonstrated by the existing partnerships such as Climate Ready Clyde and Climate Ready SES.
Although not the focus of this study, our team has proposed some potential barriers to adaptation planning that merit further exploration. In our view, gaining a better understanding of those barriers is a prerequisite to identifying a suitable policy response.
Topics for further study
There were several questions that arose from this review which could be considered for further study:
Barriers: Given the resources available to local authorities, what is preventing them from producing more detailed plans? A list of initial suggestions is in Section 7.3.
Guidance: There is already a broad range of public sector and international standards that define the approach to adaptation planning. Would more targeted guidance on how to utilise available resources be useful, e.g. more clarity on how to fill out the PBCCDR and NHS CCRA templates to help standardise the outcomes? Should there be sectoral or regional guidance, e.g. targeted at island communities? Or is guidance not one of the key barriers that public bodies face? Note, any new guidance should consider opportunities to address the gaps described in Section 7.2.
Missing information: Potentially, there could be more evidence on costs and benefits that is not reflected in the action plans or PBCCDRs.
Governance: To what extent have organisations actually embedded adaptation into their other plans, strategies and operations? From the PBCCDRs, it was not always clear whether the public bodies were carrying out dedicated adaptation planning or simply reiterating work that would happen anyway e.g. flood risk assessments.
Recommendations
The table below presents recommendations for policy, based on this review.
Ref.
Recommendation
Rationale
1
Engage with public bodies and undertake further research to understand the barriers they face to identify the specifics of the support they need for adaptation planning. Suggested topics for further study are provided in Section 8.2.
Establishing the details and actions on the support that is needed will allow budgeting for targeting resources effectively.
2
Require local authorities to produce climate change risk assessments that consider topics additional to flooding, and use these to develop climate change adaptation plans, in line with guidance from the Adaptation Scotland Programme.
Local authorities are not currently required to produce adaptation plans. New statutory guidance is being developed. This could be used to encourage public bodies to have an adequate level of adaptation planning in place, with recognition of scope, remit and budget differences.
3
Provide public bodies with advice on how the regional economic impact assessments (see Section 6.2.2) and other national evidence relating to costs and benefits can be downscaled to support the case for local adaptation planning and investment.
This would make use of the existing evidence base. The authors of the regional reports acknowledge that the information would need to be adapted for use in a cost-benefit analysis as part of an outline business case.
4
Align SSN’s system for rating the maturity of adaptation planning with the Adaptation Capability Framework. This would likely require organisations to assess and self-report their scores, which links to Recommendation 2. See Section 7.1 for more information.
Currently these do not align, which makes it difficult to track progress.
5
Explore ways to support public bodies with limited resources to produce adaptation plans or CCRAs. This could involve signposting to information provided by the Adaptation Scotland programme on easy wins, low-regret actions, no- or low-cost actions and partnership arrangements to share skills, knowledge and budgets.
All local authorities could benefit from this information. For some, there may be instances where it would be better to focus on a small number of key actions instead of using limited resources to produce an adaptation plan that lacks detail or substance.
6
Clarify what information on adaptation should be reported within PBCCDRs and what information is unnecessary in terms of key performance indicators. In particular, PBCCDR guidance should include clarity on the difference between mitigation and adaptation. See Section 7.4 for more information.
Responses were inconsistent and often appeared to signpost to workstreams or documents that would have happened anyway.
Some responses signposted to information that relates to mitigation, not adaptation. This has also been observed by SSN.
8
In future, where mitigation programmes are undertaken or funded by the Scottish Government and public bodies would be involved in their delivery, signpost links between mitigation and adaptation.
Considering mitigation and adaptation in parallel is important to maximise co-benefits and avoid unintended consequences.
Table 2: List of recommendations and description of the rationale
References
Aberdeen City Council, 2019. Aberdeen Adapts: Climate Adaptation Framework, Appendix 1 – Consultation Summary. [Online] Available at: https://committees.aberdeencity.gov.uk/documents/s105310/PLA.19.407%20-%20Appendix1%20ConsultationSummary.pdf
Aberdeen City Council, 2022. Aberdeen Adapts: Climate Adaptation Framework. [Online] Available at: https://www.aberdeencity.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2022-11/Aberdeen%20Adapts_Nov1_proof.pdf
Aberdeenshire Council, 2019. Local Clmate Impact Profile. [Online] Available at: https://aberdeenshirestorage.blob.core.windows.net/acblobstorage/b70a7fc3-42f6-4766-8d05-44642f2a010f/lclip-2019-high-res.pdf
Adaptation Scotland, n.d. NHS Lanarkshire – Place-based and site specific action. [Online] Available at: https://adaptation.scot/take-action/nhs-lanarkshire/
Advisory Group on the Economics of Climate Change Risk and Adaptation, 2024. Interim Report to the CCC – Advisory Group on the Economics of Climate Risk and Adaptation, s.l.: UK Climate Risk.
Cambridge Econometrics, 2023. Valuing the costs and benefits of climate change risk and adaptation policy, s.l.: UK Climate Risk.
Climate Change Committee, 2023. Investment for a well-adapted UK. [Online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/investment-for-a-well-adapted-uk/
Climate Ready Clyde, 2019. Glasgow City Region Climate Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan, Annex 1: Economic and Financial Assessment. [Online] Available at: https://climatereadyclyde.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/08-Annex-1-Economic-Case-and-Finanacial-Assessment.pdf
Climate Ready Clyde, 2021. Climate Change Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan. [Online] Available at: https://climatereadyclyde.org.uk/climate-change-adaptation-strategy-and-action-plan/
Comhairle nan Eilean Siar Council, 2022. Outer Hebrides Climate Rationale: An overview of our changing climate and impacts for the islands. [Online] Available at: https://adaptation.scot/app/uploads/2024/08/ohcpp-climate-rationale-final.pdf
Dundee City Council, 2019. Dundee Climate Action Plan. [Online] Available at: https://www.dundeecity.gov.uk/sites/default/files/publications/climateactionplan.pdf
East Ayrshire Council, 2021. Clean Green East Ayrshire: Climate Change Strategy. [Online] Available at: https://www.east-ayrshire.gov.uk/Resources/PDF/C/Climate-Change-Strategy.pdf
East Dunbartonshire Council, 2019. Adaptation and Nature-Based Solutions Options Assessment Report:. [Online] Available at: https://eastdunbarton.moderngov.co.uk/documents/s4704/Appendix%204%20-%20ANBS%20Options%20Assessment%20Report%2019-09-23.pdf
East Dunbartonshire Council, 2019. Adaptation and NBS Options Assessment Report. [Online] Available at: https://eastdunbarton.moderngov.co.uk/documents/s4704/Appendix%204%20-%20ANBS%20Options%20Assessment%20Report%2019-09-23.pdf
Edinburgh City Council, 2016. Edinburgh Adapts: Climate Change Adaptation Plan 2016-2020, s.l.: s.n.
Edinburgh City Council, 2023. Draft Climate Ready Edinburgh Plan 2024-2030. [Online] Available at: https://consultationhub.edinburgh.gov.uk/bi/climate-ready-edinburgh/user_uploads/draft-climate-ready-plan-for-consultation–22-jan-24-.pdf
Edinburgh City Council, 2024. Climate Ready Edinburgh Plan 2024-2030. [Online] Available at: https://www.edinburgh.gov.uk/downloads/file/35638/climate-ready-edinburgh
Frontier Economics & Paul Watkiss Associates, 2022. Barriers to financing adaptation actions in the UK. [Online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/barriers-to-financing-adaptation-actions-in-the-uk-frontier-economics-paul-watkiss-associates/
Highland Council, 2012. Adapting to the Impacts of Climate Change in Highland. [Online] Available at: https://www.highland.gov.uk/download/downloads/id/3584/adapting_to_climate_change.pdf
Historic Environment Scotland, 2020. Historic Environment Scotland Climate Action Plan 2020-2025. [Online] Available at: https://www.historicenvironment.scot/archives-and-research/publications/publication/?publicationId=94dd22c9-5d32-4e91-9a46-ab6600b6c1dd
IPCC, 2018. Fifth Assessment Report (AR5), Chapter 17: Economics of Adaptation. [Online] Available at: https://www.ipcc.ch/site/assets/uploads/2018/02/WGIIAR5-Chap17_FINAL.pdf
IPCC, 2019. Special Report on the Ocean and Cryosphere in a Changing Climate Glossary , s.l.: s.n.
NHS Greater Glasgow and Clyde, 2023. NHSGGC Climate Change and Sustainability Strategy 2023-2028. [Online] Available at: https://www.nhsggc.scot/downloads/climate-change-and-sustainability-strategy-2023-2028/
Paul Watkiss Associates, 2019. Towards a Climate Ready Clyde: Climate Risks and Opportunities for the Glasgow City Region – Economic Assessment. [Online] Available at: https://static1.squarespace.com/static/5ba0fb199f8770be65438008/t/5c70173ce4966bc8cf635bca/1550849870187/25+CRC+Climate+Risk+-+economic+impact+report.pdf
Paul Watkiss Associates, 2022. The Costs of Adaptation, and the Economic Costs and Benefits of Adaptation in the UK. [Online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/the-costs-of-adaptation-and-the-economic-costs-and-benefits-of-adaptation-in-the-uk-paul-watkiss/
Paul Watkiss Associates, 2024. Regional Report: Highland Climate Risk & Opportunity Assessment – Economic Analysis. [Online] Available at: https://highlandadapts.scot/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/Regional-Report-HCROA.pdf
Perth and Kinross Council, 2021. Climate Change Strategy and Action Plan. [Online] Available at: https://www.pkclimateaction.co.uk/climate-resilience
Transport Scotland, 2021. Transport Scotland’s Approach to Climate Change Adaptation and Resilience. [Online] Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/media/53779/ts-approach-to-climate-change-adaptation-and-resilience-accar.pdf
West Dunbartonshire Council, 2021. Climate Change Action Plan: Taking Action for a Net Zero Future. [Online] Available at: https://www.west-dunbarton.gov.uk/media/4320717/climate-change-action-plan.pdf
West Dunbartonshire Council, 2021. Climate Change Strategy: A Route Map for a Net Zero Future. [Online] Available at: https://www.west-dunbarton.gov.uk/media/4319776/climate-change-strategy.pdf
Appendices
Appendix A – Organisations involved in joint adaptation plans
The table below sets out a list of organisations that have joined together to produce climate adaptation plans or evidence base documents. This is based on our team’s understanding at the time of writing (October 2024) and may not be an exhaustive list.
Name
Organisations involved
Climate Ready Clyde
Members:
North Lanarkshire
Inverclyde Council
Glasgow City Council
East Renfrewshire Council
East Dunbartonshire Council
West Dunbartonshire Council
Renfrewshire Council
South Lanarkshire Council
University of Strathclyde
Scottish Government
Strathclyde Partnership for Transport
University of Glasgow
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
Climate Ready South East Scotland
Members:
City of Edinburgh
East Lothian
Fife
Midlothian
Scottish Borders
West Lothian
Other collaborators: 6 community climate action hubs, CAG Consultants, Paul Watkiss Associates
Highland Adapts
Members:
NatureScot
ChangeWorks
Sniffer
Highlands & Islands Climate Hub
Zero Waste Scotland
NHS Highland
Forestry and Land Scotland
The Highland Council
Highlands and Islands Enterprise
Table 3: Organisations involved in joint adaptation plans
Appendix B – Recent and upcoming work
There are several recent and upcoming developments that will provide further evidence relating to adaptation in Scotland generally, and costs and benefits in particular. These include, but are not limited to, the following:
SNAP3, which was published in September 2024. This will influence adaptation planning among public bodies because they have a duty to help deliver against its objectives.
A Local Authority Climate Service, recently launched by the Met Office. This should make it easier for Local Authorities to access relevant data on climate projections.
Updated versions of the Adaptation Scotland Public Sector Adaptation Capability Framework, Further Guidance, Starter Pack, and Benchmarking Tool will be published in early-2025.
The fourth UK climate change risk assessment (CCRA4). The independent evidence base supporting this will be published in 2026.
A regional CCRA is being commissioned by Climate Ready South East Scotland. It is expected to be released in 2025.
Perth and Kinross, Angus and Dundee Councils are currently exploring opportunities to create a Tayside Regional Adaptation Partnership and have released a tender to commission a regional analysis of the combined climate risk and opportunity assessments of the three member organisations .
NHS NSS has carried out a review of NHS boards’ adaptation plans and CCRAs. At the time of writing (October 2024) this is not publicly available, but it is understood that the work will provide a more detailed look at the content of those plans.
All of these programmes could help contribute to a better understanding of adaptation among Scottish public bodies, and facilitate planning.
Appendix C – Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework
The Capability-Maturity Approach identifies four capabilities to be developed in the context of adaptation and recommends tasks to support progress. These capabilities are: (1) organisational culture and resources (2) understanding the challenge (3) planning and implementation and (4) working together.
Figure 2. Infographic showing two stages in the Adaptation Scotland Capability Framework
To benchmark, the public body scores themselves against the criteria for each capability using a score between 0 and 3, in relation to how accurately the description describes the organisation. The public body must record evidence to justify the current activity against each task.
As the criteria are open to interpretation, this allows public bodies to apply the guidance based on their understanding, priorities and strategic outcomes. This has led to very diverse outputs across the Local Authority adaptation plan landscape.
For the capability, organisational culture and resources; the ‘starting’ and ‘intermediate’ steps focus on resource availability and allocation, whereas the ‘advanced’ and ‘mature’ steps focus on identifying internal plans, policies and procedures to include adaptation within.
Appendix D – Case studies
There are many examples of public bodies whose work on adaptation shows unique features and demonstrates good practice. A selection of case studies is below.
These have been selected to illustrate nuances in public bodies’ approaches to adaptation planning. These nuances may not be captured in the database summary, and can be used to contextualise recommendations in the report.
Note, inclusion in this list does not suggest that the case study is the best or only example of a given approach.
Considering the impacts of risks on different cross-cutting themes: Highland Council
In its 2012 climate adaptation report (Highland Council, 2012), the Highland Council employed a multi-criteria assessment approach to evaluate risks in relation to cross-cutting themes, rather than looking at them in isolation. Whilst this example is more than a decade old, and will be superseded by the forthcoming risk assessment produced by Highland Adapts, this is an example of holistic thinking. An excerpt is shown below.
Figure 3. Excerpt from the Highland Council’s assessment of climate risks in relation to cross-cutting themes
To assess the risk posed by identified threats such as severe weather events, a multi-criteria analysis approach was adopted. Each threat was assessed in relation to cross-cutting themes, drawing out potential further threats, and opportunities, following the framework of 12 sectors set out by the Scottish Government. For example, for the threat to water resource management, a risk is identified that ‘drought could lead to mandatory water conservation measures being enforced’.
This approach would have helped Highland Council consider its wider remit and identify opportunities to maximise co-benefits and optimise use of resources in adaptation action planning.
Linking climate change impacts to other corporate priorities: Comhairle nan Eilean Siar Council
As part of its Climate Rationale (Comhairle nan Eilean Siar Council, 2022), Comhairle nan Eilean Siar Council undertook an exercise to map climate change impacts against priority areas within its Local Outcome Improvement Plan (LOIP). It acknowledges that, ‘To respond to the climate challenge and realise the LOIP vision, climate adaptation and resilience must be linked to societal issues, moving beyond sectoral responses and acknowledging the environment as the support network underpinning everything, to enable a safer, healthier and more prosperous Outer Hebrides.’
This is a good example of an organisation firstly acknowledging that their wider corporate priorities are dependent on climate change action, and then seeking to align the two. In principle, this would help to achieve a more integrated response to both issues. It could also help to generate stakeholder buy-in by highlighting how climate adaptation planning is crucial for achieving success against a range of other metrics, whether those are social or economic.
Figure 4. Excerpt from the Comhairle nan Eilean Siar Council’s Climate Rationale, showing how climate hazards relate to policy priority areas
Using stakeholder engagement to inform adaptation plans: Aberdeen City Council
This is an example of a public body that has used extensive stakeholder engagement to inform its adaptation plans. Aberdeen City Council, as part of their Aberdeen Adapts programme, set up 5 stakeholder workshops, in which 41 local organisations participated. These workshops looked at: the impacts of climate change for Aberdeen; collected ideas for vision and strategy; shared information about actions that are already underway or are planned to support adaptation, and examined opportunities for increasing resilience. The arts were used in these engagement activities, and young people were also included.
In the consultation summary report (Aberdeen City Council, 2019), for each theme or question discussed, the report details the number of respondents, the percentage who agreed, disagreed or were unsure and key comments. An example is shown below.
Figure 5. Excerpt from Aberdeen City Council’s consultation summary report, showing the responses received in relation to a question about adaptation priorities
Notably, a need for stronger links between emission reduction actions and policies and plans was identified by stakeholders. This focus appears to have translated into the adaptation strategy that was subsequently produced (Aberdeen Adapts, 2022), which makes a point of highlighting the need to align with actions on decarbonisation.
Acknowledging different types of benefits and risks: Historic Environment Scotland
In Historic Environment Scotland’s Climate Action Plan (Historic Environment Scotland, 2020), a distinction is made between the ‘internal benefit’ and ‘wider benefit’ of adaptation actions. This encourages the adaptation planning team to consider types of benefits, and where benefits might be multiple or could be enhanced. For identifying co-benefits, this aids the process of decision-making in terms of financing initiatives and actions, as public bodies could contextualise financial costs for adaptation actions in relation to costs that may be saved, internally, and in terms of other sectors or competing priorities.
Figure 6. Example of some of the internal and external benefits associated with adaptation actions, as identified within Historic Environment Scotland’s Climate Action Plan
HHistoric Environment Scotland’s dedicated Adaptation Plan (Historic Environment Scotland, 2021), which was published the following year, was also the only adaptation plan identified in this study which included transition climate risks for their organisation. Transition climate risks are the risks introduced when regulators, legislators, consumers and companies start to take action on climate change, and transition to a low-carbon economy.
By identifying transition risks, public bodies can gain a better understanding of the potential unintended consequences of taking action on climate change, and seek to address these. Additionally, considering transition risks may help strengthen the business case for more funding or resourcing, if they can identify upfront multiple risks that could be compounded due to inaction.
Figure 7. Examples of transition risks, as identified within Historic Environment Scotland’s Climate Action Plan
Assessing local vulnerability to climate impacts: Climate Ready Clyde
Many of the adaptation plans reviewed in this study consider the hazards that may arise due to climate change, but not many address how vulnerable key receptors are to those hazards. As part of the Climate Ready Clyde project, an interactive map (Climate Ready Clyde, n.d.) has been produced, which shows different neighbourhoods’ comparative level of vulnerability to both flooding and overheating – see an excerpt in Figure 8. This is focused on social and community vulnerability and is based on the Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation. It also shows contextual information such as woodland coverage and areas of vacant or derelict land.
The information could be used to target different stakeholder engagement approaches and/or adaptation actions at a postcode level, although the map authors acknowledge that a specific household or individual’s vulnerability will differ within any given area.
Figure 8. Excerpt from the Climate Ready Clyde map of neighbourhood-level climate change vulnerability
Using regional information to support local action: East Dunbartonshire Council
As explained previously, for Local Authorities, the majority of quantitative information that is available comes from two regional economic impacts reports on climate risks. This review found one example of a Local Authority (East Dunbartonshire) that had attempted to downscale information from the Climate Ready Clyde (CRC) Economic and Financial Assessment (Climate Ready Clyde, 2019), along with some other sources, to a local level within its adaptation options report (East Dunbartonshire Council, 2019).
This appears to have been done in a few different ways, depending on the action:
Citing overall costs for the Glasgow City Region
Referring to the cost-benefit ratio set out in, or derived from, the CRC Economic and Financial Assessment
Providing an indicative range of costs specific to East Dunbartonshire, some of which appear to be based on internal advice from Roads & Environment or other Council departments
The cost-benefit ratio was one of the most common metrics cited, which suggests that this was considered useful for the purpose of developing a case for local action.
Developing indicators and targets for adaptation: Dundee City Council
This example highlights an instance where proposed performance indicators and targets were given for adaptation actions. In the Dundee Climate Action plan (Sustainable Dundee and the Dundee Partnership, 2019), for some actions, detail is given to help make monitoring and tracking of progress against the suggested actions, feasible and achievable. By labelling them as proposed indicators, the plan leaves space for discussion and refinement, making sure the most appropriate indicators are decided upon. Along with detail on the lead responsible agency for the actions, they support accountability for achieving the actions.
The image below shows an extract from Annex 1 of the Dundee Action Plan.
Figure 9: Presentation of the actions within the Dundee climate action plan, including performance indicators and targets where applicable
In addition to the overarching CCRA that it is required to produce, NHS Lanarkshire has undertaken site-based CCRAs for its major sites. This recognises that its assets are diverse and therefore may require different adaptation responses. Although the documents are not publicly available, according to the Adaptation Scotland website (Adaptation Scotland, n.d.), the risk assessments also contain information on the costs that NHS Lanarkshire has incurred as a result of extreme weather events.
Although not necessarily feasible for all public bodies, this approach would allow more tailored actions to be taken for specific properties.
Transparency regarding stakeholder input to the adaptation plan: Edinburgh Adapts
The Edinburgh Adapts: Climate Change Adaptation Action Plan 2016-2020 (Edinburgh City Council, 2016) clearly describes what input was sought from different stakeholders when developing the adaptation plan. This addresses input from local business and communities as well as the support received from the Adaptation Scotland programme. It also sets out what stakeholders will have responsibility for long-term governance arrangements. It is also clear about the overall guidance that was followed. This is important from a transparency perspective.
Figure 10. Description of stakeholder input within the Edinburgh Adapts Climate Change Action Plan
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Scottish public bodies need to make long-term investment and planning decisions. It is their responsibility to consider the risks affecting the outcomes of these decisions. These include risks from climate change, which are highly uncertain, difficult to communicate and require specific expertise.
For instance, public bodies need to be able to plan: where to build a new development considering the risk of coastal flooding; how much to invest in protecting a train line from heat damage or coastal change; or the expected increase in winter disruption to services in the coming decades.
Climate scenario analysis (or simply, scenario analysis) is a tool and process developed to help answer questions like these. It assesses the impact of different plausible future climate change scenarios on an organisation, project or strategy. Understanding the impact of climate change under each scenario can inform decisions.
This study reviewed policies, guidance and stakeholder insights, and examined practices and publicly available data. Based on our findings, we make recommendations for the development of a practical scenario analysis tool to help public bodies in climate adaptation planning. Many of the principles can also be applied to resilience and mitigation planning.
Findings
Stakeholders have told us that the main use of these recommendations will be to help with climate adaptation decisions.
We found a gap, as much of the guidance we reviewed focused on climate scenario analysis for financial reporting requirements[1] and often focused on climate transition risks, making it less relevant for adaptation planning.
Scottish Government and other stakeholders relayed that long-term public-sector investment and planning decisions should be based on climate risk information and approaches that are:
consistent across the public sector; e.g. they use the same scenarios, look at similar time horizons and use the same data to assess the same hazards.
based on information that is up-to-date, accurate, useable and freely available
consistent with climate risk information they are required to use for other purposes.
A data review indicated a relatively complex data landscape. Data availability varied significantly depending on the climate hazard. There is a lack of standardisation across data providers when it comes to scenarios, temporal and spatial resolution, and data format. These factors are a significant source of frustration for stakeholders.
Where our recommendations are different from existing regulations and guidance it is because they are intended to help public sector organisations make better long-term decisions to plan for adaptation.
Recommendations
We recommend that the scenario analysis decision tool covers each of the recommendations in Table 1.
Factor
Summary of recommendation on decision tool content
Hazards covered
Scenario analysis should cover both chronic and acute physical climate hazards. Transition risks should be considered separately by organisations, where they may have a significant impact.
Scenario prescription and definition
To drive consistency, organisations should consider both 2°C and 4°C warming scenarios.
Number of scenarios
At least two scenarios should be considered, specifically 2°C and 4°C warming scenarios.
Climate data provider
The tool should point to up-to-date primary sources of data for different hazards as informed by the ongoing climate data review by the Scottish Government.
Scope of scenario analysis
The scope of scenario analysis should be proportional to the use case. Use-case specific guidance should be followed.
Timeframe of scenarios
Short term: In line with business planning cycles.
Medium term: 2045-50s.
Long term: 2080s-end of century.
Frequency of updates
Scenario analysis should be updated every 3 to 5 years.
Qualitative versus quantitative analysis
Scenario analysis should be quantitative, but qualitative analysis can also be used to provide a richer narrative.
Inclusion of the impact of the organisation on the climate
Analysis only needs to cover the impact of the climate on the organisation.
Table : Summary of recommendations
These recommendations aim to support the development of a practical scenario analysis decision tool. This should then enable Scottish public bodies to spend more time on trying to understand how their organisation could respond to those scenarios and less time on identifying plausible scenarios to assess.
Glossary and abbreviations table
Terms defined in the glossary and abbreviations table are highlighted in bold throughout this report.
Term
Definition
Acute hazard
Acute hazards are event driven (rapid-onset), extremely severe, and short term. These events can include extreme weather such as cyclones, hurricanes or floods (TCFD 2017).
Adaptation planning
Planning that set outs actions to build resilience to climate change (Scottish Government, 2024).
CCC
Climate Change Committee
CCRA
Climate Change Risk Assessment. Under the 2008 Climate Change Act the UK Government is required to publish a CCRA every five years (CCC, n.d.).
Chronic hazard
Longer-term shifts in climate patterns (e.g., sustained higher temperatures) that may cause sea level rise or chronic heat waves (TCFD, 2017)
Climate anxiety
The sense of fear or worry associated with climate change.
Climate scenario analysis
Broadly a tool for assessing what could happen to different aspects of an organisation or project (costs, income, policy, asset values, liability, workforce etc) under different climate scenarios. See section 3.3.
CSRD
Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive
Defra
Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
Double materiality
Impact materiality and financial materiality. Including both means organisations consider the impact of climate change on the organisation as well as the impact of the organisation on the climate (Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2023/2772, 2023).
Earth system tipping points
Earth system tipping points are thresholds beyond which changes in a part of the climate system become self-perpetuating often leading to abrupt and irreversible changes that could have a profound impact on our planet (Armstrong et al., 2022).
Ecosystems
A functional unit consisting of living organisms, their non-living environment and the interactions within and between them.
El Niño
A phenomenon associated with increasing sea surface temperatures that occurs every few years, typically concentrated in the central-east equatorial Pacific.
Emission pathways
See RCP.
EU
European Union
FRC
Financial Reporting Council
GAD
Government Actuary’s Department
Global warming levels
Also referred to as temperature-based scenarios. Scenarios based on global mean temperatures regardless of the time at which that level has been reached (Met Office, 2023).
Green Book
Guidance issued by His Majesty’s Treasury on how to appraise policies, programmes and projects.
HadGEM3
Hadley Centre Global Environment Model version 3
HMT
His Majesty’s Treasury
IFoA
Institute and Faculty of Actuaries
IFRS
International Financial Reporting Standards
IPCC
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
ISSB
International Sustainability Standards Board
Macro-economic
The study of financial systems at a national level.
Micro-economic
The study of the economic problems of businesses and people and the way particular parts of an economy behave.
Physical risk
Also referred to as physical hazards, physical climate hazards or similar. Risks related to the physical impacts of climate change including acute and chronic hazards (TCFD, 2017).
Qualitative analysis
Analysis focused on the identification of trends and on the overarching narratives of the scenarios, often providing insight into less quantifiable company characteristics. It can involve descriptions of plausible future worlds, describing their main characteristics, relationships between key driving forces, and the dynamics of their evolution (TCFD, 2020).
Quantitative analysis
Analysis and presentation of quantified information within a scenario. Quantitative scenario analysis can take many forms, targeting various aspects of an organisation’s vulnerability to climate related risks (MIT, 2019).
Radiative forcing
The net amount of the sun’s energy absorbed by the Earth.
RCP
Representative Concentration Pathway. RCPs correspond to different levels of total atmospheric radiative forcing by 2100.
Resolution
The number of data points (level of detail or granularity) within a unit of measurement.
Scenario analysis
See climate scenario analysis.
SEPA
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency
SNAP
Scottish National Adaptation Plan
SSP
Shared Socioeconomic Pathways. The SSPs combine socio-economic narratives and approximate global effective radiative forcing levels.
TCFD
Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures
Tipping points
See earth system tipping points.
Transition risk
Risks that arise from efforts to transition to a lower-carbon economy. Transition risks include policy, legal, technological, market and reputational risks (TCFD, 2017).
UKCP
United Kingdom Climate Projections
Introduction
Background
Climate change in Scotland
Scotland’s climate is changing due to the rise of global greenhouse gas emissions with further change expected over the coming decades (Scotland’s Environment, 2024). Average global temperatures are already 1.2°C above their preindustrial levels. Further warming up to 2°C or more is becoming increasingly likely, resulting in hotter, drier summers, wetter winters, more extreme weather events, and rising sea levels. Despite international efforts to mitigate further global warming, some of these changes are already ‘locked in’ until 2040 and are unavoidable (Watkiss, 2022). The most recent UK Climate Projections (UKCP18) suggest that Scotland will be exposed to more intense and frequent extreme weather events, such as heatwaves and storms, and long-term shifts in temperature, rainfall and sea level rise (Adaptation Scotland, 2021). These changes will significantly impact Scotland’s people, ecosystems, and economy.
Climate policy has also been responding to the changing climate today and future climate projections. Scotland’s third National Adaptation Plan (2024) sets out Scottish Government’s plans over 2024-2029 to adapt to climate change. Public bodies have a statutory duty to help deliver the Adaptation Plan (Scottish Government, 2011) and Scottish Government has committed to updating its corresponding statutory guidance.
Future climate in decision making
To successfully adapt to climate change, organisations must embed climate change considerations in their decision making over the short and long term. It is crucial for organisations to develop strategies and make decisions with the awareness that our climate is changing.
This is particularly important for public bodies, which often operate over longer time horizons and have a responsibility for decisions that often cannot easily be reversed (infrastructure planning, for example). It is also important they receive help to do this on a more consistent basis to improve the coherence of decision making.
Scenario analysis is a useful tool to help organisations consider climate change implications. It can be used to:
Test the resilience of their current strategies and business plans to future changes in climate
Understand the future potential impacts of climate change and actively prepare to adapt to these risks
Explore and promote strategies to reduce their emissions and therefore mitigate future climate change
Aims
Adaptation measures can help reduce the risks associated with future climate change in Scotland. However, climate adaptation planning is not straightforward and faces uncertainties in both the magnitude of future change and timing. A single climate projection is likely to be inaccurate and therefore multiple versions of what could happen in the future need to be assessed to inform robust decision making. Climate scenario analysis addresses this challenge by providing a framework to better understand climate uncertainties by assessing the implications of different plausible climate futures.
As climate change has moved up the agenda over recent years, regulators in various jurisdictions have mandated climate related disclosures for public bodies, companies, and financial institutions. This has also included recommending scenario analysis to assess the resilience of strategies and portfolios to different climate futures and inform decision making (e.g. Taskforce for Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) in the UK and Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) in the EU).
Regardless of purpose, conducting climate scenario analysis can feel complex and the choices which need to be made, for example, which scenarios to consider, can often be confusing. To support future-proofed plans and strategic decision making, the Scottish Government (2024) has committed to develop a climate scenario decision tool for the public sector. The tool will aim to provide guidance and support around the implementation of climate scenario analysis to drive robust and consistent analysis of future climate-related risks across the public sector in Scotland and enable cohesion in adaptation planning.
This report aims to provide advice to the Scottish Government on the development of guidance for climate scenario analysis. Specifically, it provides recommendations on the climate change emissions or temperature scenarios, timeframes, climate hazards and other important factors public sector bodies should consider as part of any climate scenario analysis. The report also sets out additional features and guidance required by a climate scenario decision tool for the public sector, informed by insights from stakeholder consultation and the wider literature.
The findings and recommendation of this report will guide the development of the Scottish Government’s climate scenario decision tool, supporting public bodies with climate scenario analysis and enabling climate adaptation planning and decision within Scotland informed by a robust understanding of future climate change.
Methodology
The research which forms the basis for the guidance and recommendations in this report was commissioned by CXC and conducted by GAD between March and September 2024. The research was largely based on information from three main sources which are described in Section 4 of this report. The research project was split into three phases.
Phase 1: A review of existing policy, guidance, and stakeholder practice on use of future climate scenarios and climate hazard data when making investment judgements, exploring the resilience of current plans, and developing adaptation strategies.
We undertook a targeted desk-based review of current policy and guidance in relation to climate scenario analysis, consisting of:
A scoping exercise to map out the volume of literature and collate policy papers and guidance published in the last five years.
Identification of further key sources underpinning the literature published outside of the five-year timescale.
A synthesis of the key recommendations and considerations of these for climate scenario analysis.
The review focussed on guidance and policy applicable within Scotland and the UK, and the EU. This included TCFD scenario analysis recommendations and the Climate Change Committee’s (CCC) recommendations on global warming scenarios to consider in adaptation planning in Scotland.
For the review of current practice, we worked with ClimateXChange and Scottish Government to identify and prioritise relevant stakeholders to engage with. This included those in Scotland already using climate scenario analysis and future climate hazards data to inform their longer-term planning strategies.
Individual and group stakeholder engagement sessions were conducted over summer 2024 in person and virtually. Sessions sought to understand the purpose and aims of stakeholders’ climate scenario and hazard analyses and their experience of it. We examined what hazards and scenarios they had considered, how results had been used, pain points that they had encountered, and what decision-making support could further assist them. We captured stakeholders’ views via recording the meetings and using an online whiteboarding tool, Miro, where participants could record their ideas under question prompts. We also shared our key findings with stakeholders following the workshops to ensure we had accurately reflected and understood their views and comments. We engaged with a broad range of stakeholders including:
Climate Change Committee
Dynamic Coast
Edinburgh City Council
Forestry and Land Scotland
Highlands and Islands Airports Limited
Historic Environment Scotland
Met Office
NatureScot
Network Rail
Paul Watkiss Associates Limited
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA)
Scottish Government
Scottish Water
Sniffer
Transport Scotland
University of Glasgow.
To supplement information gathered through stakeholder engagement we also examined current best practice in the private sector, specifically through the work of the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) thematic review of TCFD reports (FRC, 2022).
Phase 2: Identify common themes across existing guidance and stakeholder practice.
We used qualitative content analysis methods to identify commonalities and differences in the policy and guidance and current practice. An analytical framework was developed to provide structured outputs of summarised qualitative data collated in Phase 1. The framework captured key guidance factors that feed into climate scenario analysis such as hazards to consider, scenario definitions, numbers of scenarios, timeframes, frequency of analysis and expected outputs.
This allowed themes in existing guidance to be easily identified whilst also providing a holistic view of the current policy and guidance landscape.
We also considered availability of data. As part of Phase 2, we conducted a rapid review of the latest publicly available physical climate hazard data. This included an assessment of potential data limitations and consideration of whether climatic tipping points are captured. This included an overview of the UKCP18 data from the Met Office.
Phase 3: Options and recommendations for setting national-level guidance to support accounting for future climate hazards in today’s decision making.
Outputs from Phases 1 and 2 of the research have been critically assessed to determine the level of prescriptiveness that Scottish Government could take in setting out recommendations for assessing future climate-related risks for strategic planning and adaptation in the public sector.
The recommendations are based on considerations of the consistency required to establish shared planning assumptions across multiple public sector bodies, the needs of stakeholders in considering climate scenarios and hazards in Scotland, the complexity that may be introduced, potential user capability and associated costs. We actively consulted with Scottish Government and public sector stakeholders during this phase of the project to gain feedback and discuss their views.
Research limitations
As the research was conducted within fixed timelines and budget the level of detail may not meet the needs of all potential audiences, e.g. those requiring climate scenario details to support investigation of highly specific and unusual risks in their planning and decisions.
Indeed, due to the budget and timeline constraints, we carried out three stakeholder workshops as part of our research. With further workshops we could have potentially gathered wider and deeper views on climate scenario analysis from public bodies across Scotland. However, engagement during our workshops was very high and the insights we gained from participants were invaluable in shaping our recommendations.
Climate scenario analysis
There is inherent uncertainty in assessing the physical impacts of climate risks. This is due to the uncertain future trajectory of global emissions, and uncertainty around how the planet will respond to those levels of future emissions. The uncertainty at an organisational or project level is impossible to accurately quantify due to the combination and complexity of uncertain inputs.
Scenario analysis relies on defining plausible futures and analysing them to better understand the impacts of the risks being faced. No likelihood is placed on any single scenario. Instead, the relevance of the analysis relies on selecting a range of scenarios under which the risks most relevant to the organisation emerge.
Defining climate risks
Climate risks can be better understood by using the International Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) framework of hazard, exposure and vulnerability (Cardona et al., 2012). Each of these components should be considered when determining climate risk as part of climate scenario analysis.
Risk = hazard x exposure x vulnerability
Hazard: The possible future occurrence of physical climate events that may have adverse effects (damage and loss) on vulnerable or exposed people, assets, services, resources, infrastructure, or systems. Examples of climate hazards include heatwaves, sea level rise, floods, and storms.
Exposure: The presence of people, assets, services, resources, infrastructure and systems that could be adversely impacted by the hazard. Proximity to the hazard is an important consideration here. For example, buildings close to the coast will have a greater exposure to sea level rise than those further inland.
Vulnerability: The propensity of exposed aspects (people, assets, services, resources, infrastructure, systems) to suffer adverse events when impacted by climate hazards. Vulnerability relates to predisposition, susceptibility, fragility, weakness, deficiency, adaptive capacity etc. For example, elderly people are less able to regulate their core temperature compared to younger adults and therefore more vulnerable to overheating than younger people (Moreira Sousa, 2022).
Exposure and vulnerability are often thought of as one but can be distinguished – it is possible to be exposed to a climate hazard but not vulnerable to it, for example by living in a floodplain but having means to modify building structure to avoid potential loss. However, to be vulnerable to a climate hazard, you must be exposed to it.
Whilst hazard data can be relatively generic, information on exposure and vulnerability is normally specific to an organisation.
What are climate scenarios?
Climate scenarios are plausible future outcomes of climatic conditions and macro- and micro-economic development in response to climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy. They were brought into the public consciousness in large part by the IPCC. This is a United Nations body for assessing the science related to climate change whose purpose is to provide governments with scientific information that they can use to develop climate policies.
The IPCC define their scenarios by emissions pathways, also known as Representative Concentration Pathways (RCPs). Whilst these emissions pathways are widely used as different climate scenarios for scenario analysis, in recent years there has been a trend to focus on temperature increase scenarios, rather than emissions pathways. Temperature increase scenarios are also known as global warming levels.
Emissions-based pathway scenarios: These are different projections of atmospheric concentration of greenhouse gasses up to 2100. The RCPs correspond to different levels of total atmospheric “radiative forcing” (a direct measurement of the greenhouse effect) meaning that they each produce different degrees of future global temperature increase. There are ranges of temperature increases that could exist for each emissions pathway.
Global warming level scenarios: Global warming level scenarios don’t generally include a timeframe. Instead, they represent a world that has reached the stated average warming for the period (Met Office, 2023). The CCC looks at +2oC and +4oC temperature increase scenarios within their most recent Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA3) (CCC, 2021); as well as considering higher levels of warming and low-likelihood, high-impact events such as climate tipping points (Betts and Brown, 2021).
The Met Office provides the UKCP18 data which are based on regional climate model[2] simulations. Data is available for different RCP scenarios but also global warming levels of 1.5oC, 2oC, 3oC and 4oC.
Climate scenario analysis in decision making
There is no single accepted definition of scenario analysis. Broadly it is a tool for assessing what could happen to different aspects of an organisation[3] or project (costs, income, policy, asset values, liability, workforce etc) under different climate scenarios.
Scenario analysis is constantly evolving to better explore the impacts of climate change on the above listed aspects. As climate related risks and opportunities begin to become more commonly considered, analysis will become more sophisticated and likely produce outputs that better support decision making.
Scenario analysis is a tool to enhance critical strategic thinking. An initial single analysis is unlikely to capture all climate-related risks at the level of detail required. Scenario analysis should be an iterative process where the objectives and scope of each analysis are well defined and tailored to ensure the output of decision useful information is maximised.
Often there will be a trade-off between:
Very well defined but near impossible to quantify narrative scenarios; and
Scenarios that can be quantified, but in doing so need simplifying assumptions which may be unrealistic.
Scenario analysis is a valuable tool for assessing and understanding uncertainty. It can be used by organisations to:
Challenge their current thinking. It is useful in testing if strategies and plans are resilient to plausible future changes in the climate
Make better informed decisions by looking over the longer term
Identify potential changes in the severity and frequency of climate-related risks. Additionally, completing scenario analysis may help organisations to identify new climate-related risks.
Limitations and challenges
Scenario analysis is difficult to carry out. For example, it is hard to know where to start and what scenarios are plausible. There is a need to recognise the limitations and challenges around data, skills, and uncertainty relating to timescales and quantifiability.
Data
Data can be hard to obtain and even when available it often has shortcomings like lack of coverage or uncertainty. This includes external data, like those covering the frequency and severity of climate hazards. It also includes lack of data held by the organisation itself on its exposure and vulnerability to climate risks.
Skills and risk awareness
A range of skills are needed to carry out scenario analysis. Few organisations will have access to all of those skills. Many address this by employing consultants or contractors, sometimes at great expense. The recommendations in this report will not eliminate this gap but aim to reduce this burden on public sector bodies.
One such skill is the ability to understand and communicate different types of uncertainty. Scenario analysis is a tool designed to help with this but also requires practitioners to have relevant skills in this area. Throughout the workshops, the importance of good communication of climate-related risks was a key theme. Participants noted the various challenges associated with ensuring communication with the public was transparent without causing climate anxiety.
Proportionality
Different organisations will be impacted by climate change in different ways, and it is the people who work at the organisation itself who will best understand the climate hazards that are most pertinent to their organisation.
Organisations should therefore take a proportionate approach to completing scenario analysis. When certain climate hazards are irrelevant for the organisation (for example, they have no exposure or are not vulnerable even where they are exposed), it is acceptable for these to be left out of climate scenario analysis. The organisation should satisfy itself that these hazards have been considered and agreed not to be investigated further. Stating this explicitly would be considered best practice and ensures transparency in any publications or disclosures.
Research findings
Recommendations presented in Section 5 are informed by three main sources of information:
Policy and guidance: Review of documents including policy, scenario analysis guidance, and reviews of existing practices.
Data: Rapid review of 21 commonly used data sources to understand data availability for different climate hazards.
Stakeholder views and experience: Three workshops with stakeholders including Scottish Government, public sector organisations, and experts in climate risks.
Policy and guidance review
We reviewed over 50 documents setting out policy, guidance and best practice examples of climate scenario analysis in Scotland and further afield. There are different legislations and regulations that bring climate reporting (such as that compliant with the TCFD (2017) recommendations including climate scenario analysis) into scope for various organisations and entities. We also considered any application guidance that went with the legislation and regulation.
Many of the sources considered covered more than just climate scenario analysis, and in contexts wider than just adaptation planning. Due to the focus of this review, greater consideration was made where sources spoke specifically about scenario analysis and in contexts relevant to adaptation planning. These sources are listed in Appendix C.
We identified nine factors that can be used to guide scenario analysis and that are frequently referred to within the policy and guidance literature. These were:
Which climate hazards should be covered?
What climate scenarios should be used?
How many climate scenarios should be considered?
Where data should be sought from?
The scope of the climate scenario analysis (i.e. whether analysis should cover the entire organisation / project or only certain parts of it).
Timeframes to be considered (i.e. how far into the future and at which specific time periods to look).
Frequency of updates to analysis.
Whether the analysis should be qualitative or quantitative.
Materiality (including double materiality).
The accompanying spreadsheet to this report, Technical appendix – Review of current policy and guidance, sets out a framework which compares each climate scenario analysis factor to the guidance and policy reviewed. The framework also provides a cross comparison with insights from the stakeholder workshops and the recommendations given in Section 5.
Key findings from the review indicated:
The current published guidance is primarily focused on scenario analysis based on requirements for financial reporting. The most obvious example of this is the recommendations of the TCFD (2017), but many other sources are also routed in this, including the requirements for pension schemes (The Occupational Pension Schemes (Climate Change Governance and Reporting) Regulations 2021) and companies (The Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022) in the UK.
TCFD (2017) mainstreamed the categorisation of climate-related risks as either physical or transition. Although transition risks (risks associated with the transition to net zero) can impact organisations and projects, they are generally less relevant to adaptation planning which is predominantly focused on reducing vulnerability to physical climate hazards. Physical hazards can be divided into acute hazards (specific events, such as floods or storms) and chronic hazards (events that gradually evolve over time, such as average temperature increase or sea level rise). Considering both acute and chronic physical hazards is consistent with a range of guidance, including that from Defra (2023) and the CCC (2024).
Due to the nature of sea level rise, including its lagged response to emissions of greenhouse gases, and the complex and dynamic nature of coastal change, alternative or additional scenario analysis guidance may be required for this climate hazard.
Guidance related to financial reporting, often mentions considering a +2°C or lower or “Paris-aligned” scenario. Emissions or temperature scenarios below +2°C may be more appropriate for analysing transition risks rather than physical risks. The His Majesty’s Treasury Green Book (2020), CCC (2022), and Defra Adaptation Reporting Power (2023) all use scenarios based on global warming levels focussed on +2°C and +4°C by the end of the century.
The more scenarios considered, the more analytical work and data gathering is required. Using fewer scenarios may allow organisations to consider each scenario in greater depth. However, multiple scenarios are needed to capture uncertainty associated with future climate change and allow for more robust decision making.
Guidance is conflicted regarding the required scope of climate scenario analysis. For example, some sources state the full organisation should be covered (e.g. Defra, 2023), whilst others restrict scope, initially at least, to cover more significant areas of an organisation (e.g. Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, 2022).
There is a lack of guidance on length of timescales to consider; analysis of reporting shows that many consider “long” timescales to be 10 years.
From an adaptation perspective, it is important to focus on climate change impacts on the organisation, rather than the organisation’s impact on the climate. Considering both aspects is sometimes referred to as “double materiality” (Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2023/2772, 2023).
Finally, published guidance makes clear that transparency around assumptions and limitations of analysis is vital.
Rapid data review
We reviewed 21 publicly available climate data sources commonly used to source data for climate scenario analysis (Appendix B). These included the providers of UK wide data (e.g. Met Office climate data portal and the UKCP18 user interface), global data (e.g. IPCC’s Interactive Atlas, Copernicus climate data store) and the Scotland focused data (e.g. Nature Scot GIS, Marine Scotland).
We found that there was a very wide variation in the data provided across this small sample of sources. Different data sources provided data on different climate hazards at different levels of spatial resolution and over different time projection periods. They also varied between using emissions-based (RCP) and temperature-base/global warming level scenarios. Climate projections based on the fifth phase of the Coupled Model Intercomparison Project (CMIP5), which are used as the basis of the IPCC’s fifth assessment report (AR5), were the most readily available. This is despite updated CMIP6 model simulations being used for the more recent sixth assessment report (AR6) (IPCC, 2021), demonstrating the long time lag often experienced for climate data updates. This lack of standardisation across climate hazard data providers was a source of frustration for those we spoke to in our workshops.
Chart 1 indicates that data availability varies significantly depending on the climate hazard under investigation. Of the 21 data sources reviewed, the greatest data availability is for temperature-based hazards, such as chronic temperature change and extreme heat events, whilst there is very limited data available for more complex hazards such as soil movement and landslip.
Chart 1: Data availability by climate hazard (21 data providers reviewed)
ClimateXChange is conducting a geospatial climate hazard data review project which should improve the understanding of the data landscape for those carrying out scenario analysis.
Current practice and insight from stakeholders
Workshops on climate scenario analysis
We engaged with multiple Scottish public bodies and other relevant stakeholders (Appendix D) across two separate workshops to discuss their experience of climate scenario analysis.
Stakeholders shared their experience of completing (or advising others on completing) climate scenario analysis, their key challenges and what would have helped to alleviate them, the tools and resources they used along with limitations, and their ability to quantify the climate impacts on their organisation.
A summary of key findings from these workshops were:
There was strong appetite across the stakeholders to learn more about how to conduct better scenario analysis. It was felt that nationally defined climate scenarios would help reduce conflict between parties using different data.
Scenario analysis is carried out for many purposes which lead to different needs for data and expertise. However, stakeholder primary use cases were to inform risk management strategies and plans and inform business decision making. Most organisations need to bring in outside expertise to help.
Stakeholders agreed that quantification of analysis should be a clear aim, but the importance of qualitative analysis is also recognised.
Analysis should aim to increase the ability of organisations to make decisions under uncertainty. The impact of “doing nothing” should also be considered.
There are advantages and disadvantages to using emissions-based scenarios and global warming levels – each have their place. Emissions based scenarios may be more suitable for climate hazards which do not scale well with global mean temperature (CCC, 2024). This includes sea level rise where a long lag time exists between global temperature increase and the full sea level response.
Stakeholders can often find it hard to obtain or understand climate data. Data availability can be limited as can the in-house capability to analyse it. Data does not always extend to the local level needed.
More data on asset vulnerability to hazards is also needed so that risk can be fully assessed.
Secondary and indirect climate impacts are particularly difficult to quantify and more guidance in these areas would be welcome.
Consideration of climate tipping points in adaptation planning is challenging due to large associated uncertainties in probability of occurrence, impact, and timing. It was noted that even when tipping points are breached, the impact may take many years to be felt.
Communication of the results of scenario analysis to users and the public was a key consideration for stakeholders and something that was often found to be challenging. Comparisons with other risks to communicate uncertainty may be helpful along with improvement of climate literacy beyond climate experts.
Workshop on scenario analysis for coastal change
‘Compared to other factors, sea level only gets worse.’
Insight from a stakeholder at the coastal change workshop, June 2024.
In addition to the two workshops held on climate scenario analysis, we held a dedicated workshop with coastal change experts. This was to allow a better understanding of specific scenario analysis guidance that may be required for coastal hazards such as sea level rise, which has a significant lagged response time and that impacts highly complex coastal processes. CXC has also commissioned a piece of research on coastal change adaptation planning conducted by the University of Glasgow which will further contribute to improving future guidance on coastal change adaptation planning.
A summary of key findings from this workshop were:
Sea level rise and coastal change can be considered to have a unique risk profile compared to other climate hazards. This is because 1) impact is always negative 2) timescales of impact are much longer and 3) the impacts are irreversible. Sea level rise is a chronic risk where the entire current baseline state is shifting.
Sea level rise will affect erosion rates and wave heights. It will impact drainage systems, structures, natural features and ecosystems. The complex interaction between sea level rise and other systems and services needs to be better mapped.
There was strong agreement that a precautionary approach was required for assessing the impacts of sea level rise and coastal change due to the permanent nature of the risk and the uncertainties associated with modelling, tipping points, and current understanding of dynamic processes.
Due to the chronic nature of sea level rise, assessments need to look over long time periods. As in the climate scenario analysis workshops, stakeholders were very supportive of ensuring scenario analysis considered a long-term timeframe to ensure adaptation measures represented maximum cost-effectiveness.
However, for adaptation planning, a focus on timescales may be a barrier to action as we are generally bad at long-term thinking. Instead, a focus on “what would the impact of a x meter rise in sea level be?” could be taken, analogous to the global warming level approach.
Consideration should be given to where assets/infrastructure affected by sea level rise will need to be moved to.
Coastal literacy is particularly poor among the public and within organisations. This prevents a comprehensive understanding of the associated risks. This has led to push back on modelled results in areas such as land use planning as there is an assumption that risks are being overstated.
The stakeholders felt strongly that there should be better communication of the risks and uncertainties associated with impacts of sea level rise and coastal change. Scenarios should be communicated not as pessimistic but realistic given what is currently known and the associated uncertainties.
The UK Met Office provide a range of datasets for the examining sea level rise under climate change and are in the process of updating these based on the more recent IPCC emissions scenarios.
Additional stakeholder insights
Stakeholder consultation as part of the 2024 SNAP statutory consultation process, indicated that there was strong support from organisations for any guidance to align scenarios with those recommended by the CCC (adapt to 2°C of warming, plan for the risks associated with 4°C of warming). Stakeholders also stated they would welcome guidance on the interpretation of data particularly relating to understanding climate data terminology (e.g. on emissions pathways and global warming levels).
Many stakeholders had previously considered flood risk, but the consideration of other hazards was less consistent. The Scottish Government (2023a) also confirmed this through the Business Insights and Conditions Survey. Over 60% businesses surveyed reported that they had not assessed for coastal erosion, increased flooding, temperature increases or water scarcity.
A scenario analysis decision tool has the potential to help ensure a range of hazards are considered in adaptation planning decisions, encouraging consistency and robustness. Whilst not all hazards will be material for all organisations, organisations should include all hazards that they deem to be material within their analysis.
Case Study: Climate Resilience Strategy (SP Energy Networks, 2021)
The Climate Resilience Strategy sets out how SP Energy Networks will maintain a safe and resilient network despite climate change. The analysis was done considering “four key climate change projection variables (temperature, precipitation, sea level rise, and wind speed/storminess) over three time periods (2030s, 2050s and 2100s) and two Representative Concentration Pathways (RCP) projection scenarios (RCP6.0 and RCP8.5)”.
Here, by considering chronic risks alongside acute ones, SP Energy Networks can ensure they understand interdependencies between different risks. For example, they note that “sea level and storm surge” could lead to an impact on their operations with sea level rise and coastal erosion increasing the exposure of their assets to storm surge events.
Recommendations
Our recommendations on the content of the decision tool are summarised below and more detail on these can be found throughout this section. There is also a section on our recommendations for the tool development (Section 5.10). These recommendations are designed to support adaptation planning so may not be suitable for scenario analysis carried out for other purposes such as financial reporting.
Factor
Summary of recommendation on decision tool content
Hazards covered
Scenario analysis should cover both chronic and acute physical climate hazards. Transition risks should be considered separately by organisations, where they may have a significant impact.
Scenario prescription and definition
To drive consistency organisations should consider both 2°C and 4°C warming scenarios.
Number of scenarios
At least 2 scenarios should be considered, specifically 2°C and 4°C warming scenarios.
Climate data provider
The tool should point to up-to-date primary sources of data for different hazards as informed by the ongoing climate data review by the Scottish Government.
Scope of scenario analysis
The scope of scenario analysis is proportional to the use case, and use-case specific guidance should be followed.
Timeframe of scenarios
Short term: In line with business planning cycles.
Medium term: 2045-50s.
Long term: 2080s-end of century.
Frequency of updates to analysis
Scenario analysis should be updated every 3-5 years.
Qualitative versus quantitative analysis
Scenario analysis should be quantitative, but qualitative analysis can also be used to provide a richer narrative.
Inclusion of the impact of the organisation on the climate
Analysis normally needs only to cover the impact of the climate on the organisation.
Table : Summary of recommendations
Hazards covered
Our research confirms that scenario analysis can consider both physical climate hazards and climate-related transition risks. However, as the decision tool will be designed to support adaptation planning, we recommend that the focus is on physical hazards only.
Transition risks should be considered separately by organisations, where they have the potential to have a significant impact on the organisation.
Scenario analysis should however cover different types of physical hazards, specifically it should cover both acute and chronic hazards (see Figure 1):
Acute hazards are specific events such as floods or storms.
Chronic events gradually evolve over time, such as average temperature increase or sea level rise.
Coastal change and sea level rise
While coastal change does pose specific threats, as indicated by the Scottish Government’s (2023b) Coastal Change Adaptation Plan Guidance and the Dynamic Coast (accessed 2024) project and explored further in the specific stakeholder workshop on this topic, we recommend considering it alongside other chronic risks as the first stage of the climate decision tool.
This will then enable stakeholders to get a better understanding of the shifting baseline in the future they are analysing, before assessing acute risks under that scenario. For example, sea level rise may bring with it a greater number and intensity of storm surges closer to shore. This is an important consideration for an organisation with infrastructure or physical assets that cannot be moved inland.
Chronic and acute hazards
Figure : Proposed structure of tool, considering chronic hazards before acute ones
Framing hazards as chronic and acute, with the sequencing set out as in Figure 1, should help tool users:
Understand how baselines like current coastlines, precipitation levels and average temperatures are expected to change over time under different climate scenarios.
Ensure that chronic physical risks are not overlooked, given their more gradual change which could lead to a progressive decline in service delivery rather than acute hazards that can cause more noticeable impacts and disruption.
Consider connections and interactions between different physical risks, that in aggregate may provide a different risk profile than when considered independently.
Ultimately provide a more holistic view, which will improve the standard of scenario analysis.
There will, however, be some challenges, specifically around data availability as revealed by the rapid data review.
An alternative would be to consider sea level rise and coastal change in a separate tool, noting some of the unique challenges posed by the risk. However, our recommendation encourages all risks to be considered in a single tool to help ensure interdependencies (and/or entire risks) are not missed.
Scenario prescription and definition
Prescribing the use of specific scenarios in the tool drives consistency across organisations and projects. This will enable better communication and comparisons supporting improved adaptation planning, particularly where several organisations are impacted by, or involved in, adaptation measures.
We recommend considering specific scenarios, aligned with other reporting frameworks we reviewed which organisations may be required/choose to comply with. This will further improve consistency (by allowing more consistency within organisations) and minimise additional work and costs for organisations.
We recommend considering both of the following scenarios:
2°C global warming level (above pre-industrial levels) by end of century.
4°C global warming level (above pre-industrial levels) by end of century.
When communicating the results of scenario analysis it is important to clearly articulate the rationale for choosing particular scenarios. Hence, we would recommend justifications for the choices of scenario are included in the tool, in particular, these could include:
alignment with the updated CCC methodology (2024) and Defra’s Adaptation Reporting Power (2023).
choosing a 2°C warming scenario allows organisations to assess their resilience against the lower end of plausible temperature outcomes by the end of the century.
choosing a 4°C warming scenario allows organisations to assess their resilience to much higher physical risk, towards the upper end of plausible temperature outcomes by the end of the century.
scenarios of 2°C and 4 °C gives a sensible range of likely futures based on current global efforts to reduce greenhouse gas emissions (CCC, 2020).
To enable a greater volume of the available climate data to be used we recommend that organisations can make use of emission pathways-based data, as well as data focused on global warming levels.
We have set out a table in Appendix F that can be used as a reference when comparing and contrasting emissions-based and temperature-based scenarios. In particular, the pathways best aligned to the scenarios prescribed above are:
Global warming level (above pre-industrial levels) by end of century
RCP
(5-95% temperature increase range at end of century)
SSP-RCP
(5-95% temperature increase range at end of century)
2°C
RCP 2.6
(1.1 – 2.3°C )
RCP 4.5
(1.8 – 3.2°C )
SSP1 – 2.6
(1.0 – 2.2°C )
4°C
RCP 8.5
(3.2 – 5.5°C )
SSP3 – 7.0
(2.8 – 5.5°C)
or SSP5 – 8.5
(3.6 – 6.6°C)
Table : Global warming levels and equivalent RCPs and SSP-RCPs for prescribed scenarios
What are earth system tipping points?
Earth system tipping points are thresholds beyond which changes in a part of the climate system become self-perpetuating often leading to abrupt and irreversible changes that could have a profound impact on our planet (Armstrong et al., 2022).
Examples include melting of the major ice sheets or significant changes in the fundamental ocean circulation patterns.
GAD also recommends that earth system tipping points are excluded from the analysis at present due to the significant uncertainty and difficulty in robustly modelling their timing and impact. The tool should ensure this is explicitly stated so that users are aware of this limitation.
This guidance should be kept under review. Over time, as our understanding of tipping points develops, it may be reasonable to allow for them in the relevant scenarios. For this to be the case more data on their onset, the pace at which the impacts of tipping points occur, and the severity and extent of the potential impact will be needed. It is worth noting that CCRA3 includes some consideration of low likelihood, high impact risks (Watkiss and Betts, 2021).
Organisations may find it valuable to also consider a reasonable worst-case scenario. However, it is likely that this is more appropriate to do as part of emergency planning exercises, rather than scenario analysis for adaptation planning. Reasonable worst-case scenarios could include tipping points being breached and other thresholds being crossed beyond which the organisation may struggle to operate.
Number of scenarios
We recommend the use of at least two scenarios, in particular those described above being a +2°C and +4°C futures.
Considering two scenarios means that the scenario analysis meets the expectations of all the policy and guidance sources we reviewed in this project, detailed in Appendix C.
Climate data provider
Climate data is available from a large number of providers. While some of this data must be purchased, we recommend using publicly available data wherever possible as this increases transparency and reproducibility of the scenario analysis.
We recommend that the tool should point to primary sources of data for different hazards, informed by the ongoing climate data review by the Scottish Government.
Sources of data may be preferred based on a number of criteria:
Criteria
Description
Coverage of different climate hazards
Sources that cover multiple hazards may enable more consistent scenario analysis across different hazards as well as improve internal efficiency and capability.
Reliability of source
UKCP and data from the Met Office are generally regarded as the best publicly available data that is specific to the UK.
Spatial granularity of data
Some data are available on a 1x1km grid, whereas other data are only available at the country-wide level. Techniques are available which can sometimes be appropriate to increase the granularity of the data. Assessing different climate hazards also requires different data granularity. The tool should allow for this and differences in spatial granularity between hazards should be communicated in the output of the scenario analysis.
Timeframe of the data
Ideally this should cover the end of the century. Different data sources may include different frequency, horizons, and baseline periods. The producer of the scenario analysis should make sure they understand these differences and communicate any implications of these in their scenario analysis output.
Scenarios for which data is available
For example, some data providers only have data relating to specific scenarios.
Format and ease of accessibility of data
This is particularly important for organisations that are inexperienced in conducting scenario analysis.
Familiarity with data
Organisations will be more efficient when using data with which they are already familiar. They may have already carried out relevant analysis using this data which can be reused. However, some caution should be exercised as there is a risk of familiarity bias.
Table : Criteria for climate data provider selection
Scope of scenario analysis
We believe the most significant factor in determining a suitable scope for the scenario analysis will be the context and purpose of the analysis. There are also advantages of considering a broader scope for the analysis to ensure that interconnected risks are understood and analysed appropriately.
For adaptation planning, we recommend that the entire organisation is included within the scope of the scenario analysis[4]. There will be instances where certain hazards will be more material for certain areas of the organisation. However, including the entire organisation within the scenario analysis will ensure that adaptation measures are well considered and have less chance of creating unintended consequences to seemingly less-affected areas.
Depending on the nature of the organisation, or adaptation measure under consideration, it may be proportional to limit the scope of any analysis, in line with any specific guidance relevant to its use. The principle of proportionality was discussed further in Section 3.3.1.3.
The scope of scenario analysis should include a range of external factors which could affect an organisation such as energy supply, communications and transport systems.
‘Cross-boundary issues and wider interdependencies should also be considered with neighbouring bodies and wider stakeholders such as Network Rail, Transport Scotland, Scottish Water and SEPA.’
A large volume of the scenario analysis literature reviewed refers to the use of short-, medium- and long-term timeframes. These are, however, seldom defined, leaving it up to the organisation to define timeframes relevant to them. This might, however, come at the expense of consistency which is needed when organisations are collaborating on adaptation planning.
There is also a risk that the timeframes considered are too short, preventing an organisation from taking a sufficiently long-term view for adaptation planning. To enable more consistency, we recommend that the timeframes are prescribed, and are aligned to those commonly cited, including mid-century and end-of-century.
GAD recommends the following timeframes:
Term
Definition
Short
Defined by an organisation based on their business planning cycle.
Medium
Mid-century with organisations likely to use 2050s or 2045 to align with Scotland’s net zero target.
Long
End-of-century, i.e. 2080 – 2100.
Table : Timeframes for scenario analysis
We have left the most flexibility around the short-term timeframe recommendation. We think that this is most helpful for organisations who have different planning cycles. It will allow them to have a greater level of internal consistency between their adaptation and other business planning, which should lead to a greater incentive to integrate climate considerations into business-as-usual planning. However, by not defining this timeframe, there will be less consistency in scenario analysis between organisations. Given the longer-term nature of many climate risks, this is considered to be a reasonable compromise.
The recommendations for the medium- and long-term still offer some flexibility, as mid- and end-of-century, as opposed to specific years such as 2050 or 2100. This is intended to make it possible for organisations to use a range of data sources more easily, or to align with other work they are doing. We believe that this will give a sufficiently high level of consistency across organisations whilst not becoming too onerous.
Carrying out scenario analysis over a longer timeframe adds greater complexity. However, we believe there is good reason to consider timeframes to the end of the century for most adaptation decision making. Through the stakeholder consultation there was a clear steer to ensure scenario analysis covered sufficiently long timeframes.
There is a delay, often lasting decades, between global climate action and the resulting impact on temperature rise and other climate risks. This means that physical risk scenarios are often very similar to each other in the short to medium term. For example, up to 2050 a +2°C end of century warming scenario may be very similar to a +4°C end of century warming scenario. This should give opportunity to consolidate analysis for the earlier years to make it more efficient.
The long timeframe of the analysis can allow false comfort as it can show that the risks are unlikely to affect the organisation for many years. However, actions to address the risks can take a similar amount of time or longer and the longevity of a physical or infrastructure asset as well as the projected sustainability of the business or organisation are more often measured in decades rather than shorter term. The uncertainty inherent in the analysis should also be considered as it means the risks may appear sooner.
Frequency of updates to analysis
Understanding of our climate and how it is changing is constantly improving. Practice in scenario analysis is also improving. In this rapidly evolving field, it is therefore important to ensure that scenario analysis is not seen as a one-off activity, but as an iterative process. In this way, the results from one scenario analysis exercise can inform the input to the next.
As updating scenario analysis can be a significant undertaking, we recommend a pragmatic approach, updating scenario analysis every 3-5 years. This can be more frequent if, for example, there are significant developments in climate science or events mean that the assumptions used are no longer suitable. Scenarios, by design, should be plausible and hence new information may mean they need to be changed.
Events that could trigger an update to a scenario analysis include, but are not limited to, the following:
New IPCC analysis or report, which has a significantly different future climate outlook affecting the hazard facing an organisation.
New data with a greater spatial resolution is realised, allowing a more accurate assessment of an organisation’s exposure to a hazard.
Assets moving from the planning to design to operational phases, affecting the organisation’s vulnerability as a result.
As with other factors, a proportionate approach should be taken, and organisations should consider the extent to which an update is needed. This will differ depending on what has changed since the last analysis. It may be appropriate for organisations to update scenario analysis at different frequencies to better align with internal planning and decision-making processes. This should be justified appropriately.
Qualitative versus quantitative analysis
What is the difference between qualitative and quantitative analysis?
Qualitative scenario analysis focuses on the identification of trends and on the overarching narratives of the scenarios, often providing insight into less quantifiable organisation characteristics. It can involve descriptions of plausible future worlds, describing their main characteristics, relationships between key driving forces, and the dynamics of their evolution (TCFD, 2020).
Quantitative scenario analysis refers to the presentation of quantified information within a scenario. Quantitative scenario analysis can take many forms, targeting various aspects of [an organisation’s] vulnerability to climate‑related risks (MIT, 2019).
Quantification is often useful for adaptation planning as it can form part of a cost benefit analysis or support business cases for different adaptation measures. Quantitative analysis can allow for an easier comparison of alternatives.
However, there is also value in qualitative exploratory analysis, particularly where climate data may be limited. Qualitative analysis can also be easier to communicate to a broader audience.
We recommend that organisations carry out quantitative analysis. We recommend the decision tool also suggests where qualitative analysis could be most helpful. This could be in the short term where it can be used alongside quantitative analysis results to supply a richer narrative.
Case Study: No Time To Lose: New Scenario Narratives for Action on Climate Change (Cliffe et al., 2023)
This report by the Universities Superannuation Scheme and University of Exeter focuses on the power of qualitative analysis, with four short-term scenario narratives defined by assumptions for a range of drivers.
The resulting analysis is colourful and highly descriptive. “In 2024, the world confronts the challenges of a “Super El Niño” event, exacerbated by human-induced climate change, resulting in powerful and prolonged weather phenomena. Southern Africa and India experience prolonged droughts exacerbating water scarcity and food insecurity, as changing rainfall patterns disrupt crop yields and livestock production. Record temperatures and prolonged droughts lead to ‘heatflation’ due to smaller harvests and higher prices.”
Qualitative analysis of this type can be a powerful communication tool, especially when quantitative analysis would require a considerable number of assumptions that may make communication challenging.
Good quality communication of the results of climate scenario analysis, whether analysis has been quantitative or qualitative is imperative. This includes communication to others involved with or affected by the analysis, disclosures or publications both inside and outside of the organisation. When communicating climate risks, organisations may find it helpful to compare these risks to others with which readers may be more familiar (Reisinger et al., 2020).
Inclusion of the impact of the organisation on the climate
We recommend that analysis should focus on the impact of climate on the organisation. Requirements to consider the impact of the organisation on the climate arise from other existing legislation and duties.
Additional recommendations for tool development
The decision tool could take many forms. Based on the literature and data review, insight from stakeholders and experience, we set out key recommendations for tool development below, split by tool content and tool features. We consider the design of both the content and features to be important to ensure public bodies use the tool. In producing the tool not all these features and content are needed at once. They can be released and updated in stages.
Tool content recommendations
The tool needs to include the recommendations summarised in Section 5. Additional content is needed to provide context, technical guidance, and links to useful resources. We recommend the following are considered:
A step-by-step process for public bodies and/or types of adaptation decision-makers to follow to complete scenario analysis in their context.
Technical guidance on assessment of risk, using the exposure / hazard / vulnerability framework (Cardona et al., 2012).
Technical guidance on how to translate data between RCPs and global warming levels, see Appendix F.
Material helping with communication of risk and uncertainty.
A description of the limitations of the approach and data.
Tool features recommendations
The platform and format of the tool should be selected to provide the following features:
Accessibility to public bodies including consideration of software requirements.
Ability to roll out updates of the content effectively when new data becomes available.
A clear guided pathway through the parts of the tool, potentially with interaction to allow users to make decisions based on their needs.
As well as this we recommend an awareness campaign and engagement or training programme to encourage use of the tool.
Examples of scenario analysis tools
Most examples available of scenario analysis tools are aimed at organisations in the private sector preparing climate-related disclosures. There are good examples of toolkits for scenario analysis from New Zealand’s Ministry for the Environment (no date) and for adaptation from Local Partnerships (no date). These examples take different approaches to different use cases, but both set out a clear process and link to further helpful resources.
Conclusions
This research has highlighted the importance of climate scenario analysis for effective adaptation planning, despite the lack of policy and guidance specific to this area. Our research findings were derived from a holistic review of policies, guidance and stakeholder insights, as well as an examination of current practices and publicly available data.
Our findings underscore the importance of considering a broad array of climate hazards, noting however this may be limited by data availability. The review also confirmed the importance of considering multiple scenarios across a variety of timeframes, including into the long term, to capture the uncertainty of future climate change.
Stakeholder engagement revealed a significant need for improved communication of climate risks and greater climate literacy. It also demonstrated clear support for a decision tool that can help standardise and streamline the scenario analysis process, making it more accessible and consistent across Scottish organisations.
Based on our research findings, we have made recommendations covering nine key factors that should be considered when undertaking scenario analysis.
The recommendations provided aim to guide the Scottish Government in developing a clear, practical decision tool for public bodies to use, which can make scenario analysis easier and more consistent. These include prescribed scenarios, consistent timeframes and a focus on quantitative analysis while recognising the value of qualitative insights. Additionally, we emphasise the need for iterative updates to scenario analysis to incorporate new data and evolving climate science.
We hope with this report that by defining some factors of the scenarios that organisations should consider within their scenario analysis, they will be able to spend more time on trying to understand how their organisation could respond to those scenarios and less time on identifying plausible scenarios to assess.
Ultimately, by implementing these recommendations and developing a robust decision tool, we hope public bodies in Scotland can enhance their climate resilience, ensuring that adaptation measures are well-informed, cost-effective and aligned with broader climate goals.
Armstrong McKay, D.I., Staal, A., Abrams, J.F., Winkelmann, R., Sakschewski, B., Loriani, S., Fetzer, I., Cornell, S.E., Rockström, J. and Lenton, T.M. (2022). Exceeding 1.5°C global warming could trigger multiple climate tipping points. Science, 377(6611). doi:10.1126/science.abn7950
Betts, R.A. and Brown, K. (2021). Introduction. In: The Third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment Technical Report [Betts, R.A., Haward, A.B. and Pearson, K.V. (eds.)]. Prepared for the Climate Change Committee, London. Available at: Introduction – UK Climate Risk
Cardona, O.D., van Aalst, M.K., Birkmann, J., Fordham, M., McGregor, G., Perez, R., Pulwarty, R.S., Schipper, E.L.F., and Sinh, B.T. (2012). Determinants of risk: exposure and vulnerability. In: Managing the Risks of Extreme Events and Disasters to Advance Climate Change Adaptation. A Special Report of Working Groups I and II of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 65-108. Available at: 2 – Determinants of Risk: Exposure and Vulnerability (ipcc.ch)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2023/2772 of 31 July 2023 supplementing Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council as regards sustainability reporting standards (2023). Available at: Delegated regulation – EU – 2023/2772 – EN – EUR-Lex (europa.eu)
Lee, J.-Y., Marotzke, J., Bala, G., Cao, L., Corti, S., Dunne, J.P., Engelbrecht, F., Fischer, E., Fyfe, J.C., Jones, C., Maycock, A., Mutemi, J., Ndiaye, O., Panickal, S., and Zhou, T. (2021). Future Global Climate: Scenario-Based Projections and Near-term Information in Climate Change 2021: The Physical Science Basis. Contribution of Working Group I to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change [Masson-Delmotte, V., Zhai, P., Pirani, A., Connors, S.L., Péan, C., Berger, S., Caud, N., Chen, Y., Goldfarb, L., Gomis, M.I., Huang, M., Leitzell, K., Lonnoy, E., Matthews, J.B.R., Maycock, T.K., Waterfield, T., Yelekçi, O., Yu, R., and Zhou, B. (eds.)]. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 553–672. doi:10.1017/9781009157896.006.
Reisinger, A., Howden, M., Vera, C., Garschagen,M., Hurlbert, M., Kreibiehl, S., Mach, K.J., Mintenbeck, K., O’Neill, B., Pathak, M., Pedace, R., Pörtner, H., Poloczanska, E., Rojas Corradi, M., Sillmann, J., van Aalst, M., Viner, D., Jones, R., Ruane, A.C., and Ranasinghe, R. (2020) The Concept of Risk in the IPCC Sixth Assessment Report: A Summary of Cross-Working Group Discussions. Geneva: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, pp15. Available at: Risk-guidance-FINAL_15Feb2021.pdf (ipcc.ch)
Seneviratne, S.I., Zhang, X., Adnan, M., Badi, W., Dereczynski, C., Di Luca, A., Ghosh, S., Iskandar, I., Kossin, J., Lewis, S., Otto, F., Pinto, I., Satoh, M., Vicente-Serrano, S.M., Wehner, M., and Zhou, B. (2021) Weather and Climate Extreme Events in a Changing Climate Supplementary Material in Climate Change 2021: The Physical Science Basis. Contribution of Working Group I to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change [Masson-Delmotte, V., Zhai, P., Pirani, A., Connors, S.L., Péan, C., Berger, S., Caud, N., Chen, Y., Goldfarb, L., Gomis, M.I., Huang, M., Leitzell, K., Lonnoy, E., Matthews, J.B.R., Maycock, T.K., Waterfield, T., Yelekçi, O., Yu, R., and Zhou, B. (eds.)]. Available at: 11SM – Weather And Climate Extreme Events in a Changing Climate Supplementary Material (ipcc.ch)
Watkiss, P. and Betts, R.A. (2021). Method. In: The Third UK Climate Change Risk Assessment Technical Report [Betts, R.A., Haward, A.B. and Pearson, K.V. (eds.)]. Prepared for the Climate Change Committee, London. Available at: Chapter 2: Method – UK Climate Risk
This report has been prepared by the Government Actuary’s Department (GAD) at the request of ClimateXChange on behalf of the Scottish Government.
The report has been prepared for the use of ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government and is published on ClimateXChange’s website. Therefore, we acknowledge that it will likely have a wider audience than the intended recipients. However, other than ClimateXChange and Scottish Government, no person or third party is entitled to place any reliance on the contents of this report, except to any extent stated herein. GAD has no liability to any person or third party for any action taken or for any failure to act, either in whole or in part, on the basis of this report.
In preparing this report, GAD has relied on publicly available data and other information as described in the report. Any checks that GAD has made on this information are limited to those described in the report, including any checks on the overall reasonableness and constancy of the data. These checks do not represent a full independent audit of the data supplied. In particular, GAD has relied on the general completeness and accuracy of the information supplied without independent verification.
GAD provides both actuarial and other advice. For clarity, this report provides research findings and recommendations and as a result is not subject to the Technical Actuarial Standard TAS 100 issued by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) for actuarial work in the UK.
There is significant uncertainty involved when assessing climate risks. Care has been taken to ensure that, where material, this work has taken into consideration the latest climate change research and appropriate climate data.
The Institute and Faculty of Actuaries (IFoA), the regulatory body for GAD’s actuaries, has issued three climate change related risk alerts to members. These have all been considered when preparing this work.
Over time, as the global emissions pathway becomes clearer and there are advances in science and technology, our view of future climate risks will undoubtably change. Future developments may have a material impact on the results and conclusions contained in this work and care should be taken when referring back to this analysis after the date of issue.
One of the challenges for public sector organisations (and others) conducting scenario analysis is the range of potential approaches and assumptions that can be taken. Through preparing this guidance we have considered various other approaches in producing the final recommendations, some of which have been outlined in Section 4.
HM Government outlined the key climate change risks and opportunities faced by the UK today, considering 61 UK-wide climate risks across various sectors in the economy. Prioritised areas for action include risks to habitats, soil health, carbon stores, food supply, power systems, and human health from increased heat exposure.
Research conducted by the Alliance Manchester Business School in collaboration with the FRC delves into the practical processes and approaches used by UK companies engaged in climate scenario analysis. The report sheds light on motivations, value, common phases and challenges faced during this analysis, helping companies identify and prepare for climate change impacts on their business models. The study emphasises the importance of embedding climate-related scenario analysis into strategic planning processes.
The report outlines key climate risks affecting Scotland’s transport system and discusses strategic outcomes for road, rail, aviation and maritime networks. It emphasises a well-adapted, safe, reliable and resilient transport system, providing a framework based on up-to-date climate science addressing each network’s specific challenges.
The CCC assesses Scotland’s climate resilience progress. The report highlights adaptation efforts have stalled across sectors. CCC recommends clear targets, improved monitoring, and local initiatives are recommended for effective climate adaptation.
A 5-year initiative aimed at preparing Scotland for the challenges posed by climate change. The report emphasises urgent action on emissions cuts and links adaptation and mitigation efforts. It outlines policies and proposals to address climate risks across sectors, including threats to food, water, health, biodiversity and Scotland’s historic environment.
Scottish Government outlines actions to enhance Scotland’s resilience to climate change. It addresses challenges like heatwaves, flooding and sea-level rise which are already affecting the country. The plan focuses on five outcomes: Nature Connects, Communities, Public Services and Infrastructure, Economy, Industry, and Business, and international Action.
Department of Business and Trade (DBT) outlines regulations requirements on certain publicly quoted companies and large private companies to incorporate TCFD-aligned climate disclosures in their annual reports. Companies must reveal climate risks, management strategies, and the impact of climate change on their business. Focuses on enhancing transparency and informed decision-making about climate risks and opportunities.
DBT outlines regulations enhancing transparency for large UK traded and limited liability partnerships (LLPs) (meeting specific employee criteria) to include climate related disclosures in their strategic reports, including risks and opportunities.
The Department for Work and Pensions (DWP) regulations outline regulations requiring trustees of occupational pension schemes to understand climate change risks and opportunities, aligning with TCFD recommendations. The goal is to enhance governance quality and encourage proactive management of climate-related risks.
Defra outlines approach for enhancing climate adaptation reporting in the UK. Consultation seeks input from stakeholders on reporting requirements, guidance and risk assessment related to climate change impacts. Aims to improve transparency, informed decision-making and proactive management of climate risks within various sectors.
CCC evaluates Scotland’s progress in climate adaptation, particularly during the second Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programme (SCCAP2). Overall progress remains slow, with gaps in delivery and implementation. The (now recently published) SNAP3 must address these challenges, embed adaptation in legislation and enhance monitoring and evaluation systems.
TCFD aims to ensure consistent, comparable and reliable climate-related financial disclosures by companies. It covers four key areas: governance, strategy, risk management, and metrics and targets.
The European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) were adopted by the EU commission in 2023 to make corporate economic, social and governance (ESG) reporting across the EU more consistent, comparable, and achieve greater standardisation.
The ISSB outlines requirements for disclosing information about an entity’s climate-related risk and opportunities. This standard enhances transparency by guiding organisations in reporting climate impacts, strategies, and metrics.
The TCFD provides widely adoptable recommendations for organisations across sectors and jurisdictions, which aim to elicit decision-useful, forward-looking information that can be incorporated into mainstream financial findings.
The TCFD released guidance helping non-financial companies in using climate-related scenarios to assess risks and opportunities, contributing to strategy resilience and flexibility.
Accounting for Sustainability (A4S) has published guidance for finance teams on frequently asked questions on scenario analysis, which is useful for preparers of TCFD reports, although targeted towards the private sector.
The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) updated their listing rules (in 2020 for premium listed and 2021 for standard listed companies), and DBT amended the Companies Act in 2022 to bring in TCFD aligned reporting requirements for publicly listed companies and LLPs in the UK.
The Physical Climate Risk Assessment Methodology (PCRAM) developed by the Coalition for Climate Resilient Investment (CCRI), integrates physical climate risks (PCRs) into investment appraisal practices. It guides infrastructure investment practitioners in assessing climate risk analytics, credit quality and investment decisions. The CCRI aims to enhance investment decision-making and foster resilient economic and communities world-wide.
The Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT) provides guidance for comprehensive transition planning, emphasising the integration of adaptation and physical resilience considerations into transition plans.
The TPT sets out gold standard recommendations for developing and disclosing robust and credible transition plans. Aligned with international standards, this framework provides essential tools for businesses navigating the global transition to net zero.
The TPT provides essential guidance for robust and credible plan transition plan disclosures. It builds upon the TPT Disclosure Framework, offering practical recommendations and a valuable resource for navigating their global transition to net zero.
ClimateXChange investigates adaptive flood risk management planning in Scotland, focusing on addressing barriers identified in a 2019 report and examinates three case studies: Outer Hebrides coastal adaptation, Moray fluvial adaptation, and The Clyde tidal adaptation. The research implies the importance of a managed adaptive approach, flexibility, stakeholder involvement, and readiness assessments for successful adaptation investments.
The Scottish Government’s interim guidance on Coastal Change Adaptation Plans aims to support local authorities and their partners across Scotland. These plans go beyond Shoreline Management Plans by considering long-term adaptation and resilience for coastal communities and assets in the face of climate change and coastal shifts. The guidance emphasises principles of adaptation, natural system collaboration, and community engagement, providing a framework for safeguarding coastlines.
Network Rail published this report that focuses on understanding and managing climate change impact. It emphasises weather and climate risks, policy alignment, and investments in resilience. Implementation is still a challenge, but the organisation is committed to enhancing on-ground resilience.
Scotland’s Railway climate ready plan discusses improving railway assets to withstand climate challenges, incorporating expertise into decision-making, and laying groundwork for managing climate risks.
The IPCC report provides a comprehensive assessment of global climate change mitigation efforts. It covers near-to-mid-term strategies, sectoral perspectives, policy considerations, innovation, and technology. The report aims to guide stakeholders in addressing the climate crisis while ensuring sustainable development.
The CCC’s report assesses the UK Government’s actions in reducing emissions. Key highlights include the need for urgent policy implementation, transparent reporting, and collaboration with international frameworks. The report emphasises specific strategies such as demand-side policies, land use planning, and transitioning away from fossil fuels.
This Scottish Government report was a response to the 2022 CCC annual progress report. The report evaluates recommendations from the CCC with the Scottish Government accepting or partially accepting 98/99 recommendations.
This report presents summary analysis and key findings from 188 public sector bodies’ annual climate change reporting across the 2021/22 reporting period
Supplementary guidance to HM Treasury’s Green Book supports analysts and policy makers to ensure, where appropriate, that policies and projects are resilient to the effects of climate change and that these are considered when appraising options.
The summary presents comprehensive evidence on the current and future impacts of climate change in Scotland. It details the specific risks facing Scotland, including those related to weather extremes, biodiversity loss, and economic vulnerabilities. It aims to inform policy and action to enhance resilience and adaptability in the face of climate change across Scotland.
Stakeholder engagement
Organisations and individuals engaged with
We would like to thank the following organisations who contributed to our research and provided useful insights on their areas of expertise and experience of completing climate scenario analysis:
Climate Change Committee
Dynamic Coast
Edinburgh City Council
Forestry and Land Scotland
Highlands and Islands Airports Limited
Historic Environment Scotland
Met Office
NatureScot
Network Rail
Paul Watkiss Associates Limited
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA)
Scottish Government
Scottish Water
Sniffer
Transport Scotland
University of Glasgow.
Climate risks and opportunities
Climate risks and opportunities are often broken down into risks related to the physical impacts of climate change and risks related to the transition to a lower-carbon economy. The TCFD (2017) further breaks down transition and physical climate risks as summarised below.
Physical risks
Acute:
River and coastal flooding
Surface water flooding
Storm events – cyclone, hurricane etc
Storm sea level surge
Chronic:
Change in precipitation
Rising mean temperatures
Sea level rise and coastal change
Transition risks
Policy and legal:
Increasing price of GHG emissions
Enhanced emissions reporting requirements
Regulation of products and services
Exposure to litigation
Technology:
Substitution with lower emitting products and services
Unsuccessful investment in new technologies
Costs to transition to lower emissions technologies
Market:
Change in customer behaviour
Uncertainty in market systems
Increased cost of raw materials
Reputation:
Change in customer preferences
Stigmatisation of sector
Increased stakeholder concern or negative stakeholder feedback
Emission-based scenarios and global warming levels
IPCC Coupled Model Intercomparison Project Phase 5 (CMIP5) – used for the IPCC’s 5th assessment report and UKCP18 (Seneviratne et al., 2021):
RCP
Associated mid-century temperature increase relative to pre-industrial temperature (°C)
Multi-model average, 5-95% range
Associated end of century temperature increase relative to pre-industrial temperature (°C)
Multi-model average, 5-95% range
RCP 2.6
1.7 (1.3-2.2)
1.7 (1.1-2.3)
RCP 4.5
2.0 (1.5-2.6)
2.5 (1.8-3.2)
RCP 6.0
1.9 (1.4-2.4)
2.8 (2.3-3.6)
RCP 8.5
2.5 (1.9-3.2)
4.4 (3.2-5.5)
IPCC Coupled Model Intercomparison Project Phase 6 (CMIP6) – used for the IPCC’s 6th assessment report (Lee et al., 2021):
SSP-RCP
Associated mid-century temperature increase relative to pre-industrial temperature (°C)
Multi-model average, 5-95% range
Associated end of century temperature increase relative to pre-industrial temperature (°C)
Multi-model average, 5-95% range
SSP1 – 1.9
1.7 (1.1-2.4)
1.5 (1.0-2.2)
SSP1 – 2.6
1.9 (1.2-2.7)
2.0 (1.3-2.8)
SSP2 – 4.5
2.1 (1.5-3.0)
2.9 (2.1-4.0)
SSP3 – 7.0
2.3 (1.6-3.2)
3.9 (2.8-5.5)
SSP5 – 8.5
2.6 (1.8-3.4)
4.8 (3.6-6.5)
How to cite this publication:
Grace, E., Marcinko, C., Paterson, C., Stobbs, W. (2024) ‘Using future climate scenarios to support today’s decision making’ ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5567
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
Whilst the focus of this report is on public bodies, there are many aspects that will be applicable and useful to private sector organisations. Therefore, throughout the report, we refer to “organisations” to encompass both public bodies and private companies. ↑
In some instances (for example Local Authorities) this will include the whole area where the organisation has influence. ↑
This project was commissioned to inform the Scottish Government on the evidence and arguments for and against the inclusion of metered energy consumption data in Energy Performance Certificates (EPCs). Methods included a literature review and interviews with stakeholders in Scotland, the UK and Sweden.
We outline the potential opportunities for and barriers to using energy consumption data; the practicalities of obtaining and using energy consumption data; and the value of including such data, when considering the variables that affect actual energy usage.
Key findings
Metered energy consumption data could be used in EPCs in two ways to provide information to occupants or potential occupants:
to provide more accurate information on building fabric performance, known as an asset rating
to give a rating of how energy is used in a building when compared with similar buildings, known as an operational rating.
These two uses of metered consumption data – asset rating and operational rating – are not mutually exclusive and could both be included in EPCs. This could be developed as a dynamic, digital EPC.
Neither of these two uses could be implemented immediately as 57% of homes in Scotland do not yet have smart meters, which are the most reliable means of collecting metered energy consumption data. Particular difficulties include:
A small proportion of homes will never have smart meter capability, including homes with unregulated heating fuels such as oil, LPG, or solid fuels.
There is no process to access smart meter data to generate EPCs. The Smart Meter Energy Data Repository Programme is investigating the commercial feasibility of a repository that would enable this.
The most straightforward use for metered energy consumption data is to include the operational rating value on an EPC alongside a reference figure, such as a national average, modelled archetype, or historic consumption data for a property.
Correcting energy consumption in a property for weather and normalising it by floor area would enable potential occupants to compare properties.
An operational rating could be included as a part of the EPC or exist as a separate document.
EPCs should retain an asset rating that is based on standard assumptions of occupancy and use, to allow comparison between properties. This could be based on modelled or measured data.
For an accurate asset rating, metered energy consumption data can be used to calculate the heat transfer coefficient of buildings. This requires collecting internal temperature data, as well as metered energy consumption data. The latest smart meter in-home display units have inbuilt temperature sensors. The possibility of transmitting temperature readings alongside meter readings is being investigated by the Data Communications Company.
Accurate heat transfer coefficient figures can inform retrofit decisions. Further consideration is needed around the level of retrofit recommendations provided by EPCs and how these are used in policy decisions. Using metered energy consumption data to inform retrofit recommendations may be more suited to detailed retrofit plans such as renovation roadmaps.
Consumer consent will be needed to collect and process metered energy consumption data.
Recommendations
This report explores whether it is possible for metered energy consumption data to be used within EPCs and outlines two ways in which this data could be useful. In order to progress with either or both of these options, we recommend that the Scottish Government define the purpose and intended outcome of using metered energy consumption data within EPCs.
Our research has highlighted that further work is needed in this area to explore:
The practicalities of collecting required data, including:
Metered energy consumption data at the individual building level, rather than from aggregated datasets. This will require a standardised process for collecting consumer consent. Public sector bodies can obtain household-level data without the need for individual consent through the legal basis of ‘public task’. However, this is for aggregated data and there are no examples of data being used to provide insights into individual households, so further investigation is needed into the legal basis for this. Legal routes for this were not explored as part of this research.
Processes for data collection, as these are mostly dependent on the rollout of smart meters. An alternative methodology will need to be developed for households using unregulated fuels, as their heating consumption will not be captured in smart meter data.
Additional information from occupants, which can be used to contextualise energy consumption data when used for an operational rating. Examples of this kind of data include the number of occupants or typical heating regime. Further work is required to understand the minimum amount of contextual information to enable metered energy consumption data to be useful.
Internal temperature data for the purpose of calculating a heat transfer coefficient as part of an asset rating. This would require the mass rollout of internal temperature sensors, which are already included in some in-home display devices. Internal temperature data could also be useful contextual data for an operational rating.
Different formats that could be used to display consumption data when used for an operational rating. This should consider whether consumption data would work best as one of multiple ratings within the EPC or separately.
For energy-generating homes, how total energy consumption, generation, export and cost can be displayed in a straight-forward manner.
Any regulatory or practical barriers to inputting the heat transfer coefficient as a measured value in Standard Assessment Procedure calculations for the asset rating.
The value of Display Energy Certificates for non-domestic public buildings in England and Wales, and whether there would be value in expanding their use in Scotland.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
Term
Definition
Asset rating
A measure of building fabric performance. It provides no information about how the building is used in practice.
BEIS
Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy. Split in 2023 to form three departments, including the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ).
CCC
Climate Change Committee. An independent, statutory body whose purpose is to advise the UK and devolved governments on emissions targets and then report to Parliament.
DCC
Data Communications Company. A licenced monopoly regulated by Ofgem. Responsible for linking smart meters in homes and businesses with energy suppliers, network operators and energy service companies.
DEC
Display Energy Certificate. Shows the energy performance of a building based on the operation rating, on a graphical scale from A (very efficient) to G (least efficient). Measures the actual energy usage of a building based on annual consumption.
DESNZ
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero. The UK Government department responsible for securing long-term energy supply, reducing bills, and encouraging greater energy efficiency.
DNO
Distribution Network Operator. A company licensed to distribute electricity in the UK.
DOR
Domestic Operational Rating. A proposed operational rating scheme for domestic properties that quantifies the actual, in-use energy demand, greenhouse gas emissions and energy costs of homes.
EER
Energy Efficiency Rating. A review of a property’s energy efficiency which is then scored. The energy efficiency charts are divided into rating bands ranging from A+ to G, where A+ is very efficient and G is least efficient.
EPBD
Energy Performance of Building Directive. The key policy instrument to increase the energy performance of buildings across the European Union. Originally introduced in 2002, it was recast in 2010 and revised in 2018 and 2021.
EPC
Energy Performance Certificate. A document that provides information about the energy efficiency of a building. Used in many countries including Scotland.
FIT
Feed-in-tariff. A support mechanism designed to pay small scale renewable energy generators for the electricity that is exported to the grid.
GDPR
General Data Protection Regulation. A regulation that enhances how people can access information about them and places limitations on what organisations can do with personal data.
HDD
Heating Degree Day. A measurement designed to quantify the demand for energy needed to heat a building. It is the number of degrees that a day’s average temperature is below a base temperature of 15.5°C.
HTC
Heat Transfer Coefficient. A common metric for the thermal performance of a building. It describes the rate of heat transfer between two areas.
IEA
International Energy Agency. An international body that provides policy recommendations, analysis and data on the global energy sector.
IHD
In-home display. A portable device with a screen showing energy usage and its associated cost.
kWh
Kilowatt hour. A measure of how much energy is used per hour.
MEPI
Measured Energy Performance Indicator. A method to determine the energy performance of a building based on measured energy use.
MEP
Measured Energy Performance. A tool that utilises accurate measurements of the HTC of a property, along with an RdSAP-style survey to produce a more accurate EPC rating for a property.
MPG
Miles per gallon. Used to describe how many miles a vehicle can travel for every gallon of fuel used.
Operational rating
Shows the actual energy usage of a building.
Performance Gap
The difference between predicted and actual performance of a building’s fabric. Also sometimes used to describe the difference between predicted energy usage and actual (metered) energy usage, therefore also including the impact of occupancy factors.
PHPP
Passive House Planning Package. Modelling software developed by the Passivhaus institute. Used when designing energy efficient buildings to calculate their operational energy use and carbon emissions.
RdSAP
Reduced Data Standard Assessment Procedure. A simplified version of SAP calculated using a set of assumptions about the dwelling based on conventions and requirements at the time it was constructed.
Regulated energy
The energy which is consumed by the building and its fixed utilities including space heating, cooling, hot water, ventilation, lighting.
RHI
Renewable Heat Incentive. A Government financial incentive to promote the use of renewable heat.
SAP
Standard Assessment Procedure. The method for calculating the energy performance of dwellings in the UK. Scores typically range from 1 to 100+, with higher scores indicating more efficient building stock. SAP is owned by the UK Government. Building Research Establishment (BRE) is responsible for the development of SAP.
SBEM
Standard Building Energy Model. Government approved methodology that calculates the energy required to heat, cool, ventilate and light a non-dwelling.
SHCS
Scottish House Condition Survey. A national survey designed to look at the physical condition of Scotland’s homes as well as the experience of householders.
SMETER technologies
Smart Meter Enabled Thermal Efficiency Ratings technologies that measure the thermal performance of homes using smart meters and other data.
Unregulated energy
The energy which is consumed by the building in the form of fixtures or appliances like refrigeration, TVs, computers, kettles, microwaves, hobs, and ovens. The usage of these appliances varies based on occupants’ choices and behaviours.
US DoE
United States Department of Energy. Department of the US federal government that oversees national energy policy and manages domestic energy production and conservation.
ZDEH
Zero Direct Emissions Heating systems are systems which produce zero direct emissions at the point of use.
Introduction
This research has been commissioned in response to calls on the Scottish Government to make use of metered energy consumption data within Scottish EPCs. A common criticism of EPCs is that they do not provide useful information to householders about the actual energy consumption and real-life performance of properties. As a result, EPCs can be perceived as unreliable and unhelpful.
Increasing evidence shows that there are significant and consistent gaps between properties’ actual energy consumption and the consumption modelled in EPCs (BEIS, 2021; Few et al., 2023; The Times, 2023). EPCs were not designed to predict actual consumption (see Section 3). This raises the question of whether the methodology or format would benefit from including metered consumption data. The installation of smart meters in an increasing number of Scotland’s homes presents an opportunity to collect this data. In this report, we explore how such data could be incorporated into EPCs to potentially improve their usefulness and reliability.
The question of using energy consumption data is complex – there are many ways it could be included, and each has different implications. This report sets out two key uses for energy consumption data: to inform an asset rating; and to inform an operational rating.
EPC Overview and Research Scope
Energy Performance Certificates (EPCs)
An EPC is a document that provides information about the energy efficiency of a building. Their introduction was driven by the European Union’s Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD). Article 11 of the EPBD states the original purpose of EPCs was “to make it possible for owners or tenants of the building or building unit to compare and assess its energy performance” (Directive 2010/31/EU, 2010). Article 2 specifies that EPCs are intended to show “the energy demand associated with a typical use of the building” (ibid.). This makes it clear that the original purpose of EPCs was to enable the comparison of building performance under ‘typical’ conditions.
Annex I also states that the energy performance of buildings can be evaluated using either the calculated (producing an asset rating) or actual energy consumption (producing an operational rating) (Directive 2010/31/EU, 2010). Methods based on measured energy consumption must separate out building performance from other factors, primarily occupancy. The variability of these other factors can be controlled when using calculated methods. However, calculated methods are often associated with inaccuracy (Crawley et al., 2019; Hardy and Glew, 2019) and pose the problem that what is built can be different from what was designed or modelled (the performance gap).
In practice, most EPC methodologies use a calculated approach, incorporating real building data from surveys or physical tests (Arcipowska et al., 2014). In Scotland, as in the rest of the UK, EPCs are produced using SAP, RdSAP and SBEM methodologies. SAP (Standard Assessment Procedure) is used to generate EPCs for both new and existing residential buildings. Full SAP is primarily used for new dwellings whereas RdSAP (Reduced Data SAP) is used for existing dwellings. RdSAP uses the same calculation as full SAP but with a simplified data collection process. This enables the calculation to take place where a complete data set for a property is unavailable, and for a lower cost than full SAP.
Existing SAP methodologies used to calculate the domestic asset rating use standard assumptions for occupancy, energy-use, and climate to ensure that the thermal performance can be compared under the same set of conditions. This asset rating is not reflective of how the building is used, for example due to the specific energy requirements of the occupants or the local climate.
SBEM (Standard Building Energy Model) is used to produce EPCs for non-domestic buildings. SBEM utilises a different calculation methodology to SAP. For the generation of an EPC, the SBEM calculation utilises standardised information for several factors to allow comparability between similar building types. Like SAP, SBEM requires a certain amount of standardisation to enable comparability between buildings for benchmarking purposes.
Research scope
This report considers whether metered energy consumption data can and should be used in the production of EPCs in Scotland. This brings with it questions around the suitability of EPCs for their various uses. However, the purpose of this report is not to assess whether EPCs (or SAP / RdSAP) are the most appropriate tool for the functions set out in Section 4. Additionally, this report does not detail the limitations of EPCs or SAP. There is an existing body of research which evidences these limitations, for example Jones Lang LaSalle (2012), Kelly et al. (2012), Jenkins et al. (2017), Hardy et al. (2019), and BEIS (2021).
The scope of this research is to consider whether it is possible to access and include metered energy consumption data on Scottish EPCs, and whether this would be a valuable addition. In some instances, we have suggested that the information provided by metered energy consumption data may be useful but would be better presented elsewhere and not as part of an EPC. The focus of the research is on domestic EPCs as tools for providing information to occupants, rather than EPCs as a policy tool or for benchmarking purposes.
The focus of this report is domestic EPCs. The use of metered energy consumption data for non-domestic EPCs is briefly explored in Section 10.
Functions of EPCs in Scotland
EPCs in Scotland are used for a range of purposes, including (but not limited to):
Providing information to potential buyers and tenants on a building’s energy use, and estimated energy costs.
Providing information to property owners on suggested retrofit measures.
Serving as a policy tool to measure, regulate and set targets for the reduction of carbon emissions from housing.
Facilitating housing stock analysis by landlords to plan and implement improvements.
Supporting national housing stock analysis through the Scottish House Condition Survey (SHCS).
Acting as a proxy indicator to support the identification of households in fuel poverty, for example for the targeting of fuel poverty prevention or alleviation services.
This report does not assess how well EPCs can perform each of these functions. The use of energy consumption data within EPCs will have implications for all of the above uses. Our research considers whether the use of energy consumption data could improve EPCs for the following specific purposes:
Providing information on a building’s fabric performance.
Providing an estimate of energy costs.
Providing information on how buildings are actually used.
Informing retrofit decisions.
The case for including energy consumption data
The arguments for using energy consumption data depend on the use-case of EPCs that is being considered. As outlined in Section 4, EPCs now serve a number of purposes for which they were not originally designed. This, along with issues such as inconsistencies between assessors, means that they are perceived as unreliable (Crawley et al., 2020; Kelly et al., 2012). A major driver for using energy consumption data is the premise that this will make EPCs more reliable for users, by reducing reliance on assumptions and assessor judgement.
Currently, EPCs can be of limited value to householders who may expect EPCs to provide information reflecting actual energy consumption. Similarly, for policy or housing stock management decisions, EPC asset ratings do not reflect the actual energy consumption of buildings. The need for policy decisions to be based on actual rather than modelled energy efficiency of buildings is also a key argument for the use of metered energy consumption data in EPCs (Baker & Mould, 2018; Lomas et al., 2019).
This report considers two key uses for energy consumption data in EPCs. It can be used to provide a more accurate asset rating or to provide an operational rating. An asset rating is a measure of building fabric performance and does not consider how a building is used. An operational rating based on energy consumption data can help understand how a building is used, which is not currently addressed by EPCs. This has the potential to provide information to householders on actual energy costs associated with a building, as well as supporting wider decarbonisation policy.
Reducing the performance gap
Improving the accuracy of EPCs through the use of energy consumption data is intended to reduce the performance gap. The performance gap refers to the difference between modelled energy performance (e.g. through SAP) and measured energy performance (Fitton et al., 2021). There are a significant number of variables which influence this gap. These include factors related to the building fabric, building use, and the accuracy of the model.
The term ‘performance gap’ usually refers to the discrepancy between designed and as-built fabric performance, particularly for new-builds. However, it is also used to refer to the difference between predicted energy usage and actual (metered) energy usage. When used in this way, the term is also incorporating the impact of occupancy factors.
Recent research found that even when other factors are accounted for (i.e. in households that meet EPC standard assumptions), EPCs overpredict energy use (Few et al., 2023). This suggests that the methodology and its underlying assumptions also contribute to the performance gap.
Improving the accuracy of asset ratings
Energy consumption data can provide a more accurate calculation of a building’s fabric performance. Utilising real-world data to calculate actual space heating demand could improve accuracy and therefore, increase consumer confidence in the reliability of the asset rating. A more accurate asset rating would enable more accurate predictions of annual energy cost. The cost metric would be predicted under standardised conditions, which would maintain the ability to make comparisons between buildings.
A programme of work by the International Energy Agency known as Annex 71 sought to test demand amongst industry stakeholders[1] for a method to calculate HTC. Their survey results indicated a high level of demand for this across several different use-cases including energy certification (Fitton et al., 2021).
Providing an operational rating
Currently EPCs are based on a building fabric model, and do not consider how energy is used by occupants. Asset ratings alone are not sufficient to reduce energy demand. This requires measuring and achieving reductions in actual energy consumption in buildings (Few et al., 2023; Jones Lang LaSalle, 2012; The Times, 2023).
The use of energy consumption data can provide tailored information for consumers regarding the potential energy costs to occupy a specific property, i.e., a measure of the operational performance of the property. Research has shown that the ability to compare energy use with that of similar dwellings is perceived as beneficial to householders (Zuhaib et al., 2021). In order for comparisons between dwellings to be useful, some contextual information is needed to account for occupancy factors which impact energy use (Section 6).
The ways in which this contextual information could be collected and used are discussed in Section 9. However, some stakeholders (Richard Fitton, Professor of Building Performance; Alan Beal, Bacra; Thomas Levefre, Managing Director, Etude) were wary of using energy consumption data in this way, as we will never be able to fully account for or control all the variables that affect how energy is used in the home.
A significant benefit of introducing an operational rating is to provide more accurate cost saving figures to improve the energy efficiency improvement recommendations. Actual consumption data could also enable a better assessment of the impact of retrofit measures and whether they perform as intended.
There is evidence that householders would find it useful to see actual energy costs on an EPC. There are number of ways this information could be contextualised or compared. A study of five European countries (Zuhaib et al., 2022) found that the majority of householders who responded to their survey would like to see the energy costs of the previous occupier included in EPCs, as well as the energy cost of ‘similar’ households[2]. However, the same study notes that energy consumption comparisons were was perceived as more useful when comparing against the previous year than with similar households. Year-on-year comparisons of energy use may be more appropriately provided by energy suppliers rather than on an EPC (see Section 7.2 for detail on dynamic EPCs).
Informing retrofit decisions
Another purpose of EPCs (as described in EBPD) is to provide improvement recommendations for householders. The Scottish Government’s latest consultation on EPCs states that EPCs are intended as a starting point for householders, but not to provide bespoke recommendations for retrofit (Scottish Government, 2023). However, the information currently provided to householders on an EPC could still be improved using energy consumption data, particularly in relation to predicted savings (Baker & Mould, 2018). Energy consumption data could be used to provide accurate predictions of savings from retrofit measures (Cozza et al., 2020).
Aside from informing individual householders, retrofit recommendations on EPCs and their associated predicted savings are also used to support the targeting of investment in retrofit. The scale of investment required for retrofit means that estimates of potential financial savings must be accurate. Laurent et al. (2013) argue that the economics of retrofit should not be evaluated using normative models. This is because all normative models (not just SAP) have been shown to overestimate potential savings and the cost effectiveness of retrofit measures. For these reasons, if the Scottish Government intends to continue to use EPC retrofit recommendations as a policy tool for directing funding, further investigation is needed into how energy consumption data could support this (Baker & Mould, 2018).
The use of energy consumption data in EPCs could better reflect the actual energy performance of building fabric (Section 8). This would provide a more realistic baseline asset rating on which to base recommended retrofit measures. However, the recommendations on an EPC would still be generated automatically by SAP based on general property characteristics. Metered energy consumption data could also play a role in measuring the impact of retrofit, as explained in Section 8.
Energy consumption data provides information on how a building is used. It can therefore be used to support the development of bespoke retrofit recommendations. However, such EPCs are not the tool for developing bespoke retrofit plans (Scottish Government, 2023). PAS 2035 or renovation roadmaps (Small-Warner & Sinclair, 2022) provide a more appropriate framework for this. This view was supported by interviewees (Kevin Gornall and Sam Mancey of DESNZ; Richard Atkins, Chartered Architect) who stated that retrofit plans should be delivered through the industry professionals and not through EPCs. An example of a tool being developed to support this is provided in Box. 1
Box 1: HTC-Up: Informing retrofit using metered energy consumption data
Chameleon Technology were recently awarded funding through the Green Home Finance Accelerator project from DESNZ to develop the HTC-Up project (Chameleon Technology, 2023). Using smart meter data alongside internal and external temperature data, a more accurate HTC figure can be generated which better reflects the actual thermal energy performance of a property. With this data, Chameleon Technology designs a programme for retrofit specific to the home. They direct householders to approved suppliers and installers, and also offer financing solutions if needed.
Validating models and assumptions
The Elmhurst Almanac (Elmhurst Energy, 2022) refers to the need to use the ‘Golden Triangle’ to inform decision-making. This refers to a building’s asset rating (predicted energy cost and consumption based on standard occupancy), occupancy rating (predicted energy consumption based on how the building is used), and actual energy consumption (smart meter data). In the Golden Triangle, smart meter data is used as a validation point for comparison with figures generated as part of the asset and occupancy ratings. This validation can help to identify issues with performance and where to focus improvements.
Metered consumption data could also be used to improve assumptions contained within SAP/RdSAP. For example, Hughes et al. (2016) showed that the difference between modelled and actual energy consumption could be reduced by using assumptions for internal temperature, number of heating hours, and the length of heating season, that are developed based on actual consumption data.
At a larger scale, metered energy consumption data could also be used to calibrate and improve the modelling used for EPCs (Thomson and Jenkins, 2023). Similar exercises have been undertaken to validate the PHPP model (Mitchell and Natarajan, 2020; Passipedia, n.d.). Using real energy consumption data for this purpose was explored as part of the X-tendo project (Zuhaib et al., 2021). The project findings suggest that real energy consumption data from large housing stock datasets can be used to improve models and for benchmarking performance levels. This particular use is not explored further in this report as it is out of scope. Our focus is on EPCs as a tool for providing information to building occupants.
Factors affecting metered energy consumption
Many variables impact on the energy use of a building. These can be broadly split into variables impacting the building fabric, system efficiency (e.g. heating) and those that impact how energy is used within the building. All of these are influenced by wider variables such as fluctuations in energy prices, deprivation levels, social and cultural norms, and changes in climatic conditions.
There is no consensus on the relative importance that can be attributed to either building characteristics or to consumption behaviour in terms of their impact on domestic energy consumption. The variables affecting household energy consumption are understudied (Fuerst et al., 2019) and strong conclusions about how to control or account for them cannot be drawn. Jones et al. (2015) found that 62 household level factors have been studied in the literature as potentially influencing domestic electricity use[3], with varying significance.
In terms of occupancy factors, the review suggests that the number of occupants, the presence of teenagers, and level of household income and disposable income all have a significant impact on electricity consumption. Electrical appliances make a very significant contribution to a household’s electricity consumption (ibid.), however the review noted that only a few previous studies have analysed the effects of the ownership, use and power demand of appliances. The review also indicates that the following building fabric characteristics have a significant effect: dwelling age, number of rooms, number of bedrooms, and total floor area.
Building fabric
When considering the physical building characteristics alone, there is little consensus on the significance of physical building characteristics, other than floor area, that impact energy consumption. Research consistently suggests a significant positive correlation between floor area and consumption (ibid.), mostly associated with demand for space heating.
There is little consensus on the impact of dwelling age. Some studies reviewed by Jones et al. (2015) found newer dwellings have a higher electricity demand, attributed to high consumption appliances such as air conditioning. Other studies observed that newer homes had lower consumption due to efficient appliances and better insulation levels. Several studies also concluded there was no relationship, including a UK study by Hamilton et al. (2013).
Built-form type (such as terraced, detached, semi-detached) has also been investigated and a large number of studies concluded that electrical energy consumption increases with the degree of detachment of a building. However, it is not clear whether this relationship is explained by the building fabric or by occupancy factors. In general, the literature suggests that the influence of built-form type on electricity consumption is related to floor area. However, building occupancy is also a possible reason. For example, Wyatt (2013) attributed lower electricity consumption in bungalows to the fact they are normally occupied by elderly residents with comparatively lower energy consumption than the rest of the population. The review by Jones et al. (2015) suggests that there is a relationship between the level of detachment of dwellings and electricity consumption, but the effect could not be determined as either positive or negative.
Occupancy factors
A regression analysis of household energy consumption in England concluded that gas usage was largely determined by occupancy characteristics such as income and household composition, rather than physical characteristics of the building (Fuerst et al., 2019). This contrasts with the findings from other regression model studies across several countries which report that building characteristics have a greater effect on domestic energy consumption than occupancy characteristics (such as Santin et al., 2009, Estiri, 2014, Huebner et al., 2015).
Fuel poverty is another factor which impacts energy consumption. Levels of fuel poverty in Scotland are geographically uneven across the country, and are higher in rural areas (Changeworks, 2023). Fuel poverty is associated with coping mechanisms such as only heating one room – behaviours which would have a significant impact on energy use. It is well-recognised that households in homes with poor energy efficiency tend to ration energy, known as the ‘prebound effect’ (Sunikka-Blank and Glavin, 2012).
Any use of energy consumption data will need to be attuned to, for example, the difference between energy rationing and energy saving behaviours, and avoid approaches that inadvertently ‘reward’ underheating through favourable EPC ratings. For example, it would be problematic if a household with higher-than-standard heating regimes, such as for health reasons, received a more negative EPC rating. This highlights the importance of collecting internal temperature data (to measure heating outcomes), alongside consumption data (Section 8.1.1).
Regulated and unregulated energy use
The question of how and whether to include consumption data on EPCs largely relates to the purpose of doing so. Not all energy use is relevant to all audiences. The SAP calculations used for EPCs only consider regulated energy use, which includes energy used for heating and cooling, domestic hot water, mechanical ventilation, and fixed lighting. The total energy consumption of a property includes other uses (unregulated energy), such as appliances. This is primarily dependent on the occupants. Although unregulated energy generally accounts for a minority of the total energy consumption in most properties, it is also more likely to fluctuate more often. Factors that can impact this could be an occupant starting to work from home, an occupant moving out, or purchasing a new electrical appliance (Jones et al., 2015).
A householder may be interested in understanding the efficiency of their appliances, but this is less relevant to a building technician working to improve the building fabric or heating system. However, industry experts have suggested that SAP 11 should consider both regulated and unregulated energy use (BEIS, 2021). In part, this is to enable EPCs to better support Net Zero, which requires a reduction in all energy use – not just regulated energy. Another reason is that unregulated energy use is becoming a larger proportion of total energy use as buildings become more energy efficient and use less energy for heating.
Disaggregating energy use
Metered energy consumption data will account for both regulated and unregulated energy, and unless submetering is used it will be difficult to disaggregate these without relying on assumptions. This disaggregation issue was highlighted in the European X-tendo project (Hummel et al., 2022), where four countries tested a methodology for including energy consumption data on EPCs. Three of the countries encountered challenges around determining the energy consumption used for different purposes in the buildings. Metered data for the different energy uses was not available, so the consumption data for space heating and hot water were estimated based on energy bills. This was perceived as complex, time consuming, and inexact (ibid.).
In properties with natural gas heating, disaggregation is not a significant issue, as most of the metered gas consumption can be assumed to be used for heating. However, it poses a challenge in the increasing number of properties with electric heating. There is a risk that relying on assumptions of typical use will replicate the issues that the inclusion of metered data is trying to solve. In Sweden, the disaggregation of energy uses is carried out by the energy assessor based on their competence and judgement. Considering the existing inconsistencies identified among assessors in the generation of UK EPCs (Jenkins et al., 2017), it is likely this approach would introduce further inaccuracies in EPC output.
Box 2: An example scenario of the need to disaggregate energy use
A property with electric heating has recently had internal wall insulation installed. The household is interested in using an energy consumption metric to understand whether the wall insulation has resulted in the expected decrease in energy consumption. However, the same month they also bought an electric vehicle which they charge at home. Without disaggregating their electricity usage, they are unable to tell if their wall insulation is performing as predicted.
The use of sub-metering could help to alleviate these challenges. Chartered Architect Richard Atkins suggested that, in the future, smart meters will be fed into from a series of data points within the home (e.g., heating system, renewable generation assets, storage assets). However, Alan Beal of Bacra indicated that this granularity of metering is unlikely to be available for at least 10 years, and as noted in Section 8.1, regular smart meters are far from fully rolled out in Scotland.
Properties with energy generation
Further consideration is needed for properties with energy generating assets, which adds a layer of complexity to the question of how different aspects of household energy data can be displayed for different audiences.
MCS standards already require a generation meter, and smart meters record the amount of energy exported to the grid, so this data should already be available (Jon Stinson of Building Research Solutions), but it will need to be represented in a way that is legible to the relevant audiences. For example, David Allinson (Building Energy Research Group, University of Loughborough) suggested that consumers would want to see historic levels of energy generation displayed on an EPC.
Overall, the challenge is to design a methodology and an output that works for all properties in Scotland, from properties with no metered heating system and no smart meters, to those with complex systems that include various types of energy generation.
Considerations for using metered energy consumption data
Practicalities of data collection
The potential for using metered data to understand buildings’ energy performance is largely linked to smart meters, which provide accurate and frequent meter readings. The number of smart meters continues to increase. As of March 2023, 57% of all gas and electricity meters in the UK were smart (National Audit Office, 2023). However, in most of Scotland, the rates of domestic smart electricity meters were lower (43%), with rates below 10% in Na h-Eileanan Siar, the Orkney Islands, and the Shetland Islands (DESNZ, 2023). This has implications for the approaches reviewed in this report.
Accessing smart meter data
Aside from the rollout, the main challenge associated with accessing smart meter data relates to where the data is stored and how it can be shared. This also relates to General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) (Section 7.3). Energy consumption data is considered personal data under current GDPR and requires the consumer’s consent to access it. Consumption data (and export profiles in homes with generation technologies) are stored on individual meters.
There are currently two ways that third parties can access smart meter data (Energy Systems Catapult, 2023), though both require explicit consent from the consumer:
Organisations (such as energy suppliers) can be integrated into the smart metering system. These organisations must lay out their approach to obtaining householder consent during the onboarding process. Work is underway within the DCC to make the on-boarding process easier and more streamlined.
Through a Consumer Access Device (CAD). This is a read-only monitor fitted to the home area network. These can only be fitted by registered users of the DCC’s systems.
DESNZ are currently exploring options for creating a central repository for smart meter data through their Smart Meter Energy Data Repository Programme. The aim of this is to explore the feasibility of creating a central repository which would support the innovation of services and products for the benefit of consumers and the wider network. This could include all types of smart meter data, either aggregated or at householder level. The primary focus of projects funded through this programme is to enable access to aggregated data sets.
Public sector bodies, or any organisation carrying out a specific task in the public interest, can access household metered energy data without the need for individual consent. This is through the legal basis of ‘public task’. However, currently this route is only used to access aggregated consumption data. There are no current examples of data being used to provide insights at the individual level. For example, metered gas consumption data is collected by DESNZ from individual households (through Xoserve[4]) for the purpose of compiling subnational consumption statistics. In this instance, individual consent is not required from the householder, and data is presented in aggregate. Legal routes for accessing individual household consumption data under the basis of public task were not explored as part of this research. Further investigation is needed to understand the GDPR considerations.
Aggregated data sets could be used as a validation point to support the improvement of the existing SAP methodology (Section 5.5), though would have little benefit for the two approaches outlined in later sections of this report (improving the asset rating or calculating operational rating for individual EPCs). Our discussions with stakeholders indicate that the current focus of work is to enable access to aggregated smart meter data.
Matt James of the DCC explained that organisations seeking to access smart meter data via DCC must undertake a series of technical, security and administrative steps to on-board and integrate with the smart meter system.
Several policy initiatives, such as ‘Data for Good’ (Energy Systems Catapult, 2023) are making the case for improved, appropriate access to smart meter data for public benefit. An alternative access route to aggregated data is through the electrical Distribution Network Operators (DNOs). DNOs currently have access to anonymised half-hourly smart meter data, for the purpose of delivering an efficient network. By February 2024 DNOs will be obligated to report smart meter data as aggregated and anonymised open access data (interview with Matt James of the DCC). Phase 2 of the Smart Meter Energy Data: Public Interest Advisory Group Project is exploring how smart meter data collected by DNOs could be of value in delivering wider public policy objectives (Sustainability First & Centre for Sustainable Energy, 2021).
Properties without smart meters
For homes without smart meters there are sources of data for analogue (non-smart) meters. ElectraLink is responsible for operating the UK’s central energy data transfer function. They have access to metered electricity data, including from analogue meters, every time the meter is settled[5]. ElectraLink estimates that 95% of UK households with analogue meters have at least annual electricity meter data available (interview with ElectraLink) which may be a useful source of energy consumption data for EPCs. Similar daa is collected for gas meters by Xoserve. However, infrequent meter readings from occupants can result in assumed energy use based on the suppliers’ algorithms. This would not be an accurate measure of energy consumption.
Different strategies would be needed to collect non-smart metered data for the different approaches explored in Sections 9 and 10. The SmartHTC approach (see Section 9) developed by Build Test Solutions overcomes this by being able to also work with just an opening and closing meter reading over a set period. In such cases the meter readings could be read by an energy assessor or surveyor, or could be supplied manually by the householder. The latter could introduce a risk of incorrect readings, deliberately or not (Zuhaib et al., 2021).
Alternatively, an assessor could take the manual meter readings, though this would add additional cost. As a workaround for homes undertaking retrofit monitoring without smart meters, JG Architects fit additional monitors to capture live energy data over a set time period. The representative from JG Architects suggested it is more valuable to capture time series energy use data than static meter readings. Time series data provides more detail about how the property is performing.
The risk from incorrect readings depends on how the data is used; it is more serious if the data is used as the input data on an EPC with policy implications, but less concerning if the data only serves the purpose of providing an additional metric for householders to better understand their energy usage. Given the large number of properties in Scotland without smart meters, this should be given significant consideration.
Properties heated with unregulated (unmetered) fuels
The stakeholders agreed that properties heated with unregulated fuels (such as oil, coal, wood, and biofuels) pose the most difficult challenge. As noted by Richard Fitton, Professor of Building Performance, these properties are out of scope of the smart meter rollout and at risk of being excluded from new approaches to EPCs that use metered data. Lomas et al. (2019) state that their proposed Domestic Operation Rating method (Section 9) will not work for homes using these types of fuels.
Different solutions could be implemented depending on the specific approach but would be associated with significant uncertainty and be difficult to implement. Build Test Solutions suggested an overnight test that uses direct electric heaters[6]. This requires a property to be vacant for the 15-hour test period. It is also possible to add meters into LPG and oil supply feeds, which could be installed temporarily and then removed and reused. These are not generally fitted as standard. This does not overcome the issue of metering solid fuels.
Jon Stinson discussed that Building Research Solutions (BRS) has navigated this challenge by backtracking energy consumption from invoices, though noted that this is a time-consuming process. He also suggested a requirement for those using solid fuel to install some sort of heat meter (as with RHI, FIT and generation meters). This would still rely on some form of modelling and would also need an interface or programme through which people can submit their meter readings.
Alternatively, Richard Atkins, Chartered Architect, suggests instigating a requirement on coal and oil suppliers to keep a record and to provide this– though there would be no certainty of how the fuel is used in the property. Sam Mancey from DESNZ noted that for this data to be useful you would also need to know the length of time between refills to understand how long it takes to use a specific quantity.
Given the move toward ZDEH (Zero Direct Emissions Heating) systems, consideration should be given to whether it is proportionate to develop a system for assessing the metered energy consumption of properties using alternative fuels. An estimation based on an annual measure of fuel use may be more appropriate and proportionate (Lomas et al., 2019), although less accurate.
Dynamic EPCs
Most stakeholders supported proposals for dynamic EPCs. These will provide improved opportunities to utilise energy consumption data. Dynamic EPCs are live reports, and this will allow for some data inputs to be updated on a more regular basis than the required EPC timeline (currently 10 years but proposed to be 5 years). This could result in the inclusion of energy pricing or carbon emission factors.
Dynamic EPCs could also allow users to input their own contextual data (see 9.3) to tailor the reported consumption data to their own usage patterns. Stakeholders proposed a public EPC which contains building performance information, and a separate private element which allows users to input their occupancy data. A representative from Build Test Solutions suggested that if EPCs enabled householders to input their specific occupancy hours and set points, this would achieve an EPC much more closely aligned with actual consumption. This could overcome the challenges around collecting data on occupancy. Users can input this data if they would find the output useful, but otherwise a standard EPC for the building exists without the need for any occupancy data.
GDPR
Energy consumption data is considered as personal data under GDPR. GDPR is not a barrier to collecting and using energy consumption data for the purpose of EPCs, as exemplified by its use in Sweden and Germany. However, any process for collecting and processing energy consumption data will need to be GDPR compliant. Below are some of the key GDPR considerations for the use of metered energy consumption data at the individual household level.
Data ownership
Energy consumption data is owned by the person who consumed the energy (usually the energy bill payer). The stakeholders we consulted believed that householder consent would be required to access and use this data, and this was confirmed by the DCC. There was disagreement between the stakeholders we interviewed about the degree to which this poses a challenge for the use of energy consumption data.
The impact of GDPR on energy consumption data depends on how it is used and stored. For example, Build Test Solutions explained that they do not identify the individual or specific address associated with the energy consumption data they collect in order to calculate the heat transfer coefficient (Section 8), and they only hold location data at a partial postcode level. Kevin Gornall from DESNZ also noted that as part of the SMETER project (Section 8.1), there was a central database of metrics based on the metered data, but the metered data itself was not stored.
Data management
The stakeholders we interviewed agreed that the processing and management of personal energy data and consent poses a significant challenge. This is particularly true if live data is collected at scale, as mentioned in Section 7.2. The actors currently involved in energy consumption data management include energy utilities, DNOs, ‘Other Users’ (other registered users of the smart meter system), and the DCC.
Andrew Parkin at Elmhurst Energy highlighted the challenge of accessing energy consumption data which is decentralised and held by the energy utilities. Several stakeholders suggested that energy consumption data could be stored in a central repository. Householders could then have the option to consent to their energy data being used for different purposes. As indicated previously, work is being undertaken by DESNZ to explore the feasibility of this (Section 7.1.1).
Jon Stinson at Building Research Solutions pointed to the US Department of Energy (US DoE) as an example of how this could be done. He explained that the US DoE collates all energy data from utilities. Initially, this was done to enable academics to access these large data sets for research purposes. In this way, energy data is centralised, and there are fewer issues should the consumer change supplier or meters regularly.
Impact of tenancy type
There are also potential challenges associated with different tenancy types. Crawley et al. (2020) note that EPCs are often commissioned by a landlord, not the owner of the consumption data. In such cases the building owner would require the tenant to provide consent to access these data, adding a layer of complexity to the process.
Energy consumption data to improve the asset rating accuracy
Metered consumption data could be used to calculate a heat transfer coefficient (HTC), which is part of the calculation for EPC ratings. HTC is a common metric for the thermal performance of buildings. For the purposes of producing EPCs, HTC is predicted using SAP/RdSAP for domestic properties and SBEM for non-domestic properties. This is based on assumptions about the heat loss of various aspects of the building (walls, floor, roof, windows etc.) It is used as part of the calculations to estimate annual heating bills, CO2 produced by the building, and the A-G asset rating (Fitton, 2020).
HTC can also be measured in-situ through a co-heating test. This is an intrusive and expensive test which measures the rate of heat loss over a certain period (usually one to three weeks) (Hollick, 2020) and must take place whilst the building is unoccupied.
Research is currently ongoing to investigate how metered energy consumption data could be used to calculate the HTC more accurately than the current predictions in RdSAP, and a more cost-effective way than the co-heating test.
Several stakeholders interviewed[7] discussed the potential for energy consumption data to be used to calculate the HTC of individual properties. All were of the view that calculating an HTC using energy consumption data is more accurate than the HTC values predicted by RdSAP. However, some stakeholders did question the usefulness of this to householders. For example, the representative from the Climate Change Committee (CCC) suggested that this would be useful for improving building standards, but the information is unlikely to be something that householders want or need.
Current research
Several approaches are currently being developed and tested. The Smart Meter Enabled Thermal Efficiency Ratings (SMETER) Innovation Programme has undertaken field trials to test nine SMETER technologies. The trials took place in a non-representative sample of 30 homes (BEIS 2022). The accuracy of each SMETER technology was evaluated by comparison with the measured HTC[8].
Build Test Solutions has developed the SmartHTC method, which is commercially available and has been applied to over 10,000 buildings at time of writing. . SmartHTC is a technology agnostic algorithm. It can either be delivered as an assessment service led by an assessor, or embedded into smart devices such as a smart meter IHD or a smart thermostat. The algorithm was used by the two best-performing HTC technologies in the SMETER research (BEIS, 2022). The IEA’s Annex 71 is also investigating methods for measuring HTC, including through smart meter data (Fitton et al., 2021).
Common to all these approaches is the need for three key pieces of information; metered consumption data (provided by smart meters for gas and electricity), internal temperature data and external temperature data.
Internal temperature data
Internal temperature is critical to collect. Senave et al. (2019) demonstrate that estimated internal temperatures can lead to errors in the HTC of up to 26.9% compared to internal temperature data from one room in the home. Ideally indoor temperatures should be measured in two locations. The literature points to the increasing popularity of “on-board devices” (Fitton, 2020) such as smart heating controls as a valuable source of internal temperature data. However, this is not currently a viable option in the context of producing EPCs. The majority of homes do not have this technology, and it is unclear how this data could be collected centrally.
Newer models of smart meter in-home displays (IHD) also have the capacity to record temperature data. For example, Chameleon’s IHD7 IHD which is already being deployed in the smart meter rollout. The UK Government is currently funding projects to explore whether smart meter infrastructure can be used for more than just energy data (DESNZ, 2023b). As part of this, Matt James explained that the DCC is involved in an ongoing pilot to investigate whether temperature and humidity data can be transmitted through the system, alongside meter readings.
Research has also explored whether it is possible to use smart meter data to estimate thermal performance without the need for temperature data. Chambers and Oreszczyn (2019) only used smart meter data and used the building’s location to make assumptions about local temperatures[9]. Three of the SMETER trials also did not use internal sensors and demonstrated that it is possible to generate an HTC figure without collecting internal temperature data. However, these SMETER technologies were found to generate less accurate HTCs than those which also measured internal temperatures.
An interim solution, suggested by Baker and Mould (2018), is that until in-home sensing equipment is mainstream, homeowners and landlords could be incentivised to record this data voluntarily for inclusion in domestic EPCs. For their SmartHTC method, if internal temperature data cannot be collected via existing devices such as smart thermostats, Build Test Solutions send several low-cost temperature sensors to householders to collect temperature data over a period of 3 weeks.
External temperature data
External temperature is a key factor influencing the amount of energy used in a building. Whilst some smart heating controls do have external temperature sensors (for weather compensation), most studies and trials to date have relied on data from nearby weather stations and online tools. Stakeholders we spoke to commented that, generally, external weather data is readily available, detailed, and reliable (Richard Fitton, Professor of Building Performance and Build Test Solutions).
Potential applications
As an input to EPC calculations
The HTC is not weighted or normalised in any way. It does not account for the size, shape or age of a building. In general, the HTC is higher for larger homes (Fitton, 2020), and therefore does not allow buildings to be compared. For this reason, the majority of stakeholders interviewed for this research felt that the HTC figure should not be presented on EPC certificates and instead should be used in the calculation of EPC metrics.
As a standalone figure on EPCs
In contrast to the above, the IEA Annex 71 report recommends that the raw HTC figure is reported on EPCs. The report authors compare the HTC to the miles per gallon (MPG) metric used for vehicles. The MPG metric is widely understood by consumers and is not normalised for size (the cylinder capacity of the engine). Similarly, they propose the HTC value could become a recognised and well-understood metric. This would require householders to be provided with a bespoke annual heating degree day (HDD) figure, in the same way that motorists are usually aware of their annual mileage.
We did not find that this view was widely reflected amongst stakeholders that we interviewed, though David Allinson also used MPG as an analogy. He noted that when looking a purchasing a vehicle, we would not expect to know or predict exactly how much a particular vehicle would cost to run and that MPG is a useful metric to understand the relative fuel efficiency of a vehicle. He suggests that in the same way we should not look at an EPC and expect to know exactly how much a property will cost to run, though we could be using HTC figures in a more useful way. Richard Fitton suggested that if the HTC value is included on EPCs it should be normalised by floor space (m2) to become the ‘heat loss parameter’ or better still by volume (m3) to account for high ceilings.
The performance gap
The HTC can be used to identify where new buildings or retrofitted buildings are not performing in line with modelled predictions (Fitton, 2020). As outlined in Section 5, this is not uncommon.
In relation to new builds, Kevin Gornall from DESNZ suggested that one of the most promising applications for in-use HTC is to identify issues with building fabric. He suggested that if the modelled HTC derived through SAP is vastly different to the measured in-use HTC figure, then it may point to construction problems which needs to be addressed. This can prompt further investigation help to identify issues that would usually go unnoticed.
HTC readings can also be an effective tool for monitoring the impacts of retrofit. For example, Elmhurst suggests that their Measured Energy Performance (MEP) tool[10] is most effective as a tool for evaluating the impacts of retrofit projects. Calculating the HTC pre- and post-installation can provide a more accurate assessment of the impacts that retrofit measures have had on the thermal performance of the property. MEP can also be used as a part of meeting the PAS 2035 requirements for monitoring and evaluation (Elmhurst, 2021).
Challenges to this approach
As outlined in Section 7 there are a number of challenges around relying on smart meter data.Technologies to measure and transmit internal temperature data are also not widely available in most homes. Both interviewees from DESNZ, Jon Stinson from BRS and a representative from Build Test Solutions all discussed the use of a co-heating test as an alternative method for homes without smart meters. This is not a practical or cost-effective solution for generating EPCs at scale. Overnight HTC tests or temporary meters are likely to be the most practicalsolutions for homes with unmetered fuels. Additionally, the SmartHTC algorithm can be used with only opening and closing meter readings for non-smart meters.
A representative of Build Test Solutions stated that another challenge is accounting for electrical loads outside the building envelope such as electric cars, outdoor offices or hot tubs. Ideally, these should be metered separately.
Annex 71 (Fitton et al., 2021) highlights that the regulatory energy models in the UK do not allow for the HTC to be directly entered as a measured value. Multiple stakeholders confirmed that this is technically possible to overwrite the HTC value in SAP. Therefore, further investigation is required as to whether there are regulatory or practical barriers to doing this.
Energy consumption data for operational performance
Metered energy consumption data can be used to produce an operational rating which is more closely aligned with actual energy use and gives an indication of how a building is used. This type of metric will include the impact of occupant behaviour. The influence of occupant behaviour makes this approach less suitable for comparison between buildings. However, this can also be an advantage, especially when combined with a good benchmark. Comparison against a benchmark can be used to encourage both building energy performance and user behaviour change (Zuhaib et al., 2021).
The most straightforward use for metered energy consumption data is to include the value on an EPC alongside a reference figure. The reference figure could be historical energy consumption data for that property (Zuhaib et al., 2021). This would not allow for comparison against other buildings unless the data is normalised to account for factors such as size and occupancy.
Current examples
Display Energy Certificates
Display Energy Certificates (DEC) for public non-domestic buildings[11] are an example of an operational rating (section 10). Energy consumption is compared to a benchmark for similar types of buildings (Lomas et al., 2019).
Measured Energy Performance Indicator (MEPI)
The X-tendo project (Verheyen et al., 2019; Zuhaib et al., 2021) developed the Measured Energy Performance Indicator (MEPI) to be compatible with EPCs. It proposes that real energy consumption data is used to generate an ‘energy use indicator’ on EPCs. To enable comparison between buildings, this figure is weather-corrected and normalised for building size and primary energy factors[12]. This method relies on sub-metering to disaggregate consumption for heating and hot water. Sub-metering is not widely used in domestic buildings in Scotland.
This method has undergone testing in four European countries. This revealed that further corrections are needed to be able to make useful comparisons, for example the number of hours the heating system is used. The method contains an optional module to correct for indoor temperature.
EPCs in Sweden
A representative from Boverket explained that EPCs in Sweden are based on real energy consumption data, which is disaggregated by the energy assessor to only consider energy used for heating, cooling, domestic hot water, and fixed lighting, and then corrected to reflect typical use. This results in an operational rating than enables comparisons between buildings. A challenge of this approach is that it requires the energy assessor to make assumptions about a building’s energy use, since disaggregated metered data rarely exists for each of the different energy uses.
Domestic Operational Rating (DOR)
Researchers from Loughborough University and De Montfort University have proposed and tested a DOR scheme for assessing the energy performance of occupied dwellings (Lomas et al., 2019). They propose this scheme as separate and complementary to existing SAP methodology, similar to DECs for non-domestic buildings.
The DOR uses metered energy consumption data alongside the existing survey data for a property collected for an EPC. For example, a key piece of information needed to normalise the energy consumption figure is total usable floor area (Lomas and Allinson, 2019). The proposed DOR scheme provides three operational ratings for energy demand (DORED), GHG emissions (DORGG) and energy costs (DOREC). These are intended to correspond with current metrics on an EPC. The energy cost metric is derived from the energy demand figure. It could be based either on a nationally standardised fuel cost (similar to SAP look-up tables) or on the actual fuel prices paid by each household.
The authors also explore the idea that a DOR certificate could be used to convey additional energy-related behaviour and advice to households. It could also have particular relevance for identifying homes in fuel poverty or residents that are under-heating their homes. Another key benefit of DOR is that it accounts for all energy used (regulated and unregulated).
David Allinson (Building Energy Research Group, University of Loughborough) suggests that moving towards DOR with normalised data to account for anomalies (e.g., a particularly cold winter), would allow people to compare with other people in the neighbourhood or the same property type.
Enabling comparison
Normalisation of data
Experts have proposed different methods which use different degrees of correction or normalisation. In its purest form, annual metered data could be included as-is. With no correction, this would result in a worse score during colder years where the heating requirements are higher. Conversely, recommendations for a new heating system based on a particularly mild winter where the heating demand of the property was lower than usual, or energy savings measured between non-typical years would be misleading.
There is consensus in the reviewed literature that a metric of this type should be normalised at least by floor area (Baker and Mould, 2018; Lomas et al., 2019). In France, EPCs for pre-1948 buildings were previously calculated based on an average of three years of metered data corrected by floor area (Crawley et al., 2020). However, this option was removed as part of recent EPC reforms due to issues related to buildings with irregular occupancy (Rosemont International, 2021; Thomson and Jenkins, 2023).
Weather-correction
The DOR uses weather-correction to enable the comparison of ratings between homes in different locations across the country. The metered daily gas and electricity consumption of homes is corrected based on the number of heating degree-days. An alternative to weather-correcting the energy demand data is to instead correct the benchmark that the energy is compared to (see below).
Corrections for standard user behaviour have also been proposed (Zuhaib et al., 2021). The latter is possible if occupancy profile data is available, but the authors note that this is hard to obtain.
Benchmarks
The DOR proposes that weather-corrected and normalised energy demand is compared against a benchmark of the average energy demand for the UK. Selecting an appropriate benchmark requires careful consideration (Lomas et al., 2019).
Jon Stinson of BRS also recommended inclusion of an average energy use figure across the previous three years, normalised with internal and external temperature data. He suggests that this could be a rolling figure, updated annually, linked to a dynamic EPC.
Non-domestic DECs use a building-specific benchmark corrected to account for the duration of occupancy and weather conditions. However, this approach is less appropriate for domestic buildings, since the proportion of energy that is used for space heating (and therefore should be weather corrected) varies significantly (Lomas et al., 2019).
Contextual occupancy data
If energy consumption data is provided on EPCs then some level of contextual data about the occupants is also required. For example, a potential tenant or buyer would need to know some details of the previous occupant(s) to understand the relevance of their energy usage.
Three stakeholders (from Build Test Solutions; Thomas Lefevre of Etude; Alan Beal of Bacra and Richard Fitton, Professor of Building Performance) were wary of using energy consumption data in isolation as it is difficult to account for all variables and to collect this data from occupants.
Several stakeholders (Kevin Gornall, DESNZ; Barbara Lantschner, JG architects; and a representative of the CCC) suggested that a small number of key questions regarding in-use occupancy information could be sufficient to generate an output which is accurate enough for the purposes of an EPC. Key information identified included:
Occupancy (number of people in the household)
Heating regime (hours of heating and preferred temperatures)
Energy behaviours (information on unregulated energy use, e.g., large appliances)
Kevin Gornall from DESNZ suggested that in future there could be the option for occupants to answer several survey questions surrounding how they use energy in the home at the point of assessment. This information alongside internal temperatures and patterns of energy consumption could replace the occupancy assumptions used within SAP to generate more tailored outputs. His view was that the existing SAP model can generate accurate outputs providing that accurate information is fed in, and the key is to provide an open version of SAP where assumptions can be altered.
A similar exercise has been done with EPCs before, through the Green Deal Occupancy Assessment. This used standard EPC inputs and amended these with data from a series of additional questions. For example, standardised occupancy patterns were amended to reflect the household.
A representative of Build Test Solutions suggested that metered data could be used to achieve a more accurate baseline asset rating (see Section 8), with further occupational data added as a separate metric to achieve an output much more closely aligned with the total energy consumption.
As highlighted in Section 8.1.1, and by Jon Stinson of BRS, internal temperature data could be used to understand heating outcomes to contextualise the energy consumption data.
Alternatively, the DOR is designed so that it does not require any contextual data from occupants. Metered consumption data is normalised and compared to a national benchmark (Lomas et al., 2019). The authors note that not accounting for number of occupants may result in a poorer DOR for homes occupied by more people. They note privacy concerns over collecting this information, and the practicalities of defining occupant numbers, particularly in HMO properties (ibid.).
Presenting the data
An operational rating could be presented on an EPC alongside the asset rating. However, Lomas et al. (2019) suggest that the DOR is provided on a separate certificate. This would be similar to DECs for non-domestic buildings[13]. The move to dynamic EPCs will have implications for how an operational rating can be displayed (Section 7.2).
In contrast, Baker and Mould (2018) suggest that consumption data should replace the existing modelled SAP methodology rather than complement it, with all EPCs being based on an operational rating.
It is possible to use asset ratings and operational ratings to produce two different kinds of EPCs. This is the case in Germany, where EPCs can take the form of either a demand certificate, which provides an asset rating, or a consumption certificate, which provides an operational rating (Lomas et al., 2019). While the resulting energy certificates differ, they are both considered to be EPCs that fulfil the requirements of EPBD. It should be noted that in Germany, the operational rating based EPCs are only available for buildings with more than five flats, since including multiple households approximates normalisation for different occupant behaviours. This would not be possible in Scotland where EPCs are produced for individual dwellings rather than buildings.
Challenges to this approach
One challenge to developing an operational rating is determining whether and how much contextual data to collect from occupants. Additionally, Lomas et al. (2019) state that it is desirable for a DOR to disaggregate energy used for space heating, domestic hot water, and electrical energy use. Sub-metering is not widely used in domestic properties (see Section 6.3.1), so this will be challenging.
Non-domestic EPCs
The most obvious use for metered energy consumption data in non-domestic EPCs in Scotland is to extend the use of DECs. This was suggested as the best way to use metered consumption data for non-domestic buildings by Joshua Wakeling of Elmhurst Energy. The operational rating on a DEC is based on meter readings for 12 months of energy consumption and compared to a benchmark. The operational rating is a numerical indicator and is also illustrated on an A-G scale.
Additionally, Joshua Wakeling (Elmhurst Energy) noted the need for more investment in improving the DEC methodology and to better understand occupancy assessment. The DEC methodology has not been updated for over 10 years (Elmhurst Energy, 2022).
The considerations around different types of energy use, as discussed in Section 7, are also relevant to non-domestic buildings. An analysis by Jones Lang LaSalle (2012) of 200 non-domestic buildings in the UK found little or no correlation between EPC ratings and actual energy performance. This significant performance gap has been attributed to a combination of uncertainty in the modelling, occupant behaviour, and poor operational practices (van Dronkelaar, 2015).
Jon Stinson of BRS has found that accessing metered data is more straightforward for non-domestic buildings than for domestic. Many occupants of non-domestic buildings will already have processes in place to collate energy consumption data, and larger buildings tend to have sub-metering arrangements as well as Building Energy Management Systems (BeMS). However, Joshua Wakeling of Elmhurst Energy noted that in England and Wales the deployment of DECs to private sector buildings has been hampered by a reluctance to share energy data.
Stakeholders discussed the use of metered energy consumption data for the purpose of an operational rating, but not for an asset rating. The comparison of HTC figures is not as important for non-domestic buildings as it is for domestic buildings. This is because building fabric has a comparably lower impact on heat loss than ventilation and air-conditioning systems (Jon Stinson, BRS).
Conclusions and recommendations
This report has explored two ways in which metered energy consumption data can be used in EPCs and the factors that need to be considered to enable this. Metered energy consumption data can provide more accurate information on building fabric performance (asset rating) and give an operational rating of how energy is used in a building.
A more accurate asset rating can be generated by using metered energy consumption data to calculate the HTC (heat transfer coefficient) in properties. Although various methods have been tested in recent years, they are not yet sufficiently developed for widespread roll out in EPCs. This approach requires collecting internal temperature data and is limited in properties without smart meters. Further work is required within the industry to enable the reliable collection of internal temperature data and consumption data across properties with different meters and fuel types.
Accurate HTC figures calculated using energy consumption data will also have value for informing retrofit decisions. This is currently being explored through projects such as Chameleon’s HTC-Up project. The use of energy consumption data in EPCs will provide a more realistic baseline asset rating on which to base recommended retrofit measures. However, the recommendations on an EPC would still be generated automatically by SAP.
Metered energy consumption data can be used to produce an operational rating to give an indication of how a building is used. A wide range of different approaches have been explored in the literature. The most straightforward use for metered energy consumption data is to include the value on an EPC alongside a reference figure. Another option is a DOR showing the energy consumption of a property, corrected by weather and floor area. This rating could be included as a part of the EPC or exist as separate document.
Using energy consumption to provide an operational rating has the challenge that different energy uses are not yet disaggregated. As a result, it can be difficult to determine what causes increases or decreases in energy consumption. Sub-metering has been suggested as a potential solution, though this technology is not commonplace in Scottish homes at present. The X-tendo project also proposes a method to achieve an operational rating but requires further normalisation of the data to account for different energy uses.
This operational rating could be included as part of existing EPCs or could be presented separately to provide additional information as to how efficiently energy is used in the home. Generation of an operational rating has the potential to be incorporated as part of dynamic, digital EPCs where data can be updated and adjusted without the need for a new EPC to be created. This format could enable occupancy-related data to be separate from the public asset rating.
Energy consumption data could be used in both or either of the two ways outlined above. EPCs should retain an asset metric (whether based on modelled or measured data) that is based on standard occupancy assumptions to allow comparison between properties regardless of who occupies them. This should not be replaced with an energy use metric, which contains occupancy variables that cannot be fully accounted for. Such a metric could be useful in addition to a standardised metric for comparison. It was suggested that metered data could be used to achieve a more accurate baseline asset rating, with further occupational data added as a separate metric to achieve an output much more closely aligned with the total energy consumption.
In both cases, consumer consent will be needed to collect and process metered energy consumption data and further consideration must be given as to how this can be facilitated.
Recommendations
This research has highlighted that further work is needed in this area to explore:
The practicalities of collecting required data. This will include:
Metered energy consumption data at the individual building level, rather than from aggregated datasets. This will require a standardised process for collecting consumer consent. Currently, public sector bodies can obtain household-level data without the need for individual consent through the legal basis of public task’. However, this is for aggregated data and there are no current examples of data being used to provide insights at the individual household level. Further investigation is needed into the legal basis of public task for collection of metered data for reporting at the household level. Legal routes for this were not explored as part of this research.
Processes for data collection, as these are mostly dependent on the rollout of smart meters. An alternative methodology will need to be developed for households using unregulated fuels, as their heating consumption will not be captured in smart meter data.
Additional information from occupants which can be used to contextualise energy consumption data when used for an operational rating. Examples of this kind of data include the number of occupants or typical heating regime. Further work is required to understand the minimum amount of contextual information to enable metered energy consumption data to be useful.
Internal temperature data for the purpose of calculating HTC as part of an asset rating. This would require the mass rollout of internal temperature sensors, which are already included in some IHD (in-home display) devices. Internal temperature data could also be useful contextual data for an operational rating.
Different formats that could be used to display consumption data when used for an operational rating. This should consider whether consumption data would work best as one of multiple ratings within the EPC or separately.
For energy-generating homes, how total energy consumption, generation, export, and cost can be displayed in a straight-forward manner.
Whether there are regulatory or practical barriers to inputting the HTC as a measured value in SAP calculations for the asset rating.
The value of Display Energy Certificates for non-domestic public buildings in England and Wales, and whether there would be value in expanding their use in Scotland.
References
Arcipowska, A., Anagnostopoulos, F., Mariottini, F. and Kunkel, S. (2014) Energy Performance Certificates across the EU: A Mapping of National Approaches. Rep. Brussels: Buildings Performance Institute Europe. Available at: https://www.bpie.eu/publication/energy-performance-certificates-across-the-eu/ (Accessed: 25 August 2023).
Baker, K.J. and Rylatt, R. M. (2008) ‘Improving the prediction of UK domestic energy-demand using annual consumption-data’, Applied Energy, 85(6), pp. 475–482. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apenergy.2007.09.004
Chambers, J. D. (2017) ‘Developing a rapid, scalable method of thermal characterisation for UK dwellings using smart meter data’. UCL Energy Institute. Available at: https://discovery.ucl.ac.uk/id/eprint/10030678/ (Accessed: 31 August 2023).
Chambers, J. D. and Oreszczyn, T. (2019) ‘Deconstruct: A scalable method of as-built heat power loss coefficient inference for UK dwellings using smart meter data’, Energy and Buildings, 183, pp. 443-453. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2018.11.016
Cozza, S., Chambers, J., Deb, C., Scartezzini, J.L., Schlüter, A. and Patel, M.K. (2020) ‘Do energy performance certificates allow reliable predictions of actual energy consumption and savings? Learning from the Swiss national database’, Energy and Buildings, 224. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2020.110235
Crawley, J., Biddulph, P., Northrop, P.J., Wingfield, J., Oreszczyn, T. and Elwell, C. (2019) ‘Quantifying the measurement error on England and Wales EPC ratings’, Energies, 12(18), pp.3523.
Crawley, J., McKenna, E., Gori, V. and Oreszczyn, T. (2020) ‘Creating domestic building thermal performance ratings using smart meter data’, Buildings & Cities, 1(1), pp.1-13.
Deb, C.,Gelder, L. V., Spiekman, M., Pandraud, G., Jack R., and Fitton, R. (2021) ‘Measuring the heat transfer coefficient (HTC) in buildings: A stakeholder’s survey’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 144, Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2021.111008
Directive 2010/31/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19 May 2010 on the energy performance of buildings (recast) (2010) Official Journal L153, p. 13. (Accessed 7 September 2023). Available from: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX:32010L0031
Estiri, H. (2014) ‘Building and household X-factors and energy consumption at the residential sector: a structural equation analysis of the effects of household and building characteristics on the annual energy consumption of US residential buildings’, Energy Econ, 43, pp. 179-184.
Few, J., Manouseli, D., McKenna, E., Pullinger, M., Zapata-Webborn, E., Elam, S., Shipworth, D. and Oreszczyn, T. (2023) ‘The over-prediction of energy use by EPCs in Great Britain: A comparison of EPC-modelled and metered primary energy use intensity’, Energy & Buildings, 288. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2023.113024
Fitton, R., Bouchie, R., Spiekman, M., Jack, R., Spindler, U., Gorzalka, P., Jimenez, M., Erkoreka, A., Marshall, A., Gorse, C., Chirag, D., Alan, D., Farmer, D., Masy, G., Virginia, G., Pandraud, G., Deltour, J., Gelder, L., Roles, S., Metzger, S. and Hughes, T. (2021) ‘Building energy performance assessment based on in-situ measurements Challenges and general framework’ Energy in Building and Communities Programme, IEA EBC Annex 71. Available at: https://salford-repository.worktribe.com/output/1336362/building-energy-performance-assessment-based-on-in-situ-measurements-challenges-and-general-framework (Accessed: 7 September 2023).
Fuerst, F., Kavarnou, D., Singh, R., Adan, H. (2019) ‘Determinants of energy consumption and exposure to energy price risk: a UK study’, Zeitschrift für Immobilienökonomie, 6, pp. 65-80. Available at: https://link.springer.com/article/10.1365/s41056-019-00027-y
Hamilton, I.G., Steadman, P.J., Bruhns, H. Summerfield, A.J., Lowe, R. (2013) ‘Energy efficiency in the British housing stock: Energy demand and the Homes Energy Efficiency Database’, Energy Policy, 60, pp. 462-480, Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enpol.2013.04.004
Hardy, A. and Glew, D. (2019) ‘An analysis of errors in the Energy Performance certificate database.’, Energy Policy, 129, pp. 1168-1178. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enpol.2019.03.022
Hollick, F.P., Gori, V., and Elwell, C.A. (2020) ‘Thermal performance of occupied homes: A dynamic grey-box method accounting for solar gains’, Energy & Buildings, 208. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2019.109669
Huebner G.M., Hamilton, I., Chalabi, Z., Shipworth, D., and Oreszczyn, T. (2015) ‘Explaining domestic energy consumption—The comparative contribution of building factors, socio-demographics, behaviours and attitudes’, Applied Energy, 159, pp. 589–600. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.apenergy.2015.09.028
Hughes, M., Pope, P., Palmer, J., and Armitage, P. (2016) ‘UK Housing Stock Models Using SAP: The Case for Heating Regime Change’, Science Journal of Energy Engineering, 4(2), pp. 12–22. Available at: 10.11648/j.sjee.20160402.11
Jenkins, D., Simpson, S., and Peacock, A. (2017) ‘Investigating the consistency and quality of EPC ratings and assessments’, Energy, 138 (1), pp. 480-489. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.energy.2017.07.105
Jones, R. V., Fuertes, A., and Lomas, K. J. (2015) ‘The socio-economic, dwelling and appliance related factors affecting electricity consumption in domestic buildings’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 43, pp. 901-917. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2014.11.084
Kelly, S., Crawford-Brown, D., and Pollitt, M. G. (2012) ‘Building performance evaluation and certification in the UK: Is SAP fit for purpose?’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 16, pp. 6861–6878. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2012.07.018
Lomas, K. J., Beizaee, A., Allinson, D., Haines, V.J., Beckhelling, J., Loveday, D.L., Porritt, S.M., Mallaband, B. and Morton, A. (2019) ‘A domestic operational rating for UK homes: Concept, formulation and application’, Energy and Buildings, 201, pp. 90–117. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2019.07.021
Mitchell, R. and Natarajan, S. (2020) ‘UK Passivhaus and the Energy Performance Gap’, Energy and Buildings, 224, pp. 110240. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2020.110240
Pullinger, M., Berliner, N. Goddard, N. and Shipworth, D. (2022) ‘Domestic heating behaviour and room temperatures: Empirical evidence from Scottish homes’, Energy and Buildings, 254. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2021.111509
Santin, O.G., Itard, L., and Visscher, H. (2009) ‘The effect of occupancy and building characteristics on energy use for space and water heating in Dutch residential stock’, Energy and Buildings, 41(11), pp. 1223-1232. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2009.07.002
Senave, M., Reynders, G., Sodagar, B., Verbeke, S., and Saelens, D. (2019). ‘Mapping the pitfalls in the characterisation of the heat loss coefficient from on-board monitoring data using ARX models’. Energy and Buildings, 197, pp. 214–228. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2019.05.047
Small-Warner, K. and Sinclair, S. (2022) Green Building Passports: a review for Scotland. Available at http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/2075 (Accessed: 7 September 2023)
Sunikka-Blank, M, and Galvin, R. (2012) ‘Introducing the prebound effect: the gap between performance and actual energy consumption’, Building Research & Information, 40(3), pp. 260-273. Available at: https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/09613218.2012.690952
Thomson, L. and Jenkins, D. (2023) ‘The Use of Real Energy Consumption Data in Characterising Residential Energy Demand with an Inventory of UK Datasets’, Energies, 16. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/en16166069
Van Dronkelaar, C., Dowson, M., Burman, E., Spataru, C. and Mumovic, D. (2016) ‘A Review of the Energy Performance Gap and Its Underlying Causes in Non-Domestic Buildings’ Frontiers in Mechanical Engineering, 1(17), Available at: https://doi.org/10.3389/fmech.2015.00017
Vatougiou, P., McCallum, P., Jenkins, D. (2022) An evidence review of data associated with non-domestic buildings. Available at: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/2557 (Accessed: 7 September 2023)
Wyatt, P. (2013) ‘A dwelling-level investigation into the physical and socio-economic drivers of domestic energy consumption in England’, Energy Policy, 60, pp. 540-549. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enpol.2013.05.037
Zuhaib, S., Pedraz, G.B., Verheyen, J., Kwiatkowski, J., Hummel, M. and Dorizas, V. (2021) Exploring Innovative Indicators for The Next-Generation Energy Performance Certificates features – Real Energy Consumption. Available at: https://x-tendo.eu/wp-content/uploads/2020/01/D3.1-Real-Energy-consumption.pdf (Accessed: 24 August 2023).
Zuhaib, S., Schmatzberger, S., Volt, J., Toth, Z., Kranzl, L., Maia, I.E.N., Verheyen, J., Borragán, G., Monteiro, C.S., Mateus, N. and Fragoso, R. (2022) ‘Next-generation energy performance certificates: End-user needs and expectations’, Energy Policy, 161. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enpol.2021.112723
Appendix: Research methodology
Desk research
This report was informed by desk research in the form of a literature review of academic articles and grey literature such as reports, statements, policy literature, and consultations.
An initial literature search was carried out using the search terms listed in table 1. The list expanded throughout the research process as key terms and concepts were identified. Further sources were identified from relevant sources cited in included literature. Literature from the past five years was prioritised, though some older works also informed the research. Through the search, 51 relevant pieces of literature were identified.
List of search terms (non-exhaustive)
Calculated (energy) use
EPC(s)
Measured (energy) use
Performance gap
Real/actual (energy) use
Building
Energy use/usage
Assessment
Consumption data
Heat transfer coefficient
Energy performance
Operational performance/rating
Smart meter(s)
GDPR
Table Search terms
Stakeholder interviews
Fourteen interviews were carried out with stakeholders in Scotland, the UK, and Sweden. These were semi-structured, 30–45-minute interviews undertaken in July and August 2023.
Interviews were held with the following stakeholders:
A representative from Boverket, the Swedish National Board of Housing, Building and Planning.
Richard Fitton, Professor of Building Performance, University of Salford.
A representative from the Climate Change Committee.
David Allinson, Building Energy Research Group, School of Architecture, University of Loughborough.
Richard Atkins, Chartered Architect.
Jon Stinson, Managing and Technical Director, Building Research Solutions.
Thomas Levefre, Managing Director, Etude.
Alan Beal, Bacra.
Barbara Lantschner, Building Performance Specialist, John Gilbert Architects.
A representative from Build Test Solutions.
Sam Mancey, SMETER Implementation Team, DESNZ.
Kevin Gornall, SMETER Implementation Team, DESNZ.
Andrew Parkin, Director of Technical Development, Elmhurst Energy
Joshua Wakeling, Director of Operations, Elmhurst Energy.
Matt James from the Data Communications Company.
Qualitative analysis
The literature and interviews were analysed in NVivo using inductive coding. This allowed key concept (e.g. performance gap) and categories (e.g. asset vs operational ratings) to emerge throughout the analysis process. Findings from the interviews and the evidence review were analysed using the same coding structure. This approach also facilitated the identification of research gaps.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Survey respondents included engineers, architects, product manufacturers, social housing providers, policy makers and researchers. ↑
The term ‘similar households’ was not defined in the study. Because of the variance of occupancy influence on energy use, this could be interpreted as similar age or number of occupants, heating pattern, income, or other factors. ↑
For most studies included in the review the electricity use of dwellings may include electric space heating, electric water heating and electric space cooling. Not all studies explicitly stated whether these were included which makes it difficult to draw clear conclusions. ↑
Xoserve is the Central Data Service Provider for Britain’s gas market. ↑
Meters are ‘settled’ each time a meter reading is provided from the consumer. ↑
Examples of these tests include QUB and Veritherm. ↑
including a representative of Build Test Solutions, a representative of the Climate Change Committee, Sam Mancey and Kevin Gornall of the SMETER Implementation Team at DESNZ, Jon Stinson from Building Research Solutions, and Thomas Lefevre from Etude. ↑
Determined using the QUB test, which is an alternative to the co-heating test and can estimate the HTC within a day. ↑
Note that this study calculated Heating Power Loss Coefficient (HPLC) rather than HTC. The difference is that HPLC incorporates thermal losses from the heating system as well as the building fabric. ↑
This tool uses four temperature and humidity monitors throughout the home to record internal data for a three-week period. Measured energy use during this period is also taken to calculate the HTC figure. ↑
Public buildings in England and Wales over 250 m2 must have a DEC. In Scotland, public buildings are required to have an EPC rather than DEC. ↑
The amount of primary energy used to generate a unit of electricity or a unit of useable thermal energy in a building. ↑
Public buildings in England and Wales over 250 m2 must have a DEC. In Scotland, public buildings are required to have an EPC rather than DEC. ↑
The generation of energy from organic matter, such as plants, is called bioenergy. The Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu) identifies the significant role that bioenergy could play in delivering Scotland’s legally binding commitment to achieve net zero by 2045. This could be achieved whilst also supporting a green economic recovery from the effects of the Covid-19 pandemic and a just transition that creates jobs and supports people and rural communities.
To meet this expanded role for bioenergy in Scotland, a scaling up of domestic biomass production would be required. The UK Climate Change Committee (CCC) highlighted the opportunity for domestic production as a key pillar for delivering the CCPu ambition.
This research examines the economic potential of perennial energy crops (PECs) for farmers and land-managers, as well as the wider economic implications. The three PECs considered are miscanthus, short rotation coppice (SRC) and short rotation forestry (SRF).
Key findings
Profitability of perennial energy crops
PECs have the potential to generate income for farmers and land-managers in Scotland.
Comparison of gross margins shows income from PECs is likely to be lower than from other typical farm enterprises on suitable land, such as lowland cattle and sheep and ‘mixed agriculture’. This is assessed on the basis of yearly average gross margins over the lifetime of the PEC in comparison to equivalent gross margins for other farm enterprises.
Income (gross margin calculation) from PECs compared very favourably in the analysis compared to the farming type known as ‘general cropping: forage’. This is growing crops for animal consumption, usually on lower quality land, and it typically makes a significant loss.
There is a need for greater confidence that PECs will deliver good economic returns in order for them to be viewed as an attractive, economically viable option by farmers and land managers in Scotland. High upfront establishment costs for perennial energy crops and low revenue potential are both likely to hinder uptake.
Miscanthus showed the highest average gross margin of the three crops studied, at £382 per hectare per year. However, there are some potentially limiting factors:
There is limited theoretical growing area in Scotland, which is much lower than for SRF or SRC.
SRF and SRC showed lower profitability for farmers: £80 and £87 per hectare per year over their lifetime respectively for ‘SRF: broadleaved’ and SRC. However, there is more suitable land for growing these.
SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin, given that the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold.
Potential opportunities
PECs could help diversify a business, creating additional income, without adding significant additional labour requirements or ongoing input costs because minimal management time and inputs are required once crops are established.
Potential barriers
Cash flow could pose a barrier to uptake. The distribution of costs and income year-on-year for PECs is significantly different to typical farming activities which have an annual profit cycle. PECs need investment in site preparation and planting upfront, but income only arrives after first harvest several years later. This is 2-3 years for miscanthus with subsequent annual harvests, 6 years for SRC with periodical harvests thereafter, and 15 years for SRF first and only harvest.
Farmers and land managers may view PECs as a risky proposition due to uncertainty about market demand and achievable crop sale prices, combined with the need for upfront investment to establish production.
Other potential barriers to uptake include: farmer and land-manager unfamiliarity with PEC production, low appetite for risk, need for new skills, access to equipment and services, concerns about community perception of land-use change, and impacts on other agricultural production, e.g. available animal feed.
Enhancing economic potential and production
Potential approaches to improve the economic potential of PECs in Scotland include:
Financial incentives, such as government specific subsidies under future agricultural support or other market-focused incentives.
Risk reduction strategies, such as secure, attractively priced contracts with end markets, alongside expansion of the market.
Innovations to allow processing at the farm and to improve transportability of crops could also help to increase the economically viable travel distance.
Improving access to skills and knowledge to produce PECs could also remove a barrier to uptake, if economic prospects are improved.
Implications for wider Scottish economy
Future demand for PECs to support the Scottish Government’s climate ambition is likely to require increased production, and previous research suggests 38,000 hectares could be feasibly planted by 2032 and 90,000 by 2045.
We modelled two demand scenarios to illustrate the potential range in results if land was transitioned to growing PECs:
Scenario 1: conversion of approximately 38,000 hectares. This would result in an economic gain in terms of increased gross margin of around £9.6 million. This would however result in a shortfall in non-PEC agricultural yield (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass) of between 537,600 and 700,000 tonnes.
Scenario 2: conversion of approximately 90,000 hectares. This would result in an economic loss of around £9.5 million per year, based on gross margin, and a shortfall in non-PEC agricultural yield (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass) of between 708,200 and 1.6 million tonnes. The financial loss is because under this scenario more economically advantageous land is transitioned to PECs and the PECs perform less well economically.
Economically viable production locations
Economically viable production locations for PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets and local access to services and facilities for crop management, such as harvesting contractors, to avoid incurring excessive costs.
The research identified suitable growing regions (some SRC/miscanthus and most for SRF) within an economically viable transport distance to existing biomass plants and potential sites for Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage (BECCS) near the proposed east coast carbon capture and storage feeder pipeline (assumed 50-100 km).
Economic viability may be a barrier to SRF production increases even if suitable land is available, given that it is economically uncompetitive against other land use options.
Potential further steps
Key debates and areas for further research include:
Considering more in-depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis. This study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm but could be explored through farm case studies. This could include considering a wider range of costs for farmers and that after initial set up the PECs would require less workload.
Comparing the economic and environmental potential of using land for energy crops with utilising the same land for other renewable energy options, such as using the land for solar panels alongside grazing.
Exploring the potential role for on-farm use of perennial energy crops.
Considering future biomass markets, including how future Greenhouse Gas Removal (GGR) schemes, global demand and demand from biotechnology sector may impact it.
Identifying how to make domestic biomass from energy crops a more attractive option than imports and a more profitable use of land, and on what basis this can be justified. For example, taking account of full LCA and rewarding greatest emission saving.
Considering in more detail the role of PECs in the context of how the agriculture sector is changing and how it may have to change to reduce GHG emissions.
Considering the value, including the financial value, of other benefits of energy crops, such as flood mitigation or animal shelter, relative to existing or potential alternative land-uses.
Exploring how PECs support/interact with tier 2 or 3 objectives of the ARP.
Considering the impact of subsidies.
The most economically and environmentally advantageous approach is likely to be site-specific and determined by local circumstances. Making judgements about the best use of land is complex for policy makers, farmers and land managers alike. Guidance on this decision-making is likely to be needed.
Abbreviations table
BECCS
Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage
CCC
UK Government Climate Change Committee
CCPu
Scotland’s Climate Change Plan Update (2020)
CXC
ClimateXChange
LFA
Less Favoured Area (a designation in Scotland for disadvantaged agricultural areas – including crofting)
NETs
Negative Emissions Technologies
PEC
Perennial energy crops
SRC
Short Rotation Coppice
SRF
Short Rotation Forestry
Introduction
This evidence assessment focuses on examining the economic potential of perennial energy crops (PECs) for farmers and land-managers in Scotland, along with considering the wider economic implications for Scotland. The assessment builds upon recent ClimateXChange reports which demonstrated that there are significant opportunities for the expansion of perennial energy crop cultivation in Scotland (Martin et al, 2020) and that increased supply of biomass for energy generation from such crops will be needed to meet forecast future demand in the context of Scotland’s climate mitigation plan goals (Meek et al, 2022). However, in scaling up domestic biomass production it is important to consider how the economics intersect with other relevant issues including biodiversity, land-use, water management and a ‘just transition’. This report aims to consider these issues, alongside the economics and support the Scottish Government’s development of policy in relation to perennial energy crop production.
The policy context for energy crops in Scotland
The Scottish Government’s Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu) forecast a role for Negative Emissions Technologies (NETs) , including bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS), to remove carbon dioxide from the atmosphere to compensate for residual emissions. ). The UK Climate Change Committee (CCC) acknowledges Scotland’s opportunity to scale up domestic biomass production to meet this aim, recommending careful consideration of impacts on land-use and agriculture. In line with Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture, and set out in the Scottish Agricultural Bill, future subsidy support which will replace Common Agricultural Policy, will be split across unconditional support and support targeted to sustainable food production and environmental outcomes, including low carbon farming and biodiversity. Scotland’s draft ‘Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan’ aims to use bioenergy where it can best support Scotland’s Net Zero Journey, and aligns with and supports Scotland’s goals for protecting and restoring nature. Considering the role for production of PECs in the evolving Scottish policy landscape will be critical.
Alongside this the UK Government has also published a new biomass strategy, which aims to support sector growth and strengthen biomass sustainability. The strategy acknowledges that bioenergy policy involves a mix of reserved and non-reserved powers, and so as the Scottish Government develops its Bioenergy Policy Statement, Scotland has an opportunity to build on UK policies and develop policies appropriate for Scotland. Further policy information is included in Appendix A.
Introduction to perennial energy crops for Scotland:
Previous research for CXC identified that perennial energy crops (PEC) present opportunities for scaling up biomass production in Scotland, with short-rotation coppice (SRC), short-rotation forestry (SRF) and energy grass Miscanthus, showing most potential (Martin et al, 2020). Details of each crop can be found in Appendix B. PECs support climate mitigation by providing a renewable energy source; displacing fossil fuel use; helping to reverse soil carbon loss, and acting as a carbon sink. When used for energy generation and combined with carbon capture and storage (CCS), such crops have the potential to generate negative emissions and contribute towards Scotland’s net zero ambitions. PECs can also bring additional benefits, such as flood mitigation (see Section 4 below for further details).
Figure 3.2: Schematic diagram of bioenergy with carbon capture and storage [1]
Currently, Scotland grows only a small area of PECs – about 250 ha (Martin et al, 2020). Previous geo-spatial mapping work for Scotland (Martin et al, 2020) has shown theoretical potential for approximately 900 kha of land, to be suitable for PECs (913kha SRF, 219 kha SRC and 52kha Miscanthus – with some overlap between suitable areas) mainly in the east and the lowlands. This analysis considered topography, soil type, climatic variables and suitable land capability classes[2] to identify these theoretically feasible growing areas. Future demand for PECs to support the Scottish Government’s climate ambition is likely to require increased production of such crops.
Markets for PEC Biomass in Scotland
Research[3] has identified the following potential uses of biomass via ‘Negative Emissions Technologies’:
BECCS Power – bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS) for electricity in a power station
BECCS hydrogen – either via gasification of biomass or steam methane reforming of biomethane, with carbon capture and storage
BECCS in industry (for heat and other industrial processes)
BECCS Biomethane – processing of biomass via Anaerobic Digestion (AD), gasification or pyrolysis, with carbon capture and storage
Biochar – pyrolysis of biomass, with carbon capture and storage
PEC biomass can also be used in combined heat and power plants and biomass boilers at a variety of scales. The market for the biomass produced from PECs is relatively immature in Scotland. There are several biomass energy plants ranging in size from large scale industrial units and power stations to small units supplying individual farms. These mostly utilise wood from local forests, waste wood from Scotland sawmills and other industries so the market for further PEC biomass is currently limited[4]. Scotland’s largest wood-fuelled power station, is located in Markinch, with 55MW capacity utilising mostly recovered wood, some virgin wood chip. The next biggest is Steven’s Croft, in Lockerbie which generates 44MW of electricity and 6MW of heat which initially planned to source fuel from local forests (60%), SRC willow (20%) grown within a 60-mile radius (and requiring around 4,000 hectares land) and recycled wood fibre (20%) (Warren et al., 2016), but the latest data suggests it mostly uses a mix of wood and waste wood[5]. BECCS plants are not expected to deploy in Scotland until 2030.
Evaluating economic potential of PEC in Scotland
To understand the real potential, it is critical to consider not just the overall economic viability of PECs, but also how the demand for land for PECs can be balanced against, or integrated with other uses such as food and fodder production and biodiversity, and the skills, knowledge and attitudes of the farmers or land managers.
The economic potential of energy crops
A Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) seeking evidence of the economic potential of energy crops in Scotland was undertaken and identified peer-reviewed and grey literature. The methodology can be found in Appendix C. The review focused on Miscanthus, SRC and SRF to specifically identify:
The positive and negative economic potential of energy crops.
Other (non-economic) opportunities and barriers to deployment.
Further economic potential (e.g., in relation to employment; technologies; wider decarbonisation, just transition).
Key insights are presented here, along with relevant insights from the stakeholder research. For full details of information found in the literature review and references to information sources (please see Appendix d), for details of stakeholder interviews conducted see Appendix G.
Key findings of the rapid evidence assessment and stakeholder engagement
Evidence of positive economic potential
There is evidence that PECs can be profitable, but there are limited studies directly applicable to Scotland and to the current economic climate (Appendix D: 15.1)
Economic performance of biomass production is influenced by production costs, crop yields, crop price and end-use/market opportunities. (Appendix D: 15.1)
Several studies comparing energy crops reported a high return per hectare for miscanthus primarily due to low maintenance cost along with the low requirement for field operations. (Appendix D: 15.1)
The tree species chosen for SRF influences plantation establishment costs and therefore profitability as costs vary between species. Initial indications from trials underway in Scotland suggest hybrid apsen to have most potential, with common alder, silver birch and Sitka spruce having potential at some sites. (Appendix D: 15.1)
Evidence of negative economic impacts
The most prominent evidence of negative economic impacts in the literature was the high upfront cost to establish PECs, lack of established markets, and the uncertainty over the stability of the long-term market. (Appendix D: 15.2)
Profitability and economic considerations for farmers are dominated by high establishment costs, uncertainties about the market, a delayed period of revenue, and biomass yield. (Appendix D: 15.2)
Economic potential of PECs in comparison to other land uses
The literature review did not provide clear evidence of how the three key PECs compare economically to other crops, annual crops and agricultural land-uses – some studies showed favourable comparison and others did not. Limited insights can be gained from the literature given the recent economic changes affecting agricultural costs and market prices (Appendix D: 15.3)
Influences on decisions to plant PECs
One of the main factors affecting the uptake of PEC is economic profitability (Appendix D: 15.4)
Appetite for and perception of financial risk, skills, attitudes and access to markets can influence farmer and land-manager decisions. (Appendix D: 15.4)
Even where PECs, or energy crops in general, can deliver positive economic results for farmers and land managers, this on its own is not always sufficient to convince them to start growing PECs. (Appendix D: 15.4)
Other features of PEC production that influence economic potential
Producing PECs has specific economic implications for growers which influence their economic potential and attractiveness. These include lack of flexibility of land-use, reduced market responsiveness, and opportunities for diversification alongside current farming enterprises. (Appendix D: 15.5)
To view PECs as economically worthwhile, farmers need confidence that they can achieve an acceptable and secure market price into the future. As farms typically operate in a risk-averse manner, reduced risk is an important factor in farmer decision-making for PECs. (Appendix D: 15.5)
The way PECs are deployed on farms influences their economic potential. Integration of PECs alongside other enterprises and on land which is not performing well could be advantageous. (Appendix D: 15.5)
Opportunities to improve economic potential
Cultivation techniques, crop variety choice and other technological developments can influence economic potential of PECs in Scotland and have potential to improve profitability for farmers and land managers in future. (Appendix D: 15.6)
There are factors which can negatively affect the economics of PEC production, which if addressed are potential opportunities to improve economic performance. (Appendix D: 15.6)
Gaps in the crop (i.e. patches where it didn’t grow) was a key factor reducing profitability of miscanthus in the UK.
Ensuring access and enabling harvesting equipment is essential for economics of SRF to be viable
For SRF effective plantation establishment is important for the economics and general success of a SRF plantation
Single species monocultures can offer greatest economic return by providing higher yields per hectare
Highest yield are achieved on fertile soil or under intensive management systems, including weed control, fertilizer application and irrigation
Evidence of potential for wider economy
There was limited research addressing the potential contribution to the wider Scottish economy and a just transition, but some opportunities and challenges can be inferred. These include sales for local energy generation and other industrial uses, employment opportunities in contract services, along with potential payments for environmental outcomes. (Appendix D: 15.7)
Evidence of non-economic opportunities
Non-economic opportunities and benefits of PECs were identified including several relating to positive environmental outcomes such as reduced agro-chemical use, reduced soil and water pollution, carbon sequestration, and biodiversity benefits. (Appendix D: 15.8)
The opportunities for environmental improvements resulting from PECs vary depending on planting, prior land-use and landscape context. (Appendix D: 15.8)
Challenges and deployment barriers
Non-economic challenges facing the production of PECs in Scotland, relate to skills, land-use commitment, compatibility with current culture and habits, farm businesses, perceived land suitability and environmental concerns. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Deployment barriers include the need for farmers to commit land for a long period of time, land quality, knowledge, profitability, time to financial return and social resistance relating to whether land should be used for energy or food production. In addition for SRC and SRF, converting land once planted is challenging, and additionally for SRF conversion be restricted by regulations as land will no longer be classed as agricultural. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Lack of access to specialist skills and to specialist contractors and machinery was identified as a barrier to deployment. While there is interest amongst farmers in diversification, appetite for change is tempered by concern about moving into unfamiliar activities which require new skills.
Culture and attitudes can be a barrier to PEC deployment. (Appendix D: 15.9)
There are concerns about the impact on biodiversity from PECs. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Energy generation from biomass is a potential source of direct and indirect emissions and limiting these emissions would need consideration. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Other relevant crops and planting regimes
Hemp has the potential to provide high yields or returns with little or no pesticides and insecticides, significant potential in carbon sequestration, fits well into crop rotations with food and feed crops and helps improve soil structure and soil-borne pests. Constraints on producing hemp in Scotland includes the current lack of market as there are no large processing facilities in or near Scotland, strict regulations on growing hemp including the need to obtain a costly license, and some reports of low profitability according to Scottish growers. (Appendix D: 15.10)
Specific studies focused on Scotland to show how PECs could be grown in agroforestry systems were not found, but provided the design of agroforestry systems can allow for economically efficient planting, management and harvesting it could provide an advantageous model. (Appendix D: 15.10)
Key evidence gaps
The research found some uncertainties – due to lack of Scottish specific data and in relation to climate impacts on PECs – which are described in the relevant sections above, and also some key gaps in the evidence which are summarised here.
Lack of Scottish data and research leading to economic uncertainty
Research related to the production and economic potential of energy crops in Scotland is limited. SRC is currently grown, but only at a small scale, and miscanthus still requires further trials and research before implementing at a commercial scale. SRF trials are currently underway in Scotland with findings slowly emerging as plantations reach maturity (Parratt, 2017). There is therefore uncertainty regarding the economic potential in Scotland.
The literature is inconclusive regarding the financial performance of PEC production. Conflicting results are found across studies, for example, a study in Ireland found miscanthus production to be an economically viable option (Zimmermann et al., 2014), yet in France, Miscanthus was found to be less profitable compared to conventional cropping systems (Glithero et al., 2013). Research by Warren (2014) reported that the soils and climate across Scotland offer significant biophysical potential, especially for SRC willow cultivation, which can also achieve good growth rates. However, with such limited data on Scotland and in light of the less favourable climate than found in locations of many studies there is uncertainty about the economic viability in Scotland.
Climate change
The effects of climate change on PECs are to some extent unknown. Research suggests that SRC willow yield may reduce as a result of rising temperatures, while miscanthus performs favourably (Alexander et al., 2014). However, as the temperature rises, this may change the habitat suitability, further research is required to establish the suitability and risks that a changing climate may have on seed development in miscanthus throughout the UK (Martin et al., 2020). We did not find research which commented on how extreme weather such as storms, flooding and drought would affect PECs. Some research suggests that water-logged soils hinder growth of PECs (Martin et al, 2020), but a recent technical webinar from Biomass Connect suggested that willow SRC is not negatively affected by water-logging, and can help improve water management when established.
Active debates within the sector
It is evident from the literature and stakeholder interviews that there are some topics with differing views including what types of land are most suitable for PEC growing considering the wider land-use debates, and likely impacts on biodiversity.
Land use and use of unproductive areas of land
In Scotland, there is competition for land to deliver food, materials, environmental services (such as carbon sequestration), leisure opportunities and more (Martin et al., 2020; Scottish Government, 2021). Scotland has the potential to produce 9.25TWh/yr and 1.75Modt/yr for SRC (Martin et al., 2020) such as SRC willow, however amongst the farming community there is social resistance relating to land being used for energy instead of food production (Anejionu and Woods 2019). The Scottish Government’s Land-use Strategy (Scottish Government, 2021) highlights the complexity of balancing the need for land to support the move to net zero with other essential activities such as food production, and that whilst land-use decisions are often determined by the land suitability, much land is suited to multiple different uses. In these cases multiple factors need to be considered as to whether PECs are a suitable use for the land.
Literature identifies that using ‘marginal’ land, for energy crop production could be a solution to this land use debate. However, there are several challenges in understanding whether this ‘solution’ could usefully apply in Scotland. Ranacher et al., 2021 found there is a gap in the available literature regarding farmers’ willingness to adopt short rotation plantations on marginal lands. There is also no agreed definition in the literature of what comprises ‘marginal’ land, so it is unclear how this would apply in the Scottish context. Much discussion in research focuses on cropland, yet in Scotland grasslands including rough grasslands, which may be viewed as ‘marginal’ from some perspectives, are a critical part of the Scottish rural economy and environment and so a more indepth analysis of the potential social, environmental and economic implications of PECs on grasslands is needed. Additionally, not all literature agrees on whether PECS will successfully grow on marginal land.
Biodiversity & ecosystem services
Converting land to energy production in Scotland will have direct impacts on biodiversity, wildlife, and landscape connectivity, yet the exact nature of these is unclear from the literature. Research shows that bioenergy crop choice and location influence biodiversity outcomes – choosing appropriate bioenergy crops in the right location is vital for the protection of biodiversity and ecosystems and to prevent damage to the surrounding ecosystem.[6] Contradictory evidence has been found throughout the REA on the effects of converting land for energy crop production in Scotland. Existing sustainability criteria for the use of biomass to produce heat or electricity require that PECs are not grown on land of high biodiversity value[7]. Beyond application of these criteria, the research could create uncertainty about how to select the right crops for the right locations in Scotland to ensure good outcomes for biodiversity and ecosystem services. Extrapolation of potential biodiversity effects from conversion of ‘marginal’ land has low confidence (Holland, et al., 2015) (Vanbeverena & Ceulemansa, 2019), and application of this research to the Scottish context with different land-use types is therefore very difficult.
The impact on biodiversity from SRC, SRF and Miscanthus differ depending on location, previous land use and crop type and management (e.g., cultivations, pesticide, and fertiliser use). The replacement of any semi-natural habitat by a dedicated bioenergy crop is likely to result in significant biodiversity losses due to creating a monoculture habitat (Martin et al., 2020). Significant areas of land classified as ‘Less Favoured Areas’ (LFA) in Scotland which were identified as potential PEC growing areas could be described as semi-natural – and seen as ‘marginal’ – but there is a risk of biodiversity loss if this is converted to PEC.
The REA identified a conflict in opinion as to whether PECs provide a biodiversity gain or loss. Firstly, factors such as reduced ground disturbance, increased diversity of nectar and pollen sources, and the potential to provide over wintering sites which are associated with energy crop production will benefit pollinating species. Conversely the monoculture nature of energy crops is likely to be detrimental to pollinator species as landscape homogenisation is widely accepted to be a driver for the current loss of pollinating species (Martin et al., 2020). Holland et al. (2015) identified ecosystem services such as hazard regulation, disease and pest control, water, and soil quality may benefit from the conversion of arable land to energy crop production, and that the transition of marginal land[8][9] to bioenergy crops will likely deliver benefits for some ecosystem services while remaining broadly neutral for others. On the other hand, conversion of forest to energy crops will likely have a negative impact due to the increased disturbance associated with the management cycle.
Estimating economic potential
This research looked at perennial energy crops (PECs), SRF, SRC and Miscanthus and included two core economic analyses:
Farm-scale economic analysis and comparison with typical land-use options:
A farm scale economic analysis of the net economic benefit for a farmer or land-manager from producing and selling the Miscanthus, SRC and SRF.
A comparison of this net economic benefit for a farmer or land-manager with typical existing land-uses.
Assessment of wider economic implications: drawing on geo-spatial data about existing farming and land-use types, the study analysed what the economics implications would be for the wider Scottish economy of a transition to growing more energy crops.
Farm Scale Economic Analysis
Methodology overview
For the farm-scale economic analysis high, medium and low-cost scenarios were developed for the production costs for: Miscanthus; short rotation coppice: willow; short rotation forestry: conifer; and short rotation forestry: broadleaved. The higher scenario includes high output/high price minus low costs, the medium scenario scenario includes medium output/medium price minus medium costs and the low scenario includes low output/low price minus high costs.
The following production costs were included; pre-planting/land preparation, planting, post-planting, harvesting and storage and reversion.
Capital investment costs were not included: where specialist equipment would be needed, which a farmer would not typically have on a farm, such as cutting equipment for SRF, we have assumed services of a specialist contractor would be utilised and this cost has been included within the production costs.
Estimates of likely income from PEC sales were combined with costs to create a ‘gross margin[10]’ (income minus costs) for each bioenergy crop. Because the PECs all have a long lifespan, time series charts are used to show the income minus costs over the lifetime of the crop. The results of which can be found in section 5.1.3. Depending on the crop, the yield changes over the lifespan of the rotation, for example due to lower yields in early years after establishment and harvest only occurring in some years. Details on the yields during rotation can be found in Appendix D. For Miscanthus and SRF a low, medium and high price presented, whereas for SRC a single price is used due to limited data. Prices used in the analysis are in Appendix D.
To compare to the economics of current land use, three farm types were used these were lowland cattle and sheep; mixed farming[11]; and general cropping – forage. These were selected because they are feasible on the land capability of grades; 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 6.1, – typically suitable for mixed agriculture, improved grassland and high-quality rough grazing, and also the land capability grades assumed suitable for PECs . To calculate the gross margins for the farm types used in the analysis the latest data from the ‘Scottish farm business income: annual estimates 2020-2021’ were used[12].
Subsidies are not included in this analysis.
Total average output in the farm business survey[13] includes the output categories; total crop output, total livestock output and miscellaneous output. For the ‘general cropping – forage’ category census data is used and output represents the estimated farm-gate worth (£s) of crops and animals without taking account of the costs incurred in production.
A more detailed description the methodology used, assumptions and data sources is included in Appendix E.
Limitations with the methodology
The calculations for the farm types used in the analysis are based on data from the Scotland Farm Business Income Survey, therefore the estimates are based on averages and so any other factors that might influence the costs and output for example climate, soil type will not be accounted for. This is the same for the costs and output estimates for the bioenergy crops. We have not allocated an economic value to any additional benefits a farmer may gain for the other farm enterprises, such as shelter for livestock on adjacent land.
It should also be noted that this study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm and would require more in depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis to be fully understood.
Results of Farm Scale Economic Analysis
Figure 5‑1 shows what land managers could earn on average in a year if costs and yield were spread equally over the lifecycle of the bioenergy crop as well as for farm types (for full details on the method please see Appendix E). There are gross margins for a low, medium and high scenario for each of the bioenergy crops and for the farm types (except for general cropping, forage[14]). The low, medium and high scenario for lowland cattle and sheep and mixed farming includes the lower (25%), average and upper (25%) of data from the farm business income data respectively, average data from 6 years 2016-17 to 2021-22 uprate to reflect 2023 prices[15].
Figure 5-1 ‑Yearly average gross margins for each of the PECs over the lifetime of the PEC and for each farm type £/ha (2023 prices)
If costs and income were spread equally over the lifetime of the crop, the medium scenario suggests:
Miscanthus produces a positive average annual gross margin of £382 per hectare, SRC £87 per hectare and SRF broadleaved £80 per hectare.
SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin i.e., the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold. The planting and the ground preparation costs are the main drivers behind this negative gross margin (see Appendix D for more detailed costs).
Mixed farming and and lowland cattle and sheep farms both show a greater average annual gross margin than all of the PECs examined.
The average gross margin per year for general cropping, forage is negative at around £990 per hectare, significantly lower than for all of the PECs. Based on these average annual gross margins, growing PECs in lowland cattle and sheep and mixed farming would reduce financial returns in the farm. Whereas, growing PECs in farms in the general cropping forage category could improve their financial returns.
Figure 5‑2, Figure 5-3, Figure 5-4, Figure 5-5 shows the low, medium and high scenario gross margins (output minus variable costs) over time of each of the PECs: Miscanthus, SRC, SRF broadleaved (silver birch) and SRF conifer (Sitka spruce). The higher scenario includes high output/high price minus low costs, the medium scenario includes the medium output/medium price minus medium costs and the lower scenario includes low output/low price minus high costs.
Costs included in the calculations included:
Site preparation / land preparation (including from different prior land-uses where data is available)
Establishment / planting
Crop management costs e.g., during initial growth
Harvesting
Reversion (where relevant)
Detailed breakdowns of these costs for the PECs are included in Appendix E.
Figure 5-2 Gross margins for Miscanthus (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Miscanthus shows an initial negative gross margin in the first two years during the site preparation and plant stages, but then picks up in the following years with harvesting driving the positive gross margins in the following years. The gross margin drops slightly in the year 21 when the costs of reversion take place.
Figure 5-3 Gross margins for short rotation coppice (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Short rotation coppice shows a negative gross margin for the first 3 years, in part driven by the pre-planting/land preparation costs in years -1 and 0. Gross margin is then positive in the years 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 and 18 reflecting when harvesting takes place.
Figure 5-4 Gross margins for short rotation forestry – Sitka Spruce (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Figure 5-5 Gross margins for short rotation forestry – Silver Birch (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Short rotation forestry for silver birch and Sitka spruce shows a negative gross margin except for the year 15 when harvesting takes place.
Linking back to Figure 5-1 with the lowland cattle and sheep category on average earning £433 per hectare per year, the mixed farming category £597 per hectare per year and the general forage making a loss of £990 per ha per year the results show;
Miscanthus, initially has a lower gross margin than all the other farm types, however, after the first few years, land managers would be better off planting Miscanthus.
SRC, produces a better gross margin than general cropping-forage after the first few years but is outperformed by all other categories when the yield is harvested in years five, eight, 11, 14, 17, 20 and 23.
SRF, again outperforms general cropping- forage, but has a lower gross margin than the other farm types, except for when harvest takes place in year 18.
Assessment of implications for Scotland’s rural economy
To consider the potential implications of growing more PECs, the results from the farm-scale economic analysis (Section 5.1) were extrapolated across Scottish regions, to consider a transition of approximately 40,000 to 90,000 hectares of suitable land to grow PECs – the area judged to be feasible by 2032 and 2045 respectively (see below for the source of these estimates).
Key findings:
This transition of land in mixed holdings and non-LFA cattle and sheep to PECs would create a shortfall of non-energy crops and and reduced income across the Scottish rural economy due. Because PECs would be more profitable than ‘general cropping: forage’ land-use, there would be an economic gain from transition, but loss of production of animal feed, which may have knock-on implications for livestock production costs (which have not been quantified here).
This research found that, if land to match the level of demand as set out in these scenarios, was utilised for perennial energy crops it would create:
a gain in gross margin[16] of around £9.6 million (scenario 1) or a loss of around £9.5 million (scenario 2) per year across the regions.[17]
a shortfall in agricultural yields (of farm outputs generated by existing land-use activity, which would not be available when the activity ceased to be replaced with PECs) across the regions between 537,600 tonnes (scenario 1) and 708,200 tonnes (scenario 2).
Our analysis which forms the basis of this assessment is set out below – with details of each scenario (approximately 40,000 and 90,000 hectares).
Limitations:
This assessment does not consider potential loss or additions to the economy due to changes in associated services. Some additional contracting employment for PECs servicing is likely based on the research, but this, and any potential shortfall in other employment from reducing other farm enterprises have not been assessed.
It should also be noted that the findings relate solely to gross margin comparison. Actual farm income – whole farm business income – is very different, comprising multiple farm enterprises (livestock, crops, diversifications) and may be supplemented with off-farm income. For the farm types considered here typical farm income levels are shown in Table 5-1 below (note General Cropping, Forage is not a type assessed in the Scottish Farm Business Income Survey so data is not available). Assessment of implications for PECs on the overall farm costs and income has not been fully assessed here and may reveal additional positive and negative economic implications of PECs.
Table 5-1: Annual Farm Business Income (£) (average of 6 years 2016-17 to 2021-2022)
Farm total
Per hectare
Farm Type
Lower (25%)
Average
Upper (25%)
Lower (25%)
Average
Upper (25%)
Mixed Farming
-9271
37,791
129,023
-58
225
551
Lowland Sheep & Cattle (non-LFA)
-20,688
25,756
105,926
-176
191
451
Method and results
For each of non-LFA cattle & sheep, mixed holdings, general cropping; forage, areas that would be suitable to grow PECs have been identified (see Table 5-1). (See Appendix E for further details on how these areas were selected.) This was done by using the GIS mapping done in previous work for CxC (Martin et al,2020) which identified land suitable for PECs to identify the percentage of land in region which was suitable for PECs. This percentage was then applied to the land area estimated to be in each farm type in the region, to derive the land are potentially suitable for PECs by farm type. There is some overlap between the types of land suitable for each of the three types of PECs so the areas in the table cannot be summed to give a total area.
Table 5-1 Potential land suitable for each bioenergy crop on different farm types (hectares)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total
(all farm types)
Land potentially suitable for SRF
13,601
66,189
27,746
107,536
Land potentially suitable for SRC
7,967
50,520
20,156
78,643
Land potentially suitable for Miscanthus
1,352
12,633
4,770
18,755
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs[18]could be planted by 2030, 38,000 by 2032 and 90,250 hectares by 2045. Using these estimates and the potential land that can grow bioenergy crops two illustrative scenarios have been created to estimate the potential economic gain/loss of growing bioenergy crops at the Scottish level.
Scenario 1:
From the results presented in section 5.1 it was financially beneficial to grow bioenergy crops on general cropping, forage land. Furthermore, of all the PECs, growing miscanthus was the most financially beneficial. Therefore, the first scenario assumes that two-thirds (66%) of the general cropping, forage land suitable for SRF and for SRC will be converted and 100% for Miscanthus. Only 66% of land for SRF and SRC are assumed to be converted to avoid double counting due to the likelihood that some areas identified are suitable for both PECs and thus appear in both estimates of suitable areas. Although the results in section 5.1 show that growing bioenergy crops on both non-LFA cattle and sheep and mixed holdings would not be financially beneficial, the loss was less on non-LFA cattle and sheep land. Therefore, to get to the 38,000 hectares, it was assumed that 15% of the land suitable for both SRF and SRC in non-LFA cattle and sheep holdings will be converted and 30% for Miscanthus (see Table 5-2). Overall this means that about 20% of total land in Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep[19] and 1.1% of land in general cropping, forage are converted to PECs.
Table 5-2 Land that is converted for each bioenergy crop for each farm type in scenario 1 (hectares)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total (all farm types)
SRF
8,977
9,928
–
18,905
SRC
5,258
7,578
–
12,836
Miscanthus
1,352
3,790
–
5,142
Total (all PECs)
15,587
21,296
–
36,883
Total land in farm type in Scotland
1,378,365
107,712
304,901
1,790,978
Percentage of total area converted
1.1%
20%
0%
2.1%
Results: scenario 1
Figure 5-6, shows that, for Scenario 1 there would be an economic gain for converting land used for general cropping and forage to PECs. This is because PECs have a positive, albeit small gross margin, compared to the large negative gross margin for general cropping and forage. The total gain in gross margins across the region is around £16.6 million, of which almost half occurs in Grampian.
Figure 5-6 Change in gross margin for converting General Cropping, Forage land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 1)
Figure 5-7, shows there would be potential economic loss for converting non-LFA cattle and sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF in table 5-2 (scenario 1) with Grampian showing a loss of a total of about £1.8 million. SRF showed the greatest loss in the majority of the regions, as it has the lowest gross margin of all the PECs but has more land suitable for it. Miscanthus showed the smallest loss across all regions. The total loss in gross margins across regions is just under £7 million. This loss is lower than the gain in gross margin from growing PECs on general cropping and forage farms, suggesting that achieving 38,000 ha of PECs could give a net increase in gross margins across the two farm categories of £9.6 million.
Figure 5-6 Change in gross margin from converting Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 1)
Figure 5-8 shows the reduction in production (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass from grazing land) that could occur when converting the land shown in Table 5-2 to PECs. From converting land to PECs, there is an estimated yield loss of 537,600 tonnes: 263,000 tonnes for crops replaced by with SRF, 85,300 tonnes for crops replaced by Miscanthus and 189,000 tonnes for crops replaced with SRC.
Figure 5-8 Reduction in production (barley, stock-feeding crops and grass) resulting from converting land to PECs (thousand tonnes) (Scenario 1)
Scenario 2:
For the second scenario to get to around 90,000 hectares of land, it was assumed that more of the suitable general cropping and forage land was converted to SRF and SRC (66%), and more of the non-LFA cattle and sheep land (30% of land suitable for SRF and SRC and 60% of land suitable for Miscanthus). It was assumed that a small percentage of the suitable land on mixed holdings was converted (50% of land suitable for SRF and SRC and 50% of land suitable for Miscanthus). Overall, this means that about 40% of the total land in non-LFA cattle and sheep farms, around 9% of total mixed holdings and 1.3% of total general cropping /forage land are converted to PECs.
Table 5-3 Land that is converted for each bioenergy crop for each farm type in scenario two (hectares) (Scenario 2)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total (all farm types)
SRF
10,201
19,857
13,873
43,931
SRC
5,975
15,156
10,078
31,209
Miscanthus
1,352
7,580
4,770
13,701
Total (all PECs)
17,528
42,592
28,721
88,841
Total land in farm type in Scotland
1,378,365
107,712
304,901
1,790,978
Percentage of total area converted
1.3%
40%
9%
5%
Results: scenario 2
Figure 5-9, show the results of the conversion rates set out in table 5-3 (scenario 2). The only farm type which shows an increase in gross margin for conversion to PECs is general cropping and forage (due to its current large negative gross margin). Conversions on the other farm types (necessary to meet the target planting area of around 90,000 ha) give a loss in gross margins. Overall, the increase in income in general and cropping farms of £18.6 million is not enough to offset losses in the other two farm types, (£13.9 million in non-LFA cattle and sheep farms and £14. 2 million on mixed holdings) meaning there is a net loss in gross margin of £9.5 million.
Figure 5-9 Change in gross margins from converting Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 2)
Figure 5-10 shows the crop production that could potentially be lost from converting the land shown in table 5-3 (scenario 2) to PECs. This based on loss of stock feeding crops (barley, maize and lupin) and grass silage and hay produced on each farm type. From converting land to PECs, there is estimated yield loss of 708,200 tonnes for replacing with SRF, 248,100 tonnes for replacing with Miscanthus and 523,900 tonnes for replacing with SRC.
Figure 5-10 Reduction in crop production (barley, stock-feeding crops and grass) resulting from converting land to PECs (thousand tonnes) (Scenario 2)
Preferred locations: considerations
Preferred locations for economically viable production of PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets (current biomass energy plants and potential future BECCS plants) and local enough access to services and facilities for crop management (e.g. harvesting contractors) to avoid excessive costs. We assessed preferred locations for economically viable energy crops in Scotland considering the locations of end markets in relation to viable growing areas for PECs.[20]. Insights from our rapid evidence assessment and stakeholder consultation were also considered, for example comments on economically viable transport distance.
Our analysis showed economically viable areas for PEC production bearing in mind future anticipated demand resulting from Scotland’s net zero ambitions, but only SRF could provide quantity needed, due to lack of availability of suitable land for SRC and miscanthus. As SRF is economically uncompetitive against current land-use, this suggests economic viability may be a barrier to PEC production increases even if suitable land within economically viable distance of end markets is available.
Proximity to users of biomass for energy
Biomass energy crops are bulky to transport and so haulage cost from the location where they are grown to where they are used is a factor which determines which growing locations are economically viable – a crop grown too far from its end destination will be prohibitively expensive to transport. It has been difficult to identify a specific economically viable distance in the available research. Stakeholder comments suggest that whilst 100km is a typical maximum distance to haul wood to a sawmill, a significantly lower distance is economic for biomass crops, as their value is lower than wood which will become sawn timber. In our economic analysis transport costs pre-farm gate e.g. for delivery of planting material are included, but haulage of the bioenergy crops to biomass plants has not been included in the costs as this will depend on the distance and whether the price paid to the farmer is at the farm gate or at delivery to the bioenergy plant. For the purposes of the analysis here, we assume a maximum viable distance of 100km, and consider a shorter 50km distance to reflect stakeholder feedback.
Proximity to existing biomass plants:
Biomass plants in Scotland were identified from DESNZ’ Renewable Energy Planning database which lists both existing and planned plants[21]. Existing sites vary in scale and use – some are generating power for the grid, others are located on industrial sites such as distilleries, sawmills and papermills supplying heat and power for the industry, whilst others are small supplying e.g. a hotel. Eight sites were selected from the list as being most likely to consider using PECs as a fuel (See Appendix J). Plant which are located on sites where there is already a ready supply of fuel (e.g. sawmills, paper and pulp) were excluded as were very small sites and sites which were not yet operational or under construction.
A buffer of 50km and 100km from these biomass plants has been applied in Figure 6-1, to show the potential geographical areas which could supply biomass markets in Scotland.
Figure 6-1: Biomass plant locations
Proximity to future BECCS facilities:
CCC[22] highlights that Scotland has very good potential for deploying Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage (BECCS) due to its access to a potential CO2 storage site in the North Sea, along with its ability to produce domestic BECCS feedstocks. A pilot facility, the Acorn Transport and Storage Facility in Aberdeenshire looks set for further investment after the UK government announced in March 2023 that it considers this site to be one of the two best placed to deliver its objective of capturing 20-30 megatonnes of CO2 across the UK economy by 2030[23]. The proposed access points to this facility are via a feeder pipeline along Scotland’s east coast which starts at Bathgate and ends at St Fergus, with two injection points at Kirriemuir and Garlogie. Large scale BECCS plants for electricity, biomass gasification for hydrogen, or biofuel production[24] may be located in proximity to these access points to benefit from easy access to the pipeline. This study assesses how much land suitable for growing bioenergy crops is within 50km and 100km of these access points. This mapping is presented in Figure 6-2.
Kirriemuir
St. Fergus
Garlogie
Bathgate
Figure 6-2 Feeder pipeline locations and nearby land suitable for PECs
Table 6-1 shows the total potential PEC growing areas with these distances.
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs[25]could be planted by 2030 and 38,000 by 2032; With this area of land, depending on the yields obtained for PECs and the efficiency of the power plant, PECs could provide feedstock for a BECCs power plant producing between 60 and 80 MWe. The data in Table 6-1 suggests that this land is available, within 50km of all proposed access points along the east coast feeder pipeline for SRC and Miscanthus, but this would require a large portion of the suitable land to be used. A larger land area which is suitable for growing SRF is available.
Table 6-1: Total potential PEC growing areas within 50km and 100km of potential BECCS sites, and existing biomass plant locations.
Feeder pipeline locations
Biomass plant locations
Within 50km
Within 100km
Within 50km
Within 100km
SRC
82,471 ha
161,016 ha
117,222 ha
225,013 ha
Miscanthus
8,224 ha
18,057 ha
18,280 ha
28,873 ha
SRF
551,303 ha
826,528 ha
555,193 ha
858,669 ha
Access to service and facilities for crop management, harvesting and processing.
Access to services and facilities for crop management harvesting and processing, such as local contractors with suitable equipment has been identified in the research and by stakeholders as a factor which would influence the suitability of growing areas for PACs. The evidence review did not provide information on the availability and access to these services in Scotland, or the speed with which services could develop if a growth in production were planned. Easy access should not be assumed, particularly given the shortage of forestry skills in Scotland and constraint on travel distance which influence the economic viability – access issues would need to be addressed before an area could be suitable for economically viable PEC growing.
Other location considerations
As is evident from the REA, biodiversity and other ecosystem services can impacted by PEC cultivation. Choice of crop, cultivation regime and location need to be carefully considered to optimise environmental benefits and avoid negative impacts. The impact is highly situation specific and could not be assessed in detail within scope of this research but should be considered carefully when selecting locations.
SWOT & PESTLE Analysis
This section provides analysis of the strengths and weaknesses of these crops, and the factors supporting or hindering uptake, drawing together the research findings. A PESTLE analysis was also carried to understand the potential enabling and preventative factors which could influence the economic viability of energy crops in Scotland. Further detailed SWOT and PESTLE analyses are available in Appendix I.
SWOT Analysis of energy crop economic potential
Table 7-1 presents SWOT analysis common to PECs assessed in this research. Further discussion of variations between Miscanthus, SRC and SRF is included in Section 9.
Table 7-1: Summary of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats for PEC in Scotland.
Strengths
Weaknesses
Feasible growing areas including proximity to potential BECCS sites (varies by crop)
Low input & maintenance costs
Alternative markets beyond energy (e.g. Miscanthus for animal bedding; SRF grow on for other wood products)
Stable annual income if sequentially planted
Shading benefits for adjacent land
Cash flow- upfront cost to establish crops, and several years before first harvest income
Lack of specific subsidies / financial support for energy crops.
Need for specialist knowledge and equipment – access constraints
Lack of processing facilities
Biomass cost currently compares unfavourable to fossil fuels
Biomass for energy is a lower value crop than sawmill wood / biomass for other industries (such as bio-based plastics)[26]
Limits farmer land-use rotation choices
Costs of transport for bulky crop – constrains distance from end market
Shading disadvantage for adjacent crop.
Opportunities
Threats
Income diversification: potential additional revenue stream with limited workload after establishment.
To design PEC planting to deliver additional environmental benefits such as water management, biodiversity, soil health.
To improve farm energy security/costs by use of biomass on farms
To harness innovation pipeline and developing knowledge base to increase yields / cut costs (see Appendix H)
Potential competition between different Scottish users (e.g., on farm vs BECCS)
Public / NGO negative perceptions
Farmer/land-manager preferences for current land-use and perception of PECs as financially risky.
Limited geographical spread of contractors.
PESTLE Analysis
The PESTLE analysis considersthe political, economic, social technical, legal and environmental factors which currently enable or prevent energy crops becoming an economically viable prospect for farmers in Scotland. The summary PESTLE is set out in Table 7-2 below, discussion of the results follows in Section 9.
Table 7.2: Summary of PESTLE analysis for growing PECs in Scotland.
Enabling factors
Preventative factors
Political
Political support by Scottish / UK government –identified as critical to climate goals.
Uncertainty of specific policies/ government financial support.
Limited grant funding opportunities for farmers and land-managers.
Economic
Low input costs / labour costs once established.
Income diversification opportunity / additional income stream if planted on previous unproductive land.
Machinery innovation could cut costs of production.
Large initial investment and lack of cash flow in years before first harvest.
High production costs, compared to imported biomass.
Uncertain markets and market prices
Low profitability over whole crop lifetime.
Social
Potential for employment in contracting services (e.g. planting / harvesting).
Perception of PEC as financially risky.
Attitudes / preferences of farmers and land-manager – preferences for familiar farm enterprises.
Concerns about competition for land / resources e.g. livestock farmers concern about loss of local feed crops.
Moral concerns about PEC replacing other land-uses e.g. food crops.
Negative publicity about energy crops.
Age of farmers: older farmers may not be in business long-enough to see profits.
Technical
Potential to use existing harvesters for Miscanthus.
Production and harvesting technology improvements in the pipeline.
BECCS is an emerging technology – no current plants in Scotland.
Need for specialist machinery, especially for SRC/SRF, which is limited in Scotland.
Interdependence between producers and bioenergy plant: concurrent development of market and supply is challenging.
Legal
Long-term contracts between end users and farmers can give confidence for investments.
SRF results in legal land-use category change – reversion to farming may be prevented in future.
Some crops are subject to cultivation licences (e.g. Hemp, Eucalyptus).
Long-term land-use decisions difficult for tenant farmers.
Environmental
Desire for ecosystem services which some PECs could deliver e.g. flood control.
Agrochemical restrictions driving interest in low-input PECs
Potential to increase soil carbon
Biodiversity / habitat benefits in some circumstances, but some uncertainty
Concerns about biodiversity impacts of ‘monoculture’.
Environmental benefits depend on sustainable production methods.
Right crop – right land is critical: carbon stored in soils could be released by planting on peaty soils / uplands areas.
Limited suitable areas e.g. some reports state SRC cannot tolerate water-logged soils.
Winter hardiness of Miscanthus a constraint for Scotland.
Future climate change favour Miscanthus.
Discussion
The research and analysis show multiple positive and negative features of the PECs. The implications of these for economic viability of PECs in Scotland is discussed here.
Economic potential to farmers and land managers
Economic potential of PECs in Scotland for farmer and land managers
Overall, the economic analysis showed Miscanthus could be most profitable over the life cycle, but though SRC and SRF broadleaves appear to achieve lower profitability, there are larger areas suited to these crops and less uncertainty about their suitability to the Scottish climate.
Achievable biomass yields, which significantly influences economic viability, is still subject to some uncertainty as commercial growing and trials in Scotland are limited, particularly for SRF and Miscanthus. The analysis shows a significant difference between high, medium and low costs and income from the three PECs considered. It could be reasonably assumed that this level of uncertainty may lead to farmers and land-managers having low confidence to plant the crops. Forthcoming results of Scottish research trials and developments may improve confidence, for example Miscanthus varieties more suitable to Scotland’s climate are in development (see Appendix H) which could extend the range or improve yields in Scotland.
Equipment needs, and therefore costs and economic potential, vary for the different PECs:
Miscanthus can be harvested by typical harvesting equipment which an arable or mixed farmer would either own, or have easy access to via local contractors; whereas for SRC and SRF the equipment needs are more specialist, so requires significant investment or access to local contractors, which is currently constrained in Scotland.
The PESTLE analysis shows that, of the factors which are likely to prevent farmers and land-managers from currently viewing PECs as an attractive proposition and hinder the uptake across Scotland. The most important, are:
the low or negative income from the crops,
upfront investment requirement, and
uncertain market for the crops.
Stakeholder feedback suggested some approaches which may addressing these issues:
Financial support for farmers, land-managers and other necessary parts of the sector including to enable adoption of forthcoming innovations aimed at improving yields and cutting costs, such as new harvesting techniques and mobile machinery for processing materials on farms.
Fixed price and long-term contracts for future crops, at prices higher than production costs. However, given imported biomass and fossil fuels appear to be available at lower cost it is unlikely that end-users will find it feasible to offer attractively priced contracts.
Greater clarity over the likely environmental impacts in Scottish context – both local impacts such as on biodiversity and wider impacts for example indirect land-use change from competition for food / animal feed crops – and how to design of PEC planting in Scotland to maximise positive environmental benefits.
Locational and temporal issues
In terms of suitable and preferred locations for energy crop production in Scotland, as described in Section 6, the proximity to biomass markets (such as power plants) is a key determining factor. The research has shown that there are suitable growing regions, primarily for SRC and SRF within 50km to 100km of existing biomass plants, or potential sites for BECCS plants close to the proposed east coast feeder pipeline, which are likely to be the dominant market demand in a future, more mature biomass market aligned to the Scottish Governments climate ambition. There is some uncertainty about the economically viable distance to transport energy crops, with stakeholders suggesting it would be significantly less than the typical 100km for sawmill quality wood. The number of viable production areas with 50km of potential sites is lower, but they are most advantageous due to lower transport costs (and GHG emissions).
The study did not explore in detail the potential for on-farm use of biomass, but stakeholder consultation suggested this may be an economically viable alternative, particularly for farms not located close to a suitable biomass plant, and given the context of high energy costs. On farm use of PECs is not a negative emissions technology, as it is not feasible to apply carbon capture to small scale plants, but it would contribute to decarbonising agriculture if it replaced fossil fuel use for power and heating in farm buildings.
Looking ahead, if demand for biomass grows in Scotand, UK and elsewhere as countries expand BECCS capacity the market prices for PECs may change. Input costs can also vary significantly. It is beyond scope of this research to deliver a full analysis of future scenarios for the market, or local market dynamics related to specific BECCS sites, but it is clear from the range of profitability demonstrated in Section 5.1, that a range of scenarios should be planned for.
Interactions between PECs and adjacent land-use and wider landscapes and ecology was shown to be an important location factor to consider. Impacts could be beneficial, such as shading / shelter for livestock and to reduce wind exposure for adjacent crops, or could be negative depending on local landscape features, for example reduced yields in adjacent crops due to shading. Positive potential biodiversity impacts have been suggested by some stakeholders, such as habitat for birds, mammals and beneficial insects if edges between PEC and other land-use is maximised, but there was also concern about negative consequences of land-use change and monoculture PECs on biodiversity. Water management benefits also vary across the crops, and the lifecycle of the crops. The implication of the research is that the effective integration of PECs into natural landscapes and farming systems in Scotland to deliver maximum additional environmental benefits will require careful design in relation to the specific local environmental context.
A key issue for economic viability of PECs is the distribution of costs and income over time. Poor cashflow for farmers and land-managers is typical for PECs, because initial costs of establishment are not recouped until harvest after several years. The time from establishment to first harvest varies so the time where a farmer/ land-manager would likely experience cash flow challenges would also vary. The shortest time to first harvest was for Miscanthus, at around 2-3 years for full harvest with potentially a small harvest in the first year, SRC is typically 3 years for first harvest, and 6 years to first full harvest, and for SRF there is typically around 15 years till first harvest. Sequential planting can help create a more regular income because a portion of the crop would be ready for harvest each year. For SRC/ SRF this can be feasible if the harvesting equipment is already available on the farm, or the yearly harvest would be enough to warrant a visit from a contractor. For Miscanthus, there is an annual harvest once established so sequential planting of a portion of land intended for Miscanthus each year would allow for some of initial income to be used for subsequent planting reducing the size of initial outlay whilst increasing the area allocated to the crop over time.
Income diversification
Stakeholder comments suggest that the current levels of interest from farmers in diversification, including into crops with lower input costs and stable income, could be a significant enabler to the uptake of PECs. However, the economic analysis suggests that this would only be the case, if the core barriers around profitability, cashflow and financial risk were addressed.
Other factors influencing PEC uptake
The research found that farmer and land manager attitudes, habits, skills and perceptions, as well as those of the wider community are likely to be influential, alongside the economics, in determining the degree to which energy crops are adopted in Scotland. Low appetite for financial risk is a key preventative factor, with most farmers looking to reduce their exposure to risk and so only likely to be interested in energy crops if they are perceived as a low risk strategy in their own right, or a beneficial diversification of income as part of a wider business risk reduction strategy. The research suggests that, without clearer evidence of favourable market, price and productivity the current perception of these crops as relatively risky is unlikely to change. Concerns about competition with other crops, sustainability credentials, and public perception of the ‘morality’ of energy crops is also likely to influence farmers and land-manager attitudes. Alongside these factors, it was highlighted during the research that farmers often have a strong preference for their current farming enterprises and so may be reluctant to adopt new crops even if they appear financially advantageous and that a significantly higher financial return may be needed to persuade a shift to energy crops in these circumstances.
State of the evidence base and identification of any key gaps
The key gaps and debates in the literature were described in Section 4, and limitations in economic analysis in Section 5. The research shows a need for more robust evidence on potential yields, production costs and environmental impacts specifically for Scotland.
Quantification of potential wider farm benefits, such as shelter for livestock, and estimation of economic value of these benefits to farmers was not identified through this research, but could help create a fuller picture of the economic potential of energy crops for Scotland.
We found limited research on the risks for crop failure / poor productivity from pest, diseases, extreme weather which hampers full assessment of the financial risk exposure of farmers and land-managers associated with planting PECs.
This study has not included a detailed comparison of PECs for NETs with annual bioenergy crops and other bioenergy technologies, such as anaerobic digestion or smaller scale use of PECs on farms for direct energy generation. The REA and stakeholder feedback indicated potential for farmers to benefit from energy security and reduce energy costs if they were to utilise energy crops for their own energy generation. This study has not modelled the current economics of investment in relevant plant and ongoing cost: benefit of this scenario. This research would be potentially beneficial to understand how local small-scale use compares to larger scale use in NETs, and therefore fully understand the relative economic potential of PECs in Scotland.
The research found debates and discussions about how land should be used to fulfil societies various material needs (food, fuel, fibre etc.) and provide space for biodiversity and deliver other ecosystem services. To inform this debate various additional factors, beyond the scope of this research are relevant including the relative benefits of using land for PECs vs other types of renewable energy such as wind and solar energy. Stakeholders highlighted that solar, for example compares, well and there is growing interest in agrivoltaics – solar voltaic panels within agricultural land that may still retain some of its agricultural use such as livestock grazing.
Conclusions
Perennial energy crops have the potential to generate income for farmers and land-managers in Scotland.
However, income is likely to be lower than they could earn from other farm enterprises, such as lowland cattle and sheep and ‘mixed agriculture’, that are typical on the types of land which may be suitable.
The exception is where PEC profitability is compared to ‘general cropping: forage’ farming type (growing crops for animal consumption, usually on lower quality land) this activity typically makes a significant loss, so PECs compared very favourably in the analysis.
for PECs to be viewed as an attractive, economically viable option by farmers and land managers there is a need for greater confidence that it will deliver good economic returns. The high upfront establishment costs for perennial energy crops and low revenue potential are both likely to hinder uptake.
Profitability of perennial energy crops based on gross margin calculations
If costs and income were spread equally over the lifetime of the crop and compared, PECs are less profitable than current farming enterprises, except for ‘general cropping: forage’ which is not typically making a profit.
Of the three crops studied, Miscanthus showed the highest average gross margin at £382 per hectare per year but there are some potentially limiting factors:
uncertainty about achievable yields in the Scottish climate and on the grades of land above category 4.1 in the Land Capability for Agriculture in Scotland. If yields were lower, then profit may be lower.
Limited theoretical growing area in Scotland – much lower than for SRF or SRC based on analysis of land quality and characteristics and Scotland’s climate.
SRF and SRC showed lower profitability for farmers: £80 and £87 per hectare per year over their lifetime respectively for SRF: broadleaved and SRC, making them less attractive but there is more suitable land for growing these. SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin i.e., the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold.
Potential opportunities
The research also identified some potential positive attributes of PECs which might encourage uptake – PECs could help diversify a business, creating additional income, without adding significant additional labour requirements or ongoing input costs – minimal management time and inputs are required once crops are established.
Potential barriers
Cash flow could pose a problem – the distribution of costs and income year-on-year for PECs is significantly different to typical farming activities which have an annual profit cycle. PECs need investment in site preparation and planting upfront, but income only arrives after first harvest several years later (2-3 years Miscanthus, 6 for SRC, 15 for SRF) and then only periodically after that.
Coupled with uncertainty about market demand and achievable crop sale prices, the need for upfront investment to establish PEC production, means farmers and land managers may view them as a risky proposition and be reluctant to grow them.
We identified other potential barriers to uptake, including farmer and land-manager unfamiliarity with PEC production, low appetite for risk, need for new skills, access to equipment and services, and concerns about community perception of land-use change and impacts on other agricultural production, e.g. available animal feed.
Enhancing economic potential and production of PECs
Potential approaches to improve economic potential in Scotland include:
financial incentives, such as government specific subsidies under future agricultural support,
risk reduction strategies such as secure, attractively-priced contracts with end markets, alongside expansion of the market.
Innovations to allow processing at the farm and to improve transportability of crops could also help to increase the economically viable travel distance.
Implications for wider Scottish economy:
Previous research suggests 38000 could be feasibly planted by 2032 (scenario one) and 90,000 by 2045 (scenario two).
We found that, if land to match this level of demand, was utilised for perennial energy crops (using the scenarios as defined in section 5.2), it would create a gain in gross margin of around £9.6 million (scenario 1) or a loss of around £9.5 million (scenario two) across the regions.
Economically viable production locations:
Economically viable production locations for PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets (current biomass energy plants and potential future BECCS plants) and local enough access to services and facilities for crop management (e.g. harvesting contractors) to avoid excessive costs.
We identified suitable growing regions (some SRC/Miscanthus and most for SRF) within an economically viable transport distance to existing biomass plants and potential sites for BECCS near the proposed east coast carbon capture and storage feeder pipeline (assumed 50-100 km).
As SRF is economically uncompetitive against current land-use, this suggests economic viability may be a barrier to PEC production increases even if suitable land is available.
Potential further steps
Key debates and areas for further research include:
Considering more in-depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis. This study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm but could be explored through farm case studies. This could include considering a wider range of costs for farmers and that after initial set up the PECs would require less workload.
Comparing, the economic and environmental potential of using land for energy crops with utilising the same land for other renewable energy options (for example using the land for solar panels alongside grazing) and
Potential role for on-farm use of perennial energy crops.
Considering future biomass markets, including how future Greenhouse Gas Removal (GGR) schemes, global demand and demand from biotechnology sector may impact it.
Identifying how to make domestic biomass from energy crops a more attractive option than imports and a more profitable use of land, and on what basis this can be justified. For example, taking account of full LCA and rewarding greatest emission saving.
Considering in more detail the role of PECs in the context of how the agriculture sector is changing and how it may have to change to reduce GHG emissions.
Considering the value, including the financial value, of other benefits of energy crops, such as flood mitigation or animal shelter, relative to existing or potential alternative land-uses.
Exploring how PECs support/interact with tier 2 or 3 objectives of the ARP.
Considering the impact of subsidies.
References
Alexander, P., D. Moran, et al. (2014). “Estimating UK perennial energy crop supply using farm-scale models with spatially disaggregated data.” Global Change Biology Bioenergy 6(2): 142-155.
Alexander, P., Moran, D., Rounsevell, M.D., Hillier, J. and Smith, P., 2014. Cost and potential of carbon abatement from the UK perennial energy crop market. GCB Bioenergy, 6(2), pp.156-168.
Alexander, P., Moran, D. and Rounsevell, M.D., 2015. Evaluating potential policies for the UK perennial energy crop market to achieve carbon abatement and deliver a source of low carbon electricity. Biomass and Bioenergy, 82, pp.3-12.
Anejionu, O.C. and Woods, J., 2019. Preliminary farm-level estimation of 20-year impact of introduction of energy crops in conventional farms in the UK. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 116, p.109407.
Berkley, N. A. J., Hanley, M. E., Boden, R., Owen, R. S., Holmes, J. H., Critchley, R. D., … Parmesan, C. (2018). Influence of bioenergy crops on pollinator activity varies with crop type and distance. GCB Bioenergy, 10(12), 960–971. https://doi.org/10.1111/gcbb.12565
Bocquého, G., 2017. Effects of liquidity constraints, risk and related time effects on the adoption of perennial energy crops. Handbook of Bioenergy Economics and Policy: Volume II: Modeling Land Use and Greenhouse Gas Implications, pp.373-399.
Bourke, D., Stanley, D., O’Rourke, E., Thompson, R., Carnus, T., Dauber, J., … Stout, J. (2014). Response of farmland biodiversity to the introduction of bioenergy crops: effects of local factors and surrounding landscape context. GCB Bioenergy, 6(3), 275–289. https://doi.org/10.1111/gcbb.12089
Brown, C., Bakam, I., Smith, P. and Matthews, R., 2016. An agent‐based modelling approach to evaluate factors influencing bioenergy crop adoption in north‐east Scotland. Global Change Biology Bioenergy, 8(1), pp.226-244.
Busch, G., 2017. A spatial explicit scenario method to support participative regional land-use decisions regarding economic and ecological options of short rotation coppice (SRC) for renewable energy production on arable land: case study application for the Göttingen district, Germany. Energy, Sustainability and Society, 7, pp.1-23.
Dandy, N., 2010. Stakeholder Perceptions of Short-rotation Forestry for energy.
Davies, I., 2020. Miscanthus: Can it tackle climate change and turn a profit? Farmers Weekly. 18 March 2020. [Date accessed 9 August 2023].
Dogbe, W. and Revoredo-Giha, C., 2022 Current and Potential Market Opportunities for Hempseed and Fibre in Scotland.Donnison, I. S. and M. D. Fraser (2016). “Diversification and use of bioenergy to maintain future grasslands.” Food and Energy Security 5(2): 67-75.
Glithero, N.J., Wilson, P. and Ramsden, S.J., 2013. Prospects for arable farm uptake of Short Rotation Coppice willow and Miscanthus in England. Applied energy, 107, pp.209-218.
Griffiths, N.A., Rau, B.M., Vaché, K.B., Starr, G., Bitew, M.M., Aubrey, D.P., Martin, J.A., Benton, E. and Jackson, C.R., 2019. Environmental effects of short‐rotation woody crops for bioenergy: What is and isn’t known. GCB Bioenergy, 11(4), pp.554-572.
Hastings, A., Mos, M., Yesufu, J.A., McCalmont, J., Schwarz, K., Shafei, R., Ashman, C., Nunn, C., Schuele, H., Cosentino, S. and Scalici, G., 2017. Economic and environmental assessment of seed and rhizome propagated Miscanthus in the UK. Frontiers in Plant Science, 8, p.1058.
Haszeldine, R., Cavanagh, A., Scott, V., Sohi, S., & Masek, O. (2019). Greenhouse Gas Removal Technologies – approaches and implementation pathways in Scotland. University of Edinburgh & Heriot Watt University 2019 on behalf of ClimateXChange. https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/media/3749/greenhouse-gas-removal-technologies.pdf
Holland, R. A., Eigenbrod, F., Muggeridge, A., Brown, G., Clarke, D., & Taylor, G. (2015). A synthesis of the ecosystem services impact of second generation bioenergy crop production. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 46, 30-40.
Hudiburg, T.W., Davis, S.C., Parton, W. and Delucia, E.H., 2015. Bioenergy crop greenhouse gas mitigation potential under a range of management practices. Gcb Bioenergy, 7(2), pp.366-374
Kralik, T., Vavrova, K., Knapek, J. and Weger, J., 2022. Agroforestry systems as new strategy for bioenergy—Case example of Czech Republic. Energy Reports, 8, pp.519-525.
Leslie, Andrew, Mencuccini, Maurizio, Perks, Mike and Wilson, Edward (2019) A
review of the suitability of eucalypts for short rotation forestry for energy in the
UK. New Forests, 51 (1). pp. 1-19.
Liu, C.L.C., Kuchma, O. and Krutovsky, K.V., 2018. Mixed-species versus monocultures in plantation forestry: Development, benefits, ecosystem services and perspectives for the future. Global Ecology and conservation, 15, p.e00419
Low Carbon Contracts Company, 2022. Fuel Measurement and Sampling (FMS) Guidance. Available at https://lcc-web-production-eu-west-2-files20230703161747904200000001.s3.amazonaws.com/documents/FMS_Guidance_-_Version_2_February_2022.pdf
Martin, G., Ingvorsen, L., Willcocks, J., Wiltshire, J., Bates, J., Jenkins, B., Priestley, T., McKay, H. and Croxten, S., 2020. Evidence review: Perennial energy crops and their potential in Scotland.
McCalmont, J.P., Hastings, A., McNamara, N.P., Richter, G.M., Robson, P., Donnison, I.S. and Clifton‐Brown, J., 2017. Environmental costs and benefits of growing Miscanthus for bioenergy in the UK. Gcb Bioenergy, 9(3), pp.489-507.
Meek, D. Jenevezian, A. , Leishman, R., Odeh, N., and Bates, J. Ricardo Energy & Environment, 2022, Comparing Scottish bioenergy Supply and Demand in the context of Net-Zero targets.
Mola-Yudego, B., I. Dimitriou, et al. (2014). “A conceptual framework for the introduction of energy crops.” Renewable Energy 72: 29-38.
Morris, J. and Day, G., 2023. The Potential of Agroforestry for Bioenergy in the UK.
Ofgem, 2021. Sustainability Self-Reporting Guidance. Available at https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/docs/2021/04/sustainability_self-reporting_guidance_final_2021.pdf
Olba-Zięty, E., Stolarski, M.J. and Krzyżaniak, M., 2021. Economic evaluation of the production of perennial crops for energy purposes—A review. Energies, 14(21), p.7147.
Ostwald, M., Jonsson, A., Wibeck, V. and Asplund, T., 2013. Mapping energy crop cultivation and identifying motivational factors among Swedish farmers. Biomass and Bioenergy, 50, pp.25-34.
Parratt, M. 2017, Short Rotation Forestry Trials in Scotland 2017 Report, Forest Research
Perrin, A., Wohlfahrt, J., Morandi, F., Østergård, H., Flatberg, T., De La Rua, C., Bjørkvoll, T. and Gabrielle, B., 2017. Integrated design and sustainable assessment of innovative biomass supply chains: A case-study on Miscanthus in France. Applied Energy, 204, pp.66-77.
Petrenko, C. and Searle, S., 2016. Assessing the profitability of growing dedicated energy versus food crops in four European countries. Proceedings of the Working paper, 14.
Ranacher, L., Pollakova, B., Schwarzbauer, P., Liebal, S., Weber, N. and Hesser, F., 2021. Farmers’ Willingness to Adopt Short Rotation Plantations on Marginal Lands: Qualitative Study About Incentives and Barriers in Slovakia. BioEnergy Research, 14, pp.357-373.
Scottish Government, 2021, Scotland’s Third Land-use Strategy 2021-2026
Schiberna, E., Borovics, A. and Benke, A., 2021. Economic modelling of poplar short rotation coppice plantations in Hungary. Forests, 12(5), p.623.
Shepherd, A., Clifton‐Brown, J., Kam, J., Buckby, S. and Hastings, A., 2020. Commercial experience with Miscanthus crops: Establishment, yields and environmental observations. GCB Bioenergy, 12(7), pp.510-523.
Shepherd, A., Littleton, E., Clifton‐Brown, J., Martin, M. and Hastings, A., 2020a. Projections of global and UK bioenergy potential from Miscanthus× giganteus—Feedstock yield, carbon cycling and electricity generation in the 21st century. GCB Bioenergy, 12(4), pp.287-305.
Spackman, P., 2012. Energy crops need support to fulfill potential. Farmers Weekly. 8 June 2012. [Date accessed 9 August 2023].
Thornley, P., 2006. Increasing biomass based power generation in the UK. Energy Policy, 34(15), pp.2087-2099.
Tullus, H., Tullus, A. and Rytter, L., 2013. Short-rotation forestry for supplying biomass for energy production. Forest bioenergy production: management, carbon sequestration and adaptation, pp.39-56.
Vanbeverena, S., & Ceulemansa, R. (2019). Biodiversity in short-rotation coppice. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 111, 34-43.
Walle, I.V., Van Camp, N., Van de Casteele, L., Verheyen, K. and Lemeur, R., 2007. Short-rotation forestry of birch, maple, poplar and willow in Flanders (Belgium) I—Biomass production after 4 years of tree growth. Biomass and bioenergy, 31(5), pp.267-275.
Warren, C. R., 2014. “Scales of disconnection: mismatches shaping the geographies of emerging energy landscapes.” Moravian Geographical Reports 22(2): 7-14.
Warren, C.R., Burton, R., Buchanan, O. and Birnie, R.V., 2016. Limited adoption of short rotation coppice: The role of farmers’ socio-cultural identity in influencing practice. Journal of Rural Studies, 45, pp.175-183.
Whittaker, C., Hunt, J., Misselbrook, T. and Shield, I., 2016. How well does Miscanthus ensile for use in an anaerobic digestion plant? Biomass and Bioenergy, 88, pp.24-34.
Witzel, C.P. and Finger, R., 2016. Economic evaluation of Miscanthus production–A review. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 53, pp.681-696.
Winkler, B., Mangold, A., von Cossel, M., Clifton-Brown, J., Pogrzeba, M., Lewandowski, I., Iqbal, Y. and Kiesel, A., 2020. Implementing Miscanthus into farming systems: A review of agronomic practices, capital and labour demand. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 132, p.110053.
Zhang, B., Hastings, A., Clifton‐Brown, J.C., Jiang, D. and Faaij, A.P., 2020. Spatiotemporal assessment of farm‐gate production costs and economic potential of Miscanthus× giganteus, Panicum virgatum L., and Jatropha grown on marginal land in China. GCB Bioenergy, 12(5), pp.310-327.
Zimmermann, J., Styles, D., Hastings, A., Dauber, J. and Jones, M.B., 2014. Assessing the impact of within crop heterogeneity (‘patchiness’) in young Miscanthus× giganteus fields on economic feasibility and soil carbon sequestration. Gcb Bioenergy, 6(5), pp.566-576.
Appendix A: Policy Context for Energy Crops in Scotland
Climate Change Policy
The Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu)[27], published by the Scottish Government in December 2020, whilst focused on reducing emissions, identifies the need to also remove carbon dioxide from the atmosphere to compensate for residual emissions. It foresees a role for technologies to achieve a net reduction in emissions – often referred to as Negative Emissions technologies (NETs). It identifies several NETs pathways with potential in Scotland, including bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS). Climate Committee’s (CCC) 6th Carbon Budget sets out that achieving the required scale of BECCS will necessitate a significant increase in the domestic production of biomass feedstocks[28].
The CCC’s 2022 review of Scotland’s progress[29] highlighted that Scotland’s planned deployment of NETs was ambitious, comprising two thirds of UK government overall ambition for 2030, but also notes the advantage of Scotland’s large land area and potential to draw on substantial biomass stocks. It recommends consideration of the impacts and interactions that increased domestic biomass production could have on land use and agriculture. The Scottish Government has acknowledged that these targets can’t be met – the NETs feasibility study gives more realistic targets[30]. Failure to meet NETs targets for Scotland implies deeper emissions reductions in harder-to-decarbonise sectors, such as aviation and agriculture, and so it is critical to consider how farmers and land-managers can deliver the necessary biomass feedstocks. The CCPu includes a proposal to develop rural support policy to enable, encourage planting of biomass crops within broader measures on sustainable, low carbon farming[31]. The CCC recommends maintenance and enhancement of support for agroforestry[32], and a target of 5% trees on farmland by 2035.
Agricultural policy
Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture recognises the essential role agriculture has in delivering sustainable food production, climate adaptation and mitigation, biodiversity recovery and nature restoration and proposes that future subsidy support for agriculture will be split across unconditional support and support targeted to environmental outcomes, including low carbon farming and biodiversity The new Scottish Agriculture Bill as introduced to parliament on 28th September 2023 provides a replacement for the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) and has been drafted to provide the required powers and framework to deliver the Vision for Agriculture. The bill would require Scottish Ministers to prepare a five-year Rural Support Plan for farming, forestry, and rural development. The Agricultural Reform Route Map (ruralpayments.org) sets out the milestones and timescales for change. The Agriculture Bill and Rural Support Plan will have implications for how economically viable it may be in future for farmers and land-managers to grow energy crops. Whilst the details are yet to be confirmed, it is clear that any expansion of perennial energy crops will need to take these policy developments into account.
Other key policies:
Principles of ‘just transition’ are defined in legislation[33] and Scotland’s draft ‘Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan’[34] was published in January 2023. It describes Scotland’s aim to use bioenergy where it can best support Scotland’s Net Zero Journey, and aligns with and supports Scotland’s goals for protecting and restoring nature. It contains a commitment to review the potential to scale up domestic biomass supply chains. Bioenergy crops, if economically viable, could offer the agricultural sector a new income stream and support the rural economy, which would be consistent with the draft plan. The draft plan also includes a proposal to develop a strategic framework for the most appropriate use of finite bio-resources (published in a Bioenergy Action Plan), acknowledging the potential for competing demands on land and natural resources. CCPu also acknowledges the need for open a discussion on optimum land uses beyond just farming and food production to multi-faceted land use including forestry, peatland restoration and management and biomass production.
UK biomass policy context
The UK Government’s Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) published a Biomass Strategy in August 2023 which set out the Government’s view that well-regulated BECCS can deliver negative emissions and ensure positive outcomes for people, the environment, and the climate. It commits the UK Government to strengthen sustainability criteria and verification processes for biomass, acknowledging challenges with international supply chains, and creating a cross-sector sustainability framework for biomass (subject to consultation). The focus will be on addressing greenhouse gas emissions, indirect land-use change, and potentially soil carbon changes. The strategy anticipates a key role for both domestic and imported biomass use across the economy, on a limited timescale. It also sets out how the government is actively developing demand side policies to support emerging technologies such as BECCS and Greenhouse Gas Reduction (GGR) business models, for example the potential for a ‘Contracts for Difference’ (CfD)[35] approach. The strategy acknowledges that bioenergy policy involves a mix of reserved and non-reserved powers, and so as the Scottish Government develops its draft Bioenergy Policy Statement, Scotland has an opportunity to build on UK policies and develop policies appropriate for Scotland.
Appendix B: Introduction to Perennial Energy Crops
Introduction to Miscanthus
Miscanthus is a tall perennial grass with woody canes like bamboo, of East Asian Origin. The most common variety of Miscanthus grown is the sterile hybrid Miscanthus x giganteus (M. giganteus). Miscanthus is a renewable source of fibre which has a wide potential range of uses as biomass or fibre. Whilst Miscanthus can be grown in parts of Scotland, it is not currently grown at commercial scale and further trials are required to verify its potential future contribution (Meek et al., 2022). Nonetheless, Martin, et al 2020 found 51,800ha of land is theoretically suitable in Scotland to grow Miscanthus which could produce 2.59TWh/yr and 0.52Modt/yr.
To grow, the crop must be established by planting pieces of rhizome (underground plant stem capable of producing the shoot and root systems) which have been collected from fields where Miscanthus is already established[36]. Prior to planting, site preparation may typically involve breaking up compacted soil, removing weeds (using herbicides), ploughing to 30cm depth, then further levelling and soil cultivation to create a fine level soil to around 15cm[37]. Equipment which is typically available on an arable farm can be used for this site preparation and planting. Planting using specialist equipment achieves best results, but a potato planter could alternatively be used[38]. Biodegradable plastic film to prevent frost damage and retain moisture and fencing to prevent rabbits damage can improve success of crop establishment. Once planted, some gap filling might be needed (done manually) and chemical weed control in the first year or so. Fertilisers are not usually needed. After the first year the material is cut back and left in the field. In year 2, depending on the growth rate, there will be a small harvest, or another cut back. Once established a Miscanthus crop is harvested annually, usually in early spring when moisture content is lower, and can be productive for around 15 years. The material is baled, or sometime chipped, to enable easier transport and storage. Sometimes drying is required in storage (natural or mechanical ventilation). At the end of the crop lifetime, to revert the land to other uses, a herbicide is often used to kill Miscanthus shoots and rhizome, followed by ploughing.
Short Rotation Coppice (SRC) commonly consists of high-yielding varieties of either poplar or willow, densely planted on a piece of land. The solid, woody biomass provides a source of biofuel that is either used alone or combined with other fuels to power district heating systems and electric power generation stations[40],[41]. It was noted previously by Martin et al. (2020), that the production of energy crops in Scotland has in the past been limited, with only SRC currently grown at small commercial scale (250ha). There is greater potential for further SRC cultivation in Scotland provided that suitable land area is available.
Most types of land, except for heavy clay soils and water-logged land, are suitable for SRC. The initial steps to establishment include removing weeds using herbicide, ploughing to 30cm and further cultivation to 15cm. Rods or cuttings are planted with a specialist planter. Gap filling and protection using rabbit or deer fencing may also be needed. During the first year weed control using herbicides and control of plant diseases using pesticides may be needed. Once established, SRC plantations are typically harvested at 3-year intervals using a forage harvester with a specific cutting system, then chipped and stored outside on a concrete base or in the field. Plantations typically remain productive for 15-25 years[42]. After this, a new planting can be established, or the field reverted through a process that involves stump grinding and the application of herbicides to prevent regrowth.
Introduction to short rotation forestry
Short rotation forestry (SRF) involves planting relatively fast-growing tree species and harvesting them for biomass after around 15-20 years, which is much quicker than conventional forestry. Species can be coniferous (e.g., Sitka spruce, Douglas fir) or broadleaved (e.g., aspen, poplar, silver birch, downy birch, sycamore). SRF is not currently operated commercially in Scotland although there are some trial plots. Nonetheless 912,600 ha of suitable land is theoretically currently suitable for planting of SRF in Scotland (Martin et al., 2020). Limited, recent literature material and evidence was found in the REA relating to the economic potential of SRF in and around the UK.
Process steps are like conventional forestry: the plantation is grown from seedlings or cuttings, or sometimes direct seeding, into land prepared through steps such as drainage, ploughing, and fencing. Some weed control or replacement planting may be needed initially, but after this limited maintenance is required. All the trees in a growing area are harvested at the same time using specialist cutting equipment, then either cut into lengths and stacked to air dry ready for collection or chipped on site. With SRC the shorter rotation, and the higher planting density, reduces the potential for co-production of logs for sawmill timber[43]. After harvest the site can be cleared, using machinery and herbicides as per SRC and then replanted or reverted to other land-use. Alternatively new stems can be allowed to regrow for coppicing, or a single good stem selected to continue growing for harvest after 15-20 years. Broadleaved varieties tend to produce higher wood density which is advantageous for use as bioenergy.
Appendix C: Methodology to Rapid Evidence Review
The Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) methodology used for this project aligns with NERC methodology[44] and comprised of the following steps.
Define the search strategy protocol, identify key search words or terms, define inclusion/exclusion criteria. A list of key words, terms and search strings was created and reviewed by Ricardo’s bioenergy and agriculture technical experts and the project steering group to direct the REA review to the most relevant sources. This list was and divided into six relevant categories ‘Energy Crops’; ‘Economic potential’; ‘Farm business and agronomic considerations’; ‘Preferred/feasible locations’; ‘Agricultural & land-use options’; ‘Other considerations e.g., just transition, decarbonisation’ to ensure that all appropriate aspects of the economic potential of energy crops were identified which supported the focus the review. Any literature that is considered out of scope based on our list of assumptions was excluded from the search. We also excluded literature that is older than 10 years, unless it was from a credible source and was the only piece of evidence available (particularly for data).
Searching for evidence and recording findings. Literature was searched using Google Scholar and Science Direct, utilising our accounts with Science Direct and Research Gate to access restricted pdfs where required. Grey literature, such as farming press and industry reports were used to provide examples and case studies of the economic potential of energy crops. In addition to the search engines, two existing evidence reviews, prepared by Ricardo were used to sources relevant literature: ‘Evidence review: Perennial energy crops and their potential in Scotland’ and ‘Evidence review: Increasing Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study’. Academic paper ‘Greenhouse Gas Removal Technologies –approaches and implementation pathways in Scotland’ (Haszeldine et al, 2019) was also provided to us to supplement our evidence base. For each individual search a unique search reference was assigned, the date, search string used, total number of results found, and the total number of relevant papers found were recorded. Our search strings can be found in the table below.
Further economic potential (e.g., decarbonisation of agricultural practices and creation of new jobs)
A RAG (red, amber, green) rating was assigned to each source, based on the g criteria:
Description
Rating
Quality
Peer reviewed journal, sound data sources and methodology
Green
Government funded research reports, sound data sources and methodology
Green
Research funded by NGOs (e.g., AHDB), sound data sources and methodology
Amber
Work is unreliable because of unreliable data sources, or limited sources, or because the method is not robust
Red
Information from websites, blogs etc., of unknown quality
Red
Relevance
Timeframe: within last 10 years
Green
Timeframe: within last 20 years
Amber
Timeframe: older than 20 years
Red
Screening. Sources of evidence was then screened initially by title and then accepted papers were then screened again using the summary or abstract. Literature was screened for information on the following inclusion criteria:
SRC, SRF, Miscanthus (and hemp / alternatives if strong evidence to show economic viability)
Economic potential (positive and negative) of energy crops – qualitative and quantitative information
How farmers / land-managers are making decisions about which enterprises and land-uses to adopt and research which provides evidence of likely preferences and decision-making influences.
Agronomic or other considerations which would influence viability / adoption by farmers / land-managers.
Extract and appraise the evidence. The screening provided an organised list of papers which enabled evidence to be extracted directly from the literature into the report. Literature extracted also guided the internal workshop and supported information included in the SWOT and PESTLE tables.
Appendix D Evidence of positive economic potential
We found some evidence in literature that PECs can be profitable for farmers and land managers, but limited studies directly applicable to Scotland and to the current economic climate. The price of fuels and other agricultural inputs have been subject to significant rises and fluctuations since most studies were undertaken and studies were mostly in locations with different growing conditions to Scotland. Economic performance of biomass production is influenced by production costs, crop yields, crop price and end-use/market opportunities (Olba-Zięty et al., 2021).
Several studies comparing energy crops reported a high return per hectare for miscanthus, (Martin et al., 2020, Zhang et al, 2020). One reason for this is that miscanthus can produce high outputs from low inputs which is economically significant for farmers (Donnison and Fraser 2016), particularly in the current context of high agricultural input costs. Miscanthus is attractive as it requires few farm operations, has low labour needs, crop management is straightforward and existing farming machinery and skills can be utilised in its production (Shepherd et al., 2020a and Glithero et al 2013) thus improving its economic potential in comparison to annual crops (such as cereals) used for energy. Growers invest in miscanthus due to this low maintenance cost along with the low requirement for field operations (Shepherd et al., 2020). However, Mola-Yudego et al., (2014) in a Swedish study found SRC willow had the lowest production costs overall, compared with other energy crops (miscanthus, reed canary grass and triticale). The production costs, and therefore profit, will vary depending on equipment available on farm (Ostwald et al,2013a).
The tree species chosen for SRF influences plantation establishment costs and therefore enterprise profitability – costs vary between species: Hybrid Aspen requires a costly micro-propagation technique, and so is more costly to establish than Poplar (Tullus et al., 2013). The literature did not provide detailed information on how well-suited different species are to the Scottish climate and the expected yields of biomass in Scotland. Initial indications from trials currently underway in Scotland (Parratt, M, 2017) suggest Hybrid Apsen appears to have most potential, with common alder, silver birch and Sitka spruce having potential at some sites, but full assessment of biomass is not complete and economics are not assessed.
A farming press example of a grower for Terravesta, the major purchaser of Miscanthus in England (Davies, in Farmers Weekly, 2020), reported that for Miscanthus, an average net profit of £530.85/ha over a 15-year period based on a mature yield of 14/t/ha was achievable. Stakeholders interviewed for this study indicated that Miscanthus is still economically viable under this growing model in England, despite current economic conditions, but questioned whether this yield, which would be a key determinant of profit, is feasible in Scottish growing conditions.
Evidence for negative economic impacts
The most prominent evidence of negative economic impacts in the literature was the high upfront cost to establish PECs, lack of established markets, and the uncertainty over the stability of the long-term market (Martin et al., 2020 and Witzel and Finger 2016). Profitability and economic considerations for farmers are dominated by these costs, market dynamics and biomass yield (Zimmermann et al., 2014).
High establishment costs and uncertainties about the market, mean that farmers may perceive PECs as financially risky and are discouraged from growing them (Witzel and Finger 2016, Zimmermann et al., 2014, Hastings et al., 2017). Previous farm-scale modelling was conducted to improve the understanding of the potential economic PEC supply across the UK. The results concluded that without increases in market prices, SRC willow would likely only provide a small proportion of the UK’s PEC target (Alexander et al., 2014). Similar studies were not found for SRF and Miscanthus, and the economics will have changed since this study making it difficult to understand from the literature if this is still the case but it is clear market access and price is a key issue.
In relation to Scotland specifically, the research found that high initial capital investment and a delayed period of revenue are major factors that negatively influence economic potential of PECs. Farmers receive no income from crop sales in the first years after establishment of PECs leading to poor cash flow, which can be an obstacle preventing farmer uptake (Bocquého, 2017). This period before first crop sales varies: typically 2-3 years for miscanthus production (Martin et al. (2020), around 4 years for SRC (Warren, 2016), and 10-20 years for SRF (Martin et al., 2020, Tullus et al., 2013), meaning a farmer may be waiting several years before the crop breaks even, for example miscanthus typically breaks even after between 4 and 11 years (Martin et al 2020).
Economic potential of PECs, in comparison to other crops
The literature review did not provide clear evidence of how the three key PECs being studied here compare economically to other crops, annual crops and agricultural land-uses – some studies showed favourable comparison and others did not. Key studies are highlighted below, but limited insights can be gained on this question from the literature given the recent economic changes affecting agricultural costs and market prices. See Section 5 for a comparative analysis reflecting current economic situation. Petrenko and Searle (2016) found the profitability of miscanthus and SRC to be competitive, with oats in the south of England, and with oats and rye in Southern Germany and, but could not compete with wheat in Europe generally or typical arable rotations in France (Glithero et al., 2013). Lower input costs may mean that PECs are more competitive now, than arable crops which typically require high levels of expensive inputs (such as fuel, pesticides and fertiliser), but literature does not confirm this. Glithero et al (2013) showed miscanthus to have lower biomass production costs (calculated as cost per gigajoule of energy) in comparison to straw-based crops in England. Busch (2017), in Germany, found SRC to be financially superior when compared to three different crop rotation systems consisting of oilseed rape, wheat, barley, and maize crops, concluding that SRC can compete against annual crops provided proper site selection and a suitable market (in this case, wood chip production). Mola-Yudego et al., (2014) highlight research in Northern Ireland which showed similar gross margin to grain production, assuming average yields in both cases.
We did not find research which compared energy crop economics with livestock farming systems economics.
Influences on farmer and land-manager decisions on planting PECs
One of the main factors affecting the uptake of PEC is economic profitability (Olba-Zięty,2021). Appetite for and perception of financial risk, skills, attitudes and access to markets can also influence farmer and land-manager decisions about planting PECs. Evidence from the literature, and our research interviews with stakeholders suggests that even where PECs, or energy crops in general, can deliver positive economic results for farmers and land managers, this on its own is not always sufficient to convince them to start growing PECs. A choice-experiment study in Sweden, found that lower production costs can enable farmers to achieve higher profit from energy crops, in comparison the traditional crops, but that further compensation of up to 215 Euro per hectare would be needed to persuade a farmer to switch to SRC (Ostwald et al,2013a).
A study by Warren (2014) on farmers’ attitudes to PECs in south-west Scotland found that farmers perceived growing SRC to be ‘financially risky’. SRC production was associated with uncertain returns on harvested wood as prices can be volatile. A lack of access to local markets was also highlighted as a potential barrier to current market adoption by producers (Alexander et al., 2014).
Other economic features of PEC production which influence economic potential for farmers and land-managers in Scotland
Producing PECs has specific economic implications for growers which influence their economic potential and attractiveness. These include challenges: lack of flexibility of land-use, reduced market responsiveness; and opportunities for diversification alongside current farming enterprises.
Unlike with annual arable crops, miscanthus producers can’t maximise profitability by changing crop each year to react to market prices (Hastings et al. (2017). The implication of this, which was highlighted during stakeholder interviews, is that to view PECs as economically worthwhile, farmers need confidence that they can achieve an acceptable and secure market price into the future. Long term production contracts between private biomass processors/plants and farmers are an important consideration in managing financial risk for producers (Bocquého, 2017). Stakeholders highlighted that joined up contracts including harvesting and haulage services, currently being used for some crops, can also help reduce risk and simplify the economics for producers.
The literature review suggested that the way PECs are deployed on farms influences their economic potential. Integration of PECs alongside other enterprises and on land which is not performing well could be advantageous. Glithero et al., (2013) reported that when integrated as a diversification enterprise on-farm miscanthus can be highly competitive. Less productive land, for example poor agricultural land with insufficient returns for food crop, is suitable for miscanthus (Shepherd et al., 2020a), which implies it could provide an economic benefit if deployed on this type of land within a farm.
Brown et al., (2016) report that introducing SRC into traditional cropping systems allows producers to diversify their farming operation, which in turn enhances income, improves income security and reduces risk. Alexander and Moran., 2013, similarly found a portfolio of crops including conventional crops, alongside Miscanthus has been found to achieve a more stable income for farmers, and furthermore conclude that, as farms typically operate in a risk-averse manner, reduced risk is an important factor in farmer decision-making for PECs.
The economic potential of SRC is largely dependent on the establishment of strong markets and demand driven by power companies (Brown, 2016). In the UK, it is generally found that further development of energy cropping only occurs once a plant has been built and several farmers adopt SRC practices to supply crops for that plant (Alexander et al., 2015).
Opportunities to improve economic potential of PECs in Scotland
Cultivation techniques, crop variety choice and other technological developments can influence economic potential of PECs in Scotland and have potential to improve profitability for farmers and land managers in future. For example, the use of plastic mulch film to reduce establishment time can improve crop economics (Hastings et al. 2017). Introduction of new and seed propagated hybrids of Miscanthus alongside agronomic developments have been projected to significantly reduce the cost of Miscanthus production. Mobile briquetting of Miscanthus can also increase the economic potential of Miscanthus (Perrin et al., 2017). Through the Biomass Innovation Fund, £32 million of research funding was awarded to innovation projects across the UK to deliver ‘commercially viable innovations in biomass production. Several innovations have potential to improve yields and reduce production costs for Miscanthus in Scotland, including efficient and mobile harvesting equipment and development of new cultivars more suited to colder climates (see Appendix F).
The literature review and stakeholder interviews both highlighted some factors which can negatively affect the economics of PEC production, which if addressed are potential opportunities to improve economic performance. Gaps in the crop (patchiness) was a key factor reducing profitability of miscanthus in the UK, resulting in longer payback periods. Tackling this by addressing issues such as planting technique, bad rhizome quality, poor overwintering, or variations in the soil quality helps maximise crop yield and improve farmer income (Zimmermann et al., 2014). Ensuring access for harvesting equipment is essential for economics of SRF to be viable – ensuring areas planted are on slopes not more than around 20 degrees is important to ensure the economic benefits of mechanised harvesting can be accessed (Martin et al 2020). For SRF effective plantation establishment is important for the economics and general success of a SRF plantation, yet our research did not find clear consensus on how to achieve this: Tullus et al., 2013 found low planting density was preferred amongst producers to minimize establishment costs, although impact on yield is uncertain in the literature. Research also found that single species monocultures can offer greatest economic return by providing higher yields per hectare (Liu et al., 2018), highest yield are achieved on fertile soil (Tullus et al., 2013) or under intensive management systems, including weed control, fertilizer application and irrigation (Walle et al., 2007).
Evidence of potential for Scotland’s wider economy
There was limited research addressing the potential contribution to the wider Scottish economy and a just transition, but some opportunities and challenges can be inferred. These include sales for local energy generation and other industrial uses, employment opportunities in contract services, along with potential payments for environmental outcomes. The requirement for contractors and local services during annual Miscanthus harvesting presents employment opportunities (Martin et al., 2020), as does SRF planting and harvesting (Liu et al., 2018). Depending on the existing farm enterprises, and choice of PEC, the workload for PECs may fall at a different time of year to other peaks in labour demand, helping to spread labour requirement through the year and reduce overall labour requirement. This could make farming more economically viable on farms which rely on family labour or very small workforces and reduce seasonal labour demands.
In addition to being used as BECCS feedstock, PECs have other potential uses and markets. Miscanthus can be sold for animal bedding, thatching, paper production, horticulture, construction materials[45], and biodegradable plastics (Anejionu and Woods 2019). There has been research on using Miscanthus as a feedstock for fermentation to transport fuels or through anaerobic digestion (AD) to biogas (Witzel and Finger, 2016). Miscanthus for AD has been found to be uneconomical according to Whittaker et al.(2016). Our stakeholder interviews confirmed that farmers would benefit more from growing feedstocks tailored to AD if this is their desired market, yet Winkler et al. (2020) reported significant potential for additional income from biogas production.
SRF and SRC, (when processed into woodchips) can provide a fuel source for biomass boilers and CHP units on-farm and for local domestic or other use[46] (Spackman, 2012, Ranacher et al., 2021). This can be an alternative market to diversify income sources and also potentially save farmers money on their own energy bills. The literature did not provide details on the economic implications of this but the stakeholder interviews flagged that farmers are currently interested in exploring opportunities to cut energy bills. Miscanthus was also identified to be used in small scale CHP plants on-farms for heating buildings and for domestic uses such as wood burners[47].
Beyond selling the biomass from PECs as a product, the literature reviewed suggested the potential of PECs to deliver environmental and ecological benefits which could potentially be monetised. SRC and SRF are currently not eligible for carbon credits, and it is unlikely that PECs can provide evidenced carbon storage in biomass or soils in order to qualify under other certification schemes. There may be opportunities to gain economic benefit from flood protection and biodiversity benefits that some PECs can deliver – the research has not identified significant information on this.
Evidence of non-economic opportunities
Non-economic opportunities and benefits of PECs were identified during the research, including several relating to positive environmental outcomes such as reduced agro-chemical use and biodiversity. All three PECs investigated require less chemical inputs, and reduce soil and water pollution (McCalmont et al., 2017). They also sequester carbon, for example miscanthus has a carbon mitigation potential of 4.0–5.3 Mg C ha-1 yr-1 (Zimmermann et al., 2014). Conversion of agricultural land to SRC leads to a reduction in management intensity of the land, resulting in potential soil benefits (Schiberna et al., 2021). The impacts of SRF may be positive or negative depending on what the land was previously used for. Soil compaction and disturbance caused by the harvest of SRF can lead to erosion and a loss in soil organic matter (Martin et al., 2020). Impacts may be neutral or possibly negative if conversion of land is from pasture or native forest to SRF (Griffiths et al., 2019). However, if displacing arable production, SRF has been reported to improve soil stability (Martin et al., 2020) with the potential to have positive effects on carbon soil organic carbon, water retention and erosion rates (Griffiths et al., 2019). SRF can also help flood alleviation as a SRF plantation would slow the rate of water flow (Martin et al., 2020).
The opportunities for biodiversity improvements resulting from PECs vary depending on planting, prior land-use and landscape context. Miscanthus has been reported to have positive effects on biodiversity (Bourke et al 2014 and Berkley et al 2018) in comparison to arable cropping systems. Shepherd et al., 2020 found an abundance of wildlife in UK miscanthus fields which, apart from at harvest time is left undisturbed. However, the effects on biodiversity of large-scale plantations are unknown (Bourke et al 2014). The introduction of SRC sites within arable cropping systems has in some cases been found to enhance the presence of some pollinators (hoverflies, bumblebees and butterflies), which can benefit crop production. However, it should be noted that these benefits are highly context dependent (Berkley et al., 2018). Opportunities to increase bird populations and diversity is thought to increase if native species of SRF are introduced (Martin et al., 2020).
Challenges and deployment barriers
The research identified several non-economic challenges facing the production of PECs in Scotland, relating to skills, land-use commitment, compatibility with current culture and habits, farm businesses, perceived land suitability and environmental concerns. Deployment barriers for Miscanthus include the need for farmers to commit land for a long period of time, land quality, knowledge (Glithero et al 2013), profitability, time to financial return and social resistance relating to whether land should be used for energy or food production (Anejionu and Woods 2019). These barriers also apply largely to SRC and SRF: land committed towards SRC and SRF will be in production for several years and conversion back to arable and the removal of tree roots is challenging (Warren 2016). Additionally for SRF land conversion may be deemed irreversible as reversion to farming use may be prohibited by government regulations once SRF is planted, and the land will no longer be classed as agricultural.
Lack of access to specialist skills (including a shortage of trained foresters[48]) and to specialist contractors and machinery (e.g., for SRF mechanised planting machines was also identified as a barrier to deployment. The most likely cause of this is limited demand and a ‘lack of off the shelf machinery’[49]. Whilst this could be seen as an opportunity for development of new infrastructure and employment opportunities, it could currently also be seen as a practical constraint for many producers. The establishment of SRC requires new skills and different machinery compared to conventional cropping, this unfamiliarity and technical lack of knowledge prohibits adoption by producers (Warren, 2014). Stakeholders who we interviewed suggested that there is increased interest amongst farmers in diversification, but that appetite for change was tempered by concern about moving into unfamiliar activities which require new skills.
Culture and attitudes can be a barrier to PEC deployment. Warren et al. (2016) found Scottish farmers opposed SRC (willow) production because they considered it was not suitable for their current farming business or the land. Whilst fertile land is best for SRF production, a study conducted by Walle et al., 2007 found that farmers willing to introduce SRF, are not willing to do so on their ‘best agricultural soils’. Ranacher et al., 2021 found there is a gap in the available literature regarding farmers’ willingness to adopt short rotation plantations on less productive land. Another potential barrier which may prejudice farmers against SRC cultivation is the cultural separation of forestry and farming in Scotland – SRC has historically been viewed as a threat towards the socio-cultural identity of Scottish agriculture (Warren, 2014). In addition, an Environmental Impact Assessment – something which farmers may not be familiar with and is likely to incur costs – may be required[50] if converting agricultural land to forestry for SRF or SRC (Martin et al., 2020).
Concerns about biodiversity identified included, concern about SRF reducing the habitat for ground feeding birds and other ‘open land’ wildlife (Martin et al., 2020).The winterhardiness of miscanthus is considered a constraint for this crop in Scotland (Martin et al., 2020), and according to stakeholder may reduce achievable yields.
From a biofuel perspective, as with all PECs, it has been noted in the literature that energy generation from biomass is a potential source of direct and indirect emissions, despite carbon being captured during crop growth. Production, transport and processing are potential sources of direct emissions (Alexander et al., 2015). Considerations to limit such emissions, for example distance from farm to biomass plant, must therefore be taken into account. Indirect emissions related to land use change are more varied in the literature.It has been noted that the establishment of SRC on peat/high organic soils, found in the upland areas of Scotland, can potentially harm soil organic carbon (SOC) levels (Martin, 2020) . Existing sustainability criteria for the use of biomass to produce heat or electricity require that PECs are not grown on land that was peatland in January 2008, or of high biodiversity value, and that any change in SOC from cultivation of PECs is taken into account when checking that the electricity or heat produced meets the relevant GHG saving criteria (see e.g. Ofgem, 2018 and Ofgem, 2021, Low Carbon Contracts Company, 2022).
Other relevant crops and planting regimes
Aside from Miscanthus, SRC and SRF there are other potential energy crops – both perennial and annual crops – which can be used for bioenergy and which are potentially suitable for Scotland. The literature reviewed above mostly considered planting of PECs as replacement for arable crops . There is also literature to suggest integrating PECs alongside existing land-use may be feasible and potentially relevant for Scotland. These alternative crops and planting regimes are considered here. Note that relatively limited research was carried outon these as the PECs above were the core focus of this study.
Hemp
Hemp was once widely grown in Scotland and suits both the climate and growing conditions in the main agronomic areas especially parts of the Borders, East Lothian, Fife, Angus, Moray and the Black Isle. Hemp has a significant potential in carbon sequestration and there is evidence to demonstrate its suitability as a feedstock for bioenergy production therefore, bringing a new ‘cash-crop’ to Scotland which would also offer new job opportunities[51]. Dogbe and Revoredo-Giha., (2022) found through a farmer’s survey, that farmers identify diversification benefits i.e. planting hemp ‘as a safety net’ as a reason for producing hemp in Scotland. Biomass Connect technical article (2023), considering the UK as a whole, found hemp to have greater versatility and profitability than other biomass crops like Miscanthus, willow and poplar and high biomass yield (12-15t/ha of air-dried biomass). They also reported it to be an above-average energy crop for some biochemical-based biofuel production (in comparison to other similar yielding bioenergy crops)[52]. Hemp can also be used in bio-based building materials such as Hempcrete and textiles [53].
Hemp has the potential to provide high yields or returns with little or no pesticides and insecticides (Dogbe and Revoredo-Giha., 2022). It fits well into crop rotations with food and feed crops and helps improve soil structure and soil-borne pests. Constraints on producing hemp in Scotland includes the current lack of market as there are no large processing facilities in or near Scotland, strict regulations on growing hemp including, the need to obtain a costly license, and some reports of low profitability according to Scottish growers[54].
PECs in agroforestry systems,
Agroforestry is the planting of trees on farmland, alongside cropland or pastureland, usually in strips, clusters or scattered individual trees, that can be grazed or cultivated in between. The REA did not find specific studies focused on Scotland to show how PECs could be grown in agroforestry systems, but provided the design of agroforestry systems can allow for economically efficient planting, management and harvesting (i.e. still allow for machinery access), it could provide an advantageous model. Kralik et al., 2022[55] conducted a study to address the economic efficiency of agroforestry systems using SRC in comparison to conventional 4-year arable rotation, in Czechia. The results of this paper showed that the agroforestry system generate similar income and profits as the conventional annual crops when cultivating on appropriate sites and practicing good farming principles.
In terms of the scale of production which could be delivered through agroforestry, for the UK in general, Morris and Day (2023) estimated that 20% of UK farmland could transition to agroforestry by 2060. Utilising the aforementioned land area and yield data, the study observed three UK scenarios for SRC Willow. One scenario found where 30% of the yield arising from SRC Willow was used for bioenergy purpose and this would equate to 1.2 million tonnes of domestic wood fuel and therefore contribute significantly towards bioenergy needs and net zero.
Appendix E Methodology for economic analysis
Farm scale economic analysis
Calculating the gross margins for bioenergy crops
Step 1: Calculating the costs for the activities for the different types of bioenergy crops
Miscanthus, willow short rotation coppice (SRC), and short rotation forestry are the energy crops for which there is information that lets us build a baseline model that takes into consideration the different costs involved in the production process of these crops. We conducted an extensive literature review of the growing cycle for different crops, identifying the different steps for growing each of the crops and identifying the costs to undertake those actions. The costs used in our analysis are based on the costs that were used in the Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study report for the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) published in 2021. This report carried out an extensive review of the available information for different types of bioenergy crops. Information was obtained through a literature review, which was supplemented by interviews with a range of key stakeholders, and expert insight from the project team. In addition, insights were gained through a review of development of SRC in Sweden, which has the largest planted area of SRC in the EU. A list of organisations consulted during the stakeholder analysis is given in appendix 2 of the Feedstocks Innovation Study report.
The three scenarios identified in the Feedstocks Innovation Study (low, medium and high-cost scenarios) were used in the analysis. This allows for some variation in factors that affect costs in agriculture and establish hypothetical scenarios that capture different combinations of costs. In the following sections, an overview of the actions and the costs are included for each of the three bioenergy crops;
Site preparation / land preparation (including from different prior land-uses where data is available)
Establishment / planting
Crop management costs e.g., during initial growth
Harvesting
Reversion (where relevant)
For information on the assumptions on the costs please see the Feedstock Innovation Study.
Miscanthus
For Miscanthus, the cost of production is made up from a number of elements that will be grouped in four phases. The phases for growing Miscanthus are:
Site preparation
Planting
Harvesting
Reversion
Figure B‑1 shows an example timeline of the Miscanthus growth cycle.
Figure B‑2 Growing cycle for Miscanthus
Year -1
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Every 3 years
Jan
Existing crop
Site preparation
Dormancy/Cut back
Dormancy
Harvest
Feb
Mar
Apr
Planting
Growth
Growth
Growth
May
Jun
Gap filling
Jul
Growth
Aug
Site preparation
Sep
Oct
Nov
Senescence
Senescence
Senescence/ Harvest
Senescence
Dec
Table B‑1 shows all the input costs for Miscanthus used in this study taken from the Feedstocks Innovation Study adjusted to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators[56]. As well as adjusting for inflation, fertiliser costs have been increased using the latest data from AHDB on fertiliser prices[57]. Using this data, costs for fertilisers were adjusted by comparing the average annual increase in fertilisers from 2019 to 2023.
Table B‑1 Input costs for Miscanthus (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Site preparation
Professional costs 1 (Advice on Environmental Impact Assessment)
£/ha
0
120
120
Professional costs 2 (Advice on agronomy)
£/ha
0
0
28
Soil sampling
£/ha
7
7
7
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearance & ploughing
£/ha
89
97
106
Total herbicide / insecticide + application 1
£/ha
57
57
69
Miscellaneous / risk to allow for unforeseen issues in land preparation
£/ha
0
61
180
Planting
Power harrow
£/ha
57
68
68
Pest control incl. rabbit fencing
£/ha
0
0
341
Rhizomes, planting, rolling
£/ha
1533
1987
2271
Fertiliser + application 1
£/ha
18
61
67
Total herbicide + application 2
£/ha
57
66
69
Weed/spray
£/ha
84
93
102
Miscellaneous / risk to allow for unforeseen issues during planting
£/ha
0
57
142
Harvesting
Mowing / cutting
£/ha
79
85
97
Baling (at £12/wet tonne)
£/t
12
14
17
Loading, stacking, storage (at £2/wet tonne)
£/t
2
2
5
Fertiliser + application 2
£/ha
25
157
229
Miscellaneous / risk 2 to allow for unforeseen issues during havesting
£/ha
0
0
102
Reversion
Reversion costs (herbicide + plough)
£/ha
145
153
174
Overall Total
2143
3025
4105
The broad action category: site preparation category includes costs of establishment. The establishment phase involves preparing the soil for the new crops, acquiring all the plant material, weed control, and planting the crops. In the production phase, the crops are matured and harvested throughout the years. This is the longest phase as it repeats for every harvest and includes all processes related to harvesting and regrowing the crop. The third phase will be reversion, when the plant material is removed, and the field is made available for a new crop (see Figure 13‑1).
There are variabilities and uncertainties related to estimating the production costs for each crop. These may arise for a variety of reasons such as:
Differences in soil type and/or condition
Differences in climate
Differences in farming practices across different companies/farms
Differences in end-product requirements/specifications.
In the establishment phase, the first lifecycle stage of Miscanthus, the field is taken care of and prepared for plantation. In our model, we have done this in year -1, with year 0 being the reference year for the plantation of the crops. In year -1, the land is prepared for the plantation of the crops in year 0. Several factors affect the cost of planting such as the site, soil type, and drainage. We have incorporated this variance into our model by modelling for different cost scenarios to reflect different possible cost combinations.
In the high-end cost scenario, we have included a possible pest-control component, such as rabbit-fencing to protect the crops. If needed, the pest control section could possibly be a major cost factor.
A couple of years after planting the Miscanthus crops, the first harvest happens. This first harvest marks the beginning of the production phase, which happens every year for the next 18 years. In the production phase, all steps related to harvesting the Miscanthus yield take place. These include mowing/cutting the plant, baling the harvest, and loading it to be further processed or sold. A margin for miscellaneous costs has also been included in the high-cost scenario. At the end of the crop’s life cycle, the reversion process happens to make the land suitable for other crops.
SRC: In this study, we have considered short-rotation coppice such as poplar and willow, two species which can be used for energy generation. Similar to Miscanthus, we have considered different costing phases that are involved in the process of growing SRC. However, given the differences there are between growing these crops and Miscanthus, the processes will be different, meaning that costs will also differ from Miscanthus. We have considered the following phases in the SRC production process:
Pre-planting/land preparation
Planting
Post-planting
Harvesting
Reversion
The same as Miscanthus, the costs have been taken from the Feedstocks Innovation Study adjusted for inflation and the fertiliser costs adjusted as explained in the Miscanthus method section (see Figure B‑2).
Figure B‑2 Growing cycle for SRC
Year -1
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Every 3 years
Jan
Existing crop
Site preparation
Dormancy/Cut back
Dormancy
Harvest
Feb
Mar
Apr
Planting
Growth
Growth
Growth
May
Jun
Gap filling
Jul
Growth
Aug
Site preparation
Sep
Oct
Nov
Senescence
Senescence
Senescence/ Harvest
Senescence
Dec
Table B‑2 Range of production costs for SRC (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Pre-planting/land preparation
Professional costs 1 for EIA advice
£/ha
0
127
127
Professional costs 2 for agronomy advice
£/ha
0
28
28
Soil sampling and testing 1
£/ha
7
7
7
Soil sampling and testing 2
£/ha
7
7
7
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
0
0
Total herbicide plus application 1
£/ha
57
57
60
Land prep (ploughing)
£/ha
89
97
106
Land prep (power harrow)
£/ha
61
69
75
Land prep (miscellaneous / risks)
£/ha
34
68
103
Pest protection (rabbit fencing)
£/ha
0
341
341
Fertiliser + application 1
£/ha
18
112
164
Planting
Plant material
£/ha
1107
1249
1419
Planting
£/ha
454
454
511
Fertiliser + application 2
£/ha
18
112
164
Total herbicide plus application 2
£/ha
57
57
60
Post-planting
Herbicide / weed / spray 1
£/ha
84
93
93
Gapping up
£/ha
15
17
19
Cutback / mowing
£/ha
51
57
62
Harvesting and storage
Harvesting, handling and storage
£/ha
710
823
852
Fertiliser + application 3
£/ha
18
112
164
Herbicide / weed / spray 2
£/ha
84
102
102
Other annual costs
Miscellaneous / risks
£/ha
11
23
34
Reversion costs
£/ha
341
341
511
Overall Total
£/ha
3,242
4,301
4,911
In the pre-planting stage, the land is prepared for growing the SRC crop. Similar to Miscanthus, in the land preparation stage different steps to prepare the land such as soil sampling and testing, ploughing, and power harrow take place. We have modelled these to happen in year -1, with year 0 being the year in which planting takes place. Heavier or more compacted soils will require additional ploughing and sub-soiling compared to lighter costs. Multiple herbicide applications may be needed depending on the specific circumstances. A rabbit fence or other forms of pest control might be needed.
In the planting phase, costs for the plant material and other costs involved in the planting process (such as labour costs and fuel costs) are taken into consideration as well as the costs for soil fertilisation and herbicide application. Fertiliser will be applied either by the farmer or a contractor after planting in and around the plants. Fertiliser could be a purchased product or sewage sludge (if permitted) which comes at zero cost.
In the post-planting phase, the farmer maintains the plants to ensure the plants are healthy and the soil usage is being optimised. At the end of third year when the leaves have fallen, the farmer will apply herbicide and cut back the crop to encourage the plant to grow more stems and fill any gaps in the crop with new, larger size rods which can compete with the already established plants which have just been cut back. In this phase, the farmer also cuts the emerging shoots to encourage more shoots per plant.
Once the plants are ready for harvest, the harvesting process begins. We have combined all the different costs (machinery, labour, fuel, handling, storage, etc) into a single category as there would be too much granularity if we considered them separately. After each harvest, the application of fertiliser and weed/spraying takes place. We have also allowed for possible miscellaneous costs which could affect the final cost of this process.
Short Rotation Forestry (SRF)
Two scenarios have been defined for SRF:
SRF conifer scenario
SRF broadleaved scenario
As with Miscanthus and SRC the costs for SRF have been taken from the Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study report for the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) published in 2021. The costs have been adjusted for inflation to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators[58].
A low, medium and high scenario for both SRF broadleaved and SRF conifer are included.
For the SRF broadleaved scenario, the costs are based on fast growing native broadleaves on medium quality land in lowlands, grown without thinning on a 15- to 20-year rotation and harvested conventionally as pole length or shortwood. The lower cost outcome uses fast growing poplar on farmland, whereas the medium and higher cost outcomes use birch in forest conditions. For more information on the costs please see the Feasibility Study. Details on the costs can be found in Table 13‑4. For the SRF conifer scenario, the costs are on the basis on a fast-growing conifer species (e.g., Sitka Spruce) on medium quality land, grown without thinning on a 15 to 20-year rotation and harvested conventionally as pole length or shortwood. The lower cost outcome assumes new planting, whereas the medium and higher cost outcome assume restocking in forest conditions. For all costs, please see Table B‑5.
Table B‑3 Range of production costs for broadleaved short rotation (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Ground preparation
Deer fencing
£/ha
0
727
965
Rabbit control
£/ha
0
79
119
Spirals
£/ha
710
0
0
Draining
£/ha
0
45
85
Cultivation
£/ha
51
170
369
Planting
Plant supply
£/ha
1079
937
1516
Planting, restock
£/ha
0
250
443
Planting, New
£/ha
97
0
0
Beat up, Labour & plants
£/ha
125
392
766
Establishment and maintenance
Top up Spray (Hylobius)
£/ha
0
0
0
Weeding
£/ha
199
352
505
Cleaning/respacing
£/ha
0
0
51
General maintenance
£/ha
182
250
312
Forest-scale operations
£/ha
51
62
91
Management overhead
£/ha
0
0
0
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
149
206
Harvesting
Thinning
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearfell
£/odt
5
7
8
Residue removal
£/ha
0
0
0
Comminution (chipping)
£/odt
3
6
9
Reversion
Reversion
£/ha
1136
1419
1817
Overall Total
£/ha
3628
4833
7246
Table B4 Range of production costs for conifer short rotation (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Deer fencing
£/ha
0
290
647
Rabbit control
£/ha
0
0
0
Spirals
£/ha
0
0
0
Draining
£/ha
0
45
85
Cultivation
£/ha
170
250
466
Planting
Plant supply
£/ha
676
738
1022
Planting, restock
£/ha
0
227
312
Planting, New
£/ha
153
0
0
Beat up, Labour & plants
£/ha
193
386
562
Establishment and maintenance
Top up Spray (Hylobius)
£/ha
0
102
261
Weeding
£/ha
165
324
432
Cleaning/respacing
£/ha
0
79
119
General maintenance
£/ha
182
250
312
Forest-scale operations
£/ha
51
62
91
Management overhead
£/ha
0
0
0
Harvesting
Thinning
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearfell
£/odt
5
7
8
Residue removal
£/ha
0
0
0
Comminution (chipping)
£/odt
3
6
9
Reversion
Reversion
£/ha
1136
1419
1817
Overall Total
£/ha
2700
4180
6135
Step 2: Calculating the output (yield and price)
Miscanthus
Data for yields in Scotland were obtained from the Scottish farm management handbook. Similar to what has been done in the costing section, different scenarios have been considered in order to account for possible variance in yields. 12 ODT, 14 ODT and 15 ODT were used for the low, medium and high scenario, respectively. ODT/ha stands for Oven dry tonne per hectare and corresponds to the total amount of above-ground living organic matter produced in a single hectare. Harvesting takes place in year 3 and is harvested on annual basis. Pricing data for Miscanthus was obtained from the John Nix pocketbook, £95, £97, £98 £/odt for the lower, medium and higher scenario, respectively (adjusted from 2021 to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators). This value is taken from the value that is offered to farmers from Terravesta. There are penalties if the crop is out of specification and bonuses available of £2/tonne if bales have been stored in a barn.
SRC
SRC is harvested with 2–3-year intervals and similar to Miscanthus, yields can vary for a wide range of reasons such as site conditions, type of planting method, years since planting, crop type, orography, and weather conditions. The yields used in the analysis come from the official statistics published by Defra which looks at Plant biomass: Miscanthus, short rotation coppice and straw[59]. These are 24, 35, 45 odt/ha, respectively. In the analysis, fluctuations in the yield of SRC have been included (Table ‑6).
Table B5 SRC rotation used in analysis if assuming fluctuations take place
Year
Units
Lower
Medium
Higher
Year 1
odt/ha
Year 2
odt/ha
Year 3
odt/ha
20
29
38
Year 4
odt/ha
Year 5
odt/ha
Year 6
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 7
odt/ha
Year 8
odt/ha
Year 9
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 10
odt/ha
Year 11
odt/ha
Year 12
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 13
odt/ha
Year 14
odt/ha
Year 15
odt/ha
25
35
46
Year 16
odt/ha
Year 17
odt/ha
Year 18
odt/ha
23
33
43
Year 19
odt/ha
Year 20
odt/ha
Year 21
odt/ha
21
31
40
For the price of SRC, the value used in the latest John Nixs Pocketbook (2022) has been used. Adjusted to 2023 prices this is £59 per odt. This figure is based on what a grower in Cumbria could get.
SRF
SRF is harvested at 15-year intervals for both conifer (sikca spruce) and broadleaved (silver birch). The yield estimates were taken from the Feedstock Innovation Study. The price for both types of SRF were taken from a stakeholder from Scottish Forestry, which estimated that the payment for SRF that had been stacked and cut would be between £50 to £64.
Step 3: Calculating the gross margin
To calculate the gross margins for the bioenergy crops, firstly the costs were placed over the lifetime of the crop. For example, clearance and ploughing costs for Miscanthus were included in the first year (-1). The accompanying spreadsheet shows how all the costs are spread over the lifecycle of the crop. The costs were then taken away from the output estimates to calculate the gross margins over the lifecycle of the crop.
To calculate the gross margins for all the farm types used in the analysis the latest data from the Scotland farm business survey[60] was used using data from the years 2016 to 2022. An average over these years was used to take account of variability in agricultural costs and outputs. To get to the £ per hectare value, using the time series data from 2016, total average output for each of the farm types was divided by the average size of the farm. For variable costs, total average inputs – other fixed costs were taken away from the total average inputs to get to the variable costs. This was then converted to per hectare values. For the general cropping, forage category data was taken from the latest census[61] for the output data and the costs were taken from the farm management handbook[62].
Table C: Breakdown of costs and outputs used for gross margin calculations (average data from 6 years from 2016-17 to 2021-22 from Scottish Farm Business Income Survey)
Type of farm
Lowland Sheep & Cattle
Mixed
Performance band
Lower 25%
Average
Upper 25%
Lower 25%
Average
Upper 25%
Total crop output
10,516
22,962
48,895
73,507
102,314
180,117
Total livestock output
74,755
126,232
304,160
72,675
104,739
165,523
Miscellaneous output
7,184
8,973
11,508
13,028
20,741
50,036
Total average output
92,455
158,167
364,563
159,210
227,793
395,676
Crop expenses
15,097
20,175
38,586
37,388
45,197
67,023
Livestock expenses
42,485
62,298
142,947
41,068
52,412
73,146
Other fixed costs
92,125
91,391
151,465
133,423
146,043
208,434
Total average inputs
149,707
173,864
332,999
211,879
243,652
348,603
Total average inputs – other fixed costs
57,582
82,473
181,534
78,457
97,609
140,169
Table D: General cropping – forage gross margin calculation data
Gross margin calculation: Average total cost per annum – forage output = gross margin
Figure A: Excerpt from Scottish Farm Mangement Handbook showing data used in the calculations in Table D above.
Comparing bioenergy crops to existing land-use economics: three scenarios
Bioenergy energy crop scenarios
For the low scenario, high costs were compared with lower output. For the medium scenario, medium costs were compared with medium output. For the high scenario, low costs were compared with high output.
Farm scenarios
For the different farm income scenarios, the farm business income definitions were used from the Scotland farm business survey. For low this uses the lower 25% percentile for that farm category, for medium the average percentile was used and for the higher, the upper 25% percentile was used.
Yearly average gross margins for each of the bioenergy crops and farm types
To calculate the yearly average gross margins for each of the bioenergy crop and the farm type scenarios a discount rate was applied to future years. The discount rate applied is the standard discount rate recommended by the green book[65]. The Green Book recommends that costs and benefits occurring in the first 30 years of a programme, project or policy be discounted at an annual rate of 3.5%, and recommends a schedule of declining discount rates thereafter. A discount rate is applied as it is assumed that people prefer to receive financial outputs now rather then in the future.
Assessment of implications for Scotland’s rural economy
Using the geo-spatial mapping data from the previous project, which identified land that was theoretically suitable for PEC production considering land capability, slope, and climate (Martin et al, 2020), percentages of the land that could be converted to bioenergy crops were derived for each of the regions. This percentage was then applied to the land area estimated to be in each farm type in the region, to derive the land are potentially suitable for PECs by farm type. The land area in each farm type in each region was estimated by combining data on crop areas in each region with estimates of the percentge of crop area at the Scottish level which occurs in each each farm type.
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs could be planted by 2030, 38,000 by 2032 and 90,250 hectares by 2045. Two scenarios were then constructed to see what land transitions could meet these areas of PECS. Using information on the gross margins for the three farm types of interest and the gross margins for the PECs, the economic impact of each land use change can be ranked.
Table E Change in gross margin (£/ha) in transitioning to PECs
SRF
SRC
Miscanthus
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
-£414
-£347
-£52
Mixed holdings
-£577
-£511
-£215
General cropping
£1,009
£1,076
£1,371
These rankings were used to guide how much of the potential land suitable for PECs in each farm type was assumed to be converted, with more land converted for more economically beneficial transitions. Care was also taken, particularly in Scenario 2, where high levels of trnaition are needed to meet the higher PEC target area, that levels of overall change were not too high. This resulted in the assumed changes shown in the Tables below
Table F Assumed changes in land use Scenario 1
Percentage of suitable land assumed converted to PECs
Ha converted to PECs
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Total area
PEC
ha
ha
ha
ha
SRF
15%
66%
9,928
–
8,977
18,905
SRC
15%
66%
7,578
–
5,258
12,836
Miscanthus
30%
100%
3,790
–
1,352
5,142
Total land are converted
21,296
–
15,587
36,883
Percentage of total land in farm type converted
20%
0%
1.1%
2.1%
Table G Assumed changes in land use Scenario 2
Percentage of suitable land assumed converted to PECs
Ha converted to PECs
PEC
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Total area
ha
ha
ha
ha
SRF
30%
50%
75%
19,857
13,873
10,201
43,931
SRC
30%
50%
75%
15,156
10,078
5,975
31,209
Miscanthus
60%
100%
100%
7,580
4,770
1,352
13,701
Total land are converted
21,296
–
15,587
42,592
Percentage of total land in farm type converted
40%
9%
1.3%
5.0%
The Potential change in farm income due to change in gross margin was calculated by multiplying the change in gross margin from each transition in Tables E, with the areas in transition in Tables F and G. This was done on a regional basis.
The estimated shortfall in crop production from a shift to PECs, was calculated by using data on the areas of crop land in each farm type and the areas converted to PECs to calculate lost areas of crop production. These were then multiplied by typical crop yields[66]. This was all done at a regional level. Estimate the change in livestock production that might come from the shift to PECs would require a more detailed analysis than was possible in this study.
Appendix F: Mapping outputs from 2020 project
A previous CXC Project (Martin et al, 2020) used geo-spatial mapping to identify suitable areas of land in Scotland for growing PECs. The project focused on land capability of grades; 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 6.1, which are typically suitable for mixed agriculture, improved grassland and high-quality rough grazing [67], and assessed what area of these grades where suitable for SRC and Miscanthus growth which limited the potential production area. For SRF the assessment also included land capability for agriculture grades F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5.
Figure C-1: Distribution of suitable land available for Short Rotation Forestry
Figure C-2: Distribution of suitable land available for Short Rotation Coppice
Figure C-3: Distribution of suitable land available for Miscanthus
Data attributions
The data used in the bioenergy crop growth analysis was downloaded from multiple sources. In order to comply with their licences, as well as to acknowledge the use of the data, attributions for each data source is provided in Table C-1. In all cases these attributions are those directly required by the data licence or metadata.
Table C-1: Data attributions
Dataset name and data source
Data attribution
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 1980. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 1980. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
Ordnance Survey: Terrain 50 50m resolution digital elevation model
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology: Gridded Estimates of Areal Rainfall (GEAR)
Tanguy, M.; Dixon, H.; Prosdocimi, I.; Morris, D.G.; Keller, V.D.J. (2019). Gridded estimates of daily and monthly areal rainfall for the United Kingdom (1890-2017) [CEH-GEAR]. NERC Environmental Information Data Centre. https://doi.org/10.5285/ee9ab43d-a4fe-4e73-afd5-cd4fc4c82556
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology: Climate Hydrology and Ecology Research Support System (CHESS)
Martinez-de la Torre, A.; Blyth, E.M.; Robinson, E.L. (2018). Water, carbon and energy fluxes simulation for Great Britain using the JULES Land Surface Model and the Climate Hydrology and Ecology research Support System meteorology dataset (1961-2015) [CHESS-land]. NERC Environmental Information Data Centre. https://doi.org/10.5285/c76096d6-45d4-4a69-a310-4c67f8dcf096
James Hutton Institute: National Soils of Scotland, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: National Soils of Scotland, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 2019. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
Scottish Natural Heritage: Carbon and Peatland Map 2016.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Forestry Commission: National Forestry Inventory Woodland Scotland 2017
Contains Forestry Commission information licensed under the Open Government License v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: National Parks, National Scenic Areas, Country Parks etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: World Heritage Sites, Battlefields, Conservation Areas etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: Ramsar, SAC, SPA, SSSI etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
AppendixG: Methology for geospatial analysis of agricultural land use change
Geospatial analysis
To calculate the current land area available for change to bioenergy cropping, based on the locations from the previous CXC project, geospatial analysis was completed. The percentage of the total land area suitable for bioenergy growth in each agricultural region was calculated and applied to the total hectarage of the the agricultural land used within the land capability categories. This was then divided into three main farm types: Non-LFA cattle and sheep, Mixed holdings, General cropping – forage. This presented a total hectarage by agricultural region and farm type that could be converted to SRC, Miscanthus and SRF. This data was used in economic calculations to present the change in economic potential for the three farm types under a land use change to bioenergy crops. Details of sources used are presented in Table D-1.
Hectarage of barley (spring and winter), stockfeeding crops (maize and lupin) and grass (under 5 years old, and 5 years old and over) used to calculate the current land usage within the Scottish agricultural regions.
N/A
Table 17 Livestock by Region (Number of heads) Dataset
Data used to calculate the percentage split of the number of animals using grass (hay and silage) within Scotland.
Assumption that beef and dairy cattle will consume similar feed amounts each day, supported by review or recommended dry matter intake by online sources.
Table 1 Crops and grass area, hay and silage production, 2010 to 2020
Agricultural Statistics: Results of December 2020 Agricultural Survey
Data used to calculate the percentage of barley produced in Scotland used for animal feed.
Assumed that all barley produced for animal feed is produced in land capability categories 3.3-5.3, in line with the areas selected for potential growth of SRC and Miscanthus.
Land capability – agriculture
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000
Dataset used to compare the land capability categories against the potential growth area of SRC and Miscanthus to calculate the percentage of land area for bioenergy growth applied in calculations.
Land capability – forestry
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000
Dataset used to compare the land capability categories against the potential growth area of SRF to calculate the percentage of land area for bioenergy growth applied in calculations.
Percentage of crops by farm type
Technical knowledge
Division of crops between farm types used to split the total hectarage of crops into three main farm type categories: Non-LFA cattle and sheep, Mixed holdings, General cropping – forage for economic farm level analysis.
Assumptions have been made on the percentage split of the crops focused within the mixed agriculture and improved grassland land capability categories, based on the removal of total crops used for other farm types (e.g. specialist dairy and non-animal feed cropping categories – general cropping and specialist cereals).
Appendix H: Stakeholder engagement methodology and key findings
In addition to the rapid evidence assessment and economic analysis, we conducted stakeholder engagement with a robust representative sample of stakeholders from across the Scottish agricultural network to provide input into the project. The engagement was conducted in two stages:
Topic expert research interviews: eight semi-structured interviews of approx. one hr were carried out as part of the evidence gathering process. Interviewees were sent a briefing of key areas of enquiry prior to their interview to aid their preparation. Ricardo recorded each discussion as meeting recording, transcript and attendee notes.
Stakeholder workshop: Stakeholder input was sought to scrutinise findings and ensure the SWOT and PESTLE are as complete and robust as possible. This engagement was delivered through a one hour structured on-line meeting held on the 16th October 2023 with a combination of stakeholders who had already contributed to individual interviews and representatives of wider organisation and businesses. Initial finding were presented by the project team and comment on accuracy, completeness and additional considerations sought throughout. Following the meeting, the presentation and list of questions (below) was sent to all attendees with an invitation for follow up comment.
Insights were gained into:
What influences farmer and land-manager decisions on energy cropping.
Wider concerns or questions about potential implications.
Benefits and disadvantages of energy crops.
Opportunities to drive greater uptake.
Insights in economic aspects and state of knowledge on this for Scotland in particular.
Feedback reflected some of the points of discussion and debate that were identified in the REA such as questions over what land is suitable and how best to use land given Scotland’s climate targets and other priorities, and debate over yields, prices and how to ensure wider environmental benefits from energy crops, and to what extent this is possible in Scotland.
The insights from this stakeholder engagement have been integrated into Section 4 Evidence Base and Section 7 SWOT & PESTLE analysis.
Summary of questions posed to stakeholders during the engagement element of the project:
General:
Do you think there are opportunities for farmers and land managers in Scotland to benefit from producing perennial energy crops?
If so, which crops, locations and circumstances do you think could be most economically viable, and why?
How could we improve our costings and economic assumptions to make them more reflective of the reality of the Scottish context?
What economic and other considerations would most influence farmers’ and land-managers’ decision to start producing energy crops?
What are the most significant potential benefits and challenges at a wider economy scale?
Economic analysis at farm scale
How could we improve our costings and economic assumptions to make them more reflective of the reality of the Scottish context?
Would you suggest any adjustments to our costs?
Would you suggest any adjustment to our yield or prices?
Are the rotation lengths appropriate?
Preferred locations
How is best to select preferred biomass locations? E.g. based on areas in proximity to market usage? Or based on land with best production potential?
Are there any existing or proposed large-scale biomass plants in Scotland?
What is a maximum travel distance from farm to plant?
Are there any key biomass planting / harvesting contractors in Scotland? If so, where?
Output of Stakeholder Engagement
The output of the stakeholder interviews included suggestions for data and information sources to support the economic analysis. Stakeholders also provided commentary on the opportunities and challenges of perennial energy crop production in Scotland; this is summarized below:
Miscanthus
Short Rotation Coppice
Short Rotation Forestry
Low input & maintenance costs
Use existing harvester (maize harvester)
Alternative markets (eg bedding)
Earlier harvest income than SRC/SRF & annual harvest
Knowledge base/innovation pipeline
Harvest contractor employment
Soil health
Sequential planting to allow harvest every year (albeit small volumes)
Opportunity to improve efficiency with modern machinery
Potential for biodiversity net gain / natural capital payments
Soil health / shelter benefits for other enterprises on farm.
No costs whilst growing
Alternative markets (for same diameter wood/ maybe to grow on)
Suits wider range of conditions
Potential community involvement
Shelter for livestock / crops
Poor cashflow
Miscanthus
Short Rotation Coppice
Short Rotation Forestry
Upfront cost: 2-3yrs to harvest
Winter hardiness challenge (although new cultivars being developed)
Director of International Land Use Study Centre – James Hutton Institute
NatureScot
AHDB
Scottish Land and Estates
Appendix I: Biomass Feedstock Innovation Funding in the UK
There is currently significant investment in innovation to increase the production of sustainable domestic biomass, including the Biomass Feedstocks Innovation Programme[68], which is funding innovative ideas that address barriers to biomass feedstock production across the UK. It is supporting projects those seeking to improve productivity through breeding, planting, cultivating and harvesting. Summaries of the 12 funded projects, taken from the GOV.UK programme page, are given below[69].
Led by UK Centre for Ecology & Hydrology. The Biomass Connect Phase 2 project will create a demonstration and knowledge sharing platform to showcase best practice and innovations in land-based biomass feedstock production.
Project BIOFORCE (BIOmass FORestry CrEation): Creating geospatial data systems to upscale national forestry-based biomass production.
Led by Verna Earth Solutions Ltd (formerly Forest Creation Partners Limited). Project BIOFORCE will create and demonstrate new, upgraded versions of Forest Research’s industry-standard Ecological Site Classification (ESC) tool, and Verna’s successful ForestFounder system.
Transforming UK offshore marine algae biomass production
Led by SeaGrown Limited. Scarborough-based SeaGrown operates a 25-hectare offshore seaweed farm in the North Sea off the Yorkshire Coast. This project seeks to apply SeaGrown’s experience in pioneering this new sector to create an innovative, automated end-to-end seaweed farming system.
EnviroCrops – Perennial Energy Crops Decision Support System (PEC-DSS)
Led by Agri Food and Biosciences Institute (AFBI).The EnviroCrops web app is envisaged as a central source of impartial information in an easy to access, free or low-cost, user-friendly format, that will enable farmers, land managers and consultants to make an informed decision about planting biomass crops.
Miscanspeed – accelerating Miscanthus breeding using genomic selection.
Led by Aberystwyth University. The aim of this project is to demonstrate the application of genomic selection (GS) in accelerating the breeding of high yielding, resilient Miscanthus varieties for the UK.
Technologies to enhance the multiplication and propagation of energy crops (TEMPEC)
Led by New Energy Farms EU Limited. The project objectives are to increase the number of energy grass varieties that are available, increase yield and develop agronomic improvements to multiplying and planting energy crops.
Optimising Miscanthus Establishment through improved mechanisation and data capture to meet Net Zero targets (OMENZ)
Led by Terravesta Farms Ltd. The project will utilise the Terravesta Harvest Hub platform to integrate data collected from all stages of our establishment pipeline alongside their existing harvest and growth data. Through data integration with the current supply chain, the OMENZ team will gain insights into long term crop performance and improve the entire Miscanthus biomass supply chain, benefiting both growers and end-users.
Demonstration of on-farm pelletisation technology.
Led by White Horse Energy Ltd in developing and constructing a robust mobile pelletiser enabling farms to process a range of feedstocks, enabling domestic biomass pellets to displace imported pellets in the UK energy supply mix.
Teesdale Moorland Biomass Project
Led by Teesdale Environmental Consulting Ltd (TEC Ltd). The Teesdale Moorland Biomass Project aims to utilise existing managed heather moort and harvest commercially viable biomass products from naturally generated moorland crops that are currently burned in situ as part of annual land management practices.
Taeda Tech Project – Soilless cultivation for rapid biomass feedstock production
Led by University of Surrey. The project uses novel aeroponic technology to rapidly cultivate Short Rotation Coppice (SRC) willow cuttings which can be planted into the field for bioenergy.
Net Zero Willow
Led by Rickerby Estates Ltd. The team is developing innovations aimed at revolutionising the industry and maximising marginal gains through more efficient machinery.
Accelerating Willow Breeding and Deployment
Led by Rothamsted Research. The Accelerating Willow Breeding and Deployment (AWBD) project will accelerate the breeding of SRC willow and generate information to guide the intelligent deployment of current varieties.
Appendix J: SWOT and PESTLE Analysis: Detailed Results
The SWOT analysis assessed the current economic potential for perennial energy crops for farmers and land-managers in Scotland, looking at strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) to provide a simplified picture and more clarity of what would be needed in order for these crops to be an attractive proposition economically, whilst also considering the other factors which farmers and land-managers would be likely to consider alongside the economics. The SWOT tables below are grouped according to the following categorisations:
Perennial energy grasses (primarily Miscanthus);
Short rotation coppice (primarily Willow);
Short rotation forestry (including broadleaved; conifer)
Table G1. SWOT table covering Perennial energy grasses, focused on Miscanthus.
Strengths
Weaknesses
Can harvest with maize harvester – farmer / contractor will have this (but not many people grow maize in Scotland).
Alternative markets e.g. bedding provides more security for farmers to encourage adoption.
Early harvest, better cashflow for farmers – 3yrs to first harvest (but some small harvest in first year)
Knowledge gaps – not flagged in research.
Limited input needs – lower costs
Upfront investment; delay in income (2-3yrs)
Winter hardiness (Scotland);
Gap in support e.g. grants (energy crop scheme for establishment grants in early 2000s) – nothing right now.
Limited market right now, uncertainty for future market.
Higher yield than SRC
Doesn’t respond to N fertilizer – limited opportunity to boost yield
Not frost tolerant – less suited to Scotland. But there are more frost hardy cultivars being developed.
Opportunities
Threats
To incentivise with grants, as there are none right now;
Employment opportunity in harvesting contracting.
Biodegradable film mulch – can boost economic performance; other innovations under biomass feedstock – opportunity to take these up (e.g. hybrid varieties which are more
Grassland that is becoming unprofitable – could be used.
Loss of carbon stock through land-use change (eg. if convert grassland)
Challenges in sourcing high-quality planting stock (esp. if there is uptake in planting)
Table G2. SWOT table covering Short Rotation Coppice
Strengths
Weaknesses
Sequential planting; allows harvest every year. But limits economics with small amounts.
Farmers consider financially risky; low selling price; high cost of harvest.
Low selling price / high harvest costs.
Single market for energy
Focused on a small number of species – more data needed on e.g. aspen
Concern re. removal of flexibility of land use in a rotation
Challenges around growth area (willow won’t grow well everywhere)
Opportunities
Threats
Modern machinery can improve efficiency.
Breeding to achieve higher yields happening.
Opportunities for biodiversity net gain and natural capital
Additional benefits of woodland habitat linkage
Benefits as a neighbour crop for shelter
Soil health benefits of willow?
Purification of contaminated soils? (willow)
Variable yield / uncertainty over lifecycle.
Risks as a neighbour crop for shading
Risks of pest (rust) for SRC willow
Table G3. SWOT table covering Short Rotation Forestry
Strengths
Weaknesses
No costs whilst growing – to harvest point.
Alternative markets potentially for same small diameter wood.
Wider range of growing conditions
Longer growing period before harvest.
Need to replant after harvest.
Loss of ‘agriculture’ classification as land and resulting loss of farm subsidy payment.
Less research: only the Forest Research plots – a few years ago, but not yet got full result.
Storage / transport: particularly for SRF in research (check)
Concern re. removal of flexibility of land use in a rotation
Opportunities
Threats
Variable yield / uncertainty over lifecycle.
Community-scale growth plans and ownership: potential economic driver for socio-economic regeneration
Biodiversity/conservation/amenity value
Grazing options on planted land and animal welfare benefits
Benefits as a neighbour crop for shelter
Options for diversification/flexibility through growing on to larger trees for other uses (e.g. timber)
Competition for output for other (possible more profitable) wood uses, such as timber
Risks as a neighbour crop for shading
PESTLE Analysis of economic potential of energy crops in Scotland
Energy crops are subject to a range of enabling and preventative factors which would influence the benefits and potential uptake of the crops in Scotland. A political, economic, social, technical, legal, and environmental (PESTLE) analysis was therefore undertaken to assess the potential to…increase economic viability and uptake of energy crops in Scotland This assessment was produced following the SWOT analysis to incorporate the strengths and opportunities of each energy crops (and more generally) identified in the SWOT.
Table G4. Summary PESTLE Analysis: enabling and preventative factors for economically viable energy crops in Scotland
The combination of high production costs, particularly the upfront investments uncertain policies and uncertain market prices for future harvests discourage farmers from growing SRC plants. (Zięty et al, 2022)
ENABLER
BARRIER
Political
Uncertain policies /lack of political support for key energy crops over multiple governments (Zięty et al, 2022, Davies et al, 2020) For example, the Energy Crops Scheme which provided establishment grants was withdrawn in 2013, and despite strong lobbying, Defra had resisted allowing Miscanthus to be counted as an ecological focus area (EFA) under greening.
Lack of specific grant funding available to help pay for establishment Miscanthus (Davies 2020).
The combination of high production costs and uncertain policies as well as the prices of the products discourage farmers from growing SRC plants. (Zięty et al, 2022)
Economic
Miscanthus- ‘high return per hectare’ (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Yield and sale price are biggest contributing factors to achieving good economics (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Farmers currently growing a bioenergy crop also had a higher average income compared to their nongrowing counterparts. (Brown et al 2016 D2)
Establishment grants and cash advance systems are widespread and efficient ways of limiting liquidity constraints (Bocquého, G., 2017 D3)
profitability was the main reason for growing these crops (Glithero et al., 2013)
Large initial investment and no income for 2-3 years (Miscanthus), 4-5 years (SRC), (10-20 years) SRF (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRF – Poor cash flow (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Uncertain profitability in comparison to land-uses that are better known (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Many farmers regard SRC willow as a financially risky (Warren et al., 2016 D2)
There are no stable markets for Miscanthus biomass and relevant applications are low-value (Lewandowski, I., J. Clifton-Brown, et al. 2016).
Social
Miscanthus- planting and annual harvesting will require supportive contractor and other local employment services. (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Local economic activity related to employment opportunities. Local employment at conversion plant and associated activities (Thornley, P., 2006.)
SRF -Negative publicity regarding the benefits of energy crops (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRF- Objections to planning applications for biomass power stations leads to limited feedstock market and demand (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Attitudes can take longer to change than awareness (Brown et al 2016 D2)
Farmers cited a range of ‘moral’ (e.g. should not be using land for energy crops when there is a shortage of food), land quality, knowledge, profit and current farming practice comments as reasons for not growing DECs (Glithero et al., 2013)
Technical
The energy crop market displays path dependence, arising from the reinforcement of the location of plant construction and energy crop selection, based on the locations of the previous plants and energy crops. Once a plant has been built at a location, and a number of farmers have adopted to produce supply for that plant, that area is more likely to be selected for further plant development, and associated energy crop growth (Alexander et al 2015 D14).
SRC- modern machinery, with high efficiency, working in fields with a larger area, reduces costs significantly (Kwaśniewski et al 2021 D17)
SRF-Limited specialist machinery for SRF management (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
need for smaller harvest equipment adapted to small-and-medium-scale area plantations of SRWC (Savoie et al 2013 B)
SRC – technical lack of knowledge (Wolbert-Haverkamp, M. and Musshoff, O., 2014).
Legal
Private long-term production contracts between farmers and biomass processors can act as a risk barrier (Bocquého, G., 2017 D3)
SRF-Irreversible land conversion- Reversion to farming use may not be allowed once SRF is planted as deemed change of use (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Long-term contracts and legal restrictions may become obstacles in the establishment of SRC (Long-termland contracts, which are essential for establishing SRC plantations, are one of the biggest obstacles for farmers engaging in SRC projects. Consequently, annual payments are an important compensation ) (Fürtner et al 2022 D9)
Environmental
careful allocation of perennial cropping systems into a cropland could produce positive impacts on climate, water, and biodiversity (foster multiple ecosystem services and mitigate ecosystem disservices (Anejionu, O.C. and Woods, J., 2019 D3)
long term weed control (Glithero et al., 2013)
The second-generation bioenergy crop Miscanthus almost always has a smaller environmental footprint than first generation annual bioenergy ones (Hastings et al., 2017).
SRC- Establishment on high organic/peaty soils (upland areas) potentially detrimental to soil carbon levels, soil damage and erosion. (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRC-cannot be planted on land with soils that are water-logged (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Miscanthus-Winterhardiness of Miscanthus is a major constraint (can halt growth, causing diminished achievable yield) (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Current varieties of Miscanthus are constrained by climate to the south and south east of Scotland (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Miscanthus- have lower or similar SOC (soil carbon stocks) when compared to grassland controls (Holder et al., 2019 D1)
Direct emissions can occur in the production, transport, handling and processing, while indirect emissions are associated with land use change potentially causing SOC changes (Alexander et al., 2015 D14).
The response to climate change scenarios further favours Miscanthus, suggesting that Miscanthus supply increases under future climate, while SRC willow supply is expected to reduce (Alexander, P., D. Moran, et al. 2014)
large-scale bioenergy production and associated additional demand for irrigation may further intensify existing pressures on water resources (Popp et al 2011)
The reduction of management intensity originating from converting agricultural land use to SRC cultivation results in additional environmental benefits, especially in soil protection and the enhancement of soil life (Schiberna et al., 2021 D9)
Appendix K: Biomass plants included for proximity analysis
Operator
Site Name
Installed Capacity (MWel)
CHP
Development Status
RWE
Markinch Biomass CHP Plant
65.00
Yes
Operational
E.ON
Stevens Croft
50.40
No
Operational
SIMEC/ Liberty House
Liberty Steel Dalzell
17.00
Operational
Norbord (West Fraser)
Cowie Biomass Facility
15.00
No
Operational
EPR Scotland
Westfield Biomass Power Station
12.50
No
Operational
Speyside Renewable Energy Partnership
Speyside Biomass CHP Plant
12.50
Yes
Operational
Scottish Bio-Power
Rothes Bio-Plant
8.30
Yes
Operational
University of St Andrews
Sustainable Power and Research Campus
6.50
Yes
Operational
How to cite this publication: Dowson, F., Leake, A., Harpham, L., Willcocks, J., Peters, E., David, T., Bates, T., Wood, C. (2024). ‘Economic potential of energy crops in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5478
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Defined as land which was primary forest, designated for nature protection, highly biodiverse grassland (except where harvesting is necessary to maintain grassland status), peatland, continuously forested, wetland in or after 2008. ↑
Based on a meta-analysis of 45 studies on transition to energy crops from ‘marginal’ land. ↑
Definition of marginal land may not be applicable to Scotland. ↑
Gross margin in agricultural costings is typically defined as ‘Output from the enterprise less the Variable Costs, including the allocated variable costs of grass and other forage’ ↑
Defined in the Scottish Farm business income survey as “Farms with no enterprise contributing more than two-thirds of their total standard output” – typically including livestock and crops, including animal fodder. An average income ↑
The general cropping, forage category has only one scenario due to the data coming from the Scottish Government Census data which doesn’t provide a low, medium and high scenario and the cost data coming form the Farm Management Handbook 2023/2024 ↑
Gross margin is farm income from a specific production enterprise, e,g, crop or livestock minus costs directly associated with production of that output, but excluding ‘fixed costs’ such as costs associated with farm buildings, general labour and finance costs. Further detail available in: Appendix E Methodology for economic analysis. ↑
The transition of a large land area – scenario 2 – to PECs creates a loss because of the assumptions within our study – we assumed that land which is more economically advantageous for PECs would be converted preferentially, so a larger portion of land transitioned in scenario 1 would make a profit from the transition to PECs, whereas in scenario 2 a large area of land which would make a loss from the transition was included, and so resulted in a total loss on balance. ↑
This study focused mostly on Miscanthus and SRC, but has been used as a best estimate here to give some basis for understanding how potential demand for bioenergy crops could evolve in future to meet Scottish Government NETs ambition. ↑
This refers to the percentage of all Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land in Scotland – suitable and not suitable for PECs. ↑
Methodology and maps of potential production areas of the three crops produced within the previous project are in Appendix F. ↑
These three types of BECCS (Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage) were identified in CCPu, along with BECCS in industry, as potential options for Scotland. ↑
This study focused mostly on Miscanthus and SRC, but has been used as a best estimate here to give some basis for understanding how potential demand for bioenergy crops could evolve in future to meet Scottish Government NETs ambition. ↑
Agroforestry is the practice of planting trees, usually to produce a crop of food or wood products, on farmland in combination with arable or livestock farming, often in small patches or strips with fields. ↑
The just transition principles are defined in the Scottish legislation as:
‘the importance of taking action to reduce net Scottish emissions of greenhouse gases in a way which:
a) supports environmentally and socially sustainable jobs,
b) supports low-carbon investment and infrastructure,
c) develops and maintains social consensus through engagement with workers, trade unions, communities, non-governmental organisations, representatives of the interests of business and industry and such other persons as the Scottish Ministers consider appropriate,
d) creates decent, fair and high-value work in a way which does not negatively affect the current workforce and overall economy,
e) contributes to resource efficient and sustainable economic approaches which help to address inequality and poverty.’↑
A Contract for Difference (CfD) is a private law contract between a low carbon electricity generator and the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC), a government-owned company. Contracts for Difference – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk)↑
Energy crops need support to fulfil potential – Farmers Weekly↑
DEFRA Area of crops grown for bioenergy in England and the UK Area of crops grown for bioenergy in England and the UK: 2008-2014 – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) ↑
Dependent on size of planting area and location in relation to National Scenic Areas and other sensitive areas – latest guidance available from Forestry Scotland. Scottish Forestry – Environmental Impact Assessments↑
The Scottish Government’s Carbon Calculator for wind farms on Scottish peatlands was developed in 2008, to calculate the impact of wind farm development on peatland carbon stocks in Scotland and thereby support decision making. Electricity generation emission factors are updated annually, but no major revisions have been made to the Carbon Calculator since 2014.
Aims
The increased focus on the transition to net zero might affect the suitability of the Carbon Calculator for future use. This research conducted a detailed review of the latest spreadsheet version of the Carbon Calculator (v2.14), which mirrors the web version (v1.8.1). It provides an evidence base for future considerations and recommendations.
This review has initiated further discussions and highlighted the need for ongoing engagement, which will be instrumental in the development of the Carbon Calculator.
Key findings
Based on the findings of a technical assessment, evidence review and quality control mechanisms, we recommend that when considered against recent policy updates and advancements in science, the Carbon Calculator, in its current form, should be updated. Each area of the Carbon Calculator was assessed for scientific accuracy and data availability:
The ‘payback time and CO2 emissions’ are not relevant/consistent with the findings of the technical assessment and literature review. It is important to consider whether emissions due to turbine life and back up are required, given new planning policy and the applicability of whole lifecycle carbon assessments.
For all peat-related areas of the Carbon Calculator, as well as the forestry area, accuracy is lacking in one or more methodologies, use of emission factors and assumptions.
While some data are accessible to users, it is not clear if they are able to accurately obtain some of that data – in particular, for variables that drive the results (the water table depth and extent of drainage), which could affect the accuracy of outputs.
In addition to the technical assessment, the research has triggered the need to examine the wider planning and consenting context through the following questions:
Does the calculator need to consider the lifecycle emissions of the wind farm, or could the focus be purely on the impact of development on peat?
Well established methods and tools are available to undertake Whole Life Carbon Assessments (e.g. PAS2080), including forthcoming offshore wind carbon footprinting guidance. This aspect of the Carbon Calculator might not be necessary as it replicates these approaches. Instead, it may be more beneficial to concentrate efforts on analysing the specific impacts of development on peatlands/habitat carbon emissions.
Is the output of the Carbon Calculator useful as a decision-making tool?
Since the inception of the Carbon Calculator, it has become clearer that improving and restoring biodiversity is important to tackling climate change. This progress is reflected the National Planning Framework 4’s mitigation hierarchy.
As the UK transitions to net zero, the current ‘carbon payback’ approach becomes less relevant, as it compares development emissions to the counterfactual of electricity generated by fossil fuels. The focus should shift to evaluating the impact of the developments on the natural environment, specifically, whether it improves the environment and sequesters CO2 effectively.
To better assess the development’s impact on peatland carbon emissions, the timeline for achieving ‘carbon payback’ or ‘carbon neutrality’ should consider land-based emissions. For example, ‘payback time’ could be defined as the period needed to restore peatland to a ‘near pristine’ condition from a reported baseline, compared to the site’s baseline emissions without development and counterfactual scenarios for non-peaty sites, and Scotland’s widespread peatland restoration efforts.
Should the Carbon Calculator incorporate other land use types?
This would offer a more comprehensive view of the carbon impact on other land use types, as compared to the carbon impact on peatland. This aspect should be evaluated considering Scotland’s evolving biodiversity net gain requirements, current Peatland Management Plans (PMP), Habitat Management Plans (HMP), and their anticipated updates.
Are the quality controls sufficient?
There are no in-built quality control mechanisms within the Carbon Calculator. Due to its complexity and skillsets required to review the data outputs, the Carbon Calculator is not used as a decision-making tool in the capacity it is intended. Additional quality controls would be beneficial.
The future of the Carbon Calculator
In addition to the technical review, the report also considers the future of the Carbon Calculator in terms of a review of incorporating high-resolution spatial data (HRSD) and/or peatland condition categories (from the Peatland Carbon Code), and applicability of the Carbon Calculator to other developments.
Integrating HRSD into the Carbon Calculator would enable an understanding of land cover types, providing proxies for peat condition and water table depth. This could reduce the need for manual site surveying for data collection and enable wider evaluation of the site.
We recommend that the integration of HRSD is explored for future versions of the Carbon Calculator, to ascertain the level of accuracy these enhancements could bring (i.e. through reduced manual inputs and/or quality controls). This can be done in conjunction with the findings from Scottish Government’s exploration of a national LiDAR mapping scheme.
The Peatland Code’s emission calculator provides emission factors to calculate the average net emissions from peatland in various conditions, based on the UK inventory. Whilst not Scotland-specific, integration of the peatland condition categories could provide a recognised approach to quantifying the benefits of peatland restoration activities.
There is potential for the Carbon Calculator to be adapted and applied to grid infrastructure and other development types on peatland and carbon rich soils, even though it is currently employed solely for wind farm developments. There are no concerns on the Carbon Calculator’s ability to be used on projects of all sizes. However, to be applied to different infrastructure types, consideration would need to be given to their unique spatial aspects, e.g. the effects of shading and effect of excess heat for solar farms. Further research is needed to understand the implications of other infrastructure developments on peatland and carbon rich soils prior to extending the applicability of the Carbon Calculator.
Glossary / Abbreviations
Baseline
Current baseline represents existing GHG emissions from the project boundary site prior to construction and operation of the project under consideration (IEMA, 2022).
Carbon-rich soils
Organo-mineral and peat soils are known as carbon-rich soils. A peat soil is defined in Scotland as when soil has an organic layer at the surface which is at least 50cm deep. Organo-mineral soil or peaty soil is soil which has an organic layer at the surface less than 50cm thick and overlies mineral layers (e.g. sand, silt and clay particles). There is also a relatively rare group of soils in Scotland known as humose soils. These have organic rich layers with between 15 and 35% organic matter. These are mineral soils but also considered to be carbon rich.
Dissolved Organic Carbon
fraction of organic carbon that can pass through a filter with a pore size between 0.22 and 0.7 micrometres.
High-Resolution Spatial Data
High-resolution spatial data refers to detailed information about the Earth’s surface captured with exceptional precision by satellite imagery.
Life Cycle Assessment
A Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is a methodology for assessing environmental impacts associated with all the stages of the life cycle of a commercial product, process, or service.
PAS 2080
PAS 2080 is a globally applicable standard for managing carbon in infrastructure. The standard looks at the whole value chain of a project and aims to reduce carbon and cost through design, construction, and use.
Particulate Organic Carbon
fraction of organic carbon that can’t pass through a filter with a pore size between 0.22 and 0.7 micrometres.
Payback period
Payback period is used within the Carbon Calculator to estimate the time it will take for a wind farm to ‘offset’ the greenhouse gases emitted. I.e., the displacement of the carbon ‘costs’ of construction with the carbon ‘savings’ due to the displacement of grid-based electricity generation from non-renewable sources.
Peat
Peat is organic material formed when dead plant material collects in cool, waterlogged conditions where there is very little oxygen, it breaks down slowly forming a layer of mainly organic matter.
Peat soil
(organic soil) in Scotland is defined as soil with a surface peat layer with more than 60% organic matter and of at least 50cm thickness.
Peaty soils
(organo-mineral soil) have a shallower peat layer at the surface less than 50cm thickness over mineral layers.
Peatland
Under NPF4, peatland is defined by the presence of peat soil or peaty soil types. This means that “peat-forming” vegetation is growing and actively forming peat, or it has been grown and formed peat at some point in the past. Peatlands can include blanket bog, upland raised bog, lowland raised bog and fens.
Peatland Code
The Peatland Code is a voluntary certification standard in the UK and is designed for peatland restoration projects aiming to market the climate benefits of restoration. The Peatland Code ensures that restoration projects are credible and deliverable, providing assurances to carbon market buyers.
The Peatland Code defines ‘peatland’ as ‘areas of land with a naturally accumulated layer of peat, formed from carbon-rich dead and decaying plant material under waterlogged conditions’.
Peat Management Plan
A peat management plan (PMP) is an operational plan in development projects on peat, describing baseline peat conditions, detail on excavation and reuse volumes, classification of the excavated material, how the excavated peat will be handled, stored, reinstated or other use or disposal.
Peatland Restoration
Carrying out an intervention which in combination with natural processes improves the hydrological function and coverage and good condition of priority peatland habitat vegetation, aiming to result in a peatland that is actively forming peat and sequestering carbon. Further detail will be stated in the Peatland Standard (under preparation).
Priority Peatland Habitat
Peatland National Vegetation Classification communities noted as a Priority Peatland Habitat are: M1, M2, M3, M15, M17, M18, M19, M20 and M25, together with their intermediates. These have been recognised under the Scottish Biodiversity Framework as being important to protect for their conservation and biodiversity value.
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
The Scottish Environment Protection Agency is Scotland’s principal environmental regulator, its main role is to protect and improve Scotland’s environment.
Whole life carbon
Assessment of emissions associated with an asset over its entire life; encompassing its development, operation, and end-of-life.
CH4
Methane
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
DOC
Dissolved organic carbon
ECU
Energy Consents Unit
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
ESA
European Space Agency
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
GIS
Geographic Information Systems
HRSD
High-Resolution Spatial Data
IPCC
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
JHI
James Hutton Institute
kWh
Kilowatt-Hour
LCA
Life Cycle Assessment
LiDAR
Light Detection and Ranging airborne mapping technique
MW
Megawatt
MWh
Megawatt-Hour
NASA
National Aeronautics and Space Administration
NPF4
National Planning Framework 4
N2O
Nitrous Oxide
PEAG
Scottish Government’s Peatland Expert Advisory Group
PMP
Peat Management Plan
POC
Particulate Organic Carbon
SAR
Synthetic Aperture Radar
SEPA
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
IUCN
International Union for Conservation of Nature
WLCA
Whole lifecycle carbon assessment
Introduction
Background
The Scottish Government’s Carbon Calculator for wind farms on Scottish peatlands (hereafter referred to as ‘the Carbon Calculator’) was developed in 2008 and updated in 2011 and 2014. It was developed due to concerns raised about the reliability of methods used to calculate the time taken for these facilities to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, combined with an increasing public policy demand for renewable energy following Scotland’s commitments at the time to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the use of fossil fuels for energy generation, principally; Scottish Planning Policy 6: Renewable Energy to deliver renewable energy in a way that “affords appropriate protection to the natural and historic environment without unreasonably restricting the potential for renewable energy development” (Scottish Government, 2007).
The Carbon Calculator was developed to ‘support the process of determining wind farm developments in Scotland. The tool’s purpose is to assess, in a comprehensive and consistent way, the carbon impact of wind farm developments. This is done by comparing the carbon costs of wind farm developments with the carbon savings attributable to the wind farm.’ (Nayak et al, 2008). The output of the Carbon Calculator compares the carbon costs of a wind farm development with the carbon savings attributable to the production of renewable energy (when compared to a counterfactual alternative). Electricity generation emission factors are updated annually, but no major revisions have been made to the Carbon Calculator since 2014.
The Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) developed the Carbon Calculator into a web Carbon Calculator (C-CalcWebV1.0), which has been available since 2016. The calculator is currently owned by the Scottish Government and is hosted and maintained by SEPA. The Carbon Calculator is currently used by developers to submit project carbon assessments. These submissions are then evaluated by the Energy Consents Unit (ECU) as part of the application for consent.
An evolving legislative, policy, science, and technology landscape
In the 16 years since the Carbon Calculator’s inception, there has been an increased focus on the transition to net zero, with updates to Scottish legislation and policy reflecting this shift. Key legislation and policy drivers include:
The Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019 (updated): sets a key driver for Scotland to deliver and meet its carbon reduction targets.
Scotland’s National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4) (adopted in February 2023): sets the framework for development across Scotland, including renewable energy. NPF4 includes national planning policies which set out ‘to protect carbon-rich soils, restore peatlands and minimise disturbance to soils from development’. Policy 5 sets out a mitigation hierarchy[1], and new development proposals on peatlands, carbon-rich soils, and priority peatland habitat are only supported in certain limited circumstances, including renewable energy generation. The policy also outlines the need for a site-specific assessment (such assessments may include peat depth surveys, Peat Landslide Hazard Risk Assessment, and detailed habitat and condition surveys) to identify the likely net effects of the development on climate emissions and loss of carbon. The mitigation hierarchy can be achieved through the Construction Environmental Management Plan, Habitat Management Plan (HMP), and Peat Management Plan (PMP), developed at the application stage.
There have also been significant advancements in science and technology during this period. The collective understanding of peatland science has evolved, and research, technology, and collaborative groups have fostered a greater understanding of the science, with the likes of the Peatland Code and NatureScot National Peatland Plan emerging as a result. This new legislative, policy and science landscape highlight the need for a comprehensive review of the Carbon Calculator’s original design and purpose.
Aim of the report
This report provides the findings of a technical assessment of the latest spreadsheet version of the Carbon Calculator (v2.14), which mirrors the web-version (v1.8.1) to determine if in its current form it remains fit for purpose, considering recent policy updates, the ongoing transition to net zero, and advancements in science. Furthermore, the report provides an evidence base for future considerations and explores how the Carbon Calculator could be improved via Peatland Code category integration, use of High-Resolution Spatial Data (HRSD), and improved quality controls.
Carbon Calculator Technical Assessment
Overview
The Carbon Calculator features numerous components used to assess the carbon impact of wind farm developments on Scottish peatland. The Carbon Calculator is split into the areas shown in Table 1. Appendix 11.3 provides a detailed breakdown of each section, including their specific calculations and assumptions.
Table 1: Carbon Calculator Section
Areas of the Carbon Calculator
Report Section
Data inputs
3.2
The core input data, forestry input data, and construction input data tabs are used by the user to insert key variables into the Carbon Calculator, to inform the development’s estimated payback time and CO2 emissions.
Payback time and CO2 emissions
3.3
Collates the results from each area of the Carbon Calculator and presents the carbon payback period and carbon intensity per kWh electricity generated.
Wind farm CO2 emission savings
3.4
Savings are calculated against the electricity generated by coal, a fossil-fuel mix, and the UK average grid mix, multiplied by the wind farm’s lifetime electricity generation at the time of the development’s application.
Emissions due to turbine life
3.5
Emissions associated with turbine life (manufacturing, construction, and decommissioning) are presented based on user input or estimated based on installed capacity. Emissions associated with foundations (concrete) are calculated separately.
Loss of carbon due to back up power generation
3.6
Emissions associated with back up requirements are calculated against the electricity generated by coal, a fossil-fuel mix, and the UK average grid mix, multiplied by the wind farm’s lifetime electricity generation.
Loss of carbon fixing potential of peatlands
3.7
Quantification of the annual carbon sequestration from bog plant fixation (without the wind farm) and thereby the loss as a result of development.
Loss of soil CO2
3.8
Emissions associated with loss of soil organic carbon from the peat removed and peat drained.
CO2 loss by DOC and POC loss
3.9
CO2 losses from dissolved organic carbon (DOC) and particulate organic carbon (POC) within waters in drained land that has been restored.
Loss of carbon due to forestry loss
3.10
Loss of future carbon sequestration associated with forest felling as part of the wind farm development.
Carbon saving due to improvement of peatland habitat
3.11
Estimates the reduction in GHG emissions due to restoration following the end of the wind farm’s lifespan.
The assessment provides a review of each area of the Carbon Calculator as outlined in Table 1. Each section consists of the following:
Assessment findings – narrative summarising the findings from the technical assessment and evidence review. For the technical areas of the Carbon Calculator a Red, Amber, Green (RAG) rating has been provided to illustrate the technical accuracy and data availability of each area. It uses the colour rating system presented in Table 2.
Key considerations and questions – considers the key takeaways from the assessment, and outlines questions for policy decision makers when considering revisions to the current Carbon Calculator.
Table 2. RAG Ratings
RAG
Criteria: Scientific accuracy
Criteria: Usability
White
Not applicable (rationale explained within narrative).
Green
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are relevant and consistent with best practice.
Data is site/project specific, is available to the Carbon Calculator user, and supports an accurate outcome.
Amber
Accuracy is lacking in one or more methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions.
There is some uncertainty around the data availability.
Red
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review.
Data is not site specific/ is inaccessible/unavailable to the user.
Assessment findings: Data inputs
Scientific accuracy
The scientific accuracy of the data inputs is provided as part of the narrative within the assessment findings for the corresponding technical areas of the Carbon Calculator (Sections 3.3-3.11). Therefore, no RAG rating has been provided.
Usability
The following commentary applies to the Carbon Calculator’s core input data. Specific commentary relating to data inputs of the technical areas of the Carbon Calculator are covered within the corresponding sections of this report (Sections 3.3-3.11).
The user is required to input a high number of variables (i.e. for the core input data, 70 input variables are required).
Each input variable requires an expected value, as well as a minimum and maximum range, therefore over ~200 input variables are required in total for core inputs.
For infrastructure design related inputs (wind farm characteristics, borrow pits, foundations, access tracks, cable trenches and peat excavated) the values are well defined based on the wind farm design, therefore the minimum and maximum ranges could represent unnecessary data requirements for design related inputs given their level of certainty. If still viewed as necessary in some instances, a minimum and maximum range could be automated, and/or an optional requirement for users.
Key consideration: Minimum and maximum data inputs
Wind farm characteristics – consider removal/option to ‘opt out’ of minimum and maximum variables where site specific data is known and can be evidenced by the user.
Peat variables – Review the minimum and maximum parameters for peat variables and explore replacing with individual infrastructure specific inputs (i.e. Turbine 1, 2 etc). Industry feedback indicated that prior to completing the Carbon Calculator, users proactively aim to reduce the impact of development on peat through the design process. If there is large variation in peat parameters around the site, should more detailed site-specific data be captured (to reflect the construction and forestry ‘areas’, and/or align with the PMP reporting where individual infrastructure outputs are provided) as an alternative?
Assessment findings: Payback time and CO2 emissions
Scientific accuracy
Although the calculations that produce the payback time and CO2 emissions are accurate (i.e. there are no errors in them), the carbon payback time that is generated (measured against the current fossil-mix of electricity generation) is a significant simplification which does not present an accurate representation of future payback. This is because the payback calculations assume a consistent counterfactual for the lifetime of the wind farm. However, as we transition to net zero, the National Grid is rapidly decarbonising and forecast to be near net zero by 2035 (DESNZ, 2023).
Usability
Payback combines infrastructure emissions (embodied carbon from wind turbines and their construction) with site-specific factors associated with peatland disturbance, and/or management. Emissions from the wind turbine manufacturing make up the largest proportion of the emissions, and so in this context, the overall carbon impact on peat (i.e. all peat related carbon calculations) appears to the user as a small proportion.
Currently there are no official guidelines about what constitutes an acceptable or unacceptable payback time, which would benefit both users and decision makers in determining ‘what good looks like’ for land based emissions.
Key consideration: Is the output of the Carbon Calculator useful as a decision-making tool?
As the National Grid transitions to net zero, the presented ‘savings’ (comparison to fossil generated electricity) become less relevant. It may be more appropriate to consider the ‘payback time’ as the time taken to restore the peatland condition to ‘near pristine’ from a reported baseline. To inform this, the sources of emissions could be split out and reported separately:
Emissions resulting from land use change (the impact on land carbon emissions as a result of the development including all peatland and other carbon rich soil related carbon sources), should be compared against the project site’s baseline emissions.
Emissions associated with the construction, operation, and decommissioning (Whole Lifecycle Carbon Assessment (WLCA)) of the wind farm. To aid decision making, this should be benchmarked against industry best practice, and/or compared against the whole life carbon impact of the counterfactual (e.g. gas turbine plant). Although this may be included within a WLCA, in which case this function is not required.
The carbon intensity of electricity generated could primarily be compared against i) the current back-up energy source of natural gas and ii) against the UK average (considering future decarbonisation) if not done so via a WLCA.
Key consideration: Is the focus of the Carbon Calculator correct?
Currently, the main use within decision making is the payback period. However, this is based on the counterfactual of electricity generated by fossil fuels. Focusing on land-based emissions and the impact of development on peatland, an alternative would be to consider the baseline site conditions and ‘payback’ time to a restored site (see 3.3.3 for suggested approach). There is widespread action to restore degraded peatland across Scotland (Scottish Government, 2024), it could be expected that if a wind farm is not developed, the sites would be restored through a variety of financial mechanisms such as the Peatland Code, and Scottish Government funding (ibid). Another relevant counterfactual could include the land-based emissions from a non-peaty site. Whether a counterfactual payback period should be updated to reflect this context is an important consideration.
Key consideration: Does the Carbon Calculator need to consider the lifecycle emissions of the wind farm, or could the focus be purely on the impact of development on peat and other carbon rich soils?
In order to demonstrate a minimisation of emissions, established methods and tools are available to undertake WLCA (e.g. PAS2080), which will include materials, construction, operational and decommissioning emissions of the entire wind farm. NPF4 Policy 2 (climate mitigation and adaptation) states that all proposals will be ‘be sited and designed to minimise lifecycle greenhouse gas emissions as far as possible.’ Given the new policy context in combination with the Carbon Calculator’s core aim (to determine the impact of development on peatland carbon emissions), key considerations include:
Whether the lifecycle emissions of a wind farm need to be included in the Carbon Calculator?
Could the calculations in the Carbon Calculator solely be focused on the impact of the development on peatland emissions?
Is the presentation of the current payback output necessary or appropriate for decision making?
Assessment findings: Wind farm CO2 emission savings
Scientific accuracy
The UK grid average is forecast to be broadly decarbonised by 2035 (BEIS, 2020). Using the current grid average (DESNZ, 2023) across the lifetime of the wind farm project represents a ‘static’ coefficient which is not representative of long-term UK grid decarbonisation over time. Additionally, over time as the grid average decarbonises this comparison will not show an operational benefit of using renewable energy.
The UK generates ca. 1% of electricity from coal (Statista, 2024). The emissions factors in the Carbon Calculator are updated annually. If users apply the current (optional) coal factor, this factor is also a ‘static’ coefficient. Coal is due to be phased out completely by the end of September 2024 (BEIS, 2021), and therefore the ‘coal-fired electricity generation’ comparison should be removed as it is not a representative comparison.
Renewable energy from wind and solar is not guaranteed and therefore a backup is required. Currently, where back up for renewables is required, gas peaking plants provide additional capacity. As we transition to a zero-carbon grid, natural gas will continue to be used to support both renewable back-up and additional demand (BEIS, 2020). There is also work ongoing nationally (Great Grid Upgrade, (National Grid, 2024)) to improve infrastructure and connectivity which will reduce the reliance on back-up energy requirements.
Most of Scotland’s electricity demand is already met by renewables (Scottish Government, 2024). There is an opportunity to increase renewables across the UK and for exports, however, this will require appropriate infrastructure.
The counterfactual emission factors only include electricity generation (i.e. the emissions associated with burning fossil fuels to generate electricity). They exclude the development of the infrastructure (i.e. the power station). Therefore, savings are based on operational energy efficiency, there is no consideration to the embodied carbon or operational maintenance of the alternative power.
Noting the transition to net zero, consideration needs to be given to the appropriateness of represented savings.
Usability
This section of the Carbon Calculator is used to calculate the Wind farm CO2 emissions. The input variables which inform it are acceptable in terms of usability.
See Section 3.3.4 Key consideration: Is the focus of the Carbon Calculator correct?
Assessment findings: Emissions due to turbine life
Scientific accuracy
The methodology for estimating emissions is based on turbine capacity derived from the regression analysis of data points found within a selection of papers dated between 2002 and 2006. The wind industry has evolved in the last 20 years and these assumptions are outdated, for the following reasons:
The average onshore wind turbine has increased over recent years to 2.5-3MW (National Grid, n.d.). the references within the current Carbon Calculator are based on studies around 1MW (Lenzen and Munksgaard, 2002; Ardente et al., 2006; Vestas, 2005) and have a direct correlation between turbine MW and embodied carbon (i.e. the greater the power, the higher the embodied carbon), however due to technology advancements (i.e. lightweighting), increased power may not require increased materials. The methodology should be updated to consider more recent manufacturer lifecycle assessments.
The physical size of UK wind turbines (i.e. height and turbine span) have increased.
The Carbon Calculator uses an emissions factor for reinforced concrete taken from The Concrete Centre (2013). This reference has been superseded with the most recent market data being available for 2023 (Concrete Centre, 2023) and should be updated.
Estimations only account for lifetime emissions attributed to turbine structures and concrete hard standings. The methodology disregards emissions from the manufacture, construction, and disassembly of other wind farm assets (e.g., site fences, access tracks, battery storage, etc) (Appendix 10.1). Carbon emissions resulting from the transport of labour and materials to the construction-site is also excluded. This underestimates emissions and does not align to common WLCA practice (e.g., PAS 2080).
Emissions exclude decommissioning; due to the uncertainty in this area this would be difficult to estimate, however it should be recognised that decommissioning activities would result in additional disruption to peat. With the net zero transition and increasing energy demand it is likely that sites will be repowered rather than decommissioned. However, as wind farm developments are only provided with consent to operate for fixed period (and should be followed by decommissioning), it may not be appropriate to include this functionality.
Usability
Many lifecycle assessments for wind turbines include foundations (e.g. Vesta, n.d.). Therefore the ‘carbon dioxide emissions from turbine life’ variable may result in double counting of construction emissions when using the ‘direct input of total emissions’ option if not split out by the turbine provider and/or Carbon Calculator user, when paired with foundations and hardstanding emissions, and/or the construction input data tab.
As this is a significant part of the assessment, lifecycle emissions should be modelled on site specific data.
Depending on the size of the development, developers may be required to submit an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), including a WLCA. Scottish Government is preparing Planning and Climate Change guidance, which includes consideration of information sources, tools, methods and approaches (including WLCAs) that can be used to demonstrate whether and how lifecycle greenhouse gas emissions of development proposals have been minimised. For reference, there is currently an industry standard approach for wind farm LCA being developed for offshore wind developments through the Offshore Wind Sustainability JIP (anticipated to be released by the end of 2024) (The Carbon Trust, 2022).
See Section 3.3.4 Key consideration: Is the focus of the Carbon Calculator correct?
See Section 3.3.5 Key consideration: Does the Carbon Calculator need to consider the lifecycle emissions of the wind farm, or could the focus be purely on the impact of development on peat?
Assessment findings: Emissions due to back up power generation
Scientific accuracy
Back up requirements are typically modelled using the guidance note assumption of 5% of the wind farm capacity following guidance within the Carbon Calculator (Dales et al, 2004). The wind industry has evolved in the last 20 years. From a review of literature and current policy, there are no specific requirements for back-up in planning applications for renewable energy. As the National Grid decarbonises (DESNZ, 2023) back-up will increasing be supplied by other renewable energy. Therefore, this area of the Carbon Calculator could be redundant.
Emissions associated with back up are calculated based on a grid connection. See Section 3.4 regarding selection of counterfactual emission factors. There are other options such as interconnections, energy storage solutions and nuclear that provide alternatives (National Grid, 2024).
Usability
The input variable is acceptable in terms of usability.
Key consideration: Should the Carbon Calculator include ‘Back-up requirements’?
From a review of literature and current policy, there are no specific requirements for back-up in planning applications for renewable energy, As the National Grid decarbonises (DESNZ, 2023) back-up will increasing be supplied by other renewable energy. Where back-up requirements are specified, it’s anticipated that these would be included within an WLCA. Therefore, this area of the Carbon Calculator could be redundant.
Assessment findings: Loss of CO2 fixing potential
Scientific accuracy
This section of the Carbon Calculator quantifies the annual carbon sequestration from bog plant fixation (without the wind farm). The loss of carbon fixing potential is calculated from user inputs for the area which peat is removed (m2) as well as the area affected due to drainage (m2). Loss of CO2 fixing potential has a low significance within the outputs of the Carbon Calculator (typically 1-2% of the total lifetime emissions), most land-based CO2 losses due to wind farm development are associated with soil organic matter (see Appendix 11.3).
Loss of carbon fixation is calculated based on the lifetime of the wind farm and time required until full peatland functioning is restored. No consideration is given to the condition the peatland will be restored to.
The Carbon Calculator currently assumes that peatland is in a pristine condition and therefore is a net carbon sink. However, 80% of UK peatland is already degraded (NatureScot, 2015). Degraded peatland is likely to be a net source of emissions rather than a sink (NatureScot, 2015).
The Carbon Calculator assumes a constant rate of carbon fixation over time, failing to take account for the impact of changing climatic conditions e.g. increased frequency of drought. See key consideration 3.7.4 on the impacts of climate change.
The condition of the peatland is influenced by vegetation composition (Marshall et al, 2021), and degraded peat is associated with changes to vegetation structure with scrubbier species to the disadvantage of characteristic peatland species (NatureScot, n.d.). Literature was located which described the known link between ecosystem resilience and peatland vegetation (Speranskaya et al, 2024), and highlighted that the interactions between temperature, precipitation, nitrogen deposition, and atmospheric CO2 and their effects can be a result of vegetation composition (Heijmans et al, 2008).
The literature review indicates that the Carbon Calculator’s current output for ‘loss of carbon fixation potential’ may not be accurate, because: i) the current condition of peatland may not be pristine, and may therefore have a lower carbon fixation rate, and ii) there is considerable uncertainty in the ability to restore peatland to its fully functioning ‘pristine’ state so the future fixation rate may be overestimated.
However, no research was located which presented the relationship between peatland condition and bog fixing potential, or updated fixation emission factor rates. This is anticipated to be because other methodologies (e.g. Evans et al, 2023) do not explicitly assess the loss of bog fixing potential, but instead assess the ‘Net Ecosystem Production of the peatland’. There was also no literature located to explain how the interaction between vegetation and hydrology impacts carbon fixing potential, and so the degree to which peatland condition impacts the carbon fixation value in the Carbon Calculator is uncertain and represents an evidence gap.
This review is unable to conclusively determine the accuracy of this area of the Carbon Calculator and whether carbon fixation is accurately represented. Although carbon fixation represents a very small proportion of the total emissions, the current assumption is likely to represent a worst case (in terms of emissions) and may be suitable in the absence of other literature to inform it. This area of the Carbon Calculator could be superseded through the integration of the Peatland Code which uses the UK inventory and includes carbon sequestration (e.g. carbon fixation from bog plants) within its net emission factors.
Usability
Carbon fixed by bog plants is a user input (a guidance note within the Carbon Calculator states ‘the Scottish National Heritage use a value of 0.25tC/ha/yr.’ however the guidance which informs this is no longer available, and this is highlighted as an evidence gap.
Key consideration: Should the baseline condition of peatland be incorporated in the Carbon Calculator?
Whilst the loss of CO2 fixing potential will remain the same, degraded peatland is likely to be a net source of emissions rather than a sink (ibid) and there is no consideration of these emissions within the Carbon Calculator. Other reasons for incorporating the baseline condition and replication of the Peatland Code’s calculation methodology are provided within this report (see Section 3.11.1). The use of HRSD could support the identification of peatland condition.
Key consideration: Impacts of climate change
Carbon fixing potential of blanket bogs (which make up 90% of Scotland’s peatland) is anticipated to decline/be under threat by 2050-80 when considering the impact of climate change (Ferretto et al, 2019). The impact of climate change on peat has not previously been considered, however is of growing concern. Degraded peatlands are less resilient to the impacts of climate change, so the emissions will change proportionally more in degraded versus pristine peatland. Climate change is also likely to make successful restoration more challenging Norby et al (2019), although it has also been indicated that successful restoration of degraded/actively eroded sites could see the greatest CO2 improvements (Evans et al, 2023), there is variation in results of the impacts of climate change on carbon fluxes following restoration (see Section 3.11 for more information).
Assessment findings: Loss of soil CO2
Scientific accuracy: Peat removed
Calculating volume of peat removed:
The Carbon Calculator uses an appropriate methodology for calculating the volume of peat removed for borrow pits, turbine foundations, hard-standing and access tracks, as well as any additional peat.
However, the use of averages may be producing a less accurate result than if actual numbers for each infrastructure feature (i.e. turbine foundation #1,2,3 etc) were inputted, as carried out in PMPs. This was reflected in industry feedback where it was highlighted that excavation volumes shown in the PMP are more realistic than what is shown in the Carbon Calculator.
Calculating CO2 loss from removed peat:
This is the largest source of peatland related carbon emissions because of development.
The carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density are important parameters which drive the outputs of the Carbon Calculator. Sensitivity analysis (Appendix 10.2) demonstrates the correlation between carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density and carbon losses from soil organic matter. Halving the data input values of either independent variable has the impact of a 60% reduction on emissions associated with carbon losses from soil organic matter.
Literature review findings indicate that carbon content of dry peat has a typical range of 50% to 55% and dry soil bulk density a range of 0.06 to 0.25 gcm3 (e.g., Chapman et al., 2009; Ratcliffe et al., 2018; Heinemeyer et al., 2018; Howson, 2021, Lindsay, 2010; Parry and Charman, 2013; Levy and Gray, 2015; Carless et al., 2021; Howson et al., 2022).
The calculation methodology is appropriate.
The Carbon Calculator assumes a worse-case scenario that all peat removed is destroyed and the carbon content is lost. Although in practice peat is often relocated, which should be more favourable, subject to it being sensitively relocated (SEPA, 2012; IUCN, 2023), there is an evidence gap in literature which illustrates successful peat relocation (i.e. via emissions rates from relocated excavated peat). In the absence of evidence, the assumption that the carbon content will be lost over time is an appropriate worst-case conclusion.
Usability: (Peat removed)
Calculating volume of peat removed:
The ‘average depth of peat at site’ input variable in the ‘characteristics of peatland before wind farm development’ is not applied to any of the calculations in the Carbon Calculator. However, the ‘average depth of peat removed’ from each development feature (i.e. ‘average depth of peat removed from borrow pit, hard standing, turbine foundations’) is applied to calculate the quantity of peat removed. This provides greater accuracy than the singular ‘average depth of peat at site’ variable which could be removed from the Carbon Calculator.
Mirroring the assessment findings from 3.8.1, the data inputs for peat depth provide an average peat depth for each development feature type (e.g. ‘average depth of peat removed from turbine foundations’) they are not specific to each individual feature on which the average is may up of. For example, there will be multiple turbine foundations. The use of an average in this context may be a poor representation of the spatial variability in peat cover, as well as the positioning of infrastructure within that peat cover. This is particularly relevant where there are different peat conditions, depths and land use types across a site. Peat depth is not uniform and varies over short distances due to the underlying topography (Parry et al., 2014). Under blanket peat thickness is typically 0.4–6 m; it can be up to ten metres and often more in raised bogs, and in fens is 0.4–5m. Peat soil is defined as requiring a depth of 0.5m and a surface peat layer containing more that 60% organic matter (NatureScot, 2023). A more detailed data input, like the ‘construction and forestry input data’ sheets and/or reflecting how peat is reported in the PMP (i.e. by turbine, borrow pit etc.) could allow for a more accurate assessment of the quantity of peat removed.
NPF4 requires consideration of peaty soils, peat soil and peatland. Whilst the Carbon Calculator can be used in its current form on any peatland and responds appropriately to shallow peat depths (inputted as averages for each infrastructure type) a more specific data input for peat depth from each area where peat is removed would allow for better differentiation between different depths.
Calculating CO2 loss from removed peat:
Carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density are user inputs. Whilst the exact metrics will be site specific, industry feedback indicated that these data inputs were difficult to obtain due to the lab analysis requirements (to obtain accurate data peat samples requiring drying out for long periods of time) and are therefore often based on assumptions, with one user utilising the von post scale. The ranges identified from the literature review could be incorporated into the Carbon Calculator as recognised minimum and maximum parameters to inform an inbuilt quality control measure.
Key consideration: replace the use of averages with infrastructure specific inputs
This approach would provide more accurate outputs and replicate how peat is reported in the PMP.
Key consideration: Reuse of removed peat
Feedback from industry indicated that where possible projects seek to relocate peat (excavate peat for development and then reuse it where there is a need e.g. due to cut and fill balance) rather than remove from site. There were concerns the Carbon Calculator assumes a worse-case scenario. Consideration of whether the Carbon Calculator should incorporate an option to include peat reuse needs to be weighed up against whether this would be appropriate, as the reuse of peat is site specific, i.e. there will be limited sites with options appropriate for peat reuse, and unless peat for reuse is handled carefully it is likely to oxidise over time and lose carbon to the atmosphere. Options for positive reuse are highlighted as an evidence gap and would require additional research prior to updating the Carbon Calculator.
Key consideration: Incorporate minimum and maximum parameters into the Carbon Calculator for the carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density variables
These two variables have a significant impact on the Carbon Calculator output. The literature review has identified an acceptable range for both variables which could act as parameters and inform quality control.
Key consideration: the use of HRSD
A recent study from JHI explored the mapping of soil profile depth, bulk density and carbon stock in Scotland using remote sensing and spatial covariates (Aitkenhead and Coull, 2020), Although further research is required to determine the appropriateness of this approach, in relation to bias in datasets, model complexity and comparison, model performance, and separate models for interrelated properties, and further engagement with JHI and NatureScot on the role of HRSD in this context is recommended as a next step.
Scientific accuracy: Peat drained
Calculating volume of peat drained:
Volume of peat drained is calculated based on the depth of the drain and the extent of drainage. However, accurately establishing drainage efficacy is complicated as it affected by other parameters which are not well documented, and the changes brought about by drainage are expressed over a long period of time (IUCN, 2014).
In pristine peatland the water table is typically close to the surface. As a result of excavation, drainage causes a drop in the water table (Irish Peatland Conservation Council, n.d.). This stimulates soil respiration and the release of carbon (Ma et al., 2022).
Drainage also leads to subsidence (Ma et al., 2022) (IUCN, 2014). Subsidence should be measured alongside the water table depth to fully inform the likely extent of drainage.
Drainage can be influenced by distance between ditches, hydraulic conductivity, and slopes (Price et al, 2023).
There is a linear relationship between age of a drain and the cumulative carbon lost (Evans et al, 2021).
Within degraded peat, the local formation of drainage ‘pipes’ is common, therefore possibly enhancing the extent of drainage.
Despite research in the area there is an evidence gap in understanding what a suitable average is, and the methodologies to define the extent of drainage are difficult to apply.
Calculating CO2 loss from drained peat:
In flooded soils, CO2 emissions are equalled or exceeded by fixation leading to near-zero emissions or net carbon sequestration, whilst in drained soils CO2 emissions exceed fixation leading to net emissions. The carbon emissions associated with peat drainage are calculated based on the difference between emissions from drained land and emissions from undrained land.
If site is not restored after decommissioning: The Carbon Calculator assumes a worse-case scenario that all carbon is lost (i.e. full drainage) following the same approach as removed peat. Due to the uncertainty in the parameter of the extent of drainage, this approach provides an appropriate worst-case scenario.
If site is restored after decommissioning: The Carbon Calculator calculates emissions from drained land against the lifetime of the wind farm, restoration period (as defined by the user) and considers the number of flooded days per year based on IPCC (1997) assumptions, which should be updated to reflect more recent literature (see below ‘calculating emission rates from soils’). Due to the uncertainty around end-of-life and decommissioning it may be more appropriate to assume a worse-case scenario (i.e. assume site is not restored after decommissioning), and separately account for the benefits from restoration within the ‘CO2 gain – site improvement’ tab so that it is reported separately to the impact during the lifetime of the wind farm.
See Section 3.8.1 for commentary on ‘carbon content of dry peat’ and ‘dry soil bulk density’ data inputs.
Calculating emission rates from soils:
The purpose of this calculation is to determine the loss of soil carbon in the peatland as a result of a wind farm development. This is calculated from the total carbon loss from physically removed peat, and total carbon loss from peat drainage.
There are two approaches included within the Carbon Calculator – the IPCC methodology is a default approach and excludes any site detail; the model used by Nayak et al, 2008 is provided as a site-specific option. Users have the option to use either the IPCC (1997) methodology or the site-specific methodology. However, the Carbon Calculator states the site-specific method must be used for planning applications. If the IPCC (1997) methodology is redundant, it should be removed from the Carbon Calculator.
IPCC 1997:
This has been superseded by the 2014 Wetland Supplement.
Whilst the Carbon Calculator does not include N2O (as it uses IPCC (1997) emission factors), the implications of this are small, and further updates could be made to include this. Whilst not expected to be a significant emission (ca. 2%) and dependent on the nutrient content of soils, it could be incorporated based on nitrogen content of soil samples. Where relevant (in the instance of intensive farming) N2O emissions could be comparable to CH4 .
The IPCC emission factors referenced are Tier 1, and therefore not representative of Scotland’s peatlands. The factors are mainly based on warm season data, and peatlands in colder climates are likely to emit less (Hongxing and Roulet, 2023).
Although these Tier 1 emissions factors could be updated by those represented by Evans et al, 2023 (Tier 2) and used within the 2021 update to the Emissions Inventory for UK Peatlands, they may not be fully representative of Scotland (which is wetter, and agriculture is predominantly less intensive). Furthermore, the Carbon Calculator states the site-specific method must be used for planning applications. It is therefore recommended that the IPCC (1997) methodology is removed due to the greater accuracy that the site-specific methodology can provide.
Nayak et al, 2008:
Calculates emissions factors via a bespoke methodology. Two options for type of peatland provided: acid bog, and fen (core data inputs). This covers the four main peatland habitats in Scotland; blanket bog (acid bog), raised bog (acid bog), fen (fen) and bog woodland (acid bog).
The methodology equations for CO2 and CH4 emissions are derived by regression analysis, considering the average annual air temperature and average water table depth. Whilst the methodology does not directly refer to peatland condition, it incorporates air temperature and water table depth which is a good proxy in establishing emission rates (Tiemeyer et al., 2020) (Ma et al, 2022), as the water table has a significant influence on peatland CO2 and CH4 emissions (Huissteden et al, 2016, Evans et al, 2021). Empirical relationships between water table depth and CH4 and CO2 emissions defined by Evans et al (ibid) enable it to be used to calculate carbon emissions, as illustrated by Evans et al (2023).
The evidence base for the methodology uses multiple peer reviewed studies (Bubier et al. 1993, Martikainen et al. 1995, Silvola et al. 1996, MacDonald et al. 1998, Nykänen et al, 1998, Alm et al. 1999), the analysis includes a robust sensitivity analysis which supports accuracy. However, the studies referenced reflect boreal peatland, and this element of the Carbon Calculator could be updated to reflect more recent literature ( (Evans et al, 2021), (Evans et al, 2023), (Ojanen and Minkkinen, 2019), (Wilson et al, 2016), (Tieymer et al, 2016)) which reflects a temperate climate and/or accounts for land use type.
Usability: Peat drained
Calculating volume of peat drained:
The volume of peat drained is highly sensitive to the user input for the ‘average depth of peat removed’ from each development feature (i.e. ‘average depth of peat removed from borrow pit, hard standing, turbine foundations’); increasing the depth and/or extent of drainage directly correlates with the volume of peat effected by drainage. This volume feeds into the calculations for CO2 loss from drained peat.
The average water table depth and extent of drainage is a user input. These parameters vary depending on the specific site, and within the site itself. Authors of the Carbon Calculator, Nayak et al (2008) underline the importance of accuracy in the choice of these inputs. However, the cost of correctly following the methodologies presented in the Carbon Calculator were highlighted by industry stakeholders as ‘prohibitively high’ for projects that may not obtain planning consent.
Average water table depth variable: The Carbon Calculator describes this variable as the upper boundary of the groundwater. Considerable variety in the method used to obtain the ‘average water table depth’ by users was observed – from obtaining an average depth via hydrologists, to using the water table depth from a previous similar site. Evidence of the hydrology calculations to inform user inputs were not assessed as part of this research, and could merit further research in conjunction with a review of other EIA deliverables and their applicability to the Carbon Calculator’s data inputs. The narrow timescales associated with the preparation of planning documents (i.e. EIA) present a challenge in obtaining reliable information, and the current approach does not account for the temporal changes of the water table. The Carbon Calculator output likely only represents a ‘snapshot’ which consequently, in combination with the variety in approaches to obtaining the variable, may be inaccurate.
Average extent of drainage around drainage features at site’ variable: Industry feedback on this variable’s method was resolute in it being impractical to collect this data (due to both time requirements and associated cost) during planning timescales. Despite reviewing available evidence, a practical methodology (i.e. within planning timescales) to inform this variable could not be identified.
Calculating CO2 loss from drained peat:
See Section 3.8.2 for commentary regarding carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density.
Emission rates from soils:
See Section 3.8.2 for commentary regarding emission rates from soils.
Key consideration: update the methodology for emissions rates from soils
The methodology should incorporate recent literature and a temperate peatland that reflects the Scottish context, it should also acknowledge the role of the mean annual water table depth, which has been identified as the overwhelmingly dominant control on CO2 fluxes (Evans et al, 2021). The literature review identified papers which should be reviewed when undertaking this update:
Tiemeyer et al (2020)’s ‘A new methodology for organic soils in national greenhouse gas inventories: Data synthesis, derivation and application’ incorporates HRSD and uses water table data to determine Germany’s GHG estimate for organic soils at a National level, which it states could be applied at a project level.
Evans et al (2023) ‘Aligning the Peatland Code with the UK peatland inventory’ provides an overview of low-cost methodologies to obtain site data to inform peat-carbon variables, including water table depth and reference to ‘Eyes on the bog’ methodologies (Lindsey et al, 2019).
Key consideration: should the Carbon Calculator account for emissions from drainage ditches?
Although the extent of drainage is captured in the Carbon Calculator, drainage ditches represent an additional source of CH4 emissions from drained organic soils (Peacock et al, 2021) which are not currently included in the calculations. Emissions from ditches are captured in the IPCC’s 2014 Wetlands supplement and could be applied to developments if the Carbon Calculator were to specify to peat condition, to replicate the approach used in the Peatland Code (Evans et al, 2023). The inclusion of drainage ditches could also be informed by the use of HRSD (see 3.8.12).
Key consideration: Investigate the use of HRSD in measuring water table depth
HRSD can be utilised to ascertain water table depth and provide historic trends. This could enhance the accuracy of Carbon Calculator when combined with ground truthing. For more information, please see Section 5. This could also inform Quality Control Mechanisms.
Key consideration: to what extent can assumptions/parameters, and HRSD be used to inform ‘Average extent of drainage around drainage features at site’?
The current methodology to obtain the extent of drainage is viewed as being impractical within planning timescales. Whether this variable (using an indicative assumption) should be automated, and/or include parameters, requires careful consideration, particularly as it is a highly sensitive input. The IUCN classifies drained peatland as that which lies within 30m of an active drain, (IUCN, 2022). The literature review was unable to determine a range to inform parameters on this variable, although it did identify a paper where GIS was utilised to establish surrounding drainage areas (Sallinen et al, 2019). The role of HRSD in informing this input variable should be considered in conjunction with other efforts being undertaken to establish better accuracy in quantifying drainage impacts. This includes work undertaken (and ongoing) at the James Hutton Institute (e.g. Aitkenhead et al, 2016, the Peat Mothership Project (2024)) to inform the best approach. Discussion of the draft report highlighted an additional study utilising HRSD to provide a national scale map of Scotland’s individual drainage channels and erosion features (Macfarlane et al, 2024) which would further inform the role of HRSD in this context and Section 3.8.10.
Key consideration: what quality control mechanisms are needed to enable a consistent (and accurate) approach to obtaining WTD and extent of drainage?
Industry feedback consistently highlighted concerns around the time and cost in obtaining the input variables required for extent of drainage and water table. These variables have a significant bearing on the carbon outputs, and so the approach to obtaining them should be uniform and feasible within planning timescales. This could be remedied through further engagement, the subsequent development/updating of guidelines (i.e. Guidance on Developments on Peatland, 2017), and/or the provision of training (to users and decision makers) and reinforced through the appropriate use of quality controls. This data could then go on to inform a national dataset of measurements.
Assessment findings: CO2 loss by Dissolved Organic Carbon (DOC) and Particulate Organic Carbon (POC) loss
Scientific accuracy
This area of the Carbon Calculator determines the gross loss of soil carbon from both DOC and POC loss following peat drainage. Only restored formerly drained land is included in this calculation because if land is not restored, the carbon lost has already been counted as carbon dioxide via ‘CO2 loss from drained peat’ (Section 3.8.7). CO2 loss by DOC and POC has a low significance within the outputs of the Carbon Calculator, most CO2 losses due to wind farm development is associated with soil organic matter (see Appendix 10.2).
The Carbon Calculator advises that “No POC losses for bare soil included yet. If extensive areas of bare soil is present at site need modified calculation (Birnie et al, 1991)”.
Assuming site restoration, DOC and POC are calculated for the period (years) of site restoration (i.e. the time between the year of site improvement and the year of the sites habitat and hydrology being restored).
Emissions are calculated based on a percentage of the total gaseous losses of carbon from improved/restored land, these are based on averages from Worrall (2009) which provide the following:
DOC – 26% (7-40%)
POC – 8% (4-10%)
These assumptions (including the minimum and maximum) are tied into the Carbon Calculator (i.e. not editable by the user). DOC has a broad range, which could be causing some inaccuracy in the results. The Carbon Calculator’s assumption that DOC and POC loss is only applied to restored formerly drained sites may be underestimating DOC and POC emissions for sites which have eroding peatland.
The Peatland Code methodology Smyth et al. (2015) uses DOC and POC emission factors (reflecting condition type) which follow Tier 1 default values for drained and rewetted temperate peatlands developed for the IPCC Wetland Supplement (IPCC, 2014). Evans et al (2023) note for DOC that few limited UK studies have been published, and other studies fall outside the UK-relevant climatic region; and similar for POC; few additional POC flux estimates exist to enable refinement. Although some recent UK evidence indicates DOC increases may be larger or smaller depending on the peatland type, there is insufficient DOC flux data across the range of UK peat types and condition classes to support a full country specific approach (ibid).
Pickard et al (2022) found that increased DOC concentrations were detected in areas of drained peatland relative to non-drained peatland from the UK’s largest tract of blanket bog in the Flow Country of northern Scotland. These findings could be incorporated into the Carbon Calculator, however, as they represent one study based on a unique area of pristine peatland, a more conservative approach is recommended until further research is available.
Discussion of the draft report raised an additional study from the Whitlee wind farm development exploring the effect of development phasing in relation to DOC and POC loss over a ten-year timespan, we suggest that further review incorporates the findings from this study.
Usability
DOC and POC calculations require no inputs from the user.
Key consideration: align DOC and POC with the 2014 IPCC Wetland Supplement
For the purposes of the Carbon Calculator, emissions factors for DOC and POC could be applied to projects based on the peat condition, utilising the IPCC 2014 methodology, replicating the Peatland Code (Evans et al, 2023) which uses the UK inventory emissions factors. This would replace the current methodology but is more robust as the studies used to inform these default factors were based partly on a small number of UK studies (including two from Worrall), rather than a single study as currently used. This approach would have the added benefit of capturing DOC and POC emissions that are already occurring on eroding peatland and provide greater accuracy. The literature review highlighted an evidence gap where additional research is required to provide more specific DOC and POC estimations, building on the findings from Pickard et al (2022).
Assessment findings: CO2 losses associated with loss of forest
Scientific accuracy (simple)
The simple methodology for forestry CO2 loss uses figures obtained from a single source (Cannell, 1999). Loss of future carbon sequestration is calculated by multiplying an emission factor by the area of forestry and lifetime of the wind farm. In the simple methodology this is a user input, “estimated carbon sequestered (t C ha-1 yr-1)”. The guidance note provides an assumption of 3.6 tC ha-1 yr-1 for yield class 16 m3 ha-1 y-1 (Cannell, 1999). Whilst this is comparable with an average (over 200 years) from the Woodland Carbon Code (Yield 16, 1.7m spacing, thinned) Woodland Carbon Code, 2024) it doesn’t consider aspects such as species, age, density etc of the site-specific parameters. Therefore, a level of uncertainty/ error can be inferred for users with differing site characteristics (tree species).
There is no consideration of emissions associated with the felling activities. Whilst this is likely to be insignificant, it could be incorporated into the Carbon Calculator for completeness.
There is no consideration of emissions associated with the loss of carbon stock (i.e. if the felled forest wood is destroyed), which depending on the use of the wood could be relevant (e.g. if the timber is burnt).
There is no consideration of the impact on the peatland of removing the trees (where forestry is located on peatland). Whilst expected to have a positive impact over time on peatland restoration, it is acknowledged that further research is required in this area (Howson et al, 2021; IUCN, 2020).
Based on our sensitivity analysis results (Table 3) from the simple and detailed methodology vary significantly based on similar parameters:
Average rate of carbon sequestration in timber (tC ha-1 yr-1)
3.6
tCO2e
33,003
Detailed methodology (presenting a reference scenario comparable to the simple methodology and subsequently scenario adjustments to consider the sensitivity of each input variable)
Data inputs
Reference scenario
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Scenario 5
(Peat type)
(Species)
(Age)
Soil type
Deep peat
Peaty gley
Area to be felled (ha)
100
Width of forest around felled area (m)
1
Tree species
Scots pine
Sitka spruce
Age (yrs.)
10
5
20
40
tCO2e
99,465
90,149
110,282
98,170
100,625
96,990
This is due to the simple methodology not accounting for/underestimating the following:
Tree species and age.
cleared forest emissions (currently labelled ‘carbon sequestration in soil under trees’ in the detailed methodology).
Underestimating the amount of carbon lost due to felling in comparison to the detailed methodology (likely because of the additional variables that inform the detailed methodology – light interception and primary production).
Usability (simple)
The input variables are acceptable in terms of usability. However, there is the potential for error with the current input variables guidance. The Carbon Calculator notes that sequestration rate is dependent on the yield class of the forestry. The guidance note provides an assumption of 3.6 tC ha-1 yr-1 for yield class 16 m3 ha-1 y-1. No guidance is provided as to how the species of tree influences yield class, although poplar, Sitka, and beech CO2 sequestration rates are provided in the separate user Guidance document, they are not visible in the Carbon Calculator. Enhanced user guidance and/or reference to sources of information (e.g. The Woodland Carbon Code) could be provided.
Scientific accuracy (detailed)
The detailed method uses similar principles to the simple method, however, differs in its calculation of ‘the average carbon sequestered per year’, it requires additional user input (‘forestry input data tab’) to account for carbon loss based on soil type, species, and age of forestry, and provides a more complete account of the emissions from forestry in comparison to the simple methodology (see Table 3) .
The method which informs these calculations (Xenakis et al, 2008) is comprehensive in calculating emissions from forestry. It uses the uses 3-PG (Landsberg, J.J., Waring, R.H., 1997). A generalised model of forest productivity using simplified concepts of radiation-use efficiency, carbon balance and partitioning, and builds on this to incorporate a soil organic matter decomposition mode, incorporating differences due to age of forestry at felling. The model has been calibrated and tested for commercial plantations of Scots pine in Scotland.
‘Carbon sequestration in soil under trees’: is noted within the Carbon Calculator as ‘more data needed’. ‘ It states that the aim of this calculation is to ‘account for the respiration from newly felled and disturbed soil, so as to include respiration from fresh plant inputs, from background soil organic matter decomposition, and from the disturbance of soil resulting in the release of additional carbon from soil aggregates. Different types of management disturbance should be considered’. This is labelled as ‘Cleared Forest Floor Emissions’ within the Carbon Calculator. It later states that this information is not yet available, so as an interim measure, carbon sequestration in soil under trees (including background respiration from soil organic matter decomposition and respiration from fresh plant input) is used.
The two emissions factors currently used for the ‘Carbon sequestration in soil under trees’ are based on two studies located in Scotland which is appropriate. However, both studies assumes that forestry is on peaty soils, which may not be the case for all forestry inputs. Given that this element of the Carbon Calculator was originally planned to account for the ‘Cleared Forest Floor Emissions’ only (see previous paragraph), the emissions factors used in lieu of this are possibly overestimating the carbon sequestration associated with soil under trees. Since this literature was published, there has been further research to understand the relationship between carbon emissions and newly felled/disturbed soils (West, 2011) (Matthews et al. 2012), these studies have informed the development of the Woodland Carbon Code (2024).
The detailed methodology also provides a calculation to determine the capacity factor for the turbines at the site. This is dependent on tree height, forest width and distance of the forest from the turbine. Although this methodology appears scientifically correct in terms of the measurements being used, none of the references provide justification of the overarching rationale/purpose of this calculation. Some of the references used for wind speed calculations are over 20 years old and it’s unclear whether these factor in the impacts of climate change on wind speeds. The technological advances in turbine functionality (and the extent to which they are impacted by forestry) needs to be considered. It is also reasonable to assume that the potential capacity of the wind turbines and influence of forestry on a wind turbine’s power curve will be considered by developers when establishing the Levelised Cost of Electricity (i.e. site feasibility) for a development. Overall, the appropriateness of this calculation in the context of the Carbon Calculator’s purpose is questionable and should be removed (see 3.3.4 Key consideration: Is the focus of the Carbon Calculator, correct?).
Usability (detailed)
Feedback from industry engagement highlighted that the detailed methodology is not used as the number of input variables required is perceived as onerous/requiring specialist support.
The forestry input data tab provides two options for soil types provided: peaty gley and deep peat. This appropriately covers both peat (organic) soils and peaty (organo-mineral) soils.
The forestry input data tab provides two options for species: Scots pine and Sitka spruce. Scots pine is the main species in bog forests (NatureScot, n.d) the inclusion of other species may be beneficial in providing a more accurate output.
The separate user Guidance document states the following: ‘Loss from soils of non-forested land is given by the estimated rate of carbon loss for two peat depths taken from Zerva et al (2005) for peaty gley (peat depth 5 to 50cm = 3.98 t C ha-1yr-1), and Hargreaves et al (2003) for deep peat (peat depth>50cm = 5.00 t C ha-1 yr-1)’. The reference to ‘non-forested land’ in the Guidance may be an error given the references used.
Emissions from felling and transportation are a user input; these could be estimated based on assumptions and utilisation of UK Government emission factors. The existing guidance notes provide outdated references (Morison et al, 2011). The most up-to-date UK Government emission factors should be used and could be automated within the Carbon Calculator.
Key consideration: Replace the simple and detailed methodologies with one approach, informed by Woodland Carbon Code calculations
Although the detailed forestry methodology is comprehensive, it is perceived as onerous/requiring specialist support by users, and so in many applications the simple methodology is used. The simple methodology is likely to be underestimating carbon impacts. In turn, the detailed methodology may be providing inaccuracies in relation to ‘Carbon sequestration in soil under trees’. The comprehensive nature of the detailed approach also has implications for the ability to ‘futureproof’ the Carbon Calculator. The equations which inform it and the formula within the Calculator, are complicated and difficult to interpret without advanced excel skills. This presents a risk when undertaking future updates to the Carbon Calculator.
Having one option in the Carbon Calculator which strikes a balance between inputs required and the generation of an accurate output is an important consideration. The Woodland Carbon Code’s (WCC) (Woodland Carbon Code, 2024) calculator includes a wider range of tree species with rates based on spacing (m), yield class, management type and age. The WCC is supported by Scottish Forestry and has undergone independent validation and verification. It provides a credible dataset that is reviewed and updated regularly. To enable a more robust output, the sequestration rates ‘Biomass Carbon Lookup Table’ could be replicated in the Carbon Calculator and aligned with the WCC to enable consistency in reporting methods.
Key consideration: Remove the option to affect the wind turbine’s capacity factor via the forestry inputs tab
The calculations that inform this appear to go beyond the remit of this Section’s purpose in calculating the CO2 losses associated with forestry. More rationale on why this is not appropriate and should be removed is provided in Section 3.10.3 bullet point 6.
Key consideration: Use of HRSD in determining forestry inputs
The role of HRSD and whether it could be utilised to determine key input variables for forestry and/or estimated carbon stocks (see Tolan et al, 2024, Cheng et al, 2024, which use cutting edge technology to estimate carbon stocks) should be explored in collaboration with forestry organisations (i.e. Scottish Forestry, NatureScot, Forestry and Land Scotland, Forest Research). There are several open resources that could inform this (i.e. Scottish Forestry Map viewer (Scottish Forestry, n.d.), Habitat Land Cover Map of Scotland (2024), Scottish Remote Sensing Portal (Scottish Government, n.d.)). Process-based modelling, data assimilation and remote sensing has been applied by the University of Edinburgh to quantify carbon stock changes, and remote sensing is used by Forest Research to accurately map woodland.
Assessment Findings: CO2 gains from site improvement
Scientific accuracy
This area of the Carbon Calculator estimates the reduction in GHG emissions due to restoration of the site. The calculation for this area of the tab replicates the calculation used to ascertain loss of soil CO2 (peat drained) (Nayak et al, 2008), and so the findings from 3.8.7 and 3.8.8 are also relevant to this section.
The current calculations assume that restoration will be successful, and that peatland will be restored to pristine condition. The UK Inventory and Peatland Code transitions land from degraded condition categories to ‘modified bog’ upon restoration, it does not apply the ‘near-natural’ emission factor to restored peatland, recognising the difficulty in fully restoring peatland to the full sequestration potential.
It is difficult to accurately model emission reductions associated with restoration at pre-planning phases – in particular, the ‘depth of peat above the water table after restoration.’ There are several restoration activities (hydrology and habitat ‘yes/not applicable’ inputs) within the Carbon Calculator are assumed to occur post wind farm operation (>20 years in the future), although these are not linked to any calculations.
Undisputed, is that the restoration of degraded sites should be a priority, and the benefits of such activities are well documented. However, there is variation in understanding the impact of restoration on carbon savings. How restoration affects carbon fluxes and storage on degraded sites shows variety in the potential results. Peatland recovery is not instantaneous (Gatis et al.,2023, Alderson et al, 2019), with interventions taking at least 5 years or more for ecosystems changes to stabilise (Gregg et al., 2021). Artz et al. (2012) note that carbon savings are dependent on the starting condition prior to restoration with some research indicating that severely degraded sites take longer to achieve emissions reduction than less affected peatlands. Restoring the carbon ‘sink’ functionality of a degraded peatland is possible, however this may take decades, and be dependent on the initial level of site degradation (Gregg et al., Ibid). Lindsay (2010) notes that peat accumulation in blanket bogs can be half that of raised bog due to warmer climatic conditions and suggests a timeframe of around four decades before restoration to a fully functional bog can achieve net carbon gain, although emissions reduction will occur much earlier. Although there can be short term CH4 fluxes because of restoration the long-term carbon savings can negate this short-term effect (Emsens et al., 2021– note this study relates to fen bogs, but also highlights the important role of vegetation establishment). Evans et al. (2022) note that independent modelling studies by Heinemeyer et al. (2019) for the Defra Peatland-ES-UK (Defra BD5104) project, and Simon et al. (2021) for the BEIS review of UK GGR potential both suggested that degraded peatlands have the potential to accumulate carbon rapidly, and therefore that the CO2 sequestration potential of peat restoration may have been significantly underestimated. The current methodology does not take these considerations into account.
Future climate conditions (e.g. rising temperatures, extreme weather events) could affect the ‘success’ of peat restoration (i.e., carbon accumulation). Climate change is noted to exacerbate ecological stresses on less resilient, managed peatlands over the next 60 years, leading to more rapid losses of stored peat carbon (Worral et al, 2010) (Ferretto et al, 2019) (Natural England, 2020). Any estimates made have a high level of uncertainty, given the relatively short timeframe of restoration in the context of a wind farm’s lifespan.
The calculations for site restoration are sensitive to water table depth changes, pre- and post-restoration (Appendix 11.3). Water table has a significant influence on peatland CO2 and CH4 emissions (see section 3.8.7). However, there is limited empirical data to provide a high level of certainty in relation to future carbon stocks and carbon flux; carbon benefits can be difficult to quantify and affected by environmental conditions on a site-by-site basis (Wille et al, 2023), Gregg et al. (2021) state in relation to blanket bogs, raised bogs and fens that ‘large spatial variability has been shown and studies have often been carried out at the same sites or regions’, blanket bogs are less responsive to drainage and rewetting alone, but can be beneficial when coupled with peatland stabilisation and re-establishment of vegetation cover, the role of vegetation as well as hydrology in site restoration should therefore be taken into account. Further research is required in the context of restoration, including blanket bog rewetting (Evans et al., 2014; Williamson et al., 2017), and restoration of plantations to semi-natural peatland.
See also the commentary on ‘emission rates from soils’ within Section 203.8.
Usability
Calculations within this tab are based on the changes to water table depth pre- and post-restoration of peat (inputted by the user) and the calculated emission rates from soils. It has been noted that small changes to the figures for water table depth can significantly increase the value of carbon gains due to peat restoration. Although the methodology for ‘Water table depth after improvement’ variables indicate an optimal water table level is ‘probably just below the surface (-10 to -6 cm)’, within planning timescales the future water table depth (and other associated variables) can only be approximated. When accounting for the high level of uncertainty regarding restoration, the question of whether this element of the Carbon Calculator should be conventionalised to replicate the Peatland Code’s calculations and guidance requires consideration.
See also commentary on ‘emission rates from soils’ within Section 203.8.
See 3.3.3 key consideration: is the output of the Carbon Calculator useful as a decision-making tool?
The timeframe for achieving a ‘carbon payback’ or ‘carbon neutrality’ should be considered on a land for land basis (e.g. restoration gains vs construction losses) instead of relying on savings from generation. More information on how this should be presented is provided in 3.3.3.
Key consideration: the Carbon Calculator should be updated to replicate the Peatland Code
Site restoration should explore the option to replicate elements of the Peatland Code’s approach, including its requirements around restoration success. In particular, the Peatland Code utilises up-to-date emissions factors (aligned with the UK inventory), and includes a 15% sensitivity buffer to accommodate the risk of future carbon losses (e.g., restoration failure) (see Section 4 on the Peatland Code). Establishing a baseline condition that reflects the Peatland Code’s classification, would simplify the input required for site restoration (by then selecting the appropriate condition post-restoration). Considering the degree of uncertainty, this is appropriate and could prevent the risk of inaccuracy and/or ‘fixing’ of the current variables. This would negate the use of ‘carbon fixing’, ‘loss of DOC and POC’, and ‘peat drainage after restoration’ calculations. By bringing different funding mechanisms together, this alignment could also support data collection at a national restoration level. Through our engagement with the Peatland Expert Advisory Panel, it was determined that the full implementation of the Peatland Code on development sites is not suitable. Further dialogue with the Peatland Code representatives is recommended to identify the optimal approach for this consideration.
Key consideration: Quality control should review the Carbon Calculator in conjunction with the Peat Management Plan (PMP) and Habitat Management Plan (HMP)
In determining whether a development should be built on peatland, a key decision factor should be the extent to which the developer is able to illustrate site restoration post installation, reflecting the requirements of NPF4 (mitigation hierarchy) and Good Practice restoration Guidance (e.g. NatureScot, Peatland Code). Resilient restoration through credible restoration techniques which prioritise vegetation establishment and a return to high water tables are critical components of this. The remit of the Carbon Calculator is to determine whether the carbon impact of the development on peatland is acceptable, any carbon savings from site restoration should be reviewed holistically in conjunction with a robust PMP and HMP that evidences credible restoration techniques. To inform this, a review of the requirements for key EIA deliverables (i.e. PMP, HMP, Carbon Calculator) could be undertaken, to enable a streamlined decision-making process.
Summary
Based on the findings from the technical assessment and evidence review, Table 4 presents a summary of the Carbon Calculator’s scientific accuracy and data usability ratings.
Table 4. Carbon Calculator areas summary
Areas of the Carbon Calculator
RAG rating Scientific accuracy
RAG rating Data usability
3.2
Data inputs
–
Amber
3.3
Payback time and CO2 emissions
Red
Amber
3.4
Wind farm CO2 emission savings
Red
Green
3.5
Emissions due to turbine life
Red
Amber
3.6
Loss of carbon due to back up power generation
Red
Green
3.7
Loss of carbon fixing potential of peatlands
Amber
Amber
3.8
Loss of soil CO2
–
–
Peat removed
Amber
Amber
Peat drained
Red
Red
3.9
CO2 loss by DOC and POC loss
Amber
–
3.10
Loss of carbon due to forestry loss
–
–
Simple
Red
Amber
Detailed
Amber
Red
3.11
Carbon saving due to improvement of peatland habitat
Red
Red
In summary, the ‘payback time and CO2 emissions’ is not relevant/consistent with the findings of the technical assessment and literature review. The focus of the Carbon Calculator (3.4) requires revisiting, with consideration of whether 3.5. and 3.6. are required considering new planning policy and applicability of WLCAs.
Accuracy is lacking in one or more of the following: methodologies, use of emission factors and assumptions, for all peat-related areas of the Carbon Calculator, as well as the forestry area. The usability of the Carbon Calculator presents a more varied picture, with some data accessible to the user. However, there was uncertainty in the ability to accurately access some of the data required for the Carbon Calculator – in particular, for variables that drive the results, which could have a material bearing on the accuracy of outputs.
Table 5 presents the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats of the current Carbon Calculator identified from this Report’s findings:
Table 5: SWOT analysis
Strengths
Allows previous iterations of inputs to be saved and updated.
Used by applicants for over 16 years.
User guidance document and detailed guidance within the Carbon Calculator are provided.
The data variables for Wind farm CO2 emission savings are site specific, are available to the Carbon Calculator user, and support an accurate output.
The data variable for Emissions due to back up power, is available to the Carbon Calculator user.
The calculation methodology for calculating CO2 loss from removed peat is appropriate.
DOC and POC calculations require no inputs from the user.
The method which informs the detailed forestry tab is comprehensive.
Weaknesses
Accuracy
Accuracy is lacking in one or more across methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions for Loss of CO2 fixing potential, due to not considering the condition of the peatland. However, it has a very small bearing on carbon output.
Accuracy is lacking in one or more across methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions for Loss of soil CO2 (peat removed), due the use of averages.
Accuracy is lacking in one or more across methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions for CO2 loss by DOC and POC loss, due to more recent literature updates.
Accuracy is lacking in one or more across methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions CO2 losses associated with loss of forest (both simple and detailed).
Usability
The user is required to input a high number of variables (i.e. for the core input data, 70 input variables are required). Each input variable requires an expected value, as well as a minimum and maximum range, therefore over ~200 input variables are required in total for core inputs, this has been highlighted as cumbersome by some users.
The peatland related carbon emissions are presented to the user as a small proportion of overall carbon emissions because the emissions from the wind turbine are far greater.
There is some uncertainty around the data availability for Emissions due to turbine life, this may be causing double counting in foundations emissions, and this area of the Carbon Calculator may be redundant with the development of WLCA.
There is some uncertainty around data availability for Loss of soil CO2 (peat removed) due to it being difficult to obtain some of the variables and/or assumptions used.
Opportunities
Replace the use of averages with infrastructure specific inputs, this approach would provide more accurate outputs, improved usability, and replicate how peat is reported on in the PMP.
Opportunity to remove/option to ‘opt out’ of minimum and maximum variables where site specific data is known and can be evidenced by the user, reducing number of inputs required overall.
Opportunity to present the impact of development on peatland via the baseline site conditions and ‘payback’ time to a restored site in relation land use emissions.
Opportunity to illustrate a ‘counterfactual’ that demonstrates the benefits of restoration without development taking place (if restoration takes place as a result of Scotland’s proactive approach and financial mechanisms that support restoration)
The emissions associated with wind turbine LCA, back up requirements, and current ‘payback’ approach could be removed from the Carbon Calculator as existing tools and approaches exist for WLCA.
Opportunity to incorporate minimum and maximum parameters into the Carbon Calculator to support quality control.
Evidence gap – in relation to bog fixing potential and peatland condition relationship.
The use of HRSD could support the identification of peatland condition, as well as ascertaining water table depth and providing historic trends. This could enhance the accuracy of the Carbon Calculator when combined with ground truthing and inform Quality Control Mechanisms.
Further research/engagement with JHI could inform estimating the ‘Average extent of drainage around drainage features at site’ and ‘soil bulk density’ input via HRSD and/or GIS.
Further engagement, the subsequent development/updating of guidelines, and/or the provision of training (to users and decision makers) would support quality control. Data outputs from applications could then go on to inform a national dataset of measurements.
Opportunity to align DOC and POC with the 2014 IPCC Wetland Supplement to capture DOC and POC emissions that are already occurring on eroding peatland and provide greater accuracy.
Opportunity to Replace the simple and detailed methodologies with one approach, informed by Woodland Carbon Code calculations (which is supported by Scottish Forestry and has undergone independent validation and verification).
Opportunity to align the inputs used in PMPs, HMPs and other related EIA deliverables with the Carbon Calculator’s inputs to streamline decision making.
Opportunity to integrate the Peatland Code calculation methodology to support greater accuracy.
Opportunity to evolve the Carbon Calculator to assess more land use types.
Opportunity to evolve the Carbon Calculator to assess different infrastructure/development types.
Threats
The focus of the Carbon Calculator and ‘Payback time and CO2 emissions’ in calculating the lifecycle emissions of wind farms based on a counterfactual of electricity generated by fossil fuels no longer accurately represents the impact of developments on peatland.
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review for Wind farm CO2 emission savings, the assumptions are not representative of current context.
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review for Emissions due to turbine life. The assumptions are out of date.
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review for Emissions due to back up power generation, there are no specific requirements for back-up, and this area of the Carbon Calculator may be redundant.
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review for Loss of soil CO2 (peat drained) due to new literature findings.
The methodologies, use of emissions factors and assumptions are not relevant/consistent with findings of the literature review for CO2 gains from site improvement, due to uncertainty in the method, and new literature findings.
Data for Loss of soil CO2 (peat drained) is inaccessible to the user, for extent of drainage and water table, and this has a material impact on the outcome of the Carbon Calculator.
Data for CO2 losses associated with loss of forest (detailed) is inaccessible to the user, and this has a material impact on the outcome of the Carbon Calculator.
The comprehensive nature of the detailed forestry approach has implications for the ability to ‘futureproof’ the Carbon Calculator. The equations which inform it and the formula within the Carbon Calculator, are complicated and difficult to interpret without advanced excel skills. This presents a risk when undertaking future updates to the Carbon Calculator.
Minimal quality controls in place could enable gamification/errors in user outputs – there is significant variety in the methods used to obtain the input variables required for extent of drainage and water table. These variables have a significant bearing on the carbon outputs. There are no quality control mechanisms in place to ensure that the inputs entered are accurate.
Capacity building is required within quality control as the Carbon Calculator outputs (and the inputs and calculations which inform these) are very complicated.
Based on the findings in this report, certain elements of the Carbon Calculator are open to external scrutiny, particularly if decision-making on planning approval uses Carbon Calculator outputs.
There is a risk of fragmentation/overlap/methodological inconsistencies within the Carbon Calculator if the collaborative efforts of multistakeholder organisations that specialise in i) forestry (WCC) and ii) peat restoration (Peatland Code) are not considered.
Evaluation of Peatland Code
The IUCN Peatland Code is a voluntary certification standard for UK peatland (fens and bogs) projects seeking financial benefits from restoration activities through ‘carbon units.’ The code provides a framework for the validation and verification of greenhouse gas reductions.
The principle of the Peatland Code is classification of land use or peatland condition pre-restoration and post-restoration. In the following subsections we explore the value add of integrating this categorisation into the Carbon Calculator, focusing on bog peatland.
The Carbon Calculator does not currently fully align with the Peatland Code; there are opportunities to replicate elements of the Peatland Code within the Carbon Calculator, as well as aligning emission factors.
Overview of the Peatland Code
The Peatland Code encompasses a simplified methodology to quantify the effect of peatland restoration on land emissions, for the purpose of verification for ‘carbon units.’ The Peatland Code considers accuracy and reliability when quantifying the climatic benefits of peatland restoration. As such key requirements on projects include:
Validation and Verification: There is a requirement for restoration projects to undertake third-party validations and verifications to ensure climate benefits are quantifiable, additional, and permanent.
Management and monitoring plan: all projects are required to have a restoration management plan for the duration of the project. The monitoring plan should track the peatland condition over time.
Management of Permanence:to manage the risk of project permanence, a 15% risk buffer is applied to emission reduction calculations. This acknowledges the risk of future carbon losses; either from emissions associated with restoration activities (e.g. fuel use) or to future peatland restoration failure.
Bog emissions calculator
The bog emissions calculator requires four inputs (area, project duration, pre-restoration condition and post-restoration condition) (Table 6) from which emission reductions (tCO2e) are calculated from a ‘emissions lookup table’ across 100-year period (Table 7). The emission factors have been developed to align with the UK Greenhouse Gas Inventory, based on recent research from the UK Centre for Ecology & Hydrology, and the JHI (Evans et al, 2023). The difference between the pre- and post-restoration emission factors provides the carbon reductions achieved through restoration.
The fens emissions calculator requires three inputs for both the pre- and post-restoration scenarios (land use classification, average annual water table depth and average peat depth) (Table 8), from which emissions from peat are calculated. Unlike the bogs emission calculator the emission factors are locked, however are understood to be a combination of Tier 1 and 2 emission factors (IPCC), and emission estimated derived from the site’s effective water table depth (Evans et al. 2021).
Table 8: Fen Land Uses
Fen Land Uses
Near-natural fen
Rewetted fen
Modified fen
Grassland (intensive)
Grassland (extensive)
Cropland
Benefits and drawbacks
Based on our findings of the Carbon Calculator’s technical assessment (see Section 3) and review of the Peatland Code, Table 9 provides a high-level summary of the benefits and drawbacks of integrating the Peatland Code’s methodology and emission factors within the Carbon Calculator.
Table 9: Peatland Code Summary
Benefits
Drawbacks
Emission factors within the peatland code have recently been updated and are aligned with the UK inventory, therefore are considered as current best practice.
The peatland code’s calculations include a risk buffer to account for the risk of restoration failure and additional emissions from restoration activities.
Restoration projects are required to have a ‘restoration management plan’ ensuring peatland condition is tracked across the project’s duration.
Emissions factor are not Scotland-specific.
The Peatland Code’s third-party verification and validation would not be applicable to users of the Carbon Calculator.
Through our engagement with the Peatland Expert Advisory Panel, it was determined that the full implementation of the Peatland Code on development sites would not be appropriate.
Recommendations for the Carbon Calculator
The Peatland Code provides an established methodology to quantify GHG benefits across the UK. Aligning with this methodology could improve the accuracy of baseline carbon flux and consistency in reporting the benefits of restoration activities. However, through our engagement with the Peatland Expert Advisory Panel, it was determined that the full implementation of the Peatland Code on development sites is not suitable. Further dialogue with the Peatland Code representatives is recommended to identify the optimal approach for the following opportunities for the Carbon Calculator:
The condition categories could be replicated to establish a more representative baseline and subsequent restoration status. The Carbon Calculator currently assumes peatland is pristine and presents a worse-case scenario in terms of carbon lost, however lost carbon may not be fairly attributed to the wind farm development.
Whilst the emission factors may not be wholly representative of Scotland (based on a UK average) they are widely recognised as best practice. Integration of the peatland condition categories could provide a recognised approach to quantifying the benefits of peatland restoration activities (site improvements tab).
Use of a risk buffer (measure of uncertainty) within the site improvements tab.
If building on degraded peatland, the Carbon Calculator could include a requirement on developers to improve condition of the site through the project’s lifespan. The principles of the Peatland Code could be used to inform guidance on this.
High Resolution Spatial Data (HRSD)
A literature review (Appendix 11.4) of eight data sources was conducted to identify HRSD measures that could indicate the presence and condition of peat. The following subsections provide analysis of the benefits and drawbacks of HRSD, and how it might improve the Carbon Calculator’s accuracy.
Summary of HRSD methodologies
To date, multiple types of imagery have been used to varying degrees of success (Table 10).
Table 10: HRSD summary of findings
#1: Optical/near infrared spectral imaging
Method
ESA’ Sentinel 2, NASA LandSat
Author
Pontone et al., 2024.
Benefits
Useful for gaining understanding of landcover types on the ground.
Free to use.
Drawbacks
Not successful in providing a good measure of condition.
Limited to 10m, distinguishing between different types of peat at this resolution is challenging.
#2: Infrared Land Surface Temperature
Method
MODIS TERRA Grid data
Author
Worrall et al. 2019
Benefits
Difference in land surface temperature can detect the energy balance of ecosystem, a proxy for peat health.
Archive data can be used to understand long term health.
Drawbacks
Very limited resolution of 1km sq.
#3: Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR)
Method
Sentinel 1 VV/VH Backscatter
Author
Toca et al. 2023, Pontone et al. 2024, Lees et al. 2020
Benefits
Provides a proxy measurement of water table depth.
Archive data can be used to look at water table depth over time.
Free to use.
Drawbacks
Limited to a resolution of 22m.
Measurement can be affected by other variables such as inundation and vegetation compositions.
#4: InSAR
Method
Sentinel 1 Interferometry, Intermittent Small Baseline Subset method
Author
Bradley et al. 2022, Alshammari et al. 2018
Benefits
Detects the surface motion of peat, a direct indicator of peat health/resilience.
Archive data can be used to look at peat health over time.
Free to use.
Drawbacks
Limited to 90m + resolution.
Complex processing pipeline (which would require additional costs).
#5: LiDAR
Method
Bespoke airborne LiDAR
Author
Carless et al. 2019
Benefits
Useful in picking up the micro-topographic features such as drainage ditches and peat cuttings.
Can be mapped to a very high resolution (<1m).
Drawbacks
Prohibitively expensive to capture all, but a one-time snapshot given. Requires airborne imaging (e.g. drone or plane).
Summary of literature review findings
For optical based imagery (#1 and #2) cloud cover often limits the number of temporal snapshots captured, although it has not been successful in providing a good measure of condition, it can provide an understanding of landcover, including vegetation.
Active based sensing (#3, #4 and #5) can be coupled with landcover information provided from optical based imagery to provide a holistic understanding of peat condition and water table depth proxies. LiDAR data, as demonstrated by #5, is very useful for mapping topographical features such as draining channels and flow paths in high resolution but is expensive to obtain in real-time, given these features are relatively stable, LiDAR surveys commissioned over a wide area (i.e. a National Scheme) would be a useful dataset for identifying hydrological features that could inform the Carbon Calculator inputs. Our findings indicate that SAR data, coupled with the methodologies referenced in #3 and #4 appears to be the most promising in both its ability to capture hydrological condition of peat (including water depth) and the ability to obtain temporal imagery. More information on ESA’s Sentinel 1 platform is provided in Appendix 11.4. The limiting resolution of this approach may reduce the accuracy for small and/or spatially varying sites, but is advantageous over the deployment of ground-based sensors in that:
It provides continual mapping across the whole site, compared to a sparse deployment of specific ground-based sensors.
Archival data and repeated visits provide a longer temporal dataset from which to establish condition compared to ground-based sensors placed for a discrete time interval.
Future trends show a rise in popularity for SAR data products, with companies like Umbra offering high-resolution (1m) options, mitigating some of the current limitations. However, as SAR is unable provide landcover information, combining it with optical imaging could yield the most informative and accurate maps.
Although not assessed as part of this review, it is understood that Scottish Government is exploring a national LiDAR scheme with repeat collections every few years, which could track the stability, loss, and/or growth of peatlands. LiDAR alongside optical SAR and InSAR data could provide key data to inform the Carbon Calculator.
Recommendations for the Carbon Calculator
Scottish Government is exploring a national LiDAR scheme with repeat collections every few years, the results of this could be integrated into the Carbon Calculator, and reviewed to understand whether any further use of HRSD would provide additional transparency and support accuracy, over and above the following:
Integrating HRSD into the Carbon Calculator, through a model which combines #1, #3 & #4 HRSD types, would enable an understanding of i) land cover types, providing proxies for ii) peat condition, and iii) water table depth, as well as the provision to understand the history of prospective sites to better inform peat condition. It could therefore also be used to inform subsequent monitoring activities. The condition of peat is causally related to the emission and sequestration of carbon sequestration and since this not currently considered by the Carbon Calculator, adding this capability would provide a step change in improving the accuracy of the Carbon Calculator. The water table depth is currently considered in the Carbon Calculator but requires manual surveying. Adopting the remote sensing approach would be advantageous in providing consistent and temporal measurements that would improve the accuracy between sites and support quality control.
Integrating remote sensing into the Carbon Calculator will depend on having data products that are deemed accurate enough and are readily available at little or no cost. The products from TerraMotion (#4) would appear to be the most promising for peat condition but further stakeholder engagement would be needed to determine whether their offering suffices both in accuracy and cost, over and above the nationwide LiDAR scheme being explored by Scottish Government.
An additional piece of work could be carried out to explore a proof-of-concept data product that brings together the surface motion, water table depth and vegetation cover measures identified in the review. Combining all three types of data is likely to provide the most informative and accurate measure of presence and condition of peat. The output should be validated against a typical ground-based survey carried out by an organisation using the Carbon Calculator.
Quality Control Mechanisms
Decision makers that utilise the outputs of the Carbon Calculator include the Energy Consents Unit (ECU) and local planning authorities. ECU review applications for consent for the construction, extension and operation of electricity generating stations with capacity more than 50MW. Applications below this threshold are reviewed by the relevant local planning authority. Following engagement with ECU, it has been ascertained that the existing quality assurance processes undertaken to evaluate and support decision-making would benefit from significant enhancement. Due to the Carbon Calculator’s complexity and the skillsets required to review the data outputs, it is ascertained that the Carbon Calculator is not currently used as a decision-making tool in the capacity it was intended but is used to check the credibility of the ‘payback period.’
Recommendations for the Carbon Calculator
The following actions are recommended to improve the utility of the Carbon Calculator as a decision-making instrument:
The Carbon Calculator should have automated mechanisms for input variables that exceed acceptable error margins or contradict other variables.
A guidance document should be produced to support developers, ECU, and local planning authorities on the key drivers of peat-related carbon emissions and potential variances (i.e. carbon fluxes), this could be done through the updating of existing guidelines (i.e. Guidance on Developments on Peatland, 2017).
The decision to build on peatland should consider the developer’s ability to demonstrate post-installation site restoration, in line with NPF4 and Good Practice restoration Guidance (e.g. NatureScot, Peatland Code). Resilient restoration through credible restoration techniques which prioritise vegetation establishment and a return to high water tables are critical components of this. The Carbon Calculator’s purpose is to assess the carbon impact of the development on peatland. Carbon savings from site restoration should be reviewed holistically alongside a robust PMP and HMP. A review of the requirements for key EIA deliverables in terms of the inputs they require could benefit quality control and streamline the decision-making process.
A further consideration is that through the implementation of the above recommendations, Quality-controlled application data could contribute to a national database.
Carbon Calculator applicability
Based on our findings, this section explores the Carbon Calculator’s applicability as a decision-making Carbon Calculator across proposals for alternative infrastructure (e.g., transmission and distribution, battery storage options) and renewable energy development (e.g., solar) on peatland and carbon rich soils within Scotland. Whilst the Carbon Calculator, in its current form, would not be fully applicable to alternative development proposals, modifications can be made to increase transferability. Table 12Table provides some considerations against each area of the Carbon Calculator.
Table 11. RAG Ratings
RAG
Criteria
Green
Fully transferable to alternative developments
Amber
Limited modifications required to enable the Carbon Calculator to be used for other developments
Red
Area would require significant work to enable the Carbon Calculator to be used for other developments
Table 12: Increasing Carbon Calculator applicability (Note Section 3 recommendations apply to the below).
Areas
RAG
Potential modification/considerations
Data inputs
Amber
Data inputs would need reviewing to cover the characteristics of other renewable technologies and developments.
Payback time and CO2 emissions
Amber
Payback time may not be an appropriate measure for all asset types.
Carbon emission savings from wind farms
Amber
Minor modifications would be required to calculate back-up requirements for other renewable energy assets. For some developments (e.g. battery storage) this area may not be relevant.
Emissions due to turbine life
Red
Currently wind farm specific, however data inputs and assumptions could be modified to allow for a broader selection of assets / technologies (e.g. drop-down selection for technology option).
Loss of carbon due to back up power generation
Amber
Minor modifications would be required to calculate back-up requirements for other renewable energy assets. For some developments (e.g. battery storage) this area may not be relevant.
Loss of carbon fixing potential of peatlands
Amber
For wind turbines this area of the Carbon Calculator considers the loss of future carbon fixation through the removal of peat. As the turbines are tall and provide little shading there is minimal impact to the wider area. However, consideration would need to be given to the spatial factors of alternative technologies. For example, if solar panels shade large areas of peatland this is likely to affect the sequestration rate of bog plants. There may also be impacts to peatland carbon cycling through the heat projected into the ground. There is a need for further research to understand the full implications (NatureScot, 2022).
Loss of carbon stored within peatlands
Green
Methodologies are relevant to any development on peatland.
Loss of carbon due to leaching of DOC & POC
Green
Methodologies are relevant to any development on peatland.
Loss of carbon due to forestry loss
Green
Methodologies are relevant to any development on peatland.
Carbon saving due to improvement of peatland habitat
Green
Methodologies are relevant to any development on peatland.
Recommendations for the Carbon Calculator
In summary, although amendments would be required to the data inputs, wind turbine related emissions, and the presentation of ‘payback’ and carbon emission savings, the majority of methodologies for the peatland related calculations are relevant to any development on peatland. Whilst currently employed solely for wind farm developments, there is potential for the Carbon Calculator to be adapted to apply to grid infrastructure and other development types on peatland and carbon rich soils. There are no concerns on the Carbon Calculator’s ability to be used on projects of all sizes. However, to be applied to different infrastructure types, it is essential to consider their unique spatial characteristics, such as the shading effects and excess heat generated by solar farms. Further research and engagement are necessary to thoroughly understand how these factors impact peatland and carbon-rich soils before extending the Carbon Calculator to other development types.
Conclusion and recommendations
Conclusion
This report concludes that, based on the findings of a technical assessment, evidence review and quality control mechanisms, we recommend updating the Carbon Calculator in its current form to align with recent policy updates and advancements in science.
Our conclusions and recommendations set out how the Carbon Calculator could be updated through:
Section 8.2: Addressing ‘big picture’ questions regarding the Carbon Calculator’s current remit to inform future decision making.
Section 8.3: Making a series of updates to the current Carbon Calculator to bring it in line with scientific understanding and improve its accuracy.
Further areas of research due to evidence gaps identified during the literature review are summarised in Section 8.4.
Overarching considerations to inform future decision making
Key consideration: Does the calculator need to consider the lifecycle emissions of the wind farm, or could the focus be purely on the impact of development on peat? (Section 3.3.5)
Well-established methods and tools are available to undertake Whole Life Carbon Assessments (e.g. PAS2080). NPF4 Policy 2 (climate mitigation and adaptation) states that all proposals will be “be sited and designed to minimise lifecycle greenhouse gas emissions as far as possible.” Given this context, it is pertinent to question the necessity of the Carbon Calculator in replicating these existing approaches. Instead, it may be more beneficial to concentrate efforts on analysing the specific impacts of development on peatland/habitat carbon emissions. Key considerations include:
Whether the lifecycle emissions of a wind farm need to be included in the Carbon Calculator?
Could the calculations in the Carbon Calculator solely be focused on the impact of the development on peatland/habitat carbon emissions?
Is the presentation of the current payback output necessary or appropriate for decision making?
Key consideration: Is the output of the Carbon Calculator useful as a decision-making tool? (Section 3.3.3)
Since the inception of the Carbon Calculator, scientific advancements have deepened our understanding of the interplay between nature and climate change. This progress is reflected in NPF4’s mitigation hierarchy and Policy 3b, which require substantial biodiversity improvements alongside restoration and offsetting requirements. In this context, it is important to acknowledge that carbon emissions sources should be segregated and reported separately to facilitate informed decision-making.
As the UK transitions to net zero, the current carbon payback’ approach (comparing development emissions to the counterfactual of electricity generated by fossil fuels) becomes less relevant. The focus should shift to evaluating the developments on the natural environment, specifically, whether it improves the environment and sequesters CO2 effectively. This method is more insightful than balancing combined wind farm and peatland emissions against ‘carbon payback,’ which does not provide significant insights.
To better assess the carbon impact on peatland, the timeline for achieving ‘carbon payback’ or ‘carbon neutrality’ should consider land-based emissions. For example, ‘payback time’ could be defined as the period needed to restore peatland to a ‘near pristine’ condition from a reported baseline, compared to the site’s baseline emissions without development and counterfactual scenarios for non-peaty sites, considering Scotland’s widespread peatland restoration efforts (refer to Section 3.3.3 for more details).
Key consideration: Should the Carbon Calculator incorporate other land use types?
Considering the previous point, it’s important to consider whether the Carbon Calculator should be updated to account for various land use and habitat types. This would offer a more comprehensive view of the carbon impact on other land use types, as compared to the carbon impact on peatland. This aspect should be evaluated considering Scotland’s evolving Biodiversity Net Gain requirements, current PMPs, HMPs, and their anticipated updates.
Key consideration: The current quality control mechanisms are insufficient
The scope of this report was to identify the key updates or improvements which would bring the tool in line with current scientific understanding and improve the accuracy to better inform decision making. However, this report concludes that due to its complexity and skill sets required to review the data outputs, the Carbon Calculator is not currently used as a decision-making tool. Section 6 on Quality Controls provides more detail on the rationale behind this, and provides recommendations to improve the current approach, which should be considered ahead of updating the Carbon Calculator.
Key updates to bring the Carbon Calculator in line with scientific understanding and improve accuracy
Updates to the current Carbon Calculator
This report concludes that the current Carbon Calculator is no longer up to date following advancements in science, but it could be brought in line with scientific understanding and improved accuracy through the updates to the following:
3.2 Data inputs:
To improve data usability, explore options to integrate the Carbon Calculator and/or allowance for easy transfer from/to input variables that align with/can be obtained directly from other sources, i.e. Peatland Management Plan, Hydrological Assessment, HMP, and (in future) WLCA.
3.3 Payback time and CO2 emissions:
Section 8.2 concludes that this area requires a significant update to accurately reflect a carbon ‘payback time’ in relation to land use emissions, and so updating the technical elements of its current calculation approach (Section 3.3.1) would not be appropriate.
3.4 Wind farm CO2 emission savings, 3.5 Emissions due to turbine life and 3.6 Loss of carbon due to back up power generation:
Section 8.2 concludes that these areas of the Carbon Calculator are not required. Updating the respective technical elements of each where inaccuracies have been identified would not be appropriate.
3.7 Loss of carbon fixing potential of peatlands:
To improve both scientific accuracy and data usability the baseline condition of peatland should be incorporated into the Carbon Calculator, the inclusion of the Peatland Code’s calculation methodology may make this area of the Carbon Calculator redundant (Section 3.7.3).
3.8 Loss of soil CO2:
To significantly improve the scientific accuracy and data usability of this area:
Incorporate minimum and maximum parameters into the Carbon Calculator for the carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density variables (Section 3.8.5).
Update the methodology for emissions rates from soils to reflect more recent literature and Scottish context (see Section 3.8.9 for more information).
Account for emissions from drainage ditches (Section 3.8.10).
Replace the use of averages with infrastructure specific inputs to replicate how peat is reported on in the PMP.
3.9 CO2 loss by DOC and POC loss:
To improve scientific accuracy, align DOC and POC with the 2014 IPCC Wetland Supplement, replicating the Peatland Code’s calculation methodology (Section 3.9.3).
3.10 Loss of carbon due to forestry loss:
To improve both scientific accuracy and data usability:
Replace the simple and detailed methodologies with one approach, informed by Woodland Carbon Code calculations (Section 3.10.5) and HRSD.
Remove the option to affect the wind turbine’s capacity factor via the forestry inputs tab (Section 3.10.6).
3.11 Carbon saving due to improvement of peatland habitat:
To significantly improve scientific accuracy and data usability, Update the Carbon Calculator to replicate the Peatland Code’s principles (Section 3.11.3).
5. High Resolution Spatial Data (HRSD):
HRSD has the potential to improve and enhance the data usability of the Carbon Calculator and could support quality control mechanisms. Recommendations include:
Consider options to integrate HRSD into the Carbon Calculator to enable an understanding of i) land cover types, providing proxies for ii) peat condition, and iii) water table depth, as well as the provision to understand the history of prospective sites to better inform peat condition, drainage variables, and subsequent monitoring activities. This could act as a quality control measure against inputted variables.
Further engagement with JHI and other key stakeholders involved in HRSD within Scotland (i.e. Nature Scot, CivTech) is recommended to enable a joined-up and effective approach to the solution developed.
Further research
This review has identified the following evidence gaps that necessitate further research and/or engagement:
Further research is required to understand the impacts of climate change on the carbon fixing potential of peatlands.
Further research is required to understand whether the option to reuse peat elsewhere would be appropriate.
Further research required into the link between peatland condition and bog plant fixing potential, or on updated fixation emission factor rates (if appropriate).
Further research is required to identify a suitable ‘average extent of drainage.’
Further research is required to provide more specific DOC and POC estimations.
Further research is required to understand whether HRSD could inform the carbon content of dry peat and dry soil bulk density variables.
Further research on the impact on peatland from the removal of trees (where located on peatland and other carbon rich soils).
Further research is necessary to understand how the spatial variability of different development types could impact peatland and carbon-rich soils.
References
Aitkenhead M, Coull M. (202) Mapping soil profile depth, bulk density and carbon stock in Scotland using remote sensing and spatial covariates. Eur J Soil Sci. 71: 71: 553–567.
Alderson, DM, Evans, MG, Shuttleworth, EL, Pilkington, M, Spencer, T, Walker, J & Allott, TEH (2019), ‘Trajectories of ecosystem change in restored blanket peatlands’, Science of the Total Environment, vol. 665, pp. 785-796.
Alm, J., Saarnio, S., Nykänen, H., Silvola, J. & Martikainen, P.J. (1999) Winter CO, CH and NO fluxes on some natural and drained boreal peatlands. Biogeochemistry, 44 (2), 163–186.
Alshammari, L., Large, D.J., Boyd, D.S., Sowter, A., Anderson, R., Andersen, R. and Marsh, S. (2018). Long-term peatland condition assessment via surface motion monitoring using the ISBAS DInSAR technique over the Flow Country, Scotland. Remote Sensing, 10(7), 1103.
Ardente F., Beccali M., Cellura M., Lo Brano V. (2008). Energy performance and life cycle assessment of an Italian wind farm. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 12, 200–217.
Artz, R.R.E., Donnelly, D., Andersen, R., Mitchell, R., Chapman, S.J., Smith, J., Smith, P., Cummins, R., Balana, B., Cuthbert, A. (2012). Managing and restoring blanket bog to benefit biodiversity and carbon balance – a scoping study. Commissioned Report (in preparation). Scottish Natural Heritage.
Bubier, J., Moore, T. & Roulet, N. (1993) Methane emissions from wetlands in the mid-boreal region of northern Ontario, Canada. Ecology, 74, 2240–2254.
Cannell, M.G.R., Milne, R., Hargreaves, K.J., Brown, T.A.W., Cruickshank, M.M., Bradley, R.I., Spencer, T., Hope, D., Billett, M.F., Adger, W.N. and Subak, S. (1999). National inventories of terrestrial carbon sources and sinks: the UK experience. Climatic Change, 42, 505-530.
Carless, D., Luscombe, D.J., Gatis, N., Anderson, K. and Brazier, R.E. (2019). Mapping landscape-scale peatland degradation using airborne lidar and multispectral data. Landscape Ecology, 34, 1329-1345.
Carless, D., Kulessa, B., Booth, A.D., Drocourt, Y., Sinnadurai, P., Street-Perrott, F.A., Jansson, P. (2021). Geoderma, 402.
Chapman, S., Bell, J., Donnelly, D., Lilly, A. (2009). Carbon stocks in Scottish Peatlands. Soil Use and Management 25(2), 105 – 112.
Cheng, F.; Ou, G.; Wang, M.; Liu, C (2024) Remote Sensing Estimation of Forest Carbon Stock Based on Machine Learning Algorithms. Forests 2024, 15, 681.
DESNZ (2023). Energy and emissions projections: 2021 to 2040. HM Government.
Emsens, W., Verbruggen, E., Shenk, P., Liczner, Y. (2021). Degradation legacy and current water levels as predictors of carbon emissions from two fen sites. Mires and Peat, 27(14), 15 pp.
Evans, C.D., Page, S.E., Jones, T., Moore, S., Gauci, V., Laiho, R., Hruška, J., Allott, T.E., Billett, M.F., Tipping, E. and Freeman, C. (2014). Contrasting vulnerability of drained tropical and high‐latitude peatlands to fluvial loss of stored carbon. Global Biogeochemical Cycles, 28(11), 1215-1234.
Evans, C.D., Peacock, M., Baird, A.J., Artz, R.R.E., Burden, A., Callaghan, N., Chapman, P.J., Cooper, H.M., Coyle, M., Craig, E. and Cumming, A. (2021). Overriding water table control on managed peatland greenhouse gas emissions. Nature, 593(7860), 548-552.
Evans, M.G., Alderson, D.M., Evans, C.D., Stimson, A., Allott, T.E., Goulsbra, C., Worrall, F., Crouch, T., Walker, J., Garnett, M.H. and Rowson, J. (2022). Carbon loss pathways in degraded peatlands: New insights from radiocarbon measurements of peatland waters. Journal of Geophysical Research: Biogeosciences, 127(7), e2021JG006344.
Evans, C., Artz, R., Burden, A., Clilverd, H., Freeman, B., Heinemeyer, A., Lindsay, R., Morrison, R., Potts, J., Reed, M. & Williamson, J. (2022, updated 2023) Aligning the Peatland Code with the UK peatland inventory. Report to the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, Bangor. 88pp.
Ferretto, A., Brooker, R., Aitkenhead, M., Matthews, R. and Smith, P., 2019. Potential carbon loss from Scottish peatlands under climate change. Regional Environmental Change, 19, 2101-2111.
Gatis, N., Benaud, P., Anderson, K. et al. (2023) Peatland restoration increases water storage and attenuates downstream stormflow but does not guarantee an immediate reversal of long-term ecohydrological degradation. Sci Rep 13, 15865. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-023-40285-4
Gregg, R., Elias, J.L., Alonso, I., Crosher, I.E., Muto, P. and Morecroft, M.D. (2021). Carbon storage and sequestration by habitat: a review of the evidence. Natural England, York. NERR094.
Gunther, A., Barthelmes, A., Huth, V., Joosten, H., Jurasinski, G., Koebsch, F., Couwenberg, J. (2024). Prompt rewetting of drained peatlands reduces climate warming despite methane emissions. Nature Communications, 11(1644).
He, H., Roulet, N.T. (2023). Improved estimates of carbon dioxide emissions from drained peatlands support a reduction in emission factor. Communications Earth & Environment, 4(1), p.436.
Heijmans, M.M.P.D., Mauquoy, D., van Geel, B. and Berendse, F. (2008), Long-term effects of climate change on vegetation and carbon dynamics in peat bogs. Journal of Vegetation Science, 19: 307-320. https://doi.org/10.3170/2008-8-18368
Heinemeyer, A., Asena, Q., Burn, W.B., Jones, A.L. (2018). Geo: Geography and Environment.
Howson, T.R. (2021). A comparison of the hydrology, hydrochemistry, and aquatic carbon flux from intact, afforested and restored raised and blanket bogs. PhD thesis, University of Leeds.
Howson, T., Chapman, P. J., Shah, N.,Anderson, R., & Holden, J. (2021). The effect of forest-to-bog restoration on the hydrological functioning of raised and blanket bogs. Ecohydrology, e2334.
Howson, T.R., Chapman, P.J., Holden, J., Shah, N., Anderson, R. (2022). A comparison of peat properties in intact, afforested and restored raised and blanket bogs. Soil Use and Management, 39(1), 104-121.
Van Huissteden, J., van den Bos, R. and Marticorena Alvarez, I. (2016) ‘Modelling the effect of water-table management on CO2 and CH4 fluxes from peat soils’, Netherlands Journal of Geosciences – Geologie en Mijnbouw, 85(1), pp. 3–18.
IEMA (2022). Assessing Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Evaluating their Significance.
IPCC (2014) 2013 Supplement to the 2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories: Wetlands, Hiraishi, T., Krug, T., Tanabe, K., Srivastava, N., Baasansuren, J., Fukuda, M. and Troxler, T.G. (eds). Published: IPCC, Switzerland
Lees, K.J., Artz, R.R., Khomik, M., Clark, J.M., Ritson, J., Hancock, M.H., Cowie, N.R. and Quaife, T. (2020). Using spectral indices to estimate water content and GPP in Sphagnum moss and other peatland vegetation. IEEE Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, 58(7), 4547-4557.
Lenzen M., Munksgaard J. (2002). Energy and CO2 life-cycle analyses of wind turbines Review and applications. Renewable Energy, 26, 339-362.
Levy, P.E., Gray, A. (2015). Greenhouse gas balance of a semi-natural peatbog in northern Scotland. Environmental Research Letters, 10(9).
Lindsay R. (2010). Peatbogs and carbon: a critical synthesis to inform policy development in oceanic peat bog conservation and restoration in the context of climate change. University of East London, Environmental Research Group.
Ma, L., Zhu, G., Chen, B., Zhang, K., Niu, S., Wang, J., Ciais, P., Zuo, H. (2022). A globally robust relationship between water table decline, subsidence rate, and carbon release from peatlands. Communications Earth & Environment, 3 (254).
MacDonald, J.A., Fowler, D., Hargreaves, K.J., Skiba, U., Leith, I.D. & Murray, M.B. (1998) Methane emission rates from a northern wetland: response to temperature, water table and transport. Atmospheric Environment, 32(19), 3219–3227
Macfarlane, F., Robb, C., Coull, M., McKeen, M., Wardell-Johnson, D., Miller, D., Parker, T. C., Artz, R. R. E., Matthews, K., & Aitkenhead, M. J. (2024). A deep learning approach for high-resolution mapping of Scottish peatland degradation. European Journal of Soil Science, 75(4), e13538.
Marshall, C., Bradley, A.V., Andersen, R. and Large, D.J. (2021) Using peatland surface motion (bog breathing) to monitor Peatland Action sites. NatureScot Research Report 1269.
Martikainen, P.J., Nykiinen, H., Alm, J. & Silvola, J. (1995) Changes in fluxes of carbon dioxide, methane and nitrous oxide due to forest drainage of mire sites of different trophy. Plant and Soil, 168, 571–577
Morison, J. Matthews, R.W. Miller, G. Perks, M. Randle, T. Vanguelova, E. White, M. and Yamulki, S. (2012) Understanding the Carbon and Greenhouse Gas Balance of UK Forests. Forestry Commission, Edinburgh.
Nayak, D.R., Miller, D., Nolan, A., Smith, P. and Smith, J.U. (2010). Calculating carbon budgets of wind farms on Scottish peatlands. Mires and Peat, 4(9), 1-23.
Norby RJ, Childs J, Hanson PJ, Warren JM. (2019) Rapid loss of an ecosystem engineer: Sphagnum decline in an experimentally warmed bog. Ecol Evol. 9: 12571–12585.
Nykänen, H., Alm, J., Silvola, J., Tolonen, K. & Martikainen, P.J. (1998) Methane fluxes on boreal peatlands of different fertility and the effect of long-term experimental lowering of the water table on flux rates. Global Biogeochemical Cycles. 12, 53–69.
Ojanen, P. and Minkkinen, K. (2019) The dependence of net soil CO2 emissions on water table depth in boreal peatlands drained for forestry. Mires and Peat, Volume 24 (2019), Article 27, 1–8,
Parry, L.E., Charman, D.J. (2013). Modelling soil organic carbon distribution in blanket peatlands at a landscape scale. Geoderma, 211-212, 75-84.
Peacock, M., Audet, J., Bastviken, D., Futter, M.N., Gauci, V., Grinham, A., Harrison, J.A., Kent, M.S., Kosten, S., Lovelock, C.E. and Veraart, A.J., (2021) Global importance of methane emissions from drainage ditches and canals. Environmental Research Letters, 16, 044010.
Pickard, A. E., Branagan, M., Billett, M. F., Andersen, R., and Dinsmore, K. J (2022).: Effects of peatland management on aquatic carbon concentrations and fluxes, Biogeosciences, 19, 1321–1334
Pontone N., Millard K., Thompson D.K., Guindon L., & Beaudoin A. (2024). A hierarchical, multi‐sensor framework for peatland sub‐class and vegetation mapping throughout the Canadian boreal forest. Remote Sensing in Ecology and Conservation. https://doi.org/10.1002/rse2.384
Price, J.S., McCarter, C.P. and Quinton, W.L. (2023). Groundwater in Peat and Peatlands. Groundwater Project. Guelph, Ontario, Canada, 108 pp. ISBN: 978-1-77470-015-0.
Ratcliffe, J.L., Payne, P.J., Sloan, T.J., Smith, B., Waldron, S., Mauqouy, D., Newton, A., Anderson, A.R., Henderson, A., Anderson, R. (2018). Mires and Peat, 23(3), 1-30.
Sallinen, A., Tuominen, S., Kumpula, T. and Tahvanainen, T. (2019). Undrained peatland areas disturbed by surrounding drainage: a large-scale GIS analysis in Finland with a special focus on aapa mires. Mires and Peat, 24(38), 1-22.
Silvola, J., Alm, J., Ahlholm, U., Nykänen, H. & Martikainen, P.J. (1996) CO2 fluxes from peat in boreal mires under varying temperature and moisture conditions. Journal of Ecology, 84, 219–228.
Smith, J.U., Graves, P., Nayak, D.R., Smith, P., Perks, M., Gardiner, B., Miller, D., Nolan, A., Morrice, J., Xenakis, G. and Waldron, S. (2011). Carbon Implications of Wind farms Located on Peatlands–Update of the Scottish Government Carbon Calculator Carbon Calculator. Scottish Government, Scotland.
Smyth, M.A., Taylor, E.S., Birnie, R.V., Artz, R.R.E., Dickie, I., Evans, C., Gray, A., Moxey, A., Prior, S., Littlewood, N. and Bonaventura, M. (2015) Developing Peatland Carbon Metrics and Financial Modelling to Inform the Pilot Phase UK Peatland Code. Report to Defra for Project NR0165, Crichton Carbon Centre, Dumfries.
Speranskaya, L., Campbell, D. I., Lafleur, P. M., and Humphreys, E. R. (2024) Peatland evaporation across hemispheres: contrasting controls and sensitivity to climate warming driven by plant functional types, Biogeosciences, 21, 1173–1190.
Tiemeyer, B., Albiac Borraz, E., Augustin, J., Bechtold, M., Beetz, S., Beyer, C., Drösler, M., Ebli, M., Eickenscheidt, T., Fiedler, S., Förster, C., Freibauer, A., Giebels, M., Glatzel, S., Heinichen, J., Hoffmann, M., Höper, H., Jurasinski, G., Leiber-Sauheitl, K., Peichl-Brak, M., Roßkopf, N., Sommer, M. and Zeitz, J. (2016), High emissions of greenhouse gases from grasslands on peat and other organic soils. Glob Change Biol, 22: 4134-4149.
Tiemeyer, B., Freibauer, A., Albiac Borraz, E., Augustin, J., Bechtold, M.m Beetz, S., Beyer, C., Ebli, M., Eickenscheidt, T., Fiedler, S., Förster, C., Gensior, A., Giebels, M., Glatzel, S., Heinichen, J., Hoffmann, M., Höper, H., Jurasinski, G., Laggner, A., Leiber-Sauheitl, K., Peichl-Brak, M., Drösler, M. (2020). A new methodology for organic soils in national greenhouse gas inventories: Data synthesis, derivation and application. Ecological Indicators, Volume 109, 2020, 105838, ISSN 1470-160X.
Toča, L., Morrison, K., Quaife, T., Artz, R.R.E. and Gimona, A. (2023). Restored Scottish Blanket Bog Monitoring Using Time Series of Optical and Radar Satellite Data. In IGARSS 2023-2023 IEEE International Geoscience and Remote Sensing Symposium, 2708-2710.
Tolan, J., Yang, H-I., Nosarzewski, B., Couairon, G., Vo, H.V., Brandt, Spore, J., Majumdar, S., Haziza, D., Vamaraju, J., Moutakanni, T., Bojanowski, P., Johns, T., White, B., Tiecke, T., Couprie, C. (2024) Very high resolution canopy height maps from RGB imagery using self-supervised vision transformer and convolutional decoder trained on aerial lidar, Remote Sensing of Environment, Volume 300, 113888,ISSN 0034-4257.
Vestas (2005). Life cycle assessment of offshore and onshore wind power plants based on Vestas V90-3.0 MW turbines. Vestas Wind Systems A/S Alsvej 21, 8900 Randers, Denmark, pp.59. www.vestas.com.
Watmough, S., Gilbert-Parkes, S., Basiliko, N., Lamit, L.J., Lilleskov, E.A., Andersen, R., del Aguila-Pasquel, J., Artz, R.E., Benscoter, B.W., Borken, W. and Bragazza, L. (2022). Variation in carbon and nitrogen concentrations among peatland categories at the global scale. Plos One, 17(11), 0275149.
West, V. (2011). Soil Carbon and the Woodland Carbon Code, Forestry Commission, Edinburgh.
Wille, E. A., Lenhart, C. F., & Kolka, R. K. (2023). Carbon dioxide emissions in relation to water table in a restored fen. Agricultural & Environmental Letters, 8, e20112.
Williamson, J., Rowe, E., Reed, D., Ruffino, L., Jones, P., Dolan, R., Buckingham, H., Norris, D., Astbury, S. and Evans, C.D. (2017). Historical peat loss explains limited short-term response of drained blanket bogs to rewetting. Journal of Environmental Management, 188, 278-286.
Wilson, D., Blain, D., Couwenberg, J., Evans, C.D., Murdiyarso, D., Page, S.E., Renou-Wilson, F., Rieley, J.O., Sirin, A., Strack, M., and Tuittila, E.-S., (2016) Greenhouse gas emission factors associated with rewetting of organic soils. Mires and Peat, Volume 17 (2016), Article 04, 1–28.
Worrall, F., Boothroyd, I.M., Gardner, R.L., Howden, N.J., Burt, T.P., Smith, R., Mitchell, L., Kohler, T. and Gregg, R. (2019). The impact of peatland restoration on local climate: Restoration of a cool humid island. Journal of Geophysical Research: Biogeosciences, 124(6), pp.1696-1713.
Appendices
The following appendices open a download link to each of the spreadsheets.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Avoid – by removing the impact at the outset, Minimise – by reducing the impact, Restore – by repairing damaged habitats, Offset – by compensating for residual impact that remains, with preference to on-site over off-site measures. ↑